CSP0000160-01 Accessory Equipment-Tab 1-14 PDF

TAB 1
RA 09 637/03.98
Warranty Policy & Procedures RA

for Rexroth Products 09 637/03.98
used in Industrial Applications
Replaces: 05.97
The Rexroth Corporation, Industrial Hydraulics Division Special, incidental, consequential or other damages are ex-
(“Rexroth”), warrants all products manufactured by it to be free pressly excluded. In no event shall Rexroth be liable for con-
from defects in material and workmanship under normal operating sequential damages or contingent liabilities including, but not
conditions and proper application in accordance with the specifi- limited to, loss of life, personal injury, loss of crops, loss of
cations for operation as described in the Data Sheet which business income, downtime costs and trade or other commercial
accompanies such products, for the periods as specified below: loss arising out of the failure of the product. Rexroth shall in no
event be liable for any sum in excess of the price received by it for
A. All products, excluding power units and power packs, piston
the product for which liability is claimed or associated.
equipment, electronics, servo and proportional valves, and
repaired/exchanged products: twenty-four (24) months No products shall be returned without prior authorization from
after delivery date or twelve (12) months after the equip- Rexroth. Buyer shall prepay all transportation charges for the
ment is placed in service, whichever occurs first. return of such products to Rexroth’s factory or authorized factory
service center. Rexroth will not accept any charges for labor and/
B. Piston equipment, without prior technical application ap-
or parts incidental to the removal and remounting of products
proval: twelve (12) months after delivery date or six (6)
repaired or replaced under this warranty.
months after the equipment is placed in service, whichever
occurs first. The foregoing warranty does not cover conditions over which
Rexroth has no control, including, without limitation, contamina-
C. Power units and power packs, piston equipment with prior
tion, pressures in excess of recommended maximum, products
technical application approval, electronics, servo and propor-
damaged or subjected to voltage, humidity, or temperature out-
tional valves and all repaired/exchanged products: eighteen
side of specified range, accident, abuse or misuse after shipment
(18) months after delivery date or twelve (12) months after
from Rexroth’s factory, products altered, disassembled, or
the equipment is placed in service, whichever occurs first.
repaired by anyone other than Rexroth personnel, authorized
D. Seals and sealing materials: six (6) months after delivery date. factory service center personnel or persons so designated in
writing by the Rexroth Service Department prior to the commence-
E. Vendor or customer supplied items on power units: per ori- ment of said work.
ginal manufacturer’s warranty policy.
Types of failures which are not attributable to defects in materials
F. Hydraulic cylinders: and/or workmanship and which are not considered by Rexroth to
F1. NFPA tie rod type: twelve (12) months after delivery date. be part of its warranty include, but are not limited to the following:
F2. Metric tie rod and mill type (≤200 mm bore): twelve (12) • Damages due to deterioration during periods of storage
months after delivery date or six (6) months after the by the Buyer or Agent prior to installation and operation;
equipment is placed in service, whichever occurs first. • Damage of any kind from erosive or corrosive action of any
gasses or liquids handled by the machinery;
F3. Metric mill type (>200 mm bore): eighteen (18) months
after delivery date or twelve (12) months after the • Lack of, or incorrect type of hydraulic fluid;
equipment is placed in service, whichever occurs first. • Contamination of hydraulic fluid;
• Use of hydraulic fluids lacking adequate lubrication
Limitations on Warranty properties;
• Damage attributable to accident, abuse, or neglect;
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER • Stripped splines or keyways on drive shaft;
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY
• Incorrect mounting of external gears, pulleys, etc.;
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A
• Operating beyond the recommended maximum speeds,
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. pressure, temperatures, voltage, or humidity;
Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy under this warranty shall be • Use of the product in a manner or purpose for which it was
limited to the repair or exchange of warranted products, at not designed or intended by Rexroth;
Rexroth’s option, FOB Rexroth’s factory. • Misalignment, mis-wiring, high vibration;
• Ordinary wear and tear.
If the Buyer (as that term is hereinafter defined) or Agent grants to
an end-user any warranty which is greater in scope, time period
Whenever possible, each provision of the foregoing warranty shall
or labor allowance than the warranty stated herein, Rexroth shall
be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under
not be liable beyond this stated warranty. Except as otherwise
applicable law, but if any provision of this warranty shall be
provided in paragraph 7.0 under the Warranty Processing
prohibited by or invalid under applicable law, such provision shall
Procedures section of this warranty, equipment and accessories
be ineffective only to the extent of such prohibition or invalidity
not of Rexroth’s manufacture warranted by the manufacturer
without invalidating the remainder of such provision or the remain-
thereof, as provided in Paragraph E above. The term “Buyer” as
ing provisions of this warranty.
used herein means the person or firm that purchased the product
directly from Rexroth, and includes direct OEM customers and
Rexroth distributors.
1
RA 09 637/03.98
Recommendation of Fluids 8.0 Products returned for warranty consideration which are
found to be defective in material or workmanship and which
To ensure that Rexroth products perform satisfactorily, proper are within the stated warranty period will be repaired and
maintenance, fluid selection, and lubrication must be provided by tested (if applicable) at no charge.
the user. Rexroth does not recommend the use of any particular
8.1 Repairs performed under warranty will be warranted against
manufacturer’s fluids in its products. Rexroth has identified lubri-
further defects in material or workmanship for the balance of
cants by characteristics, industry standard, manufacturer and the original warranty time remaining on the product, or for six
past field performance which may be suitable for use with its (6) months after the repaired unit is placed in service, which-
products; however, choice of fluid manufacturer is the user’s sole ever period is longer.
decision. 8.2 Rexroth or its authorized factory service center will pay return
Lubricant manufacturers must guarantee that their products meet freight only on products repaired under warranty.
or exceed industry standards by manufacturing fluids of the 9.0 If the damage to the product is beyond economical repair
requisite quality to comply with component manufacturers’ re- and the cause of the failure is attributable to faulty materials
quirements. REXROTH MAKES NO WARRANTIES WHATSO- or workmanship, Rexroth may elect to scrap the returned
EVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT product and supply a new replacement unit. Alternatively, a
TO FLUIDS. In no event shall Rexroth be liable for any damages, credit may be issued in an amount equal to the original
direct, indirect or consequential, arising out of, or in connection purchase price of the scrapped unit.
with component damage resulting from user’s selection, use or 10.0 If a product is returned for warranty consideration and
maintenance of fluids for Rexroth’s components. denied warranty coverage for any reason, the Buyer or
Agent will be charged for the inspection even though the
Warranty Processing Procedures product is still within the warranty time period.
1.0 All products to be submitted for warranty consideration must 10.1 Products denied warranty repair will, at the Buyer’s or
be shipped prepaid to Rexroth or to an authorized Rexroth Agent’s request, be repaired on a time and materials basis.
service center for warranty inspection and/or evaluation 10.2 Repairs made on such units will be warranted as specified in
unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Rexroth. Section C.
2.0 All products returned to Rexroth must be forwarded by the 10.3 The Buyer or Agent is responsible for freight both ways when
Buyer, or in the case of products imported on a foreign warranty repair is denied.
manufactured machine, by the United States Agent for that 11.0 If a product returned to Rexroth or an authorized Rexroth
machine. service center for warranty consideration is found not to be
3.0 A purchase order must be supplied for all products returned defective in materials and workmanship, and is found to be
to Rexroth or to an authorized Rexroth service center for in good working order, the Buyer or Agent will be charged for
warranty inspection and/or evaluation. The purchase order the inspection and testing (if applicable) even though the
must indicate return shipping instructions. product is still within the warranty time period.
11.1 The Buyer or Agent is responsible for the freight both ways
4.0 A Return Goods Authorization (“RGA”) number must be
and for the cost of any gaskets and seals that may need to be
obtained from Rexroth’s Service Department (Hydraulics or replaced following the examination.
Electronics) or authorized service center prior to any prod-
11.2 Such products will only be warranted for the balance of their
ucts being returned for warranty consideration.
original warranty time period.
5.0 Products submitted for warranty consideration by third par-
12.0 Upon inspection and/or repair of any given product, an
ties will be accepted as long as a purchase order and RGA
Inspection Report will be completed by Rexroth or by the
number are generated by the Buyer or Agent.
authorized factory service center. This document will briefly
6.0 Products repaired under warranty may be “drop shipped” to report the condition of the product and a diagnosis of the
third parties if requested by the Buyer or Agent. The invoice failure or malfunction. One copy will be forwarded to the
(if applicable) and inspection report will be sent to such Buyer or Agent. Exchanges are not applicable.
Buyer or Agent.
13.0 All repaired and rebuilt products will be tested and painted
7.0 Some Rexroth industrial products manufactured by foreign when applicable.
Rexroth affiliates are not normally marketed in the United
14.0 Products returned for warranty consideration should not
States for reasons of overlapping product lines, use of
contain the user’s fittings, couplings, hoses, etc. Rexroth
metric measure, and other market considerations. There-
does not assume responsibility for the return of such fittings,
fore, warranty and routine repairs may not be immediately
couplings, hoses, etc.
available for such units when they are imported. All indus-
trial products manufactured by Rexroth or foreign Rexroth 15.0 Damages or losses occurring during shipping and handling
affiliates can be purchased through Rexroth, if advance of Rexroth products shall be the responsibility of the Buyer
notice is given and sufficient lead times are allowed for. All or Agent.
such products, if purchased from Rexroth, will be serviced
and warranted by Rexroth.
Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation

Rexroth Hydraulics Div., Industrial, 2315 City Line Road, Bethlehem, PA 18017-2131 Tel. (610) 694-8300 Fax: (610) 694-8467
Rexroth Hydraulics Div., Mobile, 1700 Old Mansfield Road, Wooster, OH 44691-0394 Tel. (330) 263-3400 Fax: (330) 263-3333
2 All rights reserved – Subject to revision
Printed in U.S.A.
RA 07
RA 75 075/06.87
075/03.92
Petroleum Based Fluids

for use with RA
Vane, Radial, Piston and Gear 07 075/03.96
Pumps & Motors Replaces: 6.87
The oil quality, cleanliness, and operating viscosity are decisive 1.1.4 V2 pumps
factors in the operating reliability, efficiency, and service life of an permissible viscosity 80 … 740 SUS (16 … 160 mm2/s)
oil hydraulic installation. permissible start viscosity 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s)
The data sheets for the various types of pumps contain specific (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
information regarding viscosity range, and suitable fluids. Further- 1.2 R4 radial piston pumps
more, the ordering codes contain details of special models for use permissible viscostiy 60 … 930 SUS (10 … 200 mm2/s)
with special fluids. (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
The following points must also be observed in addition to the 1.3 Viscosity range for external gear pumps and gear pumps.
specifications in the data sheets. 1.3.1 G2, G3, G4 pumps, and G2 and G3 motors.
Reference: permissible operating viscosity 60 … 1390 SUS
ISO 3448 Industrial liquid lubricants – ISO viscosity classification (10 … 300 mm2/s)
ISO 6074 Hydraulic fluid power – petroleum oils-classification and permissible start viscosity 4635 SUS (1000 mm2/s)
designation. (for suitable fluids, see points 2.1 and 2.2)
ISO 6075/1 Hydraulic fluid power – characteristics of petroleum 1.3.2 G8, G9, and G10 pumps
oils DIN 51524, part 1 and 2. permissible operating viscosity 60 … 13910 SUS
(10 … 3000 mm2/s)
Note: 1 mm2/s = 1 cSt (centistoke)
(for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
1. Viscosity
1.4 GU/GN pumps
The permissable viscosity for the installation, including
permissible operating viscosity 100 … 1400 SUS
combination pumps, is always restricted to that of the
(20 … 300 mm2/s)
component with the narrowest range. (For combination
permissible start viscosity … 4635 SUS (… 1000 mm2/s)
pumps V4 + R4, the maximum viscosity is limited by the R4
(for permissible fluids, see points 2.2)
pump and the minimum viscosity is limited by the V4 pump).
1.5 MZ motors:
The permissible viscosity range must be maintained for all
suitable operating viscosity 80 … 740 SUS
operating conditions.
(16 … 160 mm2/s)
The viscosity of HV oils (ISO 6074) drops during operation suitable start viscosity 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s)
due to shearing by up to 30%. This must be considered in the (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
design. The viscosity is also dependent on temperature. On
1.6 Viscosity range for MCS motors
this basis, the oil viscosity class must be determined with
regard to the maximum and minimum oil reservoir tempera- 1.6.1 MCS series 3:
tures. Normally, cooling or heating, or both are required. If, suitable operating viscosity 60 … 2320 SUS
in spite of this, difficulties are still experienced, then a fluid (10 … 500 mm2/s)
from another viscosity class (ISO 3448 VG class) will prob- 1.6.2 MCS series 5 and 6:
ably have to be selected. If in doubt, please consult us. suitable operating viscosity 120 … 2320 SUS
1.1 Viscosity range of vane pumps. (25 … 500 mm2/s)
(for suitable fluids, see points 2.1 and 2.2)
1.1.1 V3 and V4 pumps
max. 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s) during full start up. 1.7 MCR motors:
max. 930 SUS (200 mm2/s) during start up in deadhead. suitable operating viscosity 60 … 9270 SUS
min. 120 SUS (25 mm2/s) at max. operating temperature (10 … 2000 mm2/s)
optimum viscosity range 120 … 740 SUS (for suitable fluids, see points 2.1 and 2.2)
(25 … 160 mm2/s) 1.8 MRP, MR, MRE, MRV, MRVE motors:
(for deadhead pressures less than 915 PSI (63 bar), a suitable operating viscosity 85 … 4635 SUS
minimum viscosity of 80 SUS (16 mm2/s) is permissible) (18 … 1000 mm2/s)
(for suitable fluids, see point 2.2) recommended operating viscosity 140 … 230 SUS
1.1.2 V5 pumps (30 … 50 mm2/s)
max. 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s) during full flow start up. (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
max. 930 SUS (200 mm2/s) during start up in deadhead. 1.9 MKM/MRM motors:
min. viscosity is 80 SUS (16 mm2/s) at operating suitable operating viscosity 95 … 695 SUS
temperature (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2) (20 … 150 mm2/s)
1.1.3 V7 pumps recommended operating viscosity 140 … 230 SUS
max. 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s) during full start-up (30 to 50 mm2/s)
max. 930 SUS (200 mm2/s) during start up in deadhead (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
min. 120 SUS (25 mm2/s) at max. operating temperature
(for suitable fluids:
Sizes 10, 16, 25 and 40, for deadhead pressures less
than 1015 PSI (70 bar), see points 2.1 and 2.2;
Sizes 10, 16, 25, 40, 63 and 100, for deadhead pressures
less than 2030 PSI (140 bar) see point 2.2)
1
RA 07 075/06.87
2. Fluids 2.2.2 Oils with an increased viscosity index (HV oils)
The specification of the fluid is always determined by the (Oils for use in installations which are subject to wide
most sensitive component in the system. All components temperature fluctuations.)
of the system must be compatible with the fluid used. If these oils fulfill the requirements of ISO 6074** then point
2.1 HL oils to ISO 6074 2.2 applies. When choosing an HV oil, the loss in viscosity
These fluids contain no additives against wear caused by due to shearing of up to 30% must be taken into consider-
marginal lubrication. ation. For example, taking a V4 pump with a minimum
They may only be used with the following pumps and permissible viscosity of 120 SUS (25 mm2/s). This limit must
motors: G2, G3, G4 and V7, sizes 10, 16, 25 and 40, MCS, be increased to 167 SUS (36mm2/s) when using HV oils, so
MCR. that should shearing occur, the minimum viscosity limit will
not be passed. VI improvers can also have a negative effect
Aircraft fluids to MIL-H-5606 (e.g. Aero Shell Fluid 4) of the
on the demulsifying and air separation qualities of the oil. HV
relevant viscosity range, and containing wear additives
oils should therefore only be used, when the temperature
corresponding to HL oils can also be used with the above
conditions so demand. Aircraft oils to MIL-H-5606: see point
pumps/motors.
2.1 (HL oils).
When frequently starting from rest, HLP oils should be used.
2.2.3 The application of HM (HLP-D oils)
The use of HL oils with vane pumps (except a.m. V7, sizes
(Oils with detergent, dispersant and anti-wear additives as
10, 16, 25 and 40), radial piston pumps, internal gear pumps,
described in point 2.2)
MZ motors and gear pumps G8, G9, G10 is not permitted.
These oils can absorb a considerable quantity of water,
Hydraulic fluids, which attack lead, or bearings containing
especially if this water is present in the form of large drops,
lead, may not be used, even if they comply to ISO 6074.
it can detract from the war protection given by the oil. They
They are simply multi-purpose oils, which contain fatty
should therefore not be used where water may enter the
acids, or fatty acid esters (for example slide way oils).
system.
Oils similar to HL oils are also specified under Cetop RP 75
In many machine shops in which certain synthetic cooling
and DIN 51 524, part 1.
and cutting fluids are used, installations will only operate
At low pressures, consult us regarding the use of other pump correctly if HM (HLP-D) fluids are employed. Other oils lead
types, in addition to the pumps permitted above. to sticking of the components. In the mobile area, these oils
2.2 Oils with HLP characteristics have been of particular advantage. We recommend these
2.2.1 HM (HLP)* oils to ISO 6074 oils only in the above-mentioned cases.
(Oils with corrosion, oxidization, and wear additives.) These The film strength of these oils is very much dependent on the
fluids are those most commonly used in hydraulic circuits. If manufacturer. The statement, that these oils are particularly
the viscosity range is correct, they may be used with all good in preventing stick/slip at low cylinder speeds, cannot
components. therefore be accepted as universally true.
In viscosity classes VG 10, VG 15 and VG 22, ISO 6074 In cases, where heavy contamination from water is to be
places no extensive requirements on resistance to wear. expected, i.e. in steel works, or in damp surroundings, HLP-
Oils of these classes are therefore only permitted if they D oils may not be used, as the emulsified water is not
reach wear resistance class 10 on the FZG (gear wear) test, deposited in the reservoir, but is turned into steam at highly
in addition to ISO 6074. loaded parts of the system.
For vane pumps in general, oils to ISO VG 10 and VG 15 are In these cases, we recommend the use of HLP oils with
not permitted. thermostable zinc free additives, as these have particularly
Hydraulic fluids, which attack lead, or bearings containing good demulsifying properties. The filterability of these oils is
lead, may not be used, even if they comply to ISO 6074. also very good, particularly with very fine filteration.
They are simply multi-purpose oils (lubricating oils), and When using HLP-D oils, contamination is not precipitated
sometimes, HM (HLP-D) oils. We permit the use of all HM out, but must be filtered out. On this basis, a larger filter area
(HLP) oils, which comply with ISO 6074, with the exception than normal must be used (design ∆p=0.2 bar). The filter
of those indicated above, but would point out here, that this pore size should also be made one degree finer.
standard merely specifies the minimum requirements. The water content must lie below 0.1%, as water acceler-
As may be seen from the table, there are oils available, that ates the aging of the oil, detracts from the lubricity, leads
far exceed these minimum requirements with bearing met- to corrosion and cavitation, shortens the life of seals and
als, and filterability. reduces the filterability.
The resistance to aging has an obvious effect on the usable Various HLP-D oils contain fatty acids or fatty acid esters.
life of the fluid. Sediments produced by additives in the oils These fluids may not be used, as they attack lead. If in
have a negative effect on the system. Oils should be chosen doubt, contact the manufacturer of the oil.
with a low sedimentation factor (see table). Good filterability In general, with the exception of the demulsification
avoids breakdowns. If in doubt, please contact the oil characteristics, the same information as under point 2.2
manufacturer. for HLP-D oils is valid.
We would also point out to users, when choosing a supplier,
that some of these offer to check the condition of oil which *"HLP" is comparable to ISO/DIS 6074
has been in use, for aging, contamination, and residual "HM" oil, which in the "total ring" and vane loss, "pump wear
additives. This knowledge can then be used to forecast the test", the wear is less than 50 mg. This test is according to
further usable life of the fluid. ASTM D 2882.
**HV oils according to ISO/DIS 6074 (DIN 51 524) must also
meet the anti-wear additive requirements outlined by HLP oils
in point 2.2.
2
07 075/08.91
RA 75 075/06.87
Filterability dependent on additive system 3. Filtration
Generally, a cleanliness class 18/15, according to ISO 4406
Additive system (class 9, according to NAS 1638), is required for the fluid.
Filtration time Primary Secondary Conventional Thermo- This is achieved with a filter ß10 ≥ 100. In order to ensure long
for 3 x each stable life, a cleanliness class 17/14, according to ISO 4406 (class
100 ml through 8, according to NAS 1638) is recommended, achieved with
a 5 µm filter Zn/P/S Zn/P/S PSN PSN a filter of ß9 ≥ 100.
100 ml min 33 3.5 2 1 The information provided in the various data sheets for the
maximum degree of fluid contamination, must be observed.
200 ml min >60 9 2 1
New oil, as delivered, frequently does not meet the cleanli-
300 ml min >60 >60 2 1
ness standards required, and must be filtered carefully
before being placed into the system. The ISO/NAS cleanli-
Resistance to aging dependent on additive system ness class on delivery can be obtained from the oil supplier.
Additive system High Low Zinc-free Zinc-free Operation of the system with a clogged filter must be
concentration Zinc Zinc conventional thermo- prevented by an electrical safety device.
between 0.9 content stabilized stable Maintenance of the necessary cleanliness class requires
and 1.1% eff. careful filtering of the air entering the tank.
Add. element Zn/P/S/Ca Zn/P/S PSN PSN In damp atmospheres, a silica gel element is also neces-
Test to DIN sary.
51 587 4. Mixing various fluids
1800 2600 1800 3000
Aging duration If oils from various manufacturers, or different oils from the
to h, NZ = 2 same manufacturer are mixed, sedimentation and muddi-
Sedimentation ness may occur. This can lead to damage in the system.
content after 429 52 155 48 Based on these facts, no guarantee can be made for the
100 h mg application of mixed oils. Generally, it should be noted, that
apportionment of blame in cases of damage due to the
Dissolved Cu
361 41 75 121 mixing of oils from different manufacturers or further
after 100h mg
additives being placed in the oil cannot easily be made.
Source: O + P (1985) No. 3 Prof. Dr. Thoenes, Essen Market However, the oil supplier may be able to test mixability of
and technical development of hydraulic fluids. different oils under certain circumstances, and in turn offer
a guarantee.
Viscosity/temperature diagram
Viscosity in mm2/s
Temperature in °C
3
RA 07 075/06.87
Frequently used formulas and standards

Physical Formulas Measuring Techniques and Standards
a Velocity of sound in petroleum oil = 4330 ft/sec (1320 m/sec) 1 Kinematic viscosity in mm2/s DIN 51 562
3
b Compressibility factor B (bulk modulus) 2 Density at 60°F(15°C) in g/cm DIN 51 757
∆v m3 3 Viscosity index (VI) DIN ISO 2909
ß = –––– = 3 to 8•10–5 –––––––
v•p m3 • bar
4 For HL fluids DIN 51 524 part 1
c Viscosity / temperature function For HLP fluids DIN 51 524 part 2
U1 – U2 For HV fluids DIN 51 524 part 3 (proposed)
Gradient n = –––––––––––––– where U = arc sinhlnν
2.303 (lgT2 – lgT1) 5 Viscosity classification (to ISO) DIN 51 519
Viscosity index VI (see ISO 2909) 6 Pour point
37°F (3°C) higher than the sticking point DIN ISO 3016
d Viscosity / pressure characteristic (Kinematic viscosity η)
7 Gear tooth test (FZG normal test A/8.3/90)
ηp = η0 • eα • p (p in bar) mPa • s (Gear tooth loading test in 12 stages
α 20 °C
= 0.00240 bar–1 at 194°F (90°C) start temperature and
27 ft/s (8.3 m/s) circumferential speed) DIN 51 354 part 2
α 50 °C
= 0.00205 bar–1
α100 °C = 0.00147 bar–1 8 Pressure-terms-pressure ratings DIN 24 312
(from “Pressure fluids“ by Mr. Horst Dietterle, Shell Oil) 9 Air separation characteristics DIN 51 381
e Specific heat 10 Suspension of solids DIN 51 592

kJ 11 Corrosion protection characteristics
c = 1.84 • ––––––
kg • K regarding steel (process A) DIN 51 585
corrosive effect on copper DIN 51 579
f Thermal expansion
12 Demulsification characteristics DIN 51 599
∆v = v • 0.0007 • ∆ T cm3 (T in °K) Water content DIN ISO 3733
g Bunsen coefficient 13 Effect on seal materials DIN 53 538 part 1

in connection with DIN 53 521
VL = Voil • 0.09 • p VL in cm3 (air dissolved in oil) and DIN 53 505
(p in bar) mg KOH
Voil (oil volume) 14 Neutralization number ––––––– DIN 51 558 part 1
g
p2 p2 = ending pressure (bar) 15 Determination of carbonized
VL ≈ 0.09 Voil • –––
p1 p1 = beginning pressure (bar) residue according to Conradson DIN 51 551
16 Mechanical testing of vane pumps
h Coefficient of circulation
(wear in mg) DIN 51 389 part 2
Q 1 Q in L/min (pump flow)
i = –––––– –––– 17 Aging characteristics
V installation min V in L (Oil volume of the installation)
Increase in the neutralization number
after 100 hrs. (mg KOH/g) DIN 51 587
This is the reciprocal of the setting time

4 All rights reserved - Subject to revision

Printed in U.S.A.
Petroleum Hydraulic Fluids Recommendations
Industrial Hydraulics
Petroleum Hydraulic Fluids
Recommendations
The attached list of industrial hydraulic oils has been tabulated for use as a reference in assisting Bosch Rexroth cus-
tomers with an oil selection. The list is comprised of oils which meet or exceed the lubrication requirements of our
componentry.
Viscosity Selection
Hydraulic componentry will operate efficiently only within a specific viscosity range. A fluid which is too viscous
may prompt cavitation. Conversely, a fluid which is too thin may allow an accelerated rate of wear and additional slip
losses. Consequently, it is necessary to establish viscosity limitations.
The following table can be used as a guide in determining the recommended viscosity range for all pumps of our
manufacture. If your application dictates the use of fluids whose viscosities are outside of these recommendations,
please consult a Bosch Rexroth Sales Engineer.
Viscosity Minimum Optimum Maximum Maximum

Temperature Operating Operating Operating Start-up
Chart Viscosity Viscosity Viscosity Viscosity
80 SUS 125-250 SUS 1000 SUS 4000 SUS
FA; Ra; K #1
15 cSt 26-54 cSt 216 cSt 864 cSt
Q; Q-6 100 SUS 150-250 SUS 1000 SUS 4000 SUS
SV-10, 15, 20, 25 #2 21 cSt 32-54 cSt 216 cSt 864 cSt
VPV 16, 25, 32
SV-40; 80 &100 150 SUS 200-300 SUS 1000 SUS 4000 SUS
VPV 45, 63, 80, 100, #3 32 cSt 43-65 cSt 216 cSt 864 cSt
130 & 164
60 SUS 100-250 SUS 300 SUS 750 SUS
Radial Piston (Seco) #4
10 cSt 21-54 cSt 65 cSt 162 cSt
65 SUS 103-460 SUS 3800 SUS 9500 SUS
Gear Pumps #5
12 cSt 20-100 cSt 800 cSt 2000 cSt
In general, an oil which matches the viscosity requirements of the
Valves & Boosters
pump, will also be satisfactory for valves and boosters.
Viscosity vs Leakage
In selecting a hydraulic media, keep in mind that leakage is almost proportional to the kinematic (cSt) viscosity of the
fluid. The use of a lighter fluid other than required results in increased leakage and decreased efficiencies. For exam-
ple, using an oil with a viscosity of 80 SUS (15 cSt) will result in approximately 200% of the leakage obtained with
an oil having a viscosity of 140 SUS (30 cSt). Leakage with an oil of 300 SUS (65 cST) will be less than half of the
leakage obtained with the 140 SUS (30 cSt) oil.
Filtration
The ultimate life of hydraulic componentry is contingent upon system cleanliness. The use of micronic filtration that
has been matched to system requirements will reduce component malfunctions as well as extending the life of the
componentry and the hydraulic media.
Inlet Conditions
Any restrictions in the suction line decrease the allowable maximum viscosity. In general, pressure drop in the
suction line between the tank and pump inlet should not exceed 6" mercury with vane pumps, when pumping full
volume at sea level under start-up conditions.
Some radial piston pumps are not self priming, and dictate the use of overhead reservoirs. In this instance the intake
line must be unrestricted and sized to allow gravity to supply an adequate volume of oil to the pump.
At altitudes above 5000 feet, the use of overhead reservoirs is recommended for all Bosch Rexroth systems.
2
Use of Viscosity/Temperature Charts
Under the heading “Viscosity Selection” please note that there are five classes of pumps. For each of these classes
there is a mating Viscosity/Temperature chart which can be found on pages 5 through 7 of this publication.
Before referring to these charts, however, it is necessary to look at the listing of approved oils to determine if your
intended hydraulic media is ISO viscosity grade 32, 46 or 68. In general, a viscosity grade 32 oil has a viscosity of
about 150 SUS (32 cSt) @ 100 °F, grade 46 - 200 SUS (43 cSt) @ 100 °F, and grade 68 - 300 SUS (65 cSt)
@ 100 °F.
After noting the viscosity grade, refer to the Viscosity/Temperature Chart which matches the type of pump that
is used in your system.
By noting the points at which the viscosity plots intersect the vertical temperature lines, one can quickly determine
the temperatures at which the oil reaches: the maximum start-up viscosity; the maximum running viscosity; the
optimum viscosity range; and the minimum operating viscosity.
As an example, let us assume that we wish to use Mobil DTE 26 in an SV-80 pump. From the list of approved
products we note that DTE 26 is a Grade 68 oil. The correct Viscosity/Temperature Chart for an SV-80 is Chart #3.
Based on the plot for ISO grade 68 oil we then determine that the minimum start-up temperature could be 30 °F
(–1 °C) without exceeding the 4000 SUS start-up viscosity; the maximum viscosity for continuous operation is
reached at 63 °F (17 °C); the optimum operating viscosity is attained between the temperatures of 100 °F (38 °C)
and 118 °F (48 °C); and, at temperatures above 130 °F (54 °C), the minimum operating viscosity will have been
exceeded.
3
Recommended Oils
The following list of industrial hydraulic oils are recommended for use in Bosch Rexroth hydraulic componentry.
Oils sold by listed suppliers under other trade names, or oils which are sold by unlisted suppliers may not be
considered to be a satisfactory hydraulic media. Many formulations are being offered which lack certain additives or
are formulated for special reasons, such as lower cost, high detergency, leakage control, etc. Some of these
specialty fluids can be used successfully, however, others may prompt malfunctions and high rates of wear.
When employing fire resistant fluids, please consult our publication 9 535 233 457 “Fire Resistant Fluids”.
Manufacturer Fluid Name ISO Manufacturer Fluid Name ISO

Viscosity Viscosity
Grade Grade
Amalie Ama-Oil 100 AW 32 Houghton Hydro-Drive HP 150 32
Ama-Oil 200 AW 46 Hydro-Drive HP 200 46
Amoco Amoco AW 32 32 Kendall Kenoil R&O AW 32 32
Amoco AW 46 46 Kenoil R&O AW 32 46
Ashland Ultramax AW-15 32 Lubrication Monolec 6110A 46
Ultramax AW-20 46 Engineers Monolec 6120A 68
Ultramax AW-30 68
Bel-Ray Raylene 0 32 Lubriplate HO-0 32
Raylene 1 46 HO-1 46
Benz Petraulic 32 32 Lyondell Duro AW 32 32
Petraulic 46 46 Duro AW 46 46
BP Oil Inc. Energol HLP 32 32 Mobil DTE 24 32
Energol HLP 46 46 DTE 25 46
Canvis AW 32 32 Petro-Canada Hydroflo HLP32 32
Canvis AW 46 46 Hydroflo HLP46 46
Champlin Hydrol 150 32 Phillips Magnus A 150 32
Hydrol 215 46 Magnus A 215 46
Chevron Chevron HYD 32 32 Rock Valley Trojan AW 32 32
Chevron HYD 46 46 Trojan AW 46 46
Cities Service Pacemaker XD-32 32 Shell Tellus 32 32
Pacemaker XD-46 46 Tellus 46 46
Citgo AW 32 32 Steelco 7410 Hydraulic Oil 32
Citgo AW 46 46 7420 Hydraulic Oil 46
Conoco Super Hydraulic 32 32 Sun Sunvis 816 WR 32
Super Hydraulic 46 46 Sunvis 821 WR 46
Dryden Drydene Blue 32 32 Texaco Rando HD 32 32
Drydene Blue 46 46 Rando HD 46 46
Exxon Nuto H 32 32 Tower Hydroil AW-3 32
Nuto H 46 46 Hydroil AW-4 46
Fiske Lubriplate HO-0 32 Union Unax AW 150 32
Lubriplate HO-1 46 Unax AW 215 46
Gulf Harmony 32 AW 32 Withrow Withrolube 655 32
Harmony 46 AW 46 Withrolube 656 46
4
Industrial
Chart #1 Maximum
FA, RA & K Vane Pumps Temperature
Maximum
4000 Start-up
3000 Viscosity
2000
1500
Maximum
VISCOSITY, SAYBOLT UNIVERSAL SECONDS
1000 Running
750 68 Viscosity
46
500 32
400
300
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
Minimum
Viscosity
70
60
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
TEMPERATURE, DEGREES FAHRENHEIT
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

TEMPERATURE, DEGREES CELCIUS
Industrial
Chart #2 Maximum
Q, Q-6, SV-10, SV-15, SV-20, SV-25 Vane Pumps Temperature
VPV 16, 25, & 32 Vane Pumps Maximum

4000 Start-up
3000 Viscosity
2000
1500
Maximum
1000 Running
750 68 Viscosity
46
500 32
400
300
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
Minimum
90 Viscosity
80
70
60
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

TEMPERATURE, DEGREES CELCIUS 5
Industrial
Chart #3 Maximum
SV-40, SV-80 & SV-100 Vane Pumps Temperature
VPV 45, 63, 80, 100, 130 & 164 Vane Pumps Maximum
4000 Start-up
3000 Viscosity
2000
1500
Maximum
1000 Running
750 68 Viscosity
32 46
500
400
300
200
Optimum Minimum
150
Viscosity Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
70
60
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

Industrial
Chart #4 Maximum
Radial Piston Pumps Temperature
4000
3000
2000
1500
1000 Maximum
750 Start-up
Viscosity
500 68
400 32 46 Maximum
300 Running
Viscosity
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
70
60
Minimum
Viscosity
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

6 TEMPERATURE, DEGREES CELCIUS
Industrial
Chart #5 Maximum
Gear Pumps Temperature
Maximum
10000 Start-up
7500 Viscosity
5000
Maximum
4000 Running
3000 Viscosity
2000
VISCOSITY, SAYBOLT UNIVERSAL SECONDS*
1500
68
1000
46
750 32
500
400
300
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
70
Minimum
60 Viscosity
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

* Viscosity values extrapulated at low temperatures may not be acurate. Confirm

viscosity values prior to using Bosch Rexroth hydraulic equipment.
7
Bosch Rexroth Corporation
Industrial Hydraulics Division
7505 Durand Avenue
Sturtevant, Wisconsin 53177
Phone (262) 554-7100
Fax (262) 554-7117
Email: webmasterbrirc
@boschrexroth-us.com
www.boschat.com
Bosch Rexroth Corporation*#

Pneumatics
P.O. Box 13597
1953 Mercer Road
Lexington, KY 40511-1021
Phone (859) 254-8032
Fax (859) 254-4188
(800) 489-4188
Email: customer.pneumatics
www.us.rexroth.com

Electric Drives and Controls
5150 Prairie Stone Parkway
Hoffman Estates, IL 60192-3707
Phone (847) 645-3600
Fax (847) 645-6201
Email: info@indramat.com
www.us.rexroth.com

Linear Motion and
Assembly Technologies
816 East Third Street
Buchanan, MI 49107
Phone (616) 695-0151
Fax (616) 695-5363
www.boschat.com
Bosch Rexroth Corporation*

Mobile Hydraulics Division
P.O. Box 395
1700 Old Mansfield Road
Wooster, OH 44691-0394
Phone (330) 263-3300
Fax (330) 263-3333
Email: info@rexroth.com
www.us.rexroth.com
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengiesser 1
D-97816 Lohram Main
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52/18-11
Fax +49 (0) 93 52/18-11 90
Email: pr@rexroth.de
www.boschrexroth.de
*ISO9001 Certified Quality System

#QS9000 Certified Quality System
For more information, you may contact your nearest Bosch Rexroth distributor:
9 535 233 456 9/01

RA 07 900/06.98
Assembly, Start-up RA
and Service of 07 900/06.98
Hydraulic Power Units and Systems Replaces: 11.91
1. General 3. Start-up
Long service life and functional reliability of hydraulic systems When assembly has been correctly completed, proceed with
and their components are dependent on the correct mainte- start-up and functional test.
nance. To ensure efficient operation it is important to carefully 3.1. Preparation for trial run
review the following: 1. Tank cleaned?
– the special installation and operational instructions of the 2. Lines cleaned and correctly installed?
components 3. Couplings, flanges tightened?
– the technical data contained in the data sheet 4. Lines and components correctly connected in line with
– the NFPA/ANSI/ISO recommendations installation drawings or circuit diagram?
– the following instructions 5. Pressure accumulators properly charged with nitrogen?
It is recommended that the gas charge be noted on the
accumulator itself (e.g. by a label) and in the circuit
2. Installation
diagram, so that a check may be made in the future when
2.1. Preparation of assembly required.
1. Cleanliness: 6. Prime mover and pump correctly assembled and aligned?
– of the environmental area. 7. Prime mover correctly connected?
– of power units, pipe connections, components 8. Filter of specified pore size?
(e.g. pickling may be necessary if pipes have been 9. Specified fluid filled up to maximum level?
welded or hot bent). 3.2 Trial run
– of hydraulic fluids
1. Any personnel not required should leave the area!
Watch out for contamination, dampness; dirt from the
Only maintenance and operating personnel should be
environment must not be allowed to enter the reservoir.
present during start-up.
Fill reservoir only via a filter – preferably via system
2. Are shut-off valves fully open?
filters or portable filter stations with fine filters (10 µm).
3. Does the direction of rotation of the prime mover match
– protective internal paint coatings, if used, must be com-
that of the pump? Switch on briefly, “jog” the unit (1 to 5
patible with the hydraulic fluid used.
seconds) and check rotation.
– of parts from stock
4. Check position of directional valves and if necessary
Storage of parts which have not been filled or treated
move into required position.
with anticorrosion fluid can lead to the buildup of resin.
5. Set control valves to bypass or “unloaded”.
Dissolve resin with solvent and replace lubricating oil.
6. Open pump suction valves – if necessary fill pump hous-
2. Are all the parts on hand?
ing with fluid.
3. Is there any transportation damage?
7. If pilot “boost” pump is installed, start-up.
2.2. Carrying out assembly 8. Start main pump, move out of zero “deadhead” position
1. Make use of lifting eye bolts and transportation equipment. and listen for noise.
2. Do not use force. In order to prevent radial forces and 9. Change the displacement of the pump slightly*.
tension on pipelines and components, ensure that pipe- 10. Bleed system
lines are firmly secured. Carefully loosen fitting or bleed screws at high points in
3. Do not use putty or teflon tape as a sealing material, as this the system. When the escaping hydraulic fluid is free of air
can lead to contamination and thus malfunctions. bubbles, the filling process is complete. Retighten
4. In order to avoid external leakage, observe the installation fittings.
instructions of the pipe fitting manufacturer. We 11. Flush system, if possible by short-circuiting the actuators.
recommend the use of fittings with flexible seals and Continue flushing until the filters remain clean; check
S.A.E. straight thread O-ring ports. filter.
5. Makes sure hose lines are correctly laid. Rubbing and 12. Check function of system without load; if possible, oper-
touching of the lines must be avoided. ate by hand.
6. Availability of correct fluids (ISO VG DIN 51 519) Cold test the electro-hydraulic controls.
– select the proper fluid according to system require- 13. When operating temperature has been reached, test
ments (petroleum oils preferred). system under load. Gradually increase pressure.
7. Make sure that all electrical components you wire are 14. Check monitoring and measuring devices.
calibrated, set and tested properly before start-up. 15. Listen for noise.
Please note: 16. Check fluid level, add if necessary.
– viscosity range 17. Check setting of pressure relief valves by loading or
braking the system.
– operating temperature range
18. Check for leakage.
– type of seals used on components 19. Switch off power to the drive.
* Run internal combustion engines at idling speed.
1/2
RA 07 900/06.98
20. Tighten all fittings, even if there is no evidence of leakage. have inspected for particle types, size, and quantity;
Warning: tighten only when the system is not under pres- document findings in manual.
sure. 4.5. Check accumulators
21. Recheck fluid level.
Check pressurized accumulators for charging pressure;
22. Full functional test of the system. Compare measured
while doing so, there must be no pressure on the fluid side
values with the permissible and/or required data (pres-
of the accumulator.
sure, speed and setting of other control components).
23. Jerky movements indicate the presence of air in the 4.6. Check temperature
system. By changing the pumps displacement with the Measure operating temperature not only in the reservoir, but
actuators in the loaded or braked condition, certain air also in the region of the pump bearings.
pockets can be eliminated. The system is completely bled Rising operating temperature is an indication of increasing
when all functions can be carried out smoothly and con- friction and leakage.
tinuously and there is no foaming on the surface of the 4.7. Leakage in the system
fluid. In practice it has been found that foaming should Apart from loss of fluid, leaks can endanger concrete floors
have ceased 1 hour after start-up at the latest. and components, particularly with underfloor piping.
24. Check fluid temperature.
4.8. Check main and pilot pressures
25. Switch off power to the drive.
26. Remove filter elements (secondary and main flow filters) 1. At weekly intervals.
and inspect for residue. Clean filter elements, replace 2. Note any pressure corrections in maintenance manual.
paper cartridges. 3. Frequent readjustment indicates wear in the pressure
27. If further contamination is found, an additional flushing is relief components.
necessary in order to prevent premature failure of system 4. Pressure drops should be investigated to determine the
components. cause.
28. All settings should be laid down in an acceptance certifi- 4.9. Enjoy the most efficient form of power transmission
cate and well documented. … hydraulic power.
4. Servicing
4.1. Prepare a maintenance manual
It is recommended that a maintenance manual be prepared,
in which it is outlined which particular parts must be checked
and at what time intervals.
4.2. Check fluid level
1. Continuously during start-up.
2. Daily after start-up.
3. Weekly thereafter.
4.3. Check filters
1. Check and if necessary clean or replace every 2 to 3 hours
during start-up.
2. Daily during the first week.
3. After one week the filters should be cleaned or replaced
as necessary.
4. Service suction filters
Suction filters are not recommended; however, if used re-
quire particularly careful servicing. After the initial break-
in time they should be checked and if necessary cleaned
at least once a week.
4.4. Service system fluid
1. Servicing is dependent on several operating factors.
– Fluid level (e.g. water in fluid, severely aged fluid)
– Operating temperature
– Volume of fluid
2. Drain and refill when in warm operating conditions.
3. Severely aged or contaminated fluid cannot be improved
by adding fresh fluid.
4. Use filter when filling, with mesh width of 0.002 in. (0.06
mm) or better – fill via a 10 µm system filter.
5. Take laboratory samples of system fluid regularly and

2/2 All rights reserved – Subject to revision
Printed in U.S.A.
Variable displacement pump A4VSO RA
Series 1, 2, and 3, Open Circuit
Axial Piston – Swashplate Design 92 050/10.97
SAE and Metric
5100 psi 5800 psi
Sizes 40...1000 Nominal pressure Peak pressure Replaces 05.95
(350 bar) (400 bar)
For the description and operation of the

various controls, see relevant RA-sheets
(see page 2)
Axial piston variable displacement pump A4VSO is of swashplate – Swashplate design

design and is designed for open circuit operation. – Infinitely variable displacement
– Good self priming suction characteristics
Flow is proportional to input speed and displacement, and is – Continuous operating pressure of 5100 psi (350 bar)
infinitely variable by adjustment of the swashplate angle. – Low noise level
– Excellent service life
– Drive shaft able to accept axial and radial loading
– Low power to weight ratio
– Compact modular design
– Short control times
– Over-center design (swallow circuits)
– Through drive and pump combinations possible
– Swivel angle indicator standard
– Installation positional optional
– Operation on HF fluids permitted at derated parameters
1
RA
RA9292
050/10.97 (SAE
050/10.97 and
(SAE Metric)
and Metric)
Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3
Ordering code
Hydraulic fluid / version 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Mineral oil (no code)
HF hydraulic fluid (with the exception of Skydrol) – – E
High-speed version – – – – – – H
High-speed version for HF fluids – – – – – – K
Version
SAE A
Axial piston unit
Swashplate design, variable, industrial design A4VS
Charging pump 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Without charging pump (no code)
With impeller, only for port option 25 – – – – – – – – L
Mode of operation
Pump, open circuit O
Nominal size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Displacement, Vg max in3 2.44 4.33 7.63 10.98 15.26 21.66 30.51 45.77 61.02
(cm3) (40) (71) (125) (180) (250) (355) (500) (750) (1000)
Control and adjustment devices

Constant pressure control DR DR..

Parallel pressure control DP DP..
 see RA 92060
Constant flow control (load sensing) FR – – – FR.. 
Const. power control with hyperbolic oper. curve LR LR.. see RA 92064
Manual control MA – – MA.. 
 see RA 92072
Electric motor control EM – – EM.. 
Hydraulic control, with rotary servo HW HW.. see RA 92068
in preparation
Hydraulic control, volume dependent HM HM..


Hydraulic control with servo/proportional valve HS HS..
 see RA 92076
Electronic control EO EO.. 
Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent HD HD.. see RA 92080
Hydraulic control, speed dependent DS DS.. see RE 92055
Series
Series 10 – – – – – – – 10*)
Series 22 – – – – – 22
Series 30 – – 30
Direction of rotation
As viewed from drive shaft clockwise R
counter-clockwise L
Seals
NBR (Nitrile rubber to DIN ISO 1629) with shaft seal FPM P
FPM (Fluorocarbon rubber to DIN ISO 1629) V
Shaft end
SAE parallel keyed shaft – – – K
SAE splined shaft – – – S
Metric keyed parallel shaft DIN 6885 P
Metric splined shaft DIN 5480 Z
2
RA 92 050/10.97 (SAE and Metric)
A A4VS O / –
Hydraulic fluid / version
Version
Axial piston unit

Charging pump
Mode of operation
Nominal size
Control options
Series
Seals
Shaft end
Mounting flange 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
SAE 4-bolt – – – D
ISO 4-bolt – – – B
ISO 8-bolt – – – – – – H
Port Connections 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Connections B and S: SAE on side 90o offset, UNC mounting bolts – 63
Connections B and S: SAE on side 90o offset, UNC mounting bolts 75
2nd pressure connection B1 opposite B - when delivered blanked off with a flange
Connections B and S: SAE on side 90o offset, metric mounting bolts – 13
Connections B and S: SAE on side 90o offset, metric mounting bolts 25
2nd pressure connection B1 opposite B - when delivered blanked off with a flange
Through drive
Without thru drive, without auxilliary pump N00
With thru drive (For information, please refer to table on Page 4 ) K...
Filtration (only for control device HS- and DS-)

Without filtration (no code) N
Sandwich plate filter (with HS- and DS- controls, see RA 92076 and RE 92055) Z
● = available
❍ = in preparation
– = not available
3
Through drive ordering codes 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Without auxiliary pump, without through drive N00
With through drive for mounting of axial piston unit, gear or radial piston pump
Flange Hub/shaft to accept
ISO 125, 4-bolt Splined shaft 32x2x30x14x9g A4VSO/H/G 40 K31
ISO 140, 4-bolt Splined shaft 40x2x30x18x9g A4VSO/H/G 71 – K33
ISO 140, 4-bolt Splined shaft 40x2x30x18x9g A4VSO/H/G 71 – K33
ISO 160, 4-bolt Splined shaft 50x2x30x24x9g A4VSO/H/G 125 – – K34
ISO 160, 4-bolt Splined shaft 50x2x30x24x9g A4VSO/G 180 – – – K34
ISO 224, 4-bolt Splined shaft 60x2x30x28x9g A4VSO/H/G 250 – – – – K35
ISO 224, 4-bolt Splined shaft 70x3x30x22x9g A4VSO/G 355 – – – – – K77
ISO 315, 8-bolt Splined shaft 80x3x30x25x9g A4VSO/G 500 – – – – – – K43
ISO 400, 8-bolt Splined shaft 90x3x30x28x9g A4VSO/G 750 – – – – – – – K76
ISO 400, 8-bolt Splined shaft 100x3x30x32x9g A4VSO/G 1000 – – – – – – – – K88
ISO 80, 2-bolt Splined shaft 3/4" 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 18 KB2
ISO 100, 2-bolt Splined shaft 7/8" 22-4 (SAE B) A10VSO 28 KB3
ISO 100, 2-bolt Splined shaft 1" 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VSO 45 KB4
ISO 125, 2-bolt Splined shaft 1 1/4" 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71 – KB5
ISO 125, 2-bolt Splined shaft 1 1/2" 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VSO 100 – – KB6
ISO 180, 4-bolt Splined shaft 1 3/4" 44-4 (SAE D) A10VSO 140 – – – KB7
127-4 (SAE C, 4-bolt) Splined, 32-4 (SAE C) AA4VSO/G 40 – – – K15
127-4 (SAE C, 4-bolt) Splined, 38-4 (SAE C-C) AA4VSO/G 71 – – – – K16
152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt) Splined, 44-4 (SAE D) AA4VSO/G 125 – – – – – K17
152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt) Splined, 50-4 (SAE F) AA4VSO/G 180 – – – – – – K78
165-4 (SAE E, 4-bolt) Splined, 50-4 (SAE F) AA4VSO/G 250 – – – – – – – K18
82-2 (SAE A, 2-bolt) Keyed, 19-1 (SAE A-B) AA10VSO 18 – – – K40
101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) Keyed, 22-1 (SAE B) AA10VSO 28 – – – K03
101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) Keyed, 25-1 (SAE B-B) AA10VSO 45 – – – K05
127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt) Keyed, 32-1 (SAE C) AA10VSO 71 – – – – K08
127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt) Keyed, 38-1 (SAE C-C) AA10VSO 100 – – – – – K38
152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt) Keyed, 44-1 (SAE D) AA10VSO 140 – – – – – K21
82-2 (SAE A, 2-bolt) Splined shaft 5/8" 16-4 (SAE A) G2 / GC2/GC3-1X K01
82-2 (SAE A, 2-bolt) Splined shaft 3/4" 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 18 K52
101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) Splined shaft 7/8" (SAE B) G3 K02
101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 25-4 (SAE B-B) GC4-1X, A10VO 45 K04
127-2 (SAE C) Splined shaft 32-4 (SAE C) A10VO 71 – K07
101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 32-4 (SAE C) GC5-1X K06
127-2 (SAE C) Splined shaft 38-4 (SAE C-C) GC6-1X, A10VO 100 – – K24
152-4 (SAE D) Splined shaft 44-4 (SAE D) A10VO 140 – – – K17
Ø 63, metric 4-bolt Keyed shaft Ø 25 R4 K57
101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 22-4(SAE B) G4, A10VO 28 K68
101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) Splined 7/8"-R shaft (SAE B) A10VO 28..R, PVV1/2 KA3
101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) Splined 1"-R shaft (SAE BB) A10VO 45..R, PVV4/5 KA4
127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt) Splined 1-1/4"-R shaft (SAE C) A10VO 71..R, PVV4/5 KA5
With through drive shaft, without hub, without adapter flange, with cover plate K99
Combination pumps
1. When ordering a second axial piston pump factory mounted, the "+" symbol must be used to join the ordering codes of
each pump. Ordering code of 1st pump + Ordering code of 2nd pump.
Example: AA4VSO 125 DR/22R – PKD63K08 + AA4VSO 71 DR/10R – PKD63N00.
2. When ordering a gear or radial piston pump factory mounted, please specify as a separate line item and "+" symbol.
4
Hydraulic Fluid Notes on Hydraulic Fluid Selection

The A4VSO pumps in the standard design, should be used with In order to select the correct fluid, it is necessary to know the
good quality, petroleum oil based, anti-wear hydraulic fluids. More operating temperature in the tank (open circuits) in relation to the
detailed information regarding the selection of hydraulic fluids and ambient temperature.
their application limits can be found in our Data Sheets RA 90 220 The hydraulic fluid should be selected so that, within the operating
(Petroleum Oil), RA 90 221 (Biodegradable Fluids) and RA 90 223 temperature range, the fluid viscosity is within the optimum range
(Type HF–Fire Resistant/Synthetic Fluids). νopt (see shaded area of the selection diagram). We recommend that
When operating with environmentally compatible fluids (Bio- the higher viscosity grade is selected in each case.
degradable) or Fire Resistant (Type HF synthetic fluids) possible Example: At an ambient temperature of X°, the operating tempe-
reduction of the operating specifications may be required. Please rature in the reservoir is 140 °F (60 °C). In the optimum operating
consult with us and your fluid supplier. viscosity range νopt, (shaded area), this corresponds to viscosity
grades VG 46 or VG 68, VG 68 should be selected.
Operating Viscosity Range Important: The leakage fluid (case drain fluid) temperature is
In order to obtain optimum efficiency and service life, we recommend influenced by pressure and speed and is typically higher than the
that the operating viscosity (at normal operating temperature) be tank temperature. However, maximum temperature at any point in
selected from within the range. the system must be less than 195°F (90°C).
Optimum Viscosity (νopt) 80...170 SUS (16...36 mm2/s)
Limits of Viscosity Range Temperature range (See Selection Diagram)

The limiting values for viscosity are as follows: tmin = –13° F (–25° C)
Absolute Minimum Viscosity (νmin) 45 SUS (10 mm2/s) tmax = +195° F (+90° C)
Only for short periods at max. permissible leakage oil
temperature tmax = 195°F (90°C)
Maximum Viscosity (νmax) 4600 SUS (1000 mm2/s)
respectively 1380 SUS (300 mm2/s) with auxiliary pump.
Only for short periods during cold start-up
Selection Diagram
5
Hydraulic Fluid (continued)

Bearing flushing Note regarding series 30
For a reliable continuous operation bearing flushing is required with When using external bearing flushing at port “U”, the throttle screw,
the following operating conditions: which is found at port “U”, has to be screwed in completely.
– Applications with special fluids (non mineral) due to limited With throttle screw back out, the U-port is connected to case. In this
lubricity and narrow temperature range position and with U-port plugged, a patented impeller provides
– operation with mineral oils, however with marginal conditions for lubrication flow through the front bearing and shaft seal area.
temperature and viscosity
– with vertical mounting (shaft up). In order to ensure lubrication Filtration of the Hydraulic Fluid (Axial Piston Unit)
of front bearing and shaft seal, we recommend bearing flushing.
In order to guarantee reliable operation, the hydraulic fluid must be
The bearing flushing port "U" is located in the mounting flange area maintained to a cleanliness level of minimum:
of the pump. The flushing oil flows through the pump's front bearing
9 to NAS 1638
and leaves via the case drain.
6 to SAE, ASTM, AIA
We recommend the following flushing flows:
18/15 to ISO/DIS 4406
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
This may be achieved, for example, with filter elements
QSp GPM 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.8 2.6 4.0 5.3 7.9 10.6
type…D 020… (see RA 31 278)
L/min (3) (4) (5) (7) (10) (15) (20) (30) (40)
Hence the following filtration ration is achieved
β20 ratio ≥ 100.
For the given flushing flows there will be a pressure difference of
~29 psi (2 bar) (Series 1 and 2) and ~44 psi (3 bar) (Series 3)
between port “U” (including screwed fitting) and the pump case.
Technical Specifications Determination of inlet pressure p abs at the suction port S, or the
(Valid for operation on petroleum oil based fluids) reduction in output flow when increasing rotational speed
Operating pressure range – Inlet Port

Speed n/no max Inlet pressure pabs psi (bar)
Absolute pressure at port S (suction inlet) 1.255
pabs min 12 psi (0.8 bar) 1.20 23 (1.6)
pabs max 435 psi (30. bar) 1.10 20 (1.4)
17.5 (1.2)
Operating pressure range – Outlet Port 1.00 14.5 (1.0)
Pressure at port B
0.90 12 (0.8)
Nominal pressure pn 5100 psi (350 bar)
Peak pressure pmax 5800 psi (400 bar) 0.80
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
(Pressure specification per DIN/DIS 24312) V
Displacement g
Direction of flow: S to B Vg max
The inlet pressure is the static fill pressure i.e. the min. dynamic
charge pressure.
Case drain pressure
The permissible case drain pressure is dependent on the drive Caution: Max. permissible speed no max. perm. (speed limit)
speed.
(see diagram) Max. case drain pressure (housing pressure)
pL abs max 60 psi (4 bar)
These are approximate values. Under certain operating

conditions a reduction in these values may be necessary.
6
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering ηmh and ηv; values rounded) * with impeller
Size 40 71 125 180 250/H* 355/H* 500/H* 750 750* 1000

Displacement Vg max in3/rev 2.44 4.33 7.63 11.0 15.26 21.7 30.51 45.8 45.8 61.02
(cm3) (40) (71) (125) (180) (250/250) (355/355) (500/500) (750) (750) (1000)
Max. speed at pabs 14.5 psi (1 bar) no max rpm 2600 2200 1800 1800 1500/1900 1500/1700 1320/1500 1200 1500 1000
at port S
Max. perm. speed (speed limit)
dependent on inlet pressure pabs no max perm.
rpm 3200 2700 2200 2100 1800/2100 1700/1900 1600/1800 1500 1500 1000
or reduced displacement Vg < Vg max
Max. flow at no max Qo max gpm 27.5 41.2 59.4 85.6 99/125 140/159 174/198 237.9 297.2 264.1
(L/min) (104) (156) (225) (324) (375/475) (533/604) (660/750) (900) (1125) (1000)
at nE = 1500 rpm Q gpm 15.8 28.2 49.1 71.3 99.0 140 153.41) 203.41) 297.1
(L/min) (60) (107) (186) (270) (375) (533) (581)1) (770)1) (1125) —
at no max Po max HP 81 122 176 254 294 419 518 708 885 781
(kW) (61) (91) (131) (189) (219/277) (311/352) (385/437) (525) (656) (583)
at nE 1500 rpm P HP 9.24 16.3 28.7 41.7 57.8 82.1 89.51) 118.61) 173.29
(kW) (35) (62) (109) (158) (219) (311) (339)1) (449)1) (656) —
Max. torque at Vg max Tmax lb-ft 165 292 516 744 1032 1467 2063 3097 3097 4104
∆p = 5100 psi (350 bar) (Nm) (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (4174) (5565)
Torque at Vg max T lb-ft 47 83 147 211 294 417 586 880 880 1172
∆p = 1450 psi (100 bar) (Nm) (64) (113) (199) (286) (398) (564) (795) (1193) (1193) (1590)
Moment of inertia about drive axis J lb-ft2 0.116 0.287 0.712 1.305 2.276 4.509 7.890 15.66 15.66 28.47
(kgm2) (0.005) (0.012) (0.03) (0.055) (0.096) (0.19) (0.333) (0.66) (0.66) (1.20)
Filling volume (case) gal 0.5 0.6 1.3 1.0 2.6 2.1 3.7 5.0 5.8 7.13
(L) (2) (2.5) (5) (4) (10) (8) (14) (19) (22) (27)
Approx. weight m lbs 86 117 194 225 406 456 705 1014 1080 1333
(pump with press. control) (kg) (39) (53) (88) (102) (184) (207) (320) (460) (490) (605)
Permissible max. axial force ± Fax max lbf 135 180 225 315 405 450 450 495 495 495
loading of (N) (600) (800) (1000) (1400) (1800) (2000) (2000) (2200) (2200) (2200)
drive shaft max. radial force Fq max lbf 225 270 360 450 450 495 560 675 675 786
(N) (1000) (1200) (1600) (2000) (2000) (2200) (2500) (3000) (3000) (3500)
1
) Vg < Vg max
H* = High-Speed-Version
Calculation of size Application of force

Vg • n • ηv Vg • n • ηv Fq
Flow Q=
231
gpm ( Q=
1000
L/min )
± Fax
Torque T=
Vg • ∆ p
24 • π • ηmh
lb-ft ( T=
Vg • ∆ p
20 • π • ηmh
Nm ) X/2 X/2
Power P =
Q•∆p
1714 • ηt
HP
( P=
Q • ∆p
600 •ηt
kW
) X
Vg = Geometric displacement per rev. - in3 (cm3)

n = Speed rpm (rpm)
∆p = Pressure differential - psi (bar)
Q = Flow - gpm (L/min)
T = Torque - lb-ft (Nm)
P = Power - HP (kW)
ηv = Volumetric efficiency
ηmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
ηt = Total efficiency (ηt = ηv • ηmh)
7
Drive power and output flow

(Fluid: petroleum oil to ISO VG 46 DIN 51519, t = 122°F (50°C)
Q p• Q p
•
Total efficiency:
Volumetric efficiency:
ηt =
ηv =
PQ max 1714
Qeff
Qtheor
•
Q = gpm
p = psi
P = HP
( ηt =
PQ max 600
•
Q = L/min
p = bar
P = kW
)
n = 2600 rpm
n = 1200 rpm
n = 1800 rpm
n = 1200 rpm
n = 2200 rpm
n = 1200 rpm
n = 1500 rpm
n = 1200 rpm
n = 1800 rpm
n = 1200 rpm
8

Q p• Q p
•
Total efficiency:
Volumetric efficiency:
ηt =
ηv =
PQ max 1714
Qeff
Qtheor
•
Q = gpm
p = psi
P = HP
( ηt =
PQ max 600
•
Q = L/min
p = bar
P = kW
)
9

Q p• Q p
•
( )
Total efficiency: ηt = Q = gpm ηt = Q = L/min
PQ max 1714
• PQ max 600
•
p = psi p = bar
Qeff
Volumetric efficiency: ηv = P = HP P = kW
Qtheor
Nominal Size 1000
n = 1200 RPM
n = 1000 RPM
10
Installation Notes
Installation position is optional. The pump housing must be filled 2. Horizontal installation
with fluid both when commissioning and in operation. In order to The pump is to be filled through wichever port is uppermost
achieve low noise levels, all connecting lines (suction, pressure »T«, »K1«, »K2« or »R/L«, and this port is to be used as a drain
and drain lines) are to be isolated from the tank by flexible port.
members. A non-return line in the drain lines should be avoided. In 2.1 Installation within a tank
individual cases, this may be possible, please enquire. a) If the minimum fluid level does not fall below the upper point
1. Vertical installation (shaft end upwards) on the pump: The drain port and the suction port »S« remain
The following installation conditions should be noted: open (see fig.3)
1.1 Installation within a tank
a) If the minimum fluid level is level with or above the pump
mounting flange: Ports »R/L«, »T« and »S« are open
(see fig. 1).
Fluid
Fig. 3
b) If the minimum fluid level falls below the upper point on the
pump: The leakage port and possibly the suction port are to be
Fig. 1 piped according the fig. 4. The requirements in point 1.2. are
to be met. Fill the pump housing before commissioning.
b) If the minimum fluid level falls below the pump mounting
flange: Ports »R/L«, »T« and possibly »S« must be piped, see 2.2 Installation outside a tank
fig. 2. The requirements then correspond to point 1.2. Fill the pump housing before commissioning.
a) For mounting above the tank install as fig. 4.
The requirements of point 1.2. must be met.
b) Below the tank.
Fill point
Pipe the drain port and the suction port »S« as fig.5.
Fig. 2
1.2 Installation outside a tank

Fill the pump housing before installation, with the pump in a Fig. 4
horizontal position. Pipe port »T« to tank and plug port »R/L«.
For filling when already installed: fill via »R« and bleed port
»T«. Then plug port »R«.
Requirement: The minimum pump inlet pressure (suction
pressure) is to be 12 psi (0.8 bar) abs. Mounting above the tank
is to be avoided wherever possible if a low noise level is to be
achieved.
Fig. 5
11
Unit Dimensions, Size 40, SAE Version

(Example: const. pressure control; exact dimensions of control
devices see separate data sheets)
Port connections
B Pressure port 3/4" SAE (High pressure series)
B1 Additional port 7/8-14 UNF-2B
S Suction port 1 1/2" SAE (Standard pressure series)
K1, K2 Flushing ports 7/8-14 UNF-2B
T Case drain port 7/8-14 UNF-2B
MB, MS Test ports 7/16-20 UNF-2B
R(L) Fluid fill and air bleed port 7/8-14 UNF-2B
for exact location see control data sheet
U Flushing port 7/16-20 UNF-2B
12
Before finalising your design, please request a certified drawing.
Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3 Dimensions in inches and millimeters ( ).
Unit Dimensions, Size 40, Series 1, Metric Version

(Example: const. pressure control; exact dimensions of control devices see
separate data sheets)
Connections for version 13

B Pressure port SAE 3/4" (high pressure range)
B1 Auxiliary port M 22x1.5;14 deep (plugged)

B Pressure port SAE 3/4" (high pressure range)
B1 2nd pressure port SAE 3/4" (high pressure range)
(closed)
Port connections
B Pressure port SAE 3/4" (high pressure series)
B1 Additional port M 22 x 1.5; 0.55 (14) deep (plugged)
S Suction port SAE 1 1/2" (standard pressure series)
K1, K2 Flushing ports M 22 x 1.5; 0.55 (14) deep (plugged)
T Case drain port M 22 x 1.5; 0.55 (14) deep (plugged)
MB, MS Test ports M 14 x 1.5; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
R(L) Fluid fill and air bleed port M 22 x 1.5
U Flushing port M 14 x 1.5; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
13

Port connections
B Pressure port 1" SAE (high pressure series)
B1 Additional port 1 1/16-12 UN-2B
S Suction port 2" SAE (standard pressure series)
K1, K2 Flushing ports 1 1/16-12 UN-2B
MB, MS Test ports 1 1/16-12 UN-2B
T Case drain port 7/16-20 UNF-2B
R(L) Fluid fill and air bleed port 1 1/16-12 UN-2B
14
Unit Dimensions, Size 71, Series 1, Metric Version

(Example: const. pressure control; exact dimensions of control devices
see separate data sheets)

B Pressure port SAE 1" (high pressure range)
B1 Auxiliary port M 27x2; 16 deep (plugged)

B1 2nd pressure port SAE 1" (high pressure range)
(closed)
Port connections
B Pressure port SAE 1" (high pressure series)
B1 Additional port M 27 x 2; 0.63 (16) deep (plugged)
S Suction port SAE 2" (standard pressure series)
K1, K2 Flushing ports M 27 x 2; 0.63 (16) deep (plugged)
T Case drain port M 27 x 2; 0.63 (16) deep (plugged)
R(L) Fluid fill and air bleed port M 27 x 2
15

Port connections
B Pressure port 1 1/4" SAE (High pressure series)
S Suction port 2 1/2" SAE (Standard pressure series)
T Case drain port 1 5/16-12 UN-2B
16
Unit Dimensions, Size 125, Series 2 and 3, Metric Version


B Pressure port SAE 1 1/4" (high pressure range)
B1 Auxiliary port M 33x2;18 deep (plugged)

B1 2nd pressure port SAE 1 1/4" (high pressure range)
(closed)
Port connections
B Pressure port SAE 1 1/4" (high pressure series)
S Suction port SAE 2 1/2" (standard pressure series)
17

Port connections
S Suction port 3" SAE (Standard pressure series)
18


Connections of version 25
(closed)
Port connections
19
Unit Dimensions, Size 250

Port connections
20
Unit Dimensions, Size 250, Series 3



(closed)
Port connections
B1 Additional port M 42 x 2 ; 0.79 (20) deep (plugged)
K1, K2 Flushing ports M 42 x 2 ; 0.79 (20) deep (plugged)
T Case drain port M 42 x 2 ; 0.79 (20) deep (plugged)
MB, MS Test ports M 14 x 1.5 ; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
U Flushing port M 14 x 1.5 ; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
21

Control valve
mounting for
clockwise rotation
Shaft S
on demand
Control valve
mounting for
counter-clockwise
rotation
Shaft K
12 17.8
(3
.51 ) D
IA
Detail X
SAE 4"
Standard pressure series
Port connections
B Pressure port 1 1/2" SAE (High pressure series) 5/8-11 UNC-2B
B1 Additional port 1 5/8-12 UN-2B 1.14 deep
Detail Y
MB, MS Test ports 7/16-20 UNF-2B SAE 1 1/2"
R(L) Fluid fill and air bleed port 1 5/8-12 UN-2B High pressure series
for exact location see control data sheet 5/8-11 UNC-2B
U Flushing port 3/4-16 UNF-2B 1.14 deep
22



(closed)
Port connections
R(L) Fluid fill and air bleed port M 42 x 2;
23



(closed)
Port connections
24



(closed)
Port connections
25
Unit Dimensions, Size 750 with charging pump (A4VSLO 750)

(Example: const. pressure control
exact dimensions of control devices
Port connections
B1 Additional port SAE 2" (plugged)
MB Test port (operating press.) M 18 x 1.5; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
MS Test port (suction press.) M 18 x 1.5; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
ML Test port (charging press.) M 18 x 1.5; 0.47 (12) deep (plugged)
26
Unit dimensions A4VSO 1000, series 3

(Example: Pressure control; for exact dimensions of control devices see separate RE sheets)
Threads for lifting eyes
Splined shaft M20 DIN 580
W100x3x30x32x9g U M2
W100x3x30x32x9g
DIN 5480
5480
Y
DIN 0.62
(16)
B1
9.09 (231)
8.26 (210)
ø15.74h8 (ø400h8)
ø13.33+0.19 (ø333+5)
ø12.67 (ø322)
L R
8.26 (210)
M24
1.96
(50) 2.16
(55)
4.13 M1
(105) 1.37 (35)
B
6.10 (155) 2.00
14.17 (360) (51)
R(L)
24.48 (622) Y
Key
AS 28x16x160
13.54 (344)
DIN 6885
13.77 (350)
1.10h9 (28h9) 0.17
(4.5) 6.29 (160)
17
M24
K1
ø3.93m6 (ø100m6)
K2 MB
.7
(45
0)
4.17
(106)
8.85 (225)
(49 4
9.13 (232)
1.9
19.
5)
(50)
8x
45
(= 45
°
°
36
0° 0.62+0.19 T
) 22.5° 6.49 (165) MS
(16+5)
0.86 1.8 3.8
(22) (47) (98) X
9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 8.46 (215) 7.99 (203) 21.57 (548)
24.92 (633)
View X
6.00 (152.4)
4.92 (125)
Connections – version 25 S SAE 5"

B Pressure port SAE 2" (high pressure range) standard
B1 2nd pressure port SAE 2" (high pressure range) pressure range
(closed) 3.62 M16; 24 deep
S Suction port SAE 5" (standard series) (92.1)
K1, K2 Flushing ports M 48x2; 20 deep (plugged) 1.96 View Y

(50) B B and B1 (shown without blanking plate)
T Oil drain M 48x2; 20 deep (plugged)
3.81 (96.8)
MB Test point operating pressure M 18x1.5;12 deep (plugged) SAE 2" high pressure
MS Test point suction pressure M 18x1.5;12 deep (plugged) range
R(L) Oil filling + air bleed M 48x2; 1.75
1.75
U Flushing port M 18x1.5;12 deep (plugged) M20; 30 deep (44.5) (44.5)
M1, M2 Test points for adjustment pressure M 18x1.5 (plugged) 3.81 (96.8)
27
Summary of controls
Pressure control DR (see RE/RA 92 060)
Maintains a max . pressure

level in a hydraulic system.
setting range 290 – 5100 psi (20 – 350 bar)
Optional: Q
Remote control (DRG)
not included in
Pressure control for operation in parallel DP (see RE/RA 92 060) supply
Suitable to maintain max. pressure in a

system with multiple pumps in parallel
operation.
Optional: Q
Flow control (DPF)
Not included within the

Flow control FR (see RE/RA 92 060) scope of supply
This control maintains a fixed pressure drop X

over a flow valve, installed in the service line,
thus maintains a constant flow. Q
Optional:
Remote pressure control (FRG),
Orifice in X-chamber closed (FR1, FRG1)
Not included within the

scope of supply
Pressure- and flow control DFR (see RE/RA 92060)
This control maintains a constant flow
through a flow valve regardless of operating
conditions. Overriding this flow control is a
mechanically adjustable pressure control. Q
Optional:
Orifice in X-chamber closed (DFR1)
28
Summary of controls
Power control LR2 (RE/RA 92 064)
with hyperbolic curve
The power control holds the preset drive
power constant at a constant drive
speed.
Optional:
Q
Pressure control (LR2D),
-remotely adjustable (LR2G),
flow control (LR2F, LR2S),
hydraulic stroke limiter (LR2H)
mech. stroke limiter (LR2M); p
hydr. two-point adjustment (LR2Z);
elec. relief valve (LR2Y).
Power control LR3 (RE/RA 92 064)

with remote adjustment of control curve
This hyperbolic power control holds the preset

drive power constant; the power control curve is Q
remotely adjustable.
Optional:
Pressure control (LR3D),
-remotely adjustable (LR3G),
flow control (LR3F, LR3S)
hydr. stroke limiter (LR3H) p
mech. stroke limiter (LR3M);
hydr. two-point adjustment (LR3Z).
Hydraulic control LR2N (RE/RA 92 064)

pilot pressure dependent, normally at Vg min shown in actuated
position, ie. P is
With overriding power control.The displacement pressurized
is porportional to the pilot pressure in PSt. The
hyperbolic power control is overriding the pilot
pressure signal and holds the preset power
constant.
Optional: Pressure control (LR2DN),
-remotely adjustable (LR2GN)
power control curve remotely adjustable (LR3N,
LR3DN, LR3GN)
Q Vg
Vgmax
p pSt
29
Summary of controls
Manual control MA (RE/RA 92 072)
Stepless adjustment of displace-

ment by means of handwheel.
Vg
Vgmax
s
smax
Electrical motor control EM (RE/RA 92 072)
Stepless flow adjustment via an electric motor.

With a programmed sequence control, various
intermediate displacements can be selected by
means of built-on limit switches or a potentiometer. Vg
Vgmax
s
smax
Hydraulic control HW (RA 92 068; in preparation)

with rotary servo
Infinite adjustment of the pump flow as a function of

the angle position (sin β) of the pivot. β
Optional:
with hyperbolic horse power control (HWP)
Vgmax
Hydraulic control HD (RE/RA 92 080)

pilot pressure dependent
Stepless control of displacement dependent on

pilot pressure signal. The displacement is pro-
portional to the pilot pressure. Vg
Optional:
Pilot characteristics (HD1, HD2, HD3) Vgmax
Pressure control (HD.B),
- remotely adjustable (HD.GB)
Power control (HD1P) pSt
electr. pilot pressure control (HD1T)
30
Summary of controls
Hydraulc displacement control HM1 / HM2 / HM3 (see RE/RA 92 076)
flow related
The pump displacement is infinitely adjustable, dependent on
the control volume in port X1 and X2.
Application: – 2 point control
– basic control device for servo- or
proportional controls
Hydraulic displacement control HS / HS1 (see RE/RA 92 076)

HS3 (see RE 30021)
with servo or proportional valve
Flushingplate
The stepless displacement control is accom-
plished by means of a servo or proportional
valve with electric feedback of swivel angle. Vg
Electronic control Vgmax
Optional:
Servo valve (HS/HS1), Proportional valve (HS3)
Bypass valve (HS1K/HS3K);
without valves (HSE/HS1E/HS3E) U
The HS3P-control is equipped with built-on pressure Umax ; pHD
transducer, which makes it suitable for pressure-
and power control
Hydraulic displacement control EO1/EO2 (see RE/RA 92 076)

The stepless displacement control is accom-
plished with a proportional valve with electrical
feedback of swivel angle.
Electronic control
Optional: Vg
Bypass valve (EO1K/EO2K)
Without valves (EO1E/EO2E) Vgmax
U
Umax
Speed control DS1 (see RA 92 055)

secondary controlled
The speed control DS1 controls the Flushingplate

secundary unit (the motor) in such a manner,
that this motor supplies sufficient torque to
maintain the required speed. Hooked up to a n (+)
system with constant pressure, this torque is
proportional to displacement, thus to swivel
angle.
n2(min-1)
n2(min-1)
n (-)
31
Through-drive
Model A4VSO can be supplied with a through-drive Permissible through drive torque
capability, as shown in the ordering code on page 3. It is
recommended, that no more than three individual pumps are 1 T
TGes
total
2 T
TGes
total
coupled in series.
Included in the supply are: Coupling, fixing screws, seal and
an intermediate flange (if required).
TTD1D1 TTD2D2 TTD1D1 TTD2D2
Combination pumps
Two or more independent circuits are available to the user
when combination pumps are used Splined shaft, Z
1. If the combination pump consists of 2 units and if it is
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
supposed to be delivered as an assembled unit, the two
ordering codes are to be combined with the "+" symbol. Max. perm. through drive torque at mounting flange pump 1 (pump 1 + pump 2)
Example: TGes max lb-ft 329 583 1027 1478 2052 2915 4105 6157 8209
Nm (446) (790) (1392) (2004) (2782) (3952) (5566) (8348) (11130)
A4VSO 125 DR/22R – PB13K33 +
A4VSO 71 DR /10 R – PZB13 N00 TD1max lb-ft 164 291 513 739 1026 1457 2052 3078 4104
Permissible Nm (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (5565)
1.1 Please see data sheet RA 90 139 (in preparation) if a 1 through
drive torque TD2max lb-ft 164 291 513 739 1026 1457 2052 3078 4104
gear pump or radial piston pump is to be mounted as a Nm (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (5565)
combination pump at the factory. This data sheet lists TD1max lb-ft 164 291 513 739 1026 1457 2052 3078 4104
the pumps which can be mounted and they are included Permissible Nm (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (5565)
2 through
in the ordering code of the first pump. drive torque TD2max lb-ft 164 291 513 739 1026 1457 2052 3078 4104
Nm (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (5565)
When planning a pump combination with equal pump sizes
(i.e. 125+125) and controls HD.P, HD.T and HD.U it is Keyed shaft, P
necessary to consult us.
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Max. perm. through drive torque at mounting flange pump 1 (pump 1 + pump 2)
Ttot. max lb-ft 280 516 1027 1032 1696 2623 3835 5541 6965
(Nm) (380) (700) (1392) (1400) (2300) (3557) (5200) (7513) (9444)
TD1max lb-ft 164 291 513 739 1026 1457 2052 3078 4104
Permissible (Nm) (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (5565)
1 through
Permissible bending moment related to mounting flange drive torque TD2max lb-ft 116 225 513 293 670 1166 1783 2463 2860
of main pump (Nm) (157) (305) (696) (398) (909) (1581) (2417) (3339) (3879)
TD1max lb-ft 116 225 513 293 670 1166 1783 2463 2860
Permissible (Nm) (157) (305) (696) (398) (909) (1581) (2417) (3339) (3879)
2 through
drive torque TD2max lb-ft 164 291 513 739 1026 1457 2052 3078 4104
(Nm) (223) (395) (696) (1002) (1391) (1976) (2783) (4174) (5565)
m1, m2 lbs (kg) weight of pumps

l1, l2 in (mm) center to center distance
1 1
Tm = m1 • l1 • + m2 • l2 • [lb-ft]
12 12
( Tm = m1 • l1 •
1
102
+ m2 • l2 •
1
102
[Nm])
Size 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
Permissible bending Tm perm. lb-ft 1327 1475 3098 3098 6859 6859 11506 14382 14382
moment Nm (1800) (2000) (4200) (4200) (9300) (9300) (15600) (19500) (19500)
Perm. bending moment referred to Tmperm. lb-ft 132 148 310 310 686 686 1151 1438 1438
mounting flange of main pump at Nm (180) (200) (420) (420) (930) (930) (1560) (1950) (1950)
10 g 98.1 m/sec2
Weight m lbs 86 117 194 225 406 456 705 1014 1333
kg (39) (53) (88) (102) (184) (207) (320) (460) (605)
Center to center distance l1 in 4.72 5.51 6.69 7.08 8.26 8.66 9.05 10.23 11.41
mm (120) (140) (170) (180) (210) (220) (230) (260) (290)
32
Before finalizing your design, please request a certified drawing.
Unit dimensions for combination pumps

A4VSO + A4VSO
SAE Version
main pump AA4VSO 125 AA4VSO 250
2nd pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
AA4VSO 125 12.28 2.84 12.28 29.18
(312) (72) (312) (741)
AA4VSO 250 15.04 3.90 15.04 36.30
(382) (99) (382) (922)
Other combination pumps in SAE-version on request..
Metric Version
main pump A4VSO 40 A4VSO 71 A4VSO 125 A4VSO 180 A4VSO 250
2nd pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
A4VSO 40 8.94 2.40 8.94 21.93 10.00 2.44 8.94 23.03 12.20 1.46 8.94 24.25 12.52 2.09 8.94 25.20 14.96 2.01 8.94 27.56
(227) (61) (227) (557) (254) (62) (227) (585) (310) (37) (227) (616) (318) (53) (227) (640) (380) (51) (227) (700)
A4VSO 71 – – – – 10.00 2.44 10.00 24.17 12.20 2.48 10.00 26.42 12.52 3.11 10.00 27.36 14.96 2.01 10.00 28.70
– – – – (254) (62) (254) (614) (310) (63) (254) (671) (318) (79) (254) (695) (380) (51) (254) (729)
A4VSO 125 – – – – – – – – 12.20 2.72 12.20 28.90 12.52 3.35 12.20 29.84 14.96 3.50 12.20 32.44
– – – – – – – – (310) (69) (310) (734) (318) (85) (310) (758) (380) (89) (310) (824)
A4VSO 180 – – – – – – – – – – – – 12.52 3.35 12.52 30.79 14.96 3.50 12.52 33.38
– – – – – – – – – – – – (318) (85) (318) (782) (380) (89) (318) (848)
A4VSO 250 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 14.96 3.50 14.96 35.74
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – (380) (89) (380) (908)
main pump A4VSO 355 A4VSO 500 A4VSO 750 A4VSO 1000
2nd pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
A4VSO 40 15.47 2.64 8.94 28.70 17.36 2.52 8.94 30.47 18.62 3.23 8.94 32.44 21.57 * 8.93 *
(393) (67) (227) (729) (441) (64) (227) (774) (473) (82) (227) (824) (548) (227)
A4VSO 71 15.47 2.64 10.00 29.84 17.36 2.52 10.00 31.61 18.62 3.23 10.00 33.58 21.57 * 10.00 *
(393) (67) (254) (758) (441) (64) (254) (803) (473) (82) (254) (853) (548) (254)
A4VSO 125 15.47 4.13 12.20 33.58 17.36 2.52 12.20 33.86 18.62 3.23 12.20 35.83 21.57 * 12.20 *
(393) (105) (310) (853) (441) (64) (310) (860) (473) (82) (310) (910) (548) (310)
A4VSO 180 15.47 4.13 12.52 34.52 17.36 2.52 12.52 34.80 18.62 3.23 12.52 36.77 21.57 * 12.52 *
(393) (105) (318) (877) (441) (64) (318) (884) (473) (82) (318) (934) (548) (318)
A4VSO 250 15.47 4.13 14.96 36.89 17.36 3.94 14.46 38.58 18.62 4.65 14.96 40.55 21.57 * 14.46 *
(393) (105) (380) (937) (441) (100) (380) (980) (473) (118) (380) (1030) (548) (380)
A4VSO 355 15.47 4.13 15.47 38.03 17.36 3.94 15.47 39.72 18.62 4.65 15.47 41.69 21.57 * 15.47 *
(393) (105) (393) (966) (441) (100) (393) (1009) (473) (118) (393) (1059) (548) (393)
A4VSO 500 – – – – 17.36 5.87 17.36 43.70 18.62 6.58 17.36 45.67 21.57 * 17.36 *
– – – – (441) (149) (441) (1110) (473) (167) (441) (1160) (548) (441)
A4VSO 750 – – – – – – – – 18.62 7.17 18.62 48.00 21.57 * 18.62 *
– – – – – – – – (473) (182) (473) (1219) (548) (473)
A4VSO 1000 – – – – – – – – – – – – 21.57 7.08 21.57 53.58 * on request
– – – – – – – – – – – – (548) (180) (548) (1361)
33
Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3 Before finalizing your design, please request a certified drawing.
Dimensions in inches and millimeters ( ).
Unit dimensions of combination pumps

A4VSO + A10VSO
SAE Version
main pump AA4VSO 40 AA4VSO 71 AA4VSO 125 AA4VSO 180 AA4VSO 250
AA10VSO 28 9.02 2.48 6.46 19.61 10.08 2.66
6.46 20.87 12.28 1.46 6.46 21.85 12.6 2.10 6.46 22.81 15.04 2.01 6.46 25.16
(229) (63) (164) (498) (256) (68)
(164) (530) (312) (37) (164) (555) (320) (54) (164) (580) (382) (51) (164) (639)
AA10VSO 45 10.08 2.68
7.24 21.58 15.04 2.01 7.24 25.87
(256) (68)
(184) (548) (382) (51) (184) (657)
AA10VSO 71 10.08 2.64
8.54 22.84 12.28 2.64 8.54 25.04 12.6 3.27 8.54 25.99 15.04 2.01 8.54 27.17
(256) (67)
(217) (580) (312) (67) (217) (636) (320) (83) (217) (660) (382) (51) (217) (690)
AA10VSO 100 12.28 2.64 10.83 27.75 15.04 2.79 10.83 30.66
(312) (67) (275) (705) (382) (71) (275) (779)
Other combination pumps in SAE-version on request.
Metric Version
main pump A4VSO 40 A4VSO 71 A4VSO 125 A4VSO 180 A4VSO 250
A10VSO 18 8.94 1.42 5.70 18.03 10.00 1.46 5.70 19.13 12.20 1.46 5.70 21.34 12.52 2.09 5.70 22.28 14.96 2.01 5.70 24.65
(227) (36) (145) (458) (254) (37) (145) (486) (310) (37) (145) (542) (318) (53) (145) (566) (380) (51) (145) (626)
A10VSO 28 8.94 2.48 6.46 19.52 10.00 1.46 6.46 19.56 12.20 1.46 6.46 21.77 12.52 2.09 6.46 22.72 14.96 2.01 6.46 25.08
(227) (63) (164) (496) (254) (37) (164) (497) (310) (37) (164) (553) (318) (53) (164) (577) (380) (51) (164) (637)
A10VSO 45 8.94 2.48 7.24 20.23 10.00 2.24 7.24 21.06 12.20 2.24 7.24 23.26 12.52 2.87 7.24 24.21 14.96 2.01 7.24 25.78
(227) (63) (184) (514) (254) (57) (184) (535) (310) (57) (184) (591) (318) (73) (184) (615) (380) (51) (184) (655)
A10VSO 71 – – – – 10.00 2.64 8.54 22.76 12.20 2.67 8.54 24.99 12.52 3.31 8.54 25.95 14.96 2.71 8.54 27.79
– – – – (254) (67) (217) (578) (310) (68) (217) (635) (318) (84) (217) (659) (380) (69) (217) (706)
A10VSO 100 – – – – – – – – 12.20 2.93 10.83 27.97 12.52 3.56 10.83 28.92 14.96 3.03 10.83 30.82
– – – – – – – – (310) (74.5) (275) (710.5) (318) (90.5) (275) (734.5) (380) (77) (275) (783)
A10VSO 140 – – – – – – – – – – – – 12.52 * 10.83 * 14.96 3.50 10.83 31.73
– – – – – – – – – – – – (318) * (275) * (380) (89) (275) (806)
main pump A4VSO 355 A4VSO 500 A4VSO 750
2nd pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
A10VSO 18 15.47 2.64 5.70 25.79 17.36 2.52 5.70 27.56 18.62 3.23 5.70 29.53
(393) (67) (145) (655) (441) (64) (145) (700) (473) (82) (145) (750)
A10VSO 28 15.47 2.64 6.46 26.22 17.36 2.52 6.46 28.00 18.62 3.23 6.46 29.96
(393) (67) (164) (666) (441) (64) (164) (711) (473) (82) (164) (761)
A10VSO 45 15.47 2.64 7.24 26.93 17.36 2.52 7.24 28.70 18.62 3.23 7.24 30.67
(393) (67) (184) (684) (441) (64) (184) (729) (473) (82) (184) (779)
A10VSO 71 15.47 3.34 8.54 28.93 17.36 2.52 8.54 30.00 18.62 3.23 8.54 31.97
(393) (85) (217) (735) (441) (64) (217) (762) (473) (82) (217) (812)
A10VSO 100 15.47 3.66 10.83 31.96 17.36 3.54 10.83 33.74 18.62 4.25 10.83 35.71
(393) (93) (275) (812) (441) (90) (275) (857) (473) (108) (275) (907)
A10VSO 140 15.47 4.13 10.83 32.87 17.36 3.50 10.83 34.13 18.62 4.21 10.83 36.10
(393) (105) (275) (835) (441) (89) (275) (867) (473) (107) (275) (917) * on demand
34
Dimensions - Through drive

Flange ISO 125, 4-bolt; for mounting of axial piston pump A4VSO/H/G 40 - splined shaft "Z"
Ordering Code K31 Section A-B
60)
0(1
6.3
Size to face of pump mounting flange

of main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
40 7.44 (189) 3.90 (99) – 2.28 (58) M12; 0.94 (24) deep –
71 8.50 (216) 3.94 (100) – 2.17 (55) M12; 0.94 (24) deep –
125 10.43 (265) 3.23 (82) 0.31 (8) 1.46 (37) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 5.91 (150)
180 10.43 (265) 4.17 (106) – 1.46 (37) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 6.30 (160)
250 12.87 (327) 4.09 (104) 0.08 (2) 1.89 (48) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 7.87 (200)
355 12.87 (327) 5.24 (133) – 1.89 (48) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 8.66 (220)
500 14.37 (365) 5.51 (140) 0.55 (14) 2.36 (60) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 9.45 (240)
Flange ISO 140, 4-bolt; for mounting of axial piston pump A4VSO/H/G 71 - splined shaft "Z"
Ordering code K33
Section A-B
80)
8(1
7.0
to face of pump mounting flange

Size
71 8.50 (216) 3.94 (100) – 1.73 (44) M12; 0.94 (24) deep –
125 10.43 (265) 4.25 (108) – 1.77 (45) M12; 0.98 (25) deep –
180 10.43 (265) 5.20 (132) – 1.77 (45) M12; 0.71 (18) deep –
250 12.87 (327) 4.09 (104) 0.08 (2) 1.89 (48) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 7.87 (200)
500 14.37 (365) 5.51 (140) 0.59 (15) 2.36 (60) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 9.45 (240)
35
Flange ISO 160, 4-bolt; for mounting of axial piston pump A4VSO/H/G 125 or 180 - splined shaft "Z"
Ordering Code K34
Section A-B
00)
7(2
7.8

of main pump A1 A2 A3 A4
125 10.43 (265) 4.49 (114) 2.28 (58) M16; 1.22 (31) deep
180 10.43 (265) 5.43 (138) 2.09 (53) M16; 1.26 (32) deep
250 12.87 (327) 5.59 (142) 2.36 (60) M16; 1.26 (32) deep
355 12.87 (327) 6.73 (171) 2.36 (60) M16; 1.26 (32) deep
500 14.37 (365) 5.51 (140) 2.36 (60) M16; 0.94 (24) deep
Flange ISO 224, 4-bolt; for mounting of axial piston pupm A4VSO/H/G 250 - splined shaft "Z"
Ordering Code K35
Section A-B
)
280
02(
11.

Size
250 12.87 (327) 5.59 (142) 2.95 (75) M20; 1.46 (37) deep
355 12.87 (327) 6.73 (171) 2.95 (75) M20
500 14.37 (365) 6.93 (176) 2.91 (74) M20; 1.42 (36) deep
36
Flange ISO 224, 4-bolt; for mounting of axial piston pump A4VSO/G 355 - splined shaft "Z"
Ordering code K77
Section A-B
)
280
02(
11.
Size of main pump 355

Ordering code K43
Section A-B
)
60
.17(3
14
Size
500 14.37 (365) 8.86 (225) 3.58 (91) M20; 1.02 (26) deep
750 15.63 (397) 9.57 (243) 3.58 (91) M20; 1.02 (26) deep
37
Ordering code K76
Main pump nominal size 750
Section A-B
)
50
.72(4
17
ISO 400, 8-hole; for mounting a second A4VSO/G 1000 (splined shaft)
Ordering code K88
Main pump nominal size 1000
3.89
(99)
2.08
(53)
N100x3x30x32x8H
DIN 5480
ø15.74+0.003
+0.001
M20; 30 deep +0.10
(ø400 +0.03 )
)
50
.72(4
17
0.78
15.55 (395) (20)
10.24 (260)
28.66 (728) to face of pump mounting
flange
38
ISO 80, 2-hole; for mounting an A10VSO 18 (splined shaft S) - see RA 92712
Ordering code KB2
A4
45 °
A6
A5 Splined 19-4 (SAE A-B)

3/4", 16/32 DP; 11T
ø3.14+0.001
+0.0007
9) +0.05
(10 (ø80 +0.02 )
9
4.2
0.43
(11)
11
A1 A2 A3
to face of pump mounting
flange
Size,
main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
125 10.43 (265) 3.23 (82) 0.45 (11.5) 0.75 (19.1) M10; 0.47 (12) deep 0.84 (21.4)
ISO 100, 2-hole; for mounting an A10VSO 28 (splined shaft S) - see RA 92711 (in preparation)
Ordering code KB3 A 4
45 °
A6
A5 Splined 22-4 (SAE B)

7/8", 16/32 DP; 13T
+0,05
+0,02
ø3.93+0.001
+0.0007
) +0.05
(ø100 +0.02 )
ø100
40
1(1
5.5
Size 40
0.39
(10)
A1 A2 A3
flange
Size,
40 7.44 (189) 3.98 (101) – 2.17 (55) M12; 1.02 (26) deep 0.79 (20.3)
39
Ordering code KB4
A4
45 °
A7
A5 Splined 25-4 (SAE B-B)

1", 16/32 DP; 15T
ø3.93+0.001
+0.0007
A6
+0.05
0) (ø100 +0.02 )
14
1(
5.5
0.39
(10)
10
A1 A2 A3
flange
Size,
main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7
250 12.87 (327) 4.09 (104) 0.11 (3) 1.08 (27.5) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 7.87 (200) 0.82 (20.9)
Ordering code KB5
A3
45°
A5
A4 Splined 32-4 (SAE C)

1 1/4", 12/24 DP; 14T
ø4.92+0.001
+0.0007
) +0.05
(ø125 +0.02 )
80
9(1
7.0
0.39
(10)
A1 A2
flange
Size,
main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
125 10.43 (265) 4.44 (113) 1.50 (38.1) M16; 0.94 (24) deep 0.93 (23.7)
180 10.43 (265) 5.39 (137) 1.50 (38.1) M16; 0.94 (24) deep 0.93 (23.7)
40
ISO 180, 4-hole; for mounting an A10VSO 140 (splined shaft S) - see RE 92711 (in preparation)
Ordering code KB7
45°
A3
A5
A4 Splined 44-4 (SAE D)
1 3/4", 8/16 DP; 13T
ø7.08+0.002
+0.0007
+0.07
)
(ø180 +0.02 )
24
.82(2
8
Size 250
0.39
(10)
A1 A2
flange
Amplifier for valve Model 4WRA 6…, Series 1X = 17
Amplifier for valve Model 4WRA 10…, Series 1X = 18
Size,
main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
250 12.87 (327) 5.59 (142) 3.22 (82) M16; 1.25 (32) deep 0.42 (10.8)
355 12.87 (327) 6.73 (171) 3.22 (82) M16; 1.25 (32) deep 0.42 (10.8)
Flange SAE 82-2 (SAE A, 2-hole); for mounting an external gear pump G2 (see RA 10030) or,
of an internal gear pump 1 PF2GC2/3-1X/XXXXR07MU2 (see RA 10215)
Ordering code K01 0.40
4.19 (106.5)
(10.3)
)
ø3.250+0.0007
+0.001
+0.02
(ø82.55 +0.05
Size 500
Size 500
5.51
(140) to face of pump mounting flange
0.39 (10)
Size,
40 7.44 (189) 2.91 (74) – 1.57 (40) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 5.12 (130)
71 8.50 (216) 2.95 (75) 0.08 (2) 1.46 (37) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 5.51 (140)
125 10.43 (265) 3.23 (82) 0.31 (8) 1.54 (39) M10; 0.79 (20) deep 5.91 (150)
180 10.43 (265) 4.17 (106) – 1.10 (28) M10; 0.59 (15) deep –
250 12.87 (327) 4.09 (104) 0.12 (3) 1.97 (50) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 7.87 (200)
355 12.87 (327) 5.24 (133) – 1.97 (50) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 8.66 (220)
500 14.37 (365) 5.51 (140) 0.47 (12) 2.44 (62) M10; 0.59 (15) deep –
750 14.37 (365) 7.48 (190) – 2.44 (62) M10; 0.59 (15) deep –
Pay attention to correct hydraulic fluid (see RA 10 030 or 10 215)
41
Flange 152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump AA4VSO/G 125 - splined shaft "S"
Ordering Code K17
Section A-B
Size of main pump:

AA4VSO 125
Flange 165-4 (SAE E, 4-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump AA4VSO/G 250 - splined shaft "S"
Ordering code K18
Section A-B
Size of main pump:

AA4VSO 250 to face of pump mounting flange
42
Flange 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump AA10VSO 28 - parallel keyed shaft "K" (see RA 92 711)
Ordering code K03
Section A-B
Size
of main pump A1 A2 A4 to face of pump mounting flange
40 11.50 (292.1) – 1.41(36)
71 12.74 (324) – 1.28(33)
125 13.74 (349) 0.32 (8) 1.43(36)
180 14.7 (373) – 1.43(36)
250 17.05 (433) 0.32 (8) 1.98(50)
Flange 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump AA10VSO 45 - parallel keyed shaft "K" (see RA 92 711)
Ordering code K05
Section A-B

Size
of main pump A1 A2
71 12.76 (324) 1.48(38)
250 17.05 (433) 2.00 (51)
43
Flange 127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump AA10VSO 71 - parallel keyed shaft " K" (see RA 92 711)
Ordering code K08
Section A-B
Size
of main pump A1 A2
71 12.72(323) 2.106(54) to face of pump mounting flange
125 14.92(379) 2.582(65)
180 15.87 (403) 1.91 (48)
250 17.05 (433) 2.00 (51)
Flange 127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump AA10VO 100 - parallel keyed shaft "K" (see RA 92 711)
Ordering code K38
Section A-B
Size
of main pump A1 A2
125 14.92(379) 2.13(54)
250 17.83 (453) 2.28 (60)
44
Flange SAE 82-2, (SAE A, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump A10VSO 18 - splined shaft "S" (see RA 92 712)
Ordering code K52
Section A-B
Splined hub 3/4"

16/32 DP; 11T

40 7.44 (189) 2.91 (74) – 1.57 (40) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 5.12 (130)
71 8.50 (216) 2.95 (75) 0.08 (2) 1.46 (37) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 5.51 (140)
125 10.43 (265) 3.23 (82) 0.31 (8) 1.54 (39) M10; 0.79 (20) deep 5.91 (150)
180 10.43 (265) 4.17 (106) – 1.10 (28) M10; 0.59 (15) deep –
250 12.87 (327) 4.09 (104) 0.12 (3) 1.97 (50) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 7.87 (200)
355 12.87 (327) 5.24 (133) – 1.97 (50) M10; 0.59 (15) deep 8.66 (220)
500 14.37 (365) 5.51 (140) 0.47 (12) 2.44 (62) M10; 0.59 (15) deep –
Flange SAE 101-2, (SAE B, 2-bolt); for mounting of gear pump G3 (see RA 10 039) or
for mounting of axial piston pump A10VO 28 - splined shaft "S" (see RA 92 701)
Ordering code K02
Section A-B

40 7.44 (189) 3.98 (101) – 2.52 (64) M12; 1.02 (26) deep –
71 8.50 (216) 4.17 (106) – 2.52 (64) M12; 1.18 (30) deep –
125 10.43 (265) 3.23 (82) 0.31 (8) 1.54 (39) M12; 0.59 (15) deep 5.91 (150)
180 10.43 (265) 4.17 (106) – 1.54 (39) M12; 0.59 (15) deep 6.30 (160)
250 12.87 (327) 4.09 (104) 0.12 (3) 1.97 (50) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 7.87 (200)
355 12.87 (327) 5.24 (133) – 1.97 (50) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 8.66 (220)
500 14.37 (365) 5.51 (140) – 2.44 (62) M12; 0.71 (18) deep 9.45 (240)
Pay attention to correct hydraulic fluid for mounting of gear pump G3 (see RA 10 039)
45
Flange SAE 101-2, (SAE B, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump A10VO 45 - splined shaft "S" (see RA 92 701)
or for mounting of internal gear pump 1PF2GC4-1X/0XXXR07MU2 (see RA 10 215)
Ordering code K04
Section A-B
Size
125 13.66 (347) 0.35 (9) 1.91 (48.4) M12; 0.59 (15) deep
250 16.97 (431) 0.41 (10.4) 2.40 (61) M12; 0.71 (18) deep Pay attention to correct hydraulic fluid for mounting
355 18.11 (460) 0.41 (10.4) 2.06 (52.4) M12; 0.71 (18) deep of internal gear pump (see RA 10 215)
Flange SAE 101-2, (SAE B, 2-bolt); for mounting of internal gear pump 1PF2GC5-1X/0XXXR07MU2 (see RA 10 215)
Ordering code K06
Section A-B
Size
71 12.64 (321) 0.35 (9) 2.34 (59.5) M12 Pay attention to correct hydraulic fluid for mounting
125 14.88 (378) 0.35 (9) 2.23 (56.6) M12; 0.71 (18) deep of internal gear pump (see RA 10 215)
46
Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3 Before finalizing your design, please request a certified drawing.
Dimensions in inches and millimeters ( ).
Flange SAE 127-2, (SAE C, 2-bolt); for mounting of axial piston pump A10VO 100 - splined shaft "S" (see RA 92 701) or
mounting of internal gear pump 1PF2GC6-1X/XXXXR07MU2 (see RA 10 215)
Ordering code K24
Section A-B
Sizes 125, 180
1)
(18
7.13
Size
125 14.84 (377) 0.35 (9) 2.91 (74) M16; 0.94 (24) deep
180 15.79 (401) 0.39 (10) 2.83 (72) M16; 0.94 (24) deep
250 17.76 (451) 0.41 (10.5) 2.99 (76) M16; 0.79 (20) deep
Flange ø 63 (mm) metric, 4-bolt; for mounting of radial piston pump R4 - keyed shaft (see RA 11 263),
Ordering code K57
Section A-B

Size
of main pump A1 A2 A3 Pay attention to correct hydraulic fluid for mounting of
40* 7.44 (189) 3.94 (100) 2.40 (61) radial piston pump (see RA 11 263)
71* 8.50 (216) 4.06 (103) 2.20 (56)
125 10.43 (265) 4.33 (110) 2.44 (62) * At main pump A4VSO, sizes 40 and 71 with control devices LR.D;
250 12.87 (327) 5.20 (132) 3.07 (78) LR.S or LR.G only possible mounting of a radial piston pump R4-3.
47
With through drive shaft, without hub, without intermediate flange, covered.
Ordering code K99 Section A-B Size of O-Ring
main pump (not included
in supply)
Sizes of main 40 99x3 78 SH A
pump 40…355 71 PRP 245 7509
125 119x3 78 SH A
180 119x3 78 SH A
250 162x3 78 SH A
355 162x3 78 SH A
Size of Splined shaft

main pump DIN 5480
40 W25x1.25x18x9g
71 W30x1.25x22x9g
125 W35x1.25x26x9g
Drawing appropriate 180 W35x1.25x26x9g
to size 71 250 W42x1.25x32x9g
Splined shaft 355 W42x1.25x32x9g
DIN 5480 s. table 500 W55x1.25x42x9g
Sizes of main
pump 500
(Drawing
without cover)
Section A-B
O-Ring
165x3 78SHA
(included in supply)
19.88(505) to face of pump mounting flange
Size of 20.47(520) to face of pump mounting flange

main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
40 10.35(263) 0.39(10) 0.30(7.5) 2.02(51.3) M12x25(mm) 1.46(37) 1.46(37) 0 0.71(18)
71 11.46(291) 0.39(10) 0.30(7.5) 1.89(48) M12x25(mm) 1.67(42.3) 1.77(45) 0.61(15.4) 0.71(18)
125 13.66(347) 0.47(12) 0.34(8.5) 1.96(49.7) M14x30(mm) 1.85(47) 1.85(47) 0 0.71(18)
180 14.61(371) 0.47(12) 0.34(8.5) 1.96(49.7) M14x30(mm) 1.85(47) 1.85(47) 0 0.71(18)
250 16.97(431) 0.59(15) 0.47(12) 2.42(61.4) M20x40(mm) 2.48(63) 2.48(63) 0 1.02(26)
355 18.11(460) 0.59(15) 0.47(12) 2.42(61.4) M20x40(mm) 2.48(63) 2.48(63) 0 1.02(26)
Size of
main pump A10 A11 A12 DIA (ø) A13 DIA (ø) A14 DIA (ø) A15 DIA (ø) A16 A17
40 0.35(9) 0.09(2.3) 4.65(118) 4.1334/4.1325(105g6) 3.84(97.6) 2.05(52) 1.73(44) 0.55(14)
71 0.35(9) 0.11(2.7) 5.12(130) 4.5665/4.5656(116g6) 4.19(106.4) 2.48(63) 1.50(38) 0.63(16)
125 0.33(8.5) 0.09(2.3) 5.39(137) 4.8813/4.8803(124g6) 4.57(116) 2.76(70) 1.81(46) 0.87(22)
180 0.33(8.5) 0.09(2.3) 5.39(137) 4.8813/4.8803(124g6) 4.57(116) 2.76(70) 1.81(46) 00.98(25)
250 0.35(9) 0.09(2.3) 7.07(180) 6.4955/6.4945(165g6) 6.18(157) 3.46(88) 2.52(64) 1.20(30.5)
355 0.35(9) 0.09(2.3) 7.07(180) 6.4955/6.4945(165g6) 6.18(157) 3.46(88) 2.52(64) 1.34(34)
48
Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3 Dimensions in inches and millimeters.
Flange SAE 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt); for mounting of gear pump G4 (see RA 10 042)
Ordering code K68
Section A-B
)
46
5(1
5.7
Size
of main pump A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
40 11.42 (290) 0.41 (10.3) 0.39 (10) 1.85 (47) M12
71 12.68 (322) 0.41 (10.3) 0.39 (10) 2.44 (62) M12
125 13.98 (355) 0.39 (10) 0.35 (9) 1.93 (49) M12; 0.59 (15) deep
180 14.61 (371) 0.41 (10.3) 0.39 (10) 1.93 (49) M12; 0.71 (18) deep
500 19.88 (505) 0.41 (10.3) 0.39 (10) 3.07 (78) M12
Pay attention to correct hydraulic fluid for mounting

of gear pump (see RA 10 042)
Model list (short delivery times), in case of an order please state type and part no.
Model Ident. no. Model Ident. no.
A4VSO40DFR/10X-PPB13N00 902310 A4VSO180DFR/22R-PPB13N00 934730

A4VSO40DR/10X-PPB13N00 955019 A4VSO180DR/22R-PPB13N00 934611
A4VSO40DRG/10X-PPB13N00 901396 A4VSO180DRG/22R-PPB13N00 949541
A4VSO40LR2/10R-PPB13N00 903578 A4VSO180LR2/22R-PPB13N00 939769
A4VSO40LR2G/10R-PPB13N00 905023 A4VSO180LR2G/22R-PPB13N00 935375
A4VSO180LR2N/22R-PPB13N00 934974
A4VSO71DFR/10X-PPB13N00 931535
A4VSO71DR/10X-PPB13N00 933007 A4VSO250DFR/30R-PPB13N00 985509
A4VSO71DRG/10X-PPB13N00 942715 A4VSO250DR/30R-PPB13N00 974769
A4VSO71LR2/10R-PPB13N00 904555 A4VSO250DRG/30R-PPB13N00 976965
A4VSO71LR2D/10R-PPB13N00 905142 A4VSO250LR2/30R-PPB13N00 985297
A4VSO250LR2G/30R-PPB13N00 977295
A4VSO125DFR/22R-PPB13N00 939924 A4VSO250LR2N/30R-PPB13N00 978355
A4VSO125DR/22R-PPB13N00 937693
A4VSO125DR/22R-VPB13N00 938745
A4VSO125LR2/22R-PPB13N00 936376
A4VSO125LR2G/22R-PPB13N00 940247
A4VSO125LR2N/22R-PPB13N00 940251
49
Notes
50
Notes
51
Notes
Bosch Rexroth Corporation © 2004 Bosch Rexroth Corporation

Mobile Hydraulics All rights reserved. Neither this document, nor any part of it, may be reproduced,
Axial & Radial Piston Units duplicated, circulated or disseminated, whether by copy, electronic format or any
8 Southchase Court other means, without the prior consent and authorization of Bosch Rexroth
Fountain Inn, SC 29644-9018 Corporation.
USA The data and illustrations in this brochure/data sheet are intended only to
Telephone (864) 967-2777 describe or depict the products. No representation or warranty, either express or
Facsimile (864) 967-8900 implied, relating to merchantability or fitness for intended use, is given or
www.boschrexroth-us.com intended by virtue of the information contained in this brochure/data sheet. The
information contained in this brochure/data sheet in no way relieves the user of
its obligation to insure the proper use of the products for a specific use or
application. All products contained in this brochure/data sheet are subject to
normal wear and tear from usage.
Subject to change.
52
RA 23 178/06.98
4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2 Directional Control Valves
Model WE 6.. /E, Series 6X RA
with wet pin AC or DC solenoids 23 178/06.98
up to 5100 PSI up to 21 GPM
Size 6 (D 03) (350 bar) (80 L/min) Replaces: 02.96
Features:
– Direct operated, solenoid controlled directional spool valve,
heavy duty construction
– Mounting pattern to ISO/DIS 4401-3 NFPA T3.5. MR1 and
ANSI B 93.7 D03
Subplates see data sheet RA 45 052
– Removable coils for quick replacement, or conversion,
in AC or DC voltages
– Dual frequency solenoids AC voltage with 50 or 60 Hz operation
– Individual electrical connectors
– Wet pin core tubes, with high pressure tank capacity, standard.
H/A 3972/93
Model 4 WE 6...6X/EG 24 N9Z45
Functional description
2 5 1 3 5 2
A B
Model 4 WE 6 E 6X/...E
6 4 A T B 4 6
(P)
Directional control valves Model WE 6 are solenoid operated
directional spool valves. They control the start, stop and direction Model 4 WE 6 .. 6X/ O E... (only for spools A, C and D)
of flow. This design permits 2 switching positions with 2 solenoids and no
They consist of housing (1), one or two solenoids (2), control spool detent. When the solenoids are de-energised there is no defined
(3) return spring(s) (4). neutral position.
Unengaged, control spool (3) is held centered, by means of return Model 4 WE 6 ..6X/ OF E... (only for spools A, C and D)
spring(s) (4) (except for detented spool). Control spool (3) is shifted This design permits 2 switching positions with 2 solenoids and
by wet pin solenoids (2). To guarantee satisfactory operation, detent. Energizing either solenoid, however, only one at a time,
ensure that the solenoid core tube is filled with oil. Cycling the for approx. 100 ms is sufficient to shift spool (3) and maintain a
valve will typically ensure core tubes have filled with oil. position on the detent.
The force of solenoid (2) extends push-pin (5) against control spool Orifice Insert (Model 4 WE 6..6X/E…/B..)
(3), moving it left or right from a neutral position. This provides flow
To limit maximum flows, orifice inserts are optionally available.
from P to A and B to T or P to B and A to T.
Primarily, the orifice insert is intended to prevent flow rates in
When solenoid (2) is de-energized, control spool (3) returns to excess of the maximum performance data of the valve (see page
center by return springs (4). 4). The insert is installed in port “P”, however, will fit any of the
Manual override (6) allows activating the control spool (3) without valve ports.
electrical power. Example: 4 WE 6E 6X/EG24NDA/B12 = 1.2 mm orifice in port “P”.
P
R ring 9.81 x 1.5 x 1.78
1/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Ordering codes
2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 15 19 22 23
WE 6 6X E *
3 service ports =3 Further details
4 service ports =4 in clear text
Size 6 =6 No code = NBR seals,

for petroleum oil (HM, HL,HLP
Spool e.g. C, E, EA, EB etc. 1) V= FPM seals ,
For possibilities, see below for phosphate ester (HFD-R)
No code = Without cartridge throttle

Series 60 to 69 = 6X B 08 = Throttle Ø 0.031 (0.8 mm)
(60 to 69: externally interchangeable B 10 = Throttle Ø 0.039 (1.0 mm)
B 12 = Throttle Ø 0.047 (1.2 mm)
Spring return = No code
Without spring return = O Applicable if flow exceeds
performance limit of valve,
Without spring return but with detent = OF
installed in P port
High performance solenoid =E
Type of electrical connection to data sheet RA 08 000
wet pin (oil-immersed) with removable coil
Direct solenoid connections
24 V DC = G24 K4 3) = Without angled plug but with cap
110 V AC 50/60 Hz or = W110 Z45 = Angled plug
Z55 = Large angled plug
120 V 60 Hz
Z55L = Large angled plug with lamp
96/196 V DC solenoid with built-in rectifier, Central solenoid connections
angled plug, for connection to 110 V/220 V = W110R DA = Terminal box with 2 1/2" NPT conduit conn.
AC, frequency-independent DAL = Terminal box with two 1/2" NPT conduit
(possible with Z55 or conduit box) = W220R connections and light(s)
For other ordering codes for different voltages and frequencies DZA = Terminal box with angled plug
see page 3 DZAL = Terminal box with angled plug and light(s)
ANSI B 93.55 M plug-pin type
With protected manual override (Standard) = N9 connectors (without female end)
Covered manual override, with rubber boot = N DK23 = Terminal box with 3-pin conn. (single solenoid)
Without manual override = No code DK25 = Terminal box with 5-pin conn. (dbl. solenoid)
3)
DK23L= Terminal w/ 3-pin conn. & light(s) (sgl. sol.)
Angled plugs separate order (see RA 08 000)
4)
DK25L= Terminal w/ 5-pin conn. & light(s) (dbl. sol.)
Surge suppression, 24VDC only,
DK…L2 = Terminal box w/surge suppression4)
Example: 4WE6E6X/E924N9DK25L2
Symbols
1) Example: Spool E with switching position "a"
Order code 4 WE6 EA•6X/EW 110 NZ45
A B A B A B A B 2) Symbol E1–: P – A/B pre-opening
b b b b b b
P T P T P T P T
Caution: Be aware of pressure
A B A B A B A B intensification in differential cylinders
b b b .../O.. = A.1)
P T P T P T P T =M
A B A B A B A B
b b b
=.B
b b .../OF.. b =P
P T P T P T P T
=A = E 1)
=Q
= E1-2)
=C =F =R
=D =G =T
A B A B
b b b =H =U
P T P T
=B =J =V
=Y =L =W
2/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Technical data (For applications outside these parameters please consult us)
General
Installation position Optional
Ambient temperature, max. t °F (°C) 122 (50)
Weight Single solenoid valve m lbs (kg) 3.2 (1.45)
Valve with 2 solenoids m lbs (kg) 4.3 (1.95)
Hydraulic
Operating pressure Port A, B, P p PSI (bar) 5100 (350)
Port T p PSI (bar) up to 3050 (210) DC; up to 2320 (160) AC
Where symbols A and B occur, port T must be employed as a
drain port if the operating pressure is above the permitted tank
pressure .
Flow, max. qV GPM (L/min) up to 21 (80) DC; up to 15.8 (60) AC
Cross section of flow (switching position 0):
for symbol Q A in2 (mm2) approx. 6 % of nominal cross section
for symbol W A in2 (mm2) approx. 3 % of nominal cross section
Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524,
Phosphate ester (HFD-R)
Hydraulic fluid t °F (°C) – 22 to 176 (– 30 to 80) (NBR seals)
Temperature range – 4 to 176 (– 20 to 80) (FPM seals)
Viscosity range ν SUS (mm2/s) 35 to 2320 (2.8 to 500)
Fluid cleanliness Maximum permissible degree of contamination of fluid to
ISO 4406 Class 18/15. We therefore recommend a filter
with a minimum retention rate of ß10 ≥ 75.
Electrical
Type of voltage DC voltage AC voltage
1
Available voltages ) (for ordering codes U V 12, 24, 42, 60, 96, 110, 42, 110, 120, 127, 220, 240
for AC voltages see below) 180, 196, 220 50/60 Hz
Power consumption P W 30 –
Holding current P VA – 50
In-rush current P VA – 220
Duty cycle continuous continuous
Shifting time to ON T ms 25 to 45 10 to 20
ISO 6403 OFF T ms 10 to 25 15 to 40
Shifting frequency Sw/h up to 15000 up to 7200
Insulation Exceeds NEMA class B Exceeds NEMA class B
Coil temperature t °F (°C) up to 302 (150) up to 356 (180)
1
) Special voltages on request
When making the electrical connection, the ground
screw ( PE) must be connected to earth ground
Note on AC solenoids 42 V, 50 Hz 127 V, 50 Hz

Order codes
Order codes
These solenoids may be used with 2 or 3 voltage/frequency W42 W127

42 V, 60 Hz 127 V, 60 Hz
relationships:
e.g. solenoid type W110 for 110 V, 50 Hz 110 V, 50 Hz 220 V, 50 Hz
110 V, 60 Hz W110 110 V, 60 Hz W220 220 V, 60 Hz
120 V, 60 Hz 120 V, 60 Hz 240 V, 60 Hz
3/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Directional valve solenoid power limits, measured at ν = 190 SUS (41 mm2/s) and t = 122 °F (50°C)
Because of silting, the shifting function of the valves is depen- If only one direction of flow is required, for example, when a 4-
dent upon filtration. To obtain the maximum flow values shown, way valve has one port plugged, or unbalanced flows from large
full filtration of 25 µm is recommended. The flow forces acting rod cylinders, the permissible flow in critical cases can be
within the valve also influence performance. In 4-way valves, the considerably lower. The A or B spool (3-way) can be used as an
data provided is for applications with 2 directions of flow (flow approximation of the limited flow performance.
from P to A and an equal, simultaneous return from B to T, see
table).
Performance limits measured with solenoids at operating temperature, 10 % undervoltage and without tank port pressure.
DC solenoid AC solenoid AC solenoid

e.g. G 24: 24 V e.g. W110: 110 V, 50 Hz (see below) e.g. W110: 110 V, 60 Hz (see below)
Curve Symbol Curve Symbol Curve Symbol
1 A, B1) 11 A, B1) 19 A, B1)
2 V 12 V 20 V
3 A, B 13 A, B 21 A, B
4 F, P 14 F, P 22 F, P
5 J 15 G, T 23 G, T
6 G, H, T 16 H 24 J, L, U
7 A/O, A/OF, L, U 17 A/O, A/OF, C/O, C/OF 25 A/O, A/OF, Q, W
8 C, D, Y D/O, D/OF, E, E1–2), J, L 26 C, D, Y
9 M M, Q, R3), U, W 27 H
2 3
10 E,E1– ), R ), C/O, C/OF 18 C, D, Y 28 C/O, C/OF, D/O, D/OF, E,
D/O, D/OF, Q, W E1–2), M, R3)
DC Solenoid
Operating pressure in PSI (bar)
(350) 5000 10
7 9
(300) 8
4000 1) With mal override
1 5
2)
P – A/B pre-opening
(200) 3000 3) Return flow from actuator to tank
2 6 3
2000 3
4 DC solenoid
(100) 1 Curves 1 to 10
1000
2 12, 24, and
12 Volt and 96
24 Volt
Volt typical
typical stock
stock
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
(10) (20) (30) (40) (50) (60) (70) (80)

Flow in GPM (L/min)
4/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Directional valve solenoid power limits, measured at ν = 190 SUS (41 mm2/s) and t = 122 °F (50°C)
Operating pressure in PSI (bar) AC Solenoid
(350) 5000 17 AC solenoid
(300)
4000 Curves Solenoid
14 15 possibilities
18
(200) 3000
16 W42 42 V, 50 Hz
13 11 W110 110 V, 50 Hz
2000
(100) 14 to 120 V, 60 Hz
1000 18 W127 127 V, 50 Hz
11 12 W220 220 V, 50 Hz
240 V, 60 Hz
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
(10) (20) (30) (40) (50) (60)

Flow in GPM (L/min)
Operating pressure in PSI (bar)
AC Solenoid
(350) 5000 26
(300) 21 28
4000 AC solenoid
22 23
24 Curves Solenoid
(200) 3000
25 possibilities
2000 19 W42 42 V, 60 Hz
(100) 27 to W110 110 V, 60 Hz
1000
28 W127 127 V, 60 Hz
19 20 W220 220 V, 60 Hz
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
(10) (20) (30) (40) (50) (60)

Flow in GPM (L/min)
Performance curves, measured at ν = 190 SUS (41 mm2/s) and t = 122 °F (50°C)
∆p-qV-curves Symbol Through flow direction

7 8 10 6 5 3 9 1 2 P-A P-B A-T B-T
(11) 160
150 A, B 3 3 – –
(10) 140 4 C 1 1 3 1
Pressure drop in PSI (bar)
120 D, Y 5 5 3 3
(8)
E 3 3 1 1
100 F 1 3 1 1
(6) T 10 10 9 9
80
H 2 4 2 2
(4) 60 J, Q 1 1 2 1
L 3 3 4 9
40
(2) M 2 4 3 3
20 P 3 1 1 1
R 5 5 4 –
0 4 8 12 16 20 V 1 2 1 1
W 1 1 2 2
(20) (40) (60) (80)
U 3 3 9 4
Flow in GPM (L/min) G 6 6 9 9
5/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Unit dimensions, valve with DC solenoid: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
T
1/2" NPT
A
B
P
1.1 12 1.2
1.220 1.280 3.421 (86.9)
(31) (32.5) 1.711 (43.5)
T
A B 1.77
(45)
P 9
0.6
1.594 0.591 0.6 (15)
(40.5) (15) 14
(15)
8 6 4 8 2
1/2" NPT 5 3.455
(87.8)
A ø0.370 øl.209 B
2 B
(9.4) (5.3)
1/2" NPT
3.37 2.68
(85.5) (68)
1.654 3.60
(42) (91.5)
3
0.55 2.72
(14) 0.33 0.33
(8.5) (69) (8.5) 0.906
5.74 (23) 3
(145.7) 5.74 0.55
(145.7) (14)
2.0 8.09 2.0
(50.5) (205.4) (50.5)
10 11 13 7 11 10
1.1 Solenoid a 10 Space required to remove coil

0.0004/4.0 in
1.2 Solenoid b 11 Locknut 0.01/100 mm
2 Manual override “N9” (standard) Tightening torque = 35 in-lbs (4 Nm)
32
only possible manual operation to 12 Mounting pattern to ISO/DIS 4401-3 (Rmax 4)
725 PSI (50 bar). Do not damage NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and
the manual override bore. ANSI B93.7 D 03
Handknob part # RR00 024943 Required surface finish of
Subplates: G341/12 (SAE-6),
may be used. interface when mounting the
G342/12 (SAE-8), valve without our subplate
3 Dimension for solenoid with manual G502/12 (SAE-8)
override "N", (rubber boot covered) to data sheet RA 45 052 and
4 Angled plug Z45 valve mounting bolts
5 Large angled plugs type Z55 10-24 UNC x 2" (M5 x 50mm),
and Z55L Tightening torque = 6.5 ft-lbs (8.9 Nm),
6 Nameplate must be ordered separately.
7 R-ring 9.81 mm x 1.5 mm x 1.78 mm 13 Hole for locating pin, ∆ 0.23 in (3 mm)
8 Screw cap for single solenoid valve 14 Conduit box variation,
model “DA” or “DAL”
9 Space required to remove plug
6/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Unit dimensions, valve with AC solenoid: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
T
A
1/2" NPT B
P
3.421 (86.9)
1.1 12 1.2
1.280 1.711 (43.5)
(32.5)
T
A B 1.77
(45)
P 9
1.220 1.594 0.59
(31) (40.5) (15) 0.6 0.6
(15) (15) 2.68
(68) 5
8 6 4 8 2 3.455
1/2" NPT (87.8)
2 A ø0.370 ø0.209 B
(9.4) (5.3) B
1/2" NPT
3.62
(92)
1.654 3.86
(42) (98)
3
0.67 0.33 2.72 0.33
(17) (8.5) (69) (8.5) 0.906
5.65 (23)
(143.5) 3
5.65 0.67
(143.5) (17)
1.75 7.91 1.75
(44.5) (201) (44.5)
10 11 13 7 11 10
1.1 Solenoid a 10 Space required to remove coil

0.0004/4.0 in
1.2 Solenoid b 11 Locknut 0.01/100 mm
2 Manual override “N9” (standard) Tightening torque = 35 in-lbs (4 Nm)
32
only possible manual operation to 12 Mounting pattern to ISO/DIS 4401-3 (Rmax 4)
725 PSI (50 bar). Do not damage NFPA T3.5. MR1, and
the manual override bore. Handknob ANSI B 93.7 D 03
part # RR00 024943 may be used. Required surface finish of
Subplates: G 341/12 (SAE-8),
interface when mounting the
3 Dimension for solenoid with G 342/12 (SAE-8), valve without our subplate
manual override “N” (rubber boot G 502/12 (SAE-8)
covered) to data sheet RA 45 052
4 Angled plug type Z45 Valve mounting bolts
5 Large angled plugs type Z55 10-24 UNC x 2" (M5 x 50)
and Z55L Tightening torque = 6.5 ft-lbs (8.9 Nm),
6 Nameplate must be ordered separately.
7 R-ring 9.81 mm x 1.5 mm x 1.78 mm 13 Hole for locating pin, Ø 0.23 in (3 mm)
8 Screw cap for single solenoid valves 14 Conduit box variation,
9 Space required to remove plug model “DA” or “DAL”
7/8
RA 23 178/06.98
Ordering code, available spare parts and seals

Individual connections
113
160
113 157a
Central connections
113
113
160
113
157b
113
Spare parts – Solenoid
DC Voltage AC Voltage
Item Description Voltage Order No. Voltage Order No.
157a Coil for individual connection 12 V RR00 021388 110 V, 50/60 Hz RR00 020175
24V RR00 021389 230 V, 50/60 Hz RR00 020176
157b Coil for central connection 12 V RR00 021462 110 V, 50/60 Hz RR00 021464
24V RR00 021463 230 V, 50/60 Hz RR00 021465
160 Seal kit – Hand nut for pole tube w/o manual override RR00 068604 RR00 833831
and pole tube with protected manual override
Seal kit – Hand nut for pole tube with manual override RR00 068605 RR00 833808
Seal kit – Valve: Plug connector “Z”

Item Seal Material Order number
113 NBR seals RR00 313162
FPM seals RR00 313163
Seal kit – Valve: Conduit box “D”

Item Seal Material Order number
113 NBR seals RR00 833687
FPM seals RR00 833689

Printed in U.S.A.
RA 08 000/06.98
Overview of Electrical Connections* RA

for Directional Control Valves
Models WE 4 and WE 6 with DC or AC solenoids
08 000/06.98
Replaces: 05.94
*For more information, see datasheet RA 08 006.
Directional Control Valve WE 4, individual plug connection: dimensions in inches (millimeters)

For Cable or Flexible Conduit2 (1/2" NPT), jam nut & grommet incl. For Cable only, with rubber compression grommet & jam nut
Z45 Z4
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
1.85 (47) 2.13 (54)
Plug-in connector Plug-in
(DIN 43650) connector
(DIN 43650)
3.23 (82)
3.23 (82)
1/2" NPT Pg 11
B A B A
Z55 Z5
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)
Large plug-in Large
connector plug-in Pg 11
1/2" NPT
connector
3.46 (88)
3.46 (88)
B A B A
Z55L Z5L
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)
Large plug-in Large
connector with light plug-in Pg 11
1/2" NPT
connector
3.46 (88)
3.46 (88)
with light
B A B A

Z45 Z4
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
1.85 (47) 2.13 (54)

Plug-in connector Plug-in connector
* Standard solenoid (A) (DIN 43650)
3.44 (87.5)**
3.44 (87.5)**
3.27 (83)*
3.27 (83)*
** High performance 1/2" NPT * Standard solenoid (A) Pg 11

solenoid (B) ** High performance
(DIN 43650) B A solenoid (B) B A
Z55 Z5
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)

Large plug-in Large plug-in
connector connector Pg 11
1/2" NPT
3.68 (93.5)**
3.68 (93.5)**
* Standard solenoid (A) * Standard solenoid (A)

3.50 (89)*
3.50 (89)*
** High performance ** High performance

solenoid (B) solenoid (B)
B A B A
Z55L Z5L
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)

connector with light connector with light Pg 11
1/2" NPT
3.68 (93.5)**
3.68 (93.5)**

3.50 (89)*
3.50 (89)*

B A B A
2
Note: Use “K4” code to order valve without plug. Warning: A highly flexible conduit (seal tight) must be used and be properly supported or the resulting
Pg 11 is a straight thread with a rubber grommet and jam nut for flexible (SJO type) cable installation. torque will break the plug mounting nut from the solenoid casing. Insulation exceeds NEMA class B.
1/2
RA 08 000/06.98
Directional Control Valve WE 6, central connections: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
Wiring for Central Connection (DZ, DZL only)
DA 1/2" NPT
1.85 (47)
With 2 solenoids:
Central connection both ends Solenoid A to terminals 1 and 2
with terminal box Solenoid B to terminals 3 and 4
(NEMA 4 rating)
3.50 (89)
ground to terminal PL
2.64 (67)
A B
With 1 solenoid:
Solenoid always to terminals 1 and 2
DAL 1/2" NPT DZA ≈ 0.6 (15) 1/2" NPT

1.85 (47)
Central connection both ends Central connection
with terminal box, with terminal box and
and light(s) plug-in connector Z
3.54 (90)
5.16 (131)
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
A B
A B
K8 0.64 (16.3) DZAL ≈ 0.6 (15) 1/2" NPT

MS 3102-A 14S-2P Central connection
(double solenoid) with terminal box,
3.50 (89)
K16 light(s) and plug-in

2.64 (67)
5.16 (131)
MS 3102-A 14S-1P connector Z
(single solenoid) A B
2.64 (67)
Without female connector
(NEMA 4 rating) A B
To MIL C-5015 standard
DK23 Note: Part numbers for plug connector

3 pin (single solenoid)
3.50 (89)
2.64 (67)
DK25 For cable or flexible conduit, For cable only, with rubber
5 pin (double solenoid) with 1/2" NPT thread compression grommet & jam nut
A B
Without female connector rust (A) US00 004 823 greyt (A) US00 008 908
Z45 Z4
(NEMA 4 rating)
To ANSI / B93.55M standard black (B) US00 011 039 black (B) US00 008 909
rust (A) US00 004 824 grey (A) US00 008 616
DK23L Z55 Z5
3.54 (90)
black (B) US00 012 651 black (B) US00 009 129
DK25L
2.64 (67)
5 pin (double solenoid) For other plugs and further information, see parts list RA 23 177-E
A B
Wiring for Plug Connectors - Z45 (Z4), Z55 (Z5), Z55L (Z5L) only
(NEMA 4 rating)
To ANSI / B93.55M standard Bottom view of plug
Wiring for ANSI / B93.55M - DK23 (L), DK25 (L) only Terminal 2 Ground
Single Solenoid Double Solenoid Terminal 1
1 1 5
2
2 4
1
2 3
3
3
Pin No. Color Termination Pin No. Color Termination Terminal 3
1 Green Ground 1 White Solenoid B (not used)
2 Black Solenoid 2 Red Solenoid A
SolenoidAa to terminals 1 and 2 (grey plug)
3 White Solenoid 3 Green Ground
4 Orange Solenoid A
Solenoid B to terminals 1 and 2 (black plug)
5 Black Solenoid B (terminal 3 is not wired)


Printed in U.S.A.
RA 25 802/06.98
Pressure relief valve, pilot operated, RA

Models DB / DBW / DBWS, Series 5X 25 802/06.98
Sizes 10 to 30 up to 5000 PSI (350 bar) up to 172 GPM (650 L/min) Replaces: 05.94
– Pilot operated pressure relief valve

– Threaded in-line, or subplate mounting
– For subplate mounting:
Mounts on standard ISO 6264-06, 08, or 10,
NFPA/ANSI R 06, R 08, or R 10 interface
Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form E,
ISO 6264 and CETOP–RP 121 H,
For subplates, see data sheet
RA 45 064 (must be ordered separately)
– Five pressure ranges available, to 5000 PSI
(350 bar)
– Four pressure adjustment options:
• Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
• Hand knob K4660-18 K4661-2
• Hand knob with scale Model DB 20 –1–5X/315… Model DBW 20 A3–5X/315–6AG24NZ45
• Key lock hand knob with scale
– Optional solenoid venting with directional control
valve (Model 3 WE 6) Note:
Design tested pressure relief valves model DB../..B, series 5X
– Optional time delay available for unloading Model DBW
(ordering details) see page 6.
Functional description, section, symbols

General “A” acts via control passages (10), (6), (7) and orifices (4), (5) on
DB, DBW and DBWS pressure valves are pilot operated pressure the spring loaded side of main poppet (3) plus pilot poppet (8). In
relief valves. the externally piloted model, pilot pressure may originate from port
They limit the maximum pressure in a system. Additionally, a “X” (15) via passages (6), (7) and orifices (4) and (5).
solenoid venting option (DBW) is available to unload system As pressure exceeds force on spring (9), pilot poppet (8) opens.
pressure. This allows fluid in main poppet spring chamber and pilot
These pressure relief valves consist of main valve housing (1) with passages, to drain via spring chamber (12) and passage (13) to
main poppet assembly (3), and pilot valve (2) with a manually set port “B” (internally drained model) or via port “Y” (14) to tank
pressure adjustment mechanism. (externally drained model). The pilot flow creates a pressure drop
across orifices (4 and 5), allowing main poppet (3) to open. Fluid
Pressure relief valve model DB flows from port A to B and the valve modulates to maintain a
Pressure at port A acts on the lower surface area of main poppet pressure set value.
(3). Simultaneously (internally piloted model), pressure from port The design permits flexibility. Via the “X” port (15), the valve can
be unloaded or remotely set at one or several pressures with a
11 14 8 12 9 stepped pilot circuit. Also the “Y” port (14) permits back pressure
for load sensing.
2
DB.-5X/..–.. DB.-5X/..X..
5 A A
7
1 13
B B X
6 3
DB.-5X/..Y.. DB.-5X/..XY..
4 A A
X B B Y B X Y
15 10 A
1/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Fuctional description, section, symbols
Pressure relief valve model DBW

The function of this valve is basically the same as the valve model
DB. The unloading at the main spool (3) however, is achieved by
actuating the built-on directional valve (16).
16
B T (P)
2
1 13
6 3
X B
A
15 11
DBW.-5X/..–.. DBW.-5X/..X.. DBW.-5X/..Y.. DBW.-5X/..XY..

Normally closed Normally closed Normally closed Normally closed
A A A A
A B 1) A B A B A B
P T X P T P T X P T
B B B B
Y Y
A B 2) A B A B A B
P T P T P T P T
Normally open Normally open Normally open Normally open
1
) Pilot valve normally closed 3WE6A9.6X/…
2
) Pilot valve normally open 3WE6B9.6X…
2/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Functional description, section, symbols
Pressure relief valve model DBWS

The function of this valve is basically the same as the valve model
DBW. The unloading at the main spool (3) however, is achieved
by actuating the built-on directional poppet valve (17).
By fitting a ball (18) in the actuating element (19) of the poppet
valve the pressure relief valve has a delayed opening. Due to this,
pressure peaks and unloading shocks in the return line are
minimized.
17
18
19
1 13
6 3
X A B
15 11
DBWS.-5X/..–.. DBWS.-5X/..X.. DBWS.-5X/..Y.. DBWS.-5X/..XY..

Normally closed Normally closed Normally closed Normally closed
A A A A
T T T T
P X P Y P X Y P
B B B B
T T T T
P P P P
Normally open Normally open Normally open Normally open
3/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Ordering code
DB 5X
Without directional valve = No code

With built-on directional spool valve =W
With built-in directional poppet valve = WS
Pilot operated valve (complete) = No code
Pilot valve without main spool assembly (Do not enter size) =C
Pilot valve with main spool assembly (enter valve sizes 10 or 30) =C
Pilot valve without main spool assembly for subplate mounting =T 1)
(do not enter size)

Nominal Valve for
size Subplate mounting Threaded connection
“no code” “G”
Ordering details
10 = 10 = 10 (G 1/2)
16 = 15 (G 3/4)
25 = 20 = 20 (G 1)
25 = 25 (G 1 1/4)
32 = 30 = 30 (G 1 1/2)
A B T
a b a b
Normally closed = A 2)
P T P
A B T
a b a b
Normally open = B 2)
P T P
For subplate mounting = No code

For threaded connections =G
Adjustment elements
Rotary knob =1
Sleeve with hexagon and protective cap =2
Lockable rotary knob with scale = 3 3)
Rotary knob with scale =7
With main spool Ø 0.945 inches (24 mm) (only in sizes 10, 15, 25 and model DBC 30) =–
With main spool Ø 1.102 inches (28 mm) (only in size 30; not with model DBC 30) =N
Series 50 to 59 = 5X
(50 to 59: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
Settable pressure up to 725 PSI (50 bar) = 50
Settable pressure up to 5076 PSI (350 bar) = 350 4)
4/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Ordering code (continued)
Further details in clear text

Threads for Y Port
no desig. = G (BSP)
12 = SAE (preferred)
No code = NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP
V= FPM seals (standard) suitable for phosphate ester fluids (HF
(other seals on request)
Attention!
The compatibilty of the seals and pressure
fluid has to be taken into account!
Electrical connections 2)
K4 = Without plug-in connector
Z45 = angled plug
Z55 = large angled plug
Z55L = large angled plug with light
Central solenoid connections
DA = Terminal box with 2 1/2" NPT conduit conn.
DAL = Terminal box with two 1/2" NPT conduit connections and light(s)
DZA = Terminal box with angled plug
DZAL = Terminal box with angled plug and light(s)
No code = Without manual override with rubber boot
N 2) = With manual override with rubber boot
N9 2) = With protected override (not with model DBWS) with rubber boot
AC voltage
W 120-60* = 120 Volts AC 60 Hz
W 110 R 2; 5) = DC solenoid with rectifier for AC operation (only for
voltages ≥ 110 V and with Z55 plug-in connector)
DC voltage
G + voltage 2; 6) = DC solenoid (ex.: 24 V DC = G 24)
* for other available voltages and frequencies see RA 23 177
No code = 2) Without directional valve
6E 2; 4) = With directional spool valve (3WE6…6X/E 7)) settable pressure up to 5076 PSI (350 bar)
1SC 2) = With directional poppet valve settable pressure up to 5076 PSI (350 bar)
S= With switching shock damping (only with model DBWS)
No code = Standard version
U 5; 8) = Valve for minimum opening pressure
Pilot oil supply and drain line
– 9) =
X= Ordering details
Y= to symbols
XY = pages 1 to 3
1) DBT/DBWT are the same as DBC/DBWC, except that the central drilling is closed.
2) Ordering details only required for the version with directional valve (DBW / DBWS).
3) H-key with part no. 008158 is included within the scope of supply.
4) With the version DBW…/350… the high performance directional valve “6E” (RA 23 178) has to be ordered.2
5) DC solenoids only for version with directional poppet valve (DBWS).
6) For the connection to an AC supply a DC solenoid must be used which is controlled via a rectifier (see table below).
For single connections a large plug-in connector
with integrated rectifier can be used (must be ordered AC supply Nominal voltage of the DC
separately, see page 6). (permissible voltage solenoid when used with AC Order
7) Data sheet RA 23 178 tolerance ± 10%) voltage & rectifier code
8) Not possible with the version without the main spool
assembly and cross-line relief! 110 V - 50/60 Hz
96 V G96
9) DBW / DBWS valves with code “U” require external 120 V - 60 Hz
drain “Y”. 220 V - 50/60 Hz 196 V G196
5/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Ordering details for plug-in connectors (single connection)
Plug-in connector Large plug-in connector

DIN 43 650
ISO 4400
With lamp and

Without With With protective
indicator lamp indicator lamp rectifier circuit
Valve side a, 313923/24V
Order no. 074683 008616 313932 310994
color grey 313926/180-240V
Ordering details for design tested pressure relief valves model DB../..B, series 5X†
Size Description Component code Flow G in Settable over

GPM (L/min) pressure p in PSI (bar)
2 3 4 5
10 DB 10 –5X/ B TÜV.SV.89–851.12.F.G.p 52.8 (200) 435 to 2466 (30 to 170)
1 2 3 4 5 66.0 (250) 2480 to 5076 (171 to 350)
DBW 10 –5X/ 6 * B TÜV.SV.89–851.12.F.G.p
2 3 4 5
25 DB 20 –5X/ B TÜV.SV.89–852.22.F.G.p 66.0 (250) 435 to 870 (30 to 60)
1 2 3 4 5 92.5 (350) 885 to 1595 (61 to 110)
DBW 20 –5X/ 6 * B TÜV.SV.89–852.22.F.G.p 118.9 (450) 1610 to 5076 (111 to 350)
2 3 4 5
158.5 (600) 435 to 870 (30 to 60)
32 DB 30 N5X/ B TÜV.SV.89–853.22.F.G.p
171.7 (650) 885 to 1595 (61 to 110)
1 2 3 4 5
171.7 (650) 1610 to 2466 (111 to 170)
DBW 30 N5X/ 6 * B TÜV.SV.89–853.22.F.G.p
171.7 (650) 2480 to 5076 (171 to 350)
The ordering details of design tested pressure relief valves consists of description and component code.
1
Directional valve, normally closed =A
normally open =B
2
For subplate mounting = No code
For threaded connection =G
3
Adjustment element =1
=2
4
Pressure must be entered by customer, e.g. = 150
5
Pilot oil supply = – 1)
(ordering details to symbols on page 3) =X
=Y
= XY
* Ordering details of electric data (see page 5) e.g. = AG24NK4
1) Ordering details only required for model fitted with directional valve (DBW / DBWS).
† All design tested pressure relief valves are ordered as complete units from factory.
DB…/…B valves are not typical stock.
6/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
General
Designation pressure relief valve
Symbols see pages 1 to 3
Model code see pages 4 to 6
Mounting style subplate mounting, threaded connections or cartridge valve
Model of connection direct via threads;
indirect via subplate or manifold,
porting parttern to DIN 24 340 form A,
ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H
Nominal size 10 15 25 30
Weight DB. 10 DB. 15 DB. 20 DB. 25 DB. 30
Subplate mounting DB… lbs (kg) 5.73 (2.6) – 7.71 (3.5) – 9.7 (4.4)
DBW… 1) lbs (kg) 8.98 (4.07) – 10.95 (4.97) – 12.94 (5.87)
DBWS… lbs (kg) 6.17 (2.8) – 8.16 (3.7) – 10.14 (4.6)
DBC… lbs (kg) 2.65 (1.2)
DBWC… 1) lbs (kg) 5.89 (2.67)
DBC10 or 30… lbs (kg) 3.31 (1.5)
DBWC10 or 30… 1) lbs (kg) 6.55 (2.97)
DBWSC… lbs (kg) 3.31 (1.5)
Threaded connection DB..G… lbs (kg) 11.68 (5.3) 11.46 (5.2) 11.24 (5.1) 11.02 (5.0) 10.58 (4.8)
DBW..G… 1) lbs (kg) 14.93 (6.87) 14.71 (6.67) 14.49 (6.57) 14.27 (6.47) 13.82 (6.27)
DBWS..G… lbs (kg) 12.12 (5.5) 11.9 (5.4) 11.68 (5.3) 11.46 (5.2) 11.02 (5.0)
Installation optional
Direction of flow see graphical symbols on pages 1 to 3
Ambient temperature °F (°C) – 22 to + 122 (– 30 to + 50)
Hydraulic technical data

Nominal pressure PSI (bar) 5076 (350)
Max. operating pressure at ports A, B, X PSI (bar) 5076 (350)
Max. back pressure at port Y
DB… PSI (bar) 4569 (315)
DBW… PSI (bar) 3046 (210) (high performance DC solenoid) (3WE6…6X/E)
PSI (bar) 2321 (160) (high performance AC solenoid) (3WE6…6X/E)
DBWS… PSI (bar) ≤ pressure at port A or X
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 2);
Fast bio-degradable pressure fluids to
VDMA 24 568 (also see RA 90 221);
HETG (rape seed oil) 2); HEPG (polyglycol) 3);
3)
HEES (synthetic ester) ; other fluids on request
Pressure fluid - temperature range °F (°C) – 22 to + 176 (– 30 to + 80) with NBR seals
°F (°C) – 4 to + 176 (– 20 to + 80) with FPM seals
Viscosity range SUS (mm2/s) 45 to 3720 (10 to 800)
Max. flow DB. 10 DB. 15 DB. 20 DB. 25 DB. 30
Subplate mounting GPM (L/min) 66 (250) – 132.1 (500) – 171.7 (650)
Threaded connection GPM (L/min) 66 (250) 132.1 (500) 132.1 (500) 132.1 (500) 171.7 (650)
Degree of contamination Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the fluid is
to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a filter with
a minimum retention rate of ß10≥ 75.
Settable pressure Minimum PSI (bar) flow dependent (see characteristic curves on page 9)
Maximum PSI (bar) 725 (50); 1450 (100); 2901 (200); 4569 (315); 5076 (350)
7/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Electrical technical data
Design high performance directional valve to RA 23 178
Voltage DC
Nominal voltage V 12; 24; 42; 60; 96; 110; 180; 205; 220
Voltage tolerance % ±10
Nominal power W 30
Protection IP65
Permissible switching frequency 1/h 15000
Connection model plug connection or conduit box
Design high performance directional valve to RA 23 178

Voltage AC
Nominal voltage V 110; 220; 50/60 Hz
Holding power W 50
Switching power W 220
Protection IP65
Connection model plug connection or conduit box
Design 2/2-way poppet valve

Voltage DC
Nominal voltage V 12; 24; 42; 60; 96; 110; 180; 205; 220
Nominal power W 26
Protection IP65
Connection model plug connection (single connection)
1) The values stated refer to the version fitted with directional Supply voltages for high performance directional valves
spool valve "6E" to data sheet RA 23 178. fitted with AC solenoids:
2) suitable for NBR and FPM seals
Ordering details Supply voltages
3) only suitable for FPM seals W110 110 V, 50 Hz
110 V, 60 Hz
120 V, 60 Hz
W222 220 V, 50 Hz
220 V, 60 Hz
8/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Characteristic curves measured at ν = 190 SUS (41 mm2/s) and t = 122 °F (50 °C)
The characteristic curves were measured with external, zero pressure pilot oil drain.
With internal pilot oil drain in inlet pressure increases by the outlet pressure present at port B.
Inlet pressure in relation to the flow
9428 (650)
5076 (350)
4569 (315)
Inlet pressure in PSI (bar) →
4351 (300)
1 2 3
3626 (250)
2901 (200)
2176 (150)
1450 (100)
1 Size 10
725 (50)
2 Size 20
3 Size 30
0
0 (100) (200) (250) (300) (400) (500) (600) (650)
26.4 52.8 66 79.3 106 132 159 172

Flow in GPM (L/min) →
Minimum settable pressure and bypass pressure in relation to the flow 1)
Standard version
174 (12)
1 2 4
bypass pressure in PSI (bar) →
145 (10)
Min. settable pressure,
116 (8)
3
87 (6)
1 Size 10
58 (4) 2 Size 20
3 Size 30
29 (2)
4 DBC 30/
DBW(S)C 30
0
0 (100) (200) (250) (300) (400) (500) (600) (650)
26.4 52.8 66 79.3 106 132 159 172

Minimum settable pressure and bypass pressure in relation to the flow 1)
Version “U” (not possible for versions with directional poppet valve "DBWS")
174 (12)
1 2 4
bypass pressure in PSI (bar) →
145 (10)
Min. settable pressure,
116 (8)
87 (6)
3
1 Size 10
58 (4) 2 Size 20
3 Size 30
29 (2)
4 DBC 30/
DBWC 30
0
0 (100) (200) (250) (300) (400) (500) (600) (650)
26.4 52.8 66 79.3 106

1) The characteristic curves are valid for pB = 0 (0 outlet pressure) over the entire flow range
9/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Unit dimensions: model DB/DBW for subplate mounting: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
L6
L8 L5 Ø D1
12
L7
1 0.0004/4.0 in
0.01/100 mm
32
X B (Rmax 4)
B1
B2
A
Required surface finish of
mating piece
For item descriptions, see page 15

L4 L3
L2 11
0.197 (5) L1
6.58 (167)
0.591 (15)
0.591 (15)
5.97 (151.5) 0.61 (15.5)
20 20
16
3.504 (89)
3.68 (93.5)
3.445 (87.5)
3.27 (83)
1/2” NPT
or conduit
13
0.079 (2)
5 14 9 15 4 18 19 17 6; 7 18 19
Ø 1.26 (32)
Ø 1.555 (39.5)
Ø 1.378 (35)
9 8
0.787 (20)
0
3
3.86 (98)
2 1
3.07 (78)
G 1/4; SAE 4;
0.472 (12) 7/16-20
3
0.63 (16)
1.024 (26)
21
X A B
0.197 (5)
M8 x 1; Ø0.236 (6)
0.394 (10)
2 0.197 (5) 1.929 (49)
L9 4.8 (122)
10
5.236 (133)
5.709 (145)
6.654 (169) 0.709 (18)
Model L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 B1 B2 Ø D1 R-ring R-ring

ports A, B port X
DB/DBW 10 3.58 2.12 0.87 1.08 0.87 1.87 0 25.5 0.079 3.07 2.12 0.55 0.69x0.1x0.103 0.386x0.06x0.07
(91) (53.8) (22.1) (27.5) (22.1) (47.5) (0) (25.5) (2) (78) (53.8) (14) (17.56x2.4x2.62) (9.81x1.5x1.78)
DB/DBW 20 4.57 2.63 1.32 1.31 0.44 2.19 0.94 22.8 0.41 3.94 2.76 0.71 1.12x0.134x0.139 0.386x0.06x0.07
(116) (66.7) (33.4) (33.3) (11.1) (55.6) (23.8) (22.8) (10.5) (100) (70) (18) (28.43x3.4x3.53) (9.81x1.5x1.78)
DB/DBW 30 5.81 3.5 1.75 1.61 0.5 3 1.25 20 0.83 4.53 3.25 0.79 1.36x0.139x0.139 0.386x0.06x0.07
(147.5) (88.9) (44.5) (41) (12.7) (76.2) (31.8) (20) (21) (115) (82.6) (20) (34.52x3.53x3.53) (9.81x1.5x1.78)
10/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Unit dimensions: model DBWS for subplate mounting: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
L6
L8 L5 Ø D1
12
L7
0.0004/4.0 in
0.01/100 mm
32
B (Rmax 4)
B1
B2
A
X
mating piece
L4 L3 For item descriptions, see page 15

L2 11
0.197 (5) L1
20 32
0.591 (15) 2.441 (62)
1/2” NPT
or conduit
17
0.709 (18)
1/2” NPT
or conduit
16
20
0.591 (15) 1 5 9 4 6; 7
7.402 (188)
Ø 1.555 (39.5)
Ø 1.26 (32)
Ø 1.38 (35)
9 8
0.787 (20)
0
3
2 1
3.86 (98)
3.071 (78)
SAE 4 SAE 4
7/16-20 7/16-20
3
1.024 (26)
0.63 (16)
21
X A B
0.197 (5)
M8 x 1;
2 0.394 (10)
Ø0.236 (6)
0.197 (5) 1.929 (49)
L9 4.803 (122)
5.236 (133) 10
5.709 (145)
6.654 (169) 0.709 (18)
Model L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 B1 B2 Ø D1 R-ring R-ring

ports A, B port X
DBWS 10 3.58 2.12 0.87 1.08 0.87 1.87 0 25.5 0.079 3.07 2.12 0.55 0.69x0.1x0.103 0.386x0.06x0.07
(91) (53.8) (22.1) (27.5) (22.1) (47.5) (0) (25.5) (2) (78) (53.8) (14) (17.56x2.4x2.62) (9.81x1.5x1.78)
DBWS 20 4.57 2.63 1.32 1.31 0.44 2.19 0.94 22.8 0.41 3.94 2.76 0.71 1.12x0.134x0.139 0.386x0.06x0.07
(116) (66.7) (33.4) (33.3) (11.1) (55.6) (23.8) (22.8) (10.5) (100) (70) (18) (28.43x3.4x3.53) (9.81x1.5x1.78)
DBWS 30 5.81 3.5 1.75 1.61 0.5 3 1.25 20 0.83 4.53 3.25 0.79 1.36x0.139x0.139 0.386x0.06x0.07
(147.5) (88.9) (44.5) (41) (12.7) (76.2) (31.8) (20) (21) (115) (82.6) (20) (34.52x3.53x3.53) (9.81x1.5x1.78)
11/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Unit dimensions: for threaded connections: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
12 Dimensions for built-on directional spool valve see page 10,

for built-on directional poppet valve see page 11.
For item explanation see page 15
1
3.15 (80)
Ø 2.84 (72)
10
6.65 (169) 0.709 (18)
5.71 (145)
0.197 (5) 5.24 (133)
SAE 4 4.803 (122)
7/16-20
0.079 (2)
1.929 (49)
3 5 9 4 6; 7
Ø 1.26 (32)
Ø 1.555 (39.5)
Ø 1.38 (35)
9 8
0.787 (20)
0
3
2 1
Y
5.28 (134)
21
4.488 (114)
Ø 0.984 0.217 (5.5)

(25)
Ø D2
D1
SAE 4
7/16-20
X B
1.85 (47)
2.205 (56)
1.73 (44)
T1 0.039
(1)
T1
A
0.039
0.433 (11) D1
(1)
Ø D2
2 2.835 (72)
0.158
(4) 3.54 (90) 0.669 (17)
Model D1 ØD2 T1
DB 10 G SAE-8; 3/4-16 UNC 1.338 0.551
(1/2"BSP) (34) (14)
DB 15 G SAE-12; 1-1/16-12 UNC 1.653 0.630
(3/4"BSP) (42) (16)
DB 20 G SAE-16; 1-5/16-12 UNC 1.850 0.708
(1"BSP) (47) (18)
DB 25 G SAE-20; 1-5/8-12 UNC 2.283 0.787
(1 1/4"BSP) (58) (20)
DB 30 G SAE-24; 1-7/8-12 UNC 2.559 0.866
(1 1/2"BSP) (65) (22)
BSP pipe thread to ISO 228/1
12/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Unit dimensions: Pilot valve with (DBC 10 or 30) or without (DBC, DBT) main spool cartridges:
dimensions in inches
6.654 0.709
5.709
0.197 5.236
SAE 4 4.803
7/16-20
1.929
0.079
3 5 9 4 6; 7 10
9 8
Ø 1.26
Ø 1.38
Ø 1.555
1.58
0.787
1.14
0
3
2 1
Y
22 29
23 30
31 27
28 0.0004/4.0 in
Ø 1.38 0.01/100 mm
32
2.402 (Rmax 4)
0.453 2.01 Ø0.331
12
1.102
mating piece
1.142
Dimensions for built-on directional spool valve see page 10,

Y
1.26
1.73

X
1.221
For item descriptions see page 15.
0.236
1
0.158
1.476
“Z”
View “Z”
A
1.14±0.0079 1.024±0.0079
Y
3.94 mm
0.00039/
Ø 1.772 M6 2.008
0.63
2 x 30°
Ø 0.165 Ø 1.26+0.00098 4 x M8; 12

Ø 1.122+0.0039
0.00079 A
2 x 45°
X Y X
1.004
0.00032
+0.0039
1.58+0.0039
1.654 +0,002
Ø0.02 B
1.339
X Y
1.89
B
Ø 1.26
0.669
1.26
Y Z
1.73
Z
B Z
2 x 45°
18
01 2.402
0. A
.R
ax Ø 0.976+0.0079
m Ø 0.236 x
= Rmax 4
M4;0.236 Ø 1.26
y
26 25 24 = Rz 8
z
= Rz 16
13/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Unit dimensions: Pilot valve with (DBC 10 or 30) or without (DBC, DBT) main spool cartridges:
dimensions in millimeters
169 18
145
5 133
G 1/4; 12 122
49
3 5 9 4 6; 7 10
2
9 8
Ø 39,5
Ø 35
Ø 32
40
0
29
3
20
2 1
Y
22 29
23 30
31 27
28
35
61 0.0004/4.0 in
11,5 51 Ø 8,4 0.01/100 mm
12 32
28 (Rmax 4)
29

Y mating piece
32
44
X
Dimensions for built-on directional spool valve see page 10,
31
6
1 For item descriptions see page 15.
4
37,5
“Z”
0,01/100 mm
A
View “Z”
29±0,2 26±0,2
Y
Ø 45 M6 51
2 x 30°
Ø 4,2 Ø 32H7 16 4 x M8; 12

Ø 28,5+0,1
0,02 A
2 x 45°
X Y X
25,5
0,008
42 +0,05
40+0,1
Ø0,05 B
34
+0,1
B X Y
Ø 32
17
32
Z
48
Y
44
Z
B Z
2 x 45°
3
0, 61
ax.
R A
m
Ø6 Ø 24,8+0,2
x
M4; 6 Ø 32 = Rmax 4
26 25 24 y
= Rz 8
z
= Rz 16
14/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Item descriptions
1 Name plate 30 Back-up ring 8–024 1.14 in x 0.053 in

(29.03 mm x 1.35 mm)
2 Port X for pilot oil supply external
31 Back-up ring 1.12 in x 1.26 in x 0.028 in
3 Port Y for pilot oil drain external
(28.4 mm x 32 mm x 0.7 mm)
4 Adjustment element “1”
32 Pulling action hand override; actuating force is pressure
5 Adjustment element “2” dependent, Fmax = 44.96 lbs (200 N)
(only with version DBWS.A…)
SHCS SAE Grade 8 or better
9 Hexagon 10 A/F
Subplates to data sheet RA 45 064 and valve mounting bolts
10 Space required to remove key
must be ordered separately.
11 Locating pin
Subplates for:
12 Valve mounting holes
DB/DBW(S) 10 G 545/01 (G 3/8), G 545/12 (SAE-6; 9/16-18)
13 Directional spool valve size 6 G546/01 (G 1/2), G 546/12 (SAE-8; 3/4-16)
(see RA 23 177 1)/RA 23 178 2))
DB/DBW(S) 20 G 408/01 (G 3/4), G 408/12 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
14 Solenoid "a" with hand override "N" G 409/01 (G 1), G 409/12 (SAE-16; 1-5/16-12)
15 Solenoid without hand override, optional DB/DBW(S) 30 G 410/01 (G 1 1/4), G 410/12 (SAE-20; 1-5/8-12)
3)
G 411/01 (G 1 1/2), G 411/12 (SAE-24; 1-7/8-12)
16 Plug-in connector to DIN 43 650
DBT/DBW(S) T G 51/01 (G 1/4), G 51/12 (SAE-4; 7/16-20)
17 Large plug-in connector 3)
18 Dimensions for standard valve "6A"
Valve mounting bolts for:
19 Dimensions () for high performance valve "6E"
DB/DBW(S) 10
20 Space required to remove plug-in connector (4) M12 x 1.97 (50) DIN 912–10.9;
21 Omittted with pilot oil drain internal (4) 1/2"-13 x 2" UNC
MA = 95.9 lb-ft (130 Nm)
22 R-ring 0.386 in x 0.059 in x 0.07 in
(9.81 mm x 1.5 mm x 1.78 mm) DB/DBW(S) 20
(4) M16 x 1.97 (50) DIN 912–10.9;
23 Main spool assembly (4) 5/8"-11 x 2" UNC
24 Bore Ø 1.26 in (32 mm) may connect the Ø 1.77 in MA = 229 lb-ft (310 Nm)
(45 mm) bore at any position. Please take are that the DB/DBW(S) 30
connection hole X and the mounting holes are not (4) M18 x 1.97 (50) DIN 912–10.9;
damaged. (4) 3/4"-10 x 2" UNC
25 Back-up ring and O-ring must be inserted into this bore MA = 317 lb-ft (430 Nm)
before assembling the main spool. DBC/DBW(S)C and Model DBC 30/DBW(S)C 30
26 Orifice must be ordered separately (4) M8 x 1.58 (40) DIN 912–10.9;
(4) 5/16"-18 x 1-1/2" UNC
27 O-ring 1.11 in x 0.07 in (28.3 mm x 1.78 mm) MA = 27.3 lb-ft (37 Nm)
28 O-ring 1.08 in x 0.10 mm (27.3 mm x 2.4 mm) DBT/DBW(S)T
29 O-ring 1.112 in x 0.103 in (28.24 mm x 2.62 mm) (4) M8 x 1.58 (40) DIN 912–10.9;
(4) 5/16"-18 x 1-1/2" UNC
MA = 27.3 lb-ft (37 Nm)
1) Standard valve "6A"

2) High perfaormance valve "6E"
3) Must be ordered separately, see page 6.
15/16
RA 25 802/06.98
Notes

Printed in U.S.A.
High Pressure Filters
DF Series
Inline Filters
6000 PSI • up to 180 GPM Hydraulic Symbol:
INLET
Filter
Bypass
Element
Valve
Pop-up
Indicator
OUTLET
Features: Technical Details:

• Non-welded housing design reduces stress concentrations and Mounting Method 4 mounting holes
prevents fatigue failure. Port Connection
• Choice of NPT, SAE straight thread O-ring boss, and SAE 4-bolt 30 SAE-8, 1/2” NPT, 1/2” BSPP
60/110 SAE-12, 3/4” NPT, 3/4” BSPP
flange porting (sizes 330 - 1320) to allow easy installation without 160/240/280 SAE-20, 1 1/4” NPT, 1 1/4” BSPP
costly adapters. 330/660/1320 SAE-24, 1 1/2” NPT, 1 1/2” BSPP
• O-ring seals are used to provide positive, reliable sealing. 2” SAE Flange Code 62
Choice of O-ring materials (Nitrile, Fluoro Rubber, EPDM) pro- Flow Direction Inlet: Side Outlet: Side
vides compatibility with petroleum oils, synthetic fluids, water- Construction Materials
glycols, oil/water emulsions, and high water base fluids. Head Ductile iron
• Screw-in bowl mounted below the filter head requires minimal Bowl Steel
clearance to remove the element for replacement, and contaminated Housing (1320) Steel
Cap (1320) Ductile iron
fluid cannot be washed downstream when element is serviced.
Flow Capacity
• Differential Pressure Indicators. HYDAC indicators have no external 30 8 gpm (30 lpm)
dynamic seal. This results in a high system reliability due to 60 16 gpm (60 lpm)
magnetic actuation, thus eliminating a potential leak point. 110 29 gpm (110 lpm)
160 42 gpm (160 lpm)
• A poppet-type bypass valve (optional) is mounted in-line 240 63 gpm (240 lpm)
between the inlet and outlet ports to provide positive sealing 280 74 gpm (280 lpm)
during normal operation and fast opening during cold starts and 330 87 gpm (330 lpm)
flow surges. 660 174 gpm (660 lpm)
1320 190 gpm (720 lpm)
• For special finishes and coatings – consult HYDAC for minimum
quantities, availability and pricing. Housing Pressure Rating
Max. Operating Pressure 6000 psi (420 bar)
• Fatigue pressure ratings equals maximum allowable working Proof Pressure 9000 psi (610 bar)
pressure rating. Fatigue Pressure 6000 psi (420 bar) @ 1 million cycles
Burst Pressure 30 15950 psi (1100 bar)
Applications: 60/110 17400 psi (1200 bar)
160/240/280 17110 psi (1180 bar)
330/660/1320 15080 psi (1040 bar)
Element Collapse Pressure Rating
BH/HC, V 3000 psid (207 bar)
BN/HC, W/HC 250 psid (17 bar)
Agricultural Automotive Construction Gearboxes Fluid Temperature Range -22° to 250°F (-30° to 121°C)
Fluid Compatability
Compatible with all petroleum oils and synthetic fluids rated for use
with Fluoro-Rubber or Ethylene Propylene seals. Contact HYDAC for
information on special housing and element constructions available for
use with water glycols, oil/water emulsions, and HWBF.
Industrial Offshore Power Pulp & Paper Indicator Trip Pressure
Generation ∆P = 29 psid (2 bar) -10% (standard)
∆P = 72 psid (5 bar) -10% (optional)
Bypass Valve Cracking Pressure
∆P = 43 psid (3 bar) +10% (standard)
∆P = 87 psid (6 bar) +10% (optional)
Railways Shipbuilding Steel / Heavy
Industry
115 Filter Catalog

Model Code:
DF BH/HC 30 G 3 A 1 . 0 / 3 .
Filter Type
DF = Inline filter
Element Media
BH/HC = Betamicron® High Collapse Disposable
BN/HC = Betamicron® Low Collapse
V = Metal Fiber Cleanable
W/HC = Wire Screen
Size and Nominal Connection
30 = 1/2" BSPP / NPT / SAE 8
60 = 3/4" BSPP / NPT / SAE 12
110 = 3/4" BSPP / NPT / SAE 12
160 = 1-1/4" BSPP / NPT / SAE 20
240 = 1-1/4" BSPP / NPT / SAE 20
280 = 1-1/4" BSPP / NPT / SAE 20
330 = 1-1/2" BSPP / NPT / SAE 24 (or 2” Flange on DF model only)
Type of Connection
G = Threaded
F = Flange (only available on sizes 330, 660, & 1320)
Filtration Rating (microns)
3 Betamicron® (BH/HC) 25
5 Betamicron® (BN/HC) 74 Wire Screen
10 Absolute Filtration Rating 149 Nominal Filtration Rating
20 (ßx(c) ≥ 1000)
3
5 Metal Fiber
10 Nominal Filtration Rating
20
Type of ∆P Clogging Indicator
A = no indicator Indicator Model
B = visual (pop-up) (Automatic reset) VD...B
BM = visual (pop-up) (manual reset) VD...BM
C = electrical (electric switch) VD...C
D = electrical/visual (lamp) (electric switch & light) VD...D
J = electric switch (Brad Harrison, 5 pin mini) VD...J
J4 = electric switch (Brad Harrison, 4 pin micro) VD...J4
LE = visual-mechanical/electrical indicator VD...LE
LZ = visual-mechanical/electrical indicator with 75% and 100% switching contact VD...LZ
Type Number
1 = Sizes 30 to 660
2 = Sizes 660 to 1320 (two-piece bowl)
Modification Number (latest version always supplied)
Port Configuration
0 = BSPP
3 = NPT Ports
12 = SAE Straight Thread O-Ring Boss Ports
16 = SAE Flange Ports (sizes 330, 660, & 1320 only)
Seals
(omit) = Nitrile (NBR) (standard)
V = Fluoro Rubber (FKM)
EPR = Ethylene Propylene (EPDM)
Bypass Valve
(omit) = Without Bypass (BH3HC or V elements recommended)
B3 = 43PSID Bypass (optional)
B6 = 87PSID Bypass (standard)
Supplementary Details
SO103H = Modification of BN3HC (Low Collapse) Element For Phosphate Esters
SO155H = Modification of BH3HC (High Collapse) Element For Phosphate Esters
SO184 = G-1/2 Drain in Bowl Option For Sizes 60 - 280 (comes standard for sizes 330, 660, & 1320)
W = Indicator with brass piston (for use with water based fluids)
L24 = Lamp for 24 Volts
(D-type clogging indicator only)
T100 = Indicator Thermal Lockout, 100°F (Consult factory on B & BM Indicators for thermal lockout)
Model Codes Containing Red are non-stock items — Minimum quantities may apply – Contact HYDAC for information and availability
1-877-GO HYDAC Filter Catalog 116

DF Series
Dimensions:
DF 30 10-32UNF x 0.24”
(6mm)
(4 Places)
DF 1320 1/2-20UNF x 0.67
M12 x 17
in 4 places
1.77” ø 2.64”
(45mm) (67mm)
4.53”
(115mm)
6.26”
(159 mm) 5.43”
1.18” (138mm)
(30mm)
2.72”
(69mm)
Indicator Port
2.36”
G 1/2” (60mm)
1320 G 1320 F
6.58” 6.30”
(167mm) (160mm)
1.34”
(34mm)
0.650
(16.5 mm)
0.24”
INLET OUTLET (6mm)
2.05”
(52mm)
5.04”
(128mm) INLET OUTLET
3.46”
(88mm)
G 1/2” Drain
Plug (optional)
3.00” 29.21”
ø 2.05” (75mm) (742mm)
(52mm) Clearance Required
For Element Removal
DF 60-660 DF 60/110 DF 160/240/280 DF 330/660

1.26”
(32mm)
1.38”
(35mm)
2.36”
(60mm)
D5 x T2
(4 Places)
DF 60/110
ø 3.31” DF 60/110
(84mm) 2.21”
(56mm)
DF 160/240/280
DF 160/240/280 4.41”
ø 4.57” (112mm)
(116mm) 3.45”
(85mm)
DF 330/660
ø 6.30” DF 330/660
(160mm) 4.53”
(115mm)
DF 60/110 DF 160/240/280 DF 330/660

3.62” 5.04” 6.38” Drain Plug
(92mm) (128mm) (162mm) G 1/2” 26.38”
5.20” (670mm)
Clearance Required
(132mm)
for Element Removal
Indicator Port 0.28”
(7mm) 5.98”
G 1/2”
(152mm)
DF 60/110
1.61”
(41mm)
DF 160/240/280
SAE-32 Flange Code 62
INLET OUTLET
1.89”
(48mm) DF 330, 660 & 1320 F only
DF 330/660
2.01”
(51mm) 3.81”
DF 60
(97mm)
5.55” DF 280 3/4-10UNC-2B x 1.00”
(141mm) 17.13” (25mm)
DF 60 DF 110 (435mm)
3.35”
(85mm)
DF 280 8.11” DF 330
(4 Places)
13.70” (206mm) 9.92”
DF 110 (348mm) DF 160 (252mm)
6.06” DF 330 7.48”
(154mm) (190mm) DF 660
DF 160
6.54”
(166mm)
16.65” 1.750
DF 240 (423mm)
4.61” DF 660 9.88” 44.5
(117mm) 13.27” (251mm)
DF 240 (337mm)
6.93”
(176mm)
Drain Plug
G 1/2”
(optional for sizes 30-280)
DF 60/110 DF 160/240/280 DF 330/660

2.68” 3.74” 5.12”
(68mm) (95mm) (130mm)
Size 30 60 110 160 240 280 330 660 1320

Weight (lbs.) 4.0 8.6 12.6 20.0 23.4 32.0 47.2 62.4 105.8
Dimensions shown are for general information and overall envelope size only. Weights listed are without element.
For complete dimensions please contact HYDAC to request a certified print, or visit www.hydacusa.com/filter-cp
117 Filter Catalog

Sizing Information:
Housing Curves
Assembly ∆P = Housing ∆P (from curves) + Flow (in GPM) x K Factor (from chart)
Adjustments must be made for viscosity & specific gravity of the fluid to be used! (see sizing section)
DF 30 Housing DF 60 / 110 Housings

Q in l/min Q in l/min
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105
20 25 2.0
1.2
15 1.0 20 1.5
∆P in bar
∆P in bar
∆P in psi
∆P in psi
0.8
10 0.6 10 1.5
0.4
5 5 0.5
0.2
0 0 0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Q in gpm Q in gpm
DF 160 / 240 / 280 Housings DF 330 / 660 /1320 Housings

Q in l/min Q in l/min
0 40 80 120 160 200 0 120 240 360 480 600
20 25
3.2
1.2
20
15 1.0 2.4
∆P in bar
∆P in psi
20
∆P in bar
∆P in psi
0.8
10 1.6
0.6 10
5 0.4 0.8
5
0.2
0 0 0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 30 60 90 120 150 180
Q in gpm Q in gpm
Element K Factors:
...D...BN3HC (Betamicron® Low Collapse) ...D...BH3HC (Betamicron® High Collapse)
Size Size
3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm 3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm
0030 2.480 1.897 1.768 0.979 0030 4.466 3.978 3.096 1.795
0060 2.334 1.785 1.664 0.921 0060 3.054 2.720 2.117 1.227
0110 1.114 0.852 0.794 0.440 0110 1.401 1.248 0.972 0.563
0160 0.675 0.516 0.481 0.266 0160 0.872 0.777 0.605 0.351
0240 0.415 0.317 0.296 0.164 0240 0.522 0.465 0.362 0.210
0280 0.191 0.146 0.136 0.075 0280 0.234 0.208 0.162 0.094
0330 0.266 0.204 0.190 0.105 0330 0.369 0.328 0.256 0.148
0660 0.122 0.093 0.087 0.048 0660 0.166 0.148 0.115 0.067
1320 0.058 0.043 0.031 0.024 1320 0.077 0.046 0.033 0.027
…D…V Elements …D…W/HC Elements

Size Size
3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm 25, 50, 74, 100, 149, 200 µm
0030 1.011 0.740 0.411 0.200 0030 0.185
0060 0.877 0.511 0.296 0.183 0060 0.092
0110 0.452 0.304 0.182 0.118 0110 0.050
0160 0.251 0.177 0.123 0.079 0160 0.035
0240 0.169 0.137 0.093 0.062 0240 0.023
0280 0.126 0.093 0.064 0.041 0280 0.020
0330 0.121 0.097 0.065 0.043 0330 0.020
0660 0.063 0.050 0.034 0.021 0660 0.008
1320 0.032 0.026 0.018 0.012 1320 0.004

<- Quick Navigation ->
The new Des-Case® Disposable Steel Breather is the ideal desiccant breather for mobile
equipment. With 1 micron filtration and a rugged metal housing, this breather is durable,
resistant to vibration and can withstand a greater range of temperatures.
Moisture and particulate accumulation are major factors of oil

contamination in industrial equipment. Neglected, these
detriments restrict equipment efficiency, causing machine
downtime and significant expense in replacement oil, parts and
repair labor.
Des-Case breathers incorporate a proven, field-tested design.
They prevent water and contaminants from entering fluid
reservoirs as differential pressures occur through thermal
expansion and contraction of the fluid, or during the filling or
emptying process.
Des-Case breathers utilize the entire area of the patented
polyester filter media to remove solid particulate material as
"Industry spends billions of small as 3-microns. Accompanying water vapor is then removed
by the desiccant agent. A final filter ensures that only clean dry
dollars annually treating the air enters the system. See how it works!
negative effects of oil
contamination."
Des-Case attacks the cause as opposed to
treating the problem of contamination.
Designed and developed by filtration engineers Every Des-Case desiccant breather is manufactured in a
the Des-Case hygroscopic breather is a unique, durable, shock-absorbing clear plastic casing with resilient
patented air filter and water vapor removal qualities to withstand the customary abuse associated with
system. It will virtually eliminate moisture and heavy manufacturing equipment. The units are disposable, and
particulate contamination in industrial are manufactured entirely of environmentally safe components.
equipment reservoirs such as hydraulic tanks Des-Case standard desiccant breathers are manufactured in
and gear boxes. three sizes, DC-2, DC-3, and DC-4 to accommodate different
mounting space requirements. All three models are rated for 20
cfm of air in and out of the tank or reservoir (the equivalent of
150 gpm fluid level change in the tank).
The Des-Case Sizing Wizard will help you determine the best
Des-Case hygroscopic breather elements are product for your application.
state-of-the-art in design and function, and are
industry's best choice for assuring maximum
machine performance. Des-Case offers these
cost-saving benefits:
Elimination of water-contaminated oil which
leads to additive stripping
Elimination of rust-forming condensation
Elimination of sludge deposits
Less abrasive particles to prolong machine
operating life
Longer oil and oil filter life
Des-Case standard disposable breathers retain particulate as small as 0.5-micron (73.5%efficiency) or 3-micron
absolute, are rated for 20 cfm and feature a 1" threaded standpipe.
Water
Model# Diameter Height
Adsorption
DC-2 4in/10.16cm 4.5in/11.43cm .7 cups
DC-3 4in/10.16cm 6.5in/16.51cm 1 cups
DC-4 4in/10.16cm 8.5in/21.59cm 1.5 cups
* All adsorption rates are approximate and do not factor in the positive
effects of regeneration.
Disposable Unit Adaptors for use with Optional Accessories

Clamps DC-11
NEW polycarbonate DC-2 DC-3, DC-4 Flexhose DC-16
Model # Description
New 1" NPT Female

DC-12T
Threaded Field Adaptor
New 1" NPT Female
DC-15T Threaded Brass Flange
Adaptor
New 1" NPT Female -3/4" NPT
DC-17T
Male Adaptor
Des-Case desiccant breathers are designed for installation on most equipment regardless of location. For
installation in difficult areas, Des-Case offers accessories enabling breather placement to be several feet away from
an oil reservoir or gearbox.
Breathers Tech Notes Case Studies Distributors How It Works Sizing Wizard
Home About Des-Case Newsroom Contact Us
Â© 2005 Des-Case Corporation, All Rights Reserved

Simple, dependable lubricant protection
Disposable Desiccant Breathers

• Resilient polycarbonate plastic body
disposable
and nylon standpipe
• Bi-directional, controlled airflow
• Multi-tiered filtration process
• Water vapor adsorbent
• Resilient construction
• Color indicator for easy system monitoring
Standard disposable Breathers *height is from base of standpipe to top of cap.
Model # DC-2 DC-3 DC-4
Unit Size * (height, in./cm.) 6.25/15.9 8.25/21 10.25/26
Unit Diameter (in./cm.) 4/10.16 4/10.16 4/10.16
Filtration Area (in.2 /cm.2) 11.2/ 72.3 11.2/ 72.3 11.2/ 72.3
Amount of Silica Gel (lbs./kg.) 1/.45 1.5/.68 2/.91
Adsorption Capacity (cups) .7 1.1 1.5
Max. Flow Rate (cfm @1 PSID) 16 16 16 DC-2 DC-3 DC-4
Filtration (µ absolute) 3 3 3
Op. Temp. Range (˚F/ ˚C) -58/-50 to 212/100 -58/-50 to 212/100 -58/-50 to 212/100
Hydrophilic Agent Silica Gel Silica Gel Silica Gel Filter Element
Foam Pad Second polyester
Filter Media Polyester Polyester Polyester Reduces oil mist that filter element
Connection Size (NPT) 1" 1" 1" contacts silica gel during protects against
exhalation and ensures any migration of
outgoing air is evenly desiccant dust,
disbursed through the providing maximum
Miniature Disposable Breathers filters and desiccant. efficiency through
"backflushing."
• Diminutive design aids Water Vapor
Adsorbent
installation in confined areas Silica gel
absorbs water
from incoming
air. Indicates
condition by
change of color Resilient
from blue to Polycarbonate
pink. Body*
Shock-absorbing,
Filter Element clear casing
Patented polyester provides reliable
filter element service
removes airborne and easy
DC-BB DC-1 contamination to maintenance.
3-micron absolute
(74% efficient at
Miniature disposable Breathers .5-micron). Unique
loops allow Foam Pad
Model # DC-BB DC-1 Captures any
particles to release
Unit Size (height, in./ cm.) 3/7.62 5/12.7 during system oil mist and
Unit Diameter (in./ cm.) 2.75/6.99 2.75/6.99 exhalation, helping disperses
to increase breather incoming air
Filtration Area (in.2/ cm.2) 4.12/ 26.6 4.12/ 26.6 life. evenly over
Amount of Silica Gel (oz./g.) 2 / 57 4 / 113 filtration and
Air Vents drying areas.
Adsorption Capacity (fl.oz./ml.) .4/ 12 .8/24 Individual air intakes
Max. Flow Rate (cfm @1 PSID) 3 3 are opened based on
the flow
Filtration (µ absolute) 3 3 requirements of the
Op. Temp. Range (˚F/ ˚C) -20/-29 to 200/93 -20/-29 to 200/93 system. Rated for 20 Threaded
cfm. (Plugs keep unit Mounting
Hydrophilic Agent Silica Gel Silica Gel
inactive until use). Easily replaces
Filter Media Polyester Polyester standard filler/
Connection Size (NPT) 3/8" 3/8" breather cap
with one of two
adaptors.
*The end user is responsible for ensuring

chemical compatibility for specific applications.

disposable
isolating breathers for barrier protection

Resilient Construction
Durable molded housing for
reliable service.
Expansion
Chamber Foam Pad
The diaphragm Stops oil mist during
allows for exhalation. Ensures
expansion/ outgoing air is evenly
contraction of the air disbursed through
disposable
Hydroguard by Des-Case within the filters and desiccant,

casing as a result of providing maximum
temperature varia- efficiency through
• Hybrid technology breather for tions during steady "backflushing."
state
low-flow applications operations. Filter Element
(i.e. gearboxes) Second
polyester filter
• Ideal for washdowns and high element protects
humidity areas against any migra-
tion of
• Desiccant, particulate filtration Water Vapor desiccant.
Adsorbent
ensure incoming air is dry and Color indicating
clean silica gel adsorbs
water from incoming
Air Outlets
Displaced air from
• Expansion chamber system air. Replace when bladder expansion
color changes from
isolates lubes from blue to pink.
escapes here.
extreme ambient humidity

• Check valves ensure no excess Filter Element
Foam Pad Provides 3-micron
DC-HG-8 pressure/vacuum builds Disperses absolute filtration.
incoming air Unique loops allow
evenly over particles to release dur-
filtration and ing exhalation, increas-
drying areas. ing lifespan.
Slip-Fit Connection Dual Check Valves

Easily replaces standard Provide slight system pres-
filler/breather cap with adap- surization (0.43 psi) which
tor/reducer options. allows for
controlled breathing with-
* Patent pending. out excessive
temperature build-up.
HYDROGUARD DISPOSABLE BREATHER

Model # Unit Size Filtration Amount Adsorption Max. Flow Rate Filtration Op. Temp Hydrophilic Filter Connection
(h x dia., in.) Area (in.2) Silica Gel (lbs.) Capacity (cups) (cfm@1 PSID) (µ absolute) Range (˚F ) Agent Media Size
(h x dia., cm.) Area (cm.2) Silica Gel (kg.) (˚C) (slip-fit design)
DC-HG-8 10 x 4 11.2 .9 1 Thermal Expansion/ 3 -20 to 200 Silica Gel Polyester 1"
25.1 x 10.2 49.4 .41 Contraction Only -28.9 to 93
VentGuard by Des-Case
• Hybrid technology breather for pumps

• Desiccant, particulate filtration ensure incoming air is
dry and clean
• Expansion chamber system isolates lubes from extreme
ambient humidity
• Check valves ensure no excess pressure/vacuum builds
DC-VG-1 DC-VG-4 DC-VG-4R

DC-VG-4R is the replacement filter cartridge for the DC-VG-4.
ventguard pump Breathers DC-VG-4RB is the replacement bladder for the DC-VG-4.
Model # DC-VG-1 DC-VG-4
Unit Height (in. / cm.) 5 / 12.7 8/ 20.3
Unit Diameter (in. / cm.) 2.75 / 6.99 3.5 / 8.9
Filtration Area (in.2 / cm.2) 4.12/ 26.6 4.12/ 26.6
Amount of Silica Gel (oz./g) 4.8 / 136 4.8 / 136
Adsorption Capacity (fl oz./ml) .8/ 29.6 .8/ 29.6
Max. Flow Rate (cfm @1.5 PSID) 1 1
Filtration (µ absolute) 3 3
disposable
Op. Temp. Range (˚F / ˚C) - 20 / -29 to 200 / 93 - 20 / -29 to 200 / 93
Hydrophilic Agent Silica Gel Silica Gel
Filter Media Polyester Polyester
Connection Size (NPT) 3/8" 3/8"
products designed for your specific needs
Hydrophilic
Media
Hydrophilic media
creates a water
barrier.
Pleated
particulate filter
element protects
against dirt
Durable, shock
absorbing hous-
ing. DC-SB-25 with optional vacuum indicator and DC-SB-35
Optional
Oil Coalescing Double Play and Triple Play
Option to coalesce
oil with use of Contamination Control Breathers
coalescing layer
• Creates an impenetrable barrier against water droplets

• Pleated element provides a large surface area
Threaded Mounting
Easily replaces
and is 99.5% efficient in blocking particles
standard 1µ and larger
filler/breather cap
with adaptor/reducer • Coalesces oil mist, preventing contamination
options.
of working environment (TriplePlay only)
• Visual vacuum indicator option actuates when
maximum restriction has been reached
• Rugged ABS plastic housing
• Easy installation requires hand tighten only
Double play and triple play breathers
Model # Unit Size Filtration Amount Adsorption Max. Flow Rate Filtration Op. Temp Hydrophilic Filter Connection
(h x dia., in.) Area (in.2) Silica Gel Capacity (cups) (µ absolute) Range (˚F) Agent Media Size (NPT)
2
(h x dia., cm.) Area (cm. ) Range (˚C)

DC-SB-25 5 x 5 180 n/a n/a 40 cfm @ 1 psid 1 -20 to 200 n/a Polyester 1"
12.7 x 12.7 1161 -28.9 to 93.3
DC-SB-35 5 x 5 180 n/a n/a 40 cfm @ 1 psid 1 -20 to 200 n/a Oleophobic 1"
12.7 x 12.7 1161 -28.9 to 93.3 Polyester

disposable
Disposable Steel Breather

disposable
• Rugged housing ideal for harsh environments,

high temperature, mobile and nautical applications
• Color indicator window for easy system monitoring
• Bi-directional, controlled airflow
• Multi-tiered filtration process
• Water vapor adsorbent
• Resilient construction
DC-DS-6 with recommended, optional Flapper
Valve Adaptor DC-DSV5
Second particulate
filter element Second foam
protects against filter stops oil
migration mist during
of desiccant. exhalation,
evenly
distributes air.
Color indicating
silica gel adsorbs
water from incoming
air. Replace when
color changes from
blue to pink.
Stainless steel
standpipe.
Visual
indicator
windows on 2
Air diffuser/oil sides of breather.
mist foam filter.
disposable Steel Breather

Model # DC-DS-6
Air inlets are open to meet Unit Size (height, in./ cm.) 6.5/ 16.5
system requirements, Unit Diameter (in./ cm.) 5/ 12.7
providing ‘controlled’
breathing. This maximizes the Filtration area (in.2/ dm.2) 38 / 2.45
lifespan of the breather. Amount of silica gel (lbs. / g.) 1.5 / 680
Adsorption capacity (fl. oz. / ml.) 9 / 266
Max. flow rate (cfm @1 PSID) 20
Filtration (micron) 1µ
Operating temperature range (˚F) -20 to +250
Operating temperature range (˚C) -28.9 to 121.1
Hydrophilic agent Indicating silica gel
Filter media Microglass
Connection size Varies depending on adaptor
The DC-DS-6 requires one of the following adaptors:
DC-DSA-10, DC-DSA-17, or DC-DSV5

Disposable breather Accessories to suit your requirements
Des-Case provides a wide range of disposable breather accessories for easy adaption to your specific applications and
working environment.
Mounting Adaptors
disposable
HydroGuard™ and tank breathers are
easily installed using one of several
adaptor options.
Vacuum Indicator Breather Manifolds:

Adaptor: Single position Available in 2, 3 or 4 breather
indicator actuates when configurations to mount multiple
maximum filter restriction disposable breather models.
has been reached.
Oil Coalescing Adaptor: Heavy Duty Clamp Adaptor:

Oil coalescing media Steel casing adds extra
captures oil mist, funnels stability to standard disposable
back to system. breather models DC-2, DC-3,
DC-4. Available in carbon or Disposable unit adaptors (use with
*DC-OCM5-VI shown DC-HG-8, DC-VG1, DC-VG-4, DC-DS6)
stainless steel. Model # Description
DC-10 1" Threaded Adaptor
DC-17 1" - 3/4" Threaded Reducer
NEW Mounting Adaptors for Threaded DC-18 1" - 1/4" Brass Threaded Reducer/Adaptor
DC-11 Hose Clamps
DC-2, DC-3, and DC-4
DC-12 Field Adaptor
DC-15 Flange Adaptor
DC-16 Flex Hose
DC-ME-2 '2' Breather Manifold
DC-HDC Heavy Duty Clamps for DC-2, 3, or 4
DC-13 1" Slip Fit to 1" Female Threaded Adaptor
DC-13-PI 1" Slip Fit to 1" Female Threaded Adaptor with
Single Position Vacuum Indicator
DC-PI 1/8" Single Position Vacuum Indicator
DC-35 3/4" - 3/8" SCH, 40 PVC Reducer Bushing
DC-36 1" - 3/8" SCH, 80 PVC Reducer Bushing
Disposable unit adaptors FOR use with
NEW POLYCARBONATE DC-2 DC-3, DC-4 DC-37 1/2" - 3/8". 40 PVC Reducer Bushing
Model # Description DC-OCM-3T Oil Coalescing Adaptor for DC-2, DC-3, DC-4
DC-12T New 1" NPT Female Threaded Field Adaptor DC-DSA-10 1" Threaded Adaptor for Disposable Steel DC-DS-6
DC-15T New 1" NPT Female Threaded Brass Flange Adaptor DC-DSA-17 3/4” Threaded Adaptor for Disposable Steel DC-DS-6
DC-17T New 1" NPT Female -3/4" NPT Male Adaptor DC-DSV5 1" Threaded Flapper Valve Adaptor for Disposable Steel

technical information
contamination control starts with breather protection
Preventing the ingression of dirt and water into the

lubricant is the most effective, yet least fully utilized,
method of controlling contamination.
Ingression of moisture and particles can occur with any
technical
change in the lubricant level. Even the thermal expansion
and contraction of the headspace causes enough differ-
ential pressure to draw in moisture and contaminants.
Des-Case breathers are the ideal solution to keep lubri-

cants and equipment running dry and clean.
Adsorb Moisture
By prohibiting entry of mois-
ture using silica gel technology,
breathers prevent corrosion and
additive depletion inside the
fluid reservoir.
Collect Airborne Particles

By prohibiting entry of
particulate contamination, A DC-SS-40 breather protects outside lubricant
breathers reduce abrasive storage tanks at a chemical manufacturing facility.
damage and sludge build-up
within the fluid reservoir.
Life Extension Table: Moisture
New Moisture Level (ppm)

10,000 5,000 2,500 1,000 500 250 100 50
Rolling Rolling Rolling Rolling Rolling Rolling Rolling Rolling
Element Journal Element Journal Element Journal Element Journal Element Journal Element Journal Element Journal Element Journal
50,000 2.3 1.6 3.3 1.9 4.8 2.3 7.8 2.9 11.2 3.5 16.2 4.3 26.2 5.5 37.8 6.7
25,000 1.6 1.3 2.3 1.6 3.3 1.9 5.4 2.4 7.8 2.9 11.2 3.5 18.2 4.6 26.2 5.5
Current Moisture Level (ppm)
10,000 1.4 1.2 2.0 1.5 3.3 1.9 4.8 2.3 6.9 2.8 11.2 3.5 16.2 4.3
5,000 1.4 1.2 2.3 1.6 3.3 1.9 4.8 2.3 7.8 2.9 11.2 3.5
2,500 1.6 1.3 2.3 1.6 3.3 1.9 5.4 2.4 7.8 2.9
1,000 1.4 1.2 2.0 1.5 3.3 1.9 4.8 2.3
500 1.4 1.2 2.3 1.6 3.3 1.9
250 1.5 1.3 2.3 1.6
100 1.4 1.2
Source: Noria Corporation Oil Analysis I Course Manual, 2000-2001
23
Optimize Reliability, Extend Lube & Equipment life
Des-Case breathers are designed to:

• Prohibit entry of damaging contaminants
• Maintain fluid cleanliness
• Reduce oxidation rate
Technical
• Improve hydrolytic stability of oils

• Reduce equipment and lubricant wear
• Decrease unscheduled downtime
• Extend oil and equipment life
Effectively controlling, or eliminating, contamination will

have a significant impact on the reliability of lubricants
and machinery.
Drum and Tote Protection

Keep new oil clean and dry
by using breathers to protect
lubricants in storage.
Life Extension Table
New Cleanliness Level (ISO Code)

20/17 19/16 18/15 17/14 16/13 15/12 14/11 13/10 12/9 11/8 10/7
26/23 5 3 7 3.5 9 4 >10 5 >10 6 >10 7.5 >10 9 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10
4 2.5 4.5 3 6 3.5 6.5 4 7.5 5 8.5 6.5 10 7 >10 9 >10 10 >10 >10 >10 >10
25/22 4 2.5 5 3 7 3.5 9 4 >10 5 >10 6 >10 7 >10 9 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10 >10
3 2 3.5 2.5 4.5 3 5 3.5 6.5 4 8 5 9 6 10 7.5 >10 9 >10 >10 >10 >10
24/21 3 2 4 2.5 6 3 7 4 9 5 >10 6 >10 7 >10 8 >10 10 >10 >10 >10 >10
2.5 1.5 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 6.5 4 7.5 5 8.5 6 9.5 7 >10 8 >10 10 >10 >10
23/20 2 1.5 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 7 3.5 9 4 >10 5 >10 6 >10 8 >10 9 >10 >10
Current Machine Cleanliness (ISO Code)
1.7 1.3 2.3 1.5 3 2 3.7 2.5 5 3 6 3.5 7 4 8 5 10 6.5 >10 8.5 >10 >10
22/19 1.6 1.3 2 1.6 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 7 3.5 8 4 >10 5 >10 6 >10 7 >10 >10
1.4 1.1 1.8 1.3 2.3 1.7 3 2 3.5 2.5 4.5 3 5.5 3.5 7 4 8 5 10 5.5 >10 8.5
21/18 1.3 1.2 1.5 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 7 3.5 9 4 >10 5 >10 7 >10 10
1.2 1.1 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.4 2.2 1.6 3 2 3.5 2.5 4.5 3 5 3.5 7 4 9 5.5 10 8
20/17 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 7 4 9 5 >10 7 >10 9
1.2 1.05 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.4 2.3 1.7 3 2 3.5 2.5 5 3 6 4 8 5.5 10 7
19/16 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 7 4 9 6 >10 8
1.2 1.1 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.5 2.2 1.7 3 2 3.5 2.5 5 3.5 7 4.5 9 6
18/15 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 2.5 5 3 7 4.5 >10 6
1.2 1.1 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.5 2.3 1.7 3 2 3.5 2.5 5.5 3.7 8 5
17/14 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 2.5 6 3 8 5
1.2 1.1 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.5 2.3 1.7 3 2 4 2.5 6 3.5
16/13 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 3.5 6 4
Hydraulics & Rolling Element 1.2 1.1 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.5 2.3 1.8 3.7 3 4.5 3.5
15/12 Diesel Engines Bearings 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.5 2 1.7 3 2 4 2.5
1.2 1.1 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.5 2.3 1.8 3 2.2
14/11 Journal Bearings & Gearboxes & 1.3 1.3 1.6 1.6 2 1.8 3 2
Turbo Machinery Other 1.3 1.2 1.6 1.4 1.9 1.5 2.3 1.8
13/10 1.4 1.2 1.8 1.5 2.5 1.8
1.2 1.1 1.6 1.3 2 1.6
Source: Noria Corporation Oil Analysis I Course Manual, 2000-2001
24
application data
maximize lubricant life with proper use of breathers
DC-2, DC-3, DC-4

.241
.207
.172
technical
.138
PSID
BAR
.103
.068
.034
GPM (fluid exchange rate)
DC-2, DC-3, DC-4

.241
DC-2 breathers are used to protect small hydraulic

.207
reservoirs on port applications in Asia.
.172
.138
PSID
BAR
A sample of sizing guidelines for desiccant breathers .103
Model Flow (max) Absorption Reservoirs* Gearboxes .068

DC-BB 3 cfm 0.09 cups up to 2
.034
DC-1 3 cfm 0.18 cups up to 5
DC-2 20 cfm 0.65 cups up to 50 up to 100
SCFM
0 1.89 3.78 5.68 7.57
Please visit our sizing wizard at www.des-case.com
Industry Application Special Considerations Breather Recommendation
Gearboxes in paper High humidity, Desiccant breather or desiccant

Paper Industry
mill and wood yard paper dust breather/diaphragm combo
55-gallon storage Thermal
All Industries Desiccant breather
drums expansion/contraction
Oil mist harmful for
Paper Industry Oil slinging pumps Oil coalescing breather
environment
Desiccant breather/diaphragm
Food Processing Conveyor gearboxes Daily wash downs
combo
Hydraulic power
Power Generation Downtime is very costly Desiccant breather
units
Oil coalescing/desiccant breather
Stamping Hydraulic units High volume, oil misting
combo
Moderate to high
Desiccant breather or oil coalesc-
Injection Molding Hydraulic units volume, potential oil
ing/desiccant breather combo
misting
25
application data
maximize lubricant life with proper use of breathers
Technical
Air Flow Performance*: Steel

PSID
DC/CS-6 breathers are used to manage the health

of synthetic lubricants at a power gen facility.
SCFM Air Flow
0 4.72 9.45 14.18 18.90 23.62 28.30 33.08 37.80 42.47 47.19 51.90 56.70
0 74.8 149.6 224.4 299.2 374.0 448.8 523.6 598.4 673.2 748.0 822.8 897.6
* Air flows are approximations. By manifolding two

DC-4 breathers, this
papermaker protects
lube reservoirs while
extending change
intervals between
breathers.
GLOSSARY
glossary ofOF TERMS
terms
Absolute filtration rating: The diameter of the largest hard spherical particle that will pass through a filter under specified test conditions. This is an
indication of the largest opening in the filter elements.
Adsorption: Adhesion of the molecules of gases, liquids, or dissolved substances to a solid surface, resulting in relatively high
concentration of the molecules at the place of contact
Adsorptive filtration: The attraction to, and retention of particles in, a filter medium by electrostatic forces, or by molecular attraction between the
particles and the medium.
Breather: A device permitting air movement between atmosphere and the component in/on which it is installed
cfm: Cubic feet per minute. GPM /7.5=CFM (Err on the side of caution when sizing breather)
gpm: Gallons per minute.
Hydrophilic: Compounds with an affinity for water.
Oxidation: Occurs when oxygen attacks petroleum fluids. The process is accelerated by heat, light, metal catalysts and the presence of
water, acids, or solid contaminants. It leads to increased viscosity and deposit formation.
Filter Efficiency: Method of expressing a filter's ability to trap and retain contaminants of a given size.
Filter Element: The porous device which performs the actual process of filtration.
Filtration: The physical or mechanical process of separating insoluble particulate matter from a fluid, such as air or liquid, by passing the
fluid through a filter medium that will not allow the particulates to pass through it.
26
For assistance, please call 615.672.8800 or visit des-case.com
Thousands of satisfied Des-Case product users around
the world enjoy an outstanding record of trouble-free
service and quality product support.
If you have questions regarding Des-Case products, one
technical
of our trained professionals will assist you in getting the
information you need quickly.
A panel unit is mounted on a kiln in a cement plant. A DC-4 breather protects a

hydraulic reservoir.
A DC/CS-30 breather is used to preserve diesel fuel

in outdoor storage tanks.
Manifolded DC-4 breathers

protect an outdoor fuel
storage tank.
27
Effective03/01/03
ifs
BSF PUMPA{OTORADAPTORS
'v for
,'),"r".t:::"fi:ir'*r*
t,so"""tcE"-;="1 NEMA C-FACE Motors and SAE FLANGE Pumps
PUMP DATA MOTOR DATA - NEMA FRAME SIZE
SAE PILOT MTG.

s5c r82TC 284TSC 324TC 324TSC 364TC 364TSC
stzE DIA BOLT thru thru thru thru thru thru thru
l45TC 256TC 285TC 326TC 326T5C 405TC 405TSC
2.. I 102-310 1102-320 1102-330 1102-340 1102-341 1102-345 1102-346
A 3.250 4.. 1104-310 1104-320 1104-330 1104-340 11M-341 1104-345 1104-346
$100.00 $107.00 $124.00 $r86.00 $1E5.00 $191.00 $190.00
2.. 1202-310 1202-320 1202-330 1202-3/;0 1202-341 1202-U5 1202-v6
B 4.m0 4.. 1204-310 12U-320 1204-330 120/,-3/;0 12U-341 1204-345 12U-3/,6
$97.00 $114.00 $133.00 $lEE.00 $1E7.00 $193.00 $192.00
2.. 1302-310 1302-320 1302-330 1302-340 1302-341 1302-345 1302-346
c 5.000 4.. 1304-310 1304-320 1304-330 1304-340 1304-341 1304-345 1304-346
$r06.00 $r1s.00 $140.00 $190.00 $189.00 $194.00 $193.00
2.. 1402-320 1402-330 1402-U0 1402-341 1402-U5 1402-U6
D 6.000 4.. 140/-320 1404-330 1404-340 14M-341 14U-U5 1404-346
$140.00 $160.00 $220.00 $219.00 $226.00 $22s.00
E 6.500 4.. 1504-340 1504-341 1504-345 1504-346
,v $248.00 $247.00 $254.00 $2s3.00
F 7.000 4.. 1604-340 1604-341 1604-345 1604-346

$268.00 $267.00 $274.00 $273.00
Large NEMA C-FACE Motors and SAE FLANGE Pumps

BSF recommendsthe HeavyDuty stylefor motorswith ratingsover 200 hp
MOTORDATA-- NEMAFMME SIZE

PUMP DATA
Standard
Design HeavyDutyDesign
444TC 444TSC 444TC 444TSC 504TC 504TSC
SAE PILOT MTG. thru thru thru thru thru thru
SIZE DIA BOLT 449TC 449TSC 449TC 449TSC 505TC 505TSC
2.. 1302-355 1302-356 1302-355HD1302-356H0 1302-365HD1302-366HD

c 5.000 4.. 1304-355 1304-356 1304-355HD1304-356HD1304-365H0 1304-366H0
$276.00 $275.00 $346.00 s34s.00 $340.00 $339.00
2.. 1402-355 1402-356 14UZ-3bbHU 14U2-356HU -365HD 1402-366HD
1402
D 6.000 4..
'1404-355 1404-356 1404-355HD1404-356
HD 1404-365HD1404-366HD
$288.00 $287.00 $352.00 $3sr.00 $346.00 $345.00
E 6.500 4.. 1504-355 1504-356 1504-355HD1504-356HD 1504-365HD 1504-366HD

$311.00 $310.00 $371.00 $370.00 $360.00 $359.00
'\y
F 7.000 4.. 1604-355 1604-356 1604-355HD 1604-356HD1604-365HD 1604-366HD
$340.00 $339.00 $397.00 $396.00 s388.00 $387.00
ADAPTORDATASHEET
INCORPORATED
OPTIONALWORKSHEETFOR CRITICAL
Leaderin AND SPECIFICD/MENS/ONAL
REQUIREMINIS
Pump Mount Technology
Fst;ttc*;*1
HOLES
BOLTCIRCLE
MOTOR
PILOT
l__ l-
PUMP PILOT
SHAFT GAP
SHAFTLENGTH SHAFTLENGTH
SHAFTDIA. SHAFTEXTENSION
P I L O TT H I C K N E S S
i> SHAFT DIA.

I.
ll |-. fj:_
FHF
j_tt+t_fi
Y :TT_
-'1---r#
-+l l*
INSERT
CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
SHAFTENGAGEMENT SHAFTENGAGEMENT
M O T O RF: r o m e S i z e BSF MODEL

P U M P :M o k e CUST
OMER:
Model TION
LOCA
Mounting Po# QTY.
S h o ft BY: DATE:
C O U P L I N G :M o k e PHONE
-Y
Model FAX #
po Box 459 * VANDAL|A OH 45377 * 937-890-6121 * 800-232-7867 * FAX 937-A90-0974

Page 14
Low Pressure Filters
RF Series
In-Tank Inline Filters
360 PSI • up to 400 GPM Hydraulic Symbol:
A
B
Features: Technical Details:
• RF 60 - 330 filters constructed of aluminum material. Aluminum Mounting Method 4 Mounting holes - filter housing
alloy is water tolerant - anodization is not required for high water Port Connections Inlet Outlet
based fluids (HWBF). 60/110 SAE-12 SAE-12
• RF 660 - 1300 filters constructed of ductile iron. 160/240 SAE-20 SAE-20
330 2” NPT 2” NPT
• Non-welded housing design reduces stress concentrations d pre- 2” SAE Flange, Code 61 2” NPT
vents fatigue failure. 660 3” SAE Flange, Code 61 3”NPT
950 3 1/2” SAE Flange, Code 61 3 1/2” SAE Flange, Code 61
• Inlet/outlet port options include NPT, SAE straight thread O-ring 1300 4” SAE Flange, Code 61 4” SAE Flange, Code 61
boss, and SAE 4-bolt flange to allow easy installation without
costly adapters. Direction of Flow Inlet: Side Outlet: bottom
• O-ring seals are used to provide positive, reliable sealing. Choice Materials of Construction
Housing, Lid, Transfer Valve RF60-330 Aluminum
of O-ring materials (Nitrile, Fluoro Rubber, EPDM) provides RF660-1300 Ductile Iron
compatibility with petroleum oils, synthetic fluids, water-glycols,
oil/water emulsions, and high water base fluids. Flow Capacity
60 16 gpm (60 lpm)
• Bolt-on lid requires minimal clearance for removal. 110 29 gpm (110 lpm)
• Reusable contamination basket prevents loss of retained 160 42 gpm (160 lpm)
240 63 gpm (240 lpm)
contaminants into the reservoir during element replacement. 330 87 gpm (330 lpm)
• Clogging indicators can be serviced without interruption of the 660 174 gpm (660 lpm)
hydraulic system. 950 251 gpm (950 lpm)
1300 343 gpm (1300 lpm)
• Single piece casting provides rigidity for inline or in-tank mounting.
Housing Pressure Rating
Max. Operating Pressure: 360 psi (25 bar)
Proof Pressure: 540 psi (38 bar)
Fatigue Pressure: 360 psi (25 bar) @ 700,000 cycles
Burst Pressure: 60/110 1080 psi (75 bar)
Applications: 160/240 1230 psi (85 bar)
330 1440 psi (100 bar)
660-1300 >1440 psi (100 bar)
Element Collapse Pressure Rating
BN/HC, W/HC, V 250 psid (17 bar)
ECO/N, BN/AM, P/HC, AM 145 psid 10 bar)
Agricultural Automotive Construction Gearboxes Fluid Temperature Range -22° to 250°F (-30° to 121°C)
Fluid Compatability
Compatible with all petroleum oils and synthetic fluids rated for use
with Fluoro-Rubber or Ethylene Propylene seals. Contact HYDAC for
information on special housing and element constructions available for
use with water glycols, oil/water emulsions, and HWBF.
Industrial Offshore Power Pulp & Paper
Generation Indicator Trip Pressure
∆P = 29 psid (2 bar) -10% (standard)
∆P = 72 psid (5 bar) -10% (optional)
Bypass Valve Cracking Pressure
∆P = 43 psid (3 bar) +10% (standard)
∆P = 87 psid (6 bar) +10% (optional)
Railways Shipbuilding Steel / Heavy
Industry
19 Filter Catalog
Model Code:
RF BN/HC 330 D L 10 H 1 . X / 16 - V - B6 .
Filter Type
RF = In-Tank Return Line Filter
Filter Media
BN/HC = Betamicron® Low Collapse
ECO/N = ECOmicron® Low Collapse
AM = Aquamicron® Disposable
BN/AM = Betamicron®/Aquamicron®1
P/HC = Polyester
W/HC = Wire Screen Cleanable
Size
60, 110, 160, 240, 330, 660, 950, 1300
Pressure Rating
D = 360 psi (25 bar)
Type of Connection
C = SAE 12 (sizes 60, 110) Includes Adapter
E = SAE 20 (sizes RF 160, 240, 330) SAE-NPT
G = 1 1/4” NPT (size 330)
L = SAE 32 Flange (size 330)
N = SAE 48 Flange (size 660)
O = SAE 56 Flange (size 950)
P = SAE 64 Flange (size 1300)
Filtration Rating (micron)
3 Betamicron® (BN/HC) 10 Polyester (P/HC)
5 ECOmicron® (ECO/N) 20 Nominal Filtration Rating
10 Absolute Filtration Rating
20 (ßx(c) ≥ 1000)
Betamicron®/Aquamicron (BN/AM) 25
3 Absolute Filtration Rating 74 Wire Screen (W/HC)
10 (ßx(c) ≥ 100) 149 Nominal Filtration Rating
40 Aquamicron (AM)
®
Absolute Filtration Rating (ß40(c) ≥ 100)

Type of Static Clogging Indicator (static)
A = no clogging indicator Indicator Model
B = visual (pop-up) clogging indicator VR...B
H = electrical clogging indicator (AC Electric Switch) VR...H
D = electrical & visual (lamp) clogging indicator VR...DL...
E = color-coded pressure gauge (also Type ES) VR...E
F = pressure switch (42 volt max.) (DC Electric Switch) VR...F
LE = Electrical & Visual (pop-up) VR...LE
LZ = Electrical (75% & 100%) & Visual (pop-up) VR...LZ
Type Number
1 = Standard Connection
Modification Number (latest version always supplied)
Port Configuration
3 = NPT (size 330)
12 = SAE Straight Thread Inlet/Outlet Connections (sizes 60, 110, 160, 240, 330)
16 = SAE Flange Code 61 Inlet Connections (sizes 330 - 1300 only)
Seals
(omit) = Nitrile (NBR) (standard)
V = Fluoro Rubber (FKM)
EPR = Ethylene Propylene (EPDM)
Bypass Valve
(omit) = 43 psid (3 bar) (return line standard)
KB = No Bypass (flushing system)
B6 = 87 psid (6 bar) (return line)
B1 = 15 psid (1 bar) (lubrication or coolant applications)
B0.2 = 3 psid (0.20 bar) (suction line)
Supplementary
SO103H = Modification of BN3HC & W/HC Elements For Phosphate Ester Fluids
L24 = Lamp for 24 Volt
L48 = Lamp for 48 Volt D-type clogging
L115 = Lamp for 115 Volt indicator only
L230 = Lamp for 230 Volt
T100 = Indicator Thermal Lockout, 100°F (Consult factory for B and BM indicators)
1) Betamicron Aquamicron Combination Absolute and Water Removal Elements available in sizes 330, 660, 950, and 1300.
Model Codes Containing Red are non-stock items — Minimum quantities may apply – Contact HYDAC for information and availability

RF Series
Dimensions:
RF 60 - 240 RF 330 - 660
RF 60 RF 110 RF 160 RF 240 RF 330 RF 660
3.54” 6.30” 5.12” 7.48” 7.09” 12.60”
(90mm) (160mm) (130mm) (190mm) (180mm) (320mm)
Clearance required Clearance required
for element changeout
Indicator Port for element changeout
Indicator Port
G 1/2” G 1/2”
RF 330
RF 60 RF 60 / 110 5.63”
6.53” 3.94” (143mm)
(166mm) (100mm)
RF 660
RF 110 RF 160 / 240 7.05”
9.17” 4.72” (179mm)
RF 330
(233mm) (120mm)
11.1”
(282mm)
RF 160
8.18”
RF 660
(208mm)
16.61”
(422mm) RF 330
RF 240 2.48”
10.58” (63mm)
(269mm) RF 60 / 110
1.73” RF 660
(44mm) 3.31”
(84mm)
RF 160 / 240
2.13”
(54mm)
RF 60 RF 160
RF 110 RF 240 RF 330 RF 660
3.77” 4.96” 5.98” 7.72”
(96mm) (126mm) (152mm) (196mm)
RF 950 - 1300 Mounting Pattern

RF 950 RF 1300
13.78” 18.11”
(350mm) (460mm)
Clearance required
øD6
Indicator Port øD5
for element changeout
G 1/2”
RF 950 øD1
8.27”
(210mm)
RF 1300
RF 950
9.96”
18.11”
(253mm)
(460mm)
RF 1300
22.99”
(584mm) Size øD1 øD5 øD6
RF 950 3.15” 3.94” 0.26”
60 / 110
3.66” (80mm) (100mm) (6.5mm)
(93mm) 4.17” 5.32” 0.30”
160 / 240 (106mm) (135mm) (7.5mm)
RF 1300
4.76” 5.31” 6.9” 0.35”
330
(121mm) (135mm) (170mm) (9mm)
6.89” 8.66” 0.55”
660 (175mm) (220mm) (14mm)
8.19” 11.42” 0.71”
10.04” 950 / 1300 (208mm) (290mm) (18mm)
(255mm)
Size RF 60 RF 110 RF 160 RF 240 RF 330 RF 660 RF 950 RF 1300

Weight (lbs.) 1.7 2.0 3.3 3.7 7.5 40.8 86 94.8
Dimensions shown are for general information and overall envelope size only. Weights listed are without element.
For complete dimensions please contact HYDAC to request a certified print, or visit www.hydacusa.com/filter-cp
21 Filter Catalog
Sizing Information:
Housing Curves
Assembly ∆P = Housing ∆P (from curves) + Flow (in GPM) x K Factor (from chart)
Adjustments must be made for viscosity & specific gravity of the fluid to be used! (see sizing section)
Element K Factors:
...R...BN3HC (Betamicron® Low Collapse) …R…ECO/N
Size Size
3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm 3 µm 5 µm 10 µm 20 µm
0060 1.627 1.245 1.160 0.642 0110 – – 0.464 0.317
0110 0.814 0.622 0.580 0.321
0160 0.556 0.378 0.329 0.225
0160 0.491 0.376 0.350 0.194
0240 – – 0.209 –
0240 0.312 0.239 0.223 0.123
0330 0.228 0.156 0.135 –
0330 0.234 0.179 0.167 0.093
0660 0.100 0.068 0.059 0.041
0660 0.099 0.076 0.071 0.039
0950 0.067 0.052 0.048 0.027 0950 0.068 0.0467 0.041 0.028
1300 0.048 0.037 0.034 0.019 1300 0.049 0.034 0.029 0.020
...R...P/HC (Paper) …R…W/HC (Wire Screen)

Size Size ...R...BN/AM …R…AM
10, 20 µm 25, 50, 74, 100, 149, 200 µm Size Size
0060 0.255 0060 0.055 3 µm 10 µm 040A
0110 0.128 0110 0.030
0330 0.477 0.164 0330 0.216
0160 0.077 0160 0.021
0240 0.049 0240 0.015
0660 0.192 0.066 0660 0.095
0330 0.037 0330 0.010
0660 0.016 0660 0.005 0950 0.132 0.045 0950 0.067
0950 0.010 0950 0.003
1300 0.088 0.033 1300 0.048
1300 0.007 1300 0.003

Installation and Operating Instructions
for Mechanical Pressure Gauges
Technical Information
Pressure range selection Isolating devices

To insure proper operation and long service life, the proper The isolating device may be either a pressure gauge cock or
pressure range should be selected. For applications with a needle valve, depending on operating conditions and
constant, steady pressure, the measured pressure should be requirements.
no more than 75% of the full scale range of the gauge. For
applications with fluctuating pressure, the measured pressure
should be no more than two-thirds of the full scale range of Pressure gauge cocks
the gauge. Pressure gauge cocks have three handle positions:
OFF The pressure medium is blocked and the pressure
In general, it is best to choose a range that is roughly 2X the gauge system is open to the atmosphere.
average measured pressure. This gives good over pressure ON The pressure gauge is open to the pressure
protection and the highest accuracy. medium.
VENT The pressure gauge is isolated but the pressure
system is vented and the medium can escape into
the atmosphere.
Pressure gauge cocks should be installed so that when
vented, the pressure medium is directed away from the
operator.
Needle valves
Needle valves also isolate the pressure gauge from the
pressure medium, but they usually do not have any venting
capabilities. Needle valves do have the advantage of
restricting the flow of the pressure into the gauge which helps
reduce damage by pressure spikes.
Installation
The pressure gauge should be installed where exposure to
heat and vibration are minimal and where the dial can be Mounting options
easily read. It is also important to install the gauge in a If the pressure system or tee-extension cannot support the
location with undisturbed and continuous flow of the pressure weight of the instrument, then surface or wall mounting
medium. brackets or mounting flanges (front flange or rear flange)
should be used.
It is recommended that an isolating device, such as a needle
valve or gauge cock, be installed between the process and
the pressure gauges. This allows the gauge to be taken out Vibration protection
of service without interruption of the process. If the pressure gauge is exposed to vibration or pulsating
pressure or both, then a liquid filled pressure gauge is
Connections with tapered threads, such as NPT, should be recommended. The liquid dampens the effects of vibration
sealed by using PTFE tape (or an equivalent sealing com- making the pointer easier to read.
pound) on the thread. Metric threads such as G1/4A or 1/
4BSP should be sealed by using the appropriate sealing
washer.
Temperature limits
The gauge should be tightened and loosened using the The pressure gauge should not be used outside of its rated
wrench flats on the gauge socket. Never grasp the case to temperature limits as noted on the Data Sheet specific to that
thread the gauge into the pressure system fitting. Doing so gauge. At temperatures above or below these limits, the
may cause irreparable damage to the gauge. gauge accuracy will be significantly reduced and the possibil-
ity of gauge failure may exist.
For pressure gauges with flanged connections, care must be
taken not to accidentally loosen the bolts that hold the upper
and lower housings together. Overpressure limits
WIKA gauges are generally designed to withstand up to a
A pressure gauge should never be removed when it is 130% overpressure without damage to the pressure system.
pressurized. Make sure the pressure system has been fully For applications with overpressure spikes, a snubber or
vented prior to removing a gauge. restrictor should be used. Snubbers and restrictors reduce
the inlet size of the pressure gauge which causes the
Residues from the pressure medium may remain inside the pressure to increase or decrease more slowly into the gauge.
pressure gauge after it has been removed from service. If For applications with periods of constant overpressure, an
these residues are hazardous or toxic, take the necessary overpressure protector should be used. The overpressure
precautions when handling and storing used gauges. protector isolates the gauge when the pressure reaches a
preset pressure value.
AIN 00.05
Tee extensions Pressure gauge safety
Tee extensions should have a Pressure media such as:
Tee
diameter of at least 0.24 in. (6mm) to
extension
• Oxygen
avoid clogging from solids in the
-->
• Acetylene
pressure medium. WIKA recom- • Flammable gases or liquids
mends that long, horizontal tee • Toxic gases or liquids
extensions be sloped to about 1:15. • Steam
• Ammonia and other refrigerants
With a gaseous pressure medium,
the extension should having a drain plug at its lowest point, as well as portable or stationary pressure systems like:
while a line with a liquid medium should have an air bleeding • Air compressors
valve at its highest point. A filter or separator should be used • Welding equipment
when the pressure medium contains suspended matter. • Pressure vessels and boilers
• Life support equipment
If a static head of liquid is acting on the gauge, then this
causes a zero offset which affects the reading of the gauge. may require pressure gauges that have been tested and/or
certified to national standards and/or local safety codes.
The corresponding indication will be lower by the value of ∆p Your local WIKA representative will be able to assist you in
if the gauge is mounted above, but higher by the value of ∆p selecting the proper gauge model.
if the gauge is mounted below the pressure tapping point.
Standards for Pressure Gauges

Pressure gauges in service U.S. & Canadian Standards are set forth by The American
Always open isolating devices slowly. Opening them too fast Society of Mechanical Engineers, which publishes pressure
may generate sudden pressure surges that could damage gauge specifications in their document ASME B40.1. This
the gauge. document specifies standard pressure gauge types, sizes,
materials, ranges, and accuracies. Copies of this standard
Calibration can be confirmed in larger diameter gauges (> 4") can be purchased directly from ASME:
by checking the position of the zero point. To do so, close
the isolating device and vent the gauge to zero pressure. ASME
The pointer must over the zero box . Unless the gauge 22 Law Drive, Box 2900
temperature is significantly higher or lower than 68°F (20°C), Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900
a pointer not returning to zero may indicate that the gauge 1-800-THE-ASME or (973) 882-1167
has been seriously damaged. Fax: (973) 882-1717
E-mail: infocentral@asme.org
Storage
The pressure gauge should remain in its original packing European Standards are developed and published by the
until installation. European Committee for Standardization (CEN) and replace
the individual standards formerly used in each European
Storage temperature should not exceed -4°F (-20°C) or country (such as DIN standards in Germany). Copies of
140°F (60°C) unless specified otherwise. Consult the data these standards can be obtained through:
sheet pertaining to the pressure gauge model.
Comité Européen de Normalisation (CEN)
Pressure gauges removed from service should be protected Central Secretariat
from dust and humidity, preferably by using the original rue de Stassart 36
packing material. Residue from the pressure medium may B-1050 Brussels
remain in the gauge and is susceptible to temperature Belgium
influences (i.e. freezing). This should be considered when
storing the removed pressure gauge.
THE MEASURE OF
Total Performance TM
Ordering Information:
State computer part number (if available) / model number / size /
range / connection size and location / options required. WIKA Instrument Corporation
1000 Wiegand Boulevard
Specifications given in this price list represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and the specified materials may change without prior notice Lawrenceville, Georgia 30043-5868
Tel: 770-513-8200 Fax: 770-338-5118
http://www.wika.com e-mail: info@wika.com
Pressure gauge accessories
2 3
Technical Information 4
7 8
6
1. Overpressure protector 5. Coil siphon

2. Throttling (adjustable) snubber 6. Wall mounting bracket
3. Adaptor for wall mounting bracket 7. Thread adaptor (1/4" NPT -> G1/4A)
4. Needle valves 8. Pressure gauge cock
Recommended Pressure Gauge Orientation

The table below shows the recommended position for pressure gauges in typical applications.
Liquid media Gaseous media

Contents of liquid liquid with vapor vapor only Gas only Wet gas Liquid gas
tee extension condensate
Typically Condensate Boiling liquid LPG Dry air Moist air Steam
Pressure
instrument
above the
process
Pressure
instrument
below the
process
THE MEASURE OF
Total Performance TM
Ordering Information:
State computer part number (if available) / model number / size /
range / connection size and location / options required. WIKA Instrument Corporation
1000 Wiegand Boulevard
Specifications given in this price list represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and the specified materials may change without prior notice Lawrenceville, Georgia 30043-5868
Tel: 770-513-8200 Fax: 770-338-5118
02/98 http://www.wika.com e-mail: info@wika.com
VC HEATERS
Immersion Heaters
Features
• Keeps oil at 60° to 70° F.
• Automatic built-in fixed setting thermostat normally closed
• Will not burn oil
• UL recognized and CSA certified
• Weatherproof wiring enclosure (NEMA 4)
Notes
1. Heaters must be mounted horizontally and
immersed at all times.
2. Heaters over 10 amps, 480 volt, or three phase,
must be used with a contactor. See instruction sheet.
3. Three phase available on ET 8 models.
Add -3 to the model number. Example: ET 8-2502-3.
4. For tanks larger then 500 gallon use multiple heaters
or consult factory for information on higher wattage
heaters.
5. Amps = Watts ÷ Volts for single phase.
6. Amps = Watts ÷ (Volts x 1.73) for three phase.
Vescor NPT Size Dimensions

Part Reservoir Wattage Volts
Number Size - Gals F G A B C D E W
1 1
ET 2-121 up to 10 125 120 ⁄2” ⁄2” 7” 4.5” 2.2” .62” 3.6” 1.3”
1 1
ET 2-251 up to 25 250 120 ⁄2” ⁄2” 8” 4.5” 2.2” .62” 3.6” 1.3”
1 1
ET 2-252 up to 25 250 240 ⁄2” ⁄2” 8” 4.5” 2.2” .62” 3.6” 1.3”
3 3
ET 3-501 25-50 500 120 ⁄4” ⁄4” 12.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-502 25-50 500 240 ⁄4” ⁄4” 12.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-504 25-50 500 480 ⁄4” ⁄4” 12.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-1001 50-100 1000 120 ⁄4” ⁄4” 22.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-1002 50-100 1000 240 ⁄4” ⁄4” 22.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
3 3
ET 3-1004 50-100 1000 480 ⁄4” ⁄4” 22.6” 5.1” 2.5” .75” 4.1” 1.5”
1
ET 8-2502 100-250 2500 240 2” 1 ⁄4” 23” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
ET 8-2504 100-250 2500 480 2” 11⁄4” 23” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
1
ET 8-5002 250-500 5000 240 2” 1 ⁄4” 44” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
ET 8-5004 250-500 5000 480 2” 11⁄4” 44” 8.2” 3.7” 1.9” 6.7” 2.8”
NOTE: WITH VESCORS' POLICY OF CONSTANTLY IMPROVING ITS PRODUCTS, SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. 62
1 JULY 03
120 or 240 VOLT
INSTALLATION AND WIRING SINGLE PHASE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ET HYDRAULIC OIL HEATERS
1. MUST BE IMMERSED AT ALL TIMES
2. MOUNT HORIZONTALLY ONLY

A
3. OPERATE ON RATED VOLTAGE -
HEATERS ARE NOT DUAL VOLTAGE 120 or 240 VOLT (Above 10 Amps) 1 PHASE
or 480 VOLT 1 PHASE
4. USE ON A.C. ONLY
5. LEAD WIRES ARE COLOR CODED -

HEATER LEADS ARE RED
THERMOSTAT LEADS ARE BLACK
6. T-60 AMBIENT AIR THERMOSTAT

(OPTIONAL) SET TO CLOSE AT
40°F TO BE WIRED INTO CIRCUIT
AT POINTS T1 AND T2
SEE DIAGRAM D
7. ABOVE 10 AMP DRAW OR 480V OR 3 PHASE B

USE A RELAY - SEE DIAGRAM B OR C
240 r 480 VOLT 3 PHASE
8. TO CALCULATE AMPERAGE DRAW:
SINGLE PHASE THREE PHASE

WATTAGE WATTAGE
AMPS = AMPS =
VOLTS VOLTS x 1.73
T60 THERMOSTAT
VESCOR (OPTIONAL)
50 N. River Street
South Elgin, IL 60177
847-742-7270
Fax 847-742-5187
D
B u l l e t rN
n o .R 1 2 1 9 3
I(ORFUND
NeopreneMountings
SeriesR/RD
Available
in 4 sizes 5 dur ometer s
LoadRange- 10lbs to 4,000lbs
Io 1/q"withtype R
Deflections
withtypeRD
Io1/2,'
Pr ool
Cor r osion
M oldedin color edoil- r esr stant

neopr ene
5 color sforer r orfr eeidentification
TypicalApplications
A i rH a n d l i n U
g n i t s B u s i n e sM
s achines
Com or essor sFans Instr um entPanel s
MachineTools Pumps
MotorGeneratorsTransformers
Effectivelsolation
for FloorMounted
Equipment
SeriesR&RDNeoorene
Mountings aremoldedin colored ToSpecify:
oil-resistant
neoorene. Thisunioue N e o p r e nm e o u n t i n gssh a lcl o n s i sot 1a s t e etl o p p l a t ea n d
colorcodingprovidesinstant b a s ep l a t ec o m p l e t e leym b e d d e di n c o l o r e do i l - r es t a n t
neoprenestockfor easyidentification of capacity. The
of loadingcapacity-
identification m o u n t i n gssh a l bl e T y p eR o r R D ,d e p e n d i n u g p o nt h e
simplifiesstocking- prevents requireddeflection ol 1/q"Ie1/2", as manufactured by
installation
errors. n o u n tn g s& C o n t r o l sI n
V i b r a t i oM , c , B l o o mn g d a l eN , .J.
TheVMCmoldingprocessembeds
all metalpartsin neoprene,
preventingcorrosion.Mountings
canalsobe moldedin other VibrationMountings& Controls,Inc.
elastomers to meetspecial Korfund DynamicsCompany
P.O.Box270,Bloomingdale,New Jersey 07403
reouirements.
TYPE R'RD
" D D i a2. h o l e s
-/
TYPE RP'RDP
I't
--r
' 8 " D i ap o s i t i o n ipni q
n
l_
3/4"Approx
t1
ne/noe
ins.(mm)
Dimensions:
TYPE W H
-HD B C n E Deflection
R.1 Color M a xL
. oad I n s {. m m ) J
3Vg" 1q4" 1 " 1 ! t " 1\a" 9ro" 21e" 11lzz" * 0 " Type Code
0r (7e.4) (44.4) (25.4) (317) (31.7)(8.0) (60.4) (88) (4.8)
RD.1 35 ( 1 58 )
R.2 31a" 231e" 1Ia" 1q4" 1q4" qs" R.1 BLACK AE (204)
0r 3" 1llsz" 7lsz" OI
RD2 (e8,6)
(60,4) (31.7)(44.4) (44.4) (e6) (76.2) (8,8) (5.6) RD1 RED t0 (317)
GREEN 120
R.3 5112" 39e" 11a" 24e" 2112" 1lz" 4\s" 9ro"
0r BLUE ' 135 (613)
RD.3 (13e.7)(85.8) (44.4\ (73.2) (63,5)\12.7) (104.8)(14.4) (6.3) R-2 BLACK 170 (770)
OI '
1lz" qs" RD,2 RED ' 240 (10s0)
6\a"
0r (158.7) 41a" 1ls" 21q" 3', 5" 9ro"
GREEN 380 (1t2.5)
( 117 . 6 ) (414) (69.8)176.2)(12.7\(127.0)( 1 4 , 4 )(e,6)
RD.4 GRAY I sso \2497)
- HDdimension
applies
todouble
deflection
TypeRD BrACK 2s0 (113.5)
R3 RtD 525 31
mountings
only. 0r r23B 02r 050
RD3 GREEN /s0 (3405) (63) ( 1 27 )
GRAY I 1100 (499.4)
1s00 (681
0)
R.4 1
RED 22s0 (1021
5) A2s 050
New design for Type R.4 and OI
RD4 G q fl N J000 r1 3 6 2 . 0 r ( b1 r \121)
RD-4neoprene mountings.
TypeR or RD TypeR or RD TypeRP or RDP

IF BOLTING IS NO BOLTING REOUIBED_ IF EOLT
HOLEIS
PREFERRED_ INACCESSIBLE
TypeR or RDmountings
TypeR or RDmountings maybeused without
bolt' TypeRPor RDPmount-
a r el u r n i s h ewd i t ha ingunder machineshav- ingswithpin (equalin
tapped holein thecenter. ing no lateral
or severe diameter B
to dimension
Thisenables the equip. vertical
rnotion. above) thatsimplyfits
mento be bolted se. freely
intothreaded
or un.
curely to themounting. threadedboltholes.
TYPE RGM
\-
/F
D D r a2 h o l e s
B N CB o l t
I- ^,*
1?::qgl:'N''{'
Thruboltmakes
prevents
mounting
failure
equipment
andsupported
ofmounting
lt
captive.
andvertical
horizontal
duetoexcessive
t---x
shock.
Recommended forshipboardandvehicular
installations,
or
engine withhighstarting
installations torque.
I
ins.(mm)
Dirnensions:
I
TYPE Coior lilax Load Dellection
Type Code {ks) I n s (. m m )
7"
RCrV.2(177.8) 2\q" 2q4" I 1 q 4 ' 54a" 11lzz"
BTACK 1/0 (// 0)
(s7.0)(6e.8) (444) (146
0) (88) (63)
244 ( 1 0 09 )
I RCIV
2 RED (63)
9112"
RCM.3 (241.3\ 3\2"
(89.0)
I,*
(6sa
8" 9ro" fi0"
(203.2) ( 1 4 . 4 ) (80)
EN
GRE
BTACK
380
250
\ 1 / 25 )
(r13s)
I RED 525 (2383)
RCM-4 11"
\279.41
39r" i*"
(95.2) (95.2)
9112" 9re"
( 2 4 1 . 3 )( 1 44 )
9e"
(9,6)
GRIEN
GRAY
/50
r 100
(3405)
( 4 S49)
( 63 )
BLACK 1500 ( 6 8 r0 )
RED I zzso ( 1 0 251)
'
GRIEN 3000 ( 1 3 602) ( 63 )
GRAY 4000 (18160)
LOAD DEFLECTION CURVES
T Y P ER 1 M 0 U N T | N G S T Y P ER - 2M O U N T I N G S
. r!)
a0fNl)llsMixMLlM ilA0 "x' otnrottaMqxruuL,no
'
*'9 :
= Y"*
"*a,,,'
^. ro$
q\92
txlLCrnt I MidFS DfrLL{timrul\aHts

A non-skidribbed neoprenecovefingon base
plate eliminatesthe needlor bolting to floor. T Y P ER - 3M O U N T I N G S TYPER-4 MOUNTINGS
.OFNO]ISMAXIM!MIOAD
. O tT 0 TF SI J A I M ! M LO A D
I 1([
r rlx[
= / -otrY
=
i rLt %e
ltl
0 ru20
DIILFCION I N(]HTS
N o t e :F o rS e r i e sB D m o u n t i n g sd,o u b l et h e d e f l e c t i osnh o w nf o r
q r v e nl o a o .
KORFUND
TheVibration
People...
Control
**f
li
trl
lri$i.i
W
M
{.*:i
-. \qe*NsgNc
_-.\N,*
w
.G$
\di.6l
\!-+ --qi
V i b r a t r oMn o u n t i n gasn dC o n t r o lIsn c . 'os n g o i n gp r o d u c t

d e v e l o p m e nmt ,a r k e t i nagn d d i s t r i b u t i opnr o w e s h s a sm a d e
u s a w o r l d - w i dle a d e rn t h ed e s i g na n df a b rc a t i o no f v b r a
t o n i s o l a t i ocno m p o n e n tasn d d a m p i n gm a t e r i a luss e di n t h e
h e a t i n gv,e n t r l a t i nagi ,rc o n d i t i o n i npge, t r o c h e m i c cahl ,e m i c a l
m a n u f a c t u r i nugt ,rtly ,c o n s t r u c t i oann dt r a n s p o r t a t i o n
FIELDENGINEERIS:
YOURVMC/KORFUND Inouslnes.
C o m p u t esru p p o r t eedn g i n e enr g a n dt h es o p h i s t i c a t e d
s k i l l so {t h eV M Cc r a f t s m ecno n t i n uteo I n s u r e c o r r e c t ldye -
s i g n e da n da c c u r a t e lm y a n u f a c t u r epdr o d u crt e l i a b i l iftoy rt h e
v i b r a t i oins o l aot n o f h e a t i n gv,e n t l l a t i nagn da r r - c o n d i t r o n i n g
pumps,fansand compressors, heavyrotatingmachinery,
dieselenginesand railroad, off roadancimilitaryvehicles.
KORFUND
VibrationMountings& Controls,Inc.
Korfund Dynamics
A e r o l l e x n c . C o m D a ne s
I 13 Man St.,Box270,Boomr NJ0/403Toll Free:1-800-L0W-V|
ngdale, BEFax973/4928430
O VibrationMountings& Controls,Inc. 2.5N/ 8/2000 http://www.vm

c-kortund.c0m
171N SERIES – 600 W.O.G. FULL PORT VALVES – BRASS
NOMINAL WORKING INCH DIMENSIONS

PART NUMBER SIZE PRESSURE THREAD D DN I L G A H CH
171N-14-NPT 1/4" 600 PSI 1/4" NPT F 1/4
1/4" 1/4" NPT F 1/4 .31 .47 1.77 .89 3.23 1.50 .79
171N-14-NPT-LH 600 PSI
171N-38-NPT 3/8" 600 PSI 3/8" NPT F 3/8
.39 .47 1.77 .89 3.23 1.50 .79
171N-38-NPT-LH 3/8" 600 PSI 3/8" NPT F 3/8
171N-12-NPT 1/2" 600 PSI 1/2" NPT F 1/2

1/2" 1/2" 1/2 .59 .61 2.32 1.16 3.94 1.69 .98
171N-12-NPT-LH 600 PSI NPT F
171N-34-NPT 3/4" 600 PSI 3/4" NPT F 3/4
3/4" 3/4" 3/4 .79 .67 2.52 1.26 4.72 1.97 1.22
171N-34-NPT-LH 600 PSI NPT F
171N-1-NPT 1" 600 PSI 1" NPT F 1
.98 .83 3.18 1.59 4.72 2.13 1.57
171N-1-NPT-LH 1" 600 PSI 1" NPT F 1
171N-114-NPT 11/4" 600 PSI 11/4" NPT F 11/4
1.26 .91 3.66 1.83 6.22 2.87 1.93
171N-114-NPT-LH 11/4" 600 PSI 11/4" NPT F 11/4
171N-112-NPT 11/2" 600 PSI 11/2" NPT F 11/2
1.57 .91 4.02 2.00 6.22 3.11 2.13
171N-112-NPT-LH 11/2" 600 PSI 11/2" NPT F 11/2
171N-2-NPT 2" 600 PSI 2" NPT F 2
1.97 1.04 4.76 2.38 6.22 3.39 2.70
171N-2-NPT-LH 2" 600 PSI 2" NPT F 2
171N-212-NPT 21/2" 600 PSI 21/2" NPT F 21/2
2.56 1.26 6.14 3.07 10.04 5.20 3.35
171N-212-NPT-LH 21/2" 600 PSI 21/2" NPT F 21/2
171N-3-NPT 3" 600 PSI 3" NPT F 3
3.15 1.38 6.97 3.48 10.04 5.51 3.90
171N-3-NPT-LH 3" 600 PSI 3" NPT F 3
171N-4-NPT 4" 600 PSI 4" NPT F 4
3.94 1.63 8.50 4.25 10.04 6.06 4.92
171N-4-NPT-LH 4" 600 PSI 4" NPT F 4
CONSTRUCTION: HOT FORGED SAND BLASTED BRASS BODY

BLOWOUT PROOF NICKEL-PLATED BRASS STEM
DOUBLE VITON® “O” RINGS IN STEM
GLASS FILLED PTFE SEATS
AGA-CGA APPROVED
-4°F – +350°F TEMP RATING
UL LISTED
NOTE: -LH SUFFIX = LOCKING HANDLE INCLUDED. VALVES AVAILABLE WITH ISO 5211 MOUNTING PAD FOR
DIRECT MOUNT ACTUATION IN SIZES 1/4"- 2". CONTACT PCI FOR DETAILS.
1-800-322-9527
77
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL INDEX MPCF-1033
Industrial Division / Houston Motor Plant SHEET NO. 1 of 1
ISSUED 11/08/96
SUPERSEDES 10/06/95
REVISION 1
SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR WRITTEN BY R. EVANS
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS APPROVED BY Jay Bugbee
CUSTOMER: DYKMAN ELECTRIC Customer Tag:
TIC File No.:
Customer PO:
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA

HP.: 1.5 VOLTS: 230/460 3Ø/ 60 Hz Sync. RPM: 1800
FRAME: 56 ENCL: TEFC Full Load Amp: 4.5/2.25 Full Load RPM: 1740
FORM: FCK1 S.F.: 1.15 NEMA DESIGN: B Ins. CLASS: F
TYPE: IK AMB.: 40 °C CODE: L DUTY: CONT.
MODEL No.: BY154FLF2AOZ kW.: 1.1
NOM. EFF.: 81.5 MIN. EFF.: - P.F.: - FLAmp for 208V: 4.8
MOTOR PERFORMANCE DATA

AMPERAGE TORQUES ** BEARINGS
LOCKED ROTOR: 36 FULL LOAD (lb-ft): 4.54 DRIVE END: 6205ZZ
LOCKED ROTOR (%): 290 OPP. DRIVE END: 6205ZZ
BREAK DOWN (%): 320
EFFICIENCY: POWER FACTOR:

FULL LOAD: 82.0 % FULL LOAD: 77.0 %
¾ LOAD: 81.5 % ¾ LOAD: 69.5 %
½ LOAD: 79.5 % ½ LOAD: 57.0 %
ALL CHARACTERISTICS ARE AVERAGE EXPECTED VALUES BASED UPON RATED VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY
AND SINEWAVE POWER INPUT.
* TEMPERATURE RISE WILL BE CONSISTENT WITH INSULATION, AMBIENT AND SERVICE FACTOR AS
DEFINED BY NEMA-MG-12.43 OR -20.40.
** BEARINGS ARE THE ONLY RECOMMENDED SPARE PART(S).
Prepared by: KEN JONES

Date: 07 Feb 2008
CUSTOMER: DYKMAN ELECTRIC PO NO.: TAG NO.:
MOTOR MODEL No: BY154FLF2AOZ TOSHIBA FILE NO.:
HP: 1.5 RPM (Sync): 1800 VOLTAGE: 230/460 Hz: 60
FRAME SIZE: 56 LOG NO.: LOG REV. LEVEL:
REMARKS:
PER: TIC SLC ISSUE DATE: 07 Feb 2008 SUPERSEDES: REV 2

Three Phase Motor Wiring Diagram
'Across The Line' (Full Voltage) Starting
Customer Name: DYKMAN ELECTRIC

PO Number:
Customer Tag:
TIC File No.:

Motor Model Number: BY154FLF2AOZ
For Further Information Regarding Toshiba motor starting, maintenance or wiring, Please refer to
the Toshiba - A quality Product for World Energy Installation and Maintenance Manual, or Contact
the Toshiba Low Voltage Marketing Department (800) 231-1412.
Prepared By: KEN JONES

Date: 07-Feb-2008
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
P.O. BOX 40906
HOUSTON, TX 77240 (800) 231-1412
(713) 466-0277 FAX (713) 466-8773
SPARE PARTS (RECOMMENDED)
OTHER THAN THE GREASE USED FOR RE-GREASABLE BEARINGS, TOSHIBA ADVISES THAT THERE ARE NO 'USE' PARTS.
THE ONLY INSURANCE SPARES THAT TOSHIBA SUGGESTS FOR THESE SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS ARE
INDUSTRY STANDARD, AND COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE ANTI-FRICTION BEARINGS, AS NOTED BELOW.
MOTOR COMPONENTS (SUCH AS TERMINAL BOXES, FAN COVERS, MACHINED PARTS) ARE AVAILABLE UPON SPECIAL
REQUEST. IN THIS CASE, PLEASE ADVISE OUR ORDER ENTRY DEPARTMENT THE MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBERS
(FOUND ON THE MOTOR NAMEPLATE), AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPONENT REQUIRED. THEY WILL THEN FURNISH
THE CURRENT PART NUMBER, PRICE AND AVAILABILITY.
(NOTE: OUR INTERNAL PART NUMBERS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE, AND ARE NOT PUBLISHED).
PLEASE ADVISE IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS.

PO Number:
Customer Tag:
TIC File No.:

Motor Model Number: BY154FLF2AOZ
HP / RPM /ENCL / FRAME: 1.5HP, 1800RPM, TEFC, 56
DRIVE END BEARING: 6205ZZ
OPPOSITE DRIVE END BEARING: 6205ZZ

Date: 07 Feb 2008
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL INDEX MPCF-1033
Industrial Division / Houston Motor Plant SHEET NO. 1 of 1
ISSUED 11/08/96
SUPERSEDES 10/06/95
REVISION 1
SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR WRITTEN BY R. EVANS
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS APPROVED BY Jay Bugbee
CUSTOMER: DYKMAN ELECTRIC Customer Tag:
TIC File No.:
Customer PO:
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA

HP.: 60 VOLTS: 230/460 3Ø/ 60 Hz Sync. RPM: 1800
FRAME: 364TC ENCL: TEFC Full Load Amp: 142/71 Full Load RPM: 1775
FORM: FCKL1 S.F.: 1.15 NEMA DESIGN: B Ins. CLASS: F
TYPE: TKKH AMB.: 40 °C CODE: G DUTY: CONT.
MODEL No.: B0604FLT3UMH kW.: 45
NOM. EFF.: 95.0 MIN. EFF.: 94.5 P.F.: 84.0 FLAmp for 208V: 155
MOTOR PERFORMANCE DATA

AMPERAGE TORQUES ** BEARINGS
LOCKED ROTOR: 435 FULL LOAD (lb-ft): 177 DRIVE END: 6314C3
LOCKED ROTOR (%): 216 OPP. DRIVE END: 6312C3
BREAK DOWN (%): 274
EFFICIENCY: POWER FACTOR:

FULL LOAD: 95.1 % FULL LOAD: 84.0 %
¾ LOAD: 95.2 % ¾ LOAD: 81.5 %
½ LOAD: 94.6 % ½ LOAD: 74.9 %
ALL CHARACTERISTICS ARE AVERAGE EXPECTED VALUES BASED UPON RATED VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY
AND SINEWAVE POWER INPUT.
* TEMPERATURE RISE WILL BE CONSISTENT WITH INSULATION, AMBIENT AND SERVICE FACTOR AS
DEFINED BY NEMA-MG-12.43 OR -20.40.
** BEARINGS ARE THE ONLY RECOMMENDED SPARE PART(S).
Prepared by: KEN JONES

Date: 07 Feb 2008
Three Phase Motor Wiring Diagram
'Across The Line' (Full Voltage) Starting

PO Number:
Customer Tag:
TIC File No.:

Motor Model Number: B0604FLT3UMH
For Further Information Regarding Toshiba motor starting, maintenance or wiring, Please refer to
the Toshiba - A quality Product for World Energy Installation and Maintenance Manual, or Contact
the Toshiba Low Voltage Marketing Department (800) 231-1412.

Date: 07-Feb-2008
Speed Torque/Current Curve
Motor Model: B0604FLT3UMH FLAmps: 142/71

Enclosure: TEFC Voltage: 230/460 Frame: 364TC
Pole: 4 Frequency: 60 Hz Ins. Class: F
HP: 60 Rotor Inertia: 13.06 lb-ft² Date: 07 Feb 2008
FLRPM: 1775 Load Inertia: N/A File:
Locked Rotor Amps: 435 Load Type: N/A

Locked Rotor Torque: 216 % Starting at: N/A
Breakdown Torque: 274 % Accel. Time: N/A
Rated Torque: 177 lb-ft
TIC File No.:

Customer Tag:
Thermal Limit Curve
Motor Model: B0604FLT3UMH FLAmps: 142/71

Enclosure: TEFC Voltage: 230/460 Frame: 364TC
Pole: 4 Frequency: 60 Hz Ins. Class: F
HP: 60 Rotor Inertia: 13.06 lb-ft² Date: 07 Feb 2008
FLRPM: 1775 Load Inertia: N/A File:
TIC File No.:

Customer Tag:
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
P.O. BOX 40906
HOUSTON, TX 77240 (800) 231-1412
(713) 466-0277 FAX (713) 466-8773
SPARE PARTS (RECOMMENDED)
OTHER THAN THE GREASE USED FOR RE-GREASABLE BEARINGS, TOSHIBA ADVISES THAT THERE ARE NO 'USE' PARTS.
THE ONLY INSURANCE SPARES THAT TOSHIBA SUGGESTS FOR THESE SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS ARE
INDUSTRY STANDARD, AND COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE ANTI-FRICTION BEARINGS, AS NOTED BELOW.
MOTOR COMPONENTS (SUCH AS TERMINAL BOXES, FAN COVERS, MACHINED PARTS) ARE AVAILABLE UPON SPECIAL
REQUEST. IN THIS CASE, PLEASE ADVISE OUR ORDER ENTRY DEPARTMENT THE MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBERS
(FOUND ON THE MOTOR NAMEPLATE), AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPONENT REQUIRED. THEY WILL THEN FURNISH
THE CURRENT PART NUMBER, PRICE AND AVAILABILITY.
(NOTE: OUR INTERNAL PART NUMBERS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE, AND ARE NOT PUBLISHED).
PLEASE ADVISE IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS.

PO Number:
Customer Tag:
TIC File No.:

Motor Model Number: B0604FLT3UMH
HP / RPM /ENCL / FRAME: 60HP, 1800RPM, TEFC, 364TC
DRIVE END BEARING: 6314C3
OPPOSITE DRIVE END BEARING: 6312C3

Date: 07 Feb 2008
INDEX MDS-O-0001
SHEET NO. 1 of 3
Industrial Division / Houston Motor Plant
ISSUED 01/24/96
SUPERSEDES NEW
Motor Operation Procedure
REVISION 0
REFERENCE USE ONLY WHEN ISSUED BY MOTOR MKTG. WRITTEN BY I. MARQUEZ
APPROVED BY J. Bugbee
Motor Lubrication
Dist: Mktg.
QC 1. SCOPE
To give recommended guidelines for electric motor relubrication.
2. START UP
Toshiba motors are properly greased at the time of manufacture. It is recommended that
if a motor has been stored for a period of six months or more, it should be lubricated prior
to starting (See Fig. 1) using a standard hand held grease gun.
Fig. 1 FRAME SIZE QUANTITY of PUMPS

143 ~ 256 2 to 3 strokes
284 ~ 405 4 to 5 strokes
444 and Larger 6 to 10 strokes
It should be noted that grease leakage around the shaft hole could indicated over-
packing. Excess grease should be purged out by operating the motor temporarily with
the relief open.
Lubrication of electric motors should be done as a part of a planned maintenance

program.
Before greasing, be sure fittings are clean and free from dirt. Always relubricate using
grease that is fresh and free from contamination.
Toshiba motors may be equipped with an automatic grease relief fitting, grease plug or
grease cover plate for the outlet.
It should be noted that it may be necessary to remove an automatic type fitting due to
hardening of grease. Motors utilizing a grease plate may require the scraping out of old
grease a minimum of once every two years.
3. STANDARD SERVICE
1. Select the proper service condition from Fig. 2.
2. Select the frequency and volume from Fig. 3.
3. Before greasing be sure fittings are clean and free from dirt.
INDEX MDS-O-0001
SHEET NO. 2 of 3
ISSUED 01/24/96
SUPERSEDES NEW
3. STANDARD SERVICE (-cont.)
5. Remove relief plug or plate and using a low pressure hand held grease gun, pump the required
amount of grease.
6. For Frames 143T to 365T allow motor to run for 20 to 30 minutes and for Frames 405T and
larger allow motor to run for 30 to 60 minutes before replacing hardware.
7. Grease may not relieve from drain. Use volumes recommended to avoid overgreasing.
Fig. 2 SERVICE CONDITIONS

Standard Duty Eight hours per day;
Light to normal loading;
Clean condition, free from dust.
Severe Duty 24 hours per day;

Light to normal shock loading, vibration;
Exposure to dirt or dusty conditions.
Very Severe Duty 24 hours per day;

High ambient;
Normal to high shock loading, vibration;
Dusty conditions;
Confined mounting conditions
4. RECOMMENDED GREASES:
Confirm if the motor nameplate has specified the grease used.
Standard, Severe Duty and 841 motors greased at the factory will use:
Grease Name: Chevron SRI
Manufactured By: Chevron U.S.A., Inc.
Operating Ambient Temp.: -30°C to 50°C
5. RECOMMENDED GREASES for STANDARD APPLICATIONS
Use the following greases listed for the given temperature range, unless otherwise shown by the motors
grease nameplate:
Operating Ambient Temp. -30°C to 50°C

Chevron SRI Chevron U.S.A., Inc.
Exxon Unirex #2 Exxon Corp.
Exxon Polyrex Exxon Corp.
Shell Dolium R Shell Oil Co.
Polystar RB 2 Texaco
INDEX MDS-O-0001
SHEET NO. 3 of 3
ISSUED 01/24/96
SUPERSEDES NEW
Fig. 3 TYPE OF SERVICE
SYNC. RPM FRAME SIZE STANDARD SEVERE VERY SEVERE

RANGE DUTY DUTY DUTY
3600 143T-256T 8 Mos. 4 Mos. 1 Mo.
1800 ~ 900 143T-256T 30 Mos. 12 Mos. 4 Mos.
Bearing Size Periodic Grease Amount
6205/6206 3 Grams
6207/6208/6305 5 Grams
6306 10 Grams
6308/6309 20 Grams
3600 284T-365T 8 Mos. 4 Mos. 1 Mo.
1800 ~ 900 284T-365T 24 Mos. 12 Mos. 4 Mos.
6211 10 Grams
6309 20 Grams
6310/6312 30 Grams
6314 50 Grams
3600 404T-447T 8 Mos. 4 Mos. 1 Mo.
1800 ~ 900 404T-447T 18 Mos. 8 Mos. 3 Mos.
6216 20 Grams
6313/NU317 30 Grams
NU318/NU320 50 Grams
6317/6318 80 Grams
6320/6322/6324 80 Grams
NOTES:
1. When relubricating roller bearings divide the monthly service time by two.
2. See Fig. 2 for definitions of Service Conditions.
3. Gram quantity when using a typical low pressure hand grease gun equals
(4 pumps = 5 grams)
6. RECOMMENDED GREASES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
The following greases are recommended for special applicaitons only and should be used only for motors
specifically built for such conditions.
Minimum Ambient Temp. -60°C

Beacon 325 Exxon Corp.
Maximum Ambient Temp. 90°C
DOW Corning 44 DOW Corning Corp.
Exxon Unirex S2 Exxon Corp.
WARNING: In general it is not recommend to mix greases of different brands. The mixing of different types of thickeners may destroy the
composition and physical properties of the grease. In the event that a different grease is required by the end user, the following steps can
be taken. Using the instructions for lubrication, open grease outlet and purge the system as much as possible of the old or unwanted
grease. Repeat this same operation after 1 week of service. Consult TOSHIBA/HOUSTON Engineering for further recommendations on
grease compatibility.
13131 W. Little York Rd.
Houston, Texas 77041
Phone: 713-466-0277
Fax: 713-466-8773
STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS
Short Term Storage
If the equipment is not put into immediate use it should be stored in a clean, dry location.
Care should be taken to keep the equipment covered when moving from a cold location
to a warm location, otherwise condensation may occur. If condensation does occur, and
the equipment is moist, allow it to dry thoroughly before applying power.
Long Term Storage

1. Cover machined metal parts with weatherproof cover, but leave ventilating area
exposed.
2. Make certain unpainted portions are covered and retouch any scratches or flaked
areas.
3. If condensate plugs or drain plugs have been used, make sure they are operative.
4. Cover completely with plastic cover and insert silica-gel bags inside the cover for
moisture control.
5. If motor is equipped with space heaters make sure space heaters are properly
connected and operative. The motor interior temperature should be maintained
approximately 5.6º C (10º F) above ambient.
6. A systematic inspection and maintenance schedule should be established. If rotating

apparatus is to be stored for 6 months or longer, it should, in addition to the minor
precautions above, be given a megger test every 3 to 6 months. A minimum reading
of 10 megohoms is recommended. A record of insulation values, temperature, time,
humidity and length of voltage application should be recorded to show winding
conditions prior to start up.
7. If windings are designed for outdoor operation, they will not be affected by extreme
or sudden temperature changes or inclement weather in general. However a weather
proof cover with provisions for adequate ventilation should be used to guard against
intrusion of salt, dust, or other abrasive or corrosive material.
8. It is recommended that the rotor be turned every month to redistribute the lubricant in
the bearings and oil or grease be added every 6 six months.
9. Preferably, storage would be in a warehouse or enclosed building but the same

precautions should be followed.
TAB 2
Inductive Proximity Sensors 2-Wire AC
Limit Switch
Style
Inductive Sensors
Inductive Surface Mount
• 15 to 40 mm sensing ranges Technical Specifications

• Limit switch style housing SUPPLY VOLTAGE 20-250 VAC
SUPPLY FREQUENCY 45-65 Hz
• LED power and target indication LOAD CURRENT (IL) NJ models 500 mA max.
NBN models 400 mA max.
• Terminal connection wiring
LEAKAGE CURRENT (OFF-STATE) ≤ 1.7 mA
OUTPUT Suffix WS Normally open
Suffix W Normally open or normally closed
VOLTAGE DROP AT IL (MAX.) ≤5V
INRUSH CURRENT NJ models ≤ 4 A/20 ms
NBN models ≤ 2.4 A/20 ms
HYSTERESIS 3-15% (5% typical)
SHORT CIRCUIT AND No
OVERLOAD PROTECTION
REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTED No
LED INDICATION See dimension drawings
SENSING FACE MATERIAL PBT
STANDARDS EN 60947-5-2
See pages See pages ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION IP67
827-874 for 885-892 for
cordsets accessories AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -14ºF to +158ºF (-25ºC to +70ºC)
APPROVALS
2-Wire
AC
Terminal Connection Models
Range Electrical Switching Electrical Dwg.
Model Number Mounting Housing Material
(mm) Output Frequency Connection No.
NBN15-M1K-WS 15 Nonflush N.O. 20 Hz PBT Terminal housing 1
NJ15+U4+W 15 Flush N.O. or N.C. 25 Hz PBT w/metal base Terminal housing 2
NJ20+U4+W 20 Nonflush N.O. or N.C. 20 Hz PBT w/metal base Terminal housing 2
Consult factory for other connection options.
Mini AC/DC (7/8"-16) Quick Disconnect Models

Range Electrical Switching Electrical Dwg.
Model Number Mounting Housing Material
(mm) Output Frequency Connection No.
NBN15-M1-WS-BHM 15 Nonflush N.O. 25 Hz PBT w/metal base 7/8"-16 Mini AC 4
Wiring Diagrams
2-Wire AC
Quick Disconnect
Terminal Connection Note: Wiring diagrams show
quick disconnect pin numbers.
Programmable Programmable
Normally open Normally closed BHM Type Male Receptacle End View
Normally open W
Load
1 W 1
N.C. L2 Normally open White
Load
WS 3
L1 2 2
L1 2 Black
L2
3 Load
3
WS L1 3 2 Black
4
Load N.O. L2 L1
N 4 4 1
L1 Load
3 White
L2 Green
(Metal Base Only) (Metal Base Only)
1 Green (Metal Housing Only)
(Metal Housing Only)
108 PEPPERL+FUCHS Pepperl+Fuchs® Inc. • 1600 Enterprise Parkway • Twinsburg, Ohio 44087-2245 • www.am.pepperl-fuchs.com
Telephone (330) 486-0001 • FAX (330) 405-4710 • E-Mail: sales@us.pepperl-fuchs.com
2-Wire AC Inductive Proximity Sensors
Limit Switch Style
Drawing No. 1 Drawing No. 2
NBN15-M1K-WS [N.O.] NJ15+U4+W [N.O. or N.C.]
NJ20+U4+W [N.O. or N.C.] LED
Yellow: Output Status
LED
NJ30+U4+W [N.O. or N.C.] Green: Power
Inductive Surface Mount

M16 x 1.5
1/2" NPT
20/22 118
91
30
(between
40 holes)
30 15
11
30 5.3 thru
Oblong hole 40 ( 2 places )
4.3 x 5.3 thru
( 2 places) 60
xis X-a Oblong hole

Y-a 5° ts 41 xis
1 en 30 90° xis X-a 5.3 x 7.3 thru
Y-a 0° ts xis ( 2 places )
rem 9 en
Inc 40 46 90°
rem
Inc
15 mm Sensing Range 15, 20, and 30 mm Sensing Range
Drawing No. 3 Drawing No. 4

NJ40+U4+W [N.O. or N.C.] NBN15-M1-WS-BHM [N.O.]
LEDs
Green: Power
LEDs
Green: Power
1/2" NPT /2A
20/22 UN
-16
128 7/8
30
(between
holes) 72
50 62
11 30
5.5 thru 15 2-Wire
55
60
( 2 places ) 15.5
30
AC
Oblong hole
Oblong hole
5.3 x 7.3 thru 4.3 x 5.3 thru
X-a ( 2 places ) ( 2 places)
xis xis xis 41 X-a
Y-a 0° ts Y-a 30
xis
90° ° s
9 en 56 15 ent 90°
55
rem rem
Inc Inc
40 mm Sensing Range 15 mm Sensing Range
Recommended Accessories
OMH4-4950
MH4-2681 UNI
MH4-2057
Mounting Brackets
Model Description
MH4-2681 UNI Adjustable Unistrut® bracket
MH4-2057 Adjustable slide bracket
See pages 885-892
OMH4-4950 Rotating bracket for mini limit switch for complete MH4-3742
MH4-3742 Adjustable bracket for mini limit switch accessory listing.
PEPPERL+FUCHS Pepperl+Fuchs® Inc. • 1600 Enterprise Parkway • Twinsburg, Ohio 44087-2245 • www.am.pepperl-fuchs.com
Telephone (330) 486-0001 • FAX (330) 405-4710 • E-Mail: sales@us.pepperl-fuchs.com 109
TAB 3
Large Bore High
Pressure Hydraulic
Cylinders
Series 3H
Heavy Duty Service —

Industrial Tie-Rod Construction
■ Nominal Pressure — 3000 PSI
■ Thirteen Standard Mounting Styles
For Cylinder Division Plant Locations – See Page II.
87
The large bore, high pressure
hydraulic cylinder Parker designed to
meet your needs
In the Series 3H cylinder you get unmatched reliability, the innovative anti-extrusion body end seal
performance, and innovative design features to help design...where the heads and caps are specially
increase productivity and reduce your operating costs. machined to prevent extrusion of the body end seals
and insure against leakage — PLUS... every cylinder
Parker’s externally removable bolt-on gland assembly
is individually tested before it leaves our plant.
makes preventive maintenance fast...and easy! You
do not have to disassemble the cylinder, loosen the tie For quick delivery, the Series 3H is available to you
rod nuts, or remove the long cast iron rod bearing to from our regional plant system. Select genuine Parker
replace the patented Polypak® double bevel lipseal cylinder replacement parts are stocked by over 130
and double service Wiperseal. The ruggedly local Parker distributors from coast-to-coast.
constructed gland assembly includes
See pages 90 and 91 for all the features
the ultimate in sealing for extra heavy
that make the Parker Series 3H your
duty applications in most any industry.
best choice for all your large bore high
The high pressure large bore Series
pressure hydraulic cylinder
3H hydraulic cylinder also includes
applications...
For additional information – call your local Parker Cylinder Distributor.
88
Series 3H Large Bore Specifications/
Mountings
High Pressure Hydraulic Cylinders Large Bore Sizes
Standard Specifications
• Heavy Duty Service • Piston Rod Diameter – 41/2" through 10"
• Standard Construction – Square Head – Tie Rod Design • Mounting Styles – Ten standard styles at various
• Nominal Pressure – 3000 PSI* application ratings
• Standard Fluid – Hydraulic Oil • Strokes – Available in any practical stroke length
• Standard Temperature -10°F. to +165°F.** • Cushions – Optional at either end or both ends of stroke
• Bore Sizes – 10" through 20" (Larger sizes available) • Rod Ends – Two Standard Choices – Specials to Order
In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalog *If hydraulic operating pressure exceeds 3000 PSI, send application data for engineering
are subject to change. evaluation and recommendation. See section C, page 118 for actual design factors.
** See section C, page 83 for higher temperature service.
Available Mounting Styles

Tie Rods Extended Head End Tie Rods Extended Cap End Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Head Rectangular
Style TB Style TC Style TD Style JJ
10"-14" 10"-14" 10"-14" 10"-20"
Bore, Bore, Bore, Bore,
Page 92 Page 92 Page 92 Page 94
(NFPA MX3) (NFPA MX2) (NFPA MX1) (NFPA ME5)

Head Square Flange Cap Rectangular Cap Square Flange Side Lug
Style JB Style HH Style HB Style C
10"-20" 10"-20" 10"-20" 10"-14"
Bore, Bore, Bore, Bore, B
Page 94 Page 96 Page 96 Page 96
(NFPA MF5) (NFPA ME6) (NFPA MF6) (NFPA MS2)

Centerline Lugs Cap Fixed Clevis Head Trunnion Cap Trunnion
Style E Style BB Style D Style DB
10"-14" 10"-20" 10"-14" 10"-14"
Bore, Bore, Bore, Bore,
Page Page 98 Page 98 Page 98
96
(NFPA MS3) (NFPA MP1) (NFPA MT1) (NFPA MT2)

Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Double Rod Cylinders
Style DD Style KTB Shown
10"-20"
Bore,
Most of the above illustrated
Page mounting styles are available in
98 double rod cylinders. See Catalog
Page 100.
(NFPA MT4)
89
These innovative design End Seals – Pressure-actuated
features make Parker Series 3H cylinder body-to-head and cap “O”
rings and back-up washers.
your best choice...

for all your large bore high pressure
hydraulic cylinder applications...
Primary Seal – Polypak® double-bevel lip design combines ease of
installation with rugged construction. The ultimate seal in extra heavy
duty applications. Completely self-compensating and self-relieving to
withstand pressure variations and conform to mechanical deflection
that may occur.
Secondary Seal –
Double-Service Wiperseal®
(Patent #2907596) – wipes
clean any oil film
adhering to the rod on the
extend stroke and cleans
the rod on the return stroke.
Bolt-On Rod Gland Assembly – Externally

removable without cylinder disassembly. Long
cast-iron bearing surface is inboard of the
seals, assuring positive lubrication from within
the cylinder. An “O” ring is used as a seal
between gland and head.
Optional Piston Steel Head – Bored and grooved to provide

concentricity for mating parts.
Alloy Steel Tie Rod High Strength Tie Rods – Made from
Cast iron ring piston is available Nuts – With 100,000 PSI minimum yield steel with rolled
as a special modification. hardened washer. threads for added strength.
Parker’s Exclusive
stepped cushion design shows reduced pressure peaks for most load and
Stepped floating cushions speed conditions, with comparable reduction of objectionable stopping
forces being transmitted to the load and the support structure.
combine the best features of The Series 3H design incorporates the longest cushion sleeve and cushion
known cushion technology. spear that can be provided in the standard envelope without decreasing
the rod bearing and piston bearing lengths.
Deceleration devices or built-in “cushions” are optional and can be
supplied at head end, cap end, or both ends without change in envelope
or mounting dimensions. Stepped Cushions
Standard straight or tapered cushions have been used in industrial Sleeve Design Spear Design
cylinders over a very broad range of applications. Parker research has
found that both designs have limitations. As a result, Parker has taken a
new approach in cushioning of industrial hydraulic cylinders and for
specific load and velocity conditions have been able to obtain deceleration
curves that come very close to the ideal. The success lies in a stepped
sleeve or spear concept where the steps are calculated to approximate
theoretical orifice areas curves. In the cushion performance chart,
pressure traces show the results of typical orifice flow conditions. Tests of
a three-step sleeve or spear show three pressure pulses coinciding with
the steps. The deceleration cushion plunger curves shape comes very
close to being theoretical, with the exception of the last 1/2" of travel. This
is a constant shape in order to have some flexibility in application. The
90
Piston Rod – Hard chrome-plated and Align-A-Groove® –
polished for maximum seal and rod bearing (Patent #3043639) – A 3/16" wide surface
life. Two standard thread styles. Rod end is machined at each end of the cylinder body.
supplied with spanner wrench holes. Makes precise mounting quick and easy.
Hi-Load Piston Seals – Are

standard. Ports – SAE O-ring straight thread ports are
standard.
Optional Ports
Ports – SAE straight thread ports or NPTF
(Dry Seal Pipe Ports) are available for an
extra charge.
Seals – Buna-N (Nitrile) seals are standard.
Fluorocarbon Seals – Optional at extra
charge.
One-Piece Nodular Iron Piston – The wide

piston surface contacting cylinder bore
reduces bearing loads. One piece design is
piloted to piston rod assuring concentricity.
Piston is locked with set screw. Anaerobic
adhesive and peening of set screw locks and
seals piston to rod.
B
Steel Cap – Bored and grooved to provide

concentricity for mating parts.
The Cylinder Body – Heavy- Adjustable Floating Stepped Cushions – For maximum
wall steel tubing is honed to a performance. Economical and flexible for even the most
15 RMS micro finish bore demanding applications. Provides superior performance in
providing a wear surface for reducing shock. Cushions are optional and can be supplied
long lasting piston bearing and at head end, cap end, or both ends without change in
seal life. envelope or mounting dimensions.
socket-keyed. It is located on side number 3, in all mounting

styles except C. In this style it is located on side number 2.
c. A springless check valve is provided that is also flush with the
side of the head and is mounted on the same side as the needle
valve except on mounting style C, where it is mounted on side
number 2, next to the needle valve. It may be identified by the
fact that it is slotted.
d. The check and needle valves are interchangeable in the head.
(2) When a cushion is specified at the cap end:

a. A cushion-stepped spear is provided on the piston rod.
b. A socket-keyed needle valve is provided that is flush with the
side of the cap when wide open. It is located on side number 3
in all mounting styles except C. In this style it is located on side
number 2.
c. A springless check valve is provided that is also flush with the
(1) When a cushion is specified at the head end: side of the cap and is mounted on the same side as the needle
valve except on mounting style C, where it is mounted on side
a. A stepped sleeve is furnished on the piston rod assembly. number 2, next to the needle valve.
b. A needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the head d. The check and needle valves are interchangeable in the cap.
even when wide open. It may be identified by the fact that it is
91
Tie Rod Mountings
Series 3H Large Bore
Large Bore Sizes High Pressure Hydraulic Cylinders
ZB + STROKE
Tie Rods Extended Head End
Y P + STROKE
Style TB
WF LG + STROKE
(NFPA Style MX3) K
EE
1
E 4 2 RD MM
3 DD BB G J
E ZJ + STROKE
Tie Rods Extended Cap End ZB + STROKE

Style TC Y P + STROKE
(NFPA Style MX2) WF LG + STROKE
EE K
1
E 4 2 RD MM
DD
3 G J
E ZJ + STROKE BB
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Basic Mounting (T) — Not shown is no tie ZB + STROKE
rod extended and can be supplied upon Y P + STROKE
Style TD request.
(NFPA Style MX1) WF LG + STROKE
EE K
1
E 4 2 RD MM
3 DD BB G J
E ZJ + STROKE BB
Rod End Dimensions — see table 2

Thread Style 4 LAF Thread Style 9 A Special Thread
(NFPA Style SM) (NFPA Style SF) Style 3
A WF WF
Small Male Small Female F Special thread,
F
KK extension, rod eye,
C C
KK
blank, etc., are
also available.
To order, specify
B MM RD B MM RD
“Style 3” and give
desired dimen-
.515 DIA. .515 DIA. sions for KK, A and
x .75 DEEP
NA
x .50 DEEP
NA LAF or WF. If
4 HOLES 4 HOLES
otherwise special,
V V
furnish dimen-
If rod end is not specified, Style 4 will be Use Style 9 for applications where female rod sional sketch.
furnished. ends are required.
92
Series 3H Large Bore Tie Rod Mountings
Table 1—Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

EEf▲ EE** Add Stroke
EE* S.A.E. S.A.E.
NPTF FLANGE STRAIGHT
Bore BB DD E PORT THREAD G J K RA RB RC RR LG P
10 41/8 11/8-12 125/8 2 2 24 311/16 311/16 19/32 5.291 3.775 – 21/ 8 121/8 81/ 2
12 41/ 2 11/4-12 147/8 21/2 21/2 24 47/16 47/16 113/32 6.270 4.555 – 2 3/ 8 141/2 101/8
14 41/ 2 11/4-12 171/8 21/2 21/2 24 47/8 47/8 113/32 7.485 6.143 4.409 21/4 155/8 107/8
* NPTF ports are available for an extra charge.

▲ Optional SAE flange ports may be specified – flange to be supplied by
customer. See Table 4 for flange port pattern dimensions.
** SAE straight thread ports are standard and are indicated by port number.
Table 3 —
Envelope and
Mounting
Table 2—Rod Dimensions Dimensions
Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions Add Stroke
Rod +.000
Rod Dia. Thread -.005
Bore No. MM KK A B C F LAF NA RD V WF Y ZB ZJ
1 41/2 31/4-12 41/2 5.249 1 115/16 7 7/16 43/8 81/4 1/4 215/16 43/4 1611/32 151/16
10
2 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 55/16 1629/32 155/8 B
3 5 31/2-12 5 5.749 1 115/16 8 3/16 47/8 87/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 1619/32 155/16
4 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 1619/32 155/16
1 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 53/8 193/32 1711/16
12 2 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/16 1929/32 181/2
3 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 511/16 1913/32 18
1 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 57/8 2017/32 191/8
14 2 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 67/8 2117/32 201/8
3 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/8 211/32 195/8
Table 4—Optional SAE Flange Port Pattern Table 5—Tie Rod Information
see table 1 for dimensions

Nom.
Flange Z-THD AA
Size A Q GG W X UNC-2B Min. SAE
11/ 2 1.50 2.750 1.406 1.38 0.70 1/2-13 1.06 24
2 2.00 3.062 1.688 1.53 1/2-13 1.06 32
10", 12" Bores, 8 Tie Rods 14" Bores, 12 Tie Rods
0.84
21/ 2 2.50 3.500 2.000 1.75 1.00 1/2-13 1.19 40
3 3.00 4.188 2.438 2.09 1.22 5/8-11 1.19 48
93
Head Rectangular and
Square Mountings
ZB + STROKE
Head Rectangular Mounting
Y P + STROKE
Style JJ (10"-14" Bore)
(NFPA Style ME5) UF WF LG + STROKE
EE
1
E 4 2 R RD MM
3 FB G J K
E 4 HOLES
TF
Head Rectangular Mounting

Style JJ (16"-20" Bore)

(NFPA Style ME5)

ZB + STROKE
Head Square Flange Mounting EX Y P + STROKE
E WF LG + STROKE
Style JB 1 EE
(NFPA Style MF5)
TE RE 4 2 E EX RD MM
J K
3 EB G
RE 8 HOLES
TE

(NFPA Style SM) (NFPA Style SF) Style 3
A WF WF
Small Male Small Female Special thread,
F F
KK extension, rod eye,
C C blank, etc., are
KK
also available.
To order, specify
B MM RD B MM RD
“Style 3” and give
desired dimen-
.515 DIA. .515 DIA. sions for KK, A and
x .75 DEEP
NA
x .50 DEEP
NA LAF or WF. If
4 HOLES 4 HOLES
otherwise special,
V V furnish dimen-
If rod end is not specified, Style 4 will be Use Style 9 for applications where female rod sional sketch.
furnished. ends are required.
94
Head Rectangular and
Series 3H Large Bore Square Mountings
Optional Flange Ports
High Pressure Hydraulic Cylinders Tie Rod Information

EE* S.A.E. S.A.E.
Bore E EB PORT THREAD EX FB G J K R RE TE TF UF LG P
10 125/8 15/16 2 2 24 165/8 113/16 311/16 311/16 19/32 9.62 9.89 14.13 157/8 19 121/8 81/2
12 147/8 19/16 21/2 21/2 24 193/4 21/16 47/16 47/16 113/32 11.45 11.75 16.79 181/2 22 141/2 101/8
14 171/8 113/16 21/2 21/2 24 213/4 25/16 47/8 47/8 113/32 13.26 12.90 18.43 21 25 155/8 107/8
Table 1A—Envelope and Mounting Dimensions

Add Stroke
EE EE
Bore E EB (SAE) (FLANGE) EJ EX FB G J K R RA RE TE TF UF L G P
16 19 113/16 24 3 20 241/2 113/16 57/8 57/8 129/32 151/2 8 15.28 21.03 21 241/2 181/8 121/ 8
18 22 21/16 24 3 23 261/2 21/16 67/8 67/8 129/32 18 71/4 16.45 22.65 241/4 281/4 211/8 151/8
20 24 21/16 24 3 25 29 21/16 77/8 77/8 129/32 20 8 18.07 24.87 261/2 301/2 235/8 175/8
* NPTF ports are available at an extra charge.
▲ Optional SAE flange ports may be specified – flange to be supplied by customer. See Table 4 for flange port pattern dimensions.
** SAE straight thread ports are standard and are indicated by port number.
Table 3 —Envelope and

Table 2—Rod Dimensions Mounting Dimensions
Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions Add
Stroke
Rod +.000
Bore No. MM KK A B C F LAF NA RD V WF Y ZB
1 41/2 31/4-12 41/2 5.249 1 115/16 7 7/16 43/8 81/4 1/4 215/16 43/4 1611/32
2 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 55/16 1629/32 B
10
3 5 31/2-12 5 5.749 1 115/16 8 3/16 47/8 87/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 1619/32
4 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 1619/32
1 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 53/8 193/32
12 2 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/16 1929/32
3 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 3 /2 511/16
1 1913/32
1 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 57/8 2017/32
14 2 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 67/8 2117/32
3 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/8 211/32
1 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 1 /16 12
15 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 7 24 1/32
16 3 9 61/2-12 9 9.999 1 115/16 131/4 87/8 131/2 3/8 41/4 71/4 24 9/32
4 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 71/2 24 17/32
1 9 61/2-12 9 9.999 1 115/16 131/4 87/8 131/2 3/8 41/4 71/4 27 9/32
18
3 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 71/2 27 17/32
20 1 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 71/2 30 1/32
Table 4—Optional SAE Flange Port Pattern Table 5—Tie Rod Information

10", 12" Bores 14" Bore
Nom.
Flange Z-THD AA
Size A Q GG W X UNC-2B Min. SAE Bore 10 12 14 16 18 20
11/2 1.50 2.750 1.406 1.38 0.70 1/2-13 1.06 24 Tie Rod Thread 11/8-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 * * *
2 2.00 3.062 1.688 1.53 0.84 1/2-13 1.06 32 RA 5.291 6.270 7.485 * * *
21/2 2.50 3.500 2.000 1.75 1.00 1/2-13 1.19 40 RB 3.775 4.555 6.143 * * *
3 3.00 4.188 2.438 2.09 1.22 5/8-11 1.19 48 RC — — 4.409 * * *
*Consult factory for dimensions
95
Cap Rectangular
and Square, Side Lug
and Centerline Lug Mountings
Cap Rectangular Mountings Note: 10"-14" Bores have (4) mounting holes, Y P + STROKE
16"-20" Bores have (8) mounting holes. EE PORTS
Style HH
(NFPA Style ME6) 1
EJ
4 2 RA R E (16-20"EONLY) RD MM ROD
DIA.
(10-14" ONLY)
3 K G J
E FB DIA. THRU
TF (8) HOLES 16-20" BORE WF LG + STROKE
(4) HOLES 10-14" BORE XF + STROKE
UF
Y P + STROKE
Cap Square Flange Mounting WF LG + STROKE
EX
Style HB E EE
(NFPA Style MF6) 1
TE RE 4 2 E EX RD MM
K G
3 EB J
RE 8 HOLES XF + STROKE
TE
Side Lugs Mounting Note: Stroke lengths on lug mounted cylinders should not be shorter than the cylinder

bore diameter. Consult factory for recommendations on shorter stroke lengths. See
Style C page 100 for further recommendations on side lug mountings.

10"-14" Bore only

(NFPA Style MS2)

Centerline Lugs Mounting

Style E

10"-14" Bore only

(NFPA Style MS3)

96
Cap Rectangular and Square,
Series 3H Large Bore Side Lug and Centerline Lug
Mountings, Optional Flange Ports
High Pressure Hydraulic Cylinders Tie Rod Information

(NFPA Style SM) A WF (NFPA Style SF) WF Style 3
F
Small Male
F
Small Female KK
Special thread, extension, rod eye, blank,
KK
C C etc., are also available.
To order, specify “Style 3” and give
B MM RD B MM RD desired dimensions for KK, A and LAF or
WF. If otherwise special, furnish dimen-
.515 DIA. Use Style 9 for .515 DIA. sional sketch.
If rod end is not x .75 DEEP applications where x .50 DEEP NA
NA 4 HOLES
specified, Style 4 will 4 HOLES female rod ends
be furnished. V are required. V

EE* S.A.E. S.A.E.
FLANGE STRAIGHT
Bore E EB NPTF PORT THREAD EX FB G J K R RE SB ST SU SW TE TF TS UF US L G P SS
10 125/8 15/16 2 2 24 165/8 113/16 311/16 311/16 19/32 9.62 9.89 19/16 21/ 4 31/ 2 15/8 14.13 157/8 157/8 19 191/ 8 121/8 81/2 87/8
12 147/8 19/16 21/2 21/2 24 193/4 21/16 47/16 47/16 113/32 11.45 11.75 19/16 3 41/4 2 16.79 181/2 187/8 22 227/8 141/2 101/8 101/2
14 171/8 113/16 21/2 21/2 24 213/4 25/16 47/8 47/8 113/32 13.26 12.90 25/16 4 43/4 21/4 18.43 21 215/8 25 261/8 155/8 107/8 111/8
Table 1A—Envelope and Mounting Dimensions * NPTF ports are available at an

extra charge.
Add Stroke ▲ Optional SAE flange ports may
EE EE be specified – flange to be
Bore E EB (SAE) (FLANGE) EJ EX FB G J K R RA RE TE TF UF L G P supplied by customer. See Table 4
for flange port pattern dimensions.
16 19 113/16 24 3 20 241/2 113/16 57/8 57/8 129/32 151/2 8 15.28 21.03 21 241/ 2 181/ 8 121/ 8 ** SAE straight thread ports are
18 22 21/16 24 3 23 261/2 21/16 67/8 67/8 129/32 18 71/4 16.45 22.65 241/4 281/ 4 211/8 151/8 standard
number.
and are indicated by port
20 24 21/16 24 3 25 29 21/16 77/8 77/8 129/32 20 8 18.07 24.87 261/2 301/2 235/8 175/8
Table 3 —Envelope and B

Rod +.000
Bore No. MM KK A B C F LAF NA RD V WF Y XS XF ZB
1(Std.) 41/2 31/4-12 41/2 5.249 1 115/16 7 7/16 43/8 81/4 1/4 215/16 43/4 49/16 151/16 1611/32
2 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 55/16 51/8 155/8 1629/32
10
3 5 31/2-12 5 5.749 1 115/16 8 3/16 47/8 87/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 413/16 155/16 1619/32
4 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 413/16 155/16 1619/32
1(Std.) 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115 /16 8 11 /16 5 3/ 8 9 3 /8 1/4 3 3/16 53/8 53/16 1711/16 193/32
12 2 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/16 6 181/2 1929/32
3 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 511/16 51/2 18 1913/32
1 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 57/8 53/4 191/8 2017/32
14 2 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 67/8 63/4 201/8 2117/32
3 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/8 61/4 195/8 211/32
1 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 7 * 221/8 *
16 3 9 61/2-12 9 9.999 1 115/16 131/4 87/8 131/2 3/8 41/4 71/4 * 223/8 *
4 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115 /16 14 1 /2 9 7/8 14 1 /2 3/8 41/2 71/2 * 225/8 *
1 9 61/2-12 9 9.999 1 115/16 131/4 87/8 131/2 3/8 41/4 71/4 * 253/8 *
18
3 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 71/2 * 255/8 *
20 1 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 71/2 * 281/8 * *Consult Factory
Table 4—Optional SAE Table 5—Tie Rod Information
Flange Port Pattern

10", 12" Bores 14" Bore

Nom.
Flange Z-THD AA
Size A Q GG W XUNC-2B Min. SAE
Bore 10 12 14 16 18 20
11/2 1.50 2.750 1.406 1.38 0.70 1/2-13 1.06 24
Tie Rod Thread 11/8-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 * * *
2 2.00 3.062 1.688 1.53 0.84 1/2-13 1.06 32

RA 5.291 6.270 7.485 * * *
21/2 2.50 3.500 2.000 1.75 1.00 1/2-13 1.19 40

RB 3.775 4.555 6.143 * * *
3 3.00 4.188 2.438 2.09 1.22 5/8-11 1.19 48
RC — — 4.409 * * * *Consult factory for dimensions
97
Cap Fixed Clevis and
Trunnion Mountings
ZC + STROKE
Cap Fixed Clevis Mountings
Y P + STROKE
Style BB
WF LG + STROKE LR
(NFPA Style MPI) E
EE
1
MR
RD MM CD E 2 4
K G J L M 3
CW CB CW
XC + STROKE
Head Trunnion Mounting ZB + STROKE
Style D For "D" Style Mount Y P + STROKE
10"-14" Bore only Maximum

UT WF LG + STROKE
Pressure
(NFPA Style MT1) Rating - PSI 1
EE
Bore PSI
10 1600
12 1500
14 1400
E 4 2 TD RD MM
3 G J K
TL E TL XG
Cap Trunnion Mounting ZB + STROKE

Style DB For "DB" Style Mount Y P + STROKE
10"-14" Bore only Maximum UT WF LG + STROKE
(NFPA Style MT2) Pressure EE
Rating - PSI 1
Bore PSI
10 1600
12 1500
14 1400
E 4 2 TD RD MM
3 G J K
TL E TL XJ + STROKE
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Mounting

Style DD For "DD" Style Mount

(NFPA Style MT4) Maximum
Pressure
Rating - PSI
Bore PSI
10 1600
12 1500
14 1400

98
Cap Fixed Clevis and Trunnion
Series 3H Large Bore Mountings/Optional Flange Ports
Tie Rod Information

(NFPA Style SM) A WF (NFPA Style SF) WF Style 3
F F
Small Male Small Female KK Special thread, extension, rod eye,
C C
KK blank, etc., are also available.
To order, specify “Style 3” and give
B MM RD B MM RD
desired dimensions for KK, A and LAF or
Use Style 9 for
WF. If otherwise special, furnish dimen-
If rod end is not .515 DIA.
x .75 DEEP
applications where x.515 DIA.
.50 DEEP
sional sketch.
specified, Style 4 will NA female rod ends 4 HOLES NA
4 HOLES
be furnished. are required.
V V

+.001 EEf▲ EE** +.000 Add Stroke
-.003 EE* S.A.E. S.A.E. -.001
Bore BD CB CD CW E PORT THREAD G J K L LR M MR TD TL TM TY UM UT UW L G P
10 41/2 4 3.500 2 125/8 2 2 24 311/16 311/16 19/32 4 33/ 8 31/2 31/2 3.500 31/2 14 13 21 195/8 171/2 121/8 81/2
12 51/2 41/2 4.000 21/4 147/8 21/2 21/2 24 47/16 47/16 113/32 41/2 37/8 4 4 4.000 4 161/2 151/2 241/2 227/8 203/4 141/2 101/8
14 51/2 6 5.000 3 171/8 21/2 21/2 24 47/8 47/8 113/32 53/4 43/16 5 5 4.500 41/2 191/2 191/4 281/2 261/8 243/4 155/8 107/8
Table 1A—Envelope and Mounting Dimensions (Style BB only)
Add Stroke * NPTF ports are available at an extra charge.
EE EE
▲ Optional SAE flange ports may be specified
Bore E (SAE) (FLANGE) CB CD CW G J K L LR M MD MR L G P – flange to be supplied by customer. See Table
16 19 24 3 7 6 31/2 57/8 57/8 129/32 7 61/4 6 16 6 181/ 8 121/8 4 for flange port pattern dimensions.
** SAE straight thread ports are standard and
18 22 24 3 8 61/2 4 67/8 67/8 129/32 75/8 63/4 61/2 18 61/2 211/ 8 151/8 are indicated by port number.
Dimension CD is pin diameter.
20 24 24 3 9 71/2 41/2 77/8 77/8 129/32 83/4 73/4 71/2 20 71/2 235/8 175/8
Table 3 —Envelope and B

Rod +.000
Rod Dia. Thread -.005 Min.
Bore No. MM KK A B C F LAF NA RD V WF XG XI* Y XC XJ ZB ZC
1(Std.) 41/2 31/4-12 41/2 5.249 1 115/16 7 7/16 43/8 81/4 1/4 215/16 43/4 91/16 43/4 191/16 133/8 1611/32 22 9/16
2 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 55/16 95/8 55/16 195/8 1315/16 1629/32 231/8
10
3 5 31/2-12 5 5.749 1 115/16 8 3/16 47/8 87/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 95/16 5 195/16 135/8 1619/32 2213/16
4 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 5 95/16 5 195/16 135/8 1619/32 2213/16
1(Std.) 51/2 4-12 51/2 6.249 1 115/16 8 11/16 53/8 93/8 1/4 3 3/16 53/8 105/8 53/8 223/16 151/2 193/32 263/16
12 2 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 63/16 111/2 63/16 23 165/16 1929/32 27
3 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 511/16 1015/16 511/16 221/2 1513/16 1913/32 261/2
1 7 5-12 7 7.999 1 115/16 101/2 67/8 101/2 3/8 31/2 515/16 117/16 57/8 247/8 1611/16 2017/32 297/8
14 2 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 615/16 127/16 67/8 257/8 1711/16 2117/32 307/8
3 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 67/16 1115/16 63/8 253/8 173/16 211/32 303/8
1 8 53/4-12 8 8.999 1 115/16 12 77/8 121/2 3/8 4 ** ** 7 291/8 ** ** 351/8
16 3 9 61/2-12 9 9.999 1 115/16 131/4 87/8 131/2 3/8 41/4 ** ** 71/4 293/8 ** ** 353/8
4 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 ** ** 71/2 295/8 ** ** 355/8
1 9 61/2-12 9 9.999 1 115/16 131/4 87/8 131/2 3/8 41/4 ** ** 71/4 33 ** ** 391/2
18
3 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 ** ** 71/2 331/4 ** ** 393/4
20 1 10 71/4-12 10 10.999 1 115/16 141/2 97/8 141/2 3/8 41/2 ** ** 71/2 367/8 ** ** 443/8
* Dimension XI to be specified by customer. **Consult Factory.
Table 4—Optional SAE Table 5—Tie Rod Information

Flange Port Pattern
10", 12" Bores 14" Bore

Nom.
Flange Z-THD AA
Size A Q GG W X UNC-2B Min. SAE
11/2 1.50 2.750 1.406 1.38 0.70 1/ 2-13 1.06 24 Bore 10 12 14 16 18 20
Tie Rod Thread 11/8-12 11/4-12 11/4-12 * * *
2 2.00 3.062 1.688 1.53 0.84 1/ 2-13 1.06 32
RA 5.291 6.270 7.485 * * *
21/2 2.50 3.500 2.000 1.75 1.00 1/ 2-13 1.19 40
RB 3.775 4.555 6.143 * * *

3 3.00 4.188 2.438 2.09 1.22 5/ 8-11 1.19 48 RC — — 4.409 * * * *Consult factory for dimensions
99
Double Rod Models
Mounting Recommendations/
Pressure Ratings
How to Use Double Rod Cylinder Dimensioned Drawings

Rod End #1
Rod End #2

To obtain dimensioning information on a double

Mounting Dimension Shown rod cylinder, first select the desired mounting Add 2X
Mounting Styles for on This Page style and refer to the corresponding single rod Rod Rod Stroke
Styles for Corresponding Supplement Bore Code Dia. ZM
Single Rod Double Rod Dimensions on cylinder model shown on the preceding pages.
1 41/2 18
Models Models* Pages Listed Below (See table at left.) After you have determined all
2 7 191/8
T K 92 necessary dimensions from that drawing, turn 10
back to this page and supplement those 3 5 181/2
TB KTB 92
dimensions with additional ones from the 4 51/2 181/2
TD KTD 92
drawing above and table at right. These added 1 51/2 207/8
JJ KJJ 94
dimensions differ from, or are in addition to, 12 2 8 221/2
JB KJB 94
those shown on the preceding pages and 3 7 211/2
C KC 96
provide the additional information needed to 1 7 225/8
E KE 96
completely dimension a double rod cylinder 14 2 10 245/8
D KD 98
model. 3 8 235/8
DD‡ KDD 98
On a double rod cylinder where the two rod 1 8 261/8
*If only one end of these Double Rod Cylinders is to
ends are different, be sure to clearly state 16 3 9 265/8
be cushioned, be sure to specify clearly which end
this will be. which rod end is to be assembled at which end. 4 10 271/8
Port position 1 is standard. If other than 1 9 295/8
‡Specify XI dimension from rod end #1. 18
standard, specify pos. 2, 3 or 4 when viewed 3 10 301/8
from rod end #1 only. See port position 20 1 10 325/8
information in Section C.
Mounting Recommendations and Other Mountings

In addition to the standard mountings dimensioned on the preceding Trunnion Mountings — Cylinders require lubricated pillow blocks
pages, the following information covers mounting ideas that may with minimum bearing clearances. Pillow blocks should be carefully
prove helpful in your applications. When needed, special heads, caps, aligned and rigidly mounted so the trunnions will not be subjected to
and flanges can be provided. Sketches of your requirements, together bending moments. The rod end connection should also be pivoted,
with specifications relative to the application and forces involved with the customer’s pin in the piston rod knuckle parallel to the
should be submitted. trunnions.
Mounting Bolts — High tensile socket head screws are Clevis Mountings — Cylinders should be pivoted at both ends, with
recommended for all mounting styles. Use 1/16" smaller than hole size. the customer’s pin in the piston rod knuckle parallel to the pivot pin
Flange Mountings — Cylinders can be properly centered by supplied with the clevis.
measuring from piston rod diameter. After mounting the flange may be
drilled for pins or dowels to prevent shifting. Metallic Rod Wiper
Side Lug Mountings — Caution, cylinders which do not absorb force When specified, metallic rod wipers can be supplied at extra cost,
on their centerline (Group 3) tend to sway when under load. Short instead of the standard synthetic rubber wiperseal. Recommended in
stroke, non-centerline mounted cylinders can subject mounting bolts applications where atmospheric particles or splashings tend to cling to
to large tension forces which when combined with shear forces can the extended piston rod and otherwise damage the synthetic rubber
overstress standard mounting bolts. Side lug mounted cylinders wiperseal. Installation of metallic rod wiper does not affect cylinder
should always be prevented from shifting through use of shear keys dimensions.
so located as to resist the major load, whether push or pull.
100
Notes
101
How to Order High Pressure Hydraulic Cylinders
How to Order Series “3H” Cylinders
When ordering Series 3H cylinders, please review the following:
Note: Duplicate cylinders can be ordered by giving the SERIAL Additional Lipseal® Piston (if desired): Parker Lipseal® pistons are
NUMBER from the nameplate of the original cylinder. Factory records offered as an option at no extra cost in the Series 3H cylinders. With
supply a quick positive identification. this feature, zero leakage under static holding conditions is attained.
Call out “with Lipseal piston” if this type of piston is desired. If not
Piston Rods: Specify rod code number based on diameter. Give
specified, the Hi Load piston seals will be furnished.
thread style number for a standard thread or specify dimensions. See
“Style 3 Rod End” below. Fluid Medium: Series 3H hydraulic cylinders are equipped with seals
for use with hydraulic oil. If other than hydraulic oil will be used,
Cushions: If cushions are required specify according to the model
specify class of fluid (See Catalog section C.)
number on the next page. If the cylinder is to have a double rod and
only one cushion is required, be sure to specify clearly which end of
the cylnder is to be cushioned.
Special Modifications: Additional information is required on orders
for cylinders with special modifications. This is best handled with
descriptive notes. For further information, consult factory.
Water Service Modifications (These factors must be taken into account because of the lower
Standard – When requested, Parker can supply Series 3H cylinders tensile strength of stainless steels available for use in piston rods.)
with standard modifications that make the cylinders more nearly Warranty– Parker will warrant Series 3H cylinders modified for water
suitable for use with water as the fluid medium. The modifications service to be free of defects in materials or workmanship. On the
include chrome-plated cylinder bore; electroless nickel-plated, non- other hand, Parker cannot accept responsibility for premature failure
wearing internal surfaces; Lipseal style piston, Buna N Seals and of cylinder function, where failure is caused by corrosion, electrolysis
chrome-plated, stainless steel piston rod. On orders for water service or mineral deposits within the cylinder.
cyinders, be sure to specify the maximum operating pressure.
Class 1 Seals
Class 1 seals are the seals provided as standard in a cylinder Piston Seals – Hi-Load. Filled PTFE seals with a nitrile expander
assembly unless otherwise specified. For further information on fluid Option – Cast Iron Rings
compatibility or operating limitations of all components, see section C. O-Rings – Nitrile (nitrile back-up washer when used)
For the 3H series cylinders the following make-up Class 1 Seals: Additional data is required on orders for cylinders with special
Primary Piston Rod Seal – Nitrile modifications. For further information, consult factory.
Piston Rod Wiper – Nitrile
Combination Mountings
Single Rod End The first mounting is the one called out on the head primary end at rod end #1. See Double Rod Models information page
end of the cylinder. The second or subsequent mountings are called in this section. For this option the piston rod number, piston rod end,
out as they appear in the assembly moving away from the rod end. and piston rod threads are to be specified for both ends. The simplest
Exception: When tie rod mountings are part of a combination, the are for symmetric cylinders such as: TD, C, E, F, G, and CB mounts.
model number should contain an “S” (Special) in the model code and All other mounting styless, the description of the first rod end will be at
a note in the body of the order clarifying the mounting arrangement. the mounting end. In the case of multiple mounts, the description of
The ”P” is used to define a thrust key and is not considered to be a the first rod end will be at the primary mounting end. For “DD”
mounting. However, it is located at the primary end. mounts, the description of the first rod end will be the same location
Example: 10.00 CCBB3HLTS14AC x 10.000 as the “XI” dimension.
Combination “C” mounting head only. “BB” mounting cap end Example: 10.00 KDD3HLT24A/18A x 10.000 XI=10.00
This cylinder is also cushioned at both ends. This is a center trunnion mounting cylinder with the XI dimension
Double Rod End In general, the model number is read left to right measured from the code 2 rod side of the cylinder which has the style
corresponding to the cylinder as viewed from left to right with the 4 thread. The opposite end code 1 rod with the style 8 thread.
Style 3 Rod End

A style 3 rod end indicates a special rod end configuration. All special assembly or maintenance. Standard style 55 rod ends with a longer
piston rod dimensions must have all three: KK; A; W/WF or LA/LAF than standard WG dimension should call out a style 3 rod end and the
specified with the rod fully retracted. A sketch or drawing should be note: same as 55 except WG=____. A drawing should be submitted
submitted for rod ends requiring special machining such as snap ring for special 55 rod ends that have specific tolerances or special radii.
grooves, keyways, tapers, multiple diameters, etc. It is good design Special rod ends that have smaller than standard male threads,
practice to have this machining done on a diameter at least 0.065 larger than standard female threads, or style 55 rod ends with
inches smaller than the piston rod diameter. This allows the piston rod smaller than standard AF or AE dimensions are to be reviewed by
to have a chamfer preventing rod seal damage during assembly or Engineering for proper strength at operating pressure.
Service Policy Certified Dimensions

On cylinders returned to the factory for repairs, it is standard policy for Parker Cylinder Division guarantees that all cylinders ordered from this
the Cylinder Division to make such part replacements as will put the catalog will be built to dimensions shown. All dimensions are certified to
cylinder in as good as new condition. Should the condition of the returned be correct, and thus it is not necessary to request certified drawings.
cylinder be such that expenses for repair would exceed the costs of a
new one, you will be notified.
Address all correspondence and make shipments to, Service
Department at your nearest regional plant listed in the pages of this
catalog.
102
Series 3H Large Bore Model Numbers
Series 3H Model Numbers – How to Develop Them – How to “Decode” Them

Parker Series 3H cylinders can be completely and accurately described number, select only those symbols that represent the cylinder required,
by a model number consisting of coded symbols. To develop a model and place them in the sequence indicated below.
10" C K C JB 3H K T V S 1 4 A C 12"
Feature Description Page No. Symbol
Bore* Specify in inches
Cushion-Head Used only if cushion required C94, 90 C
Double-Rod Used only if double-rod cylinder 100 K
is required
Mounting* Tie Rods Extended Head End 92 TB
Style (10"-14" Bore)
Tie Rods Extended Cap End 92 TC
(10"-14" Bore)
Tie Rods Extended Both Ends 92 TD
(10"-14" Bore)
Head Square Flange 94 JB
Head Rectangular 94 JJ
Cap Square Flange 96 HB
Cap Rectangular 96 HH
Side Lugs (10"-14" Bore) 96 C†
Centerline Lugs (10"-14" Bore) 96 E
Cap Fixed Clevis 98 BB
Head Trunnion (10"-14" Bore) 98 D
Cap Trunnion (10"-14" Bore) 98 DB
Intermediate Fixed Trunnion‡ 98 DD
Combination Any Practical Mounting Style – As listed
Mounting Listed Above above
Style
Series* Used in all 3H Model Numbers – 3H
Piston Hi-Load Piston standard B89, C4 K
Used only for Ring Packed Piston B88 C B
Ports* SAE Straight Thread O-Ring C89 T
Port (Standard)
Used only for NPTF (Dry Seal C89 U
Pipe Thread) (10-14" Bore Only)
Used only for BSP (Parallel C89 R
Thread ISO 228)
Used only for SAE Flange Ports C89 P
(3000 psi)
Used only for BSPT C89 B
(Taper Thread)
Used only for Metric Thread C89 G
Used only for Metric Thread Y
per ISO 6149 C89
Common Fluorocarbon Seals C83 V
Modifications
Water Service C83 W
Special Used only if special
Modifications Modifications are required:
Use Symbol S to designate special
Port Position Change C119 S
Special Seals C83
Stop Tube• C95,C122
Piston Rod* For Single Rod Cylinders, – 1
Number select one only.
Modification except piston rod end
Refer to Rod number listing, – 2
Table 2, Pages 90 through 97 – 3
Piston* Select:
Rod End
Style 4 Small Male C92 4
Style 8 Intermediate Female 8
Styles 4, 8, and 9 are catalog standards
Style 9 Short Female 9
Specify Style 3 for any special piston rod end
Style 55 Rod End for Flange 55
Coupling
Style 3 Special (Specify) 3
Piston Rod* UNF Standard C92 A
Threads
BSF (British Fine) W
Metric M
Cushion-Cap Used only if cushion required C94, 90 C
Stroke*• Specify in inches C122 –
†Cylinders with this mounting style should have a minimum stroke **See chart in Section C for minimum piston rod diameter.
length of equal to or greater than its bore diameter. ‡Specify XI dimension
*Required for Basic Cylinder Model Number •In case of Stop Tube, call out Gross Stroke
103
Parker TS-2000 seal designed to
eliminate cylinder rod seal leakage.
Parker Series 2H Heavy Duty and market, which in turn produces “dry
Series 3L Medium Duty Hydraulic rod” performance. The seal geometry
Cylinders with the TS-2000 seal was refined for maximum stability in
offers positive protection against the groove and has excellent
cylinder rod leakage under the most performance characteristics
demanding applications. throughout a broad range of
pressures and piston rod velocities.
The TS-2000 seal is the product of
countless hours of research, The Parker design team was
development and extensive field successful!
testing and is only available on Parker TS-2000 rod seal has not failed in
Cylinders. any of the test applications in the lab
Based on the popular Parker or on the job, no matter how tough or
“Jewel” gland with wiperseal and
Serrated Lipseal rod design, the demanding.
TS-2000 cylinder rod seal.
TS-2000 incorporates the pressure- For more information on the
compensated, uni-directional material that would not react chemically
with hydraulic fluids. And it had to TS-2000 call or write your local
characteristics of a U-cup with the Parker distributor or Parker Hannifin
multiple edge sealing effectiveness of produce better and more reliable “dry
rod” performance than the standard Corporation, Cylinder Division, 500
compression-type stacked-packings. S. Wolf Road, Des Plaines, IL 60016,
serrated lip-seal design in a broad
The goal for the Parker team was to range of applications. 847-298-2400.
design a rod seal suitable for all types
of applications, regardless of pressure The result is the TS-2000 seal,
profile. It had to be composed of a designed especially to eliminate rod
seal leakage in the most demanding
applications. It features a special
polyurethane material that will not react
chemically with petroleum-based
hydraulic fluid, is extremely resistant to
abrasion and extrusion, and
provides exceptional service
life. It has more sealing
edges than other
seals on the
Worldclass
Quality Products
and Service
104
Service Bulletin 1110-M3
Cylinder Division Cylinder Division
500 South Wolf Road 160 Chisholm Drive Series 2H, 2HD, 7" & 8" Bore
Des Plaines, IL 60016 Milton, Ontario 3H & 3HD, VH, HD, 3L & 2A
(847) 298-2400 Canada L9T 3G9 Hydraulic/Pneumatic Cylinders
(905) 693-3000 Issued: June, 2006
Supersedes: February, 2006
Series 2H, 2HD, 7" & 8" Bore 3H & 3HD, VH, HD, 3L & 2A Hydraulic and Pneumatic Cylinders
Parts Identification, Maintenance Instructions & Seal Kits
Service Assemblies and Seal Kits
Service Assemblies and Seal Kits for Parker hydraulic and 71 Ball – cushion check valve
pneumatic cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance 72 Cushion check valve screw
processes. They contain sub-assemblies which are ready for 73 Floating cushion bushing
installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering 74 Retaining ring for cushion bushing
Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identification 115 Back-up washer, gland to head o-ring
plate on the cylinder body, and supply the following information: 1193 Hi-Load Piston seal
Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type 1203 Energizing ring for Hi-Load seal
121 Wear ring for Hi-Load piston and 8" & larger
Key to Part Numbers 2A Series cylinders
122 Retainer Bolt
1 Head
1
7 Cap 3L uses 2 or 3 rings; all other series use 4 rings.
2
14 Gland In some cases, the adjusting screw is installed in a cartridge.
3
15 Cylinder body 7" & 8" Bore HD, 3H & 3HD cylinders have only one Hi-Load
17 Piston piston seal and energizing ring.
18 Cushion sleeve 70f
70a
70e
19 Tie rod 70d
70c
23 Tie rod nut 7 70b
26 Back-up washer
47
(7" & 8" 3H, VH & HD Series) 23
27 Retainer 17
15
34 Piston rod 18
40 Wiperseal – for 14
69
73 70
26
74
34
23
19
115 71
14
69
72
122 45 115
1 14 43 45
40 14
45 1 41
40-41
27 27
40 43 41 14 45
HD Construction
(See Bulletin
1110-M4 for
2HD and 3HD
Gland Assembly HD Gland Assembly
Instructions)
120 119 121
2H, 3H, VH, 3L & 2A
41 Lipseal – for 14
Gland Assembly
42 Lipseal, Piston
48
43 Back-up washer, gland lipseal 41
(not hydraulic Class 1 seals)
44 Back-up washer, Lipseal
45 O-ring – gland/head
47 O-ring – cylinder body Hi-Load Piston
481 Cast iron rings (All Series except 2A & 3L)
69 O-ring – needle valve and check
valve screws Ring Type Piston 42 44 121 44 42
702 Needle valve, cushion adjustment (All Series except 2A)
70a2 Needle valve, cushion adjustment –
42 44 42
cartridge type
70b Cartridge screw
70c O-ring – cartridge screw
70d Needle screw
70e Back-up washer – needle screw
70f O-ring – needle screw
Lipseal Piston with Wear Ring
Lipseal Piston (All Series) 2A Series Bores 8, 10, 12 & 14
Page 2 of 6
Operating Fluids and Temperature Ranges

The table shows the main types of fluid used with hydraulic cannot be met by the seal classes described, please consult the
cylinders. If the operating conditions of the particular application factory and supply complete application details.
Class No Typical Fluids Temperature Range

1 Nitrile & Polyurethane Air, Nitrogen, -10°F (-23°C) to
Hydraulic Oil, Mil-H-5606 Oil +165°F (+74°C)
2 Nitrile, Nitroxile Water, Water Glycol, H.W.C.F. - See Class 6 below. -10°F (-23°C) to
and Fluorocarbon Water-in-Oil Emulsion - Houghto-Safe 271, 620, 5040 +165°F (+74°C)
Mobil Pyrogard D,
Shell Irus 905
Ucon Hydrolube J-4
5 Fluorocarbon High Temperature -10°F (-23°C) to
Houghto-Safe 1010, 10551 1120 +250°F (+121°C)
Fyrquel 150, 220, 300, 550 (Class 5 seals may be
Mobil Pyrogard 42, 43, 53, 55 operated up to +400°F
Note: Fluorocarbon seals are not suitable for use with [+204°C] with reduced
Skydrol fluid, but can be used with hydraulic oil if desired. service life)
6 Nitroxile, Fluorocarbon, H.W.C.F. - Houghton Hydrolubric 120B +40°F (+4°C) to
and Nitrile Sonsol Lubrizol, for other H.W.C.F. consult factory +120°F (+49°C)
Service Kit Numbers

Gland Cartridge Kits and Rod Seal Kits
Series 2H, 7" & 8" Bore 3H, VH & 3L** Series HD
Seal Type Seal Type
Class 1 Service Class 2 Service* Class 1 Service***
Rod.
(Polyurethane & Nitrile) (Nitrile) Rod. (Polyurethane & Nitrile)
Dia. Rod Seal Rod Seal
Gland Cartridge Gland Cartridge Dia.
† † † † Gland Cartridge Rod Seal
Kits Kits Kits Kits † †
Kits Kits
1/2 RG2HLTS051 RK2HLTS051 RG2AHL0051 RK2AHL0051
5/8 RG2HLTS061 RK2HLTS061 RG2AHL0061 RK2AHL0061 5/8 RG1HDL0061 RK1HDL0061
1 RG2HLTS101 RK2HLTS101 RG2AHL0101 RK2AHL0101 1 RG1HDL0101 RK1HDL0101
1 3/8 RG2HLTS131 RK2HLTS131 RG2AHL0131 RK2AHL0131 1 3/8 RG1HDL0131 RK1HDL0131
*Series 2H, 7 & 8" Bore 3H, VH, & 3L rod gland cartridge kit & rod seal kit part *** Series HD rod gland cartridge kit & rod seal
numbers shown identify class 2 seals. To order class 5 or 6 seals substitute 5 or 6 kit part numbers shown identify class 1
as required for the last digit of the kit number. seals. To order class 1, 2, 5 or 6 seals
**See Bulletin 1110-M4 for gland cartridge kits and rod seal kits to service Series 2HD substitute 1, 2, 5, or 6 as required for the
and 7" & 8" bore 3HD cylinders. last digit of the kit number.
Series 2A
Seal Type
Class 1 Service Class 5 Service
Rod.
(Nitrile) (Fluorocarbon)
Dia. Rod Seal Gland Cartridge Rod Seal
† Contents and Part Numbers of Seal Kits Gland Cartridge
† † † †
For Glands (See key to part numbers on Kits Kits Kits Kits
page 1) 1/2 RG2AHL0051 RK2AHL0051 RG2AHL 0055 RK2AHL 0055
5/8 RG2AHL0061 RK2AHL0061 RG2AHL 0065 RK2AHL 0065
Gland Cartridge Kits – Contain items 14, 40,
1 RG2AHL0101 RK2AHL0101 RG2AHL 0105 RK2AHL 0105
41, 45, 115 (HD only), (43 class 2, 5, & 6 only)
1 3/8 RG2AHL0131 RK2AHL0131 RG2AHL 0135 RK2AHL 0135
Rod Seal Kits – Contain items 40, 41, 45, 115 1 3/4 RG2AHL0171 RK2AHL0171 RG2AHL 0175 RK2AHL 0175
(HD only), (43 class 2, 5, & 6 only) 2 RG2AHL0201 RK2AHL0201 RG2AHL 0205 RK2AHL 0205
Cushion Screw Assembly – Screw type: 69, 2 1/2 RG2AHL0251 RK2AHL0251 RG2AHL 0255 RK2AHL 0255
70. Cartridge type: 70, b, 70c, 70d, 70e, 70f 3 RG2AHL0301 RK2AHL0301 RG2AHL 0305 RK2AHL 0305
Cushion Assembly – Screw type: 69, 71, 72 4 RG2AHL0401 RK2AHL0401 RG2AHL 0405 RK2AHL 0405
5 RG2AHL0501 RK2AHL0501 RG2AHL 0505 RK2AHL 0505
Page 3 of 6
Piston Seal Kits and Body Seal Kits

Series 2H, 7 & 8" Bore 3H, VH, HD & 3L
Class 1 & 2 Service*
Piston Seal Type
†
Piston Lipseal Hi-Load Piston Body Seal Kits
Bore Piston Ring Kits†
Kits† Seal Kits†
Size
Series 2H, 2HD, Series 2H, 2HD, Series 2H, 2HD, Series 2H, 2HD, * Series 2H, 2HD, 7 & 8" Bore 3H &
3H, 3HD, VH, HD 3H, 3HD, VH, HD 3H, 3HD, VH 3H, 3HD, VH, HD & 3HD, VH, HD & 3L piston seal kit &
& 3L & 3L & HD 3L body seal kit part numbers shown
1 PK102HLL01 PR102H0001 – CB102HL001 identify class 1 & 2 seals. To order
1 1/2 PK152HLL01 PR152H0001 PK152HK001 CB152HL001 class 5 or 6 seals substitute 5 or 6
2 PK202HLL01 PR202H0001 PK202HK001 CB202HL001 as required for the last digit of the
2 1/2 PK252HLL01 PR252H0001 PK252HK001 CB252HL001 kit number.
3 1/4 PK322HLL01 PR322H0001 PK322HK001 CB322HL001
4 PK402HLL01 PR402H0001 PK402HK001 CB402HL001 † Contents and Part Numbers of
5 PK502HLL01 PR502H0001 PK502HK001 CB502HL001 Seal Kits For Pistons & Bodies
6 PK602HLL01 PR602H0001 PK602HK001 CB602HL001 (See key to part numbers on page 1)
Excp 3H & 3HD PK702HLL01 PR702H0001 PK702HK001 CB702HL001
7
3H & 3HD N/A PR703H0001 PK703HK001 CB703H0001 Piston Lipseal Kits – (Includes
Excp 3H & 3HD PK802HLL01 PR802H0001 PK802HK001 CB802HL001 Cylinder Body End Seals) Contain two
8
3H & 3HD N/A PR803H0001 PK803HK001 CB803H0001 each of items 47, 42, & 44 (26 3H,
3HD, & 7" - 8" HD only).
Series 2A
Piston Seal Kits Body Seal Kits Piston Ring Kits – (Includes Cylinder
Bore Class 1 & 2 Class 1 & 2 Body End Seals) Contain two each of
Class 5 Service Class 5 Service item 47, (26 3H, 3HD, & 7" - 8" HD
Size Service Service
(Fluorocarbon) (Fluorocarbon) only) & four each of item 48.
(Nitrile) (Nitrile)
1 PK1002A001 PK1002A005 CB102HL001 CB102HL005 Hi-Load Piston Seal Kits – (Includes
1 1/2 PK1502A001 PK1502A005 CB152HL001 CB152HL005 Cylinder Body End Seals): Contains
2 PK2002A001 PK2002A005 CB202HL001 CB202HL005 two each of items 47, 119, 120 & 121
2 1/2 PK2502A001 PK2502A005 CB252HL001 CB252HL005 (26 3H, 3HD, & 7" - 8" HD only).
3 1/4 PK3202A001 PK3202A005 CB322A0001
4 PK4002A001 PK4002A005 CB402A0001 Cylinder Body End Seal Kits –
5 PK5002A001 PK5002A005 CB502A0001 Contains two each of item 47
USE (PK) (26 3H, 3HD, & 7" - 8" HD only).
6 PK6002A001 PK6002A005 CB602A0001
PISTON SEAL
7 PK7002A001 PK7002A005 CB702A0001
KITS
8 PK8002A001 PK8002A005 CB802A0001
FOR THESE SIZES
10 PK9002A001 PK9002A005 CB902A0001
12 PK9202A001 PK9202A005 CB922A0001
14 PK9402A001 PK9402A005 CB942A0001
Cylinder Modifications or Repairs After the cylinder has been disassembled, carefully remove the
Cylinders as shipped from the factory are not to be disassembled seals that will be replaced to avoid damaging groove surfaces.
and or modified. If cylinders require modifications, these modifica- Carefully clean all parts.
tions must be done at company locations or by The Company's Seals will be easier to install if they are lubricated. Always lubricate
certified facilities. The Cylinder Division Engineering Department seals and other components of a hydraulic cylinder with the
must be notified in the event of a mechanical fracture or permanent operating fluid. Pneumatically operated cylinders should be
deformation of any cylinder component (excluding seals). This lubricated with Lub-A-Cyl. Neither hydraulic nor pneumatic
includes a broken piston rod, tie rod, mounting accessory or any cylinders fitted with Class 3 seals (EPR) can be lubricated or
other cylinder component. The notification should include all operated with petroleum based products.
operation and application details. This information will be used
to provide an engineered repair that will prevent recurrence of Servicing Piston Seals
the failure. The cylinder bore and piston must be closely examined for signs
of scoring. If either the cylinder body or piston is damaged they
It is allowed to disassemble cylinders for the purpose of replacing must be replaced.
seals or seal assemblies. However, this work must be done by
strictly following all the instructions provided in this bulletin. When a cylinder is overhauled, a new set of piston seals is
required. It is also recommended that the cylinder be reassembled
Although Parker Hydraulic Cylinders are designed to make on-site
with new cylinder body O-rings. All piston seal kits contain piston
maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations can seals as well as two cylinder body O-rings (47) and for 7 and 8
only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fit a
inch bore hydraulic cylinders, their mating back-up washers (26).
cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement
parts which are necessary to return it to ‘as good as new’ 47 Body O-Rings
condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such
26
that repair would be uneconomical, you will be notified. 47
The piston is sealed and securely locked to the piston rod with 47
anaerobic adhesive. This threaded connection is ONLY to be
diassembled or reassembled by factory trained personnel.
WARNING: Some cylinders contain heavily loaded springs.

Improper disassembly of these cylinders can cause severe bodily 7" & 8" Bore
injury or death. Always disassemble a cylinder containing a spring 1" Bore Series 3H,
by following the instructions in Bulletin 0805-G-TSD-1. Series 2A & 3L All Other Series VH & HD
& Bore Sizes
Parker Hannifin Corporation

Cylinder Division
Des Plaines, IL USA
Page 4 of 6
Lipseal Piston Screw the gland into the retainer about one thread short
PK kits for Lipseal pistons contain two lipseals (42) and two of the retainer face that contacts the cylinder head. Slide
back-up washers (44). Additionally, kits for 8 inch bore and the gland/retainer assembly over the piston rod end, taking
larger 2A Series cylinders contain one wear ring (121). care not to damage the seal lips. Orient holes in full square
retainers over the tie rod holes in the head or line up holes in
Apply lubricant to the piston OD and all grooves. Install one smaller retainers with threaded mounting holes. Assemble
piston seal in the groove nearest the rod. The two ‘lips’ of bolts that secure bolt-on retainers finger tight.
this Lipseal should face toward the rod end of the piston.
Install the back-up washer in the same groove opposite the 3b) HD Series Cylinders
'lips' of the seal. Lubricate the cylinder body ID and insert
Slide the gland/retainer/head assembly over the piston rod
the piston – cap end first – into the cylinder body as shown.
end, taking care not to damage the seal lips.
Next, turn the cylinder body on its side and push the piston
4) Ensuring that the head and cap are kept in alignment,
through the tube just far enough to expose the groove for
refit the cylinder tie rods.
the second seal. Now, install the second Lipseal and back-
up washer in the exposed groove with the two ‘lips’ facing Note: Some cylinder configurations have tie rods
away from the rod. If the piston has a groove for a wear threaded into a component other than tie rod nuts
ring, install the wear ring in the groove and lubricate the (e.g. head, cap, flange plate, etc). Before torquing the
wear ring OD. Then pull the piston into the cylinder body. tie rods, use paint on the tie rods as an indicator that
adequate thread engagement is achieved. Ensure that
no unpainted thread is exposed at the connection to
the mating component.
For both style retainers, torque tie rod nuts to values listed
on page 6. Torque tie rods gradually starting at one
corner and work in a diagonal pattern to ensure
evenness of tightening. DO NOT TORQUE ONE TIE
Hi-Load Piston ROD COMPLETELY AND THEN THE OTHERS. Then, on
Kits for Hi-Load pistons contain two sets of seals for Series cylinders with bolt-on retainers, torque bolts to the values
2H and 2HD cylinders, and for 1½" - 6" bore Series HD listed on page 6.
cylinders. They contain one set of seals for Series 3H and
3HD cylinders, and for 7" - 8" bore Series HD and VH Trunnion Mounts
cylinders. Each seal set includes one filled PTFE sealing Trunnion mount with trunnion in groove on cylinder
ring (119) and an elastomeric energizing ring (120). The kit body – Torque cap end tie rods to value listed in table, then
also contains two wear rings. (121). Install the inner torque head tie rods to the same value.
energizing ring(s) in the seal groove(s). Trunnion mounts with trunnion located against a
Install the wear rings in the two grooves on each end of single shoulder on the cylinder body – Torque tie rods
the piston. Stretch the PTFE seal ring(s) by hand until it fits on the larger diameter side of the shoulder to approx. 10%
over the wear ring. Push the outer ring(s) over the wear of torque table value. Then torque the
ring and into the seal groove(s). With the outer ring(s) in tie rods on the opposite end to the full table value.
the groove(s), compress them with a ring compressor. Trunnion mounts located on a cylinder body without a
Alternatively, the PTFE rings can be compressed using shoulder – Assemble short set of tie rods first, using paint
a large hose clamp over thin shim stock. In all cases, take marks on the cylinder body as a location guide. Ensure the
care not to damage the sealing ring(s). Keep the sealing trunnion pins are square to the body. Install the longer tie
ring(s) compressed for some time before inserting the rods and torque to values in
piston into the body. A starting sleeve having an ID the the table.
same size as the cylinder bore, and tapered at one end,
will aid the installation process. 5) To complete the assembly of cylinders with a threaded
gland, tighten the gland firmly against the cylinder head.
Cast Iron Piston Rings To aid this process, a Gland Wrench Set should be
Kits for cast iron piston rings contain four rings (48). Most used. A specially designed face-type gland wrench with
3L Series cylinders use only three rings and in some larger flared lugs slips into an exact, sure fit on the gland, while
sizes, only two. All other series cylinders use four rings. a self-locking spanner wrench grips the gland wrench
Iron piston rings seldom need replacement. If the rings show securely. You can order the Cartridge Wrench or
Spanner Wrench to fit the piston rod size used in your
no signs of damage or abnormal wear, they may be reused.
To install piston rings, collapse the rings one at a time while Parker Hannifin Cylinder. See table on page 5.
inserting the piston into the cylinder body, using a light oil to Servicing Cushion Needle and Check Valves
aid this process. Leakage from cushion adjusters or check valve screws
indicates that the screw or cartridge-type assembly must be
Cylinder Assembly
replaced. The replacement assembly includes a new O-ring.
The cylinder should be re-assembled as follows:
Removal
1) The back-up washers, where fitted, and then the body
The screw/cartridge assembly should be unscrewed and its
O-rings should be lightly lubricated and pressed into the
mounting hole cleaned, paying close attention to the surface
grooves in the head and cap, without twisting. The
on which the O-ring sits.
cylinder body, with the piston and rod already fitted, can
then be assembled to the cap by ‘rocking’ it down over Installation – Cushion Needle Valves
the O-ring until the cylinder body is in contact with the Where a cartridge-type adjuster is fitted, lightly lubricate the
cap. The head is then fitted over the piston rod and screw threads and torque to the figures shown in the table
assembled to the cylinder body. Rock gently until the on page 6. With both types, the hex-headed screw may be
body and head are in metal-to-metal contact. adjusted to provide the required cushioning performance.
2) Lightly lubricate the gland seals. Installation – Check Valve
3a) Cylinders having a threaded gland (All cylinders except Ensure that the ball is correctly positioned. Screw-type
HD Series) adjusters should be screwed fully home, and then backed
off by a full turn.
Page 5 of 6
Servicing Cylinder Gland Seals

Fluid leakage from the piston rod at the gland normally
indicates worn gland seals. The cylinder should, if possible,
be removed for overhaul, or the piston rod disconnected.
Removal
1) Inspect the piston rod to make sure it is free from burrs
or damage which would prevent the gland sliding off
the rod. 63-A
The Parker gland is a cartridge design consisting of a

bronze gland (14), primary rod seal (41), back-up washer 63
(43) for all hydraulic cylinder seal classes, and a double lip
wiperseal (40). For HD Series cylinders the gland kit also
contains an O-ring (45) and back-up washer (115) that 2) If a Class 1 material rod seal, for a hydraulic cylinder, is
seals the gland to the cylinder head. The HD gland is usually being fitted to a standard gland, no back-up washer is
held in place with a bolt-on retainer. However, some HD necessary. A back-up washer (43) is included in seal
Series mounting styles in bores 1½"-4" with code 2 piston kits for all other service classes. Install this in the rod
rod diameters will utilize a retainer plate held in place by tie seal groove, against the wall closest to the wiper. Install
rods. For all other series of cylinders, the gland is threaded the lipseal (41) in the groove, with the lips facing the
into a gland retainer plate. These glands are usually pressure (cylinder) side of the gland.
removable without disturbing the tie rod torque. In some
3) Before installing HD Series cylinder glands, replace
cases, where a large diameter rod gland is threaded into a
O-ring (45) and back-up washer (115). Lubricate these
large square retainer, it may be necessary to loosen the tie
components and install them into the groove at the base
rods to remove the gland.
of the gland on the OD. Orient the O-ring and back-up
2) Where the gland is screwed into a square retainer, washer as shown in the drawing on page 1.
unscrew the gland using a Gland Wrench and Spanner
All gland seals for HD Series cylinders, including the OD
described on the previous page, and slide the gland off
O-ring, must be lubricated prior to assembly. Slide the gland
the piston rod.
cartridge over the piston rod end thread and into the cylinder
Where the gland is screwed into a circular retainer, undo head. Place the retainer plate over the gland, install the
the socket head cap screws and slide the gland/retainer mounting bolts and torque to the values listed on page 6.
assembly off the piston rod. Unscrew and withdraw the Note that some mounting styles in bores 1½"-4" with code 2
gland from the inner face of the retainer. piston rod diameters will utilize a retainer plate held in place
by tie rods.
3) Remove the seals using a sharp pointed instrument,
taking care not to damage the gland. Clean and inspect 4) Each kit with a threaded type gland contains an O-ring
the gland bore and seal grooves. If any wear is present (45) which seals the gland to the cylinder head. This
replace with a Gland Cartridge Kit containing seals of the O-ring is a static seal, and the original must be left in
correct type for the conditions. place unless it is faulty.
Installation Note: Some seal kits contain more than one O-ring.
Inspect the surface of the piston rod for damage which In this case, fit the one which is identical in size and
could cause early seal failure. When fitting the gland over thickness to the existing O-ring. Any extra O-rings
the rod thread, a slight rotary motion will help prevent should be discarded.
damage to the seals. In addition, shim stock or other thin, Slide the gland cartridge over the piston rod and thread it
tough material can be wrapped around the threads to into the retainer. Tighten the gland firmly against the cylinder
protect the seal lips. head using a Gland Wrench and Spanner. In some cases
1) Ensure that the kit contains seals of the correct type. (especially large piston rod diameters) it may be necessary
Lubricate the gland and seals, and fit the wiper (40) into to loosen the tie rod nuts or retainer bolts, and remove the
the groove closest to the outside face of the gland. retainer, in order to thread the gland back into place. In
those cases, thread the gland into the retainer about one
thread short of the retainer face that contacts the cylinder
head. Slide the gland assembly over the piston rod and
orient holes in large retainers with tie rod holes and holes in
bolt-on retainers with threaded mounting holes. Seat the
retainer against the cylinder head. Assemble bolts that
secure bolt-on retainers finger tight. For both style retainers,
torque tie rod nuts to values listed on page 6. Torque ties
rods gradually starting at one corner and work in a
diagonal pattern to ensure evenness of tightening.
DO NOT TORQUE ONE TIE ROD COMPLETELY AND
THE OTHERS. Then, on cylinders with bolt-on retainers,
torque bolts to the values listed on page 6. To complete the
assembly, in all cases, tighten the gland cartridge firmly
against the cylinder head using a Gland Wrench and
Spanner.
Gland seals are pressure activated and do not need
adjustment.
See Bulletin 1110-M4 for instructions to service gland and
seals in Series 2HD and 3HD cylinders.
Page 6 of 6
Tie Rod Torque

An extreme pressure lubricant (such as molybdenum Bore Tie Rod Torque*
disulphide) should be used on tie rod threads and nut Size Series 2H, 2HD, 3H, 3HD, VH, HD
bearing surfaces to control friction and reduce tie rod twist. 1 1/2 18 - 19 ft.-lbs. 24 - 25 N-m
2 45 - 49 ft.-lbs. 61 - 67 N-m
Bore Tie Rod Torque
2 1/2 45 - 49 ft.-lbs. 61 - 67 N-m
Size Series 2A
3 1/4 120 - 124 ft.-lbs. 163 - 169 N-m
1 35 - 40 in.-lbs. 41 - 47 cm-kg 4 178 - 184 N-m
131 - 135 ft.-lbs.
1 1/2 60 - 70 in.-lbs. 69 - 81 cm-kg 5 423 - 429 N-m
312 - 316 ft.-lbs.
2 11 - 12 ft.-lbs. 15 - 16 N-m 6 716 - 738 N-m
528 - 544 ft.-lbs.
2 1/2 11 - 12 ft.-lbs. 15 - 16 N-m 7 1085 - 1107 N-m
800 - 816 ft.-lbs.
3 1/4 25 - 26 ft.-lbs. 34 - 35 N-m
8 1168 - 1184 ft.-lbs. 1584 - 1606 N-m
4 25 - 26 ft.-lbs. 34 - 35 N-m
5 60 - 64 ft.-lbs. 81 - 87 N-m * The tie rod torque values listed in this table are intended for 2H,
6 60 - 64 ft.-lbs. 81 - 87 N-m 2HD, 3H, 3HD, HD and VH Series cylinders having a pressure
envelope pressure rating of 3000 psi. Consult factory for tie rod
7 90 - 94 ft.-lbs. 81 - 87 N-m torque of 2H, 2HD, 3H, 3HD, HD and VH Series cylinders
8 110 - 114 ft.-lbs. 149 - 155 N-m having a higher pressure rating.
10 148 - 155 ft.-lbs. 201 - 211 N-m
12 172 - 181 ft.-lbs. 233 - 245 N-m Retainer Bolt Torque
14 275 - 289 ft.-lbs. 373 - 392 N-m For Cylinders with Round Gland Retainers
Screw Size Torque
#10 15 - 16 in.-lbs. 17- 18 cm-kg
Cartridge Cushion Adjuster Torque 1/4" 60 - 63 in.-lbs. 69 - 72 cm-kg
Nominal Screw Size Torque 5/16" 10 - 11 ft.-lbs. 14 - 15 N-m
M8 6 - 7 ft.-lbs. 9 - 10 N-m 3/8" 20 - 21 ft.-lbs. 27 - 28 N-m
M10 18 - 22 ft.-lbs. 25 - 30 N-m 7/16" 35 - 37 ft.-lbs 48 - 50 N-m
M14 44 - 48 ft.-lbs. 60 - 65 N-m
Gland Wrench Spanner Wrench

Rod Diameter
(Symbol 63) (Symbol 63-A)
5/8" 0695900000 0116760000
1" 0605910000
1 3/8" 0695920000 0117030000
1 3/4" 0695930000 0116770000
2" 0695940000
2 1/2" 0695950000 0116770000
3" 0695960000
3 1/2" 0695970000
4" 0695980000 0116780000
4 1/2" 0838770000
5" 0695990000
5 1/2" 0696000000
Warning
FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR
RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/
or system options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you analyze all aspects of your
application, including consequences of any failure and review the information concerning the product or system in the current product
catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and
testing, is solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systems and assuring that all performance, safety and
warning requirements of the application are met.
The product described herein, including without limitation, product features, specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to
change by Parker Hannifin Corporation and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
Offer of Sale
The items described in this document are hereby offered for sale by Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries or its authorized
distributors. This offer and its acceptance are governed by provisions stated in the ‘Offer of Sale’.
© Copyright 2004, Parker Hannifin Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Parker Hannifin Corporation

Cylinder Division
Des Plaines, IL USA
TAB 4
TAB 5
ualAutomatic The solution
The you’ve
solution you’ve
been beenfor
looking looking for
ves Valves
Larox automatic valves
Larox automatic valves are ideal for shut off or control

applications that involve abrasive or corrosive slurries,
powders or granular substances. Our advanced flow control
solutions meet even the most stringent customer
specifications. Larox valves offer substantial savings through
improved performance, longer service lifetime, and lower
maintenance costs.
Technical Over 50,000 Larox valves are currently components can be tailored to suit
features operating in mining and metal most process conditions. Self-cleaning
industries, minerals processing, pulp Larox valve provides 100% tight shut-
• 100% Tight and paper, chemical process off even if solids have built up on the
• Full Bore industries, energy as well as oil and sleeve wall. When compressed, any
• Only the Sleeve is offshore industries. Numerous crystallized particles flake off the
in Contact with the applications also exist in water and sleeve surface and are washed
Medium effluent treatment, dairy, food and downstream.
• Linear Control Curve beverage production, and
• Centerline Closing pharmaceutical processing plants. The standard range is for diameters
• Flexible Sleeve from 1” to 40”, temperatures from
-50°F to +320°F, and operating
Modular design
pressures from vacuum to 1500 psig.
Process Our modular valve design has three
benefits We provide tailor-made flow control
main components: the sleeve, the
solutions precisely in accordance with
• Excellent Wear body and the actuator. The sleeve is
the customer specifications.
Resistance the only part that is in contact with the
• High Corrosion process medium. The construction
Resistance and materials of all three main
• No Jamming or
Clogging
• Self-cleaning
• Trouble-free
Operation
• Long Service
Intervals
• Low Maintenance
Costs
• Reduced Cost of
Ownership
The operating principle of a Larox valve is simple. In the open position, the valve is at full
bore with no flow restrictions thus making the valve an integral part of the pipeline. During
LPP-D
Automatic closing, two pinch bars squeeze the sleeve shut on the centerline.
Pump
Valves
2
Actuated on-off valves
The actuated on-off valves are ideal when remote control is required. The type of
actuator depends on the operating pressure, availability of power sources and
other process requirements.
Pneumatic actuator (A) Hydraulic actuator (H) Special actuators

The standard pneumatic actuator The compact, double acting The pneumatic motor driven
is double acting, therefore allowing hydraulic actuator is designed for actuator is ideal for high force
fast opening and closing. Actuator applications where high closing applications with limited space.
housing, tie rods and piston rods forces are required (high operating
are available in various materials. pressure or large valve diameter). Hydraulic actuators with
Short cycle times are achieved by Epoxy painted actuators can be an integrated power unit are
using quick exhaust valves. equipped with a pilot operated electrically driven stand-alone
check valve for fail-safe function. hydraulic units. The need for
Pneumatic actuators are suitable hydraulic piping is eliminated as
for a wide range of industrial they are mounted directly onto the
Electric actuator (E)
applications. Epoxy paint can be actuator.
applied to further improve The standard double acting
corrosion resistance. The standard electric actuator incorporates The water hydraulic actuator is
pneumatic actuators are simple built-in limit and torque switches, best suited for applications where
and economical to install. as well as a manual override extreme cleanliness is required
hand wheel. Electric actuators and the use of hydraulic oil is
are best suited for applications unacceptable.
Fail-safe options requiring high closing forces
Pneumatic actuators can be such as large valve diameters or
equipped with an override (AB) high operating pressures. It is
hand wheel for manual fail-safe the recommended actuator for
and a mechanic (AV) or a operating conditions where
pneumatic spring (AU) for pneumatic and hydraulic power
automatic fail-safe function. is unavailable.
PVE4A75 PVE4H75 PVE4E150
3
Valve model selection
Example: PVE4AK150 - 603LR
PVE 100 AK 10 - 2 0 3 L R
type size actuator pressure flange body flange opening auxiliaries
PV = (DN) M = handwheel classes drillings material shape tags Q = quick
open 1”-40” A = pneumatic
(PN) 1 =- * types 1 - 4 L = opening exhaust
PVE = 0 = Fe tags valve
AB = with manual 15=15 psig 2 = DIN Determined
enclosed override 75=75 psig PN 10 1=- by the valve R = inductive
PVE/S = manufacturer limits
AK = with 150=150 psig 3 = DIN 2 = AISI 316
enclosed/ el.pneum. 240=240 psig PN 16 S = magnetic
3 = aluminium
sealed positioner limits
365=365 psig 4 = DIN 4 = other
PVS = AN = with pneum. 600=600psig PN 25 T = mechan.
sealed 5 = plastic limits
positioner 940=940 psig 5 = DIN
AU = with pneum. 1500=1500 psig PN 40 Z = solenoid
spring 6 = ANSI valve
AV = with mech. 150 X = other,
spring 7 = ANSI must be
300 specified
H = hydraulic
HP = with 8 = BS
hydraulic TABLE D
positioner 9A = AS
E = electric TABLE D
EO = electric for 9B = AS
control TABLE E
9C = JIS 10
9D = JIS 16
Other on request
*) Fe DN25-200: GRS 250 (EN-GJL-250), epoxy painted K18-E180/2-FeSa 2Ω

DN250…: fabricated Fe37B ASTM A281- 84 Grade D(EN 10025 S235JRG2), epoxy painted K180-E180/2-FeSa 2Ω
AISI 316 DN25-200: cast 316 Stainless Steel (EN 10213-4 1.4408)
DN250…: fabricated (EN 10088-2 1.4432)
Aluminium Aluminium DN25-150: aluminium alloy (EN 1706 EN AC 44200), epoxy painted K18-E180/2-FeSa 2Ω
Plastic Ciba 5000 series DN65---150; PA Blend DN250
R Z
S Q
PV PVE PVE/S PVS
4
Sleeve model selection
Example: SBRT 1504/9.84/3L6
SBRT 150 4” / 9.84 / 3 L 2

sleeve materials pressure sleeve sleeve flange opening flange
SBRT = styrene butadiene classes (PN) inner length shape tags drillings
EPDM= ethylene diameter (INCHES) type 1 L = yes 1=-
15 = 15 psig (INCHES)
propylene Depends on - = none 2 = DIN PN 10
75 = 75 psig 1”-40” the sleeve 3 = DIN PN 16
inner diameter
CR = chloroprene 150 = 150 psig 4 = DIN PN 25
CSM = chloro-sulphone- type 3 5 = DIN PN 40
ethene 240 = 240 psig
6 = ANSI 150
FPM = fluorine rubber 300 = 300 psig 7 = ANSI 300
HNBR = hydrogenated 8 = BS TABLE D
nitrile 600 = 600 psig
9A = AS TABLE D
IIR = butyl type 4
940 = 940 psig 9B = AS TABLE E
NBR = nitrile
1500 = 1500 psig 9C = JIS 10
NBRF = nitrile foodstuff
quality 9D = JIS 16
NR = natural rubber X = other, must

be specified
NRF = natural rubber Determined
foodstuff quality by the valve
PU = polyurethane manufacturer
_/PU = PU coating (depending
inside the sleeve on the valve
diameter /
_/M = Larox SensoMate
pressure
sleeve
class)
Opening tags
Reinforcing cords
Wear-resistant inner lining
5
Control valves for demanding duties
Larox control valves are designed for demanding
control applications in which conventional valves
encounter problems with turbulence and wear.
Controllability can be further improved with
conical sleeves or smart positioners. Elastic Larox full bore sleeve
Larox conical sleeve
sleeves have been applied for improved wear
resistance.
Standard positioners
Larox control valve actuator is equipped with a positioner.
The standard positioners for various actuators are as follows:
• For Pneumatic Actuators
• Electro-pneumatic (AK), input signal 4 - 20 mA
• Pneumatic (AN), input signal 3 - 15 psig
• For Hydraulic Actuators
• Electro-hydraulic (HP), input signal 4 - 20 mA
• For Electric Actuator
• Electronic (EO), input signal 4 - 20 mA
in which
Q G Q = Volume flow rate N1 = Numerical constant
Cv = G = Specific gravity FP = Piping geometry factor
N1FP FR p
p = Pressure drop FR = Reynolds number
Larox control valve sizing is based on the IEC60534 standard

(harmonized with ANSI/ISA S75 standards). The valve flow coefficient
Cv defines the control valve flow capacity i.e. the valve size (diameter). Control valve PVE 4 AK15
Cv values - full bore sleeves
Diameter INCHES 1” 1.5” 2” 2.5” 3” 4” 1.25” 5” 6” 8” 10” 12” 14” 16”

Opening %
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 10 25 39 65 98 154 16 241 347 616 963 1387 1888 2465
20 24 61 96 162 246 384 39 601 865 1537 2402 3459 4708 6150
30 40 103 162 273 414 647 66 1010 1455 2586 4042 5820 7922 10347
40 57 145 226 382 579 905 93 1414 2037 3621 5657 8147 11089 14483
50 72 181 284 479 725 1134 116 1772 2552 4536 7099 10207 13893 18146
60 82 211 329 557 843 1317 135 2059 2964 5270 8234 11857 16139 21080
70 90 232 362 612 927 1448 148 2263 3258 5792 9050 13032 17738 23169
80 95 244 381 645 976 1525 156 2384 3432 6102 9534 13729 18687 24407
90 96 248 388 657 994 1554 157 2428 3497 6216 9713 13986 19037 24864
100 96 248 388 657 994 1554 158 2428 3497 6216 9713 13986 19037 24864
Cv tables for conical sleeves and larger diameters are available upon request. Contact Larox Flowsys (www.larox.fi)
for a complementary Larox control valve sizing program.
6
Main dimensions
Open and enclosed body
PV PVE
Weights are for body and sleeve without actuator.

actuator.
Size PRESSURE (psig) A (INCHES) B (INCHES) E (INCHES) WEIGHT fe (LBS) WEIGHT al (LBS)
pv 3” 15 - 350 7.87” 9.25” 3.94” 31 -
pv 4” 15 - 350 9.84” 10.43” 4.33” 35 -
pv 5“ 15 - 350 12.20” 12.80” 5.31” 51 -
pv 6” 15 - 240 14.76” 15” 5.63” 57 -
pv 8” 15 - 240 19.69” 18.15” 6.69” 103 -
pv 10” 15 - 150 24.61” 21.45” 8.27” 187 -
pv 12” 15 - 85 29.53” 27.72” 9.84” 220 -
pve 1” 15 - 350 6.5” 4.92” 3.43” 18 9
pve 1.25” 15 - 350 6.5” 5.5” 3.54” 22 11
pve 1.5” 15 - 350 6.5” 7.09” 4.13” 26 13
pve 2” 15 - 350 6.5” 7.48” 4.72” 29 15
pve 2.5” 15 - 350 6.5” 8.27” 5.31” 37 20
pve 3” 15 - 350 7.87” 9.65” 6.10” 59 29
pve 4” 15 - 350 9.84” 10.94” 6.89” 73 37
pve 5” 15 - 350 12.20” 13.39” 8.27” 106 55
pve 6” 15 - 240 14.76” 15.75” 9.45” 165 95
pve 8” 15 - 240 19.69” 18.90” 11.61” 262 -
pve 10” 15 - 150 24.61” 22.44” 14.96” 354 -
pve 12” 15 - 85 29.53” 18.35” 17.52” 466 -
Dimensions subject to change without notice. Larger sizes and higher pressures also available.
Complete dimensional drawings with selected actuator available upon request.
7
For your local Larox
representative please call
1-888-356-9797
Company The solution you’ve been looking for Manual The solution you’ve been looking for
Profile Valves
Automatic The solution you’ve been looking for Valve The solution you’ve been looking for
Valves Sleeves
TYPE APPROVAL
P-11460
Larox Flowsys Oy • P.O. Box 338 • FI-53101 Lappeenranta, Finland • Tel. +358 201 113 311 • Fax +358 201 113 300
Larox Flowsys Inc. e-mail
• 808info@larox.fi • www.larox.fi
Barkwood Court Suite N, Linthicum, MD 21090 • Tel. 410-636-2250 • Fax 410-636-9062
e-mail info@larox.fi • www.larox.fi
Manu
Valv
Automatic 03/06 USA
MAIN DIMENSIONS OF LAROX VALVES
ENCLOSED BODY - PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
SIZE=? PN (psig) A B C D E F WFe WAl

PVE 1 15-300 6½ 5 12 15 3½ 26 17
PVE 1 ¼ 15-200 6½ 5½ 12 ½ 15 ½ 3¾ 30 19
PVE 1 ¼ 300 6½ 5½ 12 ¾ 15 ½ 3¾ 30 19
PVE 1 ½ 15-200 6½ 7 13 ¾ 17 4¼ 39 26
PVE 1 ½ 300 6½ 7 14 ½ 18 4¼ 45 32
PVE 2 15-125 6½ 7½ 14 ½ 18 ½ 4¾ 41 28
PVE 2 200 6½ 7½ 15 ¾ 19 ½ 4¾ 48 32
PVE 2 300 6½ 7½ 17 20 ¾ 4¾ 7¼ 58 45
PVE 2 ½ 15-75 6½ 8¼ 15 ¼ 19 ¼ 5½ 52 32
PVE 2 ½ 125 6½ 8¼ 17 21 5½ 56 39
PVE 2 ½ 200 6½ 8¼ 18 22 ¼ 5½ 7¼ 69 52
PVE 2 ½ 300 6½ 8¼ 19 ¼ 23 ½ 5½ 8¾ 80 63
PVE 3 15-75 8 9¾ 18 22 ¾ 6¼ 80 50
PVE 3 125 8 9¾ 20 24 ½ 6¼ 97 67
PVE 3 200 8 9¾ 20 ¾ 25 ¼ 6¼ 8¾ 106 76
PVE 3 300 8 9¾ 20 ½ 25 6¼ 10 ½ 154 123
PVE 4 15 10 11 19 ¾ 24 ½ 7 98 63
PVE 4 75 10 11 21 ½ 26 ½ 7 113 78
PVE 4 125 10 11 22 ¼ 27 ¼ 7 126 93
PVE 4 200 10 11 22 ½ 27 ¼ 7 10 ¾ 165 132
PVE 4 300 10 11 25 ½ 30 ¼ 7 13 ½ 236 204
PVE 5 15 12 ¼ 13 ½ 22 ¼ 28 8½ 134 84
PVE 5 75 12 ¼ 13 ½ 24 ¼ 30 8½ 169 119
PVE 5 125 12 ¼ 13 ½ 24 ¼ 30 8½ 203 154
PVE 5 200 12 ¼ 13 ½ 27 ½ 33 ½ 8½ 13 ½ 279 230
PVE 5 300 12 ¼ 13 ½ 37 42 ¾ 8½ 279 230
PVE 6 15 14 ¾ 15 ¾ 26 ¼ 32 ¾ 9½ 206 136
PVE 6 75 14 ¾ 15 ¾ 27 33 ½ 9½ 278 207
PVE 6 125 14 ¾ 15 ¾ 30 ¼ 36 ½ 9½ 333 262
PVE 6 200 14 ¾ 15 ¾ 40 ½ 47 9½ 357 287
PVE 8 15 19 ¾ 19 30 ¼ 38 11 ¾ 327
PVE 8 75 19 ¾ 19 34 ¼ 42 11 ¾ 448
PVE 8 125 19 ¾ 19 46 ½ 54 ¼ 11 ¾ 487
PVE 8 200 19 ¾ 19 51 ½ 59 11 ¾ 613
PVE 10 15 24 ¾ 22 ½ 35 ½ 45 ½ 15 442
PVE 10 75 24 ¾ 22 ½ 54 64 15 602
PVE 10 125 24 ¾ 22 ½ 59 69 15 750
PVE 12 15 29 ½ 28 ½ 40 ¼ 52 17 ½ 624
PVE 12 75 29 ½ 28 ½ 65 ¼ 77 17 ½ 957
Dimensions = (inch) Weight = (lbs), GRS-Fe/AlSi -body and -attachment frame
Larger sizes and higher pressures also available Dimensions subject to change without notice
Larox Flowsys Inc.

9730 Patuxent Woods Drive Tel. 410-381 3314
MD 21046 Columbia Fax 410-381 4490
The United States www.larox.fi
23.09.04
ENCLOSED BODY - ELECTRO MECHANICAL ACTUATOR
SIZE=? PN A B C D E F G+H WFe WAl

(psig)
PVE 1 15-300 6½ 5 17 20 3½ 9½ 10 ½+10 75 67
PVE 1 ¼ 15-300 6½ 5¾ 17 ½ 20 ½ 3½ 9½ 10 ½+10 80 69
PVE 1 ½ 15-300 6½ 7 18 ¼ 21 ½ 4¼ 9½ 10 ½+10 89 76
PVE 2 15-300 6½ 7½ 18 ½ 22 ¼ 4¾ 9½ 10 ½+10 91 78
PVE 2 ½ 15-300 6½ 8¾ 18 ½ 22 ½ 5½ 9½ 10 ½+10 100 82
PVE 3 15-200 8 9¾ 21 25 ½ 6¼ 9½ 10 ½+10 126 95
PVE 3 300 8 9¾ 21 ½ 26 6¼ 9¾ 11 ¼+10 145 115
PVE 4 15-125 10 11 21 ¼ 26 ¼ 7 9½ 10 ½+10 139 104
PVE 4 200 10 11 21 ¾ 26 ¾ 7 9¾ 11 ¼+10 158 126
PVE 4 300 10 11 24 29 7 11 ¼ 15 ¼+13 241 208
PVE 5 15-125 12 ¼ 13 ½ 23 28 ¾ 8½ 9½ 10 ½+10 180 130
PVE 5 200 12 ¼ 13 ½ 25 ¾ 31 8½ 11 ¼ 15 ¼+13 280 230
PVE 5 300 12 ¼ 13 ½ 26 ½ 32 ¼ 8½ 11 ¼ 15 ¼+13 288 241
PVE 6 15-75 15 15 ¾ 25 31 ½ 9½ 9½ 10 ½+10 240 170
PVE 6 125 15 15 ¾ 25 ½ 32 9½ 9¾ 10 ¼+10 262 192
PVE 6 200 15 15 ¾ 29 35 9½ 11 ¼ 15 ¼+13 357 287
PVE 8 15 20 19 28 ¼ 36 11 ¾ 9½ 10 ½+10 359
PVE 8 75 20 19 29 ¼ 37 11 ¾ 9¾ 10 ¼+10 379
PVE 8 125-200 20 19 32 39 ¾ 11 ¾ 15 ¼+13 -+11 ¼ 494
PVE 10 15 25 22 ½ 35 ¾ 45 ¾ 15 9¾ 10 ¼+10 491
PVE 10 75 25 22 ½ 36 ¼ 46 ¼ 15 15 ¼+13 -+11 ¼ 609
PVE 10 125 25 22 ½ 40 50 15 20+14 -+13 756
PVE 12 15 30 28 ½ 41 ¼ 52 ¾ 17 ½ 10 ¼+10 +-9 3/4 626
PVE 12 75 30 28 ½ 43 ½ 55 ¼ 17 ½ 15 ¼+13 +-11 ¼ 717
PVE 12 125 30 28 ½ 43 ¼ 54 ¾ 17 ½ 20+14 +-13 893
Dimensions = (inch) XXX = Dimensions will not exceed the dimensions of body
Weigth= (lbs), GRS-Fe/AlSi -body = Actuator has been rotated 90? counter-clockwise
Larger sizes and higher pressures also available Dimensions subject to change without notice
Larox Flowsys Inc.

MD 21046 Columbia Fax 410-381 4490
23.09.04
ENCLOSED BODY - PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR WITH NELES POSITIONER
SIZE=? PN (psig) A B C D E H+F I+G WFe WAl

PVE 1 15-300 6½ 5 15 ¾ 18 ¾ 3½ *+7½ *+5½ 35 27
PVE 1 ¼ 15-300 6½ 5½ 17 20 3½ *+7½ *+5½ 40 29
PVE 1 ½ 15-200 6½ 7 16 ½ 19 ¾ 4¼ *+7½ *+5½ 49 36
PVE 1 ½ 300 6½ 7 17 ¾ 21 4¼ *+8 *+5½ 56 45
PVE 2 15-125 6½ 7½ 17 ¼ 21 4¾ *+7½ *+5½ 51 38
PVE 2 200 6½ 7½ 18 ½ 22 ¼ 4¾ *+8 *+5½ 58 45
PVE 2 300 6½ 7½ 19 ¾ 23 ½ 4¾ 3 ½+9 *+6 69 56
PVE 2 ½ 15-75 6½ 8½ 18 22 5½ *+7½ *+5½ 62 42
PVE 2 ½ 125 6½ 8½ 20 24 5½ *+8 *+5½ 67 47
PVE 2 ½ 200 6½ 8½ 21 25 ¼ 5½ 3 ½+9 *+5½ 80 63
PVE 2 ½ 300 6½ 8½ 21 ¾ 25 ¾ 5½ 4 ½+10 4½+5¼ 92 74
PVE 3 15-75 8 9¾ 22 26 ½ 6¼ *+8 *+5½ 93 62
PVE 3 125 8 9¾ 23 ½ 28 6¼ *+9 *+6 110 79
PVE 3 200 8 9¾ 23 ¾ 28 ¼ 6¼ 4 ½+10 *+5¼ 119 88
PVE 3 300 8 9¾ 25 29 ½ 6¼ 5½+10¾ 5½+5½ 168 137
PVE 4 15 10 11 23 ¾ 28 ¾ 7 *+8 *+5½ 110 77
PVE 4 75 10 11 25 30 7 *+9 *+6 126 93
PVE 4 125 10 11 25 ½ 30 ½ 7 * + 10 *+* 137 106
PVE 4 200 10 11 26 ½ 31 ¼ 7 5½+10¾ *+* 179 146
PVE 4 300 10 11 30 ¾ 35 ¾ 7 7 + 12 ½ 12½+12½ 251 218
PVE 5 15 12 ¼ 13 ½ 26 ½ 32 ¼ 8¼ *+8 *+* 148 97
PVE 5 75 12 ¼ 13 ½ 28 33 ¾ 8¼ * + 10 *+* 183 132
PVE 5 125 12 ¼ 13 ½ 28 ¾ 34 ½ 8¼ * + 12 ¼ *+* 218 168
PVE 5 200 12 ¼ 13 ½ 33 ½ 39 ¼ 8¼ 7 + 13 ½ 7+7 273 223
PVE 5 300 12 ¼ 13 ½ 40 ¼ 46 8¼ * + 11 ¾ *+* 295 245
PVE 6 15 15 15 ¾ 30 ¾ 37 ¼ 9½ *+9 *+* 223 150
PVE 6 75 15 15 ¾ 32 ½ 39 9½ * + 12 ¼ *+* 291 218
PVE 6 125 15 15 ¾ 37 43 ½ 9½ * + 13 ½ *+* 346 273
PVE 6 200 15 15 ¾ 44 50 ½ 9½ * + 11 ¾ *+* 368 298
PVE 8 15 20 19 36 ½ 44 ¼ 11 ¾ *+* *+* 344
PVE 8 75 20 19 42 ½ 50 11 ¾ * + 13 ½ *+* 465
PVE 8 125 20 19 51 ½ 59 ¼ 11 ¾ * + 11 ¾ *+* 498
PVE 8 200 20 19 56 ½ 64 ½ 11 ¾ * + 13 ½ *+* 622
PVE 10 15 25 22 ½ 36 ¼ 46 ¼ 15 *+* *+* 463
PVE 10 75 25 22 ½ 54 ¼ 64 ¼ 15 *+* *+* 615
PVE 10 125 25 22 ½ 59 69 15 *+* * + 12 ½ 763
PVE 12 15 30 28 ½ 40 ½ 52 ¼ 17 ½ *+* *+* 637
PVE 12 75 30 28 ½ 65 ¾ 77 17 ½ *+* *+* 977
Dimensions = (inch) * = Dimensions will not exceed the dimensions of body
Weigth= (lbs), GRS-Fe/AlSi -body Larger sizes and higher pressures also available
Dimensions subject to change without notice
Larox Flowsys Inc.

MD 21046 Columbia Fax 410-381 4490
23.09.04
LAROX VALVES
OPERATION MANUAL
MODELS PV AND PVE
CONTENTS:
1. TYPE MARKINGS
2. GENERAL
2.1. Construction
2.2. Function
2.3. Safety instructions
3. HANDLING THE VALVE
3.1. Receiving and storage

3.2. Lifting
3.3. Installation in pipe line
4. OPERATION, CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE
4.1. Operation control

4.2. Sleeve change
4.3. Valve adjustment
Read these instructions before starting installation,

operation or maintenance jobs.
Keep these instructions near the valve.
Observe the safety instructions.
PVMA0195.ENG
VALVE TYPE MARKINGS
PVE 12 AK 125 - 6 0 3 LR
MODEL SIZE ACTUATOR PRESSURE FLANGE BODY SHAPE OF AUXILIARIES

(inches) CLASS (PN) DRILLINGS MATERIAL ¬) FLANGE
PV = open
1 - 40 M = handwheel 15=15 psig 1= - 0 = Fe Determined L = opening tags
PVE = enclosed
A = pneumatic 75=75 psig 2 = DIN PN 10 1=- by the valve Q = quick exhaust
PVS = sealed valve
...B = with manual 125=125 psig 3 = DIN PN 16 2 = AISI 316 manufacturer R = inductive
PVE/S = override proximity
enclosed/sealed sxensors
...K = with 200=200 psig 4 = DIN PN 25 3 = AlSi S = magnetic limits
el.pneum.
positioner
...N = with pneum. 300=300 psig 5 = DIN PN 40 4 = Other T = mechan. limits
Positioner
...U = with pneum. 600=600 psig 6 = ANSI 150 5 = plastic Z = solenoid valve
Spring
...V = with mech. 900=900 psig 7 = ANSI 300 X = other, must be
Spring specified
H = hydraulic 1500=1500 psig 8 = B.S. TABLE D
...P = with hydr. 9 = Other

Positioner
E = electro mech.
...O=with electr.
Positioner
¬) Fe ANSI 1” - 8”: GRS 250 (DIN 1691-GG25), epoxy painted K18-E180/2-FeSa 2 ½

ANSI 10”… : Fe37B (DIN 17100-Rst-2), epoxy painted K18-E180/2-FeSa 2½
AISI 316 ANSI 1” - 8”: casted (DIN 17445; 1.4408)

ANSI 10”…: welded (DIN 17122 -17440)
AlSi ANSI 1” - 8”:: aluminium alloy (DIN 1725 AlSi 12), epoxy painted K18-E180/2-FeSa 2 ½
SLEEVE TYPE MARKINGS

NR 125 12 / 30 / 3 L 6
SLEEVE PRESSURE SLEEVE SLEEVE SHAPE OF AUXILIARIES FLANGE

MATERIAL CLASSES (PN) INNER DIA LENGTH FLANGE DRILLINGS
(inch) (inch)
NR = natural rubber 15=15 psig - = none 1=-
SBR/T = styrene butadiene 75=75 psig Determined by L = opening tags 2 = DIN PN 10
IIR = butyl 125=125 psig manufacturer 3 = DIN PN 16
NBR = nitrile 200=200 psig 4 = DIN PN 25
NBRF = nitrile foodstuff quality 300=300 psig 5 = DIN PN 40
FPM = fluorine rubber 600=600 psig 6 = ANSI 150
CSM = chloro -sulphone -ethene 900=900 psig 7 = ANSI 300
EPDM = ethylene propylene 1500=1500 psig 8 = B.S. TABLE D
PU = plastic 9 = Other
In spare sleeve orders, please use 4 - or 5 - figure code marked on the sleeve.
2
2. GENERAL
2.1. CONSTRUCTION
Larox valves are made of three main components
- flanged valve sleeve

- valve body, either open PV or enclosed PVE
- actuator and actuator control components, if applicable
The valve sleeve is the only part of the valve which is in contact with
the medium flowing in the pipeline.
In the open body model the body and the actuator are connected to only
one of the end flanges. The construction allows a slight deviation in the pipe
angle and the valve can act as a shock absorber.
Fig. 1
Note that in case of a sleeve breakage, the flowing liquid will leak into the environment. It is therefore
advisable to use enclosed body valve,
if this occurrence is undesirable.
The body of the enclosed model hinders a straight spray of flowing media to
the environment. The lower part of the body has a plugged opening, which
can be opened to investigate for sleeve breakage.
In case of a sleeve breakage, slight leakage can occur through bushings.
Fig. 2
3
2.2. OPERATION
The pinch valve closes so that two pinch bars moved by the actuator,
squeeze the valve sleeve, closing on the centerline.
The closing mechanism causes the actuator to rise one half
of the diameter length.
2.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The valve closing mechanism makes the actuator move. Do not

leave tools or parts of your body between the moving valve parts.
Note the dangerous places (see drawings 3A and 3B):
Fig. 3A - PV open model

The actuator rises in both models (PV and PVE)
0.5 x valve nominal diameter (measure X).
In the open model the space between the pinch bars, the
space between the upper pinch bar and fixing plate of the
actuator and the space below the lower pinch bar.
In the enclosed model the space between the valve body

and the fixing plate of the actuator and the ends of the
bars of lower pinch bar below the valve body.
Fig. 3B - PVE enclosed model

Regarding the actuators, observe the instructions of the manufacturer.
Note the possible remote control of automatic valves and turn it off
before starting maintenance jobs.
3. HANDLING THE VALVE
3.1. RECEIVING AND STORAGE
Check the condition of the valve package on arrival. If it shows signs of transport damages, check the
operation of the valve carefully. Normally, a visual inspection of the valve is sufficient. However, if
valves have been damaged during transportation, contact your nearest Larox sales office immediately.
Store the valve and spare sleeves carefully. Direct sunlight (UV radiation) deteriorates
the sleeve.
A recommendable long term storing place is dry, with free air circulation, temperature
40 ..86 degrees F.
4
3.2. LIFTING THE VALVE
When lifting the valve, fasten the ropes to the valve body or around it. Note the centre of gravity and
support the valve to avoid it turning around. In some models the centre of gravity is located towards the
actuator.
3.3. INSTALLATION IN PIPELINE
Note the following:
OPEN BODY MODEL (PV)
The sleeve has not been designed to withstand axial forces.

The pipes must therefore be supported properly so that
neither tension nor compression is caused.
Make sure that no foreign items get between the pinch bars
and the sleeve.
If possible, protect the sleeve from direct sunlight. Direct sunlight and
Fig. 4
UV radiation deteriorate certain rubber qualities; this must also be
considered during normal use.
A lengthwise angle deviation of max. 5° in the pipe is allowed (Fig. 5).
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
Deviation in the center line of the pipe (C), (Fig. 6):
PV 1...4 max. 1/5”

PV 5...10 max. 2/5”
PV 12...20 max. 3/5”
PV 22...40 max. 4/5”
ENCLOSED BODY MODEL (PVE)
Make sure that no foreign items get between the valve body and the actuator.
5
BOTH MODELS (PV AND PVE)
The valve nominal size means the inner diameter of the sleeve. The pipe inner diameter should match
this diameter as closely as possible.
Whenever possible, install the actuator in a vertical position.
6
If you have to install the actuator horizontally,
it has to be supported to ensure the operation,
especially if the actuator is heavy.
Install a sliding surface under the actuator (Fig 7).
The support can be fixed on the wall (1),

on the floor (2) or the pipeline (3).
The valve can be installed in either way with Fig. 7.

respect to the flow direction.
When installing the valve to the pipeline, it has to be in the open position.
Tighten the end flange screws smoothly in turn on the opposite sides of the flange.
4. OPERATION CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE
4.1. OPERATION CONTROL
During the operation the valve does not normally require any maintenance operations.
The sleeve change is described in 4.2.
To ensure smooth operation, it is recommendable to change the valve sleeve at regular intervals.
Regarding the actuators, observe the instructions of the manufacturer.
Note the safety instructions, see 2.3.
4.2. CHANGE OF VALVE SLEEVE
Observe the safety instructions (see 2.3) and the instructions for adjustment of
valve (4.3) to prevent accidents and to ensure the correct operation of the valve.
4.2.1. Open model valve
Open the valve and detach it from the pipeline.

If the valve is equipped with opening tags,
loosen the fixing screws (8 pcs) at the pinch
bars and pull out the opening tags (Fig. 8).
Fig. 8.
7
Remove the broken sleeve by bending the rubber flange of the sleeve and by wrenching it e.g. with a
big screwdriver through the steel flange.
Put in the new sleeve by pressing the rubber flange on the opposite sides together, pushing its edge as
far as possible through the steel flange and wrenching the rest of the sleeve through the flange e.g. with a
big screwdriver (see Fig. 9).
The rubber flange of the sleeve allows bending. Avoid damaging the sleeve with a sharp tool.
Fig. 9.
After putting in the new sleeve, fix the opening tags to the pinch bars. Adjust the pinch bars before
installing to the pipeline.
N.B. At sleeve change, it is always important to check and, if necessary, to adjust the
position of the pinch bars. See 4.3.
4.2.2. Enclosed model valve
Open the valve and detach it from the pipeline. Open the bolts between the valve body halves and
detach the lower part of the body. If the valve has opening tags, detach them from both upper and
lower pinch bars, 8 pcs screws (Fig.8). Take out the damaged sleeve and put in a new one. If the
sleeve is stiff, detach the lower pinch bar. Remember to fix the opening tags if applicable. Check the
body sealing between the body halves and the condition of the plastic bushings. A worn sealing and/or
worn bushings may cause leakage to the environment in the event of a sleeve breakage. Assemble the
valve and adjust the pinch bars before installing the valve to the pipeline.
N.B. At sleeve change, it is always important to check and, if necessary, to adjust the position of the
pinch bars. See 4.3.
8
4.3. ADJUSTMENT OF THE VALVE
After every sleeve change, the closing of the valve has to be controlled and adjusted if necessary. A
wrong adjustment may cause a considerably shorter life time of the sleeve and leakage from the valve
when the actuator is in the closed position.
Observe the safety instructions (see 2.3). Do not leave tools or parts of your body
between the moving valve parts.
Before reinstallation of the valve into the pipeline: Close the valve by using the actuator. Adjust the
pinch bars parallel by means of the nuts, which are on both sides of actuator fixing plate (Fig.10, nuts 1
and 2), so that from one end of the sleeve an even, narrow light slit (appr. 0.5 mm) is shown on the
whole squeezed point of the sleeve (Fig. 10.1).
Unscrew the lower nuts (Fig. 10.2, nut 2) X inch from the fixing plate (see the measurements in the
table, Fig. 11). Now when the screws on the upper side of the fixing plate (Fig. 10.3, nut 1) are
tightened, the lower pinch bar rises and causes a sufficient squeeze on the sleeve to close the flow
against the pressure in the pipeline. After this has been done the valve is ready to be installed to the
pipeline.
10.1 10.2 10.3
Fig. 10.
VALVE SIZE PRESSURE CLASS [psi]
Measure [inch] 15 125 300
1 -4 0.059” 0.098” 0.138”

5 - 12 0.079” 0.118”
14 - 20 0.118” 0.157”
22 - 0.157”
Fig. 11.
If the valve is handwheel-operated, it is enough to check that the pinch bars are parallel and the light slit
is shown. A sufficient squeeze is achieved by turning the handwheel 1/3...3/4 rounds after the valve
feels tight: if the pressure in the pipeline is 15 psi - appr. 1/3 of a handwheel rotation; PN 125 psi -
9
appr. 1/2 of a handwheel rotation; PN 380 psi - appr. 3/4 of a handwheel rotation. If the valve is
supplied with a reduction gear, the number of rotations is multiplied by the gear ratio.
10
Solid State Proximity Sensors Publ #105005revC
Hawkeye TM
Installation & Adjusting Instructions

High Intensity LED
Sensor Mounting Target
1. Mount sensor in 18.5 to 20mm diameter clearance hole

using fastener(s) and lock washer provided. One
fastener and lockwasher may be used when mounting
against housing flange. Max torque for lock nut is 45
Nm (1 Nm=0.74 ft. lbs.)
Lexan
2. Locate sensor so target will move within nominal Polycarbonate 316 Stainless Steel
sensing range and avoid contact with sensor face (mild
steel less than 4mm, stainless steel less than 3 mm).
3. Red and Green LED sensors may be mounted next to
one another with no signal interference. Sensors of the
same color LED should not be used together if sensors
are closer than 45 mm (1.75").
Hawkeye™ Sensor Model Number Descriptions

HK 30 7 7 SR
Features SR - Red LED
SG - Green LED
Conduit /Connectors 7 - (1) 1/2"-14 NPT

8 - 3-Pin Mini-Connector in Stainless Steel
(Only available for Function 30&31)
Housing 7 - 316 Stainless Steel Housing
Function 30 - (1) 2-wire Solid State Sensor (Normally Open)

31 - (1) 2-wire Solid state Sensor (Normally Closed)
50 - (1) 3-wire PNP (Sourcing) Sensor (Normally Open)
51 - (1) 3-wire PNP (Sourcing) Sensor (Normally Closed)
60 - (1)3-wire NPN (Sinking) Sensor (Normally Open)
61 - (1) 3-wire NPN (Sinking) Sensor (Normally Closed)
Hawkeye™ Dimensional Data

StoneL Corporation
One StoneL Dr
26275 US Hwy 59
Fergus Falls, MN 56537
USA
Telephone: 218.739.5774
Linear dimensions are in millimeters. 1/2" N PT Toll Free: 800.843.7866
Fax: 218.739.5776
© 2001 StoneL Corporation E-mail: sales@stonel.com
Approval Agency Controlled Document.
No Changes Authorized Without Prior Agency Approval Website: www.stonel.com
Publ #105005revC
2-Wire Sensor Specifications & Wiring Diagrams
Page 2
Specifications: Nominal Sensing Distance: 4 mm (Mild Steel Target)
Supply Voltage: 8 to 125 VDC, 24 to 125 VAC 3 mm (Stainless Steel Target)
Max Continuous Current: 0.3 Amp @ Rated Voltage Temp Range: - 40° F to 180° F (- 40° C to 82° C)
Max Inrush Current: 2.0 Amps Housing Material & Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel
Min Switching Current: 2.0 milliamps Conduit Connection: 1/2"NPT
Max Leakage Current: 0.15 mA with DC voltage Wiring: 36" (1 meter) length 18 gauge multi-strand
0.25mA with AC voltage Enclosure Protection: NEMA 4, 4X & 6 / IP. 67
Maximum Voltage Drop: 6.5V @ 10 mA Warranty: 5 Years
7.5V @ 100 mA
To Bench Test a Hawkeye 2-Wire Sensor: Use StoneL Light Read Tester. Or use a 24 VDC or 120 VAC power supply
with series load resistor (2K - 6K Ω).
Sensor Wiring
1. Connect sensors per wiring diagram below.
2. Sensors may be wired for Division 2 Hazardous locations using standard code practice for explosion proof systems. For
Division 1 Hazardous areas intrinsically safe wiring and circuit protection must be followed. See Page Four for Intrinsic
Safety wiring instructions
WARNING:
FAILURE TO USE A SERIES LOAD RESISTOR WHEN BENCH TESTING SENSORS WITH A POWER SUPPLY
WILL RESULT IN PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE UNIT.
HK3077___ or HK3177___ HK3078___ or HK3178___
Pin 2 Pin 3
Pin 1
HK3077SG HK3077SR
Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal Pin Number Signal
White/Green Stripe Common* White/Red Stripe Common* Pin 1 Case Ground**
White/Green Stripe Normally Open* White/Red Stripe Normally Open* Pin 2 NO/NC*
Green Case Ground** Green Case Ground** Pin 3 Common*
* Sensors are not polarity sensitive
HK3177SG HK3177SR
** Case Ground not required for circuit operation
Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal
Green/White Stripe Common* Red/White Stripe Common*
Green/White Stripe Normally Closed* Red/White Stripe Normally Closed*
Green Case Ground** Green Case Ground**
* Sensors are not polarity sensitive
** Case Ground not required for circuit operation
StoneL Corporation Phone: (218) 739-5774 · Toll-free: (800) 843-7866 · Website: www.stonel.com
Publ #105005revC
3-Wire Sensor Specifications & Wiring Diagrams
Page 3
Specifications for Sourcing (PNP) Sensors: Specifications for Sinking (NPN) Sensors:
(HK5077__, HK5177__) (HK6077__, HK6177__)
Supply Voltage: 6 to 28 VDC Supply Voltage: 6 to 28 VDC
Max Continuous Current: 200 mA Max Continuous Current: 200 mA
Quiescent Current: 160 μA Quiescent Current: 160 μA
Min Switching Current: 2.0 mA Min Switching Current: 2.0 mA
Max Leakage Current: 0.6 μA Max Leakage Current: 0.6 μA
Maximum Voltage Drop: 0.65 VDC Maximum Voltage Drop: 0.65 VDC
Nominal Sensing Distance: 4 mm (Mild Steel Target) Nominal Sensing Distance: 4 mm (Mild Steel Target)
3 mm (Stainless Steel Target) 3 mm (Stainless Steel Target)
Temp Range: - 40° F to 180° F (- 40° C to 82° C) Temp Range: - 40° F to 180° F (- 40° C to 82° C)
Housing Material & Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel Housing Material & Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel
Conduit Connection: 1/2"NPT Conduit Connection: 1/2"NPT
Wiring: 36" (1 meter) length 18 gauge multi-strand Wiring: 36" (1 meter) length 18 gauge multi-strand
Enclosure Protection: NEMA 4, 4X & 6 / IP. 67 Enclosure Protection: NEMA 4, 4X & 6 / IP. 67
Warranty: 5 Years Warranty: 5 Years
To Bench Test a Hawkeye 3-Wire Sensor: Use StoneL Light Read Tester. Or use a 24 VDC power supply with series
load resistor (2K - 6K Ω).
Sensor Wiring - Connect sensors per wiring diagram below.
WARNING:
FAILURE TO USE A SERIES LOAD RESISTOR WHEN BENCH TESTING SENSORS WITH A POWER SUPPLY
WILL RESULT IN PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE UNIT.
HK5077__ or HK5177__ HK6077__ or HK6177__

(+) (+)
Load Load
(-) (-)
GND GND
HK5077SG HK5077SR HK6077SG HK6077SR

Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal
Brown (+) Brown (+) Brown (+) Brown (+)
White/ White/ White/ White/
Load Load Load Load
Green Stripe Red Stripe Green Stripe Red Stripe
Blue (-) Blue (-) Blue (-) Blue (-)
Green Case Ground* Green Case Ground* Green Case Ground* Green Case Ground*
HK5177SG HK5177SR HK6177SG HK6177SR

Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal Wire Color Signal
Brown (+) Brown (+) Brown (+) Brown (+)
Green/ Red/ Green/ Red/
Load Load Load Load
White Stripe White Stripe White Stripe White Stripe
Blue (-) Blue (-) Blue (-) Blue (-)
Green Case Ground* Green Case Ground* Green Case Ground* Green Case Ground*
* Case Ground not required for circuit operation * Case Ground not required for circuit operation
Hawkeye™ Intrinsic Safety Hazardous Location Installation Diagram Publ #105005revC
Page 4
Hawkeyes models approved for Intrinsically Safe Installations:
(Class I, II, III; Division 1; Gas Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G)
HK3077SR; HK3077SG; HK3177SR; HK3177SG
HAZARDOUS 1 NON-HAZARDOUS
2 IS; Class I, II, III; Division 1
(CLASSIFIED) Intrinsic Safety Barrier (SAFE AREA)
Groups A,B,C,D,E,F,G 5
4 (Associated Apparatus)
LOCATION LOCATION
6
7 Control
Shield 3
Equipment
8
NO/NC
Hawkeye Common
Sensor
Intrinsically Safe
Case Ground 9 Ground
FM (US) INSTALLATION NOTES:

Hawkeye Entity Parameters: Vmax = 30 Vdc Imax = 120 mA Ci = 0.066 μF Li = 0.794 mH
1 1. Voc or Vt < Vmax, Isc or It < Imax, Ca > Ci + Ccable, La > Li + Lcable.
2 2. For Class II and III, Division 1 installations, where conduit is not used, use Listed dust-tight cable-gland fittings.
3 3. Control equipment connected to intrinsic safety barrier must not use or generate more than 250 Vrms or Vdc.
4 4. Installation should be in accordance with ANSI/ISA RPA12.6 "Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations" and the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70).
5 5. The configuration of the intrinsic safety barrier for each Hawkeye sensor must be FMRC Approved.
6 6. Intrinsic safety barrier manufacturer's installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment.
7 7. To maintain intrinsic safety, wiring associated with each Hawkeye sensor must be run in separate cables or
separate shields connected to intrinsically safe (associated apparatus) ground.
8 8. Conduit Grounding - Upon installation verify electrical continuity between conduit and ground terminal.
9 9. Resistance between Intrinsic Safe Ground and earth ground must be less than one ohm.
CANADIAN INSTALLATION NOTES:
1 1. Barrier must be a Canadian Certified, Single Channel grounded Shunt Diode Zener Barrier or a Single Channel
Isolating Barrier, or; One dual-channel or two single-channel barriers may be used where both channels have
been Certified for use together with combined entity parameters.
2 2. For Class II and III, Division 1 installations, where conduit is not used, use Canadian Certified dust-tight cable
gland fittings.
3 3. Control equipment connected to Intrinsic Safety barriers must not use or generate more than 250 VRMS or VDC.
4 4. Install in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code.
5 5. The configuration of intrinsic safety barriers for each Hawkeye sensor must be Canadian Certified.
6 6. Intrinsic safety barrier manufacturer's installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment.
7 7. To maintain intrinsic safety, wiring associated with each Hawkeye sensor must be run in separate cables or
separate shields connected to intrinsically safe (associated apparatus) ground.
8 8. Conduit Grounding - Upon installation verify electrical continuity between conduit and ground terminal.
9 9. Resistance between Intrinsic Safe Ground and earth ground must be less than one ohm.
Pilot Operated 4/2
4 Piston/Poppet Solenoid Valves
Brass Body • 1/4" to 1" NPT
SERIES
8344
Features
• Sturdy, robust construction % )
• Piston-operated poppet design provides high flow
• For use with air or water
• Wide range of sizes and flow rates
4-WAY
• Single or dual solenoid constructions
• Dual solenoid can be shifted with a momentary
signal and remain in position even if electrical
power is lost
• Mountable in any position
Construction
Valve Parts in Contact with Fluids
Body Brass
Seals and Disc NBR
B A
Core Tube 305 Stainless Steel

E
Core and Plugnut 430F Stainless Steel P
B A
Springs 302 Stainless Steel / 17-7PH Stainless Steel
E
Shading Coil Copper P
Pilot Seat Cartridge and Disc-Holder CA

Shaft Gasket PA
Electrical
Watt Rating and Power
Consumption Spare Coil Part Number
Standard
Coil and AC General Purpose Explosionproof
Class of DC VA VA
Insulation Watts Watts Holding Inrush AC DC AC DC
F 10.6 6.1 16 30 238210 238310 238214 238314
F 11.6 10.1 25 50 238610 238710 238614 238714
Nominal Ambient Temp. Ranges
F 22.6 17.1 40 70 238610 238710 238614 238714
AC: 32˚F to 125˚F (0˚C to 52˚C)
DC: 32˚F to 104˚F (0˚C to 40˚C)
Dual Solenoid Operation: Minimum coil on-time for dual solenoid valves is 0.3
seconds on air service and 1.0 seconds on liquids. Refer to Engineering Section for details.
Caution: Do not energize both solenoids simultaneously.
Refer to Engineering Section for details. Approvals
Standard Voltages: 24, 120, 240, 480 volts AC, 60 Hz (or 110, 220 volts AC, 50 Hz). CSA certified. Meets applicable CE directives.
6, 12, 24, 120, 240 volts DC. Must be specified when ordering.
Other voltages are available when required.
Important
A Minimum Operating Pressure Differential must be
maintained between the pressure and exhaust ports.
Solenoid Enclosures Supply and exhaust piping must be full area, unrestricted.
Standard: Watertight, Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X. ASCO flow controls and other similar components must
Optional: Explosionproof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, and 9. be installed in the cylinder lines only.
(To order, add prefix “EF” to the catalog number.) • Loss of air pressure may allow valve to shift on dual
See Optional Features Section for other available options. solenoid constructions.
77
4/2
SERIES
8344 4
Specifications (English units)
Operating Pressure Differential (psi) Max. Watt Rating/
Cv Flow Fluid Class of Coil
Factor Max. AC Max. DC Temp.˚F Brass Body Insulation
Pipe Orifice
Size Size Air-Inert Lt. Oil @ Air-Inert Lt. Oil @ Catalog Const.
(ins.) (ins.) Press. Exh. Min. Gas Water 300 SSU Gas Water 300 SSU AC DC Number Ref. AC DC
SINGLE SOLENOID
4-WAY
1/4 1/4 .80 1.0 10 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 150 8344G070 1 10.1/F 11.6/F
1/4 1/4 .80 1.0 10 250 250 250 250 250 250 180 180 8344G000 1 17.1/F 22.6/F
3/8 3/8 1.4 2.2 10 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 150 8344G072 2 10.1/F 11.6/F
3/8 1/4 .80 1.0 10 250 250 250 250 250 250 180 180 8344G001 1 17.1/F 22.6/F
1/2 3/8 1.4 2.2 10 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 150 8344G074 2 10.1/F 11.6/F
1/2 3/8 1.4 2.2 10 250 250 250 250 250 250 180 180 8344G027 2 17.1/F 22.6/F
3/4 3/4 5.2 5.6 10 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 150 8344G076 3 10.1/F 11.6/F
3/4 3/4 5.2 5.6 10 250 250 250 250 250 250 180 180 8344G029 3 17.1/F 22.6/F
1 3/4 5.2 5.6 10 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 150 8344G078 3 10.1/F 11.6/F
1 3/4 5.2 5.6 10 250 250 250 250 250 250 180 180 8344G031 3 17.1/F 22.6/F
DUAL SOLENOID
1/4 1/4 .80 1.0 10 250 200 125 125 125 100 180 120 8344G044 4 6.1/F 10.6/F
3/8 3/8 1.4 2.2 10 250 200 125 125 125 100 180 120 8344G080 6 6.1/F 10.6/F
3/8 3/8 1.4 2.2 10 300 300 200 - - - 180 - 8344G050 7 10.1/F -
1/2 3/8 1.4 2.2 10 250 200 125 125 125 100 180 120 8344G082 6 6.1/F 10.6/F
3/4 3/4 5.2 5.6 10 300 300 200 125 125 100 180 120 8344G054 8 10.1/F 10.6/F
1 3/4 5.2 5.6 10 300 300 200 125 125 100 180 120 8344G056 8 10.1/F 10.6/F
25 psi (1.7 bar) minimum on light oil service. For best results, do not use valve rated 250 psi (17 bar) on mainline pressure of less than 125 psi (9 bar).
On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for the 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts.
Specifications (Metric units)

Operating Pressure Differential (bar) Max. Watt Rating/
Kv Flow Fluid Class of Coil
Factor (m3/h) Max. AC Max. DC Temp.˚C Brass Body Insulation
Pipe Orifice
Size Size Air-Inert Lt. Oil @ Air-Inert Lt. Oil @ Catalog Const.
(ins.) (mm) Press. Exh. Min. Gas Water 300 SSU Gas Water 300 SSU AC DC Number Ref. AC DC
SINGLE SOLENOID
1/4 6 .69 .86 0.7 10 9 9 9 9 9 82 65 8344G070 1 10.1/F 11.6/F
1/4 6 .69 .86 0.7 17 17 17 17 17 17 82 82 8344G000 1 17.1/F 22.6/F
3/8 10 1.2 1.89 0.7 10 9 9 9 9 9 82 65 8344G072 2 10.1/F 11.6/F
3/8 6 .69 .86 0.7 17 17 17 17 17 17 82 82 8344G001 1 17.1/F 22.6/F
1/2 10 1.2 1.89 0.7 10 9 9 9 9 9 82 65 8344G074 2 10.1/F 11.6/F
1/2 10 1.2 1.89 0.7 17 17 17 17 17 17 82 82 8344G027 2 17.1/F 22.6/F
3/4 19 4.5 4.80 0.7 10 9 9 9 9 9 82 65 8344G076 3 10.1/F 11.6/F
3/4 19 4.5 4.80 0.7 17 17 17 17 17 17 82 82 8344G029 3 17.1/F 22.6/F
1 19 4.5 4.80 0.7 10 9 9 9 9 9 82 65 8344G078 3 10.1/F 11.6/F
1 19 4.5 4.80 0.7 17 17 17 17 17 17 82 82 8344G031 3 17.1/F 22.6/F
DUAL SOLENOID
1/4 6 .80 .86 0.7 17 14 9 9 9 7 82 49 8344G044 4 6.1/F 10.6/F
3/8 10 1.4 1.89 0.7 17 14 9 9 9 7 82 49 8344G080 6 6.1/F 10.6/F
3/8 10 1.4 1.89 0.7 21 21 14 - - - 82 - 8344G050 7 10.1/F -
1/2 10 1.4 1.89 0.7 17 14 9 9 9 7 82 49 8344G082 6 6.1/F 10.6/F
3/4 19 5.2 4.80 0.7 21 21 14 9 9 7 82 49 8344G054 8 10.1/F 10.6/F
1 19 5.2 4.80 0.7 21 21 14 9 9 7 82 49 8344G056 8 10.1/F 10.6/F
25 psi (1.7 bar) minimum on light oil service. For best results, do not use valve rated 250 psi (17 bar) on mainline pressure of less than 125 psi (9 bar).
On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for the 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts.
78
4/2
4 SERIES
8344
Dimensions inches (mm)
Const. Exhaust
Ref. ØD E F G H J K L N P W X Y Z Pipe Size
ins. Ø .28 .56 2.41 1.88 4.08 1.03 2.15 3.13 .72 3.12 4.75 1.41 1.56 .81 3/8
1
mm Ø 7.1 14 61 48 104 26 55 80 18 79 121 36 40 21 3/8
ins. Ø .34 .75 3.12 2.63 4.06 1.50 1.97 3.18 .83 2.94 6.06 1.88 1.90 .84 1/2
4-WAY
2
mm Ø 8.6 19 79 67 103 38 50 81 21 75 154 47 48 21 1/2
ins. Ø .34 1.34 3.81 3.88 4.86 2.09 2.34 4.56 1.56 3.31 8.25 2.12 2.63 1.16 1
3
mm Ø 8.6 34 97 99 123 53 59 116 39 84 210 54 67 30 1
ins. Ø .28 .56 2.41 1.88 4.34 1.03 2.52 3.13 .72 3.38 4.81 1.41 1.56 .81 3/8
4
mm Ø 7.1 14 61 48 110 26 64 80 18 86 122 36 40 21 3/8
ins. Ø .34 .75 3.12 2.63 4.50 1.50 2.52 3.18 .83 3.38 6.06 1.88 1.90 .84 1/2
6
mm Ø 8.6 19 79 67 114 38 64 81 21 86 154 47 48 21 1/2
ins. Ø .34 .75 3.12 2.63 4.68 1.50 2.59 3.18 .83 3.56 6.06 1.88 1.90 .84 1/2
7
mm Ø 8.6 19 79 67 119 38 66 81 21 90 154 47 48 21 1/2
ins. Ø .34 1.34 3.81 3.88 5.56 2.09 3.03 4.56 1.55 4.00 8.25 2.12 2.63 1.16 1
8
mm Ø 8.6 34 97 99 141 53 77 116 39 102 210 54 67 30 1
Const. Ref 1 - 3
1/2 NPT
H K
PRESS EXH.
N X E
2 MTG. HOLES
PRESS DIA “D”
EXH.
L F
CYL B J CYL A
Z G
Y
W
79
4/2
SERIES
8344 4
Const. Ref. 4 - 8
4-WAY
1/2 NPT
P
K H
PRESS EXH.
N X E
2 MTG. HOLES
PRESS DIA “D”
EXH.
L F
CYL B J CYL A
Z G
Y
W
80
TAB 6
(DVABR0024-00) Sleeveline 1/28/05 11:04 AM Page 2
®
Sleeveline
THE BENCHMARK FOR QUALITY AND VALUE
Quality
System
Certificate
Non-Lubricated Plug Valves For Chemical Service

Durco ®
G4 Sleeveline Valves
F lowserve invented the

Double D Plug Stem
Accepts most standard actuation
equipment.
Tapered Plug
Assures reduced turning torque and
in-line seal adjustment and wear.
Adjustment is independent of stem seals.
non-lubricated plug valve Lockout
Meets OSHA and plant safety
With ± 3/16 in (± 5 mm) adjustment,
plug cannot bottom out.
requirements.
PFA Reverse Lip Diaphragm
for the most corrosive and In-Line Adjustment Provides static and dynamic,
Prevents thru-line leakage. self-adjusting stem seal.
difficult chemical services PTFE Sleeve

Large seal area offers positive
shutoff and extended service life.
where drop-tight shutoff is Actuator Mounting Pads
Mounts directly on flanges for
solid support.
an absolute requirement.
Nearly 50 years later there
are many imitators but no
substitute for the quality
and reliability, versatility
and value you receive with
Sleeveline valves.
2
Large Port Openings
Assure less pressure drop
and higher Cv .
Raised Locking Ribs

Along with grooves and recesses
positively lock sleeve in body.
Wide Materials Selection

Corrosion resistant stainless steels,
nickel base and reactive alloys.
© TriCom, Inc., 2005, All Rights Reserved.

Du
Rugged, Heavy-Duty Body
Limited lifetime casting guarantee.
ANSI (ASA) or DIN flanges
standard. N.P.T. screwed, socket
and butt weld available.
Rated to ANSI Class 150 lb and

300 lb designs at pressures to
740 psi (5102 kPa) and vacuum
to 1 micron (0.133 kPa).
©
G4B Marathon™ G4 Seal System

d High cycle/low emission valve is All G4 Sleeveline valves offer the proven
durable, reliable and versatile. reliability of the plug/PTFE sleeve primary
seals.
nt, See pages 6 & 7 seal with a PFA diaphragm secondary seal.
Positive Stem Seal

The unique PFA reverse lip diaphragm
provides a self-energizing dynamic stem seal
where pressure activates the reverse lip to
seal against the stem. It also provides a static
seal by wedging against the stem with an
interference fit.
Line Sealing
The compressive, wedge fit of the tapered
TSG4 Severe Service plug with the PTFE sleeve serves as the
Effectively and economically meets sealing surface. The sleeve totally surrounds
emission requirements of the most plug ports and seals the circumference of the
demanding services. plug, top and bottom. There are no cavities
See pages 8 & 9 to accumulate product. Sealing is both
upstream and downstream.
• Seal is totally independent of line pressure.
• There is no metal-to-metal contact.
• Valve remains free-turning throughout its
life and never requires lubrication.
• Seal is adjustable.
• Wiping action between sleeve and plug
provides for good slurry handling.
Durco
Special Configurations
Sleeveline valves are available in special trim,
multiport and lower torque models along with
special end connections.
See page 5
In-Line, Thru-Line Seal Adjustability

EG4 Control Valves In-line seal adjustment is achieved by turning
Characterized plug available two adjuster fasteners to drive the plug
for modulating applications. deeper into the sleeve. This saves mainte-
See pages 10 & 11 nance and process time because the seal is
adjusted in-line and under pressure within
seconds. The result is repeatable, bubble-
tight shutoff performance.

Durco
G4Z Fire Sealed
D urco Sleeveline valves

G4Z Fire Sealed Sleeveline valves incor-
porate special Grafoil® packing rings at
the stem and Grafoil gaskets at the top
cap. These reduce atmospheric leakage
Packing (Grafoil)
Diaphragm (PFA)
have been fire tested in to a negligible amount should fire

destroy the PTFE sleeve and diaphragm.
Diaphragm
(stainless steel or
A metal diaphragm keeps the Grafoil Monel®)
packing in place if the top seal
accordance with API 607 is destroyed. Gasket (Grafoil)
Fourth Edition. They
surpassed the external
sealing requirements of
Section 4, Paragraph 4.2,
“Performance
Requirements.”
Du
G4Z-HF Alkylation Valves Are Phillips See Bulletin V-25 for complete
Licensing Listed and UOP Process information about available G4Z-HF
Division Approved valve sizes and configurations; technical
specifications; and appropriate industry
As an approved supplier for Phillips and standards compliance.
UOP licensing, Flowserve has provided
thousands of Durco HF alkylation valves
to refineries throughout the world for
services such as:
• Isomerization
• Blending
• Light ends
• Gas plant
• Sulfur plant
• Crude desalting
® Grafoil is a registered trademark of Union Carbide.

4
® Monel is a registered trademark of the International Nickel Co., Inc.
© TriCom, Inc., 2005, All Rights Reserved. ©

Special Configuration
Valves
Chlorine Valves
Designed especially for dry chlorine gas
or liquid chlorine applications. All Durco
D urco valves offer the
G4 chlorine valves are supplied with a process industries’ widest
vented plug. This vents the chlorine
safely towards the high pressure side.
range of non-lubricated
plug valve models,
Jacketed Valves materials and configura-

For proven performance in critical
temperature control situations, specify
our FJG4 full cast jacket or the PJG4 tions. This provides
welded partial jacket on Durco valves.
customers the flexibility to
specify Sleeveline valves

3-Way Valves
Choose Durco Multiport process valves
to meet virtually all their
for mixing, safety and relief, switching
bypass, and transflow services. Available applications needs.
in fully or partially jacketed models.
Durco
Special End Connections
In addition to ANSI and DIN flanged
designs, G4 Sleeveline valves are
available with grooved end; screwed end;
screwed/socket end; weld end; and butt
weld end connections.
Lower Torque Valves Available

For applications requiring lower torque,
G4 valves (N models) in the
8 in (200 mm) thru 12 in (300 mm) sizes
are available. Contact the factory for
dimensional specifications.

Durco
G4B Marathon ™
T he G4B Marathon is 3-Year Performance Guarantee

Unprecedented limited warranty.
The valve will be repaired or replaced
designed for reliable if stem seal fails within 3 years after
installation.
performance in high cycle
Viton® O-rings
Full pressure containment stem seal.
on-off or modulating Also protects thrust collar from atmos-
pheric corrosion. Kalrez ® and other
elastomers are available. PTFE backup
rings help prevent extrusion of Viton
services. Fugitive emission O-rings under pressure.
containment is often equal
to more expensive severe
or toxic service valves.

Smooth Sealing Surfaces
Highly polished surfaces eliminate wear
and enhance seal integrity.
Du Integral Thrust Collar/

Alloy Diaphragm
Self-sealing, dynamic bellows-like
diaphragm moves with plug adjustment
to eliminate potential leak path.
Hastelloy® (or optional materials)
diaphragm welded to alloy thrust collar.
®Viton and Kalrez are registered trademarks of the DuPont Company.

®Hastelloy is a registered trademark of Haynes International.
©
High Cycle Positive

Stem Sealing Durability
Without
back-up
rings
With back-
up rings
Viton O-Rings
A pair of Viton O-rings prevents stem leakage
while containing line pressure. They also protect
the thrust collar against attack from atmospheric
corrosion. PTFE back-up rings firmly lock the
Unique Stem-Sealing Design Viton O-rings in the stem grooves and serve as
The G4B Marathon valve can be used with anti-extrusion devices.
confidence in chemical processing applica-
tions where tight shutoff and emissions Optional Kalrez O-rings are available for special
containment are priority requirements. As a services.
bonus, its very design assures long-lived,
high cycle performance.
Proven High Cyclability

Lab and field tests have proven that the G4B
Marathon can cycle as many as three-to-five
times more than a standard PTFE sleeved
quarter-turn valve before it begins to show
stem seal wear.
G4EB Marathon Valve
Viton o-rings & welded metal diaphragm stem seals
Sleeve & Diaphragm cut in four places
20
Durco
PPM
10
New Welded Diaphragm

0
The integral thrust collar/alloy diaphragm CYCLES (000) 10 20 140 160
is a third line of defense against leakage to
Conventional Plug Valve G4EB Valve
the atmosphere. The underside of the metal >2000 PPM
bellows-like diaphragm acts as an expan-
sion joint by allowing the PTFE diaphragm Passing The Test
to adjust to plug movement and pressure Lab technicians defeated the PTFE sleeve and
changes. The Hastelloy C diaphragm PFA diaphragm, the G4B’s primary and secondary
provides an impermeable barrier to chlorine stem seals, by cutting both of them in four
as well as many other services. places. They operated the valve to 160,000
cycles. Rather than using the standard Method
Available for G4Z, EG4, MG4 and G4J. 21 methane emissions test, they chose the more
demanding helium emissions test. The results
were impressive.

Durco
TSG4 Severe Service
T riple sealed valve for

A true stuffing box design, the TSG4 easily
handles the toughest services such as
chlorine, anhydrous HCl and hydrofluoric
Triple Sealed
Primary
PTFE sleeve provides large static seal
lethal, toxic and sub-zero acid. It possesses all the positive shutoff, area for positive shutoff and extended
corrosion resisting features and benefits of service life.
other Durco Sleeveline valves.
Secondary
fluid services where an PFA reverse lip diaphragm offers static
and dynamic self-adjusting stem sealing
assurance.
absolute stem seal is
Tertiary
Live-loaded PTFE packing set further
required. Meets/exceeds prevents potential emissions while
addressing possible permeation related
leakage.
federal Clean Air Act Belleville Washers
Accommodate extreme temperature
fluctuations.
fugitive emissions regula-
tions at one-third to
one-half the cost of
bellows sealed valves.

Bonnet Taps
Options include bonnet tap leak-off
connection for: insertion of process
compatible lubricants; use as inert gas
pad; or where remote monitoring of
highly critical processes is required.
Du Drilled and Vented Plug
Balances pressure between the
plug port and body cavity
©
Wide Range of Stuffing Box Options with

Independent Plug and Stem Seal
Adjustments
The TSG4 offers broad flexibility in choosing
the packing set and design options best suited
to your service requirements. Choose from a
variety of stem seals that lets you enjoy:
• Triple seal protection from fugitive
emissions Preformed PTFE cup and cone with lantern ring and Preformed PTFE cup and cone with
reverse lip diaphragm reverse lip diaphragm
• The sealing and long-term service benefits
of the PFA reverse lip diaphragm
• Independent plug and stem sealing
adjustment
• Thermal cycling capability with live-
loaded fasteners using Belleville washers
with PTFE packing only
• Leak-off connections for continuous
monitoring Compression fire seal packing set die formed flexible Compression fire seal packing set die formed
graphite rings and lantern ring between braided Grafoil flexible graphite rings between braided Grafoil with
with reverse lip diaphragm reverse lip diaphragm
Plug Adjuster
Provides separate and positive, in-
line plug/seat adjustment for wear.
Packing Adjuster
Independent packing set adjustment
prevents stem seal emissions.
Packing and Top Cap Adjuster
Fasteners
Live-loading of the packing adjuster
Durco
and top cap fasteners ensure
integrity of stem and bonnet despite
fastener elongation due to temper-
ature swings.
Leak-Off Connection
Optional feature helps detect fugitive
emissions in the packing chamber.
Cup and Cone Packing
Live-loaded PTFE packing prevents
stem leakage on both vacuum and
positive pressure services.
Reverse Lip Diaphragm
Provides long-term cycling
capability with its superior
static/dynamic stem sealing.

Durco EG4 V-Port

Control Valves
In addition to the features

Durco EG4 V-Port control valves are available
in a variety of trim configurations to satisfy
your exact flow control needs. Sizes include
Characterized v-port Sleeveline control
valves are available as follows:
• G4 – 1/2 in (5 mm)
1 in (25 mm) through 6 in (150 mm) with through 6 in (150 mm)
and benefits that have made full open Cv values of 3.0 to 400. • G4B – 1/2 (5 mm)
Specially trimmed EG4 V-Port SoundTrim® through 6 in (150 mm)
Sleeveline the process control valves reduce noise, cavitation and • TSG4 – 1 in (25 mm)
flashing while improving flow and pressure through 3 in (75 mm)
performance. STEG4 SoundTrim plugs are
industry’s premier plug available for 1 in (25 mm), 2 in (50 mm)
and 3 in (75 mm) valve sizes. Unique self-
cleaning design prevents particulate build-up
valve, Flowserve offers and clogging. A Typical Characteristic Curve
for EG4 V-Port Valves
the EG4 V-Port valve for 100
90
precise modulating control 80
70
% OF MAXIMUM Cv
60
services. 50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% OF VALVE OPENING
Refer to the Durco Technical Manual for

valve and actuator sizing.
10

Actuation Options
For Sleeveline Valves
Manual Operation
All Durco Sleeveline valves are fitted with
a hand wrench as standard for manual
operation. A gearbox option is also available
for valve sizes 4 in (100 mm) and above.
Actuation
The Flowserve Automax® operation is a
specialist in valve automation systems
offering rack and pinion, heavy-duty and
electric actuators along with positioners,
limit switches, engineered special control
circuits and related accessories.
Flow Characteristics Typical characteristic curve

for standard Durco G4 valve
100
90
80
70
degrees open
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 Average Turning Torque

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Ft-Lbs* (Joules)
per cent of full open flow
Valve Size Torque At Torque At
in (mm) Plug Stem Gear Wheel
Flow Coefficients CV 1/4 (5) 3.0 (4.0) –
40 3/8 (10) 3.0 (4.0) –
30 1/2 (15) 3.0 (4.0) –
20 3/4 (20) 3.0 (4.0) –
Inches 1/2 3
/4 1 11/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12F 14 16 18 1 (25) 7.0 (9.4) –
10
1-1/2 (40) 8.0 (10.8) –
pressure drop-feet of water
5 2 (50) 13.0 (17.5) –

0*
0*
0*
4
1
9
8
5
6
236
3 (75) 19.0 (25.6) –

322
555
955
153
185
340
343
700
CV VALUES
7.4
48.
83.
19.
4 (100) 54.0 (72.9) 5 (6.7)

6 (150) 140.0 (189.0) 8 (10.8)
1
8 (200) 306.0 (413.0) 16 (21.6)
.5 10 (250) 580.0 (783.0) 35 (47.3)
12 (300) 610.0 (827.0) 16 (21.6)
*Estimated
Values
14 (350) 610.0 (827.0) 16 (21.6)
16 (400) 1170.0 (1587.0) 18 (24.4)
.1 18 (450) 1170.0 (1587.0) 18 (21.4)
1 5 10 50 100 500 1000 5000
*Since starting or breakway torque is higher than turning
flow-U.S. GPM torque, these values should not be used for actuator sizing.
Consult your Durco Control Valve Manual or your
Flowserve Sales Engineer for actuator sizing values.
All CV values are measured in accordance with the Fluids Control Institute Standard 58-2.
11

T E C H N I C A L D A T A
G4 & G4B Straightway Valve

Dimensions
1/2 in (15 mm) thru 4 in (100 mm)
G411 – Class 150
G431 – Class 300
1/2 in (15 mm) - 3 in (75 mm) Offset Wrench Standard
Stem Configuration
High Hub Wrench Optional
1/2 in (15 mm) to
All dimensions are approximate and for illustration purposes only. 6 in (150 mm) flats
For exact dimensions request certified dimensional prints.
See page 19 for (L) dimensions.
8 in (200 mm) thru 14 in (350 mm) 8 in (200 mm) thru 18 in (450 mm)
4 in (100 mm) and 6 in (150 mm)
G411H – Class 150 G431H – Class 300
English Units
Area Wt. In
Drilling Drilling A B C E F G H J K M N W X of % Lbs.**
Valve Class 150 Class 300 Port Port
Class Class Class Class Class
Size No. Size BC No. Size BC 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300 Sq In Open 150 300
1/2 4 5/8 23/8 4 5/8 25/8 41/4 51/2 31/2 37/8 33/16 7/16 9/16 13/8 17/32 7/16 23/32 – 425/32 425/32 – 6 – .248 126 61/2 73/4
3/4 4 5/8 23/4 4 3/4 31/4 45/8 6 4 43/4 33/16 7/16 5/8 111/16 17/32 7/16 23/32 – 425/32 425/32 – 6 – .248 56 7 10
1 4 5/8 31/8 4 3/4 31/2 5 61/2 41/4 47/8 323/32 7/16 11/16 2 25/32 21/32 7/8 – 413/16 413/16 – 7 – .785 100 103/4 171/4
11/2 4 5/8 37/8 4 7/8 41/2 61/2 71/2 5 61/8 45/32 9/16 13/16 27/8 25/32 21/32 15/16 – 51/2 51/2 – 9 – 1.21 68 151/2 26
2 4 3/4 43/4 8 3/4 5 7 81/2 6 61/2 43/4 5/8 7/8 35/8 11/16 7/8 1 – 65/16 65/16 – 12 – 2.0 64 231/2 291/2
21/2 4 3/4 51/2 8 7/8 57/8 71/2 91/2 7 71/2 6 11/16 1 41/8 11/16 7/8 13/16 – 71/2 – – 18 – 4.6 93 38 –
3 4 3/4 6 8 7/8 65/8 8 111/8 71/2 81/4 6 3/4 11/8 5 11/16 7/8 13/16 – 71/2 71/2 – 18 – 4.6 65 41 69
4W.O. 8 3/4 71/2 8 7/8 77/8 9 12 9 10 721/32 15/16 11/4 63/16 111/16 127/64 19/16 – 91/32 91/32 – 30 – 7.4 59 75 1433/4
4G.O. 8 3/4 71/2 8 7/8 77/8 9 12 9 10 – 15/16 11/4 63/16 111/16 127/64 19/16 83/8 191/2 191/2 12 813/16 3 7.4 59 933/4 1621/2
6G.O. 8 7/8 91/2 12 7/8 105/8 101/2 157/8 11 121/2 – 1 17/16 81/2 17/8 127/64 15/8 103/8 211/2 211/2 12 813/16 3 16.1 57 1493/4 2291/2
8G.O. 8* 7/8 113/4 12 1 13 111/2 161/2 131/2 15 – 11/8 15/8 105/8 Splined 123/32 131/8 221/8 – 18 16 5/16 26.4 52 262 328
10G.O. 12* 1 141/4 16 11/8 151/4 13 18 16 171/2 – 13/16 17/8 123/4 Splined 223/32 155/16 245/16 – 18 16 15/16 40.9 52 398 455
12G.O. 12* 1 17 16 11/4 173/4 14 193/4 19 201/2 – 11/4 2 15 Splined 27/8 161/16 251/16 – 18 16 15/16 54.7 48 519 736
14G.O. 12* 11/8 183/4 20 11/4 201/4 15 30 21 23 – 13/8 21/8 161/4 Splined 111/16 169/16 259/16 – 18 16 15/16 57.8 37 599 916
16G.O. 16 11/8 211/4 20 13/8 221/2 30 33 231/2 251/2 – 17/16 21/4 181/2 Splined 331/32 281/8 401/8 401/8 24 181/16 35/16 121.0 69 1865 2097
18G.O. 16 11/4 223/4 24 13/8 243/4 34 36 25 28 – 19/16 23/8 21 Splined 331/32 281/8 401/8 401/8 24 181/16 35/16 121.0 54 1951 2183
Dimensions for Class 150 and 300 valves are the same except where indicated. Flanges are to ANSI B16.5 and can meet flange draft requirements. W.O. is wrench operated. G.O. is gear operated.
*The top two holes on each flange on the 8 in (200 mm), 10 in (250 mm), 12 in (300 mm) and 14 in (350 mm) G411 valves are drilled for studs. **Weight includes wrench or operator.
Metric Units
Area Wt. In
Drilling Drilling A B C E F G H J K M N W X of Kgs.**
Valve Class 150 Class 300 Port
Class Class Class Class Class
Size No. Size BC No. Size BC 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300 Sq Cm 150 300
15 4 15 60 4 15 67 108 140 89 98 81 11 14 35 13.5 11.1 18.3 – 121 121 – 152 – 1.59 2.9 3.5
20 4 15 70 4 19 83 117 152 102 121 81 11 16 43 13.5 11.1 18.3 – 121 121 – 152 – 1.59 3.2 4.5
25 4 16 79 4 19 89 127 165 108 124 94 11 17 51 19.8 16.7 22.2 – 122 122 – 178 – 5.1 4.8 7.8
40 4 16 98 4 22 114 165 190 127 156 106 14 22 73 19.8 16.7 23.8 – 140 140 – 229 – 7.8 7.0 11.7
50 4 19 121 8 19 127 178 216 152 165 121 16 22 92 27.0 22.2 25.4 – 160 160 – 305 – 13.0 10.6 13.3
65 4 19 140 8 22 149 190 241 178 190 152 17 25 105 27.0 22.2 30.2 – 190 – – 457 – 30.0 17.1 –
80 4 19 152 8 22 168 203 283 190 210 152 19 29 127 27.0 22.2 30.2 – 190 190 – 457 – 30.0 18.4 31.0
100 8 19 190 8 22 200 229 305 229 254 194 24 32 157 42.9 36.1 39.7 – 229 229 – 762 – 48.0 33.8 64.7
100 8 19 190 8 22 200 229 305 229 254 – 24 32 157 42.9 36.1 39.7 213.0 495.0 495 305 224 76 48.0 42.5 73.7
150 8 19 241 12 22 270 267 403 279 318 – 25 37 216 47.6 36.1 41.3 263.0 546.0 546 305 224 76 104.0 67.9 104.1
200 8* 19 298 12 25 330 292 419 343 381 – 29 41.3 270 Splined 43.7 333.5 563.4 – 457 406 8 170.0 119.0 148.8
250 12 25 362 16 29 387 330 457 406 445 – 30 47.6 324 Splined 69.0 388.9 614.5 – 457 406 33 264.0 180.0 206.4
300 12 29 432 16 32 450 356 502 483 521 – 32 50.8 381 Splined 73.3 407.9 636.5 – 457 406 33 353.0 235.0 333.9
350 12* 29 476 20 32 514 381 762 533 584 – 35 54 413 Splined 42.9 421.0 649.0 649 457 406 33 373.0 269.5 412.2
405 16 29 540 20 35 572 762 838 597 648 – 37 57 470 Splined 101 714.0 1019.0 1019 610 459 84 781.0 846.0 951.2
12 455 16 32 578 24 35 629 864 914 635 714 – 40 60 533 Splined 101 714.0 1019.0 1019 610 459 84 781.0 885.0 990.2

TSG4 Sleeveline Valve

Dimensions
1/2 in (15 mm) thru 3 in (75 mm)
G411 – Class 150
G431 – Class 300
1/2 in (15 mm) - 3 in (75 mm) Offset Wrench Standard
High Hub Wrench Optional
All dimensions are approximate and for illustration purposes only.
See page 19 for (L) dimensions.
Stem Configuration
1/2 in (15 mm) to
6 in (150 mm) flats
1 in (25 mm) thru 6 in (150 mm) 8 in (200 mm)

G411H – Class 150 G431H – Class 300
English Units
Area
Drilling Drilling A B C E F G H U of % Weight
Valve Class 150 Class 300 Class Class Class Class Port Port Class
Size No. Size BC No. Size BC 150 300 150 300 150 300 J K L M N N1 150 300 W W* W1 X Sq In Open 150 300
1/2 4 5/8 23/8 4 5/8 25/8 41/4 51/2 31/2 37/8 611/32 7/16 9/16 13/8 17/32 7/16 5/8 – – 71/2 – – 23/4 27/8 7 – – – .248 126 12.0 13.75
3/4 4 5/8 23/4 4 3/4 31/4 45/8 6 37/8 43/4 611/32 7/16 5/8 111/16 17/32 7/16 5/8 – – 71/2 – – 27/8 3 7 – – – .248 56 13.0 15.8
1 4 5/8 31/8 4 3/4 31/2 5 61/2 41/4 47/8 615/16 7/16 11/16 2 25/32 21/32 11/16 811/16 213/32 8 49/16 – 31/2 33/4 9 813/16 – 127/32 .785 100 27.9 32.2
11/2 4 5/8 37/8 4 7/8 41/2 61/2 71/2 5 61/8 71/4 9/16 13/16 27/8 25/32 21/32 3/4 9 213/32 85/16 49/16 – 41/8 43/8 9 813/16 – 127/32 1.21 68 33.1 39.1
2 4 3/4 43/4 8 3/4 5 7 81/2 6 61/2 75/8 5/8 7/8 35/8 11/16 7/8 13/16 91/2 213/32 95/16 49/16 – 41/2 43/4 12 813/16 – 127/32 2.0 64 42.8 47.5
3 4 3/4 6 8 7/8 65/8 8 111/8 71/2 81/4 831/32 3/4 11/8 5 11/16 7/8 1 107/8 211/16 101/2 49/16 – 51/8 59/16 20 913/16 – 23/8 4.6 65 69.6 83.2
4G.O. 8 3/4 71/2 8 7/8 77/8 9 12 9 10 1027/32 15/16 11/4 63/16 111/16 127/64 13/8 119/16 37/16 191/2 – 12 6 63/4 – – 813/16 3 7.4 59 119.1 145.6
6G.O. 8 7/8 91/2 12 7/8 105/8 101/2 157/8 11 121/2 1211/16 1 17/16 81/2 17/8 127/64 17/16 153/8 31/2 211/2 – 14 71/2 81/2 – – 95/8 33/8 16.1 57 206.8 268.9
8G.O. 8 7/8 113/4 12 1 13 111/2 161/2 131/2 15 175/32 11/8 15/8 105/8 Splined 123/32 171/4 4 261/4 – 18 9 10 – – 1515/16 5/16 26.4 52 262.0 328.0
Metric Units
Area
Drilling Drilling A B C E F G H U of % Weight
Valve Class 150 Class 300 Class Class Class Class Port Port Class
Size No. Size BC No. Size BC 150 300 150 300 150 300 J K L M N N1 150 300 W W* W1 X Sq In Open 150 300
15 4 16 60 4 16 67 108 140 89 98 161.1 11 14 35 13.5 11.1 15.8 – – 190.5 – – 70 73 178 – – – 1.59 126 5.4 6.2
20 4 16 70 4 19 83 117 152 98 121 161.1 11 16 43 13.5 11.1 15.8 – – 190.5 – – 73 80 178 – – – 1.59 56 5.9 7.2
25 4 16 79 4 19 89 127 165 108 124 176.2 11 17 51 19.8 16.7 17 220.6 61.1 203.2 116 – 89 95 229 223.8 – 47 5.1 100 12.6 14.6
40 4 16 98 4 22.2 114 165 190 127 156 184.1 14 21 73 19.8 16.7 19 228.6 61.1 211.1 116 – 105 111 229 223.8 – 47 7.8 68 15.0 17.7
50 4 19 121 8 19 127 178 216 152 165 193.6 16 22.2 92 27.0 22.2 22 241.3 61.1 236.5 116 – 108 121 309.8 223.8 – 47 13.0 64 19.4 21.5
80 4 19 152 8 22.2 168 203 283 190 210 227.8 19 29 127 27.0 22.2 25 276.2 68.2 267 116 – 130 141 508 249 – 60 30.0 65 31.6 37.7
100 8 19 190 8 22.2 200 229 305 229 254 275.4 24 32 157 42.9 36.1 34.9 293.6 87.3 495 – 304.8 150 171 – – 223.8 76 48.0 59 54.0 66.0
150 8 22.2 241 12 22.2 270 267 403 279 318 322.2 25 37 216 47.6 36.1 36.5 390.5 88.9 546 – 355.6 190 216 – – 244.5 85.7 104.0 57 93.8 121.9
200 8 22.2 298 12 25 330 292 419 343 381 435.7 29 41.3 270 Splined 43.7 438.1 101.6 666.7 – 457 229 250 – – 404.8 8 170.0 52 118.8 148.8 13

G4 & G4B 3-Way Valve

Dimensions
Available
Arrangements
English Units
A B D E
Valve Class Class C Class Class F M W
Size 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300
1/2 41/4 51/2 35/8 37/8 33/16 23/4 27/8 7/16 9/16 13/8 425/32 6
3/4 45/8 6 4 43/4 33/16 3 3 7/16 5/8 111/16 425/32 6 1
1 5 61/2 41/4 47/8 323/32 31/2 33/4 7/16 11/16 2 413/16 7 1/2 in (15 mm) thru
11/2 61/2 71/2 5 61/8 45/32 41/8 43/8 9/16 13/16 27/8 51/2 9 10 in (250 mm)
2 7 81/2 6 61/2 43/4 41/2 43/4 5/8 7/8 35/8 65/16 12 MG411 – Class 150
3 8 111/2 71/2 81/4 6 51/8 59/16 3/4 11/8 5 71/2 18 MG431 – Class 300
4 9 12 9 10 721/32 6 63/4 15/16 11/4 63/16 183/8 30
6 101/2 157/8 11 121/2 – 71/2 81/2 1 17/16 81/2 – –
8 111/2 161/2 131/2 15 – 9 10 11/8 15/8 105/8 – –
10 13 18 16 171/2 – 121/4 121/4 13/16 17/8 123/4 – – Flow Indication for 3-Way Valves
Durco three-way valve body runs are
Metric Units 3&7 marked with letter designations “A”, “B”,
A B D E
Valve Class Class C Class Class F M W and “C”. A position indicator plate
Size 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300 (marked with flow designations A↔B,
15 108 140 92 98 81 76 76 11 14 32 121 152
20 117 152 102 121 81 76 76 11 16 43 121 152
B↔C, A↔C, A↔B↔C, or CLOSED) is
25 127 165 108 124 94 89 95 11 17 51 122 178 mounted on the top-cap. The stop collar
40 165 190 127 156 106 105 111 14 21 73 140 229 pointer indicates the flow arrangement.
50 178 216 152 165 121 114 121 16 22 92 160 305
80 203 283 190 210 152 130 141 19 29 127 190 457 The top of the plug is marked with a
100 229 305 229 254 194 152 171 24 32 157 229 762 5&8 groove to further indicate the port
150 267 403 289 318 – 190 216 25 37 216 – – positions. Should the stop collar be
200 292 419 343 381 – 229 254 29 41 270 – –
250 330 457 406 444 – 311 311 30 48 324 – – removed, care should be taken to assure
Dimensions of gears and gear mountings are the same as for straightway valves, with the exception of proper orientation upon reassembly.
8 in (200 mm), 180˚ 3-way valves. For stem dimensions consult factory.
The valve wrench is designed to
All dimensions are approximate and for illustration purposes only. For exact dimensions request certified
dimensional prints. operate in any of four quadrants.
13
Flow Arrangements
14

G4 & G4B Jacketed Valve

Dimensions
Partially Jacketed Valves* English Units

1 in (25 mm) thru 12 in (300 mm) Valve Size X Y No. of Conn.
PJG411 – Class 150 1 1/2 215/16 3
PJG431 – Class 300 11/2 9/16 23/4 3
2 3/4 215/16 3
For exact dimensions request certified dimensional prints. 3 11/4 31/4 3
4 21/4 33/4 3
*For remainder of valve dimensions, refer to straightway valve
dimensions, page 12. The 4 in (100 mm) and larger sizes are gear 6 3 41/4 3
operated. 8 41/2 53/4 3
10 6 63/4 3
Metric Units
Valve Size X Y
25 13 75
40 14 70
50 19 75
80 31 82
100 57 95
150 76 108
200 208 146
250 152 171
Fully Jacketed Valves*

1 in (25 mm) thru 6 in (150 mm)
FJG411 – Class 150
FJG431 – Class 300
Stem Configuration
All valves furnished with 1/16 in (2 mm) R.F. flanges to ASME (ASA) 1/2 in (15 mm) to
B 16.5 Std. 6 in (150 mm) flats
The jacket is designed for 150 psi saturated steam.
Jackets are same material as body.
*Gear operated–for additional dimensions call factory.
1/16 in (2 mm)
English Units
Nom. Drilling Drilling A B C D E F G H J M P W No. Jkt. Wt. in Lbs.
Valve Flange Class 150 Class 300 Class Class Class of Conn. Class
Size Size No. Size BC No. Size BC 150 300 150 300 150 300 Conn. NPT 150 300
1 2 4 3/4 43/4 8 3/4 5 7 75/8 6 61/2 323/32 23/4 9/16 7/8 35/8 25/32 21/32 7/8 413/16 15/16 7 5 3/4 28 48
11/2 21/2 4 3/4 51/2 8 7/8 57/8 71/2 81/4 7 71/2 45/32 3 5/8 1 41/8 25/32 21/32 15/16 51/2 13/8 9 5 3/4 41 67
2 3 4 3/4 6 8 7/8 65/8 8 87/8 71/2 81/4 43/4 31/2 11/16 11/8 5 11/16 7/8 1 65/16 13/8 12 5 1 50 71
3 4 8 3/4 71/2 8 7/8 77/8 9 93/4 9 10 6 41/4 7/8 11/4 63/16 11/16 7/8 13/16 71/2 13/4 18 5 1 84 131
4 6 8 7/8 91/2 12 7/8 105/8 101/2 111/2 11 121/2 721/32 53/16 15/16 17/16 81/2 111/16 127/64 19/16 91/32 2 30 5 11/4 175 291
6 8 8 7/8 113/4 12 1 13 111/2 125/8 131/2 15 * 67/16 11/16 15/8 105/8 17/8 127/64 19/16 * 21/2 * 5 11/4 302 437
Metric Units
Nom. Drilling Drilling A B C D E F G H J M P W Wt. in Kgs.
Valve Flange Class 150 Class 300 Class Class Class Class
Size Size No. Size BC No. Size BC 150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300
25 50 4 19 121 8 19 127 178 194 154 165 94 70 14 22 92 20 17 22 122 33 178 12.6 21.6
40 65 4 19 140 8 22 149 190 210 178 190 106 76 16 25 105 20 17 24 140 35 229 18.4 30.2
50 80 4 19 152 8 22 168 203 255 190 210 121 89 17 29 127 27 22 25 160 35 305 22.5 32.0
80 100 8 19 190 8 22 200 229 248 229 254 273 108 19 32 157 27 22 30 190 44 457 37.8 59.0
100 150 8 22 241 12 22 270 267 292 279 318 194 132 24 37 216 43 36 40 229 50 762 78.8 131.0
150 200 8 22 298 12 25 330 292 321 343 381 * 164 27 41 270 48 36 40 * 64 * 135.9 196.7
15

G4 & G4B Screwed End Valve

Dimensions
Straightway Screwed End Valves English Units

1/4 in (5 mm) thru 2 in (50 mm) Area of % Port Opening
Valve A C D M W X Port Based on Wt. in
G432 Class 150 & 300 Size Sq. In. Nominal Size Lbs.
1/4 in (5 mm) - 3/4 in (20 mm) 1/4 31/2 33/16 111/32 425/32 6 19/16 .248 506 4
High Hub Wrench Standard 3/8 31/2 33/16 111/32 425/32 6 19/16 .248 225 33/4
1/2 31/2 33/16 111/32 425/32 6 19/16 .248 126 33/4
3/4 31/2 33/16 111/32 425/32 6 19/16 .248 56 31/2
1 45/8 323/32 119/32 413/16 7 115/16 .785 100 7
11/2 51/2 45/32 17/8 51/2 9 29/16 1.21 68 91/4
2 6 43/4 27/32 65/16 12 31/8 2.0 64 153/4
Metric Units
Valve Area of
Size A C D M W X Port Sq. Cm. Wt. in Kgs.
5 89 81 34 121 152 40 1.59 1.8
10 89 81 34 121 152 40 1.59 1.7
15 89 81 34 121 152 40 1.59 1.7
20 89 81 34 121 152 40 1.59 1.6
25 117 94 40 122 178 49 5.1 3.2
40 140 106 48 140 229 65 7.8 4.2
50 152 121 56 160 305 79 13.0 7.1
3-Way Screwed End Valves English Units

Valve Wrench
1/2 in (15 mm) thru 2 in (50 mm) Size A C D Sq. Dim. M W X Wt. in Lbs.
MG432 Class 150 & 300 1/4 31/2 33/16 13/4 7/16 425/32 6 19/16 43/4
1/4 in (5 mm) - 3/4 in (20 mm) 3/8 31/2 33/16 13/4 7/16 425/32 6 19/16 41/2
High Hub Wrench Standard 1/2 31/2 33/16 111/16 7/16 425/32 6 19/16 41/2
3/4 31/2 33/16 13/4 7/16 425/32 6 19/16 41/4
1 45/8 223/32 23/8 21/32 413/16 7 115/16 101/2
11/2 51/2 45/32 27/8 21/32 51/2 9 29/16 171/2
2 6 43/4 33/8 7/8 65/16 12 31/8 221/2
Metric Units
Valve Wrench
Size A C D Sq. Dim. M W X Wt. in Kgs.
5 89 81 44 11 121 152 40 2.2
10 89 81 44 11 121 152 40 2
15 89 81 44 14 121 152 40 2
20 89 81 44 14 121 152 40 1.9
25 117 69 60 14 122 178 49 4.7
40 140 106 73 14 140 229 65 7.9
50 152 121 86 22 160 305 79 10.1
16

G4 & G4B Weld End Valve

Dimensions
Socket Weld Valves ASME B16.11 English Units

These valves can be welded without dis- Area of % Port Opening
assembly of the valve. Consult IOM-240, Valve A C D F M S W X Port Based on Wt. in
available from Flowserve Corporation, Size Sq. In. Nominal Size Lbs.
for welding procedures and precautions. 1/4 31/2 33/16 111/32 – 425/32 – 6 19/16 .248 506 2
Welding of ductile iron is not recommended. 3/8 31/2 33/16 111/32 – 425/32 – 6 19/16 .248 225 2
1/2 31/2 33/16 111/32 .86 425/32 3/8 6 19/16 .248 126 2
3/4 31/2 33/16 111/32 1.07 425/32 1/2 6 19/16 .248 56 23/4
1 45/8 323/32 119/32 1.33 413/16 1/2 7 115/16 .785 100 7
1/4 in (5 mm) thru 2 in (50 mm) 11/2 51/2 45/32 17/8 1.91 51/2 1/2 9 29/16 1.21 68 91/4
G434 Class 150 & 300 2 6 43/4 27/32 2.40 65/16 5/8 12 31/8 2.0 64 153/4
1/4 in (5 mm) - 3/4 in (20 mm)
High Hub Wrench Standard
Metric Units
Valve Area of
Size A C D F M S W X Port Sq. Cm. Wt. in Kgs.
5 89 81 34 – 121 – 152 40 1.597 0.9
10 89 81 34 – 121 – 152 40 1.597 0.9
15 89 81 34 22.0 121 10 152 40 1.597 0.9
20 89 81 34 27.0 121 13 152 40 1.59 1.2
25 117 94 40 33.8 122 13 178 49 5.1 3.2
40 140 106 48 48.5 140 13 229 65 7.8 4.2
50 152 121 56 61.0 160 16 305 79 13.0 7.1
Note: Not available in ductile cast iron. Valves provided in D20, DC2, DC3, and DM will be furnished with
stub ends pre-welded into valve.
Butt Weld Valves English Units

These valves can be welded without dis- Area of % Port Opening
assembly of the valve. Consult IOM-240, Valve A A C D M W Port Based on
Size 150 300 Sq. In. Nominal Size
available from Flowserve Corporation,
1/2 61/2 61/2 33/16 17/32 425/32 6 .248 126
for welding procedures and precautions.
3/4 61/2 61/2 33/16 17/32 425/32 6 .248 56
Welding of ductile iron is not recommended.
4 in (100 mm) through 12 in (300 mm) 1 61/2 61/2 323/32 119/32 413/16 7 .785 100
valves are normally gear operated. Butt- 11/2 71/2 71/2 45/32 17/8 51/2 9 1.21 68
weld valves are machined to match 2 81/2 81/2 43/4 27/32 65/16 12 2.0 64
schedule 40 (ASME) piping systems 3 12 12 6 229/32 71/2 18 4.6 65
unless otherwise specifed. 4 14 14 721/32 311/16 109/32 30 7.4 59
6 17 17 923/32 47/8 – – 16.1 57
8 20 20 • 67/16 – – 27.7 55
12 26 26 * 93/16 – – 57.8 37
1/2 in (15 mm) thru 12 in (300 mm)
G413 Class 150
G433 Class 300 Metric Units
Valve A A Area of
Size 150 300 C D M W Port Sq. Cm.
15 165 165 81 31 127 152 1.59
20 165 165 81 31 127 152 1.59
25 165 165 94 40 122 178 5.1
40 191 191 106 48 140 229 7.8
50 216 216 121 56 160 305 13.0
80 305 305 152 74 191 457 30.0
100 356 356 194 94 261 762 48.0
150 432 432 247 124 314 1168 104
200 508 508 * 163 – – 179
All dimensions are approximate and for illustration purposes only. 300 660 660 * 233 – – 373
Note: Not available in ductile cast iron. Valves provided in D20, DC2, DC3, and DM will be furnished with
stub ends pre-welded into valve. 17

Manual Actuator &

Trim Options
Handwheel Extension T-Handle Wrench
Valve Size
in (mm) W
1 (25) 20 (500)
1-1/2 (40) 20 (500)
2 (50) 24 (600)
3 (80) 24 (600)
4 (100) 28 (700)
Chlorine Valve Double Block and Bleed

The Durco G4 Chlorine Valve is built in
accordance with the recommendations of The
Chlorine Institute. This valve is manufactured
with a cast carbon steel body and a vented
Monel plug for dry chlorine service. It is
cleaned, dried and packaged for delivery.
Vented plug design is also recommended
for other cold liquids such as anhydrous HCL.
Block Valve
Bleed Valve
* Plug cavity and upstream or downstream bleed capability as specified by the

customer. 1/4 in (5 mm) bleed valve is standard–other sizes are available.
18

Double End Chain Wrench Crank
Note: Customer must

specify horizontal or
vertical installation.
1 in (25 mm) thru

3 in (75 mm)
Chain Wheel
4 in (100 mm)
English Units English Units

Valve Valve Sprocket
Size M W W1 W2 Size K L M N N1 W X Size
1 323/32 131/2 12 6 1 41/4 23/8 – 8 49/16 71/8 113/16 2
11/4 521/32 131/2 12 6 11/2 43/4 23/8 – 8 49/16 71/8 113/16 2
11/2 521/32 131/2 12 6 2 51/16 23/8 – 8 49/16 71/8 113/16 2
2 51/4 25 24 12 3 65/16 211/16 – 8 49/16 81/8 23/8 2
21/2 65/16 25 24 12 4 83/8 37/16 – 13 111/8 121/16 3 21/2
3 65/16 25 24 12 6 103/8 37/16 – 13 111/8 121/16 3 21/2
4 91/2 62 60 – 8 131/8 4 221/8 18 – 1515/16 5/16 31/2
10 149/16 41/2 239/16 18 – 1515/16 15/16 31/2
12 139/16 41/2 229/16 18 – 1515/16 15/16 31/2
Metric Units 14 169/16 41/2 259/16 18 – 16 15/16 31/2
Valve 16 245/16 6 365/16 24 – 181/16 35/16 41/2
Size M W W1 W2
18 245/16 6 365/16 24 – 181/16 35/16 41/2
25 94 343 305 152
30 144 343 305 152
Metric Units
40 144 343 305 152
Valve Sprocket
50 133 635 610 305 Size K L M N N1 W X Size
65 160 635 610 305
25 108 60 – 203 116 181 46 51
80 160 635 610 305
40 121 60 – 203 116 181 46 51
100 241 1575 1524 –
50 129 60 – 203 116 181 46 51
75 160 68 – 203 116 207 60 51
100 213 87 – 330 283 306 76 64
150 264 87 – 330 283 306 76 64
200 527 102 794 457 – 405 8 64
250 370 114 598 457 – 405 33 89
300 344 114 573 457 – 405 33 89
For exact dimensions request certified dimensional prints. 350 421 114 649 457 – 405 33 89
400 618 152 922 610 – 459 84 114
450 618 152 922 610 – 459 84 114
19

Parts and Materials
G4 Valve
G4 & G4B Parts and Materials G4B

Exclusive Parts
Item Description Material of No.
No. Construction Req. 11 •
1 Body * 1
2 Plug * 1
2• Plug * 1 20 •
3 Top Cap Durcomet 100**/ 1 21 •
Stem
Configuration Ductile Iron
1/2 in (15 mm) to 3A Top Cap B8M3 SS/B7 4
6 in (150 mm) flats Fastener (CR-MO) Steel
5 Sleeve PTFE*** 1
6 Diaphragm PFA*** 1
11 Thrust Collar Durcomet 100 1 2•
11• Thrust Collar/ Durcomet 100/ 1
Diaphragm Hastelloy ®
12 Adjuster Durcomet 100 1
12A Adjuster B8-40 SS/B7 2
Fastener (CR-MO) Steel
13 Wrench Ductile Iron 1
17 Grounding 304 SS 1
Spring
19 Stop Collar Zinc Plated 1
Carbon Steel
19A Stop Collar 302 SS 1 * Body (Item No. 1) and Plug (Item No. 2) available in the
following cast materials: Ductile Iron; Carbon Steel; CF-8 SS;
Retainer Durcomet 100; Durimet 20; Chlorimet 2 and 3; Nickel; Monel;
20• Back-up Ring PTFE 2 Inconel; Titanium and Zirconium.
** Durcomet 100 is a high alloy stainless steel, CD4M Cu.
21• O-ring Viton 2 *** Other materials available on request.
(Kalrez optional) • Parts exclusive to G4B.
Materials Selection Chart A

DI = ASTM A395 Ductile Cast Iron
DINI = Ductile Cast Iron Nickel Plated (Plug Only)
DS = ASTM A216 Gr. WCB (Cast Steel)
Applicable Valve Standards DSNI = Cast Steel Nickel Plated (Plug Only 3 in or larger)
Specification Title D2 = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CF8 (304 S.S.)
ASME B16.10 Face-to-face D2L = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CF3 (304L S.S.)
dimension
D4 = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CF8M (316 S.S.)
ASME B16.34 Steel valves,
D4L = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CF3M (316L S.S.)
flanged & buttweld
DV = Durcomet 5 (Durco’s High Silicon Stainless Steel)
ASME B16.5 Flange & flange
fitting CD = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CD4M Cu (Durcomet 100)
ASME B1.20.1 Screwed ends D20 = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CN-7M (Durimet 20)
API 607 Fire safe valve CK3M = ASTM A351/A744 Gr. CK-3MCuN (254 SMO)1
testing DIN = ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 (Inconel 600)2
API 598 Valve inspection & DM = ASTM A494 Gr. M35-2 (Monel 400)2
test DM1 = ASTM A494 Gr. M35-1 (Monel 400)2
ASME B16.11 Forged fittings, DNI = ASTM A494 Gr. CZ-100 (Nickel 200)
socket weld and DC2 = ASTM A494 Gr. N-7M (Chlorimet 2)
threaded DC3 = STM A494 Gr. CW-6M (Chlorimet 3)
M.S.S. SP-54 Radiographic Ti = ASTM B367 Gr. C-3 (Titanium)
M.S.S. SP-55 Visual quality Zr = ASTM B752 Gr. 702C (Zirconium)
M.S.S. SP-61 Hydrostatic testing Zr5 = ASTM B752 Gr. 705C (Zirconium)
20 1. Registered trademark of Avesta AB
2. Registered trademark of the International Nickel Company, Inc.

G4Z 13
G4Z Fire Sealed TSG4 8
Parts and Materials
19A 15
Item Description Material of 13
19 No. Construction 12
1 Body ASTM A351 11
12A A744 Gr. CF8M
2 Plug ASTM A351 16
12 A744 Gr. CF8M 17
3A 3 Top Cap ASTM A744
Gr. CD4MCu 18
3
3A Top Cap B8M3 SS/B7 7
17
11 Fasteners (CR-MO) Steel
5 Sleeve PTFE 5
20 6 Diaphragm PFA**** 6
6A 6A Diaphragm Steel or Monel
6 11 Thrust Collar ASTM A744
Gr. CD4MCu
21 12 Adjuster ASTM A744 4
Gr. CD4MCu
12A Adjuster Fasteners B7M
17 Grounding Spring 302 S.S.
19 Stop Collar Zinc Plated Steel 10
2 19A Stop Collar Retainer 302 SS

20 Packing Grafoil ® 14
21 Gasket Grafoil ®
G4Z-HF valves substitute B7M studs and 2M nuts for
hex head top cap fasteners. 9
TSG4 Severe Service
5 Parts and Materials 19
Item Description Material of
No. Construction 20
1
1 Body ALY*
2 Plug ALY*
3• Sleeve TFE
4• Packing PTFE 2
5 Packing Adjuster D100
6 Packing Gland 304SS
7 Belleville Washers 17-7 PH E.N.C.***
8 Adjuster Fasteners B7/B8
9 Top Cap ALY*
10 Top Cap
Fasteners B7/B8
11 Plug Adjuster ASTMA 744
Gr. CD4MCu
12 Plug Adjuster
Fasteners B7/B8 3
13 Stop Collar Zinc Plated Steel
14 Belleville Washers 17-7 PH E.N.C.***
15 Stop Collar
Retainer 302SS 1
16 • Grounding Spring 302 SS
17 Plug Gland 304 SS
18 • Thrust Washer Glass Filled TFE
19 • Plug Bearing TFE
20 • Gasket - Top Cap GY**
* Carbon Steel; 316SS; Durimet 20; Chlorimet 3; Monel.
Plug and Top Cap are typically the same alloy unless otherwise
specified.
** Part Nos. 4 & 20 are Grafoil® on Fire Sealed TSG4Z.
*** Part Nos. 7 & 14 are not normally used on Fire Sealed TSG4Z.
Optional Inconel 718 recommended in corrosive environments.
****Other materials available.
21
• Recommended spare parts.
® Grafoil is a registered trademark of Union Carbide.

Testing and
Pressure/Temperature Ratings
G4 valves have been extensively tested to We believe the G4 valve is the best soft-
ensure the highest level of reliability possible. seated valve on the market today, and will
The unique reverse lip stem seal has outlast and outperform all competitive valves.
been tested from -50°F (-46°C) to 450°F
(232°C) maximum, and with pressures up Pressure-Temperature Ratings
to 720 psig (4960 kPa). The pressure-temperature ratings of all the
High temperature throttling tests at 450°F materials below are based on mechanical
(232°C) with pressure drops of 175 psig property requirements cited in the latest
(1205 kPa) have proven the superiority of ASME specifications.
G4 valves over other soft-seated valves. Ask The pressure-temperature rating for
your Durco Valve Sales Representative for ductile iron is in agreement with ASME
specific test results. B16.42, 1987.
The valves have been temperature Valves may require adjustment to remain
cycled to 450°F (232°C), and have provided drop tight at the lower end of temperature
performance superior to any other soft- range when operating below 0°F (-17°C) or
seated valve available for cyclical during extreme temperature cycles.
temperature situations.
G4 Pressure/Temperature Ratings
Class 150 Valves Class 300 Valves
D-20 = Durimet 20 (CN-7M), CD4M = Durcomet 100 (CD-4MCu), D4 = Cast 316 SS (CF-8M), D4L = Cast 316L SS (CF-3M), D2 = Cast 304 SS (CF-8), D2L = Cast 304L SS (CF-3),
DC2 = Chlorimet 2 (N-7M), DC3 = Chlorimet 3 (CW-6M), DINC = Cast Inconel (CY-40), DS = Cast Carbon Steel (WCB), DCI = Ductile Cast Iron (60-40-18), DNI = Cast Nickel (CZ-100),
DM-1 = Cast Monel (M-35-1), Zr-705C = Zirconium 705C, Zr-702C = Zirconium 702C,
22 Ti = Titanium, CK-3MCuN = 254 SMO

How To
Specify
Size Prefix Type Option Class End Operator Materials
Valve Size
Selection Code
Check Catalog For Applicability By Valve Type
Selection, Installation, Operation
Prefix and Maintenance
Selection Code
Partial Jacket PJ Although Flowserve can, and often does,
Full Jacket FJ
provide general guidelines, it is obviously
Valve Type not possible to provide application
Selection Code
Straight Way G4 specific data and warnings for all con-
3-Way Multiport MG4
Straight Way ceivable applications. The purchaser/end
Characterized Plug EG4 user must therefore assume the ultimate
Severe Service Straight TSG4
Severe Service responsibility for the proper selection,
3-Way Multiport TSMG4
Severe Service installation, operation and maintenance
Characterized Plug TSEG4
Straight Way Marathon G4B
of the products. Read the appropriate
3-Way Multiport Marathon MG4B IOM available from Cookeville, TN 38501
Marathon Characterized Plug EG4B
before installing, operating or repairing
Option
Selection Code any valve. The purchasers/end user
Fire Sealed Z should train its employees and/or
Pressure Class contractors in the safe use of the
Selection Code
ANSI Class 150 1 Durco products in connection with the
ANSI Class 300 3 purchaser’s manufacturing processes.
End Connection
Selection Code
ANSI R.F. Flange 1 Design Changes
NPT Screwed 2 In order to follow the Flowserve commit-
300# Butt Weld 3
Socket Weld Schedule 40 4 ment to continuous improvement, we
Operator reserve the right to change product and
Selection Code
Actuator Mounting Pads
performance specifications without
Drilled and Tapped A notice.
Actuator Mounting Pads
Not Drilled B
Wrench Operated
(4 in (100mm) G4 only) E
Gear Operated H
Bare Stem L
2nd Suffix
Selection Code
Flow Arrangement for 3-Way 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 or 13
Prepared for Cl2 Service DNZ
Alkylation HF
Available Materials
1st Group = Body
2nd Group = Plug
(See Materials Table page 20)
Sleeveline
Valve Index
Z EG MG PJ FJ Flanged Screwed Socket Butt Chlorine Page
Model Fire V-Port 3-Way Partially Fully Weld Weld No.
Sealed Control Multiport Jacketed Jacketed
G4 • • • • • • • • • • 2
G4Z-HF • • • • 4
G4B • • • • • • • • • • 6
TSG4 • • • • • • • • 8
23

Flowserve has the answer

to your corrosion resistant,
quarter-turn valving needs.
Clockwise from top right.
Durco® BTV-2000
PTFE or UHMWPE lined
chemical service valve
Atomac®
Lined ball valves
• ANSI/ISO, standard and full port
• Specialty valves
• Valve products and accessories
Durco® Sleeveline®
Non-lubricated, PTFE-sleeved
plug valves
• G4 Isolation
• G4E – DIN Mounting Pad
• G4 Marathon™
• TSG4 Severe Service
Durco® T-Line®
Non-lubricated, PTFE-lined
plug valves
Big Max® Butterfly
High performance valves
Durco® Microfinish™
Alloy ball valves
Automax®
Valve automation
systems
• Actuators
• Controls with
smart technology
• Accessories
For more information, contact:
Flowserve Corporation
Flow Control Division
1978 Foreman Drive
Cookeville, Tennessee 38501
Phone: 931 432 4021
Fax: 931 432 3105
www.flowserve.com
Or Consult Your Local Stocking Distributor Flowserve Ahaus GmbH Flowserve Pte. Ltd.
Von Braun Straße 19a 12 Tuas Avenue 20
FCD DVABR0024-00
D-48683 Ahaus Republic of Singapore 638824 (Bulletin V-24)
Germany Phone: 65 862 3332 Printed in U.S.A.
Phone: +49 2561 686-0 Fax: 65 862 2800 February 2005
© Flowserve Corporation
Fax: +49 2561 686-39
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
G4, G4Z and G4R

Marathon
S L E E V E L I N E® P L U G V A L V E S
Quality
System
Certificate
Non-Lubricated Plug Valves for Chemical Service
Bulletin V-270c
Section 1.0
FOREWORD
Flowserve Corporation, Flow Control Division, has established Sales Representative of Flowserve Corporation. Only
this Installation, Operating, and Maintenance Manual to facili- Flowserve replacement repair parts and assembly tooling
tate field installation, operation and repair of G4 Marathon, made or designed by Flowserve Corporation should be used.
G4Z Marathon and G4R Marathon valves. Part numbers referenced in the following sections are avail-
able from Flowserve Corporation, Flow Control Division.
It is recommended that questions or concerns involving the
processes described in this manual be directed to the local
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE
FOREWORD
I INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS – FLANGED AND WELDED G4 Marathon, G4Z Marathon, G4R Marathon 2
II OPERATING/MAINTENANCE – G4 Marathon, G4Z Marathon, G4R Marathon 3
III VALVE DISASSEMBLY – G4 Marathon, G4Z Marathon, G4R Marathon 4
IV PRESSURE CONTAINING FASTENERS 5-6
V A. VALVE ASSEMBLY – 1/2" & 3/4" G4 Marathon, G4R Marathon 7-8-9
B. VALVE ASSEMBLY – 1"-8" G4 Marathon, G4R Marathon 10-11-12
VI ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS – FIRESAFE VALVES G4Z Marathon, G4ZR Marathon 13-14-15
VII RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS 16
SECTION I
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS –
FLANGED AND WELDED G4 MARATHON, G4Z MARATHON, G4R MARATHON
FLANGED: limitation. (Refer to Table 1.1 for temperature limitations.)

The valve body sleeve area should not exceed this tempera-
Installation of Flowserve flanged valves is best accomplished by ture during welding including preheats, interpasses, or post
locating valves in pipeline flanges, assuring all corrosion and
weld heat treatments as applicable. Due to welding variables,
foreign material are removed from pipe flange and then center contact the Flowserve Corporation, Cookeville, TN, Valve
gaskets with the valve flanges. Fasteners or taper pins should
Operation for additional information or recommendations.
be used to align holes and locate gaskets. Fasteners should be
tightened to the corresponding valve and fastener size. 4. Leak-off or buffering connections should be installed after
the valve has been welded into the pipeline. A suitable thread
WELDED: sealant is recommended for installing such connections.
Flowserve Corporation, Flow Control Division recommends
using only qualified welding procedures and personnel for TABLE 1.1
weld installation of G4 Marathon and G4R Marathon valves.
TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
The following precautions should be observed:
1. The valve should be inspected prior to welding to assure MAXIMUM
that no foreign materials obstruct the flow passageway MATERIAL DESCRIPTION SERVICE
TEMPERATURE
and that the weld preparations are free of corrosion and
physical damage. Ultra High Molecular Weight
2. The valve should be in the open position while being welded. Polyethylene (UMPE) 200°F (93°C)
Open position is when the flow indicator on the plug stem is Tetrafluoroethylene Polymer (PTFE) 400°F (204°C)
pointing in the direction of the pipeline. Durlon 2 450°F (232°C)
3. Valves of the G4 Marathon and G4R Marathon style contain Duriron Durco 82 (DU-82) 275°F (135°C)
various seal materials which have a maximum temperature
2
Section 1.0
SECTION II
OPERATING/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
G4 MARATHON, G4Z MARATHON, G4R MARATHON
Maintenance requirements for G4 Marathon, G4Z Marathon FIGURE II-1

and G4R Marathon valves may vary due to operating condi- TYPICAL ASSEMBLY OF G4 MARATHON AND
tions of the process. Factors such as operating temperature, G4R MARATHON VALVE
pressure, solids content, and frequency of cycling can influ-
ence valve performance and maintenance requirements.
Seal wear is compensated by adjusting appropriate parts. For WRENCH (13)
G4 Marathon, G4Z Marathon and G4R Marathon valves, there
are three possible leak paths: STOP COLLAR RETAINER (19A)
1. Top Cap (bonnet) STOP COLLAR (19)
2. Stem
3. Line (through) ADJUSTER FASTENERS (12A)
Corresponding adjustments for each leak path are as follows: ADJUSTER (12)
Note: Refer to Figure II-1 or Figure VI-1A for parts identification. TOP CAP FASTENERS (3A)
1. Top Cap (bonnet)
TOP CAP (3)
Leakage due to thermal or pressure cycling is eliminated
by snugging the top cap fasteners (Part 3A) in a “criss- GROUNDING SPRING (17)
cross” pattern. This adjustment is most effective when the
valve is not pressurized. It is important that the top cap THRUST COLLAR (11)
fasteners not be tightened excessively and that torque
TEFLON BACK-UP RINGS (20) &
values applied be within industry standard for fasteners. O-RINGS (21)
2. Stem DIAPHRAGM (6)
Leakage due to wear of the diaphragm, and/or wear to
the sleeve (primary seal) is eliminated by tightening the
adjuster fasteners (Part 12A) in 1/4 turn increments. It is
recommended that the adjuster fasteners be tightened
evenly. PLUG (2)
The valve should be operated between adjustments to

assure that the plug properly seats itself into the sleeve.
If leakage persists after repeated adjustments, the sleeve
and diaphragm will require replacement as covered in
SLEEVE (5)
Section V A and V B or Section VI.
3. Line (through)
Through leakage due to wear of the primary seal can be
eliminated by tightening the adjuster fasteners (Part 12A)
in 1/4 turn increments. It is recommended that the BODY (1)
fasteners be tightened evenly.
The valve should be operated during adjustments to pre-
vent excessive operating torque. Should leakage persist
after repeated adjustments, the sleeve will require replace-
ment as covered in Section V A and V B or Section VI.
▲WARNING
!
To avoid personal injury and prevent damage to equip-
ment, do not operate or repair this valve without observ-
ing the following procedures outlined in this manual.
3
Section 1.0
SECTION III
VALVE DISASSEMBLY – G4 MARATHON, G4Z MARATHON, G4R MARATHON
Recommended Precautionary Measures 5. Gradually loosen but DO NOT REMOVE all of the top cap
1. Valves must be relieved of process fluid and pressure fasteners (Part 3A). Turn the plug until it is loose from
prior to disassembly. the sleeve (Part 5) and all pressure has been vented.
(Again, it may be necessary to use a mechanical means
2. Personnel performing disassembly must be suitably to move the plug upwards.)
protected and alert for emission of hazardous process
fluid. 6. Remove the top cap fasteners (Part 3A) and top cap
(Part 3) from the plug stem (Part 2).
3. If there is a pipe plug located at the bottom bowl of
the valve, DO NOT remove the pipe plug until the valve 7. Remove the plug (Part 2) from the body (Part 1).
plug has been removed.
8. Remove the grounding spring (Part 17) and thrust collar
(Part 11) from plug stem (Part 2).
Disassembly Steps
NOTE: Refer to Figure II-1 or VI-1A for parts identification. If 9. Remove the o-rings (Part 21), backup rings (Part 20) and
an actuator or gearbox operates the valve, alignment marks the diaphragm (Part 6) from the plug stem (Part 2).
should be noted to assure correct orientation when reassem- 10. Inspect the valve sleeve (Part 5) for wear or damage,
bled. This may best be accomplished by making matching especially scratches near the top, bottom, and port areas.
marks on the plug stem and operator housing with no burrs If wear or damage is excessive, the sleeve should be
on the plug stem. replaced.
1. Gradually loosen adjuster fasteners (Part 12A) – DO 11. Remove sleeve (Part 5) as follows:
NOT REMOVE.
NOTE: Care should be taken not to damage the internal
2. Turn plug (Part 2) in order to raise the plug to vent any body bore.
material trapped in the valve (see note below). a. Using a screw driver and mallet, cut the old sleeve
through one of the port openings, top and bottom.
Note: If there is no upward movement of the plug
b. Grasp the sleeve with a pair of pliers while twisting,
(Part 2), it will be necessary to devise a method of lifting
and lift the sleeve from the body.
the plug upward. This may require removal of the valve
operator (Step 3). This operation should be undertaken 12. Thoroughly clean all valve parts with an acceptable
noting the above precautionary measures. Methods of cleaner.
plug removal must include protective measures on plug
stem and plug end. 13. Inspect parts for damage. Look for marred, scratched, or
rough sealing surfaces on the valve plug (Part 2).
3. WARNING: Do not loosen or remove top cap fasteners
(Part 3A) when removing an operator or accessory. NOTE: Reinstallation of damaged or unclean parts will
Remove the operator by unfastening it from the ruin any replacement seals installed into the valve.
bracket.
4. Once the plug (Part 2) has lifted, the adjuster fasteners
(Part 12A) can be completely removed.
4
Section 1.0
SECTION IV
PRESSURE CONTAINING FASTENERS
Material Selection it must be periodically removed for visual inspection of the

Selecting the proper fastener material is the ultimate responsi- fasteners. If you wish assistance in determining the proper
bility of the customer because the supplier does not typically fasteners to use, please refer to the attached chart.
know in what service the valves will be used or what elements
may be present in the environment. Flowserve normally sup- Design & Type
plies B7 (carbon steel) for ductile cast iron and carbon steel Flowserve’s valve design standards adopt ASME B18.2.1
valves. For stainless steel and high alloy valves, B8 (stainless (1996) as the standard for fastener type and design. This
steel) fasteners are supplied as standard. All fasteners used national standard requires that finished hex “head” cap
must have a minimum yield strength of 40,000 PSI, a mini- screws be used when the head of the fastener is turned. A
mum elongation of 12% and be compatible with the process finished hex “head” cap screw and a heavy hex cap screw
fluid. Determining compatibility to the process fluid goes have a bearing surface under the head to minimize frictional
beyond a material being resistant to general corrosion resistance during tightening. They also comply to qualified
because the more important consideration is a material’s body diameters and fully formed head dimensions. Cookeville
resistance to stress corrosion cracking. Depending on the Valve Division’s policy is to use finished hex “head” and heavy
service, it may make sense to use B7 fasteners on high alloy hex “head” cap screws for all pressure retaining fasteners.
valves. One such service would be marine environments This includes top caps, packing adjusters, plug adjusters,
because of stainless steel’s susceptibility to stress corrosion bottom caps, body halves or other pressure retaining compo-
cracking in chloride environments. Another key aspect of nents. Compliance is made with ANSI B18.2.2 (1987), Square
fasteners is frequent visual inspection. Because of the com- and Hex Nuts, when studs and heavy hex nuts are required.
mon practice of using steel fasteners rather than stainless Additional information on these items may be obtained from
steel to avoid chloride stress corrosion cracking, visual the Flowserve Corporation, Cookeville Valve Operation,
inspection is recommended to monitor the general corrosion Cookeville, Tennessee.
of these fasteners. If jacketing or insulation is used on a valve,
TABLE 1
CAP SCREWS - STUDS
HHCS - Finished Heavy Hex Head Cap Screw Alloy identification stamp required on each piece.
HCS - Finished Hex Head Cap Screw Certification required.
STUD - Stud Alloy Specification (40 KSI Minimum Yield Strength, 12% Minimum Elongation)
Dimensions per ASME B18.2.1
B9 - Stainless Steel per ASTM A193, Class 2B, Grade B8 (AISI type 304)
B16 Stainless Steel per ASTM A193, 100% hardness tested
B7 - Chromium - Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A193, Grade B7
B7M - Chromium - Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A193, Grade B7M, 100% hardness tested
B7MT - Chromium - Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A193, Grade B7M, 100% hardness tested, Teflon® coated, Dupont SP11C, Type B - Color blue or green
B8M - 316 Stainless Steel per ASTM A193, Grade B8M, Class 1, 40 KSI Min. Yield Strength, 12% Min. El.
B8C2 - 304 Stainless Steel per ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class 2
C20 - Carpenter C20, CB-3 (UNS NO8020), ASTM B473, 40 KSI Min. Yield Strength, 12% Min. El.
HC - Hastelloy C276 (UNS N10276), ASTM B574
I625 - Inconel 625 (UNS N006625), ASTM B446
I825 Incoloy 825 (UNS N08825), ASTM B425, 40 KSI Min. Yield Strength, 12% Min. El.
IN - Inconel 600 (UNS N0660), ASTM B166, 40 KSI Min. Yield Strength, 12% Min. El.
M- Monel (UNS N04400), ASTM B164, Class A or B, 40 KSI Min. Yield Strength, 12% Min. El.
HB - Hastelloy B (UNS 10665), ASTM B335
I718 - Incoloy 718, AMS 5595B
MKH - Monel K-500, Cold drawn and aged hardened, QQN-286 and ASTM F468
L7 - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A320, Grade L7
L7M - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A320, Grade L7M, 100% hardness tested
L7T - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A320, Grade L7, Teflon® coated, Dupont SP11C, Type B - Color blue or green
L7MT - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A320, Grade L7M, 100% hardness tested, Teflon® coated, Dupont SP11C, Type B - Color blue or green
N- Nickel per ASTM B160 (UNS N0220), 40 KSI Min. Yield Strength, 12% Min. El.
B7YC - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per A193, Grade B7, Yellow Zinc Dichromate Plated
5
Section 1.0
SECTION IV
PRESSURE CONTAINING FASTENERS
TABLE 2
NUTS
HN - Finished Heavy Hex Nut
XN - Finished Hex Nut
HXN - Regular Heavy Hex Nut
Dimension per ANSI B18.2.2
Alloy identification stamp is required on each piece.
Certification required.
8- 304 Stainless Steel per ASTM A194, Grade 8

8M - 316 Stainless Steel per ASTM A194, Grade 8M
2H - ASTM A194, Grade 2H
2HM - ASTM A194, Grade 2HM
7M - ASTM A194, Grade 7M, 100% hardness tested
7MT - ASTM A194, Grade 7M, 100% hardness tested, Teflon® coated, Dupont SP11C, Type B - Color blue or green
M- Monel (UNS N04400), ASTM B164, Class A or B, QQN-281, Class B
HB - Hastelloy B (UNS 10665), ASTM B335
HC - Hastelloy C276 (UNS N10276), ASTM B574
I625 - Inconel 625 (UNS N06625), ASTM B446
I718 - Incoloy 718, AMS 5596B
I825 Incoloy 825 (UNS N08825), ASTM B425
L7 - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A194, Grade 7
L7M - Chromium-Molybdenum Alloy Steel per ASTM A194, Grade 7M, 235 BHN Max, ASTM A320, Section 9
MKH - Monel K-500, Cold drawn and aged hardened, QQN-286 and ASTM F467
8F - 303 Stainless Steel per ASTM A194, Grade 8F
2HYC - ASTM A194, Grade 2H, Yellow Zinc Dichromate Plated
6
Section 1.0
SECTION V
A. VALVE ASSEMBLY – 1/2" & 3/4" G4 MARATHON, G4R MARATHON
1. Apply Durco Seal 1028B to the inside of the tapered bore 3. Size sleeve. Check sleeve in body to make sure sleeve vent
in the body and permit to dry before assembly. RAD-1 holes are still centered between body ports. Apply a light
material is used for nuclear applications. coat of silicone lubricant to sizing Plug #1 and sizing Plug
#2, part #BY80017B & C. Push sizing Plug #1 into sleeve
2. Assemble sleeve into body with a coining die, part until the sizing plug flange bottoms against the counter-
#BY81917A. Position coining die so locating pins are bore of the valve body. Remove #1 sizing plug and now
located in bonnet flange holes in body. Position sleeve in push #2 sizing plug in the same manner, but HOLD SIZING
coining die so that sleeve holes are centered over body PLUG IN PLACE for 15 SECONDS (Figure V A-3).
ports (Figure V A-1). Place push rod and push rod guide in
coining die and push sleeve into body until push rod stops 1. Rough Size With Plug #1
on push rod guide (Figure V A-2). 2. Finish Size With Plug #2 (Hold for 15 Seconds)
FIGURE V A-1 FIGURE V A-3

ASSEMBLE SLEEVE SIZE SLEEVE
SIZING PLUG
PTFE SLEEVE
COINING DIE
SLEEVE HOLE
CENTERED
OVER BODY
HOLE
VALVE BODY
FIGURE V A-2 4. On a flat surface place the top cap and adjuster subassem-
PUSH SLEEVE IN BODY bly over the thrust collar. Thread the fasteners until snug.
FIGURE V A-4
PUSH ROD PRESET ADJUSTER, THRUST COLLAR
PUSH ROD AND TOP CAP
GUIDE
SET ADJUSTER CAP
SCREWS TO MAKE
ADJUSTER PARALLEL TO
TOP CAP
CHAMFER
BOTTOM OF TOP CAP

AND THRUST COLLAR OFFSET
DIAPHRAGM TO BE FLUSH
7
Section 1.0
SECTION V
5. The plug stem and dia- FIGURE V A-5 8. Place the thrust collar/ FIGURE V A-8
phragm guide are to be ASSEMBLE DIAPHRAGM ON diaphragm over the SEAT THRUST COLLAR ON
PLUG DIAPHRAGM
checked for nicks or plug stem and gently
burrs before installing maneuver it over the
the diaphragm. Nicks DIAPHRAGM o-rings onto the PFA
ASSEMBLY
on these surfaces TOOL diaphragm. With the THRUST
could result in thrust collar guide, P/N COLLAR
scratches on the lip BY86273B, centering GUIDE
of the diaphragm. the thrust collar assy;
Assemble diaphragm DIAPHRAGM force down (with arbor THRUST
over plug stem with the press) the thrust collar COLLAR
aid of the diaphragm guide to seat the
guide, part #BY86272B, thrust collar on the
and assembly tool, part DIAPHRAGM diaphragm. See Figure
GUIDE
#BY80019A (Figure V A-8. Remove guide
V A-5). from plug stem.
6. Using diaphragm guide If damaged the 9. Place grounding spring
plug taper and 1"
to protect the o-ring in length of stem
over plug stem sliding
from the stem edge, must be repolished it down to the thrust
install the first o-ring to a surface finish collar.
by “rolling” it with your of 16AA on the
taper and on stem. 10. Apply a thin, even film of silicone or customer approved
fingers over the guide
lubricant to the entire surface of the 2° plug taper.
and into the lower stem
groove (Figure V A-6). 11. Take plug (preassembled with diaphragm, thrust collar
Install Teflon split ring and grounding spring) and place it into body. Using a
in a similar manner FIGURE V A-6 soft head mallet, tap top of plug slightly to seat plug into
such that it is located sleeve taper. The plug at this time will be setting up
above the o-ring inside above the body counterbore approximately 1/4". The
the lower groove. See plug ports should be lined up in an open position.
Figure V A-7.
12. Place the top cap assembly over plug and slide it down
7. Install second o-ring until it rests on the thrust collar.
and split ring in the
upper groove in a 13. Assemble four fasteners thru top cap and body. With “U”
similar manner, except shaped push plate, part #BY86592A, resting on the top
that the diaphragm cap (Figure V A-9), force the top cap down (with arbor
guide should be raised press or pneumatic clamping arrangement) to seat the
so that the lower edge top cap against the valve body counterbore. While holding
of the guide does not the cap in this position, assemble nuts on underside of
contact the lower o-ring body flange to a finger tight position against the flange.
assembly. See Figure
FIGURE V A-9
V A-7. Coat both o-ring
ASSEMBLE TOP CAP ASSEMBLY
assemblies liberally OVER PLUG AND PUSH INTO
with Krytox® grease. BODY. APPLY THREAD LOCKING
Remove the guide. COMPOUND.
TOP CAP
ASSEMBLY
PUSH PLATE
FIGURE V A-7
NOTE: All fastening torques
are for corrosion free fasten-
ers and nuts. Precautions
must be taken not to exceed
recommended fastening
torques.
8
Section 1.0
SECTION V
14. Apply thread locking compound to the threads of the 18. LEAK TESTING: Anytime a valve has been modified in
top cap fasteners. Tighten the four top cap fasteners to any manner, including fastener changes, it should be
7 ft-lbs using a torque wrench. Reference Torque Table retested. Normal testing using gas, should be at 150 PSI
#1a & 1b on page 12. for Class 150 and 300 PSI for Class 300 valves from
1/2" through 6". It should be noted, however, that this
15. Loosen the adjuster fasteners to approximately 3/16" test does not meet the requirements of ANSI, API, or
above adjuster. Then rotate the valve plug back and forth MSS. For test procedures complying with these specifi-
3 times, making it rise upward. cations, refer to the appropriate published specification
16. Retighten adjuster fasteners to a torque of 10 to 12 in-lbs. or contact Flowserve.
or until the height of the plug port is positioned approxi-
mately 1/16" above to flush with the body port, whichever
occurs first.
17. Rotate plug back and forth a couple times to make sure
the stops and ports line up properly. The final assembled
valve should look similar to Figure V A-10.
FIGURE V A-10
ASSEMBLED VALVE
PLUG STOP COLLAR

ADJUSTER FASTENER RETAINER
ADJUSTER
STOP COLLAR
TOP CAP
FASTENER GROUNDING
SPRING
TOP CAP
TEFLON BACK-UP
RINGS (2)
BODY
O-RINGS (2)
DIAPHRAGM
THRUST
COLLAR
SLEEVE
9
Section 1.0
SECTION V
B. VALVE ASSEMBLY – 1"-8" G4 MARATHON, G4R MARATHON
Due to the tooling and associated equipment required then rotated back to its original position, and the blades
(presses, fixtures, etc.) to rebuild 10"-14" size valves, it is highly are then removed or retracted. The plug is then removed
recommended they be returned to the factory or a Flowserve from the body (Figure V B-2). In the 1" and 11/2" sizes, a
Authorized Black Tie Valve Rebuilder for repair and rebuild. bar may be substituted for the locking plug. See Figure
Many valves made by Flowserve Corporation handle corrosive V B-2A for a description of this operation.
chemicals which may be injurious to property or personnel.
FIGURE V B-3
Valves returned without proper attention given to the safety The sizing plug is pushed
requirements will be shipped back to the consignor collect. into the sleeve until the
sizing plug flange bottoms
Note: Part number reference is shown in Figure V B-9. against the counterbore of
1. Apply Durco Seal 1028B to the inside of the tapered bore the valve body.
in the body and permit to dry before assembly. RAD-1
material is used for nuclear applications. 4. Apply a thin film of oil on
the sizing plug, part series
2. Apply a light coating of oil or silicone to the interior of
#BY79555A, and push it
the coining die or to the O.D. of the sleeve. Position the
into the sleeve until the siz-
sleeve in the coining die, part series #BY79542A, so that
ing plug flange bottoms
the diagonal opposite sides of the sleeve port will lock
against the counterbore of
behind the metal lips in the body (Figure V B-2). The
the valve body (Figure V B-3). Allow the sizing plug to
sleeve is then pushed directly through the coining die
remain in this position for one minute.
into the valve body until the sleeve drops below the top
counterbore of the valve body (Figure V B-1). 5. Check that the inner diameter of the gasket pad of the
top cap has between a 1/6" x 45° to 3/32" x 45° chamfer.
FIGURE V B-1 FIGURE V B-2
If not, remachine the top cap to this dimension. See
Push sleeve directly through coining A special plug with retractable
die until sleeve drops below top or removable blades engages Figure VB-4.
counterbore of the valve body. the two remaining sleeve ports FIGURE V B-4 SET ADJUSTER CAP SCREWS TO
and pulls them until they fall MAKE ADJUSTER PARALLEL TO
behind the body port lips. TOP CAP
CHAMFER
DIRECTION OF
ROTARY MOTION BOTTOM OF TOP CAP OFFSET
AND THRUST COLLAR
DIAPHRAGM TO BE FLUSH
FIGURE V B-2A
Optional assembly operation 6. On a flat surface place the FIGURE V B-5
for 1" & 11/2" G4 Valves top cap and adjuster sub- If damaged the plug taper and
3. A special plug, part series Care must be exercised to 1" in length of stem must be
ensure that the bar does not slip assembly over the thrust repolished to a surface finish
#BY79664A, containing
and gouge or tear the sleeve. collar. Thread the fasteners of 16 on the taper and stem.
retractable or removable
until snug.
blades is lowered into the
body with the blades re- 7. The plug stem and
tracted or removed. The diaphragm guide should be
blades are then installed or checked for nicks before
extended and a counter installing the diaphragm.
clockwise rotary motion is Nicks on these surfaces
applied to the plug engag- could result in scratches
ing the two remaining diag- on the lip of the diaphragm.
onal opposite sleeve port The diaphragm (Part 6) is
openings and pulling them assembled over the plug
until they fall behind the stem with the aid of the
body port lips. The plug is G4 diaphragm guide, part
series #BY86272A (Figure
10 V B-5).
Section 1.0
SECTION V
8. Using the diaphragm FIGURE V B-6 fasteners to the torque values found in Torque Table #1a
guide to protect the & #2b on page 12.
o-ring from the stem
14. Remove the valve from the arbor press, loosen the
edge, install the first
adjuster fasteners, and operate the plug several times. It
o-ring by “rolling” it with
will turn hard at first but will then loosen and turn freely.
your fingers over the
guide and into the lower 15. Tighten the adjuster fasteners (Part 12A) until a reason-
stem groove (Figure V able turning torque (Ref. Table #2) is obtained. The 8"
B-6). Install Teflon split and larger valves are placed in an oven at 200°F for a
ring in a similar manner minimum of six hours prior to final adjustment with the
such that it is located plug in the open position. After removal from the oven
above the o-ring inside and valve has cooled, loosen the adjuster fasteners. Turn
the lower groove. See the plug several times. Retighten the adjuster fasteners
Figure V B-7. until a reasonable plug turning torque is obtained. The
height of the plug port should be positioned approxi-
9. Install second o-ring
mately 1/16" above to flush with the body port.
and split ring in upper
groove in a similar 16. Place the stop collar (Part 19A) and retainer on the plug
manner, except that the FIGURE V B-7 stem. The stop collar should point in the direction of flow.
diaphragm guide should
be raised by hand so 17. The valve is now ready for test and use.
that the lower edge of 18. LEAK TESTING: Anytime a valve has been modified in
the guide does not any manner, including fastener changes, it should be
contact the lower o-ring retested. Normal testing using gas, should be at 150 PSI
assembly. See Figure for Class 150 and 300 PSI for Class 300 valves from
V B-7. Coat both o-ring 1/2" through 6". It should be noted, however, that this test
assemblies liberally does not meet the requirements of ANSI, API or MSS.
with Krytox® grease. For test procedures complying with these specifications,
Remove the guide. refer to the appropriate published specification or
10. Place the thrust contact Flowserve.
collar/diaphragm over FIGURE V B-8
the plug stem and gently FIGURE V B-9
maneuver it over the ASSEMBLED G4 MARATHON OR G4R MARATHON VALVE
o-rings onto the PFA THRUST STOP
diaphragm. The thrust COLLAR COLLAR & GROUND
GUIDE ADJUSTER SPRING (17)
collar is driven into FASTENERS (12A) PLUG (2) RETAINER
place through the use of (19A)
ADJUSTER (12) TOP CAP
the thrust collar guide, FASTENERS (3A)
part series #BY86273A, THRUST TEFLON BACK-UP
and an arbor press COLLAR RINGS (20) &
(Figure V B-8). (11) O-RINGS (21)
TOP
11. Place the grounding CAP (3)
spring (Part 17) over
the plug stem.
12. Apply a thin, even coat
of silicone on the entire
surface of the 2° plug
taper.
13. Place the top cap and adjuster over the plug stem. Place
this subassembly into the valve body. Using an arbor or
hydraulic press, push down on the top cap evenly until
the top cap gasket pad seats firmly against the body
SLEEVE (5) BODY, BODY (1)
counterbore. Apply thread locking compound to the G4 MARATHON G4R
DIAPHRAGM (6)
threads of the top cap fasteners. Tighten the top cap MARATHON
11
Section 1.0
SECTION V
Table #1a *Apply Loctite ®

242 to fastener threads, top cap only.
Torque Required On Top Cap Fasteners Of Class 150 G4 Marathon Valves
VALVE SIZE 1/2-3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 8N
MAX TORQUE (ft-lbs) 7 7 7 12 21 31 62 62 105
Table #1b *Apply Loctite ®

242 to fastener threads, top cap only.
Torque Required On Top Cap Fasteners Of Class 300 G4 Marathon Valves
VALVE SIZE 1/2-3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8"
MAX TORQUE (ft-lbs) 7 13 13 20 31 62 125 115
Table #2
Torque On Plug Adjusters Of G4 Marathon Valves, 150# And 300#
VALVE SIZE 1/2-3/4" 1" 11/2" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 8N
MAX TORQUE (in-lbs) 10 35 35 35 50 80 180 372 480
Loctite® is a registered trademark of the Loctite Corp.
12
Section 1.0
SECTION VI
ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS – FIRESAFE VALVES G4Z MARATHON, G4ZR MARATHON
FIGURE VI-1A 3. The firesafe top seal FIGURE VI-1
TYPICAL ASSEMBLY OF G4Z MARATHON AND assembly differs from Flare PFA diaphragm over
G4ZHF MARATHON tapered bar.
the standard G4 top
seal and is completed
per the following
WRENCH (13)
instructions.
STOP COLLAR RETAINER (19A)
4. The PFA diaphragm
STOP COLLAR (19)
(Part 6) is to be flared
ADJUSTER FASTENERS (12A) on a diaphragm guide
ADJUSTER (12) just enough to slip FIGURE VI-2
TOP CAP FASTENERS (3A) over the plug stem Place PTFA diaphragm over plug
(Figure VI-1). stem with lip down.
TOP CAP (3)
GROUNDING SPRING (17) 5. The plug stem should If damaged the
THRUST COLLAR (11) be checked for nicks plug taper and
before installing the PFA 1" in length of
TEFLON BACK-UP RINGS (22) & stem must be
O-RINGS (23)
diaphragm. Nicks on repolished to a
this surface could result surface finish of
PACKING GRAFOIL® (20) in scratches on the lip 16 on the taper
DIAPHRAGM – of the diaphragm. The and stem.
STEEL OR MONEL (6A) PFA diaphragm (Part 6)
DIAPHRAGM – is placed over the plug
PTFE, PFA, UHMWPE (6) stem with the aid of the
GASKET GRAFOIL® (21) G4 Marathon diaphragm
guide part series
PLUG (2) BY86272A. The lip is FIGURE VI-3
down (Figure VI-2). Flare metal diaphragm over plug
Remove the guide. stem with lip up.
SLEEVE (5)
6. The metal diaphragm
(Part 6A) is placed over
BODY (1)
the plug stem and the
hole enlarged just
enough to slip down on
the stem (Figure VI-3).
7. The metal diaphragm
is then removed and
replaced with the lip
down (Figure VI-4).
®Grafoil is a registered trademark of Union Carbide Corporation 8. The Grafoil packing ring
(Part 20) is placed over FIGURE VI-4
1/2"-4" the stem (Figure VI-5). Metal diaphragm is removed and
reassembled with lip down.
1. Normal procedures for field replacement of one piece 9. Using diaphragm guide
sleeves are to be followed for inserting the sleeve, port # series P/N
Section V A (1/2" & 3/4"), steps 1-3 or Section V B (1"-8"), BY86272A to protect
steps 1-4. the o-ring from the
2. Check that the inner diameter of the gasket pad of the stem edge, install the
top cap has between a 1/16" x 45° to 3/32" x 45° cham- first o-ring by “rolling”
fer. If not, remachine the top cap of this dimension. See it with your fingers over
Figure V B-4, page 10. the guide and into the
lower stem groove
13
Section 1.0
SECTION VI
ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS – FIRESAFE VALVES G4Z, G4ZHF, G4ZR
(Figure VI-6). Install FIGURE VI-5 6"-8"-8"N FIGURE VI-8

Teflon split ring in a Grafoil packing ring placed Due to the tooling and Packing and thrust collar driven
similar manner such over stem. associated equipment into place.
that it is located above required (presses, fix-
the o-ring inside the tures, etc.) to handle 10"-
lower groove. See 14" size valves, it is high-
Figure VI-7. ly recommended they be
returned to the factory
10. Install second o-ring for repair and rebuild.
and split ring in upper
groove in a similar 1. Normal procedures
manner, except that the for field replacement
diaphragm guide of one piece sleeves
should be raised by are to be followed
hand so that the lower for inserting the
edge of the guide does sleeve Section V B,
not contact the lower steps 1-4.
o-ring assembly. See
2. The firesafe top seal
Figure VI-7. Coat both FIGURE VI-6 assembly differs
o-ring assemblies O-ring placed over stem. from the standard
liberally with Krytox®
G4 top seal and is FIGURE VI-9
grease. Remove the
completed per the Grafoil gasket placed on metal
guide.
following instruc- diaphragm using a bonding material.
11. Place the thrust collar/ tions.
diaphragm over the
3. The PFA diaphragm
plug stem and gently
(Part 6) is to be
maneuver it over the
flared on the GASKET
o-rings onto the Grafoil
ring. The thrust collar diaphragm guide
(Part 11) is driven into just enough to slip
place through the use over the plug stem
of the thrust collar (Figure VI-1).
guide, part series 4. The plug stem and
#BY86273A, and arbor diaphragm guide
press (Figure VI-8). should be checked
12. The entire assembly for nicks before
is turned over and the installing the PFA
Grafoil gasket placed on diaphragm. Nicks on
the metal diaphragm FIGURE VI-7 this surface could
(Figure VI-9). A small result in scratches on the lip of the diaphragm. The PFA
amount of rubber diaphragm is placed over the diaphragm guide with the
cement is placed on the lip down (Figure VI-2). Remove the guide.
Grafoil in several places 5. The thrust collar (Part 11) and thrust collar guide, part
to cause it to adhere to series #BY86273A, are to be installed over the plug stem
the metal diaphragm. and loaded by an arbor press to flatten the PFA firesafe
13. Continue to assemble diaphragm. Remove the thrust collar and thrust collar
the valve per Step 9 of guide.
Section V A for the 1/2"- 6. The metal diaphragm (Part 6A) is placed over the plug
3/4" size valves or Step stem and the hole enlarged just enough to slip down on
11 in Section V B for the stem (Figure VI-3).
the 1"-4".
7. A thin coat of silicone oil is applied to the down edge of
the metal diaphragm. The diaphragm is then placed over
the plug stem with the lip down (Figure VI-4).
14
Section 1.0
SECTION VI
ASSEMBLY SPECIFICATIONS – FIRESAFE VALVES G4Z, G4ZHF, G4ZR
8. The Grafoil packing ring (Part 20) is placed over the stem valve parts by tightening in excess of industry standards
(Figure VI-5). for appropriate size and alloy fasteners. Ref. Torque Table
#1a & 1b.
9. Using the diaphragm guide P/N BY86272A to protect the
o-ring from the stem edge, install the first o-ring by 16. The adjuster fasteners (Part 12A) are loosened and the
“rolling” it with your fingers over the guide and into the plug is turned a minimum of three times. The sleeve is
lower stem groove (Figure VI-6). Install Teflon split ring in checked on all four seal zones for tears.
a similar manner such that it is located above the o-ring
17. With the plug in the open position, adjuster fasteners
inside the lower groove. See Figure VI-7.
(Part 12A) are then torqued to the following levels or until
10. Install second o-ring and split ring in upper groove in a the plug port is 1/6" above or flush with body port: Ref.
similar manner, except that the diaphragm guide should Table #2, page 12.
be raised by hand so that the lower edge of the guide
Size Torque
does not contact the lower o-ring assembly. See Figure
6" 180 in-lb
VI-7. Coat both o-ring assemblies liberally with Krytox
8" 372 in-lb
grease.
8N 480 in-lb
11. Place the thrust collar/diaphragm over the plug stem and
18. Operate the plug a minimum of three times. The valve
gently maneuver it over the o-rings onto the Grafoil ring.
should look similar to Figure VI-10.
The thrust collar (Part 11) is then driven into place
through the use of the thrust collar guide part # series 19. The gear box or actuator is installed with the plug set in
BY86273A and arbor press (Figure VI-8). the open position and the open position adjusting screw
of the gear is then locked. Careful attention is required to
12. The Grafoil top cap gasket (Part 21) is to be installed with
set the gear box stop screw at 90° rotation for the closed
the tapered or small edge diameter down or placed
position. A protractor may be used to check for 90°
against the valve counterbore. The plug is pushed down
rotation or alignment scribes may be noted on the gear
until it is flush with the bottom of the body port in order
box cover.
to check the diaphragm fit inside the Grafoil gasket for
clearance. The PFA diaphragm must not ride on the 20. LEAK TESTING: Anytime a valve has been modified in
Grafoil gasket but should fit just inside the Grafoil. any manner, including fastener changes, it should be
retested. Normal testing using gas, should be at 150 PSI
13. The adjuster fasteners must be preset per Section VB-6.
for Class 150 and 300 PSI for Class 300 valves from
Check that the inner diameter of the gasket pad of the top 1/2" through 6". It should be noted, however, that this test
cap has between a 1/16" x 45° to 3/32" x 45° chamfer. If
does not meet the requirements of ANSI, API or MSS.
not, remachine the top cap to this dimension. The top cap
For test procedures complying with these specifications,
(bonnet) (Part 3) and thrust collar assembly is installed
refer to the appropriate published specification or
and the plug is pushed down in the open position again
contact Flowserve.
until the bottom of the port is flush and the top cap
bottoms firmly on body counterbore. The top cap must FIGURE VI-10
be checked before installation to ensure there is no ASSEMBLED G4Z MARATHON & G4ZHF MARATHON
chamfer on outside edge of the cap.
14. The top cap is visually located to be evenly spaced inside
the body counterbore. The side of the top cap compres-
sion flange is equally spaced with the side wall of the
body counterbore. Fasteners should be installed and
tightened to 5 ft-lb torque to prevent movement of the
cap during initial torquing. Push down on the top cap
evenly until the top cap gasket pad seats firmly against
the body counterbore.
15. Once it has been determined that the gaskets fit properly,
continue to tighten the top cap fasteners in 50 ft-lb incre-
ments in a crisscross fashion to the levels found in Table
#1a & 1b, page 12.
Note: All fastening torques are for Locktite® coated,
corrosion free fasteners and nuts. Extreme care must be
taken to prevent overstressing fasteners and subsequent
15
A T O M A C
SECTION VII
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
Named parts shown below by respective valve are recommended

spare parts for that valve model.
GROUND SPRING TEFLON BACK-UP RINGS (2)

O-RINGS (2) TEFLON GROUND
DIAPHRAGM BACK-UP SPRING
RINGS (2) THRUST COLLAR/
DIAPHRAGM
0-RINGS (2) ASSEMBLY
CD4M/C276
DIAPHRAGM
(STAINLESS
STEEL OR
MONEL)
GASKET
(GRAFOIL)
PACKING
(GRAFOIL)
DIAPHRAGM
(PFA)
SLEEVE
THRUST COLLAR/
DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY
CD4M/C276
SLEEVE
G4 MARATHON VALVE G4Z & G4ZHF FIRESAFE VALVE
Design, Manufacture, and In-house Repair
of Ball, Butterfly and Plug Valves
in Cookeville, TN
Selection, Installation, Operation and Maintenance

Flowserve Corporation has established industry leadership in the design and manufacture of its products. When
properly selected, each product is designed to perform its intended function safely during its useful service life. However,
it is necessary that Flowserve’s customers be fully aware of their responsibilities when using these products.
Each Flowserve valve product may be used in numerous applications under a wide variety of industrial service
conditions. Although Flowserve can, and often does, provide general guidelines, it is obviously not possible to provide
application specific data and warnings for all conceivable applications. The purchaser/end user must therefore assume
the ultimate responsibility for the proper selection, installation, operation and maintenance of the products. Read the
appropriate IOM before installation, operating or repairing any valve. The purchaser/end user should train its employees
and/or contractors in the safe use of the Flowserve products in connection with the purchaser’s manufacturing processes.
Flowserve will continue to provide its customers with the best possible products and service available. We do not
recommend substituting surplus or remanufactured valves over new Durco valves or those repaired in an authorized
service center. Should you have any questions about these provisions or about Flowserve’s products in general, please
contact your local Flowserve valve representative, who will be happy to help.
Or Consult Your Local Stocking Distributor For more information, contact: Flowserve Ahaus GmbH
Von Braun Straße 19a
Flowserve Corporation D-48683 Ahaus
Flow Control Division Germany
1978 Foreman Drive Phone: +49 2561 686-0
Cookeville, Tennessee 38501 Fax: +49 2561 686-39
Phone: 931 432 4021
Fax: 931 432 3105 Flowserve Pte. Ltd.
www.flowserve.com 12 Tuas Avenue 20
Republic of Singapore 638824
Phone: 65-862-3332
Fax: 65 862 2800
Printed in U.S.A.
January 2002
© Flowserve Corporation
Direct Acting 3/2
4
SERIES
Direct Mount Pilot Valves 8320
Brass or Stainless Steel Bodies Direct
1/4" NPT Mount
Features
• Mount directly to spring return actuators with % ^
NAMUR interface
• Same poppet valve performance as in standard
8320 valves
• Integral breather block prevents ingestion of
contaminates or corrosives
• Variety of flow and pressure ratings
• Mountable in any position
Construction
Valve Parts in Contact with Fluids
Body Brass 303 Stainless Steel
Seals and Discs NBR
Core Tube 305 Stainless Steel
Core and Plugnut 430F Stainless Steel 1
NC
Core Springs 302 Stainless Steel
3 2
Shading Coil Copper Silver
Disc-Holder CA
AUTOMATION
Core Guide CA (10.1 and 17.1 watts only)
VALVE
Electrical
Watt Rating and Power
Consumption Spare Coil Part Number
Standard
Coil and AC General Purpose Explosionproof
Class of DC VA VA
Insulation Watts Watts Holding Inrush AC DC AC DC
F 10.6 6.1 16 30 238210 238310 238214 238314
F 11.6 10.1 25 50 238610 238710 238614 238714
F 22.6 17.1 40 70 238610 238710 238614 238714
Standard Voltages: 24, 120, 240, 480 volts AC, 60 Hz (or 110, 220 volts AC, 50 Hz).
6, 12, 24, 120, 240 volts DC. Must be specified when ordering.
Other voltages are available when required.
Special Construction: Dual solenoid construction for redundant controls and dribble
control available. Consult your local ASCO sales office for details. Nominal Ambient Temp. Ranges
AC: 0˚F to 125˚F (-18˚C to 52˚C)
DC: 0˚F to 104˚F (-18˚C to 40˚C)
Solenoid Enclosures When used at temperatures below 32˚F (0˚C), media
Standard: Watertight, Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X. must be moisture free. Also available: -40˚ construction.
Optional: Explosionproof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, and 9. Please contact ASCO sales office for details.
(To order, add prefix “EF” to catalog number.)
See Optional Features Section for other available options. Approvals
UL component and CSA certified.
Refer to Engineering Section for details.
185
3/2
SERIES
8320
Direct
Mount
4
Specifications (English units)
Operating Pressure Watt Rating/
Differential (psi) Max. Fluid Class of Coil
Pipe Orifice Cv
Size Size Flow Air-Inert Gas Temp.°F Brass Body Stainless Steel Body Const. Insulation
(ins.) (ins.) Factor Max. AC Max. DC AC DC Catalog Number Catalog Number Ref. AC DC
NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized)
1/4 1/16 .09 150 125 180 120 8320G701 8320G711 1 6.1/F 10.6/F
1/4 3/32 .12 100 100 180 120 8320G702 8320G712 1 6.1/F 10.6/F
1/4 1/16 .09 210 160 200 150 8320G703 8320G713 2 17.1/F 11.6/F
1/4 3/32 .12 150 150 200 150 8320G704 8320G714 2 10.1/F 22.6/F
1/4 1/8 .21 100 - 200 - 8320G705 8320G715 2 17.1/F -
Specifications (Metric units)

Operating Pressure Watt Rating/
Differential (bar)s Max. Fluid Class of Coil
Pipe Orifice Kv Flow
Size Size Factor Air-Inert Gas Temp. °C Brass Body Stainless Steel Body Const. Insulation
(ins.) (mm) (m3/h) Max. AC Max. DC AC DC Catalog Number Catalog Number Ref. AC DC
NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized)
1/4 2 .08 10 9 81 48 8320G701 8320G711 1 6.1/F 10.6/F
1/4 2 .10 7 7 81 48 8320G702 8320G712 1 6.1/F 10.6/F
1/4 2 .08 14 11 92 65 8320G703 8320G713 2 17.1/F 11.6/F
1/4 2 .10 10 10 92 65 8320G704 8320G714 2 10.1/F 22.6/F
1/4 3 .18 7 - 92 - 8320G705 8320G715 2 17.1/F -

AUTOMATION
Const. Ref. 1
VALVE
Const. Ref. 2
186
Installation & Maintenance Instructions SERIES
3-WAY NORMALLY CLOSED DIRECT MOUNTED SOLENOID VALVES
FOR NAMUR ACTUATORS Ċ 1/4I NPT Ċ AIR OR INERT GAS SERVICE
8320
BRASS OR STAINLESS STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Form No.V7222R2
INSTALLATION
NOTICE: See separate solenoid installation and maintenance Check nameplate for correct catalog number, pressure, voltage,
instructions for information on: Wiring, Solenoid Temperature, frequency, and service. Never apply incompatible fluids or exceed
Causes of Improper Operation and Solenoid Replacement. pressure rating of the valve. Installation and valve maintenance to be
performed by qualified personnel.
DESCRIPTION Future Service Considerations
Series 8320 valves are 3-way normally closed direct mounted Provision should be made for performing seat leakage, external
solenoid valves designed for air or inert gas service. Valves are leakage, and operational tests on the valve with a nonhazardous,
made of rugged brass or stainless steel. Series 8320 valves are noncombustible fluid after disassembly and reassembly.
provided with a general purpose solenoid enclosure. Series Temperature Limitations
EF8320 or EV8320 are the same as Series 8320 except they are
provided with an explosionproof/watertight solenoid enclosure.
Watt Catalog Maximum Maximum
Coil
Rating Number Ambient Fluid
Class
OPERATION AC/DC
Prefix Temp. Temp.
Normally Closed (Pressure at Port 1)
None, KF,
Solenoid De-energized: Flow is from Port 2 to Port 3. Port 1 is F 125_F(51.7_C)
6.1 & 10.1 SF or SC
closed.
AC HT, KH,
Solenoid Energized: Flow is from Port 1 to Port 2. Port 3 is closed. ST or SU
H 140_F(60_C)
Breather Function: Allows for spring side of a spring return actuator to 180_F(82_C)
None, KP,
vent at all times through valve exhaust port 3. IMPORTANT: Because SP or SD
F 125_F(51.7_C)
of the breather function, the use of a metering / flow control device at 17.1
exhaust port 3 (to control actuator speed) is not recommended. AC HB, KB,
H 140_F(60_C)
SS or SV
NOTICE: No minimum operating pressure differential required.
None, HT,
10.6/11.6 KF, KH,
FLOW DIAGRAMS F or H 104_F(40_C)
DC SC, SF,
SOLENOID SOLENOID ST or SU
DE-ENERGIZED ENERGIZED 120_F(49_C)
None,
3 3 22.6
HB, KB,
SS, KP, F or H 104_F(40_C)
DC SP, SD
1 2 1 2 or SV
Positioning
Valve may be mounted in any position.
Manual Operation Mounting Solenoid Valve to NAMUR Actuator
Manual operator (optional feature) allows manual operation when Valves are supplied with a hardware kit containing two port gaskets
desired or during an electrical power outage. Depending upon valve and three sets of mounting screws; sizes: M5, .190-24 UNC-2A and
requirements, two types of manual operators are available: .190-32 UNF-2A. Align port 2 and 3 port gaskets and solenoid
Momentary Push Type (Suffix MO) Manual Operator valve on actuator. Then install two hex head screws in offset center
To engage push type manual operator, push stem at base of valve body holes on either side. Hand thread screws a few turns into actuator.
upward as far as possible. Valve will now be in the same position as Then tighten screws evenly using a 5/16I or 8 mm wrench.
when the solenoid is energized. To disengage manual operator,
release stem. Manual operator will return to original position. [24]
port gaskets (2) .95
Maintained Screw Type (Suffix MS) Manual Operator
To engage screw type manual operator, turn red knob clockwise until
it hits a stop. Valve will now be in the same position as when solenoid
is energized. Rotate knob fully counterclockwise to disengage. [32]
1.26
CAUTION: For valve to operate electrically, manual
3 2
operator must be fully disengaged.
2 mounting holes locating hole

Figure 1. Mounting Dimensions
e MM All Rights Reserved. Printed in U.S.A. Page 1 of 4
50 Hanover Road, Florham Park, New Jersey 07932 www.ascovalve.com

Piping 5. Unscrew solenoid base sub-assembly from valve body. Then
Apply pipe compound sparingly to male pipe threads only. If applied remove solenoid base gasket and core assembly with core
to valve threads the compound may enter the valve and cause spring and core guide (AC construction only). On valve
operational difficulty. Avoid pipe strain by properly supporting and constructions using an internal core spring, the spring is loose.
aligning piping. When tightening the pipe, do not use valve or 6. Unscrew end cap or optional manual operator and remove disc
solenoid as a lever. Locate wrenches applied to valve body or piping holder spring, disc holder assembly and end cap gasket from
as close as possible to connection point. valve body.
NOTE: The exhaust and/or pressure lines may be restricted to 7. All parts are now accessible for cleaning or replacement. If
control actuator speed. parts are worn or damaged, install a complete ASCO Rebuild
Kit.
CAUTION: To protect the solenoid valve, install a strainer
or filter, suitable for the service involved, in the inlet side as
close to the valve as possible. Clean periodically depending Valve Reassembly
on service conditions. See ASCO Series 8600, 8601, and 8602 1. Reassemble valve using exploded views for identification and
for strainers. placement of parts.
2. Lubricate all gaskets with DOW CORNINGr 200 Fluid
MAINTENANCE lubricant or an equivalent high-grade silicone fluid.
WARNING: To prevent the possibility of NOTE: Solenoid base gasket and end cap gasket are identical.
death, serious injury or property damage, turn off 3. Reinstall end cap gasket, disc holder assembly, disc holder
electrical power, depressurize valve, and vent spring and end cap or optional manual operator in valve body.
Torque end cap to 175 ± 25 in-lbs [19,8 ± 2,8 Nm].
fluid to a safe area before servicing the valve.
4. Position solenoid base gasket in valve body.
5. Install core assembly with core spring and guide (AC
Cleaning construction only) into solenoid base sub-assembly and
All solenoid valves should be cleaned periodically. The time between engage with valve body.
cleaning will vary depending on the medium and service conditions.
In general, if the voltage to the coil is correct, sluggish valve operation, NOTE: For valve constructions with internal type core springs, install
excessive noise, or leakage will indicate that cleaning is required. In wide end of core spring in core assembly first, closed end protrudes
the extreme case, faulty valve operation will occur and the valve may from top of core assembly.
fail to shift. Clean strainer or filter when cleaning the valve. 6. Torque solenoid base sub-assembly to 175 ± 25 in-lbs
[19,8 ± 2,8 Nm].
Preventive Maintenance 7. Reinstall valve on actuator, see Mounting Solenoid Valve To
NAMUR Actuator section.
S Keep the medium flowing through the valve as free from dirt and
foreign material as possible. 8. Reinstall solenoid and make electrical connections, see
separate instructions.
S While in service, the valve should be operated at least once a
month to ensure proper operation. 9. Install piping to valve, see Piping section.
S Depending on the medium and service condition, periodic
inspection of internal valve parts for damage or excessive wear is
recommended. Thoroughly clean all parts. If parts are worn or WARNING: To prevent the possibility of death,
damaged, install a complete ASCO Rebuild Kit. serious injury or property damage, check valve for
proper operation before returning to service. Also
Causes of Improper Operation perform internal seat and external leakage tests
S Incorrect Pressure: Check valve pressure. Pressure to valve must with a nonhazardous, noncombustible fluid.
be within range specified on nameplate.
S Excessive Leakage: Disassemble valve and install a complete
ASCO Rebuild Kit. 10. Restore line pressure and electrical power supply to valve.
11. After maintenance is completed, operate the valve a few times
Valve Disassembly (Refer to Figures 2 & 3) to be sure of proper operation. A metallic click indicates the
1. Disassemble valve in an orderly fashion using exploded view for solenoid is operating.
identification of parts.
2. Disconnect electrical hookup to solenoid and piping to valve ORDERING INFORMATION
body.
3. Remove solenoid, see separate instructions. FOR ASCO REBUILD KITS
4. Remove two hex head mounting screws from offset holes in Parts marked with an asterisk (*) in the exploded view are supplied in
valve body using a 5/16I or 8 mm wrench. Rebuild Kits. When Ordering Rebuild Kits for ASCO valves, order
the Rebuild Kit number stamped on the valve nameplate. If the
number of the kit is not visible, order by indicating the number of kits
required, and the Catalog Number and Serial Number of the valve(s)
for which they are intended.
Page 2 of 4 Form No.V7222R2

disc holder spring
Indicates that these mounting screw (2)
parts are included 5/16I or 8 mm wrench
in ASCO Rebuild Kit
body
end cap
solenoid base gasket

disc holder assembly
core spring
end cap gasket
(see note)
solenoid base
sub-assembly
body gasket (2)
core assembly
disc holder spring

mounting screw (2)
5/16I or 8 mm wrench
body
end cap
core guide
(AC only) disc holder assembly
end cap gasket
AC Construction
body gasket (2)
core assembly
with spring
DC Construction
Note:
Wide end of spring in core first,
solenoid base closed end protrudes from top of
sub-assembly
core assembly.
Figure 2. Series 8320 valves without solenoids.
Form No.V7222R2 Page 3 of 4

Indicates that these
parts are included disc holder spring
in ASCO Rebuild Kit
mounting screw (2)
manual operator
body push type
(optional feature)
disc holder assembly
core spring
(see note) end cap gasket
solenoid base
sub-assembly
body gasket (2)
core assembly
disc holder spring

mounting screw (2)
body manual operator
solenoid base gasket screw type
(optional feature)
core guide
(AC only) disc holder assembly
end cap gasket
AC Construction
body gasket (2)
core assembly
with spring
DC Construction
solenoid base Note:

sub-assembly
Wide end of spring in core first,
closed end protrudes from top of
core assembly.
Figure 3. Series 8320 valves with optional manual operator.
Page 4 of 4 Form No.V7222R2

TAB 7
type_e_sel_dim Page 23 Friday, July 30, 2004 1:29 PM
SELECTION/DIMENSIONS
D-LOK
Type E PIllow Block - Inch
2-BOLT BASE
GRAY IRON CAST STEEL
SHAFT WEIGHT SHAFT
PART PART PART PART WEIGHT
SIZEI LBS SIZE
NUMBER NAME NUMBER NAME LBS
NCHES # (APPROX) INCHES #
1-3/16 023000 P2B-E-103R 4 1-3/16 023047+ SP2B-E-103R 4
1-1/4 023001 P2B-E-104R 4 1-1/4 023048+ SP2B-E-104R 4
1-3/8 023002 P2B-E-106R 7 1-3/8 023049+ SP2B-E-106R 7
1-7/16 023003 P2B-E-107R 7 1-7/16 023050+ SP2B-E-107R 7
1-1/2 023004 P2B-E-108R 10 1-1/2 023051+ SP2B-E-108R 10
Type E Family
1-5/8 023005 P2B-E-110R 10 1-5/8 023052+ SP2B-E-110R 10
1-11/16 023006 P2B-E-111R 10 1-11/16 023053+ SP2B-E-111R 10
1-3/4 023007 P2B-E-112R 12 1-3/4 023054+ SP2B-E-112R 11
1-7/8 023008 P2B-E-114R 12 1-7/8 023055+ SP2B-E-114R 11
1-15/16 023009 P2B-E-115R 12 1-15/16 023056+ SP2B-E-115R 11
2 023010 P2B-E-200R 12 2 023057+ SP2B-E-200R 11
2-3/16 023011 P2B-E-203R 15 2-3/16 023058+ SP2B-E-203R 14
2-1/4 023012 P2B-E-204R 21 2-1/4 023059+ SP2B-E-204R 19
2-7/16 023013 P2B-E-207R 20 2-7/16 023060 SP2B-E-207R 19
2-1/2 023014 P2B-E-208R 20 2-1/2 023061+ SP2B-E-208R 19
2-11/16 023015 P2B-E-211R 29 2-11/16 023062+ SP2B-E-211R 26
2-3/4 023016 P2B-E-212R 28 2-3/4 023063+ SP2B-E-212R 26
2-15/16 023017 P2B-E-215R 27 2-15/16 023064 SP2B-E-215R 26
Speciality Tapered
3 023018 P2B-E-300R 27 3 023065+ SP2B-E-300R 26
3-3/16 023019 P2B-E-303R 48 3-3/16 023066+ SP2B-E-303R 44
3-1/4 023020 P2B-E-304R 47 3-1/4 023067+ SP2B-E-304R 44
3-7/16 023021 P2B-E-307R 46 3-7/16 023068 SP2B-E-307R 44
3-1/2 023022 P2B-E-308R 45 3-1/2 023069+ SP2B-E-308R 44
# Consult DODGE For Sizes Not Listed # Consult DODGE For Sizes Not Listed
+ Non-Stock - Consult DODGE For Delivery + Non-Stock - Consult DODGE For Delivery
SHAFT F
D D
SIZE A B C BOLT G H J J1 L M
MIN MAX
(Inches) DIA
1-3/16
2-3/4 6 1-7/8 4-3/4 4-13/16 1/2 19/32 7/8 3 3-9/32 2-1/4 1-1/2
1-1/4
1-3/8
3 7-3/8 2-1/8 5-5/8 5-7/8 1/2 3/4 1-1/8 3-3/4 4 2-3/4 1-7/8
1-7/16
1-1/2
S-2000
1-5/8 3-3/8 7-7/8 2-3/8 6-1/8 6-3/8 1/2 3/4 1-1/4 4-1/4 4-15/32 3-3/16 2-1/8
1-11/16
1-3/4
1-7/8
3-1/2 8-7/8 2-1/2 6-7/8 7-1/8 5/8 7/8 1-5/16 4-1/2 4-11/16 3-7/16 2-1/4
1-15/16
2
2-3/16 3-3/4 9-5/8 2-5/8 7-5/8 7-7/8 5/8 7/8 1-1/2 5 5-11/64 3-3/4 2-1/2
2-1/4
2-7/16 4 10-1/2 2-7/8 8-3/8 8-5/8 5/8 7/8 1-5/8 5-1/2 5-5/8 4-1/16 2-3/4
2-1/2
2-11/16
2-3/4
4-1/2 12 3 9-5/16 9-11/16 3/4 1 1-7/8 6-1/4 6-11/32 4-23/32 3-1/8
2-15/16
UNISPHERE II
3
3-3/16
3-1/4
5 14 3-1/2 10-13/16 11-3/16 7/8 1-3/16 2-1/4 7-1/2 7-1/2 5-1/2 3-3/4
3-7/16
3-1/2
NOTE: All sizes use a 1/8-27 NPT hydraulic grease fitting
FEATURES/BENEFITS SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE SELECTION

PAGE B6-3 PAGE B6-8 PAGE B6-10 PAGE B6-11
B6-23
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
DODGE TYPE E BEARINGS
for 13/16" to 3" and 35mm to 75mm Bore
NSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS entrance of foreign material. In the higher speed ranges too
much grease will cause overheating — see “High Speed
WARNING Operation.” In the lower speed ranges it is advisable to add
To ensure that drive is not unexpectedly started, turn off extra grease to a new bearing before putting into operation.
and lock out or tag power source before proceeding. Bearings should be greased as often as necessary (daily if
Failure to observe these precautions could result in required) to maintain a slight leakage at the seals.
bodily injury.
Average Operation — This bearing has been greased at the
1. Clean shaft bore of bearing. Lubricate with light oil or factory and is ready to run. The following table is a general
antiseize compound. guide for relubrication. However, certain conditions may
2. Slip bearing in position. require a change of lubricating periods as dictated by
3. Bolt bearing to support, using shims where necessary to experience. See “High Speed Operation” and “Operating in
align bearing. Presence of Dust, Water, or Corrosive Vapors.”
4. Tighten setscrews to the torque values shown on Table 1. Operating Temperature — Abnormal bearing temperature
5. The effort required to turn the shaft should be the same may indicate faulty lubrication. Normal temperature may range
before and after bolting bearing to the support.
from “cool to warm to the touch” up to a point “too hot to touch
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS for more than a few seconds,” depending on bearing size and
Storage or Special Shutdown — If exposed to wet or dusty speed, and surrounding conditions. Unusually high
conditions or to corrosive vapors, extra protection is temperature accompanied by excessive leakage of grease
necessary. Add grease until it shows at the seals; rotate the indicates too much grease. High temperature with no grease
bearing to distribute grease; cover the bearing. After storage showing at the seals, particularly if the bearing seems noisy,
or idle period, add a little fresh grease before running. usually indicates too little grease. Normal temperature and a
slight showing of grease at the seals indicate proper
High Speed Operation — In the higher speed ranges too lubrication.
much grease will cause overheating. The amount of grease
that the bearing will take for a particular high speed application Kind of Grease — Many ordinary cup greases will
can only be determined by experience — see “Operating disintegrate at speeds far below those at which DODGE
Temperature” below. If excess grease in the bearing caused bearings will operate successfully if proper grease is used.
overheating, it will be necessary to remove grease fitting (also DODGE bearings have been lubricated at the factory with
drain plug when furnished) to permit excess grease to escape. No. 2 consistency lithium complex-base grease which is
The bearing has been greased at the factory and is ready to suitable for normal operating conditions. Relubricate with
run. When establishing a relubrication schedule, note that a lithium complex-base grease or a grease which is compatible
small amount of grease at frequent intervals is preferable to a with original lubricant and suitable for roller bearing service. In
large amount at infrequent intervals. unusual or doubtful cases the recommendation of a reputable
grease manufacturer should be secured.
Operation in Presence of Dust, Water or Corrosive Vapors
— Under these conditions the bearing should contain as much Special Operating Conditions — Refer acid, chemical,
grease as speed will permit, since a full bearing with extreme or other special operating conditions to
consequent slight leakage is the best protection against DODGE/Baldor Electric Company.
TABLE 1 Lubrication Guide

Set Screw Torque Table Read Preceding Paragraphs Before Establishing Lubrication Schedule.
Shaft Size Set Screw Size Tightening Torque Hours Suggested Lubrication Period in Weeks
1 3/16"–1 11/16" 5
/16 –18 165 in.–lbs. Run 1 to 251 to 501 to 751 to 1001 to 1501 to 2001 to 2501 to
3 per 250 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
1¾"–2½" /8 –16 290 in.–lbs. Day RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM
2 11/16 "–3" 1
/2 –13 620 in.–lbs. 8 12 12 10 7 5 4 3 2
35–40MM M8 17.8NM 16 12 7 5 4 2 2 2 1
45–65MM M10 35NM 24 10 5 3 2 1 1 1 1
70–75MM M12 57NM
WARNING: Because of the possible danger to persons(s) or property from accidents which may result from the improper use of products, it is
important that correct procedures be followed: Products must be used in accordance with the engineering information specified in the catalog.
Proper installation, maintenance and operation procedures must be observed. The instructions in the instruction manuals must be followed.
Inspections should be made as necessary to assure safe operation under prevailing conditions. Proper guards and other suitable safety devices
or procedures as may be desirable or as may be specified in safety codes should be provided, and are neither provided by Baldor Electric
Company nor are the responsibility of Baldor Electric Company. This unit and its associated equipment must be installed, adjusted and
maintained by qualified personnel who are familiar with the construction and operation of all equipment in the system and the potential hazards
involved. When risk to persons or property may be involved, a holding device must be an integral part of the driven equipment beyond the speed
reducer output shaft.
35mm to 75mm Type E Bearings
Parts for 35MM to 75MM Type E Pillow Block Bearings

Item 24 32 12 14 18 16** *** *** *** 20 34 +
Shaft Housing Cone* Cup Collar* Snap Shim 0.004" 0.006" 0.015" Seal Set Lube
Size Ring Pack Shim Shim Shim Screw Fitting
35 MM 061320 389740 390751 046120 401004 391102 427071 427081 427091 061356 400713 405601
40 MM 061321 389741 390755 046121 401008 391103 427072 427082 427092 061357 400713 405601
45 MM 061322 389742 403006 046122 401012 391104 427073 427083 427093 061358 400708 405601
50 MM 061322 389743 403006 046122 401012 391104 427073 427083 427093 061358 400708 405601
55 MM 061323 389744 390762 046123 401016 391105 427074 427084 427094 061359 400709 405601
60 MM 061324 389745 390766 046124 401020 391106 427075 427085 427095 061360 400709 405601
65 MM 061324 389746 390766 046124 401020 391106 427075 427085 427095 061360 400709 405601
70 MM 061325 389747 390771 046125 401024 391107 427076 427086 427096 061361 400710 405601
75 MM 061325 389748 390771 046125 401024 391107 427076 427086 427096 061361 400710 405601
Quantity 1 1 2 2 2 1** *** *** *** 2 4 1
Per
* 65° Set Screw Angle

** Consists of one each of 0.004", 0.006" and 0.015" shims
*** These parts make up shim pack
+ Not shown on drawing
World Headquarters
P.O. Box 2400, Fort Smith, AR 72902-2400 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 479.646.4711, Fax (1) 479.648.5792, International Fax (1) 479.648.5895
Baldor - Dodge
6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 864.297.4800, Fax: (1) 864.281.2433
www.baldor.com
© Baldor Electric Company All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
IM 499791 12/07-K-00M
TAB 8
sleeve_sel_dim Page 46 Friday, July 30, 2004 11:06 AM
SELECTION/DIMENSIONS
IMPERIAL - ISAF
Sleeve Bearings - Bronze-Bushed

15/16” THRU 2-15/16” SPLIT BRONZE JOURNAL BEARING
J
UNIFIED
M
H
(Min-Max.)
D C
F
B A
Plummer
Shaft D
Part No. Description Wt. A B C
Size Min. Max.
1-15/16 005070 P2B-BZSP-115 9 3-7/8 7-1/2 2-1/2 5-15/16 6-1/16
2-3/16 005073 P2B-BZSP-203 12 4-3/8 8-1/2 2-3/4 6-1/4 6-3/4
2-7/16 005076 P2B-BZSP-207 15 4-7/8 9-1/4 3 6-7/8 7-3/8
2-11/16 005079 P2B-BZSP-211 20 5-3/8 10 3-1/4 7-1/2 8
2-15/16 005082 P2B-BZSP-215 24 6 10-3/4 3-1/2 8-1/4 8-3/4
Sleeve Bearing
Shaft F Grease Cups #

G H J M
Size Bolt Pipe Tap No. Req’d Size
1-15/16 5/8 13/16 15/16 3-1/2 1-3/4 1/4 1 0
2-3/16 5/8 1 1 3-7/8 1-7/8 3/8 1 2
2-7/16 5/8 1 1-1/8 4-1/4 2-1/8 3/8 1 2
2-11/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-3/16 4-9/16 2-1/4 3/8 1 2
2-15/16 3/4 1-1/8 1-5/16 5 2-1/2 3/8 1 2
# Grease cups or pressure fittings may be obtained thru our distributors; one required per bearing.
Note: All sizes have 2 bolt base and 2 cap bolts.
♦ No Published Metric Dimensions For This Product

SLEEVEOIL
SLEEVE - FEATURES/BENEFITS SLEEVE - SPECIFICATION/HTO SLEEVE-NOMENCLATURE SLEEVE - SELECTION

PAGE B13-2 PAGE B13-4 PAGE B13-5 PAGE B13-6
B13-46
IMPERIAL Adapter Mounted DODGE ISAF
Pillow Blocks and IP Unitized Spherical
Roller Bearing Pillow Blocks, Flanges,
5) Shipping
Piloted Flanges &Take-Ups

If BLO units are supplied with shafting as an assembly from Baldor Electric Company they will arrive without oil. Units
need to be filled with oil prior to start up to the static oil level indicated as the center of the static oil sight window (P/N
22) located on the side of the housing. The following are approximate oil quantity in liters and should only be used as
GENERAL
ref.INFORMATION 2. Before mounting bearing to shaft, remove
lockplate from bearing and turn locknut
DODGE ISAF and IP Spherical Roller Bearing
counterclockwise one to two turns to allow adapter
mounted units incorporate a unique way ofUnit sealing,
Size Oil Qty
to (Liters)
expand fully. The unit is now shaft ready. Slide
mounting, and dismounting the unit to and from the
BLO-40A 0.9 Lbearing to the desire position on the shaft.
the
shaft. The patented sealing system (Pat. BLO-45A
#5,908,249) 0.9 L
has proven effective in protecting the internal
BLO-50Abearing 1.5 L
components, due to its constant pressure, BLO-55A
while still 1.5 L
Keep weight off bearing during
BLO-60A The
allowing a full + or –1 degree of misalignment.. 2.2 L
BLO-65A mounting
2.2 L via a sling or jacks.
patented IMPERIAL system (Pat. #5,489,156) pulls the
BLO-70A 3.0 L
bearing on the adapter based upon a predetermined
BLO-75A 3.0 L
clockwise rotation of the locknut. Dismounting is
BLO-80A 4.0 L
accomplished via counterclockwise rotation BLO-85A of the 4.0 L
locknut. Keep in mind that the thread on the locknut as
BLO-90A 6.0 L
well as on the adapter is a left-hand threadBLO-95A 6.0 L
BLO-100A 6.0 L
WARNING BLO-110A 6.0 L
To ensure that drive is not unexpectedly started,
BLO-120A 10.0 L
BLO-130A
turn-off and lock out or tag power source before 18.0 L
proceeding. Failure to observe these
precautions could result in bodily injury.
If BLO units are mounted with Fan wheel and coupling assembly’s ship unit with oil fill volume of 1/8 of the listed
volume in table above. Upon installation drain oil from housing and follow above oil fill instructions.
INSPECTION
6) Maintenance
Inspect shaft. Ensure that the shaft is smooth, straight,
clean, andCheck oil level
within on regular
commercial intervals inInspect
tolerance. static condition.
unit.
Do not allow unit to be exposed to any dirt or moisture.
Drain oil after first 300 to 500 hours of operation and examine condition of oil. The test results will be an indication for
Picture 1Hot gas fans after 1,000
the relubrication interval. Fresh air fans require oil change after 2,000 hours of operating.
hours.
MOUNTING General recommendations are 5,000 hours for fresh air fans and 2,000 hours for hot gas fans depending on
findings during initial oil testing. 3. Proper locking of this unit to the shaft is based on
Install the non-expansion unit first. turning the locknut clockwise a predetermined
number of degrees shown for each bore size on
1. Apply a coating of light oil or other rust inhibitor to Table 1.
the adapter area of the shaft.
WARNING: Because of the possible danger to persons(s) or property from accidents which may result from the improper use of products, it is
important that correct procedures be followed. Products must be used in accordance with the engineering information specified in the catalog.
Proper installation, maintenance and operation procedures must be observed. The instructions in the instruction manuals must be followed.
Inspections should be made as necessary to assure safe operation under prevailing conditions. Proper guards and other suitable safety devices or
procedures as may be desirable or as may be specified in safety codes should be provided, and are neither provided by Baldor Electric nor are the
responsibility of Baldor Electric. This unit and its associated equipment must be installed, adjusted and maintained by qualified personnel who are
familiar with the construction and operation of all equipment in the system and the potential hazards involved. When risk to persons or property
may be involved, a holding device must be an integral part of the driven equipment beyond the speed reducer output shaft.
www.baldor.com www.ptplace.com www.dodge-pt.com www.reliance.com
Baldor Electric Company Headquarters

P.O. Box 2400, Fort Smith, AR 72902-2400 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 479.648.5792, Fax (1) 479.648.5792, International Fax (1) 479.648.5895
DODGE/Reliance Division
6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 U.S.A., Ph: (1) 864.297.4800, FAX: (1) 864.281.2433
Copyright © 2007 Baldor Electric Company All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
04/07 5C-K This material is not intended to provide operational instructions. Appropriate instruction
manuals and precautions should be studied prior to installation, operation or maintenance
of equipment.
TAB 9
Double Reduction
For Compact Light Weight Aluminum

Worm Gear Drives
See Spartan™ Worm Gear Drives
Section C
For Sub-Fractional Worm Gearmotors

See Mina-Gear™ Gearmotors
Section P
For High Efficiency

Right Angle Gear Drives
See Poweratio® 2000
Helical Bevel and Helical Worm Units
Sections K & L
For Available Electric Motors

Section H
HUB CITY DOUBLE REDUCTION WORM GEAR DRIVES
Model Index
SERIES
1301 1304
1300 PAGE PAGE
B-56,B-57 B-62,B-63
1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1809 1810

1800 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
B-56,B-57 B-58,B-59 B-60,B-61 B-62,B-63 B-64,B-65 B-66,B-67 B-72,B-73 B-74,B-75
2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2109 2110

2601 2602 2603 2604 2605 2606 2609 2610

3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3206 3207 3208 3209 3210
3200 PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
B-56,B-57 B-58,B-59 B-60,B-61 B-62,B-63 B-64,B-65 B-66,B-67 B-68,B-69 B-70,B-71 B-72,B-73 B-74,B-75
3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807 3808 3809 3810
4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508 4509 4510
5201 5202 5203 5204 5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210
6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010
60D PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
7001 7002 7004 7005 7007 7008 7009 7010

70D PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
8001 8004 8007 8008 8009 8010

80D PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
B-56,B-57 B-62,B-63 B-68,B-69 B-70,B-71 B-72,B-73 B-74,B-75
For Accessories Refer to Page B-91 Thru B-98
Universal Side Mounting Kits NEMA "C" Flange Fan Kits & Torque
Base Kits Adaptor Kits Thermal Block Kits Arm Kit
LUBRICATION AND MOUNTING POSITIONS

Follow the lubrication instructions that are furnished for the Primary, and Final Drive of your Hub City Double Reduction Worm Gear Reducer.
The two units that make up the Double Reduction Assembly have independent oil reservoirs and each must be filled to the specified level of oil
indicated in the lubrication instructions.
CAUTION — The Double Reduction Worm Gear Reducer may be mounted in virtually any position. However, if the final mounting position is such
that any of the shafts is in a vertical position, it is suggested that you consult the factory or your Hub City Distributor for special lubrication
instructions.
B-48 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

FOR MOTOR SELECTION

REFER TO SECTION H S e r i e s 13 0 0 & 18 0 0 R a t i n g s
SERIES 1300 SERIES 1300 SERIES 1800 SERIES 1800
MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL
R SERVICE FACTOR DESIGN OPTION R SERVICE FACTOR DESIGN OPTION
A Ratio A Ratio
T Combination 1.00 Basic Unit
T Combination 1.00 Basic Unit
I
O
Output Pri- Sec-
R.P.M. mary ondary
Input
H.P.
Output
Torque
Eff.
%
Input
H.P.
Output
Torque
I
O
Output Pri- Sec-
R.P.M. mary ondary
Input
H.P.
Output
Torque
Eff.
%
Input
H.P.
Output
Torque B
1750 RPM INPUT SPEED (HIGH SPEED SHAFT)
50 35.0 5 10 .250 328 72.9 .250 328 50 35.0 5 10 .509 686 74.9 .509 686
75 23.3 5 15 .189 342 66.9 .189 342 75 23.3 5 15 .403 753 69.2 .403 753
100 17.5 5 20 .155 354 63.6 .155 354 100 17.5 5 20 .335 797 66.1 .335 797
150 11.7 10 15 .114 354 57.6 .114 354 150 11.7 10 15 .252 815 59.9 .252 815
200 8.75 10 20 .0937 365 54.4 .0937 365 200 8.75 10 20 .201 818 56.6 .201 818
250 7.00 5 50 .0804 312 43.1 .0804 312 250 7.00 5 50 .170 708 46.2 .170 708
300 5.83 20 15 .0685 359 48.5 .0685 359 300 5.83 20 15 .148 805 50.3 .148 805
400 4.38 20 20 .0569 372 45.4 .0569 372 400 4.38 20 20 .123 834 47.2 .123 834
500 3.50 50 10 .0481 328 37.9 .0481 328 500 3.50 50 10 .104 736 39.4 .104 736
600 2.92 20 30 .0486 370 35.2 .0486 370 600 2.92 20 30 .103 829 37.1 .103 829
750 2.33 50 15 .0410 359 32.4 .0410 359 750 2.33 50 15 .0869 805 34.3 .0869 805
1000 1.75 50 20 .0345 372 29.9 .0345 372 1000 1.75 50 20 .0728 834 31.8 .0728 834
1200 1.46 40 30 .0333 370 25.7 .0333 370 1200 1.46 40 30 .0695 829 27.6 .0695 829
1500 1.17 50 30 .0307 370 22.3 .0307 370 1500 1.17 50 30 .0642 829 23.9 .0642 829
1800 .972 60 30 .0290 370 19.7 .0290 370 1800 .972 60 30 .0612 829 20.9 .0612 829
Double Reduction
2000 .875 50 40 .0255 365 19.9 .0255 365 2000 .875 50 40 .0536 830 21.5 .0536 830
2400 .729 60 40 .0240 365 17.6 .0240 365 2400 .729 60 40 .0511 830 18.8 .0511 830
3000 .583 60 50 .0196 312 14.7 .0196 312 3000 .583 60 50 .0415 708 15.8 .0415 708
3600 .486 60 60 .0155 253 12.6 .0155 253 3600 .486 60 60 .0327 573 13.5 .0327 573

50 23.0 5 10 .169 320 69.3 .169 320 50 23.0 5 10 .363 710 71.4 .363 710
75 15.3 5 15 .136 350 62.7 .136 350 75 15.3 5 15 .291 778 65.1 .291 778
100 11.5 5 20 .112 363 59.2 .112 363 100 11.5 5 20 .250 844 61.7 .250 844
150 7.67 10 15 .0811 358 53.7 .0811 358 150 7.67 10 15 .175 801 55.7 .175 801
200 5.75 10 20 .0673 371 50.3 .0673 371 200 5.75 10 20 .145 831 52.4 .145 831
250 4.60 5 50 .0593 312 38.4 .0593 312 250 4.60 5 50 .125 708 41.2 .125 708
300 3.83 20 15 .0484 359 45.1 .0484 359 300 3.83 20 15 .105 805 46.7 .105 805
400 2.88 20 20 .0404 372 42.0 .0404 372 400 2.88 20 20 .0871 834 43.7 .0871 834
500 2.30 50 10 .0346 328 34.6 .0346 328 500 2.30 50 10 .0752 736 35.7 .0752 736
600 1.92 20 30 .0352 370 32.0 .0352 370 600 1.92 20 30 .0748 829 33.7 .0748 829
750 1.53 50 15 .0297 359 29.4 .0297 359 750 1.53 50 15 .0642 805 30.5 .0642 805
1000 1.15 50 20 .0250 372 27.1 .0250 372 1000 1.15 50 20 .0542 834 28.1 .0542 834
1200 .958 40 30 .0248 370 22.7 .0248 370 1200 .958 40 30 .0525 829 24.0 .0525 829
1500 .767 50 30 .0227 370 19.8 .0227 370 1500 .767 50 30 .0487 829 20.7 .0487 829
1800 .639 60 30 .0212 370 17.7 .0212 370 1800 .639 60 30 .0459 829 18.3 .0459 829
2000 .575 50 40 .0188 365 17.7 .0188 365 2000 .575 50 40 .0409 830 18.5 .0409 830
2400 .479 60 40 .0176 365 15.8 .0176 365 2400 .479 60 40 .0387 830 16.3 .0387 830
3000 .383 60 50 .0146 312 13.0 .0146 312 3000 .383 60 50 .0317 708 13.6 .0317 708
3600 .319 60 60 .0116 253 11.1 .0116 253 3600 .319 60 60 .0250 573 11.6 .0250 573

50 17.0 5 10 .131 324 66.7 .131 324 50 17.0 5 10 .283 721 68.8 .283 721
75 11.3 5 15 .106 354 59.9 .106 354 75 11.3 5 15 .228 790 62.2 .228 790
100 8.5 5 20 .0876 367 56.5 .0876 367 100 8.5 5 20 .188 819 58.8 .188 819
150 5.67 10 15 .0630 359 51.2 .0630 359 150 5.67 10 15 .136 805 53.1 .136 805
200 4.25 10 20 .0527 372 47.6 .0527 372 200 4.25 10 20 .113 834 49.8 .113 834
250 3.40 5 50 .0474 312 35.5 .0474 312 250 3.40 5 50 .101 708 38.0 .101 708
300 2.83 20 15 .0385 359 41.9 .0385 359 300 2.83 20 15 .0815 805 44.4 .0815 805
400 2.12 20 20 .0324 372 38.7 .0324 372 400 2.12 20 20 .0681 834 41.3 .0681 834
500 1.70 50 10 .0271 328 32.6 .0271 328 500 1.70 50 10 .0596 736 33.3 .0596 736
600 1.42 20 30 .0221 370 37.6 .0221 370 600 1.42 20 30 .0595 829 31.3 .0595 829
750 1.13 50 15 .0235 359 27.5 .0235 359 750 1.13 50 15 .0513 805 28.2 .0513 805
1000 .850 50 20 .0198 372 25.3 .0198 372 1000 .850 50 20 .0433 834 26.0 .0433 834
1200 .708 40 30 .0200 370 20.8 .0200 370 1200 .708 40 30 .0429 829 21.7 .0429 829
1500 .567 50 30 .0181 370 18.4 .0181 370 1500 .567 50 30 .0392 829 19.0 .0392 829
1800 .472 60 30 .0168 370 16.5 .0168 370 1800 .472 60 30 .0365 829 17.0 .0365 829
2000 .425 50 40 .0150 365 16.4 .0150 365 2000 .425 50 40 .0331 830 16.9 .0331 830
2400 .354 60 40 .0139 365 14.8 .0139 365 2400 .354 60 40 .0307 830 15.2 .0307 830
3000 .283 60 50 .0115 312 12.2 .0115 312 3000 .283 60 50 .0253 708 12.6 .0253 708
3600 .236 60 60 .0091 253 10.4 .0091 253 3600 .236 60 60 .0201 573 10.7 .0201 573
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT — MODELS 1301 AND 1304 225 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION.
MODELS 1801 AND 1804 400 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 1802, 1803, 1805, AND 1806 NOT APPLICABLE.
MODELS 1809 AND 1810 300 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. THRUST* UP OR DOWN 450 LBS.
*OHL and Thrust values shown are independent functions and cannot be applied simultaneously. Refer applications with combined OHL and Thrust to Hub City Customer Service Department.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-49

FOR MOTOR SELECTION

S e r i e s 210 0 & 2 6 0 0 R a t i n g s REFER TO SECTION H

MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL RATING
R SERVICE FACTOR DESIGN OPTION R SERVICE FACTOR DESIGN OPTION
A Ratio A Ratio With
Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube
T T
I Output Pri- Sec- Input Output Eff. Input Output I Output Pri- Sec- Input Output Eff. Input Output Input Output
O R.P.M. mary ondary H.P. Torque % H.P. Torque O R.P.M. mary ondary H.P. Torque % H.P. Torque H.P. Torque

50 35.0 5 10 .769 1050 75.8 .769 1050 50 35.0 5 10 1.10 1580 79.6 1.01 1454 1.10 1580
75 23.3 5 15 .593 1120 69.9 .593 1120 75 23.3 5 15 1.02 2020 73.0 1.01 2000 1.02 2020
100 17.5 5 20 .503 1220 67.2 .503 1220 100 17.5 5 20 .899 2300 71.0 .899 2300
150 11.7 10 15 .364 1190 60.5 .364 1190 150 11.7 10 15 .625 2160 64.0 .625 2160
200 8.75 10 20 .287 1190 57.5 .287 1190 200 8.75 10 20 .551 2450 61.7 .551 2450
250 7.00 5 50 .210 934 49.3 .210 934 250 7.00 5 50 .350 1780 56.5 .350 1780 N
300 5.83 20 15 .224 1220 50.5 .224 1220 300 5.83 20 15 .383 2230 53.9 .383 2230 O
400 4.38 20 20 .173 1190 47.8 .173 1190 400 4.38 20 20 .337 2510 51.7 .337 2510 T
500 3.50 50 10 .167 1190 39.7 .167 1190 500 3.50 50 10 .224 1770 44.0 .224 1770 R
600 2.92 20 30 .156 1250 37.1 .156 1250 600 2.92 20 30 .260 2290 40.7 .260 2290 E
750 2.33 50 15 .134 1220 33.7 .134 1220 750 2.33 50 15 .224 2200 36.4 .224 2200 Q
1000 1.75 50 20 .105 1190 31.6 .105 1190 1000 1.75 50 20 .199 2510 35.0 .199 2510 U
I
1200 1.46 40 30 .106 1250 27.2 .106 1250 1200 1.46 40 30 .177 2290 30.0 .177 2290
R
1500 1.17 50 30 .0985 1250 23.5 .0985 1250 1500 1.17 50 30 .168 2370 26.1 .168 2370
E
1800 .972 60 30 .0936 1250 20.6 .0936 1250 1800 .972 60 30 .154 2290 23.0 .154 2290
D
2000 .875 50 40 .0771 1200 21.6 .0771 1200 2000 .875 50 40 .132 2380 25.1 .132 2380
2400 .729 60 40 .0731 1200 19.0 .0731 1200 2400 .729 60 40 .125 2380 22.1 .125 2380
3000 .583 60 50 .0509 934 17.0 .0509 934 3000 .583 60 50 .0788 1780 20.9 .0788 1780
3600 .486 60 60 .0425 761 13.8 .0425 761 3600 .486 60 60 .0776 1500 14.9 .0776 1500

50 23.0 5 10 .555 1100 72.3 .555 1100 50 23.0 5 10 .845 1790 76.8 .845 1790
75 15.3 5 15 .432 1170 65.9 .432 1170 75 15.3 5 15 .753 2150 69.3 .753 2150
100 11.5 5 20 .345 1190 62.9 .345 1190 100 11.5 5 20 .656 2410 67.0 .656 2410
150 7.67 10 15 .260 1200 56.1 .260 1200 150 7.67 10 15 .452 2220 59.7 .452 2220
200 5.75 10 20 .204 1190 53.2 .204 1190 200 5.75 10 20 .397 2500 57.4 .397 2500
250 4.60 5 50 .154 934 44.3 .154 934 250 4.60 5 50 .252 1780 56.1 .252 1780 N
300 3.83 20 15 .167 1280 46.8 .167 1280 300 3.83 20 15 .272 2230 49.9 .272 2230 O
400 2.88 20 20 .123 1190 44.0 .123 1190 400 2.88 20 20 .250 2640 48.2 .250 2640 T
500 2.30 50 10 .116 1150 36.1 .116 1150 500 2.30 50 10 .210 2320 40.3 .210 2320 R
600 1.92 20 30 .114 1250 33.4 .114 1250 600 1.92 20 30 .189 2290 36.8 .189 2290 E
750 1.53 50 15 .100 1220 29.6 .100 1220 750 1.53 50 15 .168 2280 33.0 .168 2280 Q
1000 1.15 50 20 .0770 1190 28.2 .0770 1190 1000 1.15 50 20 .144 2510 31.7 .144 2510 U
I
1200 .958 40 30 .0802 1250 23.7 .0802 1250 1200 .958 40 30 .132 2290 26.4 .132 2290
R
1500 .767 50 30 .0742 1250 20.5 .0742 1250 1500 .767 50 30 .121 2290 23.0 .121 2290
E
1800 .639 60 30 .0700 1250 18.1 .0700 1250 1800 .639 60 30 .114 2290 20.3 .114 2290
D
2000 .575 50 40 .0573 1200 19.1 .0573 1200 2000 .575 50 40 .0987 2380 22.0 .0987 2380
2400 .479 60 40 .0540 1200 16.9 .0540 1200 2400 .479 60 40 .0928 2380 19.5 .0928 2380
3000 .383 60 50 .0386 934 14.7 .0386 934 3000 .383 60 50 .0570 1780 19.0 .0570 1780
3600 .319 60 60 .0324 761 11.9 .0324 761 3600 .319 60 60 .0589 1500 12.9 .0589 1500

50 17.0 5 10 .433 1120 69.8 .433 1120 50 17.0 5 10 .677 1870 74.5 .677 1870
75 11.3 5 15 .340 1190 62.9 .340 1190 75 11.3 5 15 .544 2160 66.5 .544 2160
100 8.5 5 20 .269 1190 59.7 .269 1190 100 8.5 5 20 .515 2450 64.2 .515 2450
150 5.67 10 15 .206 1220 53.2 .206 1220 150 5.67 10 15 .353 2230 56.8 .353 2230
200 4.25 10 20 .160 1190 50.3 .160 1190 200 4.25 10 20 .311 2510 54.4 .311 2510
250 3.40 5 50 .123 934 40.9 .123 934 250 3.40 5 50 .198 1780 48.4 .198 1780 N
300 2.83 20 15 .124 1220 44.1 .124 1220 300 2.83 20 15 .213 2230 47.0 .213 2230 O
400 2.12 20 20 .0976 1190 41.1 .0976 1190 400 2.12 20 20 .187 2510 45.3 .187 2510 T
500 1.70 50 10 .0928 1152 33.5 .0928 1152 500 1.70 50 10 .170 2380 37.7 .170 2380 R
600 1.42 20 30 .0909 1250 30.9 .0909 1250 600 1.42 20 30 .151 2290 34.0 .151 2290 E
750 1.13 50 15 .0819 1220 26.8 .0819 1220 750 1.13 50 15 .131 2230 30.5 .131 2230 Q
1000 .850 50 20 .0617 1190 26.0 .0617 1190 1000 .850 50 20 .117 2510 29.0 .117 2510 U
I
1200 .708 40 30 .0653 1250 21.5 .0653 1250 1200 .708 40 30 .107 2290 24.1 .107 2290
R
1500 .567 50 30 .0601 1250 18.7 .0601 1250 1500 .567 50 30 .0985 2290 20.9 .0985 2290
E
1800 .472 60 30 .0561 1250 16.7 .0561 1250 1800 .472 60 30 .0927 2290 18.5 .0927 2290
D
2000 .425 50 40 .0465 1200 17.4 .0465 1200 2000 .425 50 40 .0798 2380 20.1 .0798 2380
2400 .354 60 40 .0438 1200 15.4 .0438 1200 2400 .354 60 40 .0747 2380 17.9 .0747 2380
3000 .283 60 50 .0311 934 13.5 .0311 934 3000 .283 60 50 .0473 1780 16.9 .0473 1780
3600 .236 60 60 .0264 761 10.8 .0264 761 3600 .236 60 60 .0484 1500 11.6 .0484 1500
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT — MODELS 2101 AND 2104 550 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 2102, 2103, 2105, AND 2106 NOT APPLICABLE.
MODELS 2601 AND 2604 850 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 2602, 2603, 2605, AND 2606 NOT APPLICABLE.
B-50 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

FOR MOTOR SELECTION

REFER TO SECTION H Series 3200 & 3800 Ratings
MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL RATING MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL RATING
R SERVICE FACT. DESIGN OPTION R SERVICE FACT. DESIGN OPTION
A Ratio With A Ratio With
Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube
T T
I
O
Output Pri- Sec- Input
R.P.M. mary ondary H.P.
Output Eff.
Torque %
Input Output Input Output
H.P. Torque H.P. Torque
I
O
Output Eff.
Torque %
H.P. Torque H.P. Torque B
50 35.0 5 10 3.02 4250 78.1 2.26 3180 2.60 3657 50 35.0 5 10 3.02 4320 79.4 2.26 3233 2.60 3719
75 23.3 5 15 2.34 4650 73.7 1.75 3488 2.01 4011 75 23.3 5 15 3.02 6130 75.2 2.26 4587 2.60 5277
100 17.5 5 20 1.89 4780 70.3 1.53 3872 1.76 4453 100 17.5 5 20 2.80 7350 72.9 2.13 5586 2.45 6424
150 11.7 10 15 1.50 5300 65.5 1.40 4954 1.50 5300 150 11.7 10 15 2.01 7310 67.3 1.40 5092 1.61 5855
200 8.75 10 20 1.09 4840 61.6 1.09 4840 NOT 200 8.75 10 20 1.59 7350 64.4 1.40 6468 1.59 7350
250 7.00 5 50 .775 3740 53.6 .775 3740 250 7.00 5 50 1.08 5620 57.6 1.08 5620 NOT REQ.
300 5.83 20 15 .884 5280 55.3 .884 5280 REQUIRED 300 5.83 20 15 1.31 8080 57.1 .917 5656 1.05 6504
400 4.38 20 20 .657 4840 51.1 .657 4840 400 4.38 20 20 .945 7350 54.0 .917 7130 .945 7350
500 3.50 50 10 .629 4980 44.0 .514 4070 .591 4679 500 3.50 50 10 .673 5530 45.6 .514 4224 .591 4857
600 2.92 20 30 .586 5420 42.8 .586 5420 600 2.92 20 30 .895 8720 45.1 .895 8720 NOT REQ.
750 2.33 50 15 .503 5280 38.9 .503 5280 750 2.33 50 15 .673 7380 40.6 .514 5636 .591 6480
1000 1.75 50 20 .381 4840 35.3 .381 4840 1000 1.75 50 20 .537 7350 38.0 .514 7035 .537 7350
1200 1.46 40 30 .403 5420 31.1 .403 5420 NOT 1200 1.46 40 30 .611 8720 33.0 .567 8092 .611 8720
1500 1.17 50 30 .352 5420 28.5 .352 5420 1500 1.17 50 30 .531 8720 30.4 .514 8440 .531 8720
1800 .972 60 30 .345 5420 24.2 .345 5420 1800 .972 60 30 .521 8720 25.8 .440 7364 .506 8469
Double Reduction
2000 .875 50 40 .273 4880 24.8 .273 4880 REQUIRED 2000 .875 50 40 .377 7460 27.5 .377 7460 NOT
2400 .729 60 40 .270 4880 20.9 .270 4880 2400 .729 60 40 .372 7460 23.2 .372 7460
3000 .583 60 50 .188 3740 18.4 .188 3740 3000 .583 60 50 .250 5620 20.8 .250 5620 REQUIRED
3600 .486 60 60 .142 3030 16.5 .142 3030 3600 .486 60 60 .186 4540 18.8 .186 4540

50 23.0 5 10 2.22 4660 76.5 2.02 4240 2.22 4660 50 23.0 5 10 2.40 5130 78.1 2.02 4309 2.32 4959
75 15.3 5 15 1.68 4950 71.6 1.63 4802 1.68 4950 75 15.3 5 15 2.40 7250 73.4 2.02 6102 2.32 7008
100 11.5 5 20 1.31 4840 67.6 1.31 4840 100 11.5 5 20 1.90 7350 70.6 1.90 7350 NOT REQ.
150 7.67 10 15 1.02 5240 62.7 1.02 5240 150 7.67 10 15 1.59 8430 64.6 1.29 6839 1.51 8006
200 5.75 10 20 .757 4840 58.3 .757 4840 200 5.75 10 20 1.09 7350 61.4 1.09 7350 NOT
250 4.60 5 50 .550 3740 49.6 .550 3740 N 250 4.60 5 50 .762 5620 53.8 .762 5620 REQUIRED
300 3.83 20 15 .611 5280 52.6 .611 5280 O 300 3.83 20 15 .945 8500 54.7 .853 7672 .945 8500
400 2.88 20 20 .456 4840 48.4 .456 4840 T 400 2.88 20 20 .652 7350 51.4 .652 7350 NOT REQ.
500 2.30 50 10 .426 4980 42.7 .426 4980 R 500 2.30 50 10 .533 6480 44.4 .501 5962 .533 6480
600 1.92 20 30 .415 5420 39.7 .415 5420 E 600 1.92 20 30 .631 8720 42.0 .631 8720
750 1.53 50 15 .343 5280 37.5 .343 5280 Q 750 1.53 50 15 .530 8500 39.0 .530 8500
1000 1.15 50 20 .262 4840 33.7 .262 4840 U 1000 1.15 50 20 .367 7350 36.5 .367 7350
I
1200 .958 40 30 .283 5420 29.1 .283 5420 1200 .958 40 30 .426 8720 31.1 .426 8720 NOT
R
1500 .767 50 30 .253 5600 26.9 .253 5600 1500 .767 50 30 .368 8720 28.8 .368 8720
E
1800 .639 60 30 .250 5690 23.1 .250 5690 1800 .639 60 30 .356 8720 24.8 .356 8720
D
2000 .575 50 40 .192 4880 23.2 .192 4880 2000 .575 50 40 .265 7460 25.7 .265 7460 REQUIRED
2400 .479 60 40 .186 4880 19.9 .186 4880 2400 .479 60 40 .257 7460 22.1 .257 7460
3000 .383 60 50 .131 3740 17.3 .131 3740 3000 .383 60 50 .174 5620 19.7 .174 5620
3600 .319 60 60 .0991 3030 15.5 .0991 3030 3600 .319 60 60 .130 4540 17.7 .130 4540
50 17.0 5 10 1.74 4810 74.6 1.74 4810 50 17.0 5 10 2.02 5730 76.5 2.02 5730
75 11.3 5 15 1.32 5100 69.4 1.32 5100 75 11.3 5 15 2.02 8000 71.3 2.02 8000
100 8.5 5 20 1.00 4840 65.2 1.00 4840 100 8.5 5 20 1.51 7650 68.3 1.51 7650
150 5.67 10 15 .790 5280 60.1 .790 5280 150 5.67 10 15 1.23 8500 62.1 1.23 8500
200 4.25 10 20 .588 4840 55.5 .588 4840 200 4.25 10 20 .843 7350 58.8 .843 7350
250 3.40 5 50 .435 3740 46.4 .435 3740 N 250 3.40 5 50 .598 5620 50.7 .598 5620 N
300 2.83 20 15 .500 5530 49.8 .500 5530 O 300 2.83 20 15 .752 8680 51.9 .752 8680 O
400 2.12 20 20 .359 4840 45.4 .359 4840 T 400 2.12 20 20 .509 7350 48.7 .509 7350 T
500 1.70 50 10 .338 4980 39.8 .338 4980 R 500 1.70 50 10 .410 6310 41.5 .410 6310 R
600 1.42 20 30 .338 5550 36.9 .338 5550 E 600 1.42 20 30 .500 8720 39.2 .500 8720 E
750 1.13 50 15 .273 5280 34.8 .273 5280 Q 750 1.13 50 15 .420 8500 36.4 .420 8500 Q
1000 .850 50 20 .209 4840 31.2 .209 4840 U 1000 .850 50 20 .293 7350 33.8 .293 7350 U
I I
1200 .708 40 30 .224 5420 27.2 .224 5420 1200 .708 40 30 .336 8720 29.2 .336 8720
R R
1500 .567 50 30 .199 5420 24.5 .199 5420 1500 .567 50 30 .298 8720 26.3 .298 8720
E E
1800 .472 60 30 .193 5420 21.0 .193 5420 1800 .472 60 30 .290 8720 22.5 .290 8720
D D
2000 .425 50 40 .156 4880 21.1 .156 4880 2000 .425 50 40 .214 7460 23.5 .214 7460
2400 .354 60 40 .152 4880 18.0 .152 4880 2400 .354 60 40 .209 7460 20.1 .209 7460
3000 .283 60 50 .107 3740 15.7 .107 3740 3000 .283 60 50 .141 5620 17.9 .141 5620
3600 .236 60 60 .0811 3030 14.0 .0811 3030 3600 .236 60 60 .106 4540 16.1 .106 4540
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT — MODELS 3201 AND 3204 1,100 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 3202, 3203, 3205, AND 3206 NOT APPLICABLE.
MODELS 3207 AND 3208 — OHL* 1,280 LBS., TO* THRUST OUT 1,700 LBS. AND TI* THRUST IN 1,210 LBS.
*OHL and Thrust values shown are independent functions &
MODELS 3209 AND 3210 1,050 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. THRUST* UP OR DOWN 1,200 LBS.
cannot be applied simultaneously. Refer applications with
MODELS 3801 AND 3804 1,600 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 3802, 3803, 3805, AND 3806 NOT APPLICABLE.
combined OHL and Thrust to Hub City Customer Service
MODELS
Department. Thermal capacity can be improved on some 3807 AND 3808 — OHL* 1,970 LBS., TO* THRUST OUT 1,950 LBS. AND TI* THRUST IN 1,500 LBS.
MODELS
applications with the addition of a fan on the primary unit. 3809 AND 3810 1,600 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. THRUST* UP OR DOWN 1,500 LBS.
Consult Hub City Customer Service for specifics.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-51

FOR MOTOR SELECTION

Series 4500 & 5200 Ratings REFER TO SECTION H

MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL RATING MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL RATING
R SERVICE FACT. DESIGN OPTION R SERVICE FACT. DESIGN OPTION
A Ratio With A Ratio With
T Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube T Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube
I Output Pri- Sec- Input Output Eff. Input Output Input Output I Output Pri- Sec- Input Output Eff. Input Output Input Output
O R.P.M. mary ondary H.P. Torque % H.P. Torque H.P. Torque O R.P.M. mary ondary H.P. Torque % H.P. Torque H.P. Torque

50 35.0 5 10 7.55 10930 80.4 5.02 7267 5.65 8174 50 35.0 5 10 10.2 15950 86.8 5.77 9022 6.64 10380
75 23.3 5 15 5.50 11380 76.6 3.57 7387 4.11 8495 75 23.3 5 15 7.83 16500 78.0 5.01 10560 5.76 12140
100 17.5 5 20 4.45 11960 74.6 3.11 8359 3.58 9612 100 17.5 5 20 6.33 17400 76.3 4.43 12180 5.09 14010
150 11.7 10 15 3.40 12710 69.1 3.16 11813 3.40 12710 150 11.7 10 15 5.02 19190 70.7 3.31 12650 3.81 14550
200 8.75 10 20 2.58 12340 66.5 2.58 12340 200 8.75 10 20 3.66 18080 68.5 3.31 16350 3.66 18080
N
250 7.00 5 50 1.77 9570 59.9 1.77 9570 250 7.00 5 50 2.40 13610 63.0 2.40 13610 NOT REQ.
O
300 5.83 20 15 2.11 13290 58.3 2.11 13290 300 5.83 20 15 3.03 19690 60.2 2.12 13790 2.44 15860
T
400 4.38 20 20 1.54 12340 55.6 1.54 12340 400 4.38 20 20 2.18 18080 57.7 2.12 17580 2.18 18080
500 3.50 50 10 1.54 12530 45.1 1.54 12530 R 500 3.50 50 10 2.20 18310 46.3 1.12 9340 1.29 10740
600 2.92 20 30 1.34 13620 46.9 1.34 13620 E 600 2.92 20 30 1.87 19980 49.4 1.87 19980 NOT REQ.
750 2.33 50 15 1.22 13290 40.4 Q 750 2.33 50 15 1.71 19430 42.1 1.12 12730 1.29 14640
1.22 13290
U 1000 1.75 50 20 1.26 18080 40.0 1.12 16070 1.26 18080
1000 1.75 50 20 .895 12340 38.3 .895 12340 I
1200 1.46 40 30 .921 13620 34.2 .921 13620 R 1200 1.46 40 30 1.28 19980 36.2 1.27 19820 1.28 19980
1500 1.17 50 30 .819 13620 30.8 .819 13620 E 1500 1.17 50 30 1.13 19980 32.7 1.12 19800 1.13 19980
1800 .972 60 30 .753 13710 28.1 .753 13710 D 1800 .972 60 30 1.03 19980 29.9 1.01 19590 1.03 19980
2000 .875 50 40 .619 12570 28.2 .619 12570 2000 .875 50 40 .822 17870 30.2 .822 17870
2400 .729 60 40 .564 12570 25.8 2400 .729 60 40 .754 17990 27.6 .754 17990 NOT
.564 12570
3000 .583 60 50 .390 9570 22.7 3000 .583 60 50 .503 13750 25.3 .503 13750 REQUIRED
.390 9570
3600 .486 60 60 .277 7610 21.2 3600 .486 60 60 .360 10830 23.2 .360 10830
.277 7610

50 23.0 5 10 5.23 11460 79.9 4.18 9159 4.81 10540 50 23.0 5 10 7.56 16820 81.2 5.00 11120 5.75 12790
75 15.3 5 15 3.95 12280 75.6 3.12 9701 3.59 11160 75 15.3 5 15 5.63 17890 77.3 4.39 13950 5.05 16040
100 11.5 5 20 3.08 12340 73.0 2.77 11110 3.08 12340 100 11.5 5 20 4.40 18080 75.0 3.87 15910 4.40 18080
150 7.67 10 15 2.38 13160 67.2 2.38 13160 150 7.67 10 15 3.39 19260 69.2 3.01 17100 3.39 19260
200 5.75 10 20 1.75 12340 64.3 1.75 12340 200 5.75 10 20 2.46 18080 67.1 2.46 18080 NOT
N 1.65 13610 REQUIRED
250 4.60 5 50 1.22 9570 57.2 1.22 9570 250 4.60 5 50 1.65 13610 60.1
O 1.88 18260 2.00 19430
300 3.83 20 15 1.42 13290 57.0 1.42 13290 300 3.83 20 15 2.00 19430 59.0
T 1.51 18700 NOT REQ.
400 2.88 20 20 1.04 12340 54.0 1.04 12340 400 2.88 20 20 1.51 18700 56.4
500 2.30 50 10 1.02 12860 46.0 1.02 12860 R 500 2.30 50 10 1.41 18310 47.5 1.03 13380 1.18 15390
600 1.92 20 30 .931 13620 44.5 .931 13620 E 600 1.92 20 30 1.29 19980 47.2 1.29 19980 NOT REQ.
Q 750 1.53 50 15 1.11 19430 42.6 1.03 18030 1.11 19430
750 1.53 50 15 .789 13290 41.0 .789 13290
U .815 18080
1000 1.15 50 20 .582 12340 38.7 .582 12340 1000 1.15 50 20 .815 18080 40.5
I
1200 .958 40 30 .626 13620 33.1 .626 13620 R 1200 .958 40 30 .863 19980 35.2 .863 19980
1500 .767 50 30 .545 13620 30.4 .545 13620 E 1500 .767 50 30 .754 20140 32.5 .754 20140 NOT
1800 .639 60 30 .504 13780 27.7 .504 13780 D 1800 .639 60 30 .684 19980 29.6 .684 19980
2000 .575 50 40 .410 12570 28.0 .410 12570 2000 .575 50 40 .543 17870 30.0 .543 17870 REQUIRED
2400 .479 60 40 .376 12570 25.4 .376 12570 2400 .479 60 40 .505 18080 27.2 .505 18080
3000 .383 60 50 .267 9570 21.8 .267 9570 3000 .383 60 50 .340 13980 25.0 .340 13980
3600 .319 60 60 .185 7610 20.8 .185 7610 3600 .319 60 60 .250 11230 22.8 .250 11230

50 17.0 5 10 4.10 12000 78.9 3.81 11160 4.10 12000 50 17.0 5 10 5.89 17500 80.2 4.55 13520 5.23 15550
75 11.3 5 15 3.09 12740 74.1 3.00 12370 3.09 12740 75 11.3 5 15 4.43 18680 75.9 4.03 17000 4.43 18680
100 8.5 5 20 2.33 12340 71.4 2.33 12340 100 8.5 5 20 3.32 18080 73.5 3.32 18080
150 5.67 10 15 1.83 13290 65.3 1.83 13290 150 5.67 10 15 2.59 19430 67.4 2.59 19430
200 4.25 10 20 1.34 12340 62.2 1.34 12340 200 4.25 10 20 1.88 18080 64.7 1.88 18080
250 3.40 5 50 .951 9570 54.3 .951 9570 N 250 3.40 5 50 1.27 13610 57.6 1.27 13610 N
300 2.83 20 15 1.08 13290 55.3 1.08 13290 O 300 2.83 20 15 1.52 19430 57.6 1.52 19430 O
400 2.12 20 20 .793 12340 52.5 .793 12340 T 400 2.12 20 20 1.11 18080 54.7 1.11 18080 T
500 1.70 50 10 .761 12530 44.4 .761 12340 R 500 1.70 50 10 1.12 18310 44.1 1.12 18310 R
600 1.42 20 30 .750 14210 42.6 .750 14210 E 600 1.42 20 30 1.02 20500 45.2 1.02 20500 E
750 1.13 50 15 .608 13290 39.3 .608 13290 Q 750 1.13 50 15 .854 19430 40.9 .854 19430 Q
1000 .850 50 20 .451 12340 36.9 .451 12340 U 1000 .850 50 20 .628 18080 38.8 .628 18080 U
I I
1200 .708 40 30 .500 14280 32.1 .500 14280 1200 .708 40 30 .657 19980 34.2 .657 19980
R R
1500 .567 50 30 .427 13620 28.7 .427 13620 1500 .567 50 30 .585 19980 30.7 .585 19980
E E
1800 .472 60 30 .391 13620 26.1 .391 13620 1800 .472 60 30 .538 19980 27.8 .538 19980
D D
2000 .425 50 40 .335 13120 26.4 .335 13120 2000 .425 50 40 .426 17870 28.3 .426 17870
2400 .354 60 40 .297 12570 23.8 .297 12570 2400 .354 60 40 .392 17870 25.6 .392 17870
3000 .283 60 50 .209 9570 20.6 .209 9570 3000 .283 60 50 .263 13610 23.3 .263 13610
3600 .236 60 60 .147 7610 19.4 .147 7610 3600 .236 60 60 .190 10830 21.3 .190 10830
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT — MODELS 4501 AND 4504 2,200 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 4502, 4503, 4505, AND 4506 NOT APPLICABLE.
MODELS
*OHL and Thrust values shown are independent functions & 4507 AND 4508 — OHL* 2,370 LBS., TO* THRUST OUT 3,330 LBS. AND TI* THRUST IN 3,140 LBS.
MODELS
cannot be applied simultaneously. Refer applications with 4509 AND 4510 2,000 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. THRUST* UP OR DOWN 2,500 LBS.
MODELS
combined OHL and Thrust to Hub City Customer Service 5201 AND 5204 2,600 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 5202, 5203, 5205, AND 5206 NOT APPLICABLE.
Department. Thermal capacity can be improved on some
applications with the addition of a fan on the primary unit.
Consult Hub City Customer Service for specifics.
B-52 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

FOR MOTOR SELECTION

REFER TO SECTION H Series 60D Ratings
SERIES 60D SERIES 60D
MECHANICAL RATING THERMAL RATING
R SERVICE FACT. DESIGN OPTION
A Ratio With
T Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube
I
O

Output Eff.
Torque %
50 35.0 5 10 11.1 16270 81.4 5.77 8458 6.64 9727
100 17.5 5 20 8.69 23583 75.4 5.39 14630 6.20 16820
150 11.7 5 30 6.16 22869 68.7 3.77 14000 4.34 16100
200 8.75 10 20 5.46 26783 68.1 3.31 16240 3.81 18680
250 7.00 5 50 4.00 22124 61.5 2.83 15700 3.25 18050
300 5.83 20 30 4.01 26276 60.7 3.36 22070 3.86 25380
400 4.38 10 40 3.25 26665 57.0 3.01 24720 3.25 26665
500 3.50 25 20 2.76 28115 56.5 1.83 18620 2.10 21410
600 2.92 20 30 2.45 27727 52.3 2.12 23960 2.44 27550
750 2.33 25 30 2.08 27727 49.3 1.83 24370 2.08 27727
1000 1.75 25 40 1.70 27990 45.7 1.70 27990 NOT REQ.
1200 1.46 30 40 1.57 27990 41.2 1.51 26890 1.57 27990
1500 1.17 50 30 1.37 27727 37.5 1.12 22690 1.29 26090
1800 .972 60 30 1.23 27727 34.8 1.01 22780 1.16 26200
Double Reduction
2000 .875 50 40 1.13 27990 34.5 1.12 27830 1.13 27990
2400 .729 60 40 1.01 27990 32.1 1.01 27990 NOT
3000 .583 60 50 .689 22124 29.7 .689 22124 REQUIRED
3600 .486 60 60 .500 17892 27.6 .500 17892
50 23.0 5 10 9.02 20021 81.0 5.00 11100 5.75 12760
100 11.5 5 20 6.31 25664 74.2 4.66 18940 5.36 21780
150 7.67 5 30 4.58 25115 66.7 3.29 18030 3.78 20730
200 5.75 10 20 3.75 27819 67.7 3.01 22340 3.46 25690
250 4.60 5 50 2.74 22124 59.0 2.52 20360 2.74 22124
300 3.83 10 30 2.78 27388 59.9 2.78 27388 NOT REQ.
400 2.88 10 40 2.26 27695 55.8 2.26 27695 NOT REQ.
500 2.30 25 20 1.80 28115 57.0 1.66 25928 1.80 28115
600 1.92 20 30 1.63 27727 51.8 1.63 27727
750 1.53 25 30 1.37 27727 49.1 1.37 27727
1000 1.15 25 40 1.12 27990 45.6 1.12 27990
1200 .958 30 40 1.03 27990 41.4 1.03 27990
1500 .767 50 30 .881 27727 38.3 .881 27727 NOT
1800 .639 60 30 .796 27727 35.3 .796 27727
2000 .575 50 40 .750 28937 35.2 .750 28937 REQUIRED
2400 .479 60 40 .655 27990 32.5 .655 27990
3000 .383 60 50 .447 22124 30.1 .447 22124
3600 .319 60 60 .333 18396 28.0 .333 18396

50 17.0 5 10 7.87 23517 80.6 4.55 13600 5.23 15640
100 8.5 5 20 5.01 27266 73.4 4.29 23360 4.93 26860
150 5.67 5 30 3.61 26276 65.4 3.03 22070 3.48 25380
200 4.25 10 20 2.83 28115 67.0 2.82 28020 2.83 28115
250 3.40 5 50 2.07 22124 57.7 2.07 22124
300 2.83 10 30 2.12 27727 58.8 2.12 27727
400 2.12 10 40 1.73 27990 54.6 1.73 27990 N
500 1.70 25 20 1.35 28115 56.2 1.35 28115 O
600 1.42 20 30 1.22 27727 51.0 1.22 27727 T
750 1.13 25 30 1.04 27727 48.1 1.04 27727 R
1000 .850 25 40 .850 27990 44.4 .850 27990 E
1200 .708 30 40 .773 27990 40.7 .723 27990 Q
.683 27727 U
1500 .567 50 30 .683 27727 37.6
I
1800 .472 60 30 .594 27727 35.0 .594 27727
R
2000 .425 50 40 .547 27990 34.5 .547 27990 E
2400 .354 60 40 .500 28650 32.2 D
.500 28650
3000 .283 60 50 .337 22124 29.5 .337 22124
3600 .236 60 60 .250 18285 27.4 .250 18285
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT —MODELS 6001 AND 6004 4,000 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION. MODELS 6002, 6003, 6005, AND 6006 NOT APPLICABLE.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-53

S e r i e s 70 D , R a t i n g s FOR MOTOR SELECTION

REFER TO SECTION H

A Ratio With
Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube
T
I Output Pri- Sec- Input Output Eff. Input Output Input Output
O R.P.M. mary ondary H.P. Torque % H.P. Torque H.P. Torque

50 35.0 5 10 17.2 25521 82.4 8.09 12000 9.30 13800
100 17.5 5 20 11.97 33069 76.7 7.57 20920 8.71 24060
150 11.7 5 30 8.38 31929 70.5 5.16 19630 5.93 22570
200 8.75 10 20 7.66 38441 69.7 5.01 25150 5.64 28300
250 7.00 5 50 5.76 32729 63.1 3.81 21650 4.38 24900
300 5.83 15 20 5.75 40203 64.7 3.54 24750 4.07 28460
400 4.38 10 40 4.53 38274 58.6 3.84 32430 4.42 37290
500 3.50 10 50 3.50 34785 55.2 3.43 34100 3.50 34785
600 2.92 15 40 3.46 40025 53.6 3.46 40025 NOT REQ.
750 2.33 15 50 2.56 34785 50.4 2.56 34785 NOT REQ.
1000 1.75 50 20 2.38 40710 47.5 1.58 27030 1.82 31080
1200 1.46 30 40 2.18 40529 43.1 2.06 38370 2.18 40529
1500 1.17 50 30 1.81 40113 41.0 1.58 35000 1.81 40113
1800 .972 60 30 1.60 40113 38.6 1.42 35530 1.60 40113
2000 .875 50 40 1.51 41194 37.8 1.51 41194
2400 .729 60 40 1.32 40529 35.5 1.32 40529 NOT
3000 .583 60 50 1.02 36506 32.9 1.02 36506 REQUIRED
3600 .486 60 60 .696 27717 30.7 .696 27717

50 23.0 5 10 13.8 30970 81.9 6.71 15060 7.72 17320
100 11.5 5 20 8.85 36585 75.4 6.30 26040 7.24 29950
150 7.67 5 30 6.36 35753 68.4 4.45 25020 5.12 28770
200 5.75 10 20 5.28 40203 69.5 4.21 32070 4.84 36880
250 4.60 5 50 4.19 34785 60.6 3.36 27930 3.86 32120
300 3.83 15 20 3.83 40710 64.7 3.07 32660 3.53 37560
400 2.88 10 40 3.17 40025 57.6 3.17 40025
500 2.30 10 50 2.35 34785 54.1 2.35 34785 NOT
600 1.92 15 40 2.33 40529 52.9 2.33 40529 REQUIRED
750 1.53 15 50 1.71 34785 49.5 1.71 34785
1000 1.15 50 20 1.54 40710 48.3 1.51 39970 1.54 40710
1200 .958 30 40 1.42 40529 43.3 1.42 40529
1500 .767 50 30 1.18 40113 41.3 1.18 40113 NOT
1800 .639 60 30 1.04 40113 39.0 1.04 40113
2000 .575 50 40 1.01 42068 38.0 1.01 42068 REQUIRED
2400 .479 60 40 .861 40529 35.8 .861 40529
3000 .383 60 50 .639 34785 33.1 .639 34785
3600 .319 60 60 .454 27717 30.9 .454 27717

50 17.0 5 10 11.7 35377 81.4 6.14 18530 7.06 21310
100 8.5 5 20 6.97 38441 74.4 5.72 31560 6.58 36290
150 5.67 5 30 5.08 37669 66.7 3.79 28120 4.36 32340
200 4.25 10 20 4.00 40710 68.6 3.92 39880 4.00 40710

250 3.40 5 50 3.18 34785 59.0 3.12 34110 3.18 34785
300 2.83 15 20 3.00 42709 64.0 3.00 42709
400 2.12 10 40 2.42 40529 56.4 2.42 40529 N

500 1.70 10 50 1.78 34785 52.8 1.78 34785 O
600 1.42 15 40 1.76 40529 51.8 1.76 40529 T
750 1.13 15 50 1.30 34785 48.2 1.30 34785 R

1000 .850 50 20 1.15 40710 47.9 1.15 40710 E
1200 .708 30 40 1.07 40529 42.6 1.07 40529 Q
.886 40113 U
1500 .567 50 30 .886 40113 40.7 I
1800 .472 60 30 .785 40113 38.3 .785 40113
R
2000 .425 50 40 .756 41817 37.3 .756 41817 E
D
2400 .354 60 40 .649 40529 35.1 .649 40529
3000 .283 60 50 .501 36442 32.7 .501 36442
3600 .236 60 60 .343 27717 30.3 .343 27717
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT —MODELS 7001 AND 7004 5,500 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION.
B-54 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

FOR MOTOR SELECTION

REFER TO SECTION H Series 80D Ratings
A Ratio With
Combination 1.00 Basic Unit Synthetic Lube
T
I
O
Output Eff.
Torque %
100 17.5 10 10 16.3 44908 76.5 7.55 20800 8.68 23920
150 11.7 15 10 12.4 47895 71.5 5.35 20670 6.15 23770
200 8.75 10 20 10.4 52384 69.9 7.55 38010 8.68 43710
300 5.83 15 20 7.87 55295 65.0 5.35 37570 6.15 43210
400 4.38 20 20 6.22 56097 62.6 4.53 40850 5.21 46980
500 3.50 10 50 5.12 51217 55.5 4.36 43590 5.01 50130
600 2.92 15 40 5.00 58451 54.1 5.00 58451
750 2.33 15 50 3.81 52325 50.8 3.81 52325 NOT
1000 1.75 20 50 3.02 52325 48.1 3.02 52325
REQUIRED
1200 1.46 30 40 3.02 56644 43.4 3.02 56644
1500 1.17 50 30 2.50 55257 40.9 2.30 50820 2.50 55257
1800 .972 60 30 2.21 55257 38.6 2.07 51800 2.21 55257
2000 .875 50 40 2.02 55849 38.3 2.02 55849 NOT
Double Reduction
2400 .729 60 40 1.80 55849 36.0 1.80 55849
3000 .583 60 50 1.50 54129 33.4 1.50 54129 REQUIRED
3600 .486 60 60 1.04 41905 31.1 1.04 41905

100 11.5 10 10 12.1 50977 76.8 6.18 26010 7.11 29910
150 7.67 15 10 8.70 51730 72.3 4.47 26570 5.14 30560
200 5.75 10 20 7.51 57457 69.8 6.18 47280 7.11 54370
300 3.83 15 20 5.25 56097 65.0 4.47 47770 5.14 54940

400 2.88 20 20 4.08 56097 62.7 3.89 53470 4.08 56097
500 2.30 10 50 3.50 52325 54.6 3.50 52325
600 1.92 15 40 3.19 55849 53.3 3.19 55849

750 1.53 15 50 2.56 52325 49.8 2.56 52325
1000 1.15 20 50 2.02 52325 47.3 2.02 52325
NOT
1200 .958 30 40 1.95 55849 43.6 1.95 55849
1500 .767 50 30 1.63 55257 41.3 1.63 55257
1800 .639 60 30 1.50 57857 39.1 1.50 57857 REQUIRED
2000 .575 50 40 1.32 55849 38.5 1.32 55849

2400 .479 60 40 1.16 55849 36.5 1.16 55849
3000 .383 60 50 .944 52325 33.7 .944 52325
3600 .319 60 60 .676 41905 31.4 .676 41905

100 8.5 10 10 9.11 51730 76.6 5.66 32150
150 5.67 15 10 6.36 51730 73.1 4.14 33660
200 4.25 10 20 5.47 56097 69.2 5.47 56097
300 2.83 15 20 3.90 56097 64.6 3.90 56097 N
400 2.12 20 20 3.04 56097 62.2 3.04 56097 O
500 1.70 10 50 2.65 52325 53.2 2.65 52325 T
600 1.42 15 40 2.40 55849 52.3 2.40 55849 R
750 1.13 15 50 2.01 54323 48.6 2.01 54323 E
1000 .850 20 50 1.52 52325 46.5 1.52 52325 Q
1.50 57523 U
1200 .708 30 40 1.50 57523 43.1
I
1500 .567 50 30 1.22 55257 40.9 1.22 55257
R
1800 .472 60 30 1.07 55257 38.6 1.07 55257 E
D
2000 .425 50 40 .986 55849 38.2 .986 55849
2400 .354 60 40 .874 55849 35.9 .874 55849
3000 .283 60 50 .706 52325 33.3 .706 52325
3600 .236 60 60 .508 41905 30.9 .508 41905
OVERHUNG LOAD - LOW SPEED SHAFT — MODELS 8001 AND 8004 7,000 LBS. AT CENTER POINT OF SHAFT EXTENSION.
Thermal capacity can be improved on some applications with the addition of a fan on the primary unit. Consult Hub City Customer Service for specifics.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-55

Models 13 01, 18 01, 2101, 26 01, 3201, 3 8 01, 45 01, 5201, 6 001, 7001 & 8 001
A E T FF NPT (5) I F
H
GG NPT (5)
G
LL
B MM C.D.
K KEYWAY
NN
L EFF. LGTH.
C C.D.
U
D W KEYWAY
X EFF. LGTH.
TYP. BOTH EXTENSIONS
Z
KK NC
(4) PP DEEP TOP V V
CC
(4) RR DEEP BOTTOM
HH
JJ
FOR LUBRICATION AND INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS - REFER TO SECTION R
DD RR
BB
Standard Styles Available DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

CERTIFIED PRINTS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST.
RA DR LB UL LA UR RB DL L LR R
STYLE UR-LR
CONSULT FACTORY FOR VERTICAL SHAFT LUBRICATION RECOMMENDATIONS

INPUT SHAFT CAN BE ROTATED IN EITHER DIRECTION
B-56 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Models 13 01, 18 01, 2101, 26 01, 3201, 3 8 01, 45 01, 5201, 6 001, 7001 & 8 001
MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E F G H I

1301
1801
2101
131
131
131
134-56C
184-56C
214-56C
2
2-15/32
2-29/32
1.186
1.374
1.499
1.334
1.751
2.064
1.562
1.875
2.437
4-1/2
4-7/8
5-5/8
2
2
2
.500/.499
.500/.499
.500/.499
1-11/16
1-11/16
1-11/16
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
B
2601 131 264-56C 3-13/32 1.874 2.626 2.938 6 2 .500/.499 1-11/16 3-1/2
3201 211 324-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 2 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16
3801 211 384-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 2-29/32 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16
4501 321 454-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4
5201 321 524-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4
6001 321 601 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4
7001 381 701 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 4-11/16 1.000/.999 2-9/16 7-1/8
8001 451 801 10 4.501 8.000 8.750 12-1/2 5-11/16 1.125/1.124 3-7/32 8-7/16
Double Reduction
MODEL K L T U V W X Z AA BB CC
1301 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 .625/.624 3-1/4 3/16 X 3/32 1-5/16 1-25/32 2-1/4 3-1/8 2-1/4
1801 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 .750/.749 3-1/2 3/16 X 3/32 1-15/32 1-15/16 2-3/8 3-7/8 3-1/8
2101 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 .875/.874 4-1/4 3/16 X 3/32 1-13/16 2-3/8 2-15/16 4-7/8 4
2601 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 1.250/1.249 4-1/2 1/4 X 1/8 1-25/32 2-13/32 3-7/16 5-5/8 4-7/8
3201 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8 1-7/8 1.375/1.374 5-7/16 5/16 X 5/32 2-5/16 3-1/16 3-13/16 7-3/8 6-1/4
3801 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8 1-7/8 1.500/1.499 6-11/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-5/32 4 4 8 6-7/8
4501 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8 1.625/1.624 7-1/4 3/8 X 3/16 3-9/32 4-3/16 4-5/8 9-1/4 8-1/8
5201 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8 1.750/1.749 7-13/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-1/2 4-15/32 5-1/16 10-3/4 9-1/2
6001 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8 2.250/2.249 10-1/4 1/2 X 1/4 4-1/2 5-1/8 6-3/4 13-1/4 11
7001 1/4 X 1/8 1-29/32 2-23/32 2.750/2.749 11-1/8 5/8 X 5/16 5 5-7/16 7-3/4 15-3/16 12-1/2
8001 1/4 X 1/8 2-1/2 3-1/16 3.250/3.248 12-3/4 3/4 X 3/8 5-5/8 6-1/4 9 17-3/4 14-3/4
MODEL DD FF GG HH JJ KK LL MM NN PP RR Wt. Lbs.

1301 1-5/8 1/8 1/8 1-1/8 13/16 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 13/32 15/32 22
1801 1-5/8 1/8 1/8 1-9/16 13/16 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 13/32 1/2 25
2101 2 1/8 1/4 2 1 3/8 1.186 1.334 1.562 1/2 11/16 32
2601 2-11/16 1/8 1/4 2-7/16 1-11/32 3/8 1.186 1.334 1.562 9/16 11/16 42
3201 2-3/4 1/4 1/2 3-1/8 1-3/8 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 3/4 29/32 83
3801 3 1/4 1/2 3-7/16 1-1/2 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 15/16 1 103
4501 3-1/4 1/2 1/2 4-1/16 1-5/8 5/8 2.124 3.251 3.250 7/8 1-1/8 170
5201 3-3/4 1/2 1/2 4-3/4 1-7/8 5/8 2.124 3.251 3.250 1 1-1/4 196
6001 4-7/8 1/2 3/4 5-1/2 2-7/16 7/8 2.124 3.251 3.250 1-7/8 1-7/8 335
7001 5-1/2 1/2 3/4 6-1/4 2-3/4 1 2.374 3.751 3.937 2 2 505
8001 6-1/2 1/2 3/4 7-3/8 3-1/4 1 2.499 4.501 4.625 2 2 737
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-57

M o d e l s 18 0 2 , 210 2 , 2 6 0 2 , 3 2 0 2 , 3 8 0 2 , 4 5 0 2 , 5 2 0 2 , 6 0 0 2 & 70 0 2
A FF NPT (5)
GG NPT (5) E T I F
H
G
LL
B MM C.D.
K KEYWAY NN
C C.D. L EFF. LGTH.
D U BORE X SOCKET S.S.
W KEYWAY
V
Y
Q D B u s h i n g D e t a i l f o r M o d e l s 4 5 0 2 , 5 2 0 2 , 6 0 0 2 & 70 0 2

PP
U BORE
W KEYWAY
SHAFT MOUNTED UNITS REQUIRE TORQUE
RR
ARMS. TORQUE ARM KITS ARE AVAILABLE,
V SEE PAGE B-97.
Y
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

Standard Styles Available CERTIFIED PRINTS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST.
RA DR LB UL LA UR RB DL ONLY ONE SECONDARY STYLE AVAILABE.

ORDER BY PRIMARY STYLE ONLY.
STYLE UR

B-58 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

M o d e l s 18 0 2 , 210 2 , 2 6 0 2 , 3 2 0 2 , 3 8 0 2 , 4 5 0 2 , 5 2 0 2 , 6 0 0 2 & 70 0 2
MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E F G H I

1802
2102
131
131
185-56C
215-56C
2-15/32
2-29/32
1.374
1.499
1.751
2.064
1.875
2.437
4-7/8
5-5/8
2
2
.500/.499
.500/.499
1-11/16
1-11/16
3-1/2
3-1/2
B
2602 131 265-56C 3-13/32 1.874 2.626 2.938 6 2 .500/.499 1-11/16 3-1/2
3202 211 325-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 2 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16
3802 211 385-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 2-29/32 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16
4502 321 455-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4
5202 321 525-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4
6002 321 602 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4
7002 381 702 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 4-11/16 1.000/.999 2-9/16 7-1/8
MODEL K L T V Y FF GG LL MM NN Wt. Lbs.

1802 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 2-13/32 4-13/16 1/8 1/8 1.186 1.334 1.562 29
Double Reduction
2102 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 2-15/16 5-7/8 1/8 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 35
2602 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32 1-1/2 3-1/8 6-1/4 1/8 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 45
3202 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8 1-7/8 3-25/32 7-9/16 1/4 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 86
3802 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8 1-7/8 3-25/32 7-9/16 1/4 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 107
4502 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8 5 10 1/2 1/2 2.124 3.251 3.250 175
5202 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8 5-9/16 11-1/8 1/2 1/2 2.124 3.251 3.250 203
6002 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8 7-3/16 14-3/8 1/2 3/4 2.124 3.251 3.250 350
7002 1/4 X 1/8 1-29/32 2-23/32 8-1/8 16-1/4 1/2 3/4 2.374 3.751 3.937 515
Stock Bores QD Bushing Bores

MODEL U W Key Furnished X MODEL U W X PP RR KEY TYPE KIT*
15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 1-15/16 - 0229-02683
1802
1 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 2 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02684
15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 4502 2-3/16 - 4-5/8 3/8 SF 0229-02685
2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 X 1/2 0229-02686
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2102 2-15/16 3/4 X 1/32 - 3/4 X 13/32 0229-02687
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-3/16 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02688
1-1/4 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 Sq. 0229-02689
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 5202 & 2-15/16 - 0229-02690
6 7/16 E
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 6002 3 3/4 X 1/8 - 3/4 X 1/2 0229-02691
2602 1-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 3-3/16 - 0229-02692
1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 3-7/16 7/8 X 1/16 - 7/8 X 1/2 0229-02693
1-7/16 (Max) 3/8 X 1/8 3/8 X 5/16 2-7/16 5/8 X 5/16 - 5/8 Sq. 0229-02905
5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-15/16 - 0229-02906
1-7/16 3/8 X 3/16 3/8 Sq. 3/8 NC X 5/8 LG
7002 3 3/4 X 3/8 - 3/4 Sq. 0229-02907
3202 & 1-15/16 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG 6-5/8 17/32 F
3-3/16 - 0229-02908
3802 2 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG 3-7/16 7/8 X 3/16 - 7/8 X 5/8 0229-02909
2-3/16 (Max.) 1/2 X 1/8 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG 3-15/16 1 X 1/8 - 1 X 5/8 0229-02910
BORE TOLERANCE NOMINAL + .002 *Order by QD Bushing Kit Number. Bushing Kits are not included in reducer price.
Kit includes two Bushings with Keyways and one Key
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-59

M o d e l s 18 0 3 , 210 3 , 2 6 0 3 , 3 2 0 3 , 3 8 0 3 , 4 5 0 3 , 5 2 0 3 , & 6 0 0 3
A E T
FF NPT (5) I F
GG NPT (5) DD DIA. (4)
LL H EQUALLY SPACED
G
BB
B MM C.D.
NN K KEYWAY
L EFF. LGTH.
C C.D.
11
X SOCKET S.S.
D U BORE
W KEYWAY
AA 45°
EE B.C.
Y
V Z
QD Bushing Detail for Models 45 03, 5203, & 6 003

PP
U BORE
Y
THESE UNITS CAN BE FURNISHED WITH
SOLID OUTPUT SHAFT ON SPECIAL ORDER
RR
W KEYWAY AA
V Z

RA DR LB UL LA UR RB DL L R
STYLE UR-L

B-60 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

M o d e l s 18 0 3 , 210 3 , 2 6 0 3 , 3 2 0 3 , 3 8 0 3 , 4 5 0 3 , 5 2 0 3 , & 6 0 0 3
MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E F G H I K L

1803
2103
2603
131
131
131
186-56C
216-56C
266-56C
2-15/32
2-29/32
3-13/32
1.374
1.499
1.874
1.751
2.064
2.626
1.875
2.437
2.938
4-7/8
5-5/8
6
2
2
2
.500/.499
.500/.499
.500/.499
1-11/16
1-11/16
1-11/16
3-1/2
3-1/2
3-1/2
1/8 X 1/16
1/8 X 1/16
1/8 X 1/16
1-9/32
1-9/32
1-9/32
B
3203 211 326-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 2 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8
3803 211 386-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 2-29/32 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8
4503 321 456-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2
5203 321 526-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2
6003 321 603 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2
MODEL T V Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG LL MM NN Wt. Lbs.

1803 1-1/2 2-13/32 29/32 3-5/16 19/32 4-29/32 6-25/32 11/32 5.875 1/8 1/8 1.186 1.334 1.562 33
Double Reduction
2103 1-1/2 2-15/16 11/16 3-5/8 7/16 6-1/4 7-7/8 13/32 7 1/8 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 40
2603 1-1/2 3-1/8 1/2 3-5/8 7/16 7-3/4 8-7/8 13/32 8 1/8 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 53
3203 1-7/8 3-25/32 7/32 4 1/2 8 10 13/32 9 1/4 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 95
3803 1-7/8 3-25/32 23/32 4-1/2 1/2 9 11 9/16 10 1/4 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 115
4503 2-3/8 5 3/4 5-3/4 5/8 12-1/4 14-1/4 11/16 13 1/2 1/2 2.124 3.251 3.250 183
5203 2-3/8 5-9/16 1-7/16 7 3/4 12-1/2 15-1/2 11/16 14 1/2 1/2 2.124 3.251 3.250 212
6003 2-3/8 7-3/16 13/16 8 7/8 15 18 13/16 16 1/2 3/4 2.124 3.251 3.250 370

15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 4503 1-15/16 - 0229-02683
1803
1 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 2 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02684
15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 2-3/16 - 4-5/8 3/8 SF 0229-02685
2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 X 1/2 0229-02686
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2103 2-15/16 3/4 X 1/32 - 3/4 X 13/32 0229-02687
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-3/16 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02688
1-1/4 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 Sq. 0229-02689
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 5203 & 2-15/16 - 0229-02690
6 7/16 E
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 6003 3 3/4 X 1/8 - 3/4 X 1/2 0229-02691
2603 1-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 3-3/16 - 0229-02692
1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 3-7/16 7/8 X 1/16 - 7/8 X 1/2 0229-02693

1-7/16 (Max) 3/8 X 1/8 3/8 X 5/16
*Order by QD Bushing Kit Number. Bushing Kits are not included in reducer price.
5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
1-7/16 3/8 X 3/16 3/8 Sq. 3/8 NC X 5/8 LG
3203 & 1-15/16 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG BORE TOLERANCE NOMINAL + .002
3803 2 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG
2-3/16 (Max.) 1/2 X 1/8 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-61

Models 13 0 4, 18 0 4, 210 4, 26 0 4, 320 4, 3 8 0 4, 45 0 4, 520 4, 6 00 4, 700 4 & 8 00 4
K I F
SQ. O DIA. (4) FF NPT (5)
EQUALLY SPACED H
GG NPT (5) 45° 9/16
J B.C.
PUSH-OFF
P (2) LL
N
B MM C.D.
G
L C'BORE
R DEEP
NN
C C.D. M
U
T
D
W KEYWAY
X EFF. LGTH.
TYP. BOTH Z
EXTENSIONS
A E V V
CC KK NC
(4) PP DEEP TOP
HH (4) RR DEEP BOTTOM
JJ FOR LUBRICATION AND INSTALLATION
DD AA SPECIAL, 48C, METRIC AND SAE

HYDRAULIC INPUT FLANGES AVAILABLE.
CONSULT FACTORY FOR COMPLETE
SPECIFICATIONS.
BB
Standard Styles Available DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.

CERTIFIED PRINTS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST.
RA NOT LB UL LA UR RB NOT L LR R
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
STYLE UR-LR

B-62 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Models 13 0 4, 18 0 4, 210 4, 26 0 4, 320 4, 3 8 0 4, 45 0 4, 520 4, 6 00 4, 700 4 & 8 00 4
Secondary Unit Dimensions

MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E U V W X Z
1304 134 134-56C 2 1.186 1.334 1.562 4-1/2 .625/.624 3-1/4 3/16 X 3/32 1-5/16 1-25/32
1804
2104
134
134
184-56C
214-56C
2-15/32
2-29/32
1.374
1.499
1.751
2.064
1.875
2.437
4-7/8
5-5/8
.750/.749
.875/.874
3-1/2
4-1/4
3/16 X 3/32 1-15/32 1-15/16
3/16 X 3/32 1-13/16 2-3/8
B
2604 134 264-56C 3-13/32 1.874 2.626 2.938 6 1.250/1.249 4-1/2 1/4 X 1/8 1-25/32 2-13/32
3204 214 324-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 1.375/1.374 5-7/16 5/16 X 5/32 2-5/16 3-1/16
3804 214 384-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 1.500/1.499 6-11/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-5/32 4
4504 324 454-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 1.625/1.624 7-1/4 3/8 X 3/16 3-9/32 4-3/16
5204 324 524-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 1.750/1.749 7-13/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-1/2 4-15/32
6004 324 601 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 2.250/2.249 10-1/4 1/2 X 1/4 4-1/2 5-1/8
7004 384 701 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 2.750/2.749 11-1/8 5/8 X 5/16 5 5-7/16
8004 454 801 10 4.501 8.000 8.750 12-1/2 3.250/3.248 12-3/4 3/4 X 3/8 5-5/8 6-1/4
MODEL AA BB CC DD FF GG HH JJ KK PP RR Wt. Lbs.

1304 2-1/4 3-1/8 2-1/4 1-5/8 1/8 1/8 1-1/8 13/16 1/4 13/32 15/32 26
1804 2-3/8 3-7/8 3-1/8 1-5/8 1/8 1/8 1-9/16 13/16 1/4 13/32 1/2 29
Double Reduction
2104 2-15/16 4-7/8 4 2 1/8 1/4 2 1 3/8 1/2 11/16 36
2604 3-7/16 5-5/8 4-7/8 2-11/16 1/8 1/4 2-7/16 1-11/32 3/8 9/16 11/16 46
3204 3-13/16 7-3/8 6-1/4 2-3/4 1/4 1/2 3-1/8 1-3/8 1/2 3/4 29/32 87
3804 4 8 6-7/8 3 1/4 1/2 3-7/16 1-1/2 1/2 15/16 1 107
4504 4-5/8 9-1/4 8-1/8 3-1/4 1/2 1/2 4-1/16 1-5/8 5/8 7/8 1-1/8 176
5204 5-1/16 10-3/4 9-1/2 3-3/4 1/2 1/2 4-3/4 1-7/8 5/8 1 1-1/4 202
6004 6-3/4 13-1/4 11 4-7/8 1/2 3/4 5-1/2 2-7/16 7/8 1-7/8 1-7/8 341
7004 7-3/4 15-3/16 12-1/2 5-1/2 1/2 3/4 6-1/4 2-3/4 1 2 2 512
8004 9 17-3/4 14-3/4 6-1/2 1/2 3/4 7-3/8 3-1/4 1 2 2 747
Primary Unit Dimensions

MODEL F G H I J K L M N O P R T LL MM NN
1304 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
1804 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2104 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2604 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
56C 2-1/4 .6255/.6270
3204 2 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 .8755/.8770
56C 2-1/4 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
3804 2-29/32 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
4504 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
5204 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
6004 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-7/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
7004 4-11/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-7/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-23/32 2.374 3.751 3.937
182TC 3-3/16 6-5/8 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 6-3/4 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
143TC 2-1/4 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
8004 5-11/16 3-1/16 2.499 4.501 4.625
182TC 3-3/16 6-3/4 1/4 X 1/8 1.1255/1.1270
7-1/4 8.501/8.504 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
213TC 3-1/2 5/16 X 5/32 1.3755/1.3770
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-63

M o d e l s 18 0 5 , 210 5 , 2 6 0 5 , 3 2 0 5 , 3 8 0 5 , 4 5 0 5 , 5 2 0 5 , 6 0 0 5 & 70 0 5
K I F
SQ.
O DIA. (4) FF NPT (5)
EQUALLY SPACED H
GG NPT (5) 45° 9/16
J B.C.
PUSH-OFF
P (2) LL
N
B MM C.D.
G
L C'BORE
R DEEP
NN
C C.D. M
D U BORE X SOCKET S.S.
W KEYWAY V
Y
A E T
Q D B u s h i n g D e t a i l f o r M o d e l s 4 5 0 5 , 5 2 0 5 , 6 0 0 5 & 70 0 5

PP
SHAFT MOUNTED UNITS REQUIRE
U BORE
TORQUE ARMS. TORQUE ARM KITS ARE
W KEYWAY AVAILABLE, SEE PAGE B-97
RR SPECIAL, 48C, METRIC AND SAE

V HYDRAULIC INPUT FLANGES AVAILABLE.
Y SPECIFICATIONS.

ONLY ONE SECONDARY STYLE AVAILABLE.

ORDER BY PRIMARY STYLE ONLY.
RA NOT LB UL LA UR NOT
RB
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
STYLE UR

B-64 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

M o d e l s 18 0 5 , 210 5 , 2 6 0 5 , 3 2 0 5 , 3 8 0 5 , 4 5 0 5 , 5 2 0 5 , 6 0 0 5 & 70 0 5

MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E V Y FF GG Weight (lbs)
1805 134 185-56C 2-15/32 1.374 1.751 1.875 4-7/8 2-13/32 4-13/16 1/8 1/8 33
2105
2605
3205
134
134
214
215-56C
265-56C
325-143TC
2-29/32
3-13/32
4-3/16
1.499
1.874
2.124
2.064
2.626
3.251
2.437
2.938
3.250
5-5/8
6
7-1/2
2-15/16
3-1/8
3-25/32
5-7/8
6-1/4
7-9/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/2
38
49
90
B
3805 214 385-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 3-25/32 7-9/16 1/4 1/2 111
4505 324 455-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 5 10 1/2 1/2 181
5205 324 525-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 5-9/16 11-1/8 1/2 1/2 209
6005 324 602 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 7-3/16 14-3/8 1/2 3/4 356
7005 384 702 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 8-1/8 16-1/4 1/2 3/4 522

1805 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2105 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2605 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
Double Reduction
56C 2-1/4 .6255/.6270
3205 2 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 .8755/.8770
56C 2-1/4 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
3805 2-29/32 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
4505 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
5205 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
6005 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-7/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
7005 4-11/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-23/32 2.374 3.751 3.937
182TC 3-3/16 6-5/8 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16

15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 1-15/16 - 0229-02683
1805
1 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 2 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02684
15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 4505 2-3/16 - 4-5/8 3/8 SF 0229-02685
2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 X 1/2 0229-02686
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2105 2-15/16 3/4 X 1/32 - 3/4 X 13/32 0229-02687
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-3/16 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02688
1-1/4 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 Sq. 0229-02689
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 5205 & 2-15/16 - 0229-02690
6 7/16 E
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 6005 3 3/4 X 1/8 - 3/4 X 1/2 0229-02691
2605 1-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 3-3/16 - 0229-02692
1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 3-7/16 7/8 X 1/16 - 7/8 X 1/2 0229-02693
1-7/16 (Max) 3/8 X 1/8 3/8 X 5/16
2-7/16 5/8 X 5/16 - 5/8 Sq. 0229-02905
5/16 NC X 5/16 LG
2-15/16 - 0229-02906
1-7/16 3/8 X 3/16 3/8 Sq. 3/8 NC X 5/8 LG
3 3/4 X 3/8 - 3/4 Sq. 0229-02907
3205 & 1-15/16 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG 7005 6-5/8 17/32 F
3-3/16 - 0229-02908
3805 2 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG 3-7/16 7/8 X 3/16 - 7/8 X 5/8 0229-02909
2-3/16 (Max.) 1/2 X 1/8 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG 3-15/16 1 X 1/8 - 1 X 5/8 0229-02910
BORE TOLERANCE NOMINAL + .002 *Order by QD Bushing Kit Number. Bushing Kits are not included in reducer price.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-65

M o d e l s 18 0 6 , 210 6 , 2 6 0 6 , 3 2 0 6 , 3 8 0 6 , 4 5 0 6 , 5 2 0 6 & 6 0 0 6
K
I F
O DIA. (4) H
45° EQUALLY SPACED FF NPT (5)
GG NPT (5) 9/16
J B.C. LL DD DIA. (4)
EQUALLY SPACED
P BB
N
B MM C.D.
G
L C'BORE
R DEEP
NN
C C.D. M
CC
U X SOCKET S.S.
D
BORE
AA EE B.C. 45°
W KEYWAY
Y
A E T V Z
QD Bushing Detail for Models 45 0 6, 520 6 & 6 00 6

PP METRIC AND SAE HYDRAULIC INPUT

FLANGES AVAILABLE. CONSULT FACTORY
U BORE FOR COMPLETE SPECIFICATIONS.
Y THESE UNITS CAN BE FURNISHED WITH
SOLID OUTPUT SHAFT ON SPECIAL ORDER
RR
W KEYWAY AA
V Z

NOTE: ASSEMBLIES, LA-L, LB-L, RA-R, RB-R,

ARE NOT AVAILABLE DUE TO INTERFERENCE
BETWEEN PRIMARY UNIT C FLANGE AND
SECONDARY UNIT SIDE MOUNT FLANGE.
RA NOT LB UL LA UR RB NOT L R
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
STYLE UR-L
B-66 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

M o d e l s 18 0 6 , 210 6 , 2 6 0 6 , 3 2 0 6 , 3 8 0 6 , 4 5 0 6 , 5 2 0 6 & 6 0 0 6

MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E V Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG Weight (lbs)
1806
2106
2606
134
134
134
186-56C
216-56C
266-56C
2-15/32 1.374 1.751 1.875
2-29/32 1.499 2.064 2.437
3-13/32 1.874 2.626 2.938
4-7/8
5-5/8
6
2-13/32 29/32 3-5/16 19/32
2-15/16 11/16
3-1/8 1/2
3-5/8
3-5/8
7/16
7/16
4-29/32 6-25/32 11/32 5.875 1/8
6-1/4
7-3/4
7-7/8 13/32
8-7/8 13/32
7
8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
37
44
57
B
3206 214 326-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 3-25/32 7/32 4 1/2 8 10 13/32 9 1/4 1/2 99
3806 214 386-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 3-25/32 23/32 4-1/2 1/2 9 11 9/16 10 1/4 1/2 119
4506 324 456-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 5 3/4 5-3/4 5/8 12-1/4 14-1/4 11/16 13 1/2 1/2 189
5206 324 526-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 5-9/16 1-7/16 7 3/4 12-1/2 15-1/2 11/16 14 1/2 1/2 218
6006 324 603 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 7-3/16 13/16 8 7/8 15 18 13/16 16 1/2 3/4 376

1806 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2106 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
Double Reduction
2606 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
56C 2-1/4 .6255/.6270
3206 2 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 .8755/.8770
56C 2-1/4 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
3806 2-29/32 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
4506 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
5206 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
6006 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16

15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 1-15/16 - 0229-02683
1806
1 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 2 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02684
15/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 4506 2-3/16 - 4-5/8 3/8 SF 0229-02685
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 X 1/2 0229-02686
2106
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 2-15/16 3/4 X 1/32 - 3/4 X13/32 0229-02687
1-1/4 (Max.) 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 2-3/16 1/2 X 1/4 - 1/2 Sq. 0229-02688
1 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 2-7/16 5/8 X 3/16 - 5/8 Sq. 0229-02689
1-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 5206 & 2-15/16 - 6 7/16 E 0229-02690
2606 1-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 1/4 Sq. 5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 6006 3 3/4 X 1/8 - 3/4 X 1/2 0229-02691
1/4 NC X 1/4 LG 3-3/16 - 0229-02692
1-7/16 (Max) 3/8 X 1/8 3/8 X 5/16
5/16 NC X 5/16 LG 3-7/16 7/8 X 1/16 - 7/8 X 1/2 0229-02693
1-7/16 3/8 X 3/16 3/8 Sq. 3/8 NC X 5/8 LG *Order by QD Bushing Kit Number. Bushing Kits are not included in reducer price.
3206 & 1-15/16 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG Kit includes two Bushings with Keyways and one Key
3806 2 1/2 X 1/4 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG

2-3/16 (Max.) 1/2 X 1/8 1/2 Sq. 3/8 NC X 3/8 LG
BORE TOLERANCE NOMINAL + .002
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-67

Models 3207, 3 8 07, 45 07, 5207, 6 007, 7007 & 8 007
K KEYWAY
L EFF. LGTH.
A E 1-7/8 I F
FF NPT (5) H
GG NPT (5) Y
LL
AA
X
UU V
B MM C.D.
G
PP W KEYWAY
X EFF. LGTH.
NN
C C.D.
U
1/8 NPT (2) RR NC

D 1 DEEP
1/8 NPT (3)
UU
TT
SS X
S Z
W NPT
R EE DIA. (4)

CC INSTRUCTIONS - REFER TO SECTION R
BB
DD
1
DD
1 CC
BB
VIEW X – X

NOTE: STYLES DL-L AND DR-R ARE NOT AVAILABLE

DUE TO INTERFERENCE BETWEEN PRIMARY UNIT
AND SECONDARY UNIT SIDE MOUNT FLANGE.
RA DR LB UL LA UR RB DL L R
STYLE UR-L

B-68 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Models 3207, 3 8 07, 45 07, 5207, 6 007, 7007 & 8 007
MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY A B C D E F G H I K L T

3207
3807
211
211
328-143TC
388-143TC
4-3/16
4-11/16
2.124
2.374
3.251
3.751
3.250
3.937
7-1/2
7-7/8
2
2-29/32
.625/.624
.625/.624
1-29/32
1-29/32
4-7/16
4-7/16
3/16 X 3/32
3/16 X 3/32
1-3/8
1-3/8
1-7/8
1-7/8
B
4507 321 458-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8
5207 321 528-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8
6007 321 607 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2 2-3/8
7007 381 707 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 4-11/16 1.000/.999 2-9/16 7-1/8 1/4 X 1/8 1-29/32 2-23/32
8007 451 807 10 4.501 8.000 8.750 12-1/2 5-11/16 1.125/1.124 3-7/32 8-7/16 1/4 X 1/8 2-1/2 3-1/16
OUTPUT
MODEL U V W X Y Z AA BB CC DD EE FF GG
FLANGE
STD 1.4375/1.4365 4-11/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-7/8 9-1/2 5-5/8 3/4 11 9 4-1/2 9/16 1/4 1/2
3207
LARGE 1.625/1.624 4-9/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-11/16 9-1/2 5-7/8 31/32 12-1/2 10-1/2 5-1/4 9/16 1/4 1/2
Double Reduction
STD 1.625/1.624 4-1/2 3/8 X 3/16 3-11/16 9-1/2 5-7/8 15/16 12-1/2 10-1/2 5-1/4 9/16 1/4 1/2
3807
LARGE 1.6875/1.6865 5-1/2 3/8 X 3/16 4-11/16 10-1/2 6-1/32 *1-1/16 14 12 6 11/16 1/4 1/2
4507 STD 1.6875/1.6865 5-1/2 3/8 X 3/16 4-11/16 10-1/2 6 *1-1/16 14 12 6 11/16 1/2 1/2
5207 STD 2.1875/2.1865 5-17/32 1/2 X 1/4 4-7/8 10-1/2 6-1/4 1-7/32 16 14 7 13/16 1/2 1/2
6007 STD 2.4375/2.4365 7-5/8 5/8 X 5/16 6-13/16 15-1/2 8-1/4 1-1/4 19-1/2 17 8-1/2 15/16 1/2 3/4
7007 STD 2.9375/2.9365 7-5/8 3/4 X 3/8 6-13/16 15-1/2 10-1/4 1-1/2 22-1/4 19 9-1/2 1-1/16 1/2 3/4
8007 STD 3.4375/3.4355 8-5/16 7/8 X 7/16 7-5/8 16-1/8 11-1/4 1-3/4 24-1/4 21 10-1/2 1-5/16 1/2 3/4
*FLANGE THICKNESS IS 13/16 AT HOLE AREA
OUTPUT Weight
MODEL LL MM NN PP RR SS TT UU VV XX YY ZZ
FLANGE (lbs)
STD 4-3/4 5/16 2-13/16 1 7/16 1/2 3/4 3/8 1
3207 1.499 2.064 2.437 128
LARGE 4-15/16 5/16 2-3/4 1-1/16 7/16 1/2 3/4 3/8 1
STD 4-15/16 5/16 2-3/4 1-1/16 7/16 1/2 3/4 3/8 1
3807 1.499 2.064 2.437 157
LARGE 5-17/32 3/8 3-1/4 1-1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1
4507 STD 2.124 3.251 3.250 5-1/2 3/8 3-1/4 1-1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1 244
5207 STD 2.124 3.251 3.250 6-5/8 3/8 3-3/16 1-3/16 7/16 1/2 1-1/2 3/4 1 292
6007 STD 2.124 3.251 3.250 8-1/2 3/8 3-5/8 1-1/4 7/16 3/4 1-1/2 3/4 1 515
7007 STD 2.374 3.751 3.937 9-1/32 3/8 4 1-5/16 1/2 3/4 2 1 1 709
8007 STD 2.499 4.501 4.625 10-7/16 5/8 4-1/16 1-5/16 1/2 3/4 2-1/8 1-1/16 1-1/2 981
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-69

Models 320 8, 3 8 0 8, 45 0 8, 520 8, 6 00 8, 700 8 & 8 00 8
SQ. 4-1/8 F
FF NPT (5)
J B.C. Z LL
PUSH-OFF 45°
GG NPT (5) K 9/16 Y
SLOTS P (2)
AA
L C'BORE G
R DEEP
N UU V
B MM AA
C.D.
PP
P KEYWAY
X EFF. LGTH.
M
C C.D.
U
NN
O DIA. (4)
EQUALLY
SPACED (2) RR NC
D 1 DEEP
1/8 NPT
1/8 NPT (3)

UU
TT AA
SS
A E T H
XX VV NPT
YY EE DIA. (4)
CC FOR LUBRICATION AND INSTALLATION

BB
SPECIAL, 48C, METRIC AND SAE
DD CONSULT FACTORY FOR COMPLETE
SPECIFICATIONS.
1
DD
1 CC
BB
VIEW AA – AA
HUB CITY LUBRICANT RECOMMENDED
(REFER TO PAGE B-125-126)

NOTE: STYLES LA-L, LB-L, RA-R AND RB-R ARE NOT AVAILABLE
DUE TO INTERFERENCE BETWEEN PRIMARY UNIT C-FLANGE
AND SECONDARY UNIT SIDE MOUNT FLANGE.
RA NOT LB UL LA UR RB NOT L R
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
STYLE UR-L
B-70 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Models 320 8, 3 8 0 8, 45 0 8, 520 8, 6 00 8, 700 8 & 8 00 8

OUTPUT
MODEL PRIMARY SECONDARY
3208 214 328-143TC

A B C
4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250

D E
7-1/2
FLANGE
STD
U V
1.4375/1.4365 4-11/16 3/8 X 3/16

W X
3-7/8
Y
9-1/2
Z
5-5/8
AA
3/4
BB
11
B
LARGE 1.625/1.624 4-9/16 3/8 X 3/16 3-11/16 9-1/2 5-7/8 31/32 12-1/2
STD 1.625/1.624 4-1/2 3/8 X 3/16 3-11/16 9-1/2 5-7/8 15/16 12-1/2
3808 214 388-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8
LARGE 1.6875/1.6865 5-1/2 3/8 X 3/16 4-11/16 10-1/2 6-1/32 *1-1/16 14
4508 324 458-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 STD 1.6875/1.6865 5-1/2 3/8 X 3/16 4-11/16 10-1/2 6 *1-1/16 14
5208 324 528-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 STD 2.1875/2.1865 5-17/32 1/2 X 1/4 4-7/8 10-1/2 6-1/4 1-7/32 16
6008 324 607 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 STD 2.4375/2.4365 7-5/8 5/8 X 5/16 6-13/16 15-1/2 8-1/4 1-1/4 19-1/2
7008 384 707 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 STD 2.9375/2.9365 7-5/8 3/4 X 3/8 6-13/16 15-1/2 10-1/4 1-1/2 22-1/4
8008 454 807 10 4.501 8.000 8.750 12-1/2 STD 3.4375/3.4355 8-5/16 7/8 X 7/16 7-5/8 16-1/8 11-1/4 1-3/4 24-1/4
OUTPUT Weight
MODEL CC DD EE FF GG PP RR SS TT UU VV XX YY ZZ
FLANGE (lbs)
Double Reduction
STD 9 4-1/2 9/16 1/4 1/2 4-3/4 5/16 2-13/16 1 7/16 1/2 3/4 3/8 1
3208 132
LARGE 10-1/2 5-1/4 9/16 1/4 1/2 4-15/16 5/16 2-3/4 1-1/16 7/16 1/2 3/4 3/8 1
STD 10-1/2 5-1/4 9/16 1/4 1/2 4-15/16 5/16 2-3/4 1-1/16 7/16 1/2 3/4 3/8 1
3808 161
LARGE 12 6 11/16 1/4 1/2 5-17/32 3/8 3-1/4 1-1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1
4508 STD 12 6 11/16 1/2 1/2 5-1/2 3/8 3-1/4 1-1/4 1/2 1/2 1 1/2 1 250
5208 STD 14 7 13/16 1/2 1/2 6-5/8 3/8 3-3/16 1-3/16 7/16 1/2 1-1/2 3/4 1 298
6008 STD 17 8-1/2 15/16 1/2 3/4 8-1/2 3/8 3-5/8 1-1/4 7/16 3/4 1-1/2 3/4 1 521
7008 STD 19 9-1/2 1-1/16 1/2 3/4 9-1/32 3/8 4 1-5/16 1/2 3/4 2 1 1 716
8008 STD 21 10-1/2 1-5/16 1/2 3/4 10-7/16 5/8 4-1/16 1-5/16 1/2 3/4 2-1/8 1-1/16 1-1/2 981
*FLANGE THICKNESS IS 13/16 AT HOLE AREA

56C 2-1/4 .6255/.6270
3208 2 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 .8755/.8770
56C 2-1/4 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
3808 2-29/32 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
4508 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
5208 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
6008 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-7/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
7008 4-11/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-23/32 2.374 3.751 3.937
182TC 3-3/16 6-5/8 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 6-3/4 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
143TC 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
8008 5-11/16 3-1/16 2.499 4.501 4.625
182TC 3-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1.1255/1.1270
6-3/4 7-1/4 8.501/8.504 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
213TC 3-1/2 5/16 X 5/32 1.3755/1.3770
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-71

Models 1809, 2109, 2609, 3209, 3809, 4509, 5209, 6009, 7009 & 8 0 0 9
K KEYWAY
L EFF. LGTH. I F
A E T
FF NPT (5) H
GG NPT (5) LL W KEYWAY
G X1 EFF. LGTH.
A
B MM C.D.
NN
C C.D. U
U
D
W KEYWAY
X EFF. LGTH.
AA A
TT DIA. (4)
V Z V1
Y Y1
BB
CC
DD
SS
RR
PP
VIEW A – A

CL
BL
AL
AR
BR
CR
RA DR LB UL LA UR RB DL
STYLE UR-CR
B-72 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Models 1809, 2109, 2609, 3209, 3809, 4509, 5209, 6009, 7009 & 8 0 0 9
MODEL
1809
PRIMARY SECONDARY
131 180V-56C
A
2-15/32
B
1.374
C
1.751
D
1.875
E
4-7/8
F
2
G
.500/.499
H
1-11/16
I
3-1/2
K
1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32
L
B
2109 131 210V-56C 2-29/32 1.499 2.064 2.437 5-5/8 2 .500/.499 1-11/16 3-1/2 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32
2609 131 260V-56C 3-13/32 1.874 2.626 2.938 6 2 .500/.499 1-11/16 3-1/2 1/8 X 1/16 1-9/32
3209 211 320V-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 2 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8
3809 211 380V-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 2-29/32 .625/.624 1-29/32 4-7/16 3/16 X 3/32 1-3/8
4509 321 450V-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2
5209 321 520V-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2
6009 321 609V 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 4-3/16 .875/.874 2-9/16 6-3/4 3/16 X 3/32 2
7009 381 709V 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 4-11/16 1.000/.999 2-9/16 7-1/8 1/4 X 1/8 1-29/32
8009 451 809V 10 4.501 8.000 8.750 12-1/2 5-11/16 1.125/1.124 3-7/32 8-7/16 1/4 X 1/8 2-1/2
MODEL T U V V1 W X X1 Y Y1 Z AA BB
Double Reduction
1809 1-1/2 .750/.749 2-15/16 2 3/16 X 3/32 2-7/16 1-5/8 4-1/2 4-13/16 2-13/16 3/8 5-3/4
2109 1-1/2 .875/.874 2-7/8 2-1/4 3/16 X 3/32 2-5/16 1-13/16 4-3/4 5-1/2 3-1/4 1/2 6
2609 1-1/2 1.000/.999 3-9/32 2-1/2 1/4 X 1/8 2-7/16 1-7/8 5-3/8 6-1/8 3-5/8 1/2 7-1/2
3209 1-7/8 1.250/1.249 3-1/2 2-3/4 1/4 X 1/8 2-25/32 2-1/16 5-7/8 6-1/2 3-3/4 19/32 8-3/4
3809 1-7/8 1.500/1.499 4-5/16 3-1/4 3/8 X 3/16 3-15/32 2-19/32 7 7-1/4 4 5/8 10
4509 2-3/8 1.750/1.749 5-7/16 3-3/4 3/8 X 3/16 4-19/32 3-1/32 8-1/2 8-3/4 5 3/4 12-19/32
5209 2-3/8 2.000/1.999 5-21/32 4-1/4 1/2 X 1/4 5-1/8 3-3/4 9 9-3/4 5-1/2 3/4 16-27/32
6009 2-3/8 2.250/2.249 4-5/8 4-1/2 1/2 X 1/4 4-1/2 4-1/2 9-3/4 10-1/2 6 3/4 20-1/2
7009 2-23/32 2.750/2.751 6-1/16 5-1/2 5/8 X 5/16 5-5/8 5-1/2 11-3/4 13-1/2 8 1 25
8009 3-1/16 3.250/3.248 8-1/2 6-1/2 3/4 X 3/8 7-7/8 6-1/8 15 16-1/2 10 1-1/4 30
MODEL CC DD FF GG LL MM NN PP RR SS TT Weight (lbs)

1809 5 2-1/8 1/8 1/8 1.186 1.334 1.562 4-3/4 4 2 13/32 27
2109 5-1/4 2-1/8 1/8 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 4-3/4 4 2 13/32 40
2609 6-3/4 2-7/8 1/8 1/4 1.186 1.334 1.562 6-3/4 5-3/4 2-7/8 13/32 53
3209 7-3/4 3-1/4 1/4 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 7-1/4 6-1/4 3-1/8 9/16 95
3809 9 3-3/4 1/4 1/2 1.499 2.064 2.437 8 7 3-1/2 9/16 115
4509 11 5 1/2 1/2 2.124 3.251 3.250 11-19/32 10 5 11/16 183
5209 15-1/4 6-3/4 1/2 1/2 2.124 3.251 3.250 12-19/32 11 5-1/2 11/16 212
6009 18-1/2 7-1/2 1/2 3/4 2.124 3.251 3.250 14 12 6 13/16 370
7009 22-1/2 10 1/2 3/4 2.374 3.751 3.937 17-1/2 15 7-1/2 1-1/16 530
8009 27 11-1/2 1/2 3/4 2.499 4.501 4.625 22-1/2 19-1/2 9-3/4 1-5/16 745
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-73

Models 1810, 2110, 2610, 3210, 3 810, 4510, 5210, 6 010, 7010 & 8 010
I F
K H
SQ. FF NPT (5)
O DIA. (4) 9/16
45° EQUALLY SPACED
GG NPT (5)
J B.C. LL
P PUSH-OFF
SLOTS (2) E
N
B MM C.D.
G
L C'BORE
R DEEP
NN
C C.D. M U U
D
W KEYWAY
W KEYWAY X1 EFF.
X EFF. LGTH. LGTH.
AA
E
A E T V Z V1
Y Y1
TT DIA. (4)
BB
CC

DD INSTRUCTIONS - REFER TO SECTION R
SPECIAL, 48C, METRIC AND SAE

SS
RR
PP SPECIFICATIONS.
VIEW E – E

CL
BL
PRIMARY STYLES LB & LA NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECONDARY STYLES AR, BR, OR CR. AL
AR
PRIMARY STYLES RA & RB NOT AVAILABLE
WITH SECONDARY STYLES AL, BL OR CL. BR
CR
RA NOT LB UL LA UR RB NOT
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
STYLE UR-CR

B-74 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Models 1810, 2110, 2610, 3210, 3 810, 4510, 5210, 6 010, 7010 & 8 010

MODEL
1810
2110
PRIMARY SECONDARY
134
134
180V-56C
210V-56C
A
2-15/32
2-29/32
B
1.374
1.499
C
1.751
2.064
D
1.875
2.437
E
4-7/8
5-5/8
U
.750/.749
.875/.874
V
2-15/16
2-7/8
V1
2
2-1/4
W
3/16 X 3/32
3/16 X 3/32
X
2-7/16
2-5/16
X1
1-5/8
1-13/16
B
2610 134 260V-56C 3-13/32 1.874 2.626 2.938 6 1.000/.999 3-9/32 2-1/2 1/4 X 1/8 2-7/16 1-7/8
3210 214 320V-143TC 4-3/16 2.124 3.251 3.250 7-1/2 1.250/1.249 3-1/2 2-3/4 1/4 X 1/8 2-25/32 2-1/16
3810 214 380V-143TC 4-11/16 2.374 3.751 3.937 7-7/8 1.500/1.499 4-5/16 3-1/4 3/8 X 3/16 3-15/32 2-19/32
4510 324 450V-213TC 5-11/16 2.499 4.501 4.625 9-1/8 1.750/1.749 5-7/16 3-3/4 3/8 X 3/16 4-19/32 3-1/32
5210 324 520V-213TC 6-13/32 2.624 5.168 5.375 9-7/8 2.000/1.999 5-21/32 4-1/4 1/2 X 1/4 5-1/8 3-3/4
6010 324 609V 7-9/32 3.250 6.000 6.625 9-13/16 2.250/2.249 4-5/8 4-1/2 1/2 X 1/4 4-1/2 4-1/2
7010 384 709V 8-3/8 3.875 7.000 7.625 10-31/32 2.750/2.751 6-1/16 5-1/2 5/8 X 5/16 5-5/8 5-1/2
8010 454 809V 10 4.501 8.000 8.750 12-1/2 3.250/3.248 8-1/2 6-1/2 3/4 X 3/8 7-7/8 6-1/8
MODEL Y Y1 Z AA BB CC DD FF GG PP RR SS TT Wt. Lbs.

1810 4-1/2 4-13/16 2-13/16 3/8 5-3/4 5 2-1/8 1/8 1/8 4-3/4 4 2 13/32 37
2110 4-3/4 5-1/2 3-1/4 1/2 6 5-1/4 2-1/8 1/8 1/4 4-3/4 4 2 13/32 44
Double Reduction
2610 5-3/8 6-1/8 3-5/8 1/2 7-1/2 6-3/4 2-7/8 1/8 1/4 6-3/4 5-3/4 2-7/8 13/32 57
3210 5-7/8 6-1/2 3-3/4 19/32 8-3/4 7-3/4 3-1/4 1/4 1/2 7-1/4 6-1/4 3-1/8 9/16 99
3810 7 7-1/4 4 5/8 10 9 3-3/4 1/4 1/2 8 7 3-1/2 9/16 119
4510 8-1/2 8-3/4 5 3/4 12-19/32 11 5 1/2 1/2 11-19/32 10 5 11/16 189
5210 9 9-3/4 5-1/2 3/4 16-27/32 15-1/4 6-3/4 1/2 1/2 12-19/32 11 5-1/2 11/16 218
6010 9-3/4 10-1/2 6 3/4 20-1/2 18-1/2 7-1/2 1/2 3/4 14 12 6 13/16 376
7010 11-3/4 13-1/2 8 1 25 22-1/2 10 1/2 3/4 17-1/2 15 7-1/2 1-1/16 537
8010 15 16-1/2 10 1-1/4 30 27 11-1/2 1/2 3/4 22-1/2 19-1/2 9-3/4 1-5/16 753

1810 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2110 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
2610 2 56C 2-9/32 3-3/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-1/2 1.186 1.334 1.562
56C 2-1/4 .6255/.6270
3210 2 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 .8755/.8770
56C 2-1/4 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
3810 2-29/32 1-7/8 1.499 2.064 2.437
143TC 2-3/8 4-1/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 5-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 13/64
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
4510 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
5210 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
6010 4-3/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-3/8 2.124 3.251 3.250
182TC 3-3/16 6-1/4 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 5-7/8 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
7010 4-11/16 143TC 2-3/8 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16 2-23/32 2.374 3.751 3.937
182TC 3-3/16 6-5/8 7-1/4 1/4 X 1/8 8.501/8.504 1.1255/1.1270 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
56C 2-1/4 6-3/4 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .6255/.6270 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
143TC 2-1/4 5-1/2 5-7/8 3/16 X 3/32 4.501/4.503 .8755/.8770 6-1/2 13/32 SLOTS 7/16
8010 5-11/16 3-1/16 2.499 4.501 4.625
182TC 3-3/16 1/4 X 1/8 1.1255/1.1270
6-3/4 7-1/4 8.501/8.504 9 17/32 HOLES 7/16
213TC 3-1/2 5/16 X 5/32 1.3755/1.3770
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B-75

Notes
B-76 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
WARNING CAUTION
Please Read Carefully
The following WARNING and CAUTION information is supplied to you for your protection and to provide
you with many years of trouble free and safe operation of your HUB CITY product.
Read ALL instructions prior to operating reducer. Injury to personnel or reducer failure may be caused by improper
installation, maintenance or operation.
WARNING • Written authorization from HUB CITY is required to operate or use reducers in man lift or people
moving devices.
• Check to make certain application does not exceed the allowable load capacities published in the
current catalog.
• Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining the adequacy of the product for any and all uses to which
Buyer shall apply the product. The application by Buyer shall not be subject to any implied
warranty of fitness for a particular purpose.
• For safety, Buyer or User should provide protective guards over all shaft extensions and any moving
apparatus mounted thereon. The User is responsible for checking all applicable safety codes in his area and
providing suitable guards. Failure to do so may result in bodily injury and/or damage to equipment.
• Hot oil and reducers can cause severe burns. Use extreme care when removing lubrication plugs and vents.
• Make certain that the power supply is disconnected before attempting to service or remove any
components. Lock out the power supply and tag it to prevent unexpected application of power.
• Reducers are not to be considered fail safe or self-locking devices. If these features are required, a
properly sized, independent holding device should be utilized. Reducers should not be used as a brake.
• Any brakes that are used in conjunction with a reducer must be sized or positioned in such a way so as to
not subject the reducer to loads beyond the catalog rating.
• Lifting supports including eyebolts are to be used for vertically lifting the gearbox only and no other
associated attachments or motors.
• Use of an oil with an EP additive on units with backstops may prevent proper operation of the backstop. Injury
to personnel, damage to the reducer or other equipment may result.
• Overhung loads subject shaft bearings and shafts to stress which may cause premature bearing failure and/or
shaft breakage from bending fatigue, if not sized properly.
CAUTION • Test run unit to verify operation. If the unit tested is a prototype, that unit must be of current production.
• If the speed reducer cannot be located in a clear and dry area with access to adequate cooling air supply,
then precautions must be taken to avoid the ingestion of contaminants such as water and the reduction in
cooling ability due to exterior contaminants.
• Mounting bolts should be routinely checked to ensure that the unit is firmly anchored for proper operation.
In the event of the resale of any of the goods, in whatever form, Resellers/Buyers will include the following language in a
conspicuous place and in a conspicuous manner in a written agreement covering such sale:
The manufacturer makes no warranties or representations, express or implied, by operation of law or otherwise,
as to the merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose of the goods sold hereunder. Buyer acknowledges that
it alone has determined that the goods purchased hereunder will suitably meet the requirements of their intend-
ed use. In no event will the manufacturer be liable for consequential, incidental or other damages.
Resellers/Buyers agree to also include this entire document including the warnings and cautions above in a conspicuous place and
in a conspicuous manner in writing to instruct users on the safe usage of the product.
This information should be read together with all other printed information supplied by HUB CITY.
R-2 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
WARNING CAUTION
Please Read Carefully
This catalog is not intended to provide operational instructions. Appropriate Marathon Electric instructions provided with the
motor and precautions attached to the motor should be read carefully prior to installation, operation and/or maintenance of the
equipment. Injury to personnel or motor failure may be caused by improper installation, maintenance or operation.
The following WARNING and CAUTION information is supplied to you for your protection and to provide
you with many years of trouble free and safe operation of your Marathon Electric product:
WARNING • Disconnect power and lock out driven equipment before working on a motor.
• Always keep hands and clothing away from moving parts.
• The lifting support on the motor is not to be used to lift the entire machine. Only the motor attached
directly to the support may be safely lifted by the support.
• Install and ground per local and national codes.
• Discharge all capacitors before servicing a single phase motor.
• Misapplication of a motor in a hazardous environment can cause fire or an explosion and result in serious
injury. Only the end user, local authority having jurisdiction, and/or insurance underwriter are qualified
to identify the appropriate class(es), group(s), division and temperature code. Marathon Electric person-
nel can not evaluate or recommend what motors may be suitable for use in hazardous environments. If
a motor is nameplated for hazardous locations, do not operate the motor without all of the grease and
drain plugs installed.
• Never attempt to measure the temperature rise of a motor by touch. Temperature rise must be measured
by thermometer, resistance, imbedded detector or thermocouple.
• Motors with automatic reset thermal protectors will automatically restart when the protector temperature
drops sufficiently. Do not use motors with automatic reset thermal protectors in applications where auto-
matic restart will be hazardous to personnel or equipment.
• Motors with manual reset thermal protectors may start unexpectedly after the protector trips when the
surrounding air is at +20°Fahrenheit or lower. If the manual reset protector trips, disconnect motor from
its power supply. After the protector cools (five minutes or more), it can be reset and power may be
applied to the motor.
• Connect all protective device leads, marked P1, P2, etc., per instructions supplied with the motor.
• Operation of a motor at other than its nameplate rating may result in fire, damage to equipment or seri-
ous injury to personnel.
• For safety, Buyer or User should provide protective guards over all shaft extensions and any moving appa-
ratus mounted thereon. The User is responsible for checking all applicable safety codes in his area and
providing suitable guards. Failure to do so may result in bodily injury and/or damage to equipment.
CAUTION • Consult qualified personnel with questions and all electrical repairs must be performed by trained and
qualified personnel only.
• For motors nameplated as “belted duty only”, do not operate the motor without belts properly installed.
• Motors and/or driven equipment should not be operated faster than their rated speed.
• For inverter applications, follow the inverter manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
• Make sure the motor is properly secured and aligned before operation.
Resale of Goods
In the event of the resale of any of the goods, in whatever form, Resellers/Buyers will include the following language in a conspicuous
place and in a conspicuous manner in a written agreement covering such sale:
The manufacturer makes no warranty or representations, express or implied, by operation of law or
otherwise, as to the merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose of the goods sold hereunder. Buyer acknowl-
edges that it alone has determined that the goods purchased hereunder will suitably meet the requirements of their
intended use. In no event will the manufacturer be liable for consequential, incidental or other damages. Even if the
repair or replacement remedy shall be deemed to have failed of its essential purpose under Section 2-719 of the
Uniform Commercial Code, the manufacturer shall have no liability to Buyer for consequential damages.
R
Resellers/Buyers agree to also include this entire document including the warnings and cautions above in a conspicuous place and in a
conspicuous manner in writing to instruct users on the safe usage of the product.
This information should be read together with all other printed information supplied by Marathon Electric.
For more information contact: Marathon Electric Manufacturing Corporation, Subsidiary of Regal-Beloit Corporation, 100 E.
Randolph St., Wausau, WI 54401 Phone: 715-675-3311 or Fax: 715-675-8030.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 R-3

HUB CITY - LUBRICATION & INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
G e a r D r i v e Wa r n i n g s & C a u t i o n s
IMPORTANT SELECTION INFORMATION CAUTION
The system of connected rotating parts must be free from
critical speed, torsional, or other type vibration, regardless Do not operate the unit without making sure it contains the
of how induced. The responsibility for this system correct amount of oil. Do not overfill or underfill with oil, or
analysis lies with the purchaser of the gear unit. injury to personnel, unit, or other equipment may result.
WARNING CAUTION
SHIELD ALL ROTATING PARTS Oil should be changed with greater frequency if unit is
For safety, purchaser or user must provide protective used in a severe environment such as dusty or humid or
guards over all shaft extensions and any moving apparatus high or low temperatures.
mounted on the unit. The uses is responsible for checking CAUTION
and complying with all applicable safety codes in his area Do not mix nonsynthetic and synthetic oil in the unit.
and providing suitable guards. Failure to do so may result
in bodily injury and/or damage to equipment. CAUTION
If unit is used in the food or drug industry (including
WARNING animal food) consult the petroleum supplier or HUB CITY
Wear protective clothing and eye shields when installing for recommendations of lubricants which meet the
or maintaining unit and machine. specifications of FDA, USDA and/or other authoritative
bodies having jurisdiction. Standard lubricants are not
WARNING
suitable for these applications or these industries.
A unit cannot be used as an integral part of a machine
superstructure which would impose additional loads on CAUTION
the unit other than those imposed by the torque being Inspect shafts and components for paint, burrs, or other
transmitted, or by any shaft mounted power transmitting imperfections before installing components. Do not use
device such as sprockets, pulleys, or couplings. excessive force or pounding to install components onto
unit shafts, as this may cause damage to shafts, bearings,
WARNING
or gears.
Make certain that all tools and other items are clear from PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE — Keep shafts and
rotating parts before starting machine. Stand clear, and vent plug clean to prevent foreign particles from entering
start machine slowly to be sure all components are secure seals or gear case. Inspect periodically for oil leaks.
and operating properly.
CAUTION
WARNING STORAGE OF HUB CITY REDUCERS: A gearbox does
For safe operation and to continue the unit warranty, when not have a definable shelf life. The main points of
installing, reinstalling, or replacing a factory installed deterioration are rusting of non-painted surfaces and drying
fastener for servicing purpose, or to accommodate the out of the seal lips. Proper storage of drives in a cool dry
mounting of guards, shields or other light load imposing place in a carton away from exposure to ultraviolet light
devices, or for mounting the unit, it becomes the should permit protection for approximately one year.
responsibility of the purchaser or user to properly If the unit is to be inoperative for a longer period of time,
determine the quality, grade of fastener, thread completely fill the gear case with regular lubricant
engagement, load carrying capacity, tightening torque, containing rust and oxidation inhibitors, tag the gear case
and the means of torque retention. and any connected motor to prevent operation until the proper
COUPLINGS — Flexible couplings to input and output oil level is obtained. Do not operate a completely filled
shafts are recommended because they minimize bearing gear case. Coat external shafts with a rust preventative oil
and gear wear caused by slight misalignment. Follow cou- or grease. At least every three months, rotate the input
pling manufacturer’s recommendations for installation and shaft until the output rotates at least one revolution to
shielding. ensure all internal parts are coated and that the shaft
SHEAVES AND SPROCKETS — When mounting seals are free and the seal journals are coated with oil.
sheaves or sprockets, the center of the load should be The most sensitive part of the gearbox is the radial lip
located as close to the reducer as possible. Excessive seals. Even under ideal storage conditions, the seal lips
overhung loading could result in early failures of bearing may deteriorate or take a set, losing their sealing effect
or shaft. Refer to the general catalog or contact Hub City and reducing service life. Therefore, it may be necessary
for overhung load ratings. Follow manufacturer’s to replace the seals prior to putting the units in service
recommendations for installation and shielding. depending upon the length and conditions of storage.
R-4 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

Wo r m G e a r S p e e d R e d u c e r s
WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS - When position selected is Output Vertical-Up (Figures W5
SINGLE & DOUBLE REDUCTION & W9) or Output Vertical Down (Figures W7 & W11) an
LUBRICATION adequate amount of lubrication must be supplied to the
General Note – These instructions contain information for upper Bearing through Grease Fitting (4, Figures W5, W7,
the standard Worm Gear Speed Reducer product line. For W9 & W11).
Instructions specific to the Hub3™ Worm Gear Speed All Worm Gear Speed Reducer Drop Bearing Models are
Reducers see the CleanLine Products pages R-23 and R 24. equipped with Double Seals on the Output Shaft.
Periodically the Pipe Plugs should be removed (5, Figures
CAUTION W5-W8) a Grease Fitting inserted in one plug hole and
ALL WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS ARE SHIPPED enough grease injected to purge all of the old grease from
DRY. OIL MUST BE ADDED PRIOR TO OPERATION. between the seals.
All HUB CITY Worm Gear Speed Reducers are splash CAUTION
lubricated. The unique design of the reducers permits nearly
universal mounting by placing a fill, drain and oil level plug CHANGING LUBRICANT — After the first 100 hours of
at the proper location for mounting positions. Figures W1- operation, drain out initial oil, flush out the worm gear case
W12 show common mounting positions for the different with an approved nonflammable, non-toxic solvent, such as
style reducers. Lubriplate Syn Flush, Lubriplate Pure Flush, Whitmore’s
Flushing Oil (#06802030) or Medallion™ Flushing Oil
CAUTION Kosher (#06812010), and refill. Thereafter, oil should be
WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS: Review the approved changed at least every 2,500 operating hours (5,000 for
mounting positions and lubrication levels identified in synthetic oil lubricant) or every 6 months (12 months for
Figures W1-W12 on this sheet. Do not deviate from the synthetic oil lubricant), which ever occurs first.
mounting positions or lubrication levels shown without APPROXIMATE OIL CAPACITIES - WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS
contacting the factory. QUANTITY (pints)
DOUBLE REDUCTION WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS: SERIES MOUNTING SHAFT OUTPUT HOLLOW BORE DROP BEARING
POSITION MODELS MODELS MODELS
If the final mounting position of the Double Reduction WORM TOP 0.31
Reducer is such that either the input shaft of the Primary 130 WORM BOTTOM 0.25 N/A N/A
VERTICAL OUTPUT 0.16
Unit or the input (high speed) shaft of the Secondary Unit WORM TOP 0.56 0.56
is in a vertical position, consult HUB CITY for special 180 WORM BOTTOM 0.47 0.47 N/A
lubrication instructions. VERTICAL OUTPUT 0.34 0.34
WORM TOP 1.2 1.2
The Primary Unit and the Secondary Unit (Figure W13) each 210 WORM BOTTOM 0.88 0.88 N/A
have independent oil reservoirs. Each unit must be filled to VERTICAL OUTPUT 0.75 0.75
WORM TOP 1.6 1.6
the specified level of oil indicated in Figures W1-W12. 260 WORM BOTTOM 1.1 1.1 N/A
WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS: After selecting the VERTICAL OUTPUT 0.88 0.88
position that the unit will be mounted but before operating: WORM TOP 3.5 3.5 5.5
320 WORM BOTTOM 2.5 2.5 3.3
Remove Fill and Breather Plug (1, Figures W1-W12) and VERTICAL OUTPUT 1.9 1.9 3.9 VERTICAL DOWN
Oil Level Plug (2, Figures W1-W12). Clean threads on 1.9 VERTICAL UP
WORM TOP 4.2 4.2 6.5
removed plugs and plug holes with degreaser. Fill gearbox WORM BOTTOM 3.2 3.2 4.2
380
with recommended lubricant (see APPROXIMATE OIL VERTICAL OUTPUT 2.6 2.6 4.8 VERTICAL DOWN
CAPACITY CHART in these instructions and GEAR 2.6 VERTICAL UP
WORM TOP 7 5.2 9
LUBRICANT page of these instructions) to a level near the 450 WORM BOTTOM 4.8 4 5.7
centerline of the uppermost horizontal shaft or until lubri- VERTICAL OUTPUT 3.8 3 5.8 VERTICAL DOWN
3.8 VERTICAL UP
cant starts coming out oil level plug hole. Install plugs WORM TOP 10.6 7.3 14.5
securely in gear case. Note — Plug with breather (1, 520 WORM BOTTOM 7.5 5.1 9.3
Figures W1-W12) must always be installed in the top of VERTICAL OUTPUT 5.5 3.8 9.4 VERTICAL DOWN
5.5 VERTICAL UP
gear case, opposite Drain Plug (3, Figures W1-W12). HUB WORM TOP 23 20 33
CITY Worm Gear Speed Reducers Series 60, 70 and 80 60 WORM BOTTOM 16 15 20
13 VERTICAL DOWN
have drain plug at 3A position. VERTICAL OUTPUT 13 12
23 VERTICAL UP
VARIATIONS FROM NORMAL CONDITIONS — Worm WORM TOP 35 31 50
Gear Speed Reducers: Input speeds of more than 1,800 70 WORM BOTTOM 25 23 33
VERTICAL OUTPUT 21 19 21 VERTICAL DOWN
RPM may require an adjustment in oil level. Side mount 35 VERTICAL UP
units (see Figure W1) that run less than 800 RPM with the WORM TOP 55 73
output shaft vertical may require a zerk fitting installed to
lubricate upper bearing. When input is in a vertical position
80 WORM BOTTOM
VERTICAL OUTPUT
WORM TOP
35
31
N/A
0.70
42
31 VERTICAL DOWN
49 VERTICAL UP
R
consult HUB CITY for special lubrication instructions. W300 WORM BOTTOM N/A 0.40 N/A
Figures W1-W4 show four common mounting positions of VERTICAL OUTPUT 0.40
the shaft output and hollow bore units. Figures W5-W8 WORM TOP 3.2
W50B WORM BOTTOM N/A 2 N/A
show four common mounting positions of Drop Bearing VERTICAL OUTPUT 3.5
Units. Figures W9-W12 show four common mounting WORM TOP 5.25 5.25
positions of vertical mount Units. W516 WORM BOTTOM 2.75 2.75 N/A
VERTICAL OUTPUT 2.6 2.6
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 R-5

Wo r m G e a r S p e e d R e d u c e r s
OUTPUT
INPUT
1 1 OUTPUT
2
WORM GEAR SPEED REDUCERS -
2
INPUT SINGLE & DOUBLE REDUCTION
INSTALLATION
OPERATING POSITIONS — Normal Worm Gear Speed
3 3A Reducer positions are shown in Figures W1-W12. For spe-
Figure W1:Side Mount 3 cial applications, mounting position may be inclined.
NOTE: This mounting position requires factory modifications.
Figure W2:Worm Top However, if position varies more than 15°, it may be
1 1 necessary to make some adaptations to maintain a
OUTPUT OUTPUT
2 sufficient oil level. Contact your local distributor or HUB
INPUT
2 CITY for recommendations. Input rotation of Speed
90° INPUT
+
–30° Reducers can be either clockwise or counterclockwise.
3
4A CAUTION
4 3 3A
SHAFT MOUNT WORM GEAR UNITS — The Torque Arm
Figure W3:Shaft Mount Figure W4:Worm Bottom Pad Ref. 4A (Figure W3) can be attached to any of the four
5 available mounting surface locations of the unit.
4 5 1
Install and position Torque Arm Ref. 4 at 90° to the place
1 2 5
(a line drawn) between the center of the output hollow
bore and the bolt that attached the Torque Arm 4 to the
5 Torque Arm Pad 4A of the unit, Ref. (Figure W3). The
2 3
3 Torque Arm should be positioned to be in tension, NOT
Figure W5:Output Vertical-Up Figure W6:Worm Bottom compression, based on output rotation of the gear drive.
1 4 CAUTION
2 2 1
5
Excessive setscrew torque may cause damage to the output
sleeves in hollow bore Worm Gear Reducers. Please refer to
the following table for recommended tightening torque.
3 5
5 5 3 Size Recommended Torque
Figure W7:Output Vertical Down Figure W8:Worm Top 1/4-20 NC 87 LB.–IN
1 5/16-18 NC 165 LB.–IN
4
1 3/8-16 NC 290 LB.–IN
2
2 Shaft Mount Worm Gear Reducers equipped with QD

bushings utilize a bushing on both sides to provide shaft
3
support. However the keyways on QD bushings are not
3
Figure W9:Output Vertical-Up Figure W10:Worm Bottom timed to the mounting holes, therefore it is not possible to
NOTE: This mounting position requires factory modifications.
install keys in both bushings. One key is sufficient to carry
1
1
4 the transmitted torque.
2 CAUTION
2
When installing Q/D Bushing Kits on Worm Gear
3
Reducers, follow the Q/D Bushing manufacturer
recommendations for bolt tightening torque and
3
Figure W11:Output Vertical Down Figure W12:Worm Top installation methods. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the bushings and unit.
SECONDARY UNIT
PRIMARY UNIT CAUTION
RUN-IN PERIOD — A new Worm Gear Reducer will not
operate at maximum efficiency during the run-in period.
Increased current draw or heat rise may be seen during
Figure W13: Double Reduction this time.
R-6 CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

HUB CITY WORM GEAR DRIVES INSTRUCTIONS
Maintenance Instructions
These general maintenance instructions cover Series 130 through Series 80 reinstalling, or replacing a factory installed fastener for servicing purposes, or
Worm Gear Reducers. Your reducer may be slightly different than the to accommodate the mounting of guards, shields or other light load imposing
reducers shown in the figures below, and to the right, but these general devices, or for mounting the unit, it becomes the responsibility of the customer
instructions will still apply. or user to properly determine the quality, grade of fastener, thread
engagement, load carrying capacity, tightening torque, and the means of
It is advisable to periodically inspect your Speed Reducer for any signs of torque retention.
impending service. Spare or replacement parts can often be ordered and
obtained before disassembly is necessary, thus minimizing machine
24 10 33 32 1 9 27 7
down-time. The following symptoms can be inspected visually without
disassembly and may, in some cases, indicate extensive maintenance 25
procedures.
OIL LEAKING FROM SEALS—indicates that shaft and/or seals are worn and
need replacing. Keep dirt and foreign particles off shafts in the area of the 14
seals to minimize wear.
OIL LEAKING FROM INPUT OR OUTPUT CAPS, CAP SCREWS OR PIPE 5
PLUGS—might be corrected by retightening or removal and recoating with
Loctite® or pipe sealant as required before tightening. If this does not correct 15
the leaking condition, disassembly will be necessary to replace o-rings. 18
EXCESSIVE END PLAY OF SHAFTS—if there is noticeable shaft movement
4
when couplings are removed and shaft is moved back and forth, it may be an
indication of bearing wear. Replacement may be required.
EXCESSIVE BACKLASH—would indicate worm gears which might have to 31
be replaced.
HIGH INTERNAL OPERATING TEMPS (ABOVE 200°F OR 95°C)—if a unit
exhibits high internal operating temperatures, one or a combination of the
following may be the cause.
Figure 2 — Ball Bearing Input Shaft Assembly
1. Unit is overloaded, application may require replacement with higher
capacity unit. 9 10
2. Damaged bearings, components or improper bearing setting. 33
3. Improper oil level, lubricant type or lubricant contamination. 10 9 32 1 7
4. High ambient temperature. 14
5. High speed operation in excess of rated values.
18
IMPORTANT 14
In the initial factory assembly, Loctite® is used on the threads of all
capscrews. If any screws are removed, a new application of Loctite® is 4
required. NOTE: Screw threads and the threaded hole must be degreased 6
before application of Loctite®. 25
25
WARNING 23 24
For safe operation and to continue the unit warranty, when installing,
Figure 3 — Tapered Bearing Input Shaft Assembly
28 12 11
NOTE: 25 24 10 32 33 7 38 4A
SERIES 130
16 HAS BALL 14
BEARINGS ON 36
OUTPUT 5
19
15
4 18
31 1
6
19 2 23 22 11 12 8 20 26 2 16
Figure 1 — Typical Output Shaft Assembly Figure 4 — Motorized Input Assembly
A CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

The figures on page B-128 represent a general design configuration for Hub 3. If old seals are to be salvaged, cover keyways with cellophane tape,
City Century Series Worm Gear Speed Reducers. There are design differ- plastic shim stock, or paper before sliding seals over keyway. Remove cap
ences from model to model, and a general outline of the basic construction is screws from Output Shaft Caps (2) and CAREFULLY remove output shaft
offered here for clarification and future reference: assembly. Be careful to keep bearings clean and
not to damage Worm Gear (8) teeth.
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY STYLES 4. Remove cap screws from closed input cap (4)
Motorized Versions and open input cap if applicable. Series 60, 70,
Series 130-380 Single ball bearing construction opposite motor end as and 80 may have fan shroud in place of cap. Use
shown in Figure 4. same procedure. Series 130 requires removal of
Series 450-520 Double tapered bearing arrangement opposite motor expansion plug. The expansion plug is a non
end, not shown salvageable part. CAREFULLY remove input
Series 60-80 N/A shaft assembly. On motorized units, remove
Shaft Input Versions entire quill assembly from the back of the unit.
Series 130-260 Ball bearing construction as shown in Figure 2. No open On shaft input units, remove input seal (18) or
input cap. open cap if applicable and snap ring (27) if used
Series 320-70 Direct mounted tapered bearings, straddle mounted on and press worm shaft out through front bearing
worm, and open input cap used as shown in Figure 3. (9). NOTE: Some series allow removal of input
Series 80 Double tapered bearing arrangement opposite shaft shaft assembly without removal of front seal
extension, with single spherical roller bearing on shaft through closed cap end. On Series 80, remove
extension side. (Not shown) bearing locknut, lock washer, and flat washer. FIGURE 5 – Removal of
Press input shaft out of housing and bearings. Worm Gear and Bearing Cone
Housing Construction
Series 130-260 Have 56C/143TC flange cast integral with housing. All 5. Examine Seals (13) for wear or damage and remove from caps or housing
other input flanges and all other models utilize bolt-on only if replacement is necessary. (When servicing units, seals should
connection. always be replaced.) When removed from caps or housing, seals should
Series 130 Utilizes an expansion plug instead of high speed cover not be reused.
(Ref. #4) 6. Remove Bearing Cups (11) from output caps and input caps when
applicable with a puller tool. If driven out, gently tap opposite sides of the
OUTPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY STYLES bearing cups with a flat punch so they are removed evenly and no damage
All series, with the exception of the Series 130, use a straddle mounted occurs to caps.
tapered bearing design as shown in Figure 1 on both shaft and hollow bore 7. To remove Worm Gear (8) and Bearing Cone (12) from Output Shaft (6),
outputs. Series 130 uses ball bearings. rest one side of gear on blocks and press shaft through gear and one
bearing cone as shown in Figure 5.
Series 450, 520, 60, and 70 hollow shaft units have flanged output sleeves.
Series 60, 70, and 80 have shouldered solid output shafts. CAUTION
Do not attempt to strip the gear and both bearing cones off the output shaft in
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE one operation. The Key (17) will lodge against Bearing Cone (12) and severe
damage will occur.
CAUTION
Series 450, 520, 60 and 70 units have flanged output sleeves on the shaft
The exterior threaded holes on this drive are for mounting the drive or drive
mount models. To remove the worm gear from these models, the sleeve must
accessories (couplings, sprockets, etc.). They are not to be used for lifting the
be pressed out so gear moves away from the flange. The back side of the
drive or any driver/driven equipment.
flange is recessed to allow a puller to be used to remove the bearing cone
from the short end of the output sleeve.
WARNING
Make certain that the power supply is disconnected before attempting to Series 60, 70, and 80 have shouldered output shaft. To remove gear
service or install the unit, or remove any components. Lock out the power assembly, press on shaft so gear assembly moves away from shoulder.
supply, and tag it to prevent unexpected application of power.
8. If input shaft bearings are to be reused, use bearing puller tool or proper
Refer to the figures on page B-128 for the discussion on assembly and bearing removal fixture so no damage occurs to bearings.
disassembly procedures.
ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect reducer from drive motor, couplings, or driven shafts to guard
against personal injury. Remove all sprockets or sheaves from reducer 1. All parts, including the gear case, should be cleaned thoroughly with an
shafts with a puller tool to prevent accidental damage to shafts. approved, non-flammable, nontoxic solvent. Any accumulation of sludge
deposits or corrosion should be removed. Whenever input or output caps
2. Remove Pipe Plug from bottom of Gear Case and drain all lubricant from are removed, it is recommended that seals and shims be replaced. These
unit. and other miscellaneous items are included in each Reducer Repair Kit.
WARNING Before reassembly, examine input and output shafts for grooving in the
shaft seal area. If the shafts are to be reused, polish out any imperfections
Oil, housings, and other components can reach high temperatures during with a fine grade of emery cloth. The polishing motion should be
operation, and can cause severe burns. Use extreme care when removing circumferential, not axial or spiral in direction. Shaft grooving .010 deep or
lubrication plugs and vents while servicing the unit. greater cannot be corrected by polishing. These shafts should be replaced
or the seal installed in a new axial location to allow contact in non grooved
WARNING areas. Some units do not allow space for repositioning of the seal.
Wear protective clothing and eye shields when installing or maintaining unit
and machine.
CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567 B

2. Replace Bearing Cups (14) in output caps and input caps when applicable removing shim until bearings bind, then adding one .002 shim at a time
being careful to remove any foreign particles in the counterbore. Bearing until shaft rotates freely with .001-.003 endplay. Liberally add grease to
cup must seat squarely in counterbore of cap. If cups must be tapped into o-ring, Loctite® cap screws and tighten properly.
place, use a rubber hammer or brass driver to protect cup surfaces. Do not On Series 80, install only Roller Bearing Inner Race on input shaft.
insert seals at this time. Install shaft in housing, install Inner Bearing Cup, then press both
bearing cones onto shaft. Install Outer Bearing Cup, flat washer, lock
3. PREASSEMBLY OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SHAFTS. washer, and locknut. Tighten locknut fully and bend tang of lock
IMPORTANT: The Models 130-380 motorized style input and Series 130- washer into slot on locknut. Install roller bearing into housing and install
260 shaft style units use a National Fine Grade 8 cap screw to secure the open cap. No bearing adjustment is required at open cap. Adjust
rear ball bearing to the shaft. The assembly procedure for the cap screw is tapered roller bearings with gaskets at closed cap.
critical and MUST be followed to assure proper gearbox operation. C. Motorized style assemblies using a single ball bearing. Models 130-380.
A. Clean the cap screw to be free of dirt and oil. Install preassembly in housing. All units should have bearing installed
on shaft and cap screw assembled by following procedure listed earlier
B. Clean the threaded hole with a swab or air pressure.
at this time. Install proper amount of shims (24) between bearing outer
C. Apply Loctite® Primer N to the threaded hole. Do this before
race and end cap to eliminate any movement of bearing outer race.
preassembly so the primer is dry when you are ready to install the screw.
Liberally add grease to o-ring (25), Loctite® cap screws (14) and
D. Assemble the rear bearing, taking care to press on bearing inner race tighten properly.
only. 5. Installation of the output assembly. IMPORTANT: The Worm must be
E. Slide the flat washer onto the screw. centered on the Worm Gear for maximum gear life. Follow the procedure below
F. Apply green Loctite® #640 to the screw and also the threaded hole in to achieve proper bearing adjustment and gear position.
the worm. A. Insert output assembly carefully into gear case so that worm is meshed with worm
G. Tighten the screw to the appropriate torque as listed below. gear. Install one each .002 and .005 shims (22) (23) on each Output Cap (2,
Series Cap Screw Tightening Torque Figures 1 and 2) and install caps over shaft. Fasten caps and shims to gear case
130 5/16-24 x 3/4 20 ft.-lbs. by torquing down cap screws evenly.
180 5/16-24 x 3/4 20 ft.-lbs. B. Adjust bearings by removing or adding shims until
bearings bind. Then add one shim at a time until shaft rotates
210 5/16-24 x 3/4 20 ft.-lbs.
freely, with no endplay. NOTE: the position of the gear will be
260 3/8-24 x 1-1/4 37 ft.-lbs. closer to center if the total shim pack thickness on each cap
320 1/2-20 x 1-1/2 90 ft.-lbs. does not vary by more than .005. After adjusting bearings,
380 1/2-20 x 1-1/2 90 ft.-lbs. but before permanently bolting output caps or installing
NOTE: PREASSEMBLY OF BALL BEARING STYLE INPUT SHAFTS. o-rings, coat worm gear teeth with blueing compound.
Series 130 and 210 require assembly of the rear ball bearing in the housing C. Turn Worm Shaft (7) by hand while putting a slight load on FIGURE 7 –
after the worm shaft has been inserted. Models 180 and 260 can have both output shaft so that worm marks contact points in blueing Gear Pattern
bearings preassembled before final assembly. The procedure for securing the on gear.
cap screw listed above should be carefully followed for Models 180 and 260 D. Sight through pipe plug holes with an inspection light and determine if the contact
of the worm is centered on both sides of the gear. If worm is not centered, the
at this time.
gear position must be shifted by moving shims from one side to the other. This
When reassembling worm and worm gear assemblies, refer to Figures 1 and will maintain proper bearing adjustment. See Figure 7.
2 so that all parts are included in their proper position. Be sure that parts are E. Liberally apply grease to o-ring and Loctite® cap screws and tighten properly.
pressed tightly against one another and that no 6. Oil Seals (13, Figures 1 and 2) can now be installed in input and output caps.
Before installing seal, coat O.D. of seal with Permatex and apply grease to seal
foreign material is included between them. If shaft
lips. Force should be applied evenly, with a driver, near the outer edge of the seal
has a shoulder, the appropriate gear, spacer, or
until seals are flush with outer surface of caps. If seals must be installed without
bearing must be assembled tightly against it.
a seal driver, a rubber hammer or brass driver should be used to protect the seal.
Figure 6 shows the recommended method of 3
CAUTION
pressing the Bearing Cone (1) onto the Shaft (3).
An Inserting Tool (2) is shown pressing evenly on Damage to seals can be avoided by covering the shaft keyways with cellophane
the bearing inner race. This tool may be machined tape, plastic shim stock, or paper before sliding seals onto the shaft. The spring
for this purpose in your shop. A substitute inserting loaded lip of the seal must face toward the inside of reducer to operate properly.
tool may also be made from tubing which would 2 7. Apply sealant to drain plug and replace in the bottom of the gear case. Remove
1 fill and breather plugs and fill gear case with recommended lubricant, following
have an I.D. sufficient to accept the shaft and an
O.D. no larger than the inner bearing race. all the procedures detailed in the Lubrication and Installation Instructions which
are included with Speed Reducer.
CAUTION CAUTION
Contact on the cage of the bearing, or using the Do not operate the unit without making sure it contains the correct amount of oil.
bearing cup to press the bearing on, will damage FIGURE 6 – Reassembly of Do not overfill or underfill with oil, or injury to personnel, unit, or other equipment
bearing. Worm Gear and Bearing Cone
may result.
4. Installation of Input Assembly CAUTION
A. Shaft input styles using ball bearings, Models 130-260.
Install preassembly into housing. Models 130 and 210 will require Do not mix nonsynthetic and synthetic oil in the unit.
installation of rear bearing while input shaft is in the housing. Install
washer and cap screw, taking care to follow the procedure outlined in
WARNING
Section 3 on these models at this time. Then install proper amount of Make certain that all tools and other items are clear from rotating parts before
shims (24) between bearing outer race and end cap to eliminate any starting machine. Stand clear, and start machine slowly to be sure all
axial movement of bearing outer race. Liberally add grease to o-ring components are secure, and operating properly.
(25), Loctite® cap screws (14) and tighten properly. For further information that may be helpful, see the Lubrication, Installation
B. Shaft input styles using tapered bearing. Models 320-80 and Illustrated Replacement Parts sheets for your Speed Reducer. Should a
Install preassembly into housing. Preassembly will consist of worm particular problem arise or additional information be required, contact the
shaft and two bearing cones. Install two (2) each shims 23 & 24 nearest HUB CITY Sale Office or Industrial Power Transmission Distributor
between gear case and input caps. Bearings are adjusted by adding or which are listed in the Yellow Pages, or contact HUB CITY, Aberdeen, SD.
C CALL: (605) 225-0360 FAX: (605) 225-0567

TAB 10
Electric Drives Linear Motion and
and Controls Hydraulics Assembly Technologies Pneumatics Service
Axial Piston Fixed Motor RA 91001/09.07

Replaces: 07.05
/36
AA2FM (A2FM)
Technical data sheet
Series 6
Sizes Nominal pressure/Peak pressure
5 4550/5100 psi (315/350 bar)
10 to 200 5800/6500 psi (400/450 bar)
250 to 1000 5100/5800 psi (350/400 bar)
Open and closed circuits
Contents Features
Ordering Code / Standard Program 2...3 – Fixed motor with axial tapered piston rotary group of bent
Technical Data 4...9 axis design, for hydrostatic drives in open and closed circuits
Ordering Code / Unit Dimensions, Size 5 10 – For use in mobile and stationary application areas
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 10, 12, 16 11 – The output speed is dependent on the flow of the pump and
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 23, 28, 32 12...13 the displacement of the motor
Unit Dimensions, Size 45 14...15 – The output torque increases with the pressure differential
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 56, 63 16...17 between the high and low pressure sides and with increa-
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 80, 90 18...19 sing displacement
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 107, 125 20...21 – Careful selection of the displacements offered, permit sizes
Unit Dimensions, Sizes 160, 180 22...23 to be matched to practically every application
Unit Dimensions, Size 200 24 – High power density
Unit Dimensions, Size 250 25 – Compact design
Unit Dimensions, Size 355 26 – High overall efficiency
Unit Dimensions, Size 500 27
– Good starting characteristics
Unit Dimensions, Size 710 28
Unit Dimensions, Size 1000 29 – Economical conception
Flush and Boost Pressure Valve 30 – One piece pistons with piston rings
Pressure Relief Valve 31
BVD Counterbalance Valve 32...33
Speed Measurement 34
Installation Notes 35
General Notes 36
/36 Bosch Rexroth Corp. AA2FM RA 91001/09.07
Ordering Code / Standard Program (ordering code size 5 see page 10)
M / 6 W – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Hydraulic fluid
Mineral oil and HFD. HFD for sizes 250 to 1000 only in combination with long-life bearing “L“ (no code)
01 HFB-, HFC hydraulic fluid Sizes 10 to 200 (no code)
Sizes 250 to 1000 (only in combination with long-life bearing “L“) E-
Axial piston unit 10 to 180 200 250 355 to 1000

Bent axis design, Version SAE – – AA2F
02
fixed Version ISO – – A2F
Drive shaft bearing 10 to 200 250 to 500 710 to 1000

Standard bearing (no code) –
03
Long-life bearing – L
Operation mode
04 Motor (plug-in motor A2FE see RE 91008) M
Size
≈ Displacement Vg (cm3)
Size 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80
05 in3/rev. 0.63 0.73 0.98 1.40 1.71 1.95 2.78 3.42 3.84 4.91
Size 90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
in3/rev. 5.49 6.51 7.63 9.79 10.98 12.20 15.25 21.66 30.51 43.33 61.02
Series
06 6
Index
sizes 10 to 180 1
07 size 200 3
sizes 250 to 1000 0
08 Viewed from shaft end alternating W
Seals
09 FKM (flour-caoutchouc) V
Shaft end 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250

SAE Version SAE – – S
(AA2F) Splined shaft – – – – – – – – – – – – – – T
– – – – – – – – – – – – U
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – Q
Parallel keyed shaft – – – – B
DIN 6885 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – P
10
SAE parallel keyed shaft – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – K
200 355 500 710 1000
ISO Version Splined shaft – – – – A
(A2F) DIN 5480 – Z
Parallel keyed shaft – – – – B
DIN 6885 – P
RA 91001/09.07 AA2FM Bosch Rexroth Corp. /36
Ordering Code / Standard Program (ordering code size 5 see page 10)
M / 6 W – V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Mounting flange 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250

SAE Version 2-hole – SAE – – – – – – – – – – – – – C
(AA2F) 4-hole – SAE – – – – – D
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – DN
11
200 355 500 710 1000
ISO Version 4-hole – ISO – – – – B
(A2F) 8-hole – ISO – H
Service line ports

AA2F 1) 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250
SAE flange ports A and B, rear 51 0 – – – 510
SAE flange ports A and B, 52 0 – – – 520
at side, opposite side 7 – – – – – – 527
Threaded ports A and B, 53
0 – – – – – – – – – – 530
at side, opposite side
Threaded ports A and B, 54
0 – – – – – – – – – – – – – 540
at side and rear 2)
SAE flange ports A and B, 60
12 0 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 600
bottom 2)
Port plate for mounting a counterbalance 18
1 – – – – – 181
valves 3)
Port plate with pressure 19 1 – – – – – 191
relief valve 3) 2 – – – – – 192
A2F 3) 200 355 500 710 1000
SAE flange ports A and B, rear 01 0 010
7 – m m 017
SAE flange ports A and B, bottom 10 0 – – – – 100
Valves
Without valve 0
With pressure relief valves (without pressure sequence range) 1
With pressure relief valves (with pressure sequence range) 2
With flush and boost pressure valve 7
Speed measurement 10 to 16 23 to 180 200 250 355 to 1000

Without speed measurement (no code)
13 Prepared for speed measurement (ID) 4) – – – – D
Prepared for speed measurement (HDD) 4) – – 5) m F
Special design
Standard version (no code)
14
Specific version for slew drive applications (standard for port plate 19) J
1) Fastening threads resp. threaded ports are SAE (UN/UNF)
2) Threaded ports at side are plugged with locking screw
3) Fastening threads are metric
4) Complete order recommended, speed sensor page 34
5) See RE 91001 (ISO-Version)
= available m = on request – = not available

Technical Data
Hydraulic fluid Selection diagram
(-40°) (-20°) (0°) (20°) (40°) (60°) (80°) (100°)
Before starting project planning, please refer to our data sheets 7000 (1600) 7400
(1600)
5000 (1000)
RE 90220 (mineral oil), RE 90221 (environmentally 3000 (600)
2000 (400)
acceptable hydraulic fluids) and RE 90223 (HF hydraulic fluids)
for detailed information regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid 1000 (200)
VG 46
VG 68
VG
VG 32
VG 2
viscosity ν SUS (mm2/s)
10
2
and application conditions. 500
0
(100)
300 (60)
The fixed motor AA2FM is unsuitable for operation with HFA. If 200 (40) 170 (36)
HFB, HFC and HFD or environmentally acceptable hydraulic 150
νopt.
fluids are being used, the limitations regarding technical data 100 (20)
and seals mentioned in RE 90221 and RE 90223 must be 80
70
80 (16)
observed. 60 (10)
When ordering please indicate the used hydraulic fluid. 50
40 (5) 42 (5)
Operationg viscosity range (-40°) (-25°) (-10°) (0°) (10°) (30°) (50°) (70°) (90°) (115°)
For optimum efficiency and service life, select an operating -40° -13° 0° 20° 40° 60° 80° 120° 160° 195° 240°
viscosity (at operating temperature) within the optimum range of
tmin = -40°F fluid temperature range t in °F (°C) tmax = +240°F
νopt = optimum viscosity 80...170 SUS (16...36 mm2/s) (-40°C) (+115°C)
depending on the circuit temperature (closed circuit) and tank

temperature (open circuit). Details regarding the choice of hydraulic fluid
The correct choice of hydraulic fluid requires knowledge of the
Limits of viscosity range operating temperature in relation to the ambient temperature:
The limiting values for viscosity are as follows: in a closed circuit the circuit temperature, in an open circuit the
tank temperature.
Sizes 5 to 200:
The hydraulic fluid should be chosen so that the operating vis-
νmin = 42 SUS (5 mm2/s) cosity in the operating temperature range is within the optimum
short-term (t < 3 min) range (νopt.) - the shaded area of the selection diagram. We
at max. permitted temperature of tmax = +240°F (+115°C). recommended that the higher viscosity class be selected in
νmax = 7400 SUS (1600 mm2/s), each case.
short-term (t < 3 min) Example: At an ambient temperature of X°F (X°C) an operating
at cold start (p ≤ 435 psi / 30 bar, n ≤ 1000 rpm, temperature of 140°F (60°C) is set. In the optimum operating
tmin = -40°F / -40°C). viscosity range (νopt; shaded area) this corresponds to the
Only for starting up without load. Optimum operating viscosity classes VG 46 or VG 68; to be selected: VG 68.
viscosity must be reached within approx. 15 minutes.
Please note:
Sizes 250 to 1000: The case drain temperature, which is affected by pressure and
speed, is always higher than the control temperature or tank
νmin = 60 SUS (10 mm2/s), temperature. At no point in the system may the temperature be
short-term (t < 3 min) higher than 240°F (115°C) for sizes 5 to 200 or 195°F (90°C)
at max. permitted temperature of tmax = +195°F (+90°C) for sizes 250 to 1000.
νmax = 4600 SUS (1000 mm2/s), If the above conditions cannot be maintained due to extreme
short-term (t < 3 min) operating parameters, we recommend flushing the case at port
at cold start (p ≤ 435 psi / 30 bar, n ≤ 1000 rpm, U (size 250 to 1000) or using a flush and boost pressure valve
tmin = -13°F / -25°C). (see page 30).
Only for starting up without load. Optimum operating
viscosity must be reached within approx. 15 minutes.
Filtration
Note that the maximum hydraulic fluid temperature of +240°F The finer the filtration, the higher the cleanliness level of the hy-
(115°C) (+195°F (+90°C) at size 250 to 1000) must not be ex- draulic fluid and the longer the service life of the axial piston unit.
ceeded locally either (e.g. in the bearing area). The temperature
in the bearing area is - depending on pressure and speed - up To ensure functional reliability of the axial piston unit, the hy-
to 22 °F (12 K) higher than the average case drain temperature. draulic fluid must have a cleanliness level of at least
Special measures are necessary in the temperature range from 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406.
-40°F and -13°F (-40°C and -25°C) (cold start phase), please At very high hydraulic fluid temperatures (90°C to max. 115°C, not
contact us. permitted for sizes 250 to 1000) at least cleanliness level
For detailed information about use at low temperatures, see 19/17/14 according to ISO 4406 is required.
RE 90300-03-B.
If the above classes cannot be observed, please contact us.
Technical Data
Operational pressure range
Maximum pressure on port A or B (pressure data in accordance with DIN 24312)
AA2F Sizes 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 Nominal pressure Peak pressure
Shaft end: S 5800 psi (400 bar) 6500 psi (450 bar)
S 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
Q 4350 psi (300 bar) 5100 psi (350 bar)
Q 4100 psi (280 bar) 4550 psi (315 bar)
T 5800 psi (400 bar) 6500 psi (450 bar)
U 5800 psi (400 bar) 6500 psi (450 bar)
B 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
P 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
K 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
A2F Sizes 5 200 355 500 710 1000 Nominal pressure Peak pressure
Shaft end: Z 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
A 5800 psi (400 bar) 6500 psi (450 bar)
P 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
B 5100 psi (350 bar) 5800 psi (400 bar)
B 3050 psi (210 bar) 3600 psi (250 bar)
C 4550 psi (315 bar) 5100 psi (350 bar)
With pulsating loads over pN = 4550 psi / 315 bar (pmax = 5100 psi / 350 bar);
we recommend the use of a splined shaft (AA2FM 10 to 250: S, T or U / A2FM 200: A / A2FM 355 to 1000: Z)
The sum of the pressure at ports A and B may not exceed 10150 psi / 700 bar (A2F5: 9000 psi / 630 bar)
Attention: shaft end with drives of radial force loads at the drive shaft (pinion, V-belt drives) necessitate reduction of the nominal
pressure to pN = 4550 psi (315 bar)! Sizes 250 to 1000 please contact us.
Minimum inlet pressure, see page 8
Direction of flow
Direction of rotation, viewed on shaft end
clockwise counter-clockwise
A to B B to A
Speed range
No limit to minimum speed nmin. If uniformity of motion is re-
quired, speed nmin must not be less than 50 rpm. See table of
values on page 7 for maximum speed.
Long-life bearing (sizes 250 to 1000)

For long service life and use with HF hydraulic fluids. Same
external dimensions as the motor with standard bearing. A
long-life bearing can be specified. Flushing of bearing and case
via port U is recommended.
Flushing volumes (recommended)
Size 250 355 500 710 1000

qv flush gpm 2.6 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
L/min 10 16 16 16 16
Technical Data
Shaft seal ring
Permissible pressure loading

The service life of the shaft seal ring is affected by the speed
of the motor and the case drain pressure. It is recommended
that the average, continuous case drain pressure at operating
temperature 45 psi (3 bar) absolute not be exceeded (max. per-
missible case drain pressure 90 psi (6 bar) absolute at reduced
speed, see diagram). Short-term (t < 0.1 s) pressure spikes of
up to 145 psi (10 bar) absolute are permitted. The service life of
the shaft seal ring decreases with an increase in the frequency
of pressure spikes.
The case pressure must be equal to or greater than the exter-
nal pressure on the shaft seal ring.
Sizes 10 to 200
psi bar
145 (10)
130 (9)
115 sizes 10, 12, 16 (8)

Perm. pressure pabs. max.
100 (7)
sizes 23, 28, 32
90 (6)
size 45
75 (5)
sizes 80, 90 sizes 56, 63
60 (4)
sizes 107, 125
45 (3)
sizes 160, 180
30 (2)
size 200
15 (1)
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
Speed n (rpm)
Sizes 250 to 1000
psi bar
90 (6)
size 250
75 (5)
Perm. pressure pabs. max.
sizes 710, 1000 size 355

60 (4)
size 500
45 (3)
30 (2)
15 (1)
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Speed n (rpm)
Temperature range
The FKM shaft seal ring is permissible for case temperatures of
-13°F to +240°F (-25°C to +115°C) at sizes 5 to 200 and
-13°F to +195°F (-25°C to +90°C) at sizes 250 to 1000
Note:
For application cases below -13°F (-25 °C) a Buna-N (NBR)
shaft seal ring is necessary (permissible temperature range
-40 °F to +195 °F / -40 °C to +90 °C). Please contact us.
Technical Data
Table of values (theoretical values, ignoring ηmh and ηv; values rounded)
Size 5 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80
Displacement Vg in3 0.30 0.63 0.73 0.98 1.40 1.71 1.95 2.78 3.42 3.84 4.91
cm3 4.93 10.3 12 16 22.9 28.1 32 45.6 56.1 63 80.4
Max. Speed nmax rpm 10000 8000 8000 8000 6300 6300 6300 5600 5000 5000 4500
nmax intermit.1)rpm 11000 8800 8800 8800 6900 6900 6900 6200 5500 5500 5000
Max. flow qV max gpm 13 21.8 25.3 33.9 38.2 46.6 52.2 67.4 74.0 83.1 95.6
L/min 49 82 96 128 144 176 201 255 280 315 360
Torque at Δp = 5100 psi T lb-ft 18 2) 42 49 66 94 115 132 188 231 259 332
Δp = 350 bar T Nm 24,7 2) 57 67 88 126 156 178 254 312 350 445
Δp = 5800 psiT lb-ft – 48 56 75 107 131 150 213 263 295 377
Δp = 400 bar T Nm – 65 76 100 144 178 204 290 356 400 508
Rotary stiffness c Nm/rad 625 922 1250 1590 2560 2930 3120 4180 5940 6250 8730
Moment of inertia JTW lbs-ft2 0.0014 0.00 95 0.0095 0.0095 0.0285 0.0285 0.0285 0.0569 0.0997 0.0997 0.1708
for rotary group kgm2 0.00006 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 0.0012 0.0012 0.0012 0.0024 0.0042 0.0042 0.0072
Angular acceleration maximum a rad/s2 5000 5000 5000 5000 6500 6500 6500 14600 7500 7500 6000
Filling capacity V gal 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.053 0.053 0.053 0.087 0.119 0.119 0.145
L 0.17 0.17 0.17 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.33 0.45 0.45 0.55
Mass (approx.) m lbs 5.5 12 12 12 21 21 21 30 40 40 51
kg 2.5 5.4 5.4 5.4 9.5 9.5 9.5 13.5 18 18 23
Size 90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
Displacement Vg in3 5.49 6.51 7.63 9.79 10.98 12.20 15.25 21.66 30.51 43.33 61.02
cm3 90 106.7 125 160.4 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
Max. Speed nmax rpm 4500 4000 4000 3600 3600 2750 2700 2240 2000 1600 1600
nmax intermit.1)rpm 5000 4400 4400 4000 4000 3000 – – – – –
Max. flow qV max gpm 106.9 112.7 132.1 152.5 171.1 145.2 178 210 264 300 422
L/min 405 427 500 577 648 550 675 795 1000 1136 1600
Torque at Δp = 5100 psi T lb-ft 371 440 516 662 742 825 1030 1465 2063 2930 4127
Δp = 350 bar T Nm 501 595 697 889 1001 1114 1393 1978 2785 3955 5570
Δp = 5800 psi T lb-ft 422 500 587 753 844 938 – – – – –
Δp = 400 bar T Nm 572 680 796 1016 1144 1272 – – – – –
Rotary stiffness c Nm/rad 9140 11200 11900 17400 18200 57300 73100 96100 144000270000 324000
Moment of inertia JTW lbs-ft2 0.1708 0.2753 0.2753 0.5221 0.5221 0.8377 1.4475 2.4205 4.2240 13.052 13.052
for rotary group kgm2 0.0072 0.0116 0.0116 0.0220 0.0220 0.0353 0.061 0.102 0.178 0.55 0.55
Angular acceleration maximum a rad/s2 6000 4500 4500 3500 3500 11000 10000 8300 5500 4300 4000
Filling capacity gal 0.145 0.211 0.211 0.291 0.291 0.713 0.660 0.925 1.110 2.113 2.113
L 0.55 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.1 2.7 2.5 3.5 4.2 8 8
Mass (approx.) m lbs 51 71 71 99 99 145 161 242 342 715 741
kg 23 32 32 45 45 66 73 110 155 325 336
1) Intermittent maximum speed: overspeed at discharge and over-running travel operations, t < 5 s and Δp < 2200 psi (150 bar)
2) Torque at Δp = 4550 psi (315 bar)
Caution: Exceeding the permissible limit values may result in a loss of function, a reduction in service life or in the destruction
of the axial piston unit.
Other permissible limit values with respect to speed variation, reduced angular accelaration as a function of the
frequency and the permissible startup angular acceleration (lower than the maximum angular acceleration) can be
found in data sheet RE 90261.
Technical Data
Determining the size
Flow qv =
Vg • n
231 • ηv
gpm
( qv =
Vg • n
1000 • ηv
L/min
)
Speed n =
qv • 231 • ηv
Vg
rpm
( n =
qv • 1000 • ηv
Vg
rpm
)
Torque T =
Vg • Δp • ηmh
24 • π
lb-ft
( T =
Vg • Δp • ηmh
20 • π
Nm
)
Power P =
2π•T•n
33 000
=
qv • Δp • ηt
1714
HP
( P =
2π•T•n
60 000
=
qv • Δp • ηt
600
kW
)
Vg = Displacement per revolution in in3 (cm3)
Δp = Differential pressure in psi (bar)
n = Speed in rpm
ηv = Volumetric efficiency
ηmh = Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency
ηt = Overall efficiency
Minimum inlet pressure on service line port A (B)

To prevent damage to the motor, there must be a minimum inlet
pressure in the inlet area. The minimum inlet pressure is depen-
dent on the speed of the fixed motor.
psi bar
175 (12)
Inlet pressure pabs. min
145 (10)
115 (8)
90 (6)
60 (4)
30 (2)
15 (1)
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Speed n/nmax
Please contact us if these conditions cannot be satisfied

Technical Data
Permissible radial and axial loading on the drive shaft
The specified values are maximum values and do not apply to continuous operation.
Size 5 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80
Radial force, max. 1) Fq max lbf 160 472 562 730 865 1079 1214 1630 1832 2057 23042)
Fq
at distance a N 710 2100 2500 3250 3850 4800 5400 7250 8150 9150 10250
a
(from shaft collar) a in 0.47 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.79
mm 12 16 16 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 20
Axial force, max. 3) +Fax max lbf 40 72 72 72 112 112 112 142 180 180 225
–
Fax N 180 320 320 320 500 500 500 630 800 800 1000
+
–Fax max lbf 40 72 72 72 112 112 112 142 180 180 225
N 180 320 320 320 500 500 500 630 800 800 1000
Permissible axial force/psi (bar) ±Fax per./psi lbf/psi 0.023 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.11 0.13 0.13 0.16
operating pressure (bar) N/bar 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.2 5.2 5.2 7.0 8.7 8.7 10.6
Size 90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000
Radial force, max. 1) Fq max lbf 25742) 2720 3170 3664 4114 5148 270 337 427 674 584
at distance a N 11450 12100 14100 16300 18300 22900 12004) 15004) 19004) 30004) 26004)
(from shaft collar) Fq
a in 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.98 0.98 0.98 1.61 2.07 2.07 2.66 2.66
a
mm 20 20 20 25 25 25 41 52.5 52.5 67.5 67.5
Axial force, max. 3) +Fax max lbf 225 281 281 360 360 360 450 562 674 989 989
N 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600 1600 2000 2500 3000 4400 4400
–
Fax –Fax max lbf 225 281 281 360 360 360 450 562 674 989 989
+
N 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600 1600 2000 2500 3000 4400 4400
5) 5) 5) 5) 5)
Permissible axial force/psi (bar) ±Fax per./psi lbf/psi 0.16 0.20 0.20 0.26 0.26 0.26
operating pressure (bar) N/bar 10.6 12.9 12.9 16.7 16.7 16.7
1) During intermittent operation (sizes 5 to 200)
2) Value for Q-shaft: Fq max = 2023 lbf (9000 N)
3) Max. permissible axial force when at a standstill or when axial piston unit working in pressureless conditions
4) When at a standstill or when axial piston unit operating in depressurized condition. Higher forces are permissible when under
pressure. Please contact us.

5) Please contact us
When considering the permissible axial force, the force-transfer direction must be taken into account.
– Fax max = increase in sevice life of bearings
+ Fax max = reduction in service life of bearings (avoid)
Toothed gear drive V-belt drive
Effect of radial force Fq on the service life of the bearings
By selecting a suitable force-transfer direction of Fq, the stress AlternatingMotor
direction
bei ϕ opt
ϕo
pt
wechselnder
on the bearings caused by the internal transmission forces can of rotation
Drehrichtung
be reduced, thus achieving the optimum service life for the t ϕo

bearings. Recommended position of mating gear is dependent ϕ op pt
on direction of rotation. Examples:
Toothed gear drive V-belt drive

Size ϕopt. ϕopt.
10 to 180 ± 70° ± 45° A B A B
200 to 1000 ± 45° ± 70°

Motor Linkslauf Motor Rechtslauf Motor Linkslauf
Counter-clockwise
Druck am Clockwise
Druck am Counter-clockwise
Druck am
Anschluß B
direction of rotation Anschluß A
direction of rotation direction of rotation
Anschluß B
Pressure on port B Pressure on port A Pressure on port B

10/36 Bosch Rexroth Corp. AA2FM RA 91001/09.07
Ordering Code / Standard Program – Size 5

A2F 5 / 60 W – 3
01 02 03 04 05 06
Axial piston unit

01 Bent axis design, fixed A2F
Size
Size 5
02 ≈ Displacement Vg in3/rev. 0.30
cm3/rev. 4.93
Additional instructions in text form
Series
03 60 Seals
The fixed motor A2F5 is equipped with
Direction of rotation Buna-N (NBR) seals in standard design.
04 Viewed from shaft end alternating W
In case of need FKM- (fluor-caoutchouc)
Shaft end seals please indicate when ordering in
plain text:
Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885 B
05
Tapered shaft with spigot and spring washer DIN 6888 C "with FKM-seals"
Service line ports

06 Threaded ports A und B at side, metric 3
Unit Dimensions, Size 5 – ISO Design Before finalizing your design, please request a
binding installation drawing.
Dimensions in inches and (millimeters)
2.05 (52) Y
0.32 2.9
2.3 3( R0 2.76 (70)
(8) 74. . Detail Y
0 (5
8.5
5) (R 624
0 ) ) T2
(17 .69
(6.4) 2.76 (70)
.5) A
(DIA 60–0.046)
DIA 2.362
DIA 2.360
6
2.995 )
DIAIA 2. 5 ±0,1
25°
0.25
(DIA 48.5)
D IA 7
DIA 1.91
(D 62)
4 (
0.16
2.4
(4) T1 T1
2.00 (51) 3.15 (80)
B
Shaft ends Ports
B Parallel keyed shaft C Tapered shaft with spigot and spring A, B Service line ports M18x1,5; 100 lb-ft 3)
DIN 6885 – A4x4x20 (mm) washer (3x5 mm) DIN 6888 DIN 3852 0.47 (12) deep (140 Nm)
pN = 3050 psi (210 bar) (taper 1:10) pN = 4550 psi (315 bar)
T1, T2 Case drain ports M10x1; 20 lb-ft 3)
+0.001)
0.39
(DIA 12 +0.012
1.30 (33) DIN 3852 0.31 (8) deep (30 Nm)

(DIA 12.8)
M10x1 2) 3)
DIA 0.50
(10)
(13.5) DIA 0.473
DIA 0.472
M4x0.71) 3)
0.13 0.87
(3.2) (22) 1) Center bore according to DIN 332
DIA 0.59
(DIA 15)
(thread according to DIN 13)

DIA 0.59
(DIA 15)
0.53
2) Thread according to DIN 3852,

0.16 max. tightening torque: 20 lb-ft (30 Nm)
(R 0.02
(7.3)
0.29
)
(4)
0.4
3) Please observe the general notes for the max.

R
0.95 tightening torques on page 36

(24)
RA 91001/09.07 AA2FM Bosch Rexroth Corp. 11/36
Before finalizing your design, please request a

Unit Dimensions, Sizes 10, 12, 16 – SAE Design binding installation drawing.
Port plate 53: Threaded ports, at side
4.25 (108)
6.85 (174)
0.31 (7.9)
0.47 (12) 5.75 (146)
T1
(DIA 101.6 -0.05 )
4.76 (121)
(29)
2.20 (56) 1.14
40°
DIA 4.000
DIA 3.999
(54)
2.13
3.62 (92)
0.55
(14)
0.38 2.83 (72)
(9.7)
T2
5.63 (143)
IA 35
)
(D A 3.
85
7.01 (178) DI Detail Y
Flange SAE J744 Y

B A
3.35 (85)
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 7/8 in 13T 16/32 DP 1) B Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 22-4 (B)) DIN 6885 – AS8x7x32 (mm)
pN = 5800 psi (400 bar) pN = 5100 psi (350 bar)
5/16-18UNC-2B 2) 4)
+0.002 )
M10x1.5 3) 4) (DIA 25 +0.015
DIA 0.9848
DIA 0.9843
0.75 0.87 (22)

DIA 1.10
DIA 1.10
0.3150
(DIA 28)
0.27 (7)
(DIA 28)
0.24 (19) 0.3135 0.30 (7.5)

(6) (8h9)
1.10
(28)
0.31
(8) 1.57
1.32 (40) E1x0.2
(33.5) DIN 509
Ports
A, B Service line ports ISO 11926 1 1/16 in -12 UN-2B; 0.79 (20) deep 265 lb-ft (360 Nm) 4)
T1, T2 Case drain ports (T2 plugged) ISO 11926 9/16 in -18 UNF-2B; 0.51 (13) deep 60 lb-ft (80 Nm) 4)
1) ANSI B92.1a-1976, 30° pressure angle, flat root, side fit, tolerance class 5
2) Thread according to ISO 68
3) Center bore according to DIN 332 (thread according to DIN 13)
4) Please observe the general notes for the max. tightening torques on page 36

4.92 (125) ° 45°

45
0.31 (7.9)
0.79 (20) 5.75 (146)
T1
(DIA 127-0.05 )
(146)
1.06
DIA 5.000
DIA 4.998
(27)
0.56 14.3
°
5.75
40
2.28
IA 38
(58)
2)
( D IA 6 .
16
D
IA .17
0.50 2.32
6)
(12.7) T2 ( D IA 4
10
(59)
D
Flange SAE J744
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP 1) B Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 32-4 (C)) DIN 6885 – AS8x7x40 (mm)
7/16-14 UNC-2B 2) 4)
+0.002 )
(DIA 30 +0.015
1.10 (28)
0.87 (22)
DIA 1.182
DIA 1.181
0.37 (9.5) 0.3150

0.27 (7)
0.3135 0.30 (7.5) E1x0.2

(8h9) DIN 509
(DIA 35)
DIA 1.38
1.30 (33)
DIA 1.38
(DIA 35)
M10x1.5 3) 4)
0.31 (8)
1.97
1.89 (48) (50)
Ports
A, B Service line ports (see port plates)

Port plates
51 SAE flange ports, rear 52 SAE flange ports, at side
Detail Y
0.7
2
2.32 (59) (18 Detail Y
.2)
0.51 (13)
2.76 (70)
3.07 (78)
4.09 (104)
(18.2)
(40 .59
0.72
4.61 (117)
.5)
A
1
B
Y B A
6.69 (170) 1.59 (40.5) 6.34 (161) B Y
7.44 (189) 4.53 (115) 8.15 (207) 4.72 (120)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1/2 in A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1/2 in
(high pressure series) (high pressure series)
Fastening threads ISO 68 5/16 in-18 UNC-2B; Fastening threads ISO 68 5/16 in-18 UNC-2B;
0.71 (18) deep 1) 0.71 (18) deep 1)
53 Threaded ports, at side 54 Threaded ports, at side and rear
Detail Y Detail Y
2.76 (70)
3.50 (89)
4.61 (117)
4.65 (118)
B A B A
6.34 (161) Y Y
8.15 (207) 4.72 (120) 7.24 (184) 2.28 (58)
8.23 (209) 4.92 (125)
A, B Service line ports 1 5/16 in -12 UN-2B; 400 lb-ft 1) A, B Service line ports 1 5/16 in -12 UN-2B; 400 lb-ft 1)
ISO 11926 0.79 (20) deep (540 Nm) ISO 11926 0.79 (20) deep (540 Nm)
once plugged each
Note: port plates 18 and 19 see pages 31, 32


Unit Dimensions, Size 45 – SAE Design binding installation drawing.
5.24 (133)
0.79 (20)
° 45°
0.51 (13) 45
0.31 (7.9) 5.75 (146)
T1
(DIA 127 -0.025 )
DIA 5.000
DIA 4.999
1.18
(30)
5.75 (146)
0.56 (14.3)
40°
16 8
2.56
(65)
3
2)
( D A 6.
DI
IA
2.60 IA 65
(66) T2 8)
(D A 4.
11
Flange SAE J744
DI
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP 1) P Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 32-4 (C)) DIN 6885 – AS8x7x50 (mm)
M12x1.75 3) 4) (DIA 30 +0.002)
7/16-14 UNC-2B 2) 4)
+0.015
1.10 (28)
(28)
DIA 1.181
DIA 1.182
1.10
0.27 (7)
0.37 (9.5) 0.3150

0.3135 0.37 (9.5) E1x0.2
(8h9) DIN 509
(DIA 35)
DIA 1.38
1.30 (33)
DIA 1.38
(DIA 35)
0.31 (8) 2.36

1.89 (48) (60)
Ports

Port plates
Detail Y
2.95 (75) 0.9
4( Detail Y
2.00 23
.8)
(50.8)
0.75
3.50 (89)
3.15 (80)
(19) A
4.80 (122)
(5 .00
5.24 (133)
)
B A
0.8
2
B
7.48 (190) 0.94 (23.8) 7.05 (179)

8.58 (218) Y 5.79 (147) 9.09 (231) B Y 5.04 (128)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 3/4 in A, B Service line ports SAE J518 3/4 in
Fastening threads ISO 68 3/8 in -16 UNC-2B; Fastening threads ISO 68 3/8 in -16 UNC-2B;
0.82 (21) deep 1) 0.82 (21) deep 1)


Unit Dimensions, Sizes 56, 63 – SAE Design binding installation drawing.
5.63 (143) 45° 45°

0.50 (12.7) 0.79 (20)
5.75 (146)
0.31 (7.9)
T1
(DIA 127 -0.05 )
1.30
(146)
(33)
DIA 5.000
DIA 4.998
0.56 (14.3)
5.75
40°
IA .38
2.83
2)
(72)
(D IA 6
18
D
2.91
IA 04
(74)
8)
(D A 5.
T2
12
DI
Flange SAE J744
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP 1) T Splined shaft 1 3/8 in 21T 16/32 DP 1) B Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 32-4 (C)) pN = 5800 psi (400 bar) DIN 6885 – AS10x8x50 (mm)
+0.002 )
7/16-14 UNC-2B 2) 4)
7/16-14 UNC-2B 2) 4)
M12x1.75 3) 4) (DIA 35 +0.018

DIA 1.379
DIA 1.378
1.10 (28) 1.10 (28) 1.10 (28)

0.3937
0.31(8)
0.3923 E1x0.2
0.37 (9.5) 0.37 (9.5) 0.37 (9.5)
(10h9) DIN 509
DIA 1.57
(DIA 40)
DIA 1.57
(DIA 40)
1.50 (38)
DIA 1.57
(DIA 40)
0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 2.36
1.89 (48) 1.89 (48) (60)
Ports

Port plates
Detail Y
1.
09 Detail Y
(2
5.79 (147) 7.8
0.94 (23.8)
)
0.75 (19)
3.58 (91)
3.78 (96)
(57 .25
A
5.12 (130)
B
.2)
B A
5.91 (150)
2
8.11 (206) Y 2.00 (50.8) 7.87 (200)
B Y
9.06 (230) 2.95 10.16 (258) 5.91 (150)
(75)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 3/4 in A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 in
0.82 (21) deep 1) 0.87 (22) deep 1)


6.34 (161) 45° 45°

0.50 (12.7) 0.79 (20)
0.31 (8) 5.75 (146)
T1
(DIA 127 -0.05 )
1.61
(41)
5.75 (146)
DIA 5.000
DIA 4.998
0.56 (14.3)
40°
I A . 38
2)
3.27
(83)
( D IA 6
16
D
3.66
IA .43
T2
8)
(93)
( D IA 5
13
D
Flange SAE J744
Shaft ends
U Splined shaft 1 3/8 in 21T 16/32 DP 1) Q Splined shaft 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24 DP 1)
pN = 5800 psi (400 bar) (SAE J744 – 32-4 (C))
Size 80: pN = 4350 psi (300 bar)
Size 90: pN = 4100 psi (280 bar)
7/16-14 UNC-2B 2) 3)
1.10 (28)
7/16-14 UNC-2B 2) 3)
0.37 (9.5) 1.10 (28)

0.37 (9.5)
DIA 1.77
(DIA 45)
DIA 1.77
(DIA 45)
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
1.89 (48)
1.89 (48)
Ports

Port plates
Detail Y 1.
09
(2 Detail Y
0.98 2.25 7.8
)
(25) (57.2)
3.90 (99)
4.09 (104)
A
(57 .25
B
5.67 (144)
6.38 (162)
.2)
2
B A
(27.8)
1.09
Y B
9.13 (232) 3.31(84) 8.86 (225) Y
10.31 (262) 6.54 (166) 11.26 (286) 6.30 (160)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 in A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 in
Fastening threads ISO 68 7/16 in -14 UNC-2B; Fastening threads DIN 13 7/16 in -14 UNC-2B;
0.75 (19) deep 1) 0.75 (19) deep 1)


° 45
45 °
6.89 (175)
0.31 (7.9) (200)
7.87
0.98 (24.9)
T1
(DIA 152.4 -0.05 )
7.87 (200)
1.69
(43)
40°
DIA 6.000
DIA 5.998
0.81 (20.6)
0
A 9.0 8.6)
3.39
(86)
I
D 22
IA
(D
0.50
(12.7) 3.81 T2 IA .91
0)
( D IA 5
(96.9) 15
D
Flange SAE J744
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16 DP 1) U Splined shaft 1 1/2 in 23T 16/32 DP 1) B Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 44-4 (D)) pN = 5800 psi (400 bar) DIN 6885 – AS14x9x63 (mm)
+0.002)
5/8-11UNC-2B 2) 4)
M16x2 3) 4) (DIA 45 +0.018

5/8-11UNC-2B 2) 4)
DIA 1.772
DIA 1.771
1.42 (36) 1.42 (36) 1.42 (36) E1x0.2

0.35 (9)
0.47 (12) 0.5512

0.47 (12) 0.5495 0.47 (12) DIN 509
(14h9)
DIA 1.97
(DIA 50)
DIA 1.97
(DIA 50)
1.91 (48.5)
DIA 1.97
(DIA 50)
0.47 (12) 0.31 (8)
2.64 (67) 2.44 (62) 3.15 (80)
Ports

Port plates
Detail Y 1. Detail Y
25
(31
2.63 .8)
1.25 (31.8)
4.33 (110)
(66.7)
4.72 (120)
A
6.14 (156)
B B
(6 .63
A
7.13 (181)
)
6.7
2
Y
1.26 (32) 9.69 (246) B Y
10.16 (258) 3.90 (99) 12.48 (317) 7.01 (178)
11.10 (282) 7.64 (194)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 1/4 in A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 1/4 in
0.75 (19) deep 1) 0.75 (19) deep 1)
60 SAE flange ports, bottom

Detail Y
2.76
1.26 (32)
(70)
B
5.35 (136)
(66.7)
2.63
6.22 (158)
7.64 (194)
3.9 (99)
(66.7)
2.63
10.16 (258)
Y
11.54 (293) 1.25 A
(31.8)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 1/4 in

(high pressure series)
Fastening threads ISO 68 1/2 in -13 UNC-2B;
0.75 (19) deep 1)


7.48 (190) 45° 45°

0.50 (12.7) 0.98 (25)
0.31 (7.9) 7.87 (200)
T1
(DIA 152.4 -0.05 )
1.85
(47)
7.87 (200)
DIA 6.000
DIA 5.998
0.83 (21)
0
9.0 6)
40°
I A 28.
(96)
3.78
D 2
IA
(D
4.09
(104)
IA 09
T2
0)
(D A 7.
18
Flange SAE J744 DI
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16 DP 1) B Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 44-4 (D)) DIN 6885 – AS14x9x70 (mm)
+0.002 )
M16x2 3) 4) (DIA 50 +0.018
5/8-11UNC-2B 2) 4)
DIA 1.969
DIA 1.968
1.42 (36) 1.42 (36)

0.5512
0.35 (9)
0.47 (12) 0.5495

R0 1.6
0.47 (12)
(R
.06 )
(14h9)
DIA 2.36
(DIA 60)
2.11 (53.5)
DIA 2.36
(DIA 60)
0.47 (12)
2.64 (67) 3.54 (90)
Ports

Port plates
Detail Y 1. Detail Y
25
(31
.8)
1.26 2.63
(32) (66.7)
4.76 (121)
5.28 (134)
7.36 (187)
7.36 (187)
B A B A
(6 .63
)
6.7
2
1.25 (31.8)
Y 10.59 (269)
B Y
11.18 (284) 3.90(99)
12.83 (326) 7.64 (194) 12.83 (326) 7.95 (202)
A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 1/4 in A, B Service line ports SAE J518 1 1/4 in
0.75 (19) deep 1) 0.75 (19) deep 1)


Unit Dimensions, Size 200 – ISO Design binding installation drawing.
Port plate 01: SAE flange ports, rear
6.14 (156) 45
° 45 °
1.58 4.09 (104)
9.29 (236)
0.35(40) 1.26 T1
(9) (32)
(DIA 200–0.029)
0.87
3.03
(236)
(22)
(77)
(102.5) 25 °
DIA 7.874
DIA 7.872
9.29
3.31
9.8 50)
(84)
4.04
(2
A B
(166)
6.54
Y
1.26
(32) T2
3.50
(89)
11.81 (284) Detail Y
12.05 (306) 8.11 (206)
2.63 2.63
Flange ISO 3019-2 (66.7) (66.7)
B A
8.31 (211)
(31.8)
1.25
1.26
(32) 3.90
(99)
Shaft ends
A Splined shaft DIN 5480 B Parallel keyed shaft
W50x2x30x24x9g DIN 6885 – AS14x9x80 (mm)
+0.002 )
M16x2 1) 2) (DIA 50 +0.018
1.42 (36)
DIA 1.968
2.11(53.5) DIA 1.969
1.42 (36) R
M16 1) 2)
0.47 (12) 0.5512

0.35 (9)
0
0.5495 0.47(12)(R1. .06
(14h9) 6)
DIA 2.76
(DIA 70)
DIA 2.76
(DIA 70)
0.43 (11)
2.17 (55) 3.94 (100)
Ports
A, B Service line ports (high pressure series) SAE J518 1 1/4 in
Fastening threads DIN 13 M14x2; 0.75 (19) deep 2)
T1, T2 Case drain ports (T1 plugged) DIN 3852 M22x1.5; 0.55 (14) deep 155 lb-ft (210 Nm) 2)


4.88 (124) 360°)
0 ° (=
0.63 (16) 2.52 9
4x 45°
0.31 (7.9) (64)
U T1
4.13 (105) 4.13 (105)
DIA IA31
(D
(DIA 165.1-0.05)
12 7.5)
10.31 (262)
.50
(DIA 140)
DIA 5.51
26.5°
DIA 6.498
DIA 6.500
0.81 (20.6)
3.66 (93)
6.77 (172)
Flange 0.98
T2 Y
(25) 4.88 (124)
SAE J744 10.31 (262)
12.99 (330)
13.94 (354)
Port plate 52: Detail Y

SAE flange ports, at side
1.25 (31.8)
1.26 (32)
1.2
5 (3
8.27 (210)
1.8 Detail Y B A
)
(30 6
(66 3
.7)
)
1.2
A
2.6
B
6.77 (172)
2.63
3.23 (82)
1.97 1.97 (66.7)

(50) (50)
12.17 (309) B Y
14.33 (364) 9.29 (236)
Shaft ends
S Splined shaft 2 in 15T 8/16 DP 1) K Parallel keyed shaft
(SAE J744 – 50-4 (F)) 0.5x0.5x3.0 (in) 12.7x12.7x76.7 (mm)
5/8-11UNC-2B 2) 3)
(DIA 50.8 -0.03)
5/8-11UNC-2B 2) 3)
-0.89 )
(DIA 50.8 -0.74
DIA 2.000
DIA 1.998
0.5 (12.7)
0.5010 1.42 (36)

DIA 1.964
DIA 1.970
1.42 (36) 0.5000

0.47 (12)
0.47 (12) (12.7 +0.025 )
2.22 (56.3)
DIA 2.36
(DIA 60)
DIA 2.36
(DIA 60)
.06
0.59 (15) R0 1.6)
(R
2.63 (66.7) 3.13 (79.4)
Ports
Fastening threads ISO 68 1/2 in -13 UNC-2B; 0.75 (19) deep 3)
U Port for bearing flushing (plugged) ISO 11926 9/16 in -18 UNF-2B; 0.51 (13) deep 60 lb-ft (80 Nm) 3)


1.97 (50) 3.27 (83) 13.19 (335)
0.55 (14) 0.93 (23.5) 22°30’
U
T1
°
45
M A (M B )
6.7 (170)
D
(128)
( D IA 1
5.04
(DIA 280 –0.081 )
IA 4.1
13.19 (335)
DIA 11.024
DIA 11.020
36 7
0.71 (18)
0)
0
0’
2.6 0)
26 ° 3
7.80 (102)
4.02
A 1 2
D I IA 3
(128)
5.04
(D
(198)
1.89 1.10 (28) T 2 Y
(48) 3.2 7
Flange (83) Detail Y
12.60 (320)
ISO 3019-2 13.7 8 (350) 1.44 1.44
Port plate 10: (36.6) (36.6)
SAE flange ports, bottom B A
14.59 (370.5) Detail Y 1.25 MB MA
9.65 (245)
12.72 (323) (31.8)
(79.4)
3.13
MB
B
(66.7)
2.63
9.49 (241)
4.72 (120)
1.58 1.58
(40)
5.83 (148)
(40) 2.36 2.36

7.84 (199)
1.26
(32)
(60) (60)
9.84 (250)
MA A
Y
Shaft ends
Z Splined shaft DIN 5480 P Parallel keyed shaft
+0.011)
(DIA 60 +0.030
1.65 (42)
DIA 2.363
DIA 2.362
1.65 (42)
0.43 (11)
0.59 (15) 0.7087

0.7070 0.59 (15)
M20x2.5 1) 2)
(18h9)
M20x2.5 1) 2)
DIA 2.76
(DIA 70)
2.52 (64)
DIA 2.76
(DIA 70)
0.43 (11) 6
3.23 (82) R0.0.6)
( R1
4.13 (105)
Ports
Port plate 01: Port plate 10:
A, B Service line ports (high pressure series) SAE J518 1 1/2 in 1 1/4 in
Fastening threads DIN 13 M16x2;0.83 (21) deep 2) M14x2; 0.87 (22) deep 2)
T1, T2 Case drain ports (T2 plugged) DIN 3852 M33x2; 0.71 (18) deep 400 lb-ft (540 Nm) 2)
U Port for bearing flushing (plugged) DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 0.47 (12) deep 60 lb-ft (80 Nm) 2)
MA, M B Gauge ports operating pressure (plugged) DIN 3852 M14x1.5; 0.47 (12) deep 60 lb-ft (80 Nm) 2)


22°30’
1.97 (50) 3.86 (98)
0.55 (14) 1.08 (27.5) ° 14.76 (375)
45
U
T1
7.56 (192)
MA (MB)
D
5.59
(D IA 1
(142)
DIA 315 –0.081 )
DIA 12.402
DIA 12.398
IA 5.7
14.76 (375)
40 5
0.87
(22)
0)
.17
0’
8.66 (112.5)
14 0)
26°3
4.43
A 36
(142)
I
5.59
D IA
(D
(220)
T2
1.89 1.18 (30)
(48)
Y Detail Y
4.37
(111) 14.23 (361.5) 1.44 1.44
(36.6) (36.6)
15.59 (396)
B A
Flange ISO 3019-2
MB MA
10.63 (270)
(79,4)
3.13
1.58 1.58
(40) 2.56 2.56 (40)
(65) (65)
10.87 (276)
Shaft ends
+0.011 )
(DIA 70 +0.030
DIA 2.7570
DIA 2.7563
1.65 (42) 1.65 (42)

0.47(12)
0.7874
0.59 (15) 0.7854 0.59 (15)
(20h9)
M20x2.5 1) 2)
M20x2.5 1) 2)
2.93 (74.5)
DIA 3.15
(DIA 80)
DIA 3.15
(DIA 80)
0.51 (13) .06

3.15 (80) R0 1.6)
(R
4.13 (105)
Ports
Fastening threads DIN 13 M16x2; 0.83 (21) deep 2)


0’
22°3
1.97 (50) 5.16 (131)
0.55 (14) 1.63 (41.5) ° 18.31 (465)
45
U
T1
9.29 (236)
MA (MB)
D
7.21
(D IA 1
(183)
(DIA 400 –0.089 )
18.31 (465)
IA 9.6
DIA 15.748
DIA 15.745
50 9
0.87
(22)
0)
72
’
18°30
9.92 (102)
.
17 50)
4.02
A 4
7.21 DI IA
(183) (D
(252)
Y
T2
1.85 1.38 (35)
(47) 6.14 Detail Y
(156) 19.13 (486) 1.75 1.75
19.96 (507) (44.5) (44.5)
Flange ISO 3019-2 B A MA
MB
13.39 (340)
(96.8)
3.81
1.97 1.97
(50) 3.35 3.35 (50)
(85) (85)
13.54 (344)
Shaft ends
M24x3 1) 2) (DIA 90 +0.013 )
+0.035
DIA 3.5447
DIA 3.5438
1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)

0.55 (14)
0.9843
M24x3 1) 2)
0.71(18) 0.9822 0.71 (18)

(25h9)
(DIA 100)
DIA 3.94
(DIA 100)
3.74 (95)
DIA 3.94
0.55 (14) 6
R0.0 6)
4.13 (105) (R 1.
5.12 (130)
Ports
A, B Service line ports (high pressure series) SAE J518 2 in
Fastening threads DIN 13 M20x2.5; 1.18 (30) deep 2)

1.97 (50) 5.16 (131) 22°30’
0.55 (14) 1.63 (41.5) ° 18.31 (465)

U 45
T1
9.29 (236)
MA (MB)
D
7.20
(D IA 1
(DIA 400 –0.089)
(183)
18.31 (465)
DIA 15.748
DIA 15.745
IA 9.
50 69
0.87
0)
(22)
.72
0’
10.98 (143)
17 0)
5.63
26°3
IA 45
D IA
(183)
7.20
(D
(279)
T2
1.85 1.38 (35) Y
(47) 6.14 Detail Y
(156) 18.23 (468) 1.75 1.75
20.16 (512) (44.5) (44.5)
Flange ISO 3019-2 B A
13.39 (340)
MB MA
(96.8)
3.81
1.97 1.97
(50) 3.35 3.35 (50)
(85) (85)
13.54 (344)
Shaft ends
M24x3 1) 2) (DIA 90 +0.013 )
+0.035
DIA 3.5447
DIA 3.5438
1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)

0.55 (14)
0.9843
M24x3 1) 2)
0.71(18) 0.9822 0.71 (18)

(25h9)
(DIA 100)
(DIA 100)
3.74 (95)
DIA 3.94
DIA 3.94
6
0.55 (14) R0.0 6)
4.13 (105) (R1.
5.12 (130)
Ports
A, B Service line ports (high pressure series) SAE J518 2 in
Fastening threads DIN 13 M20x2.5; 1.18 (30) deep 2)

Flush and Boost Pressure Valve binding installation drawing.
The flush and boost pressure valve is used to remove heat Port plate 527: SAE flange ports, at side
from the closed control and to ensure that a minimum boost
A1
pressure is present (opening pressure 230 psi (16 bar), fixed;
note when setting primary valve). A side effect is flushing of the
case.
Detail Y
Warm hydraulic fluid is directed from the respective low pres-
sure side into the motor case. This is then fed into the tank,
together with the case drain. The hydraulic fluid drawn out B A
A2
of the closed control in this way must be replaced by cooled
hydraulic fluid that is supplied by the boost pump.
In an open control system, the flush and boost pressure valve
is used solely to flush the case from the return line. Y 3.86
(98)
On port plate 527, the valve is fitted directly onto the fixed
motor (size 45 to 180, 250), while on port plate 017 (size 355 Size A1 A2
and 500), it is fitted on a plate.
45 in 9.72 5.94
Orifice can be used to adjust the flushing volumes as required. mm (247) (151)
56, 63 in 10.36 6.26
Standard flushing volumes mm (263) (159)
(at low pressure ΔpLP = 365 psi / 25 bar) 80, 90 in 11.69 6.83
Size Flushing flow Mat.-no-orifice mm (297) (173.5)
107, 125 in 12.84 7.56
45, 56, 63 0.93 gpm (3.5 L/min) R909651766 mm (326.1) (192)
80, 90 1.32 gpm (5 L/min) R909419695 160, 180 in 13.66 7.91
107, 125 2.11 gpm (8 L/min) R909419696 mm (347) (201)
250 in 15.20 6.06
160, 180 2.64 gpm (10 L/min) R909419697 mm (386) (154)
250 2.64 gpm (10 L/min) on request
355, 500 4.23 gpm (16 L/min) on request Port plate 017: SAE flange ports, rear
For sizes 45 to 180, orifices for flushing volumes of 0.93 - 2.64
Detail X
gpm (3.5 - 10 L/min) can be supplied. In the case of non-standard
flushing volumes, please specify the desired flushing volume when
M16x2; 0.83 deep1)
ordering. The flushing volume without orifice is approx. 3.2 to 3.7
21 deep 1)
gpm (12 to 14 L) at low pressure ΔpLP = 365 psi (25 bar).
B A
Circuit diagram
A2
A4
T1 A (B)
X
1.5
7(
4
A1 0)
A3 DIA 0.71; 1.57 deep
DIA 18; 40 deep
Size A1 A2 A3 A4
355 in 14.02 4.72 16.57 7.80
T2 B (A) mm 356 120 421 198
500 in 15.63 5.12 18.27 8.66
mm 397 130 464 220
Additional dimensions see page 26 (size 355) and page 27
(size 500).
1)DIN 13, please observe the general notes for the
max. tightening torques on page 36

Pressure Relief Valves binding installation drawing.
The pressure relief valves MHDB (as to RE 64642) protect the Unit dimensions
motor from excess pressure. When the set opening pressure is
D1 Detail Z:
reached the hydraulic fluid flows from the high pressure side to
D2 Design without pres-
the low pressure side.
D5 sure sequence range
The pressure relief valves can only be supplied in conjunction "191" or "181"
T1
D3
with the port plates 181, 191 or 192 (counterbalance valve for D8
fitting on port plate 181, see next page).
Setting range opening pressure_____725 - 6100 psi (50 - 420 bar)
D7
Z
D6
At design "with pressure sequence range" (192) a higher
pressure setting can be realized by applying an external pilot T2
pressure of 365 - 435 psi (25 - 30 bar) at port PSt. MB
MB S1 S1 MA
Please indicate in clear text when ordering: Detail Y Detail Z:
Y
Design with pressure
– opening pressure of the pressure relief valve D10
sequence range "192"
D12 D8
– opening pressure at pilot pressure applied at PSt
D11
(for design 192 only)
only for port
D4
Design without pressure sequence range "191"
B plate "181"
MB
D9
T1
A
D6
B
D13
MB S1 MA
S1 Ports
A, B Service line ports SAE J518
A S1 Boosting (only for port plate 191/192)
MA, M B Gauge ports (plugged)
T2 PSt Pilot pressure port (only for port plate 192)
MA
Design with pressure sequence range "192" Size A, B 1) S1 2) MA , M B pSt 3)
T1 MB PSt 28, 32 SAE 3/4 in M22x1,5; M20x1,5; G 1/4
0.55 (14) deep 0.55 (14) deep 2)
45 SAE 3/4 in M22x1,5; M20x1,5; G 1/4
B 0.55 (14) deep 0.55 (14) deep 2)
56, 63 SAE 3/4 in M26x1,5; M26x1,5; G 1/4
0.63 (16) deep 0.63 (16) deep 2)
80, 90 SAE 1 in M26x1,5; M26x1,5; G 1/4
S1 0.63 (16) deep 0.63 (16) deep 2)
107, 125 SAE 11/4 in M26x1,5; M26x1,5; G 1/4
0.63 (16) deep 0.63 (16) deep 2)
A 160, 180 SAE 11/4 in M26x1,5; M30x1,5; G 1/4
0.63 (16) deep 0.63 (16) deep
T2 MA PSt 1) SAE J518 2) DIN 3852 3) DIN ISO 228
Size D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 4)

28, 32 MHDB.16 in 8.98 8.07 0.98 2.48 7.60 4.02 3.43 1.42 2.60 2.00 0.94 0.75 M10; 0.67 deep
mm 228 205 25 63 193 102 87 36 66 50.8 23.8 19 17 deep
45 MHDB.16 in 9.72 8.78 0.87 2.36 8.35 4.45 3.86 1.42 2.60 2.00 0.94 0.75 M10; 0.67 deep
mm 247 223 22 60 212 113 98 36 66 50.8 23.8 19 17 deep
56, 63 MHDB.22 in 10.87 9.76 0.75 2.24 9.21 4.88 4.13 1.65 2.95 2.00 0.94 0.75 M10; 0.51 deep
mm 276 248 19 57 234 124 105 42 75 50.8 23.8 19 13 deep
80, 90 MHDB.22 in 11.81 10.73 0.69 2.17 10.16 5.28 4.49 1.65 2.95 2.25 1.09 0.98 M12; 0.71 deep
mm 300 272.5 17.5 55 258 134 114 42 75 57.2 27.8 25 18 deep
107, 125 MHDB.32 in 13.11 11.89 0.39 1.89 11.26 5.89 5.12 2.09 3.31 2.63 1.25 1.26 M14; 0.75 deep
mm 333 302 10 48 286 149.5 130 53 84 66.7 31.8 32 19 deep
160, 180 MHDB.32 in 14.33 13.11 0.20 1.69 12.48 6.69 5.87 2.09 3.31 2.63 1.25 1.26 M14; 0.75 deep
mm 364 333 5 43 317 170 149 53 84 66.7 31.8 32 19 deep
4) DIN 13, please observe the general notes Assembly instructions for port plate with pressure sequence range “192”:
for the max. tightening torques on page 36 When fitting the hydraulic line on the PSt port, the lock nut must be held in place!
BVD Counterbalance Valve

Function Unit dimensions

Driving/winch counterbalance valves are designed to redu- B1
ce the danger of overspeeding and cavitation of axial piston B3
motors in open controls. Cavitation occurs if the motor speed Pressure relief valves,
is greater than it should be for the given flow during braking, T see page 31
downhill travel or decrease in motor load.
Please note
B12
– The BVD counterbalance valve must be specified explicitly in
the order. We recommend ordering the counterbalance valve
B2
and the motor as a set.
Ordering example: AA2FM80/61W–VUDN181 +
BVD20F27S/41B–V03K16D0400S12
MB
– The counterbalance valve does not replace the mechanical
service brake and parking brake. B5
A,B
– Note the detailed information about the BVD counterbalance Y
valve contained in RE 95522! Detail Y
B13
Application example for driving counterbalance valve BVD..F
B
Tacking holes
– Travel drive of wheeled excavators (M6x1, DIN 13)
S
B6
Application example for winch counterbalance valve BVD..W
B9
– Winch drives in cranes B8
B7
– Track drives in crawler excavator A

B11
Circuit diagram driving counterbalance valve BVD..F
B10
MB Gext
L Ports
G A, B Service line ports SAE J518
B` B S Boosting (plugged)
MA, M B Gauge ports (plugged)
AA2FM Motion control valve
S Size Type A, B 1) S 2) MA,M B 2)
28, 32 BVD20..16 SAE 3/4 in M 22x1.5 M12x1.5
45 BVD20..16 SAE 3/4 in M 22x1.5 M12x1.5
A` A 56, 63 BVD20..17 SAE 3/4 in M 22x1.5 M12x1.5
80, 90 BVD20..27 SAE 1 in M 22x1.5 M12x1.5
T MA 107, 125 BVD25..38 SAE 11/4 in M 27x2 M12x1.5
160, 180 BVD25..38 SAE 11/4 in M 27x2 M12x1.5
250 on request
Size B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 3) B13 3)

28, 32 BVD20..16 in 8.98 7.09 7.60 3.074) 5.39 9.25 3.78 2.60 0.94 2.00 0.75 M10;0.67 deep M10;0.55 deep
mm 228 180 193 784) 137 235 96 66 23.8 50.8 19 17 deep 14 deep
45 BVD20..16 in 10.00 7.52 8.35 3.074) 5.39 9.25 3.78 2.60 0.94 2.00 0.75 M10;0.67 deep M10;0.55 deep
mm 254 191 212 784) 137 235 96 66 23.8 50.8 19 17 deep 14 deep
56, 63 BVD20..17 in 10.87 7.56 9.21 2.68 5.39 9.25 3.78 2.95 0.94 2.00 0.75 M10;0.67 deep M10;0.55 deep
mm 276 192 234 68 137 235 96 75 23.8 50.8 19 17 deep 14 deep
mm 300 202 258 68 137 235 96 75 27.8 57.2 25 18 deep 16 deep
mm 333 234.5 286 85 151.5 286 120.5 84 31.8 66.7 32 19 deep 19 deep
mm 364 255 317 85 151.5 286 120.5 84 31.8 66.7 32 19 deep 19 deep
1) SAE J518 2) DIN 3852 3) DIN 13, please observe the general notes for the max. tightening torques on page 36
4) With adapting plate
BVD Counterbalance Valve

Attaching the counterbalance valve

When delivered, the counterbalance valve is attached to the
motor using 2 tacking screws. Do not remove the tacking
screws when connecting the service lines. If the counterbalan-
ce valve and motor are delivered separately, the counterbalan-
ce valve must first be attached to the motor port plate using the
provided tacking screws. In both cases, the final attachment
of the counterbalance valve to the motor is by the connectio of
B1
the service lines, e.g. using SAE flanges. A total of 6 screws
with thread lengths B1+B2+B3 and 2 screws with thread
lengths B3+B4 are required.
B2
When tightening the screws, it is imperative that the sequence
(1 to 8) as shown in the adjacent diagram be adhered to and
B4
carried out in two phases.
B3
Y
In the first phase the screws should be tightened to 50% of
their tightening torque before being tightened to maximum Detail Y
tightening torque in the second phase (see table below).
Flange, e.g.
Thread 1) Property class Tightening torque SAE-flange
M10x1.5 10.9 55 lb-ft (75 Nm) 2 4
M12x1.75 10.9 95 lb-ft (130 Nm) 6 8
M14x2 10.9 150 lb-ft (205 Nm)
7 5
1) Fastening screws according to DIN 912 Tacking holes
3 1
(M6x1, DIN 912)
107, 125,
Size 28, 32, 45 56, 63 80, 90
160, 180
Dim. B1 1) M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M14x2
0.67 deep 0.67 deep 0.71 deep 0.75 deep
(17 deep) (17 deep) (18 deep) (19 deep)
Dim. B2 3.07 (78)2) 2.68 (68) 2.68 (68) 3.35 (85)
Dim. B3 customer-specific
Dim. B4 M10x1.5 M10x1.5 M12x1.75 M14x2
0.59 deep 0.59 deep 0.63 deep 0.75 deep
(15 deep) (15 deep) (16 deep) (19 deep)
Fastening threads according to DIN 13, please observe the
general notes for the max. tightening torques on page 36
1) Minimum reach required 1 x DIA, thread
2) With adapting plate
Speed Measurement Please request a certified installation

drawing before finalizing your design
Dimensions in inches and (millimeters).
The AA2FM...D and AA2FM...F ("prepared for speed measure- Version „F“ (sizes 23 to 200): with HDD sensor
ment", i.e. without sensor) versions have teeth on the rotary
group. The rotating, toothed rotary group generates a signal in
proportion to the speed. The signal is picked up by a sensor X
and can be forwarded for evaluation.
D
The sensor is fitted to the special port D provided for this pur-
pose. The following versions are available:
C
Version „D“ (sizes 23 to180)
B
A
Suitable for mounting the inductive speed sensor ID (see RA
95130). The ID sensor is screwed into port D. The spacer ring
adapter required for the inductive speed sensor ID is included
in the supply volume of the sensor (only when ordering, speed
sensor with installation parts).
Version „F“ (sizes 23 to 250)
Suitable for mounting of HDD Hall effect speed sensor (see
RE 95135). The HDD sensor is flange mounted with two faste- Detail X
ning screws. In the standard version, the port is plugged with a
without HDD sensor with HDD sensor
pressure-resistant flange cover.
We recommend ordering the AA2FM fixed motor complete M6x1 (DIN 13)
with mounted sensor. Please specify the ordering code for the 8 deep
0.79 0.87
0.79 0.87
sensor separately.
(20) (22)
(20) (22)
Version „D“ (sizes 23 to 180): with ID sensor
(18.2)
0.72
D Y 90
Detail Y
M18x1,5 2)
C21)
C11)
C
A
B
1) clearance required for attaching/detaching the mating

connector: min 0.51 in (13 mm)
2) tightening torque, max.: 37 lb-ft (50 Nm) - ID-Sensor
Size 23,28,32 45 56,63 80, 90 107, 125 160, 180 200

Number of teeth 38 45 47 53 59 67 80
HDD 3) A Insertion depth (tolerance ± 0.004) in 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63
(tolerance ±0.1) mm 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
B Contact surface in 2.19 2.46 2.66 2.85 3.05 3.35 3.89
mm 55.5 62.5 67.5 72.5 77.5 85 98.8
C in 3.69 3.97 4.17 4.36 4.56 4.85 5.39
mm 93.8 100.8 105.8 110.8 115.8 123.3 137
D in 2.15 2.14 2.42 2.85 3.02 3.42 3.84
mm 73.7 79.3 87.5 101.5 111.8 118.8 97.5
ID 3) A Insertion depth (tolerance ± 0.004) in 0.37 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.43 –
(tolerance ±0.1) mm 9.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 11 –
B Contact surface in 1.93 2.17 2.36 2.56 2.76 3.15 –
mm 49 55 60 65 70 80 –
C without mating connector in 4.61 4.89 5.09 5.28 5.48 5.78 –
mm 117.2 124.2 129.2 134.2 139.2 146.7 –
C1 with 90° mating connector in 5.93 6.21 6.41 6.59 6.79 7.09 –
mm 150.7 157.7 162.7 167.5 172.5 180.2 –
C2 with 180° mating connector in 6.82 7.06 7.25 0.72 7.65 7.94 –
mm 173.2 179.2 184.2 18.2 194.2 201.7 –
D in 2.15 2.14 2.42 2.85 3.02 3.42 –
mm 73.7 79.3 87.5 101.5 111.8 118.8 –
3) Suitable speed sensor: sizes 23-200: HDD.L16../20 (see RE 95135) resp. IDR18/20–L250 (see RE 95130)
4) For size 250 see RE 91001 (ISO-Version)
Installation Notes
General
The motor case must be completely filled up with hydraulic fluid during startup and during operation (filling the case chamber). The
motor must be started at low speed and no load until the system has been bled completely.
If stopped for an extended period, fluid may drain out of the case through the working lines. When restarting, make sure that the
case contains sufficient fluid.
The leakage fluid inside the case chamber must be drained off to the tank through the highest case drain port.
Installation position
Optional. At size 10 to 200 with installation position “shaft to the top” use motor with bleeding port R (indicate in clear when orde-
ring; the port U in the bearing section for bleeding is included in production with sizes 250 to 1000).
Installation below tank level Installation above the tank

Motors below minimum fluid level in the tank (standard) Motor above minimum fluid level in tank
– Fill axial piston motor before startup via the highest – Proceed in same way as below the tank installation
case drain port – Additional measures for installation positions 1 and 2:
– Run the motor at low speed until the system is bled If stopped for an extended period, fluid may drain out of the
completely (bleed through service line port A, B if tubing is case chamber through the service lines (air enters through
long) the shaft seal). The bearings will therefore not be properly
lubricated when the motor is started up again. Fill the axial
– Minimum immersion depth of leakage line in tank: piston motor before restarting via the highest case drain port.
7.87 in (200 mm) (relative to the min. fluid level in the tank) Installation position 2: bleed at port R (sizes 10 to 200)
– Additional measures required for installation position 2 resp. U (sizes 250 to 1000). Order port R in clear text.
(shaft facing up): with installation position 2, make sure that – Additional measures required for installation position 2
the motor case is completely full before starting up. Bleed at (shaft facing up)
port R (sizes 10 to 200) resp. U (sizes 250 to 1000). Order
port R in clear text. An air pocket in the bearing area can In this installation position the bearings will not be pro-
cause damage to the motor. perly lubricated, even if there is still some fluid in the case
chamber. Putting a non-return valve (opening pressure
7.5 psi (0.5 bar)) in the leakage line can prevent the system
emptying through the line.
T1
Installation position 1
T2
T1
T2
R(U)
7.5 psi (0.5 bar)
T1
R(U)
T2
T1
T2
General Notes
– The AA2FM motor is designed to be used in open and closed circuits.
– Project planning, assembly, and commissioning of the motor require the involvement of qualified personnel.
– The service line ports and function ports are only designed to accommodate hydraulic lines.
– During and shortly after operation, there is a risk of burns on the motor. Take suitable safety precautions, e.g. wear protective
clothing
– There may be shifts in the characteristic depending on the operating state of the motor (operating pressure, fluid temperature).
– Tightening torques:
- The tightening torques specified in this data sheet are maximum values and must not be exceeded
(maximum values for screw thread).
Manufacturer's instruction for the max. permissible tightening torques of the used fittings must be observed!
- For ISO 68 / DIN 13 fixing screws, we recommend checking the tightening torque individually according to VDI 2230
Edition 2003.
– The data and information contained herein must be adhered to.
Bosch Rexroth Corporation © 2007 Bosch Rexroth Corporation

Hydraulics All rights reserved. Neither this document, nor any part of it, may be reproduced,
Axial & Radial Piston Units duplicated, circulated or disseminated, whether by copy, electronic format or any
8 Southchase Court other means, without the prior consent and authorization of Bosch Rexroth Corp.
Fountain Inn, SC 29644-9018, USA The data and illustrations in this brochure/data sheet are intended only to descri-
Telephone (864) 967-2777 be or depict the products. No representation or warranty, either express or imp-
Facsimile (864) 967-8900 lied, relating to merchantability or fitness for intended use, is given or intended by
www.boschrexroth-us.com virtue of the information contained in this brochure/data sheet. The information
contained in this brochure/data sheet in no way relieves the user of its obligation
to insure the proper use of the products for a specific use or application. All
products contained in this brochure/data sheet are subject to normal wear and
tear from usage.
Subject to change.
TAB 11
Dimensions
CAST IRON HOUSING

HARDENED GEARS
Table No. 3 Specifications

Size Wt . Dimensions
No. Lbs. A B C D1 D2 E F G
3 10 ¬ ¬ 7 1/2" 3 3/4" 3 3/4" 1 1/2" 7/8" 4 9/16"
6 23 4 3/8" 2 3/4" 9 3/32 4 35/64 4 35/64 1 5/8 7/8 6 1/8
9 28 4 1/4 4 1/4 10 3/16 5 3/32 5 3/32 2 1 5/16 7 5/32
12 48 4 1/2 4 1/2 12 1/4 6 1/8 6 1/8 2 3/8 1 5/8 8 15/32
15 105 6 1/2 6 1/2 15 13/16 7 29/32 7 29/32 3 2 1/8 10 7/8
18 125 6 1/2 6 1/2 16 3/32 8 3/64 8 3/64 3 2 1/8 11 15/32
Size Dimensions Keyway

No. H J K L M N P Q R S
3 3 1/16" 1 1/2" 7/8" 2 13/64" 1 11/16" 1 19/32" 3 3/16" .625" - 3/16" x 3/32"
6 4 3/8 1 3/4 1 2 15/16 2 1/16 2 1/8 4 1/4 1.000 3/8-16NC 1/4 x 1/8
9 5 5/32 2 1 5/16 3 1/16 2 9/16 2 1/16 4 1/8 1.000 3/8-16NC 1/4 x 1/8
12 5 31/32 2 1/2 1 5/8 3 31/32 2 7/8 2 13/16 5 5/8 1.250 1/2-13NC 1/4 x 1/8
15 7 7/8 3 2 1/8 4 17/32 3 27/32 4 3/32 8 3/16 1.375 1/2-13NC 5/16 x 5/32
18 8 15/32 3 2 1/8 4 27/32 3 27/32 4 3/32 8 3/16 1.500 1/2-13NC 3/8 x 3/16
{ See Mount Hole Detail Drawing for 3HSB1. | Shaft Tolerances are: +.000 to -.001".
Select Part No. from Table No. 4 and Figures 1-6, page 293.
NOTE — If gear box is to mounted with either shaft vertical, provision must be made to lubricate the top bearings. Contact the
EPT Technical Services at 1-800-626-2093.
NOTE — In order to obtain maximum reducer life, all applications applying axial force on the input shaft of these reducers
should be referred to EPT Technical Services.
292
Assembly Positions and Part Numbers
Table No. 4 Ratios, Types and Part Numbers

Ratio Fig. Type Part No. Ratio Fig. Type Part No. Ratio Fig. Type Part No.
Size No. 3 Size No. 12 Size No. 18
1 and 2 LR 3HSB1-LR10 1 and 2 LR 12HSB1-LR10 1 and 2 LR 18HSB1-LR10
1:1 1:1 1:1
3 and 4 SN 3HSB1-SN10 3 and 4 SN 12HSB1-SN10 3 and 4 SN 18HSB1-SN10
Sprial Spiral Spiral
5 and 6 SF 3HSB1-SF10 5 and 6 SF 12HSB1-SF10 5 and 6 SF 18HSB1-SF10
1 and 2 LR 3HB1-LR10 1 and 2 LR 12HB1-LR10 1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR10
1:1 1:1 1:1
3 and 4 SN 3HB1-SN10 3 and 4 SN 12HB1-SN10 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN10
Straight Straight Straight
5 and 6 SF 3HB1-SF10 5 and 6 SF 12HB1-SF10 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF10
1.5:1 1.5:1 1.2105:1
2:1 2:1 1.3333:1
Size No. 6 1:1.5 1 and 2 LR 12HB1-LR15-A
1.5:1
1 and 2 LR 18HSB1-LR15
1 and 2 LR 6HSB1-LR10 Straight 3 and 4 SN 12HB1-SN15-A 3 and 4 SN 18HSB1-SN15
1:1 Spiral
3 and 4 SN 6HSB1-SN10 (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 12HB1-SF15-A 5 and 6 SF 18HSB1-SF15
Spiral
5 and 6 SF 6HSB1-SF10 Size No. 15 1.5:1
1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR15
1 and 2 LR 6HB1-LR10 1 and 2 LR 15HSB1-LR10 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN15
1:1 1:1 Straight
3 and 4 SN 6HB1-SN10 3 and 4 SN 15HSB1-SN10 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF15
Straight Spiral
5 and 6 SF 6HB1-SF10 5 and 6 SF 15HSB1-SF10 1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR17
1.7131:1
1 and 2 LR 6HB1-LR15 1 and 2 LR 15HB1-LR10 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN17
1.4615:1 1:1 Straight
3 and 4 SN 6HB1-SN15 3 and 4 SN 15HB1-SN10 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF17
Straight Straight
5 and 6 SF 6HB1-SF15 5 and 6 SF 15HB1-SF10 1:1.2105 1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR12-A
1 and 2 LR 6HB1-LR18 1 and 2 LR 15HSB1-LR15 Straight 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN12-A
1.8:1 1.5:1 (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF12-A
3 and 4 SN 6HB1-SN18 3 and 4 SN 15HSB1-SN15
Straight Spiral
5 and 6 SF 6HB1-SF18 5 and 6 SF 15HSB1-SF15 1:1.3333 1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR13-A
Size No. 9 1.5:1
1 and 2 LR 15HB1-LR15 Straight 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN13-A
1 and 2 LR 9HSB1-LR10 3 and 4 SN 15HB1-SN15 (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF13-A
1:1 Straight
3 and 4 SN 9HSB1-SN10 5 and 6 SF 15HB1-SF15 1:1.5 1 and 2 LR 18HSB1-LR15-A
Spiral
5 and 6 SF 9HSB1-SF10 1 and 2 LR 15HB1-LR20 Spiral 3 and 4 SN 18HSB1-SN15-A
2:1 (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 18HSB1-SF15-A
1 and 2 LR 9HB1-LR10 3 and 4 SN 15HB1-SN20
1:1 Straight
3 and 4 SN 9HB1-SN10 5 and 6 SF 15HB1-SF20 1:1.5 1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR15-A
Straight
5 and 6 SF 9HB1-SF10 1 and 2 LR 15HB1-LR30 Straight 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN15-A
3:1 (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF15-A
1 and 2 LR 9HB1-LR15 3 and 4 SN 15HB1-SN30
1.5:1 Straight
3 and 4 SN 9HB1-SN15 5 and 6 SF 15HB1-SF30 1:1.7143 1 and 2 LR 18HB1-LR17-A
Straight
5 and 6 SF 9HB1-SF15 1:1.5 1 and 2 LR 15HSB1-LR15-A Straight 3 and 4 SN 18HB1-SN17-A
1 and 2 LR 9HB1-LR20 Spiral 3 and 4 SN 15HSB1-SN15-A (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 18HB1-SF17-A
2:1 (Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 15HSB1-SF15-A
3 and 4 SN 9HB1-SN20
Straight
5 and 6 SF 9HB1-SF20 1:1.5 1 and 2 LR 15HB1-LR15-A
Straight 3 and 4 SN 15HB1-SN15-A
(Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 15HB1-SF15-A
1:2 1 and 2 LR 15HB1-LR20-A
Straight 3 and 4 SN 15HB1-SN20-A
(Speed-Up) 5 and 6 SF 15HB1-SF20-A
Determine the size reducer and ratio needed from Engineering Data on pages 286 to 291. Then from the sketches above determine the Type needed for the desired shaft extension and rotation.
Then from Table No. 4, above, determine the Reducer Part Number. Example: For a Size 12, 2:1 Ratio Reducer with single output left and output to rotate CCW when input rotates CW (looking
at the shaft ends) note from Fig. 4 that a Type SN is needed and from Table No. 4 that the Part Number is 12HB1-SN20.
293
Emerson Power Transmission FORM
P O Box 687
7893-E
MAYSVILLE, KY 41056
Phone: 800-626-2093 Revised
www.emerson-ept.com May, 2002
RIGHT ANGLE BEVEL GEAR

BOXES ! WARNING
INSTALLATION & Reducer shipped without oil. Fill to proper level before
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS operating to avoid equipment damage and/or personal injury.
Read and follow all instructions on this sheet.
! WARNING
High voltage and rotating parts may cause
serious or fatal injury.
Turn off power to install or service.
Operate with guards in place.
Read and follow all instructions in this manual.
INSTALLATION - Install the drive in the desired mounting position by bolting securely to a solid foundation. (If the pinion shaft extends vertically upward, or
output shaft vertical, provisions must be made at the factory to grease lubricate the upper bearings.) Accurately align all couplings. Install all sheaves and
sprockets as close as practical to the oil seals. Do not hammer on shafts.
LUBRICATION - Remove the breather and fill the housing to the proper oil level with one of the recommended oils from Table 1 below. The proper oil level
is established and maintained at the oil level plug half way up the side of the housing. The approximate oil capacity is shown in Table 2.
RELUBRICATION - After approximately one week or 100 hours operation, drain the reducer, preferably while warm. Thoroughly flush the housing with a light
flushing oil and replace with fresh lubricant. Under favorable conditions, change oil every 2500 operating hours or every 6 months, whichever comes first. For
less favorable conditions such as rapid temperature changes, dirty, dusty or damp atmospheres, more frequent intervals are desired.
Table No. 1 RECOMMENDED OILS

Viscosity @ 100° F 284-347 SSU 626-765 SSU
Ambient Temp. 15-60° F 50-125°F
AGMA No. AGMA No. 2 AGMA No. 4
Manufacturer Trade Name
Amoco Amer. Ind. Oil No. 31 Amer. Ind. Oil No.75

Atlantic-Richfield Duro S-315 Duro S-700
Chevron Oil Co. Chevron OC Turbine 68 Chevron OC Turbine 150
Cities Ser vice Oil Co. CITGO Pacemaker T-30 CITGO Pacemaker T-80
Conoco Dectol 33 R & O Dectol 76 R & O
Exxon Co. Terressic 68 NUTO 150
Famous Lubricants Inc. Gear Life HLC No. 20 Gear Life HLC No. 40
Gulf Oil Cor p. Harmony 33 Harmony 75
Keystone Lubricating Co. KLC -4A KLC-3
Mobil Oil Cor p. DTE Oil Heavy Medium DTE Oil Extra Heavy
Molub Alloy M-A 603 M-A 609
Pennzoil Co. Hyd. Oil No. 3 Hyd. Oil No. 5
Phillips Petroleum Co. Magnus Oil 315 Magnus Oil 700
Shell Oil Company Tellus 58 Tellus 150
Standard Oil Co. of Cal. Chevron OC Turbine 68 Chevron OC Turbine 150
Standard Oil Co. (KY) Chevron OC Turbine 68 Chevron OC Turbine 150
Standard Oil Co. (Ohio) Factoris 52 Industron 66
Sun Oil Co. Sunvis 951 Sunvis 999
Texaco Inc. Regal PC (R & O) Regal F (R & O)
Union Oil Co. UNAX AW-68 UNAX AW-150
Table No. 2
Reducer Size Approximate Oil Capacity
3 4 oz.
6 11 oz.
9 14 oz.
12 26 oz.
15 86 oz.
18 76 oz.
The Emerson logo is a trademark and a service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
© Emerson Power Transmission Manufacturing, L.P. or affiliates 2002.
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
TAB 12
BALL CHECK VALVE TYPE 5087A
DESCRIBTION :
HDL® Ball Check Valves offer great
operation reliability because of their
construction and working principle. The
principle of these valves is a freely moving
ball mounted in a valve housing in such a
way, that return flow is effectively prevented.
The metal ball is covered with oil, sewage
and sea water resistant NBR rubber, which
provides a perfect and silent seal.
The special advantages of the HDL® Ball

Check Valves are:
• Reliable operation without the danger of

clogging
• Efficient operation even with small
pressure differences.
• Economical because of low friction loss
• Valve housing constructed of high
quality material; Nodular Cast Iron EN-
GJS-400-15 (GGG40), ASTM A536
60-40-18
• Light weight, hence low shipping and installation costs
• Easy access for inspection
• No wear under normal conditions
• Maintenance-free and long life
• Comprehensive range from 1½" (DN40) up to 24" (DN600)
These advantages make HDL® Ball Check Valves extremely suitable for use in systems, where there
is danger of clogging, such as sewage and storm water systems.
ANSI valve type 5087A:

Size 1½"-24" are made according to ANSI B16.1, class 125.
The built in length is according to EN 558-1, row 10 (ANSI B16.10, Table 1, column 16)
measurements are stated on page 2
Flanged HDL® Ball Check Valves are also available with DIN flanges.
The working tem perature range goes up to 80°C or 176°F.
In case of higher temperature or pressure or when agrassive or abrassive liquids are involved, we can
deliver special coatings, balls or housing metals to suit almost every possible application.
Hillen de Lelie bv, Grasweg 51, 1031HX Amsterdam, Postbus 37061, 1030AB Amsterdam, tel: +31 (0)20-6360982, Fax: +31 (0)20-6362842, www.hdl.nl
HDL® Ball Check Valve Type 5087A/ASA125 (ANSI B16.1)
B
H
øC
D
A
K
L
Flanges according to ANSI B16.1, ASA125

Length according to EN 558-1 row 10
size D size D A B C H K L weight

inch mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
1½ 40 150*) 84 50 95 16**) 174*) 6,5
2 50 152 100 63 115 19 203 8,5
2½ 65 185*) 114 80 135 16**) 235*) 12
3 80 191 140 96 160 19 241 15
4 100 229 170 125 200 19 292 24
5 125 250*) 200 150 225 16**) 344*) 30
6 150 279 230 180 260 19 356 40
8 200 343 315 250 335 20 495 73
10 250 406 396 320 410 22 622 135
12 300 483 460 370 490 24.5 698 206
14 350 533 544 440 590 24.5 787 310
16 400 597 610 500 755 24.5 914 456
20 500 699 754 620 930 26.5 1100*) 712
24 600 813 910 750 1010 30 1295 1200
*) = Material ball: Aluminium core with Polyurethane rubber

**) = Measurement not according to standard
Hillen de Lelie bv, Grasweg 51, 1031HX Amsterdam, Postbus 37061, 1030AB Amsterdam, tel: +31 (0)20-6360982, Fax: +31 (0)20-6362842, www.hdl.nl
Frictionloss checkvalve HDL type 5087-080
Vertical position Horizontal position
2,00
1,50
1,00
[PSI]
0,50
0,00
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
[US-gpm]
TAB 13
Tab 14
RA 09 637/03.98
Warranty Policy & Procedures RA

for Rexroth Products 09 637/03.98
used in Industrial Applications
Replaces: 05.97
The Rexroth Corporation, Industrial Hydraulics Division Special, incidental, consequential or other damages are ex-
(“Rexroth”), warrants all products manufactured by it to be free pressly excluded. In no event shall Rexroth be liable for con-
from defects in material and workmanship under normal operating sequential damages or contingent liabilities including, but not
conditions and proper application in accordance with the specifi- limited to, loss of life, personal injury, loss of crops, loss of
cations for operation as described in the Data Sheet which business income, downtime costs and trade or other commercial
accompanies such products, for the periods as specified below: loss arising out of the failure of the product. Rexroth shall in no
event be liable for any sum in excess of the price received by it for
A. All products, excluding power units and power packs, piston
the product for which liability is claimed or associated.
equipment, electronics, servo and proportional valves, and
repaired/exchanged products: twenty-four (24) months No products shall be returned without prior authorization from
after delivery date or twelve (12) months after the equip- Rexroth. Buyer shall prepay all transportation charges for the
ment is placed in service, whichever occurs first. return of such products to Rexroth’s factory or authorized factory
service center. Rexroth will not accept any charges for labor and/
B. Piston equipment, without prior technical application ap-
or parts incidental to the removal and remounting of products
proval: twelve (12) months after delivery date or six (6)
repaired or replaced under this warranty.
months after the equipment is placed in service, whichever
occurs first. The foregoing warranty does not cover conditions over which
Rexroth has no control, including, without limitation, contamina-
C. Power units and power packs, piston equipment with prior
tion, pressures in excess of recommended maximum, products
technical application approval, electronics, servo and propor-
damaged or subjected to voltage, humidity, or temperature out-
tional valves and all repaired/exchanged products: eighteen
side of specified range, accident, abuse or misuse after shipment
(18) months after delivery date or twelve (12) months after
from Rexroth’s factory, products altered, disassembled, or
the equipment is placed in service, whichever occurs first.
repaired by anyone other than Rexroth personnel, authorized
D. Seals and sealing materials: six (6) months after delivery date. factory service center personnel or persons so designated in
writing by the Rexroth Service Department prior to the commence-
E. Vendor or customer supplied items on power units: per ori- ment of said work.
ginal manufacturer’s warranty policy.
Types of failures which are not attributable to defects in materials
F. Hydraulic cylinders: and/or workmanship and which are not considered by Rexroth to
F1. NFPA tie rod type: twelve (12) months after delivery date. be part of its warranty include, but are not limited to the following:
F2. Metric tie rod and mill type (≤200 mm bore): twelve (12) • Damages due to deterioration during periods of storage
months after delivery date or six (6) months after the by the Buyer or Agent prior to installation and operation;
equipment is placed in service, whichever occurs first. • Damage of any kind from erosive or corrosive action of any
gasses or liquids handled by the machinery;
F3. Metric mill type (>200 mm bore): eighteen (18) months
after delivery date or twelve (12) months after the • Lack of, or incorrect type of hydraulic fluid;
equipment is placed in service, whichever occurs first. • Contamination of hydraulic fluid;
• Use of hydraulic fluids lacking adequate lubrication
Limitations on Warranty properties;
• Damage attributable to accident, abuse, or neglect;
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER • Stripped splines or keyways on drive shaft;
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY
• Incorrect mounting of external gears, pulleys, etc.;
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A
• Operating beyond the recommended maximum speeds,
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. pressure, temperatures, voltage, or humidity;
Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy under this warranty shall be • Use of the product in a manner or purpose for which it was
limited to the repair or exchange of warranted products, at not designed or intended by Rexroth;
Rexroth’s option, FOB Rexroth’s factory. • Misalignment, mis-wiring, high vibration;
• Ordinary wear and tear.
If the Buyer (as that term is hereinafter defined) or Agent grants to
an end-user any warranty which is greater in scope, time period
Whenever possible, each provision of the foregoing warranty shall
or labor allowance than the warranty stated herein, Rexroth shall
be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under
not be liable beyond this stated warranty. Except as otherwise
applicable law, but if any provision of this warranty shall be
provided in paragraph 7.0 under the Warranty Processing
prohibited by or invalid under applicable law, such provision shall
Procedures section of this warranty, equipment and accessories
be ineffective only to the extent of such prohibition or invalidity
not of Rexroth’s manufacture warranted by the manufacturer
without invalidating the remainder of such provision or the remain-
thereof, as provided in Paragraph E above. The term “Buyer” as
ing provisions of this warranty.
used herein means the person or firm that purchased the product
directly from Rexroth, and includes direct OEM customers and
Rexroth distributors.
1
RA 09 637/03.98
Recommendation of Fluids 8.0 Products returned for warranty consideration which are
found to be defective in material or workmanship and which
To ensure that Rexroth products perform satisfactorily, proper are within the stated warranty period will be repaired and
maintenance, fluid selection, and lubrication must be provided by tested (if applicable) at no charge.
the user. Rexroth does not recommend the use of any particular
8.1 Repairs performed under warranty will be warranted against
manufacturer’s fluids in its products. Rexroth has identified lubri-
further defects in material or workmanship for the balance of
cants by characteristics, industry standard, manufacturer and the original warranty time remaining on the product, or for six
past field performance which may be suitable for use with its (6) months after the repaired unit is placed in service, which-
products; however, choice of fluid manufacturer is the user’s sole ever period is longer.
decision. 8.2 Rexroth or its authorized factory service center will pay return
Lubricant manufacturers must guarantee that their products meet freight only on products repaired under warranty.
or exceed industry standards by manufacturing fluids of the 9.0 If the damage to the product is beyond economical repair
requisite quality to comply with component manufacturers’ re- and the cause of the failure is attributable to faulty materials
quirements. REXROTH MAKES NO WARRANTIES WHATSO- or workmanship, Rexroth may elect to scrap the returned
EVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT product and supply a new replacement unit. Alternatively, a
TO FLUIDS. In no event shall Rexroth be liable for any damages, credit may be issued in an amount equal to the original
direct, indirect or consequential, arising out of, or in connection purchase price of the scrapped unit.
with component damage resulting from user’s selection, use or 10.0 If a product is returned for warranty consideration and
maintenance of fluids for Rexroth’s components. denied warranty coverage for any reason, the Buyer or
Agent will be charged for the inspection even though the
Warranty Processing Procedures product is still within the warranty time period.
1.0 All products to be submitted for warranty consideration must 10.1 Products denied warranty repair will, at the Buyer’s or
be shipped prepaid to Rexroth or to an authorized Rexroth Agent’s request, be repaired on a time and materials basis.
service center for warranty inspection and/or evaluation 10.2 Repairs made on such units will be warranted as specified in
unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Rexroth. Section C.
2.0 All products returned to Rexroth must be forwarded by the 10.3 The Buyer or Agent is responsible for freight both ways when
Buyer, or in the case of products imported on a foreign warranty repair is denied.
manufactured machine, by the United States Agent for that 11.0 If a product returned to Rexroth or an authorized Rexroth
machine. service center for warranty consideration is found not to be
3.0 A purchase order must be supplied for all products returned defective in materials and workmanship, and is found to be
to Rexroth or to an authorized Rexroth service center for in good working order, the Buyer or Agent will be charged for
warranty inspection and/or evaluation. The purchase order the inspection and testing (if applicable) even though the
must indicate return shipping instructions. product is still within the warranty time period.
11.1 The Buyer or Agent is responsible for the freight both ways
4.0 A Return Goods Authorization (“RGA”) number must be
and for the cost of any gaskets and seals that may need to be
obtained from Rexroth’s Service Department (Hydraulics or replaced following the examination.
Electronics) or authorized service center prior to any prod-
11.2 Such products will only be warranted for the balance of their
ucts being returned for warranty consideration.
original warranty time period.
5.0 Products submitted for warranty consideration by third par-
12.0 Upon inspection and/or repair of any given product, an
ties will be accepted as long as a purchase order and RGA
Inspection Report will be completed by Rexroth or by the
number are generated by the Buyer or Agent.
authorized factory service center. This document will briefly
6.0 Products repaired under warranty may be “drop shipped” to report the condition of the product and a diagnosis of the
third parties if requested by the Buyer or Agent. The invoice failure or malfunction. One copy will be forwarded to the
(if applicable) and inspection report will be sent to such Buyer or Agent. Exchanges are not applicable.
Buyer or Agent.
13.0 All repaired and rebuilt products will be tested and painted
7.0 Some Rexroth industrial products manufactured by foreign when applicable.
Rexroth affiliates are not normally marketed in the United
14.0 Products returned for warranty consideration should not
States for reasons of overlapping product lines, use of
contain the user’s fittings, couplings, hoses, etc. Rexroth
metric measure, and other market considerations. There-
does not assume responsibility for the return of such fittings,
fore, warranty and routine repairs may not be immediately
couplings, hoses, etc.
available for such units when they are imported. All indus-
trial products manufactured by Rexroth or foreign Rexroth 15.0 Damages or losses occurring during shipping and handling
affiliates can be purchased through Rexroth, if advance of Rexroth products shall be the responsibility of the Buyer
notice is given and sufficient lead times are allowed for. All or Agent.
such products, if purchased from Rexroth, will be serviced
and warranted by Rexroth.

2 All rights reserved – Subject to revision
Printed in U.S.A.
RA 07
RA 75 075/06.87
075/03.92
Petroleum Based Fluids

for use with RA
Vane, Radial, Piston and Gear 07 075/03.96
Pumps & Motors Replaces: 6.87
The oil quality, cleanliness, and operating viscosity are decisive 1.1.4 V2 pumps
factors in the operating reliability, efficiency, and service life of an permissible viscosity 80 … 740 SUS (16 … 160 mm2/s)
oil hydraulic installation. permissible start viscosity 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s)
The data sheets for the various types of pumps contain specific (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
information regarding viscosity range, and suitable fluids. Further- 1.2 R4 radial piston pumps
more, the ordering codes contain details of special models for use permissible viscostiy 60 … 930 SUS (10 … 200 mm2/s)
with special fluids. (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
The following points must also be observed in addition to the 1.3 Viscosity range for external gear pumps and gear pumps.
specifications in the data sheets. 1.3.1 G2, G3, G4 pumps, and G2 and G3 motors.
Reference: permissible operating viscosity 60 … 1390 SUS
ISO 3448 Industrial liquid lubricants – ISO viscosity classification (10 … 300 mm2/s)
ISO 6074 Hydraulic fluid power – petroleum oils-classification and permissible start viscosity 4635 SUS (1000 mm2/s)
designation. (for suitable fluids, see points 2.1 and 2.2)
ISO 6075/1 Hydraulic fluid power – characteristics of petroleum 1.3.2 G8, G9, and G10 pumps
oils DIN 51524, part 1 and 2. permissible operating viscosity 60 … 13910 SUS
(10 … 3000 mm2/s)
Note: 1 mm2/s = 1 cSt (centistoke)
(for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
1. Viscosity
1.4 GU/GN pumps
The permissable viscosity for the installation, including
permissible operating viscosity 100 … 1400 SUS
combination pumps, is always restricted to that of the
(20 … 300 mm2/s)
component with the narrowest range. (For combination
permissible start viscosity … 4635 SUS (… 1000 mm2/s)
pumps V4 + R4, the maximum viscosity is limited by the R4
(for permissible fluids, see points 2.2)
pump and the minimum viscosity is limited by the V4 pump).
1.5 MZ motors:
The permissible viscosity range must be maintained for all
suitable operating viscosity 80 … 740 SUS
operating conditions.
(16 … 160 mm2/s)
The viscosity of HV oils (ISO 6074) drops during operation suitable start viscosity 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s)
due to shearing by up to 30%. This must be considered in the (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
design. The viscosity is also dependent on temperature. On
1.6 Viscosity range for MCS motors
this basis, the oil viscosity class must be determined with
regard to the maximum and minimum oil reservoir tempera- 1.6.1 MCS series 3:
tures. Normally, cooling or heating, or both are required. If, suitable operating viscosity 60 … 2320 SUS
in spite of this, difficulties are still experienced, then a fluid (10 … 500 mm2/s)
from another viscosity class (ISO 3448 VG class) will prob- 1.6.2 MCS series 5 and 6:
ably have to be selected. If in doubt, please consult us. suitable operating viscosity 120 … 2320 SUS
1.1 Viscosity range of vane pumps. (25 … 500 mm2/s)
(for suitable fluids, see points 2.1 and 2.2)
1.1.1 V3 and V4 pumps
max. 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s) during full start up. 1.7 MCR motors:
max. 930 SUS (200 mm2/s) during start up in deadhead. suitable operating viscosity 60 … 9270 SUS
min. 120 SUS (25 mm2/s) at max. operating temperature (10 … 2000 mm2/s)
optimum viscosity range 120 … 740 SUS (for suitable fluids, see points 2.1 and 2.2)
(25 … 160 mm2/s) 1.8 MRP, MR, MRE, MRV, MRVE motors:
(for deadhead pressures less than 915 PSI (63 bar), a suitable operating viscosity 85 … 4635 SUS
minimum viscosity of 80 SUS (16 mm2/s) is permissible) (18 … 1000 mm2/s)
(for suitable fluids, see point 2.2) recommended operating viscosity 140 … 230 SUS
1.1.2 V5 pumps (30 … 50 mm2/s)
max. 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s) during full flow start up. (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
max. 930 SUS (200 mm2/s) during start up in deadhead. 1.9 MKM/MRM motors:
min. viscosity is 80 SUS (16 mm2/s) at operating suitable operating viscosity 95 … 695 SUS
temperature (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2) (20 … 150 mm2/s)
1.1.3 V7 pumps recommended operating viscosity 140 … 230 SUS
max. 3710 SUS (800 mm2/s) during full start-up (30 to 50 mm2/s)
max. 930 SUS (200 mm2/s) during start up in deadhead (for suitable fluids, see point 2.2)
min. 120 SUS (25 mm2/s) at max. operating temperature
(for suitable fluids:
Sizes 10, 16, 25 and 40, for deadhead pressures less
than 1015 PSI (70 bar), see points 2.1 and 2.2;
Sizes 10, 16, 25, 40, 63 and 100, for deadhead pressures
less than 2030 PSI (140 bar) see point 2.2)
1
RA 07 075/06.87
2. Fluids 2.2.2 Oils with an increased viscosity index (HV oils)
The specification of the fluid is always determined by the (Oils for use in installations which are subject to wide
most sensitive component in the system. All components temperature fluctuations.)
of the system must be compatible with the fluid used. If these oils fulfill the requirements of ISO 6074** then point
2.1 HL oils to ISO 6074 2.2 applies. When choosing an HV oil, the loss in viscosity
These fluids contain no additives against wear caused by due to shearing of up to 30% must be taken into consider-
marginal lubrication. ation. For example, taking a V4 pump with a minimum
They may only be used with the following pumps and permissible viscosity of 120 SUS (25 mm2/s). This limit must
motors: G2, G3, G4 and V7, sizes 10, 16, 25 and 40, MCS, be increased to 167 SUS (36mm2/s) when using HV oils, so
MCR. that should shearing occur, the minimum viscosity limit will
not be passed. VI improvers can also have a negative effect
Aircraft fluids to MIL-H-5606 (e.g. Aero Shell Fluid 4) of the
on the demulsifying and air separation qualities of the oil. HV
relevant viscosity range, and containing wear additives
oils should therefore only be used, when the temperature
corresponding to HL oils can also be used with the above
conditions so demand. Aircraft oils to MIL-H-5606: see point
pumps/motors.
2.1 (HL oils).
When frequently starting from rest, HLP oils should be used.
2.2.3 The application of HM (HLP-D oils)
The use of HL oils with vane pumps (except a.m. V7, sizes
(Oils with detergent, dispersant and anti-wear additives as
10, 16, 25 and 40), radial piston pumps, internal gear pumps,
described in point 2.2)
MZ motors and gear pumps G8, G9, G10 is not permitted.
These oils can absorb a considerable quantity of water,
Hydraulic fluids, which attack lead, or bearings containing
especially if this water is present in the form of large drops,
lead, may not be used, even if they comply to ISO 6074.
it can detract from the war protection given by the oil. They
They are simply multi-purpose oils, which contain fatty
should therefore not be used where water may enter the
acids, or fatty acid esters (for example slide way oils).
system.
Oils similar to HL oils are also specified under Cetop RP 75
In many machine shops in which certain synthetic cooling
and DIN 51 524, part 1.
and cutting fluids are used, installations will only operate
At low pressures, consult us regarding the use of other pump correctly if HM (HLP-D) fluids are employed. Other oils lead
types, in addition to the pumps permitted above. to sticking of the components. In the mobile area, these oils
2.2 Oils with HLP characteristics have been of particular advantage. We recommend these
2.2.1 HM (HLP)* oils to ISO 6074 oils only in the above-mentioned cases.
(Oils with corrosion, oxidization, and wear additives.) These The film strength of these oils is very much dependent on the
fluids are those most commonly used in hydraulic circuits. If manufacturer. The statement, that these oils are particularly
the viscosity range is correct, they may be used with all good in preventing stick/slip at low cylinder speeds, cannot
components. therefore be accepted as universally true.
In viscosity classes VG 10, VG 15 and VG 22, ISO 6074 In cases, where heavy contamination from water is to be
places no extensive requirements on resistance to wear. expected, i.e. in steel works, or in damp surroundings, HLP-
Oils of these classes are therefore only permitted if they D oils may not be used, as the emulsified water is not
reach wear resistance class 10 on the FZG (gear wear) test, deposited in the reservoir, but is turned into steam at highly
in addition to ISO 6074. loaded parts of the system.
For vane pumps in general, oils to ISO VG 10 and VG 15 are In these cases, we recommend the use of HLP oils with
not permitted. thermostable zinc free additives, as these have particularly
Hydraulic fluids, which attack lead, or bearings containing good demulsifying properties. The filterability of these oils is
lead, may not be used, even if they comply to ISO 6074. also very good, particularly with very fine filteration.
They are simply multi-purpose oils (lubricating oils), and When using HLP-D oils, contamination is not precipitated
sometimes, HM (HLP-D) oils. We permit the use of all HM out, but must be filtered out. On this basis, a larger filter area
(HLP) oils, which comply with ISO 6074, with the exception than normal must be used (design ∆p=0.2 bar). The filter
of those indicated above, but would point out here, that this pore size should also be made one degree finer.
standard merely specifies the minimum requirements. The water content must lie below 0.1%, as water acceler-
As may be seen from the table, there are oils available, that ates the aging of the oil, detracts from the lubricity, leads
far exceed these minimum requirements with bearing met- to corrosion and cavitation, shortens the life of seals and
als, and filterability. reduces the filterability.
The resistance to aging has an obvious effect on the usable Various HLP-D oils contain fatty acids or fatty acid esters.
life of the fluid. Sediments produced by additives in the oils These fluids may not be used, as they attack lead. If in
have a negative effect on the system. Oils should be chosen doubt, contact the manufacturer of the oil.
with a low sedimentation factor (see table). Good filterability In general, with the exception of the demulsification
avoids breakdowns. If in doubt, please contact the oil characteristics, the same information as under point 2.2
manufacturer. for HLP-D oils is valid.
We would also point out to users, when choosing a supplier,
that some of these offer to check the condition of oil which *"HLP" is comparable to ISO/DIS 6074
has been in use, for aging, contamination, and residual "HM" oil, which in the "total ring" and vane loss, "pump wear
additives. This knowledge can then be used to forecast the test", the wear is less than 50 mg. This test is according to
further usable life of the fluid. ASTM D 2882.
**HV oils according to ISO/DIS 6074 (DIN 51 524) must also
meet the anti-wear additive requirements outlined by HLP oils
in point 2.2.
2
07 075/08.91
RA 75 075/06.87
Filterability dependent on additive system 3. Filtration
Generally, a cleanliness class 18/15, according to ISO 4406
Additive system (class 9, according to NAS 1638), is required for the fluid.
Filtration time Primary Secondary Conventional Thermo- This is achieved with a filter ß10 ≥ 100. In order to ensure long
for 3 x each stable life, a cleanliness class 17/14, according to ISO 4406 (class
100 ml through 8, according to NAS 1638) is recommended, achieved with
a 5 µm filter Zn/P/S Zn/P/S PSN PSN a filter of ß9 ≥ 100.
100 ml min 33 3.5 2 1 The information provided in the various data sheets for the
maximum degree of fluid contamination, must be observed.
200 ml min >60 9 2 1
New oil, as delivered, frequently does not meet the cleanli-
300 ml min >60 >60 2 1
ness standards required, and must be filtered carefully
before being placed into the system. The ISO/NAS cleanli-
Resistance to aging dependent on additive system ness class on delivery can be obtained from the oil supplier.
Additive system High Low Zinc-free Zinc-free Operation of the system with a clogged filter must be
concentration Zinc Zinc conventional thermo- prevented by an electrical safety device.
between 0.9 content stabilized stable Maintenance of the necessary cleanliness class requires
and 1.1% eff. careful filtering of the air entering the tank.
Add. element Zn/P/S/Ca Zn/P/S PSN PSN In damp atmospheres, a silica gel element is also neces-
Test to DIN sary.
51 587 4. Mixing various fluids
1800 2600 1800 3000
Aging duration If oils from various manufacturers, or different oils from the
to h, NZ = 2 same manufacturer are mixed, sedimentation and muddi-
Sedimentation ness may occur. This can lead to damage in the system.
content after 429 52 155 48 Based on these facts, no guarantee can be made for the
100 h mg application of mixed oils. Generally, it should be noted, that
apportionment of blame in cases of damage due to the
Dissolved Cu
361 41 75 121 mixing of oils from different manufacturers or further
after 100h mg
additives being placed in the oil cannot easily be made.
Source: O + P (1985) No. 3 Prof. Dr. Thoenes, Essen Market However, the oil supplier may be able to test mixability of
and technical development of hydraulic fluids. different oils under certain circumstances, and in turn offer
a guarantee.
Viscosity/temperature diagram
Viscosity in mm2/s
Temperature in °C
3
RA 07 075/06.87
Frequently used formulas and standards

Physical Formulas Measuring Techniques and Standards
a Velocity of sound in petroleum oil = 4330 ft/sec (1320 m/sec) 1 Kinematic viscosity in mm2/s DIN 51 562
3
b Compressibility factor B (bulk modulus) 2 Density at 60°F(15°C) in g/cm DIN 51 757
∆v m3 3 Viscosity index (VI) DIN ISO 2909
ß = –––– = 3 to 8•10–5 –––––––
v•p m3 • bar
4 For HL fluids DIN 51 524 part 1
c Viscosity / temperature function For HLP fluids DIN 51 524 part 2
U1 – U2 For HV fluids DIN 51 524 part 3 (proposed)
Gradient n = –––––––––––––– where U = arc sinhlnν
2.303 (lgT2 – lgT1) 5 Viscosity classification (to ISO) DIN 51 519
Viscosity index VI (see ISO 2909) 6 Pour point
37°F (3°C) higher than the sticking point DIN ISO 3016
d Viscosity / pressure characteristic (Kinematic viscosity η)
7 Gear tooth test (FZG normal test A/8.3/90)
ηp = η0 • eα • p (p in bar) mPa • s (Gear tooth loading test in 12 stages
α 20 °C
= 0.00240 bar–1 at 194°F (90°C) start temperature and
27 ft/s (8.3 m/s) circumferential speed) DIN 51 354 part 2
α 50 °C
= 0.00205 bar–1
α100 °C = 0.00147 bar–1 8 Pressure-terms-pressure ratings DIN 24 312
(from “Pressure fluids“ by Mr. Horst Dietterle, Shell Oil) 9 Air separation characteristics DIN 51 381
e Specific heat 10 Suspension of solids DIN 51 592

kJ 11 Corrosion protection characteristics
c = 1.84 • ––––––
kg • K regarding steel (process A) DIN 51 585
corrosive effect on copper DIN 51 579
f Thermal expansion
12 Demulsification characteristics DIN 51 599
∆v = v • 0.0007 • ∆ T cm3 (T in °K) Water content DIN ISO 3733
g Bunsen coefficient 13 Effect on seal materials DIN 53 538 part 1

in connection with DIN 53 521
VL = Voil • 0.09 • p VL in cm3 (air dissolved in oil) and DIN 53 505
(p in bar) mg KOH
Voil (oil volume) 14 Neutralization number ––––––– DIN 51 558 part 1
g
p2 p2 = ending pressure (bar) 15 Determination of carbonized
VL ≈ 0.09 Voil • –––
p1 p1 = beginning pressure (bar) residue according to Conradson DIN 51 551
16 Mechanical testing of vane pumps
h Coefficient of circulation
(wear in mg) DIN 51 389 part 2
Q 1 Q in L/min (pump flow)
i = –––––– –––– 17 Aging characteristics
V installation min V in L (Oil volume of the installation)
Increase in the neutralization number
after 100 hrs. (mg KOH/g) DIN 51 587
This is the reciprocal of the setting time

4 All rights reserved - Subject to revision

Printed in U.S.A.
Petroleum Hydraulic Fluids Recommendations
Industrial Hydraulics
Petroleum Hydraulic Fluids
Recommendations
The attached list of industrial hydraulic oils has been tabulated for use as a reference in assisting Bosch Rexroth cus-
tomers with an oil selection. The list is comprised of oils which meet or exceed the lubrication requirements of our
componentry.
Viscosity Selection
Hydraulic componentry will operate efficiently only within a specific viscosity range. A fluid which is too viscous
may prompt cavitation. Conversely, a fluid which is too thin may allow an accelerated rate of wear and additional slip
losses. Consequently, it is necessary to establish viscosity limitations.
The following table can be used as a guide in determining the recommended viscosity range for all pumps of our
manufacture. If your application dictates the use of fluids whose viscosities are outside of these recommendations,
please consult a Bosch Rexroth Sales Engineer.
Viscosity Minimum Optimum Maximum Maximum

Temperature Operating Operating Operating Start-up
Chart Viscosity Viscosity Viscosity Viscosity
80 SUS 125-250 SUS 1000 SUS 4000 SUS
FA; Ra; K #1
15 cSt 26-54 cSt 216 cSt 864 cSt
Q; Q-6 100 SUS 150-250 SUS 1000 SUS 4000 SUS
SV-10, 15, 20, 25 #2 21 cSt 32-54 cSt 216 cSt 864 cSt
VPV 16, 25, 32
SV-40; 80 &100 150 SUS 200-300 SUS 1000 SUS 4000 SUS
VPV 45, 63, 80, 100, #3 32 cSt 43-65 cSt 216 cSt 864 cSt
130 & 164
60 SUS 100-250 SUS 300 SUS 750 SUS
Radial Piston (Seco) #4
10 cSt 21-54 cSt 65 cSt 162 cSt
65 SUS 103-460 SUS 3800 SUS 9500 SUS
Gear Pumps #5
12 cSt 20-100 cSt 800 cSt 2000 cSt
In general, an oil which matches the viscosity requirements of the
Valves & Boosters
pump, will also be satisfactory for valves and boosters.
Viscosity vs Leakage
In selecting a hydraulic media, keep in mind that leakage is almost proportional to the kinematic (cSt) viscosity of the
fluid. The use of a lighter fluid other than required results in increased leakage and decreased efficiencies. For exam-
ple, using an oil with a viscosity of 80 SUS (15 cSt) will result in approximately 200% of the leakage obtained with
an oil having a viscosity of 140 SUS (30 cSt). Leakage with an oil of 300 SUS (65 cST) will be less than half of the
leakage obtained with the 140 SUS (30 cSt) oil.
Filtration
The ultimate life of hydraulic componentry is contingent upon system cleanliness. The use of micronic filtration that
has been matched to system requirements will reduce component malfunctions as well as extending the life of the
componentry and the hydraulic media.
Inlet Conditions
Any restrictions in the suction line decrease the allowable maximum viscosity. In general, pressure drop in the
suction line between the tank and pump inlet should not exceed 6" mercury with vane pumps, when pumping full
volume at sea level under start-up conditions.
Some radial piston pumps are not self priming, and dictate the use of overhead reservoirs. In this instance the intake
line must be unrestricted and sized to allow gravity to supply an adequate volume of oil to the pump.
At altitudes above 5000 feet, the use of overhead reservoirs is recommended for all Bosch Rexroth systems.
2
Use of Viscosity/Temperature Charts
Under the heading “Viscosity Selection” please note that there are five classes of pumps. For each of these classes
there is a mating Viscosity/Temperature chart which can be found on pages 5 through 7 of this publication.
Before referring to these charts, however, it is necessary to look at the listing of approved oils to determine if your
intended hydraulic media is ISO viscosity grade 32, 46 or 68. In general, a viscosity grade 32 oil has a viscosity of
about 150 SUS (32 cSt) @ 100 °F, grade 46 - 200 SUS (43 cSt) @ 100 °F, and grade 68 - 300 SUS (65 cSt)
@ 100 °F.
After noting the viscosity grade, refer to the Viscosity/Temperature Chart which matches the type of pump that
is used in your system.
By noting the points at which the viscosity plots intersect the vertical temperature lines, one can quickly determine
the temperatures at which the oil reaches: the maximum start-up viscosity; the maximum running viscosity; the
optimum viscosity range; and the minimum operating viscosity.
As an example, let us assume that we wish to use Mobil DTE 26 in an SV-80 pump. From the list of approved
products we note that DTE 26 is a Grade 68 oil. The correct Viscosity/Temperature Chart for an SV-80 is Chart #3.
Based on the plot for ISO grade 68 oil we then determine that the minimum start-up temperature could be 30 °F
(–1 °C) without exceeding the 4000 SUS start-up viscosity; the maximum viscosity for continuous operation is
reached at 63 °F (17 °C); the optimum operating viscosity is attained between the temperatures of 100 °F (38 °C)
and 118 °F (48 °C); and, at temperatures above 130 °F (54 °C), the minimum operating viscosity will have been
exceeded.
3
Recommended Oils
The following list of industrial hydraulic oils are recommended for use in Bosch Rexroth hydraulic componentry.
Oils sold by listed suppliers under other trade names, or oils which are sold by unlisted suppliers may not be
considered to be a satisfactory hydraulic media. Many formulations are being offered which lack certain additives or
are formulated for special reasons, such as lower cost, high detergency, leakage control, etc. Some of these
specialty fluids can be used successfully, however, others may prompt malfunctions and high rates of wear.
When employing fire resistant fluids, please consult our publication 9 535 233 457 “Fire Resistant Fluids”.
Manufacturer Fluid Name ISO Manufacturer Fluid Name ISO

Viscosity Viscosity
Grade Grade
Amalie Ama-Oil 100 AW 32 Houghton Hydro-Drive HP 150 32
Amoco Amoco AW 32 32 Kendall Kenoil R&O AW 32 32
Ashland Ultramax AW-15 32 Lubrication Monolec 6110A 46
Ultramax AW-20 46 Engineers Monolec 6120A 68
Ultramax AW-30 68
Bel-Ray Raylene 0 32 Lubriplate HO-0 32
Benz Petraulic 32 32 Lyondell Duro AW 32 32
BP Oil Inc. Energol HLP 32 32 Mobil DTE 24 32
Canvis AW 32 32 Petro-Canada Hydroflo HLP32 32
Champlin Hydrol 150 32 Phillips Magnus A 150 32
Chevron Chevron HYD 32 32 Rock Valley Trojan AW 32 32
Cities Service Pacemaker XD-32 32 Shell Tellus 32 32
Citgo AW 32 32 Steelco 7410 Hydraulic Oil 32
Conoco Super Hydraulic 32 32 Sun Sunvis 816 WR 32
Dryden Drydene Blue 32 32 Texaco Rando HD 32 32
Exxon Nuto H 32 32 Tower Hydroil AW-3 32
Fiske Lubriplate HO-0 32 Union Unax AW 150 32
Gulf Harmony 32 AW 32 Withrow Withrolube 655 32
4
Industrial
Chart #1 Maximum
FA, RA & K Vane Pumps Temperature
Maximum
4000 Start-up
3000 Viscosity
2000
1500
Maximum
1000 Running
750 68 Viscosity
46
500 32
400
300
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
Minimum
Viscosity
70
60
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

Industrial
Chart #2 Maximum
Q, Q-6, SV-10, SV-15, SV-20, SV-25 Vane Pumps Temperature
VPV 16, 25, & 32 Vane Pumps Maximum

4000 Start-up
3000 Viscosity
2000
1500
Maximum
1000 Running
750 68 Viscosity
46
500 32
400
300
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
Minimum
90 Viscosity
80
70
60
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

TEMPERATURE, DEGREES CELCIUS 5
Industrial
Chart #3 Maximum
SV-40, SV-80 & SV-100 Vane Pumps Temperature
VPV 45, 63, 80, 100, 130 & 164 Vane Pumps Maximum
4000 Start-up
3000 Viscosity
2000
1500
Maximum
1000 Running
750 68 Viscosity
32 46
500
400
300
200
Optimum Minimum
150
Viscosity Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
70
60
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

Industrial
Chart #4 Maximum
Radial Piston Pumps Temperature
4000
3000
2000
1500
1000 Maximum
750 Start-up
Viscosity
500 68
400 32 46 Maximum
300 Running
Viscosity
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
70
60
Minimum
Viscosity
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

6 TEMPERATURE, DEGREES CELCIUS
Industrial
Chart #5 Maximum
Gear Pumps Temperature
Maximum
10000 Start-up
7500 Viscosity
5000
Maximum
4000 Running
3000 Viscosity
2000
VISCOSITY, SAYBOLT UNIVERSAL SECONDS*
1500
68
1000
46
750 32
500
400
300
200
Optimum
150
Viscosity
Range
100
90
80
70
Minimum
60 Viscosity
55
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

* Viscosity values extrapulated at low temperatures may not be acurate. Confirm

viscosity values prior to using Bosch Rexroth hydraulic equipment.
7
Industrial Hydraulics Division
7505 Durand Avenue
Sturtevant, Wisconsin 53177
Phone (262) 554-7100
Fax (262) 554-7117
Email: webmasterbrirc
www.boschat.com
Bosch Rexroth Corporation*#

Pneumatics
P.O. Box 13597
1953 Mercer Road
Lexington, KY 40511-1021
Phone (859) 254-8032
Fax (859) 254-4188
(800) 489-4188
Email: customer.pneumatics
www.us.rexroth.com

Electric Drives and Controls
5150 Prairie Stone Parkway
Hoffman Estates, IL 60192-3707
Phone (847) 645-3600
Fax (847) 645-6201
Email: info@indramat.com
www.us.rexroth.com

Linear Motion and
Assembly Technologies
816 East Third Street
Buchanan, MI 49107
Phone (616) 695-0151
Fax (616) 695-5363
www.boschat.com
Bosch Rexroth Corporation*

Mobile Hydraulics Division
P.O. Box 395
1700 Old Mansfield Road
Wooster, OH 44691-0394
Phone (330) 263-3300
Fax (330) 263-3333
Email: info@rexroth.com
www.us.rexroth.com
Bosch Rexroth AG
Zum Eisengiesser 1
D-97816 Lohram Main
Telefon +49 (0) 93 52/18-11
Fax +49 (0) 93 52/18-11 90
Email: pr@rexroth.de
www.boschrexroth.de
*ISO9001 Certified Quality System

#QS9000 Certified Quality System
For more information, you may contact your nearest Bosch Rexroth distributor:
9 535 233 456 9/01

RA 07 900/06.98
Assembly, Start-up RA
and Service of 07 900/06.98
Hydraulic Power Units and Systems Replaces: 11.91
1. General 3. Start-up
Long service life and functional reliability of hydraulic systems When assembly has been correctly completed, proceed with
and their components are dependent on the correct mainte- start-up and functional test.
nance. To ensure efficient operation it is important to carefully 3.1. Preparation for trial run
review the following: 1. Tank cleaned?
– the special installation and operational instructions of the 2. Lines cleaned and correctly installed?
components 3. Couplings, flanges tightened?
– the technical data contained in the data sheet 4. Lines and components correctly connected in line with
– the NFPA/ANSI/ISO recommendations installation drawings or circuit diagram?
– the following instructions 5. Pressure accumulators properly charged with nitrogen?
It is recommended that the gas charge be noted on the
accumulator itself (e.g. by a label) and in the circuit
2. Installation
diagram, so that a check may be made in the future when
2.1. Preparation of assembly required.
1. Cleanliness: 6. Prime mover and pump correctly assembled and aligned?
– of the environmental area. 7. Prime mover correctly connected?
– of power units, pipe connections, components 8. Filter of specified pore size?
(e.g. pickling may be necessary if pipes have been 9. Specified fluid filled up to maximum level?
welded or hot bent). 3.2 Trial run
– of hydraulic fluids
1. Any personnel not required should leave the area!
Watch out for contamination, dampness; dirt from the
Only maintenance and operating personnel should be
environment must not be allowed to enter the reservoir.
present during start-up.
Fill reservoir only via a filter – preferably via system
2. Are shut-off valves fully open?
filters or portable filter stations with fine filters (10 µm).
3. Does the direction of rotation of the prime mover match
– protective internal paint coatings, if used, must be com-
that of the pump? Switch on briefly, “jog” the unit (1 to 5
patible with the hydraulic fluid used.
seconds) and check rotation.
– of parts from stock
4. Check position of directional valves and if necessary
Storage of parts which have not been filled or treated
move into required position.
with anticorrosion fluid can lead to the buildup of resin.
5. Set control valves to bypass or “unloaded”.
Dissolve resin with solvent and replace lubricating oil.
6. Open pump suction valves – if necessary fill pump hous-
2. Are all the parts on hand?
ing with fluid.
3. Is there any transportation damage?
7. If pilot “boost” pump is installed, start-up.
2.2. Carrying out assembly 8. Start main pump, move out of zero “deadhead” position
1. Make use of lifting eye bolts and transportation equipment. and listen for noise.
2. Do not use force. In order to prevent radial forces and 9. Change the displacement of the pump slightly*.
tension on pipelines and components, ensure that pipe- 10. Bleed system
lines are firmly secured. Carefully loosen fitting or bleed screws at high points in
3. Do not use putty or teflon tape as a sealing material, as this the system. When the escaping hydraulic fluid is free of air
can lead to contamination and thus malfunctions. bubbles, the filling process is complete. Retighten
4. In order to avoid external leakage, observe the installation fittings.
instructions of the pipe fitting manufacturer. We 11. Flush system, if possible by short-circuiting the actuators.
recommend the use of fittings with flexible seals and Continue flushing until the filters remain clean; check
S.A.E. straight thread O-ring ports. filter.
5. Makes sure hose lines are correctly laid. Rubbing and 12. Check function of system without load; if possible, oper-
touching of the lines must be avoided. ate by hand.
6. Availability of correct fluids (ISO VG DIN 51 519) Cold test the electro-hydraulic controls.
– select the proper fluid according to system require- 13. When operating temperature has been reached, test
ments (petroleum oils preferred). system under load. Gradually increase pressure.
7. Make sure that all electrical components you wire are 14. Check monitoring and measuring devices.
calibrated, set and tested properly before start-up. 15. Listen for noise.
Please note: 16. Check fluid level, add if necessary.
– viscosity range 17. Check setting of pressure relief valves by loading or
braking the system.
– operating temperature range
18. Check for leakage.
– type of seals used on components 19. Switch off power to the drive.
* Run internal combustion engines at idling speed.
1/2
RA 07 900/06.98
20. Tighten all fittings, even if there is no evidence of leakage. have inspected for particle types, size, and quantity;
Warning: tighten only when the system is not under pres- document findings in manual.
sure. 4.5. Check accumulators
21. Recheck fluid level.
Check pressurized accumulators for charging pressure;
22. Full functional test of the system. Compare measured
while doing so, there must be no pressure on the fluid side
values with the permissible and/or required data (pres-
of the accumulator.
sure, speed and setting of other control components).
23. Jerky movements indicate the presence of air in the 4.6. Check temperature
system. By changing the pumps displacement with the Measure operating temperature not only in the reservoir, but
actuators in the loaded or braked condition, certain air also in the region of the pump bearings.
pockets can be eliminated. The system is completely bled Rising operating temperature is an indication of increasing
when all functions can be carried out smoothly and con- friction and leakage.
tinuously and there is no foaming on the surface of the 4.7. Leakage in the system
fluid. In practice it has been found that foaming should Apart from loss of fluid, leaks can endanger concrete floors
have ceased 1 hour after start-up at the latest. and components, particularly with underfloor piping.
24. Check fluid temperature.
4.8. Check main and pilot pressures
25. Switch off power to the drive.
26. Remove filter elements (secondary and main flow filters) 1. At weekly intervals.
and inspect for residue. Clean filter elements, replace 2. Note any pressure corrections in maintenance manual.
paper cartridges. 3. Frequent readjustment indicates wear in the pressure
27. If further contamination is found, an additional flushing is relief components.
necessary in order to prevent premature failure of system 4. Pressure drops should be investigated to determine the
components. cause.
28. All settings should be laid down in an acceptance certifi- 4.9. Enjoy the most efficient form of power transmission
cate and well documented. … hydraulic power.
4. Servicing
4.1. Prepare a maintenance manual
It is recommended that a maintenance manual be prepared,
in which it is outlined which particular parts must be checked
and at what time intervals.
4.2. Check fluid level
1. Continuously during start-up.
2. Daily after start-up.
3. Weekly thereafter.
4.3. Check filters
1. Check and if necessary clean or replace every 2 to 3 hours
during start-up.
2. Daily during the first week.
3. After one week the filters should be cleaned or replaced
as necessary.
4. Service suction filters
Suction filters are not recommended; however, if used re-
quire particularly careful servicing. After the initial break-
in time they should be checked and if necessary cleaned
at least once a week.
4.4. Service system fluid
1. Servicing is dependent on several operating factors.
– Fluid level (e.g. water in fluid, severely aged fluid)
– Operating temperature
– Volume of fluid
2. Drain and refill when in warm operating conditions.
3. Severely aged or contaminated fluid cannot be improved
by adding fresh fluid.
4. Use filter when filling, with mesh width of 0.002 in. (0.06
mm) or better – fill via a 10 µm system filter.
5. Take laboratory samples of system fluid regularly and

Printed in U.S.A.
RA 23327/04.04 1/12
4/3, 4/2 and 3/2-way Replaces
RA 23 316/06.98
directional valves with wet pin
DC or AC solenoids
Model WE 10 ../.C
Nominal size 10
Series 3X (individual connections)
Series 4X (central connections)
Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI)
Maximum flow 120 L/min (32 GPM)
List of contents Features
Contents Page – Direct solenoid operated directional spool valve,

Features 1 standard version
Ordering details 2 – Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A,

ISO 4401 and CETOP–RP 121 H; NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and
Symbols 3 ANSI B93.7 D05
Standard types 3 subplates to catalog sheet RE 45 054
(separate order)
Function, section 4
– Wet pin AC or DC solenoids with removable coil
Technical data 5
– Solenoid coil can be rotated through 90°
Characteristic curves 6
– Coils may be replaced without opening the pressure
Performance limits 6, 7 tight chamber
Unit dimensions 8–11 – Electrical connections available as either individual
Plug-in connectors 12 connections or as a central connection
– Hand override, optional
– For soft switching version, see RE 23 183
– For inductive limit switch (contact and proximity),
see RE 24 830
2/12 Bosch Rexroth Corp. | Industrial Hydraulics WE 10 ../.C | RA 23327/02.03
Ordering details
WE 10 / C / *
3 actuator ports =3
4 actuator ports =4
Nominal size 10 = 10
Symbol e.g. C, E, EA, EB etc. – for possible versions see page 3
Series 30 to 39 – individual connection = 3X
Series 40 to 49 – central connection = 4X
With spring return = No code
Without spring return, with detent = OF
Without spring return =O
Wet pin solenoid (oil immersed) with removable coil =C
24 V DC = G24
230 V AC 50/60 Hz = W230
205 V DC = G205 1)
Ordering details for other voltages and frequencies see page 5.
With protected hand override (standard) = N9
Without hand override = No code
Hand override with protective cap =N
Types of electrical connections
1/2” NPT conduit connector in conduit box = DA
1/2” NPT conduit connector in conduit box with light(s) = DAL
ANSI B 93.55 M plug-in type connections (without female end)
Terminal box with 3-pin connector (single solenoid) = DK23
Terminal box with 5-pin connector (double solenoid) = DK25
Terminal box with 3-pin connector and lights (single solenoid) = DK23L
Terminal box with 5-pin conenctor and lights (double solenoid) = DK25L
Individual solenoid plug connections for cable or conduit (1/2” NPT)
Without plug-in connector(s) = K4 2)
Accessories
With inductive limit switch (for ordering details see catalogue sheet RE 24 830)
Without limit switch = No code
Without cartridge throttle = No code
Throttle Ø 0.8 mm (0.031 in.) Used where the flow > than the = B08
Throttle Ø 1.0 mm (0.039 in.) perforamce limit of the valves = B10
Throttle Ø 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) effective in P port = B12
NBR seals = No code
FKM seals =V
(other seals on request) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account!
1) 2)
When connecting to an AC supply a DC solenoid must Plug-in connectors must be ordered separately
be used which is controlled via a rectifier (see table below). (see page 3).
3)
With an individual connection a large plug-in connector with Plug-in connector (Material No. R900005538) must be
built-in rectifier can be used ordered separately.
(separate order, see page 3).
DC solenoids used with an AC supply AC solenoids may be used for several types of supplies:
AC supply Nominal voltage of the Supply Ordering details

Order
detail
(permissible voltage DC solenoid when used with

42 V, 50 Hz
tolerance ± 10%) an AC supply via rectifier W42
42 V, 60 Hz
110 V – 50/60 Hz 120 V – 60 Hz G96
110 V, 50 HZ
W110
96 V 110 V G110 110 V, 60 Hz
230 V – 50/60 Hz 205 V G205 120 V, 60 Hz
230 V, 50 Hz W230
230 V, 60 Hz
RA 23327/02.03 | WE 10 ../.C Industrial Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth Corp. 3/12
Symbols
A B A B A B A B 1)
a b a b
b b Example:
a a 0 b a 0 b
a
P T P T P T P T
Spool E with switched position “a”
A B
A B A B Ordering detail..EA..
a b b …/O..
a a 0 a 0 = .A 1)
P T a
P T P T
a b A B A B
a b …/OF.. b
0 b 0 b
= .B
P T P T
=A
= E 1) =P
=C
=F =Q
=D
=G =R
A B A B
b
a b a b
a
P T P T =H =T
=B
=J =U
=Y
=L =V
=M =W
Standard types
Type Material number Type Material number

3WE 10 A3X/CG24N9K4 R900592014 4WE 10 M3X/CG24N9K4 R900500932
3WE 10 A3X/CW230N9K4 R900915675 4WE 10 M3X/CW230N9K4 R900916118
3WE 10 B3X/CG24N9K4 R900594429 4WE 10 P3X/CG24N9K4 R900500716
3WE 10 B3X/CW230N9K4 R900517341 4WE 10 Q3X/CG24N9K4 R900591325
4WE 10 C3X/CG24N9K4 R900593277 4WE 10 Q3X/CW230N9K4 R900921465
4WE 10 C3X/CW230N9K4 R900915651 4WE 10 R3X/CG24N9K4 R900598583
4WE 10 D3X/CG24N9K4 R900589933 4WE 10 R3X/CW230N9K4 R900593804
4WE 10 D3X/CW230N9K4 R900912496 4WE 10 T3X/CG24N9K4 R900503424
4WE 10 E3X/CG24N9K4 R900588201 4WE 10 T3X/CW230N9K4 R900931784
4WE 10 E3X/CW230N9K4 R900911869 4WE 10 U3X/CG24N9K4 R900592655
4WE 10 F3X/CG24N9K4 R900529749 4WE 10 U3X/CW230N9K4 R900909906
4WE 10 F3X/CW230N9K4 R900918361 4WE 10 V3X/CG24N9K4 R900921780
4WE 10 G3X/CG24N9K4 R900594277 4WE 10 V3X/CW230N9K4 R900919553
4WE 10 G3X/CW230N9K4 R900912497 4WE 10 W3X/CG24N9K4 R900588200
4WE 10 H3X/CG24N9K4 R900597986 4WE 10 W3X/CW230N9K4 R900521281
4WE 10 H3X/CW230N9K4 R900503425 4WE 10 Y3X/CG24N9K4 R900595531
4WE 10 J3X/CG24N9K4 R900589988 4WE 10 Y3X/CW230N9K4 R900915670
4WE 10 J3X/CW230N9K4 R900911868
4WE 10 L3X/CG24N9K4 R900599646
4WE 10 L3X/CW230N9K4 R900915669
Function, section
Directional valves type WE are solenoid operated directional In order to ensure correct function care must be taken that the
spool valves. They are used to control the start, stop and direc- solenoid pressure chamber is filled with oil.
tion of a flow. The force of solenoid (2) acts on the control spool (3) and moves
The directional valves basically comprise of the housing (1), one it from its initial position to the desired end position. This permits
or two solenoids (2), a control spool (3), and one or two return free flow from P to A and B to T or P to B and A to T.
springs (4). On de-energising the solenoid (2) the control spool (3) is re-
In the de-energised condition the control spool (3) is held in its turned to its initial position by the return spring (4).
central or initial position be means of the return springs (4) (with The optional hand override (5) permits the control spool (3) to be
the exception of impulse spools). The control spool (3) is oper- moved without the solenoids being energised.
ated by the wet pin solenoids (2).
5 2 4 1 3 4 2 5
A B
“a” “b”
TA A P B TB
Type 4WE 10 E3X/CG24N9K4
Type .WE 10.3X/OC....

(only possible with symbols A, C and D)
This model is a 2-position directional valve with 2 solenoids A
without detents. The spool position, when the solenoids are
de-energised, is not defined.
Type .WE 10.3X/OFC... (impulse spool), with detent

Detent
(only possible with symbols A, C and D)
“a”
This model is a 2-position directional valve with 2 solenoids and
detents. Hence, when the solenoids are de-energised, the spool
is held in the detented position and thus the solenoids do not
need to be continuously energised.
Type .WE 10.3X/OFC (impulse spool)

TA
Cartridge throttle (type 4WE 10…/.../B..)

A cartridge throttle is required when, if due to the operating con-
ditions, flows can occur during the switching procedure which
are higher than the permitted performance limits of the valve.
The throttle is inserted into the P port of the directional valve.
P
General
Installation Optional
ambient temperature range °C (°F) –30 to +50 (–22 to +122) – NBR seals
–20 to +50 (–4 to +122) – FKM seals
Weight Central connection Individual connection
Valve with 1 solenoid kg (lbs.) 4.4 (9.7) (=); 3.6 (7.9) (~) 4.3 (9.5) (=); 3.5 (7.7) (~)
Valve with 2 solenoids kg (lbs.) 6.0 (13.2) (=); 4.4 (9.7) (~) 5.9 (13.0) (=); 4.3 (9.5) (~)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure Ports A, B, P bar (PSI) 315 (4600)
Port T bar (PSI) 210 (3050) (=) ; 160 (2320) (~)
For symbols A and B port T must be used as a drain line,
if the operating pressure is higher than the permissible
tank pressure.
Max. flow L/min (GPM) 120 (32)
Flow cross-section For symbol V mm2 (in2) 11 (0.017) (A/B → T); 10.3 (0.016) (P → A/B)
(switched position 0) For symbol W mm2 (in2) 2.5 (0.004) (A/B → T)
For symbol Q mm2 (in2) 5.5 (0.009) (A/B → T)
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1);
Fast bio-degradable pressure fluids to
VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1);
HEPG (polyglycols) 2); HEES (synthetic ester) 2);
other pressure fluids on request
Pressure fluid temperature range °C (°F) –30 to +80 (–22 to +176) – with NBR seals
–20 to +80 (–4 to +176) – with FKM seals
Viscosity range mm2/s (SUS) 2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320)
Cleanliness class to ISO code Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/15 3)
Electrical
Voltage type DC AC
Available voltages 4) V 12, 24, 42, 60, 96, 110, 42, 110, 230
(ordering details for AC solenoids see below) 180, 205, 220 50/60 Hz
Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) % ±10
Power consumption W 35 –
Holding power VA – 90
Switching power VA – 550
Duty Continuous
Switching time to ISO 6403 ON ms 45 to 60 15 to 25
OFF ms 20 to 30 20 to 30
Switching frequency cycles/h Up to 15000 Up to 7200
Protection to DIN 40 050 5) IP 65
Insulation class VDE 0580 F H
Max. coil temperature 6) °C (°F) 150 (302) 180 (356)
1)
Suitable for NBR and FKM seals
2)
Only suitable for FKM seals
3)
The cleanliness class stated for the components must be adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents faults from
occurring and at the same time increases the component service life.
For the selection of filters see catalogue sheets RE 50 070, RE 50 076 and RE 50 081.
4)
Special voltages on request
5)
With assembled and locked plug-in connector
6)
Due to the surface temperatures which occur on the
solenoid coil, the European standards EN563 and EN982 With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE ) must be
have to be taken into account! connected according to the relevant regulations.
Characteristic curves – measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ±5°C (104 °F ±41 °F)
Δp-qV-characteristic curves Direction of flow

14.0 10
(203) 9 Symbols P – A P – B A – T B – T
A, B 3 3 – –
12.0 C 3 3 4 5
(174) 8
D, Y 5 5 6 6
Pressure differential in bar (PSI)
10.0 7 E 1 1 4 4
(145) 6 F 2 3 7 4
8.0 5 G 3 3 6 7
(116) 4 H 1 1 6 7
3 J 1 1 3 3
6.0 2
(87) 1 L 2 2 3 5
M 1 1 4 5
4.0 P 4 2 5 7
(58)
Q 1 2 1 3
2.0 R 3 6 4 –
(29.0) T 3 3 6 7
U, V 2 2 3 3
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 W 2 2 4 5
(5.3) (10.6) (15.9) (21.1) (26.4) (31.7) Op. pos. P – A B – A A – T P – T
Flow in L/min (GPM) R – 9 – –
Centre pos. P–A P–B B–T A–T P–T

F 4 — — 9 9
P — 5 8 — 10
G, T — — 9
H — — 3
Performance limits: DC – measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ±5°C (104 °F ±41 °F)
The performance limits shown are valid when the valve is used one direction of flow (e.g. from P to A and port B blocked)! (For
with two directions of flow (e.g. from P to A with simultaneous these applications, please consult us.)
return flow from B to T). The performance limit was determined with the solenoids at their
Due to the flow forces occuring within the valves, the permissbile operating temperature, 10 % under voltage and with no pre-loa-
switching performance limits can be significantly lower with only ding of the tank.
300 Char. curve Symbols

(4350)
8 10 1 C, C/O, C/OF
1
4 D, D/O, D/OF
Operating pressure in bar (PSI)
250 Y, M
(3625) 5 2
2 E
200 3 A/O, A/OF
(2900) L, U, J, Q, W
6 3
4 H
150
1)
(2175) 5 R, L2), U2)
6 G
100 7
(1450) 7 T
9
8 F, P
8
50 9 A, B
(725)
10 V
1)
Return flow
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 (independent of the area ratio)
(5.3) (10.6) (15.9) (21.1) (26.4) (31.7) 2)
Only the center position
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Performance limits: AC – measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ±5°C (104 °F ±41 °F)
300
(4350) 9 7
11 2 1
250
(3625)
10
200 5
(2900)
Char. curve Symbols
150
(2175) 1 C, C/O, C/OF
7 D, D/O, D/OF
100 Y
(1450)
2 E, L,
50 9 U, Q, W
(725) 3 M
7
4 A, B
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 A/O, A/OF, J
(5.3) (10.6) (15.9) (21.1) (26.4) (31.7)
Flow in L/min (GPM) 6 G
7 F, P
300 8 V
(4350)
6 3 9 T
4
250
(3625) 10 H
8
11 R
200
(2900) 12 1) L, U
1)
150 Only the centre position
(2175)
42 V, 50 Hz; 110 V, 50 Hz; 120 V, 60 Hz;
100
(1450) 127 V, 50 Hz; 220 V, 50 Hz; 240 V, 60 Hz
6
50
(725)
4
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
(5.3) (10.6) (15.9) (21.1) (26.4) (31.7)
Flow in L/min (GPM)
300
(4350) Char. curve Symbols
3 1 C, C/O, C/OF
250
(3625) D, D/O, D/OF
2 5 6
200 1 Y
(2900) 2 A/O, A/OF
4
150 3 E
(2175)
4 M
100 5 V
(1450)
6 H
50
(725) 42 V, 60 Hz; 110 V, 60 Hz;
127 V, 60 Hz; 220 V, 60 Hz
0 Performance limits for other spools
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
(5.3) (10.6) (15.9) (21.1) (26.4) (31.7) on request!
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Unit dimensions: DC – dimensions in millimeters (inches)
Individual connection
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)
8 4 15 4 9 12
A Ø 11 B
1/2” NPT
12 5 (0.43) 6
123 (4.84)
117 (4.61)
(1.57)
(1.18)
40
30
Ø 6.6 (0.26) 26 80 (3.15)
(1.02) 16
5.3 121.3 (4.78) 175.3 (6.90) 5.3
(0.21) (0.21)
75 201.3 (7.93)
(2.95) 14
201.3 (7.93) 75
(2.95)
296.6 (11.68)
7 19 2 1 92.2 (3.63) 3 7 13
54 19.1
(2.13) (0.75)
P
70 (2.76)
(1.81)
46
TA A B TB
18 17
16 50 (1.97)
(0.63)
1/2” NPT
16
12 11 10
157 (6.18)
1/2" NPT
15
1/2” NPT
114.5 (4.51)
Central connection
97.5 (3.84)
4.84
3.93 (123)
(100)
2.66
(67.5)
3.68
1.55 (93.5)
(39.5)
0.01/100 mm
0.0004/4.0 in.
32 (Rmax4)
Required surface finish

of the mating piece
Unit dimensions: DC – dimensions in millimeters (inches)
1 3-position valve 1) 14 Dimension for hand override “N” Terminal allocation for the central
connection:
2 2-position valve with 15 Name plate
1 solenoid (A, C, D, EA...) 1) For 1 solenoid:
16 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, Solenoid always to terminal 1 and 2
3 2-position valve with TA, TB (for valves with cartridge
Earth to terminal PE
1 solenoid (B, Y, EB...) 1) throttle: O-ring in the P port)
For 2 solenoids:
4 Cover for valve with 1 solenoid 17 Additional T connection (TB) can
Solenoid “a” to terminals 1 and 2
be used with manifolds where this
5 Solenoid “a” (plug-in connector Solenoid “b” to terminals 3 and 4
connection is required.
color grey) Earth to terminal PE
18 Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A,
6 Solenoid “b” (plug-in connector
ISO 4401 and CETOP–RP 121 H.
color black)
Subplates
7 Space required to remove the coil
G 66/01(/12), G 3/8 (SAE-6; 9/16-18)
8 Plug-in connector without circuitry G 67/01(/12), G 1/2 (SAE-8; 3/4-16)
to DIN EN 175 301-803 2) G 534/01(/12), G 3/4 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
9 Plug-in connector with circuitry to catalog sheet RE 45 054 and
to DIN EN 175 301-803 2) Valve fixing screws
10 Cable gland Pg 16 “DL” M6 x 40 DIN 912-10.9
(1/4 - 20 UNC x 1-1/2”),
11 Plug-in connector (plug-in connector MA = 15.5 Nm (11.43 lb-ft),
color red, must be ordered separately, must be ordered separately.
Material No. R900005538)
19 Tightening torque MA = 6 + 2 Nm
12 Space required to remove the (4.43 + 1.48 lb-ft)
plug-in connector
13 Hand override “N9” (standard) –
the hand override can only be 1)
Dim. without hand override and with
operated up to a max. tank pressure of protected hand override “N9”
50 bar (725 PSI) – avoid damage to the 2)
Must be ordered separately,
hand override pin bore!
see page 3.
Unit dimensions: AC – dimensions in millimeters (inches)
Individual connection
8 4 15 4 9 12
15 (0.59)
15 (0.59)
A Ø 11 B
1/2” NPT (0.43)
6
123 (4.84)
12 5
117 (4.61)
(1.57)
(1.18)
40
30
Ø 6.6
(0.26) 26 80 (3.15) 16
(1.02)
15 95.8 (3.77) 149.8 (5.90) 15
(0.59) (0.59)
46 175.8 (6.92)
(1.81) 175.8 (6.92) 14
46
(245,6) (1.81)
7 19 2 1 92.2 (3.63) 3 7 13
54 19.1
(2.13) (0.75)
70 (2.76)
P
(1.81)
46
TA A B TB
18 17
16 50 (1.97)
(0.63)
1/2” NPT
Central connection
16
12 11 10
157 (6.18)
1/2" NPT
15
1/2” NPT
114.5 (4.51)
97.5 (3.84)
4.84
3.93 (123)
(100)
2.66
(67.5)
3.68
1.55 (93.5)
(39.5)
0.01/100 mm
0.0004/4.0 in.
32 (Rmax4)

of the mating piece
Unit dimensions: AC – dimensions in millimeters (inches)
1 3-position valve 1) 15 Name plate Terminal allocation for the central

2 2-position valve with 1 solenoid 16 Identical seal rings for ports A, B, P, connection:
(A, C, D, EA...) 1) TA, TB (for valves with cartridge For 1 solenoid:
3 2-position valve with 1 solenoid throttle: O-ring in the P port) Solenoid always to terminal 1 and 2
(B, Y, EB...) 1) 17 Additional T connection (TB) can Earth to terminal PE
4 Cover for valve with 1 solenoid be used with manifolds where this For 2 solenoids:
connection is required. Solenoid “a” to terminals 1 and 2
5 Solenoid “a” (plug-in connector Solenoid “b” to terminals 3 and 4
color grey) 18 Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A,
ISO 4401 and CETOP–RP 121 H. Earth to terminal PE
6 Solenoid “b” (plug-in connector
color black) Subplates
7 Space required to remove the coil G 66/01, G 3/8 (SAE-6; 9/16-18)

G 67/01, G 1/2 (SAE-8; 3/4-16)
8 Plug-in connector without circuitry G 534/01, G 3/4 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
to DIN EN 175 301-803 2) to catalog sheet RE 45 054 and
9 Plug-in connector with circuitry Valve fixing screws
to DIN EN 175 301-803 2) M6 x 40 DIN 912-10.9
10 Cable gland Pg 16 “DL” (1/4 - 20 UNC x 1-1/2”),
MA = 15.5 Nm (11.43 lb-ft),
11 Plug-in connector (plug-in connector must be ordered separately.
color red, must be ordered separately, 19 Tightening torque MA = 6 + 2 Nm
Material No. R900005538) (4.43 + 1.48 lb-ft)
12 Space required to remove the
plug-in connector
1)
13 Hand override “N9” (standard) – Dim. without hand override and with
the hand override can only be protected hand override “N9”
operated up to a max. tank pressure 2)
Must be ordered separately,
of 50 bar (725 PSI) – avoid damage see page 3.
to the hand override pin bore!
14 Dimension for hand override “N”
Plug-in connectors to DIN EN 175 301-803 for component plug "K4"
For further
plug-in connectors
see RE 08006
Material No.
With indicator light and

Valve With indicator light With rectifier Z-diode protective circuit
side Color Without circuitry 12 … 240 V 12 … 240 V 24 V
a grey R900074683 — — —
b black R900074684 — — —
a/b black — R900057292 R900313933 R900310995
Bosch Rexroth Corp. © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Industrial Hydraulics information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
2315 City Line Road Corporation. Without their consent it may not be reproduced or given to
third parties.
Bethlehem, PA 18017-2131
USA The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Telephone (610) 684-8300 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
application can be derived from our information. The information given
Facsimile (610) 694-8467
does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth-us.com
verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging.
Capacity:
Pilot operated, balanced piston relief valve 50 gpm (200 L/min.)
Functional Group: Model:
Products : Cartridges : Relief : 2 Port : Pilot Operated, Balanced Piston RPGC
Product Description
Pilot-operated, balanced-piston relief cartridges are normally closed
pressure regulating valves. When the pressure at the inlet (port 1)
reaches the valve setting, the valve starts to open to tank (port 2),
throttling flow to regulate the pressure. These valves are accurate, have
low pressure rise vs. flow, they are smooth and quiet, and are moderately
fast.
Technical Features
Main stage orifice is protected by a 150 micron All 2-port relief cartridges (except pilot reliefs) are
stainless steel screen. physically and functionally interchangeable (same
flow path, same cavity for a given frame size).
Not suitable for use in load holding applications Stainless steel cartridge options P or W are
due to spool leakage. intended for use within corrosive environments
with all external components manufactured in
stainless steel or titanium. Internal working
components remain the same as the standard
valves.
Will accept maximum pressure at port 2; suitable Incorporates the Sun floating style construction to
for use in cross port relief circuits. If used in cross minimize the possibility of internal parts binding
port relief circuits, consider spool leakage. due to excessive installation torque and/or
cavity/cartridge machining variations.
Back pressure on the tank port (port 2) is directly
additive to the valve setting at a 1:1 ratio.
Technical Data
U.S. Units Metric Units
Model Weight 0.56 lb. 0.25 kg.
Cavity T-3A
Capacity 50 gpm 200 L/min.
Adjustment - Number of Clockwise Turns to Increase Setting 5
Factory Pressure Settings Established at 4 gpm 15 L/min.
Maximum Operating Pressure 5000 psi 350 bar
Maximum Valve Leakage at 110 SUS (24 cSt) 3 in³/min.@1000 psi 50 cc/min.@70 bar
Response Time - Typical 10 ms
Series (from Cavity) Series 2
Valve Hex Size 1 1/8 in. 28,6 mm
Valve Installation Torque 45 - 50 lbf ft 60 - 70 Nm
Adjustment Screw Hex Socket Size 5/32 in. 4 mm
Adjustment Nut Hex Size 9/16 in. 15 mm
Adjustment Nut Torque 108 lbf in. 12 Nm
Seal Kits - Cartridge Buna: 990-203-007
Seal Kits - Cartridge Viton: 990-203-006
RPGC-LAN
External Material/Seal
Control Adjustment Range
Material
Preferred Options
L Standard Screw Adjustment 100 - 3000 psi (7 - 210 bar), N Buna-N

A 1000 psi (70 bar) Standard
Setting
150 - 4500 psi (10,5 - 315
W bar), 1000 psi (70 bar)
Standard Setting
Standard Options
Tamper Resistant - Factory 50 - 1500 psi (3,5 - 105 bar), P Stainless/Buna-N
C*
Set B 1000 psi (70 bar) Standard
V Viton
Setting
Hex Head Screw with
F W Stainless/Viton
Locknut 150 - 6000 psi (10,5 - 420
C bar), 1000 psi (70 bar)
J Capped Screw Adjustment
Standard Setting
K Handknob
25 - 800 psi (1,7 - 55 bar),
O Handknob with Panel Mount D 400 psi (28 bar) Standard
W* Max. Setting Limiter Setting
25 - 400 psi (1,7 - 28 bar),
E 200 psi (14 bar) Standard
Setting
60 - 800 psi (4 - 55 bar), 400
N
psi (28 bar) Standard Setting
60 - 400 psi (4 - 28 bar), 200
Q
psi (14 bar) Standard Setting
If the material/seal is P, the control must be L or C

If the material/seal is W, the control must be L or C
If the control is 3, the range must be A,C or D
* Special Setting required, specify at time of order

Related Models
RPGC8
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - US units.
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - metric units.
Two-piece, floating cartridge construction.
| | | | | |
Copyright © 2007-2008 Sun Hydraulics Corporation. All rights reserved.
Terms and Conditions - ISO Certification - Statement of Privacy
RA 24751/02.03 1/28
4/2- and 4/3-way directional valves Replaces: 12.95
pilot operated, 4WEH

externally pilot operated, 4WH
Model 4WEH, 4WH
Nominal sizes 10 to 32 Model 4WEH 22 E7X/..6E..N9..K4... Model 4WH 22 .7X/...

Series 4X; 6X; 7X with plug-in connector 1)
Model 4WEH 16 .7X/.6E..N9..K4...
Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5100 PSI) Model 4WEH 10 D4X/..6E..N9..K4... with plug-in connector 1)
Maximum flow 1190 L/min (290 GPM) with plug-in connector 1)
List of contents Features
Contents Page – Valves used to control the start, stop and direction of a fluid flow
Features 1 – Electro-hydraulic operation (WEH),
Ordering details 2, 3 hydraulic operation (WH)
Symbols 4, 5 – For subplate mounting,

Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A,
Prefered types 6 to 8 ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H; NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and
Function, section 9, 10 ANSI B93.7 D05, D07, D08, or D10
Pilot oil supply 11 – Subplates to catalog sheets RE 45 054 to RE 45 060
(separate order),see pages 18 to 22
Technical data 12 to 15
– Spring or pressure centered, spring or hydraulic offset
Characteristic curves, performance limits 16 to 20
– Wet pin DC or AC solenoids, optional
Unit dimensions 21 to 25
– Hand override, optional
Item description 26
– Electrical connections as an individual or central connection
Switching time adjustment, pressure reducing valve, (see RA 23 178)
back pressure valve 27
– Switching time adjustment, optional
– Back pressure valve in the P-channel of the main valve, optional
– Accessories to catalogue sheet RE 24 830:
• Stroke adjustment at the main spool, optional
• Stroke adjustment and/or end position monitoring, optional
• Mechanical or inductive limit switch
(proximity type) at main spool, optional
1)
Separate order
2/28 Bosch Rexroth Corp. | Industrial Hydraulics 4WEH, 4WH | RA 24751/02.03
Ordering details
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13
4 /
Up to 280 bar (4060 PSI) = No code
(not for model 4W.H 25 …)
Up to 350 bar (5100 PSI) =H–
4-way version =4
Types of operation
Electro-hydraulic = WEH
Hydraulic = WH
Nominal sizes
NS 10 = 10
NS 16 = 16
NS 25 (model 4W.H 22 .7X/…) 1) = 22
NS 25 (model 4W.H 25 .6X/…) 2) = 25
NS 32 = 32
Spool return
By means of springs = No code
Hydraulic 3) =H
For symbols, see page 4
Series 40 to 49 – NS 10 = 4X
Series 60 to 69 – NS 25 (4W.H 25.) and NS 32 = 6X
Series 70 to 79 – NS 16 and 25 (4W.H 22.) = 7X
Spool return in the pilot valve for a 2-position valve and 2 solenoids
Only possible for spools C, D, K, Z and hydraulic spool return in the main valve:
Without spring return =O
Without spring return with detent 4) = OF
Pilot valve with wet pin solenoids 4)

High performance valve (RE 23 178) = 6E
24 V DC 4) = G24
230 V AC 50/60 Hz 4) = W230
For further voltages, frequencies and electrical data see catalogue sheet RE 23 178
Without hand override = No code

With hand override 4) =N
With protected hand override 4) = N9
External pilot oil supply, external pilot oil drain 5) = No code

Internal pilot oil supply, external pilot oil drain 5; 6) =E
Internal pilot oil supply, internal pilot oil drain 6) = ET
External pilot oil supply, internal pilot oil drain 5) =T
For model 4WH… only “No code” possible!
Versions “ET” and “T” as a 3-position valve with pressure centering are only possible,
if pSt ≥ 2 x pTank + pSt min!
pSt = Pilot pressure
pSt min = Pilot pressure, minimum
pTank = Tank pressure
pö = Opening pressure
For foot notes see page 3!

RA 24751/02.03 | 4WEH, 4WH Industrial Hydraulics | Bosch Rexroth Corp. 3/28
Ordering details
14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 24
/ *
No code = NBR seals

V=
FKM seals (other seals on request)
Attention!
The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid
has to be taken into account!
No code = Without pressure reducing valve

D3 7) = With pressure reducing valve
No code = Back pressure valve (not for NS 10) 4; 7)

P4,5 = Without back pressure valve
With back pressure valve (pö = 4.5 bar)
Throttle insert 4)
No code = Without throttle insert
B08 = Throttle Ø 0.8 mm (0.031in.)
B10 = Throttle Ø 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
Accessories
Stroke adjustment, for ordering details see RE 24830
Accessories
Inductive limit switch, for ordering details see RE 24830
Central Electrical Connections 4)

DA = Terminal box with 1/2” NPT conduit connection
DAL = Terminal box with 1/2” NPT conduit connection and light(s)
ANSI B 93.55 M plug-in type connections (without female end)
DK23 = Terminal box with 3-pin connector (single solenoid)
DK25 = Terminal box with 5-pin connector (double solenoid)
DK23L = Terminal box with 3-pin connector and light (single solnoid)
DK25L = Terminal box with 5-pin connector and light (single solenoid)
Individual solenoid plug-in electrical connectors
K4 8) = For cable or conduit, (1/2” NPT) without angled plug connector(s)
No code = Without switching time adjustment

S= Switching time adjustment as meter-in control
S2 = Switching time adjustment as meter-out control
1)
Standard version
2)
High performance version
3)
• 2 switched positions (hydraulic end position): for spools C, D, K, Z, Y
• 3 switched positions (hydraulically centered): only for NS16, NS25 (model H-4W.H 25 …) and NS32
4)
This ordering detail only applies to electro-hydraulic operation.
5)
When using NS10 valves, with an external pilot oil supply X or an external pilot oil drain, the SO30 version of the sand-
wich plate must be used. The designation SO30 must be entered at the end of the type designation (sandwich plate).
6)
With an internal pilot oil supply:
• Minimum control pressure: Page 10 must be taken into account!
• In order to avoid excessive pressure peaks, a throttle insert (B10) should be provided in the P port
of the pilot valve (see page 9).
7)
Only in conjunction with throttle insert “B10”
8)
Plug-in connectors must be ordered separately (RE 23 178)
Symbols
A B A B
a, X
a b
b, Y ../.. a, X
a 0 b
b, Y ../..
P T P T
B
WH A
WH A B
a, X
a b
b, Y ..H../.. a, Y
a 0 b
b, X ..H../..
P T P T
A B A B
a
a b
b ../.. a
a 0 b
b
P T P T
A B A B
a
a b
b ..H../.. a
a 0 .A 1)
P T P T
WEH A B A B
a
a b
b ..H../O 0 b
b .B
P T P T
A B WEH A B
a
a b
b ..H../OF a
a 0 b
b H../..
P T P T
A B
=C a
a 0 H.A
P T
A B
=D 0 b
b H.B
P T
=K
= E 1)
=Z
=F
=G
A B
a b ../..
WH a, X
P T
b, Y
=H
A B
a b ../.. =J
a b
P T
WEH A B
a b ..H../.. =L
a b
P T
=M
=Y
=P
=Q
=R
1)
Example: Spool E with switched position “a”
Ordering example: = S 2)
H-4WEH 16 EA7X/6EG24N9ETSK4..B10..V..
2)
Spool S only for NS16 =T
=U
=V
=W
Symbols with 2 switched positions
Valves with spring offset Valves with hydraulic offset

Model 4WEH.../... Model 4WEH..H.../... Model 4WEH..H.../O... Model 4WEH..H.../OF...
A B A B A B A B
X = external; Y = external
a b a b a b a b
a, X b, Y a, X b, Y a, X b, Y a, X b, Y
P T P T P T P T
a b a b a b a b
P X Y T P X Y T P X Y T P X Y T
A B A B A B A B
a b a b a b a b
a b a b a b a b
X P T Y X P T Y X P T Y X P T Y
Model 4WEH.../...E... Model 4WEH..H.../...E... Model 4WEH..H.../O...E... Model 4WEH..H.../OF...E...

A B A B A B A B
X = internal; Y = external
a b a b a b a b
P T P T P T P T
a b a b a b a b
A B A B A B A B
a b a b a b a b
a b a b a b a b
P T Y P T Y P T Y P T Y
Model 4WEH.../...ET... Model 4WEH..H.../...ET... Model 4WEH..H.../O...ET... Model 4WEH..H.../OF...ET...

A B A B A B A B
X = internal; Y = internal
a b a b a b a b
P T P T P T P T
a b a b a b a b
A B A B A B A B
a b a b a b a b
a b a b a b a b
P T P T P T P T
Model 4WEH.../...T... Model 4WEH..H.../...T... Model 4WEH..H.../O...T... Model 4WEH..H.../OF...T...

A B A B A B A B
X = external; Y = internal
a b a b a b a b
P T P T P T P T
a b a b a b a b
A B A B A B A B
a b a b a b a b
a b a b a b a b
X P T X P T X P T X P T
Symbols with 3 switched positions
Valves with spring cemtered neutral position Valves with pressure centered neutral position
only NS 16, 25 (model 4W.H 25 .6X/...) and 32
Model 4WEH.../... Model 4WEH..H.../...
A B A B
X = external; Y = external
a 0 b a 0 b
a, X b, Y a, X b, Y
A B A B
a 0 b a 0 b
a b a b a b a b
P X Y T X P T Y L P X Y T X L P T Y
Model 4WEH.../...E... Model 4WEH..H.../...E...
A B A B
X = internal; Y = external
a 0 b a 0 b
a, X b, Y a, X b, Y
A B A B
a 0 b a 0 b
a b a b a b a b
P T Y L P T Y
P X Y T L P X Y T
Model 4WEH.../...ET...
3-position valves, pressure centered, preferrably with external
pilot oil supply and/or drain (No code., E)
A B For the pre-conditions for internal pilot oil supply and/or drain
X = internal; Y = internal
(ET, T) see pages 3 or 10.

a 0 b
a, X b, Y
A B
a 0 b
a b a b
P T
P X Y T
Model 4WEH.../...T...
A B
X = external; Y = internal
a 0 b
a, X b, Y
A B
a 0 b
a b a b
X P T Y
P X Y T
Standard types
Model, Size 10 Material-No. Model, Size 16 Material No.

4WEH 10 C4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900941581 4WEH 16 C7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900922081
4WEH 10 C4X/6EG24N9K4 R900925268 4WEH 16 C7X/6EG24N9K4 R900924024
4WEH 10 D4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900926575 4WEH 16 D7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900922083
4WEH 10 D4X/6EG24N9K4 R900931316 4WEH 16 D7X/6EG24N9K4 R900923989
4WEH 10 E4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900928594 4WEH 16 E7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900922084
4WEH 10 E4X/6EG24N9K4 R900928168 4WEH 16 E7X/6EG24N9K4 R900923811
4WEH 10 G4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900942019 4WEH 16 G7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900926886
4WEH 10 G4X/6EG24N9K4 R900961516 4WEH 16 G7X/6EG24N9K4 R900926378
4WEH 10 H4X/6EG24N9K4 R900920717 4WEH 16 H7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900926207
4WEH 10 J4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900926574 4WEH 16 H7X/6EG24N9K4 R900933198
4WEH 10 J4X/6EG24N9K4 R900578288 4WEH 16 J7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900922085
4WEH 10 M4X/6EG24N9K4 R900754735 4WEH 16 J7X/6EG24N9K4 R900925580
4WEH 10 Q4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900973945 4WEH 16 M7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900926887
4WEH 10 Q4X/6EG24N9K4 R900924732 4WEH 16 M7X/6EG24N9K4 R900929281
4WEH 10 R4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900952799 4WEH 16 R7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900925977
4WEH 10 R4X/6EG24N9K4 R900947420 4WEH 16 R7X/6EG24N9K4 R900929283
4WEH 10 T4X/6EG24N9K4 R900977227 4WEH 16 T7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900926888
4WEH 10 V4X/6EG24N9K4 R900958747 4WEH 16 T7X/6EG24N9K4 R900942302
4WEH 10 HD4X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900929469 4WEH 16 V7X/6EG24N9K4 R900712908
4WEH 10 HD4X/6EG24N9K4 R900957389 4WEH 16 W7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900925961
4WEH 16 W7X/6EG24N9K4 R900927092
4WEH 16 K7X/6EG24N9K4 R900963501
4WEH 16 Z7X/6EG24N9K4 R900939796
4WEH 16 HC7X/6EG24N9K4 R900956808
4WEH 16 HD7X/6EG24N9ETK4 R900922079
4WEH 16 HD7X/6EG24N9K4 R900925823
Size 22, 25 and 32 see page 8

Standard types
Model, Size 22 Material No. Model Size 25 Material No.

4WEH 22 C7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900722936 H-4WEH 25 C6X/6EG24N9K4 R900924322
4WEH 22 C7X/6EG24N9K4 R900930928 H-4WEH 25 D6X/6EG24N9K4 R900907357
4WEH 22 D7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900951901 H-4WEH 25 E6X/6EG24N9K4 R900932453
4WEH 22 D7X/6EG24N9K4 R900920169 H-4WEH 25 G6X/6EG24N9K4 R900936600
4WEH 22 E7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900931338 H-4WEH 25 H6X/6EG24N9K4 R900949851
4WEH 22 E7X/6EG24N9K4 R900981655 H-4WEH 25 J6X/6EG24N9K4 R900929180
4WEH 22 G7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10P4.5 R900930144 H-4WEH 25 Q6X/6EG24N9K4 R900780849
4WEH 22 G7X/6EG24N9K4 R900927611 H-4WEH 25 R6X/6EG24N9K4 R900708262
4WEH 22 H7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10P4.5 R900730904 H-4WEH 25 T6X/6EG24N9K4 R900701990
4WEH 22 H7X/6EG24N9K4 R900934810 H-4WEH 25 W6X/6EG24N9K4 R900931313
4WEH 22 J7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10P4.5 R900932049 H-4WEH 25 HD6X/6EG24N9K4 R900769948
4WEH 22 J7X/6EG24N9K4 R900916452 H-4WEH 25 Z6X/6EG24N9K4 R900921602
4WEH 22 M7X/6EG24N9K4 R900766705
4WEH 22 Q7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900951218 Model, Size 32 Material No.
4WEH 22 Q7X/6EG24N9K4 R900747704 4WEH 32 C6X/6EG24N9EK4/B10P4.5 R900700270
4WEH 22 R7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900932992 4WEH 32 C6X/6EG24N9K4 R900942550
4WEH 22 R7X/6EG24N9K4 R900923680 4WEH 32 D6X/6EG24N9EK4/B10 R900957519
4WEH 22 W7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900956272 4WEH 32 D6X/6EG24N9K4 R900937068
4WEH 22 W7X/6EG24N9K4 R900978642 4WEH 32 E6X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900954291
4WEH 22 HD7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900926507 4WEH 32 E6X/6EG24N9K4 R900972539
4WEH 22 HD7X/6EG24N9K4 R900925823 4WEH 32 G6X/6EG24N9EK4/B10 R900715427
4WEH 22 HK7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900753578 4WEH 32 G6X/6EG24N9K4 R900947978
4WEH 22 K7X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900963669 4WEH 32 H6X/6EG24N9K4 R900951221
4WEH 22 K7X/6EG24N9K4 R900978132 4WEH 32 J6X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900932052
4WEH 22 Z7X/6EG24N9K4 R900705849 4WEH 32 J6X/6EG24N9K4 R900933558
4WEH 32 M6X/6EG24N9EK4/B10 R900766461
4WEH 32 M6X/6EG24N9K4 R900947975
4WEH 32 Q6X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900961918
4WEH 32 Q6X/6EG24N9K4 R900702114
4WEH 32 R6X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900966086
4WEH 32 W6X/6EG24N9K4 R900732830
4WEH 32 HC6X/6EG24N9K4 R900916934
4WEH 32 HDR6X/6EG24N9ETK4/B10 R900968228
4WEH 32 HDC6X/6EG24N9K4 R900949136
4 10
B A
5.2 5.1
9 9
“b” “a”
A
C
1
2 7
3.2 C 3.1
A
8 B B D D 6 11
Model 4WEH 16 ...

T A P B X Y
Directional valves, model 4WEH… Model 4WH

Valves of model WEH are directional spool valves with electro-
hydraulic operation. They control the start, stop and direction of An optional hand override (9) permits the pilot spool (10) to be
a flow. operated without energising the solenoid.
The directional valves basically consist of the main valve with Directional valves, model 4WH…
housing (1), main control spool (2), one or two return springs Valves of model WH are directional spool valves with hydraulic
(3.1) and (3.2), and the pilot valve (4) with one or two solenoids operation. They control the start, stop and direction of a flow.
“a” (5.1) and/or “b” (5.2).
The directional valves basically consist of the valve housing (1),
The main control spool (2) in the main valve is held in the neutral the main control spool (2), one or two return springs (3.1) and
or in the initial position either by the springs or by means or (3.2) in the case of valves with spring return or spring centring,
pressure. In the initial position, the two spring chambers (6) and and the inter-connecting plate (11).
(8) are connected to the tank without pressure via the pilot valve
(4). The pilot valve is supplied with pilot fluid via the pilot line (7). The control spool (2) is operated directly by means of hydraulic
The pilot oil supply can be either internal or external (external via pressure.
port X). The control spool (2) is held in the neutral or in the inital position
When the pilot valve is operated, e. g. solenoid “a,” the pilot either by springs or by means of pressure. Pilot oil supply and
spool (10) is moved to the left and thus spring chamber (8) is pilot oil drain are external (see page 9).
pressurised with pilot pressure. Spring chamber (6) remains
unpressurized.
4/3-way directional valve with spring centring of the
The pilot pressure acts on the left hand side of the main control control spool
spool (2) and pushes it against the spring (3.1). As a conse-
In this model, the main control spool (2) is held in the neutral
quence, the ports P to B and A to T are connected in the main
position by two return springs (3.1) and (3.2). The two spring
valve.
chambers (6) and (8) are connected to ports X and Y via the
When the solenoid is de-energized, the pilot spool returns to its inter-connecting plate (11).
initial position (exception: detented spool). The spring chamber
When one of the two ends of the main control spool (2) is pres-
(8) is unloaded to tank.
surised with pilot pressure, the spool is moved to the switched
The pilot oil is expelled from the spring chamber via the pilot position. The required ports in the valve are then opened to flow.
valve into the Y channel.
When the pilot pressure is removed, the spring on the opposite
The pilot oil supply and drain are internal or external (external via side to the pressurised spool area causes the spool to return to
port Y). its neutral or initial position.
4 10
B A
5.2 5.1
9 9
“b” “a”
2 7
3.1
3.2
8 6
12
L T A P B X Y
4/3-way directional valve with pressure centring of the main

control spool, model 4WEH…H
The main control spool (2) in the main valve is held in the neutral
position by pressurisation of the two end faces. A centring sleeve
(12) is supported in the housing and holds the spool in position.
By removing the pressure from one of the spool ends, the main
control spool (2) is moved to the shifted position.
The unloaded spool area displaces the returning pilot oil via the
pilot valve into the Y-channel (external).
Pilot oil supply
Model 4WH…
Nominal size 16
The pilot oil supply is external via channels X and Y.
Section D – D Main valve Section C – C
Model 4WEH…
1
The pilot oil drain is external via channel X from a separate 3
circuit.
The pilot oil drain is external via channell Y to tank. X
P
Model 4WEH…E… Y T
The pilot oil supply is internal from channel P of the main valve.
(see also page 11, foot notes 3) and 4)) Cover
The pilot oil drain is external via channel Y to tank. Port X in the
subplate is plugged.
Pilot oil supply
Conversion from external to internal or from internal to external X
External: 2 plugged
pilot oil supply for NS16: Remove the cover on the solenoid side P Internal: 2 open
“B,” Remove or fit the plug (2) and replace the cover.
Pilot oil drain
Model 4WEH…ET… 2 External: 1 plugged
The pilot oil supply is internal from channel P of the main valve. 3 Internal: 1 open
The pilot oil drian is internal via channel T to tank. Ports X and Y
in the subplate are plugged. Nominal size 25 Section C – C
(Model 4W.H 22 .7X/...)
Model 4WEH…T… P T
Main valve
The pilot oil supply is external via channel X from a separate Pilot valve
circuit. Pilot oil supply
The pilot oil drain is internal via channel T to tank. Port Y is the X Y
External: 2 plugged
subplate is plugged. Internal: 2 open 2 1
1 Plug M6 DIN 906–8.8, 3A/F – pilot oil drain Pilot oil drain
P
2 Plug M6 DIN 906–8.8, 3A/F – pilot oil supply External: 1 plugged T
3 Plug M8 x 1 DIN 906–8.8, 4A/F – for external sealing Internal: 1 open
Tightening torque MA for cover fixing screws:
NS16: 35 Nm (25.8 lb-ft); NS25: 68 Nm (50.2 lb-ft) Nominal size 25 (Model 4W.H 25 .6X/...)
Tightening torque MA for pilot valve fixing screws: Section B – B
NS 10 to 32: 9 Nm (6.6 lb-ft)
2
Throttle insert T Section A – A
The use of a throttle insert is required if the pilot oil supply in the P Pilot valve
P channel of the pilot valve is to be limited (see page 3, 6)). This
throttle is inserted in the P channel of the pilot valve. P T
X Y
Pilot valve X A
Cover T 1
Main valve
Pilot oil supply Pilot oil drain
Main valve
P External: 2 plugged External: 1 plugged
Internal: 2 open Internal: 1 open
Nominal size 10
Section A – A Section C – C Nominal size 32
Section A – A
2 P T Pilot valve Pilot valve
P T
X Y Y
1
X Y
T 1
2
P
T
P T
Main valve
Pilot oil supply Pilot oil drain Pilot oil supply Pilot oil drain
External: 2 plugged External: 1 plugged External: 2 plugged External: 1 plugged
Internal: 2 open Internal: 1 open Internal: 2 open Internal: 1 open
General
Nominal sizes NS10 NS16 NS25 NS25 NS32
4W.H 22… 4W.H 25…
Weight Valve with one solenoid kg ~ 6.4 ~ 8.5 ~ 11.5 ~ 17.6 ~ 40.5
(lbs.) (14.1) (18.7) (25.4) (38.8) (89.3)
Valve with two solenoids, spring centered kg ~ 6.8 ~ 8.9 ~ 11.9 ~ 18.0 ~ 41.0
(lbs.) (15.0) (19.6) (26.2) (39.7) (90.4)
Valve with two solenoids, pressure centered kg ~ 6.8 ~ 8.9 ~ 11.9 ~ 19.0 ~ 41.0
(lbs.) (15.0) (19.6) (26.2) (41.9) (90.4)
Valve with hydraulic operation (4WH…) kg ~ 5.5 ~ 7.3 ~ 10.5 ~ 16.5 ~ 39.5
(lbs.) (12.1) (16.1) (23.1) (36.4) (87.1)
Switching time adjustment kg ~ 0.8 ~ 0.8 ~ 0.8 ~ 0.8 ~ 0.8
(lbs.) (1.8) (1.8) (1.8) (1.8) (1.8)
Pressure reducing valve kg ~ 0.4 ~ 0.4 ~ 0.4 ~ 0.4 ~ 0.4
(lbs.) (0.8) (0.8) (0.8) (0.8) (0.8)
Installation Optional; horizontal with hydraulic spool return “H” and
symbols C, D, K, Z, Y
Ambient temperataure range °C (°F) –30 to +50 (–22 to +122)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure Model 4WEH bar 280 280 280 280
—
– Ports P, A, B (PSI) (4060) (4060) (4060) (4060)
Model H-4WEH bar 350 350 350 350 350
(PSI) (5075) (5075) (5075) (5075) (5075)
– Port T With external pilot oil drain Y bar 315 5) 250 250 250 250
(PSI) (4570) (3625) (3625) (3625) (3625)
With internal pilot oil drain Y 1) bar (PSI) 210 (3045) DC; 160 (2320) AC
– Port Y With external pilot oil drain: bar (PSI) 210 (3045) DC; 160 (2320) AC
Model 4WH bar 250 250 210 250 250
(PSI) (3625) (3625) (3045) (3625) (3625)
Pressure fluid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 6);
Fast bio-degradable pressure fluids to VDMA 24 568
(see also RE 90221); HETG (rape seed oil) 6);
HEPG (polyglycols) 7); HEES (synthetic ester) 7);
Other pressure fluids on request
Pressure fluid temperature range °C (°F) –30 to +80 (–22 to +176) – for NBR seals
–20 to +80 (–4 to +176) – for FKM seals
Viscosity range mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (47 to 3700)
Cleanliness class to ISO code Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the
pressure fluid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/15 8)
Maximum control pressure (with higher control pressures, bar 250 250 210 250 250
a pressure reducing valve must be used.) (PSI) (3625) (3625) 93045) (3625) (3625)
Minimum control pressure
– External pilot oil supply X, internal pilot oil supply X
(for spools: D, K, E, J, L, M, Q, R, U, W)
3-position valves, spring-centred Model H-4WEH… bar (PSI) 10 (145) 14 (203) 12.5 (181) 13 (190) 8.5 (123)
Model 4WEH… bar (PSI) 10 (145) 14 (203) 12.5 (181) 13 (190) 8.5 (123)
3-position valves, pressure-centered bar (PSI) – 14 (203) – 18 (260) 8.5 (123)
2-position valves with spring offset Model H-4WEH… bar (PSI) 10 (145) 14 (203) 14 (203) 13 (190) 10 (145)
Model 4WEH… bar (PSI) 10 (145) 14 (203) 11 (160) 13 (190) 10 (145)
2-position valves hydraulic offset bar (PSI) 7 (100) 14 (203) 8 (115) 8 (115) 5 (70)
– Internal pilot oil supply X
(for spools C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z, S 2)) bar (PSI) 4.5 (65) 3) 4.5 (65) 3) 4.5 (65) 3) 4.5 (65) 3) 4.5 (65) 3)
See next page for footnotes.
Hydraulic
Nominal sizes NS10 NS16 NS25 NS25 NS32
4W.H 22… 4W.H 25…
Switching pilot oil volume
– 3-position valve, spring centered cm3 (in3) 2.04 (0.12) 5.72 (0.35) 7.64 (0.47) 14.2 (0.87) 29.4 (1.79)
3 3
– 2-position valve cm (in ) 4.08 (0.25) 11.45 (0.70) 15.28 (0.93) 28.4 (1.73) 58.8 (3.59)
3 3
– 3-position valve, pressure centered cm (in ) WH WEH WH WEH WH WEH
From the neutral position to position “a” cm3 2.83 2.83 7.15 7.15 14.4 14.4
— —
(in3) (0.17) (0.17) (0.44) (0.44) (0.88) (0.88)
From position “a” to the neutral position cm3 5.72 2.90 14.18 7.0 29.4 15.1
— —
(in3) (0.35) (0.18) (0.87) (0.43) (1.74) (0.92)
From the neutral position to position “b” cm3 5.72 5.72 14.18 14.15 29.4 29.4
— —
(in3) (0.35) (0.35) (0.87) (0.86) (1.74) (1.74)
From position “b” to the neutral position cm3 8.55 2.83 19.8 5.73 43.8 14.4
— —
(in3) (0.52) (0.17) (1.21) (0.35) (2.62) (0.88)
Pilot oil flow for the shortest switching time L/min (GPM) ~ 35 (9.2) ~ 35 (9.2) ~ 35 (9.2) ~ 35 (9.2) ~ 45 (11.9)
1) 5)
As a 3-position valve, pressure centring is only possible Model 4WEH 10...: 280 bar (4060 PSI)
when pSt ≥ 2 x pTank + pSt min. Model H-4WEH 10...: 315 bar (4570 PSI)
2) 6)
Spool S, only for NS16 Suitable for NBR and FKM seals
3) 7)
For symbols C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z internal pilot oil supply is Only suitable for FKM seals
only possible when the flow from P to T, in the mid position 8)
The cleanliness class stated for the components must be
(for 3-position valve) or during moving through the mid posi- adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective filtration prevents
tion (for 2-position valves), when the flow is high enough so faults from occurring and at the same time increases the
that the pressure differential from P to T reaches a minimum component service life.
value of 6.5 bar (95 PSI).
4)
For the selection of filters see data sheets RE 50070,
For spools C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z, S 2) – via a back pressure RE 50076 and RE 50081.
value (not NS10) or appropriately high flows
Free-flow cross-section in the neutral position for spool types Q, V and W
Spool Q A – T; B – T mm2 13 32 78 83 78
(in2) (0.020) (0.050) (0.121) (0.129) (0.121)
Spool V A – T; B – T mm2 13 32 78 83 78
(in2) (0.020) (0.050) (0.121) (0.129) (0.121)
P – A; P – B mm2 13 32 84 83 84
(in2) (0.020) (0.050) (0.130) (0.129) (0.130)
Spool W A – T; B – T mm2 2.4 6 10 14 20
(in2) (0.004) (0.009) (0.015) (0.022) (0.031)
Technical data (for application outside these parameters, please consult us)
Switching times (= from contact received at the pilot valve up to start of opening at the control land on the main valve)
Nominal size 10
Control pressure bar (PSI) 70 (1015) 140 (2030) 210 (3045) 250 (3625)
Voltage type AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC
Valve switching time from the neutral position
to the switched position
– 3-position valve ms 30 65 25 60 20 55 15 50
Valve switching time from the switched position
to the neutral position
Nominal size 16
– 3-position valve, spring centered ms 25…30 40 25…30 40 25…30 40 20…25 40
– 2-position valve ms 30…35 55 30…35 55 30…35 55 25…30 50
– 3-position valve, pressure centered
“0” to “a” ms 30 40 30 40 30 35 30 35
“0” to “b” ms 30 40 30 40 30 40 30 40
“0“ to “a” or “b” to “0” ms 20…35 20 20…55 20 20…35 20 20…35 20
Nominal size 25 (model 4W.H 22…)
– 3-position valve, spring centered ms 50 100 40 80 35 65 30 60
Technical data (for application outside these parameters, please consult us)
Switching times (= from contact received at the pilot valve up to start of opening at the control land on the main valve)
Nominal size 25 (model 4W.H 25…)

– 3-position valve, spring centered ms 50 85 40 75 35 70 30 65
“0” to “a” ms 30 55 30 55 25 50 25 50
“0” to “b” ms 35 65 35 65 30 60 30 60
“0” to “a” or “b” to “0” ms 30…50 30 30…50 30 30…50 30 30…50 30
Nominal size 32
Control pressure bar (PSI) 70 (1015) 140 (2030) 210 (3045)
Voltage type AC DC AC DC AC DC
– 3-position valve, spring centered ms 65 80 50 90 35 105
– 2-position valve ms 100 130 75 100 60 115
“0” to “a” ms 55 100 40 85 35 85
“0” to “b” ms 60 105 45 95 40 95
– 3-position valve, spring centered ms 60…75 50 60…75 50 60…75 50
– 2-position valve ms 115…130 90 85…100 70 65…80 65
“a” to “0” ms 30…65 30 60…90 30 105…155 50
“b” to “0” ms 30…65 40 60…90 30 105…155 50
Characteristic curves: Model 4WEH 10 … – measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ± 5 °C (104 °C ±41 °F)
Δp-qv – characteristic curves 7 6 5

11 (160)
4
10 (145)
9 (130) 3
Pressure diffferential in bar (PSI)
8 (116) 2
1
7 (102)
6 (87)
5 (73)
4 (58)
3 (44)
2 (29)
1 (15)
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
(5.28) (10.57) (15.85) (21.13) (26.42) (31.70) (36.98) (42.27)
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Switched position Neutral position

Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T Spools A–T B–T P–T
E, Y, D 2 2 4 5
F 1 4 1 4 F 3 – 6
G, T 4 2 2 6 G, T – – 7
H, C 4 4 1 4 H 1 3 5
J, K 1 2 1 3
L 2 3 1 4 L 3 – –
M 4 4 3 4
P 4 1 3 4 P – 7 5
Q, V, W, Z 2 2 3 5
R 2 2 3 –
U 3 3 3 4 U – 4 –
Performance limits: Model 4WEH 10 … – measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ± 5 °C (104 °F ± 41 °F)
General:
2- and 3-position valves
Maximum flow qV in L/min (GPM) Attention!
Operating pressure pmax in bar (PSI) The switching power limits given are for applications featuring
two flow directions (e. g. from P to A and simultaneous return
Spools 200 (2900) 250 (3625) 315 (4570)
flow from B to T).
E, J, L, M, Q, R, U, V, Due to the flow forces active within the valves, the permitted
160 (42) 160 (42) 160 (42)
W, C, D, K, Z, Y power limit for directional valves may be considerably less where
H 160 (42) 150 (40) 120 (32) there is only one direction of flow (e. g. from P to A and port B
blocked)!
G, T 160 (42) 160 (42) 140 (37)
(Please consult us for applications of this kind!)
F, P 160 (42) 140 (37) 120 (32)
The power limit for directional valves was determined using
solenoids at their operating temperature, 10% under voltage
and with no pre-loading of the tank.
Characteristic curves: Model 4WEH 16 … – measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ± 5 °C (104 °F ± 41 °F)
Δp-qv – characteristic curves 8 6 5

14 (203) 7
3
12 (174)
10 (145)
4
1
8 (116)
2
6 (87)
4 (58)
2 (29)
0
0 50 (13.21) 100 (26.42) 150 (39.62) 200 (52.83) 250 (66.04) 300 (79.2
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Switched position Switched position

Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T P–T Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T P–T
E, D, Y 1 1 1 3 – M, W 2 2 4 3 –
F 2 2 3 3 – R 2 2 4 – –
G, T 5 1 3 7 6 U 1 1 4 7 –
H, C, Q, V, Z 2 2 3 3 – S 4 4 4 – 8
J, K, L 1 1 3 3 –
2-position valves – max. flow qV in L/min (GPM) 3-position valves – max. flow qV in L/min (GPM)
Operating pressure pmax in bar (PSI) Operating pressure pmax in bar (PSI)
70 140 210 280 350 70 140 210 280 350
Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075) Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075)
X external – Spring offset in main valve X external – spring-centered
(at pSt min = 12 bar [174 PSI]) E, H, J, L, M, 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80)
C, D, K, Y, Z 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) Q, U, W, R
X external – Spring offset in main valve 1) F, P 300 (80) 250 (66) 180 (48) 170 (45) 150 (40)
C 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) G, T 300 (80) 300 (80) 240 (63) 210 (55) 190 (50)
D, Y 300 (80) 270 (71) 260 (69) 250 (66) 230 (61) S 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 250 (66) 220 (58)
K 300 (80) 250 (66) 240 (63) 230 (61) 210 (55) V 300 (80) 250 (66) 210 (55) 200 (53) 180 (48)
Z 300 (80) 260 (69) 190 (50) 180 (48) 160 (42) X external – pressure-centered
X external – hydraulic offset in main valve (at a min. control pressure of 16 bar [232 PSI])
HC, HD, HK, 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) All spools 2) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80) 300 (80)
HZ, HY
For performance limits see “General” on page 13.
Attention! required. So for example, with an operating pressure of

1)
pmax = 350 bar (5075 PSI) and a flow of qV = 300 L/min
If the stated flow values are exceeded then it is not possible to (80 GPM), a pilot pressure of 16 bar (232 PSI) is required.
guarantee the return spring function if the pilot pressure fails! The maximum flow for this valve is only dependent on the
• With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative Δp value which the system can accept.
overlap of the spools C, Z and HC, HZ and flows < 160 • With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative
L/min (42.27 GPM) a back pressure valve must be fitted. overlap of the spools F, G, M, P and S a back pressure
• When using a 4/3-way directional valve, with pressure cen- valve must be fitted.
tring of the control spool in the main valve, which exceeds 2)
The back pressure valve is not required for flows > 160 L/min
the stated performance limits, a higher pilot pressure is (42.27 GPM) for the V spool.
Δp-qv – characteristic curves 5 6

14 (203)
4
12 (174)
3
10 (145) B–A
Spool R 2
8 (116) 1
6 (87)
4 (58)
2 (29)
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
(13.21) (26.42) (39.62) (52.83) (66.04) (79.25) (92.46) (105.67) (118.88)
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Switched position Neutral position

Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T Spools A–T B–T P–T
E, M, P, Q, U, V 2 2 1 4 F – – 4
F 1 2 1 2 G, P – – 6
G, T 2 2 2 4 H – – 2
H, J, W 2 2 1 3 L 4 – –
L 2 2 1 2 T – – 5
R 1 2 1 – U – 6 –
70 140 210 280 350 70 140 210 280 350
Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075) Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075)
X external – Spring offset in main valve X external – spring-centered
(at pSt min = 11 bar [160 PSI] / 14 bar [203 PSI]) E, J, L, M,
450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119)
C, D, K, Y, Z 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) Q, U, W, R
X external – Spring offset in main valve 1) H 450 (119) 450 (119) 300 (80) 260 (69) 230 (61)
C 450 (119) 450 (119) 320 (84) 250 (66) 200 (53) G 400 (106) 350 (92) 250 (66) 200 (53) 180 (47)
D, Y 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 400 (106) 320 (84) F 450 (119) 270 (71) 175 (46) 130 (34) 110 (29)
K 450 (119) 215 (57) 150 (40) 120 (32) 100 (26) V 450 (119) 300 (80) 240 (63) 220 (58) 160 (42)
Z 350 (92) 300 (80) 290 (77) 260 (69) 160 (42) T 400 (106) 300 (80) 240 (63) 200 (53) 160 (42)
X external – hydraulic offset in main valve P 450 (119) 270 (71) 180 (47) 170 (45) 110 (29)
HC, HD, HK,
450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119)
HZ, HY Attention!
HC../O.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 1)
If the stated flow values are exceeded then it is not possible to
HD../O.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) guarantee the return spring function if the pilot pressure fails!
HK../O.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) • With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative
overlap of the spools Z, HZ and V and flows < 180 L/min
HZ../O.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) (47.75 GPM) a back pressure valve must be fitted.
HC../OF.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119)
• With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative
HD../OF.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) overlap of the spools F, G, M, P and T a back pressure valve
HK../OF.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) must be fitted.
HZ../OF.. 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119) 450 (119)
Δp-qv – characteristic curves 8 7 6 5

14 (203)
4
12 (174) 3
B–A 2
10 (145)
Spool R
1
8 (116)
6 (87) 7 Spool G center

position P – T
4 (58) 8 Spool T center

position P – T
2 (29)
0
0 100 (13.21) 200 (52.83) 300 (79.25) 400 (105.67) 500 (132.09) 600 (158.50)
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Switched position Switched position Switched position
Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T Spools P–A P–B A–T B–T
E 1 1 1 3 L 2 2 3 3 U 4 1 1 6
F 1 4 3 3 M 4 4 1 4 V 2 4 3 6
G 3 1 2 4 P 4 1 1 5 W 1 1 1 3
H 4 4 3 4 R 2 1 1 – T 3 1 2 4
J, Q 2 2 3 5
70 140 210 280 350 70 140 210 280 350
Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075) Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075)
X external – spring offset in main valve X external – spring-centered
(at pSt min = 13 bar [190 PSI]) E, L, M, Q,
700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172)
C, D, K, Y, Z 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172) U, W
X external – spring offset in main valve 1) G, T 400 (106) 400 (106) 400 (106) 400 (106) 400 (106)
C 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172) F 650 (172) 550 (145) 430 (114) 330 (87) 300 (79)
D, Y 700 (185) 650 (172) 400 (106) 350 (92) 300 (79) H 700 (185) 650 (172) 550 (145) 400 (106) 360 (95)
K 700 (185) 650 (172) 420 (111) 370 (98) 320 (84) J 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172) 600 (158) 520 (137)
Z 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172) 480 (127) 400 (106) P 650 (172) 550 (145) 430 (114) 330 (87) 300 (79)
X external – hydraulic offset in main valve V 650 (172) 550 (145) 400 (106) 350 (92) 310 (82)
HC, HD, HK, R 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172) 580 (153)
700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185)
HZ, HY X external – pressure-centered
HC../O.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) (at a min. control pressure of 18 bar [260 PSI])
HD../O.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) E, F, H, J, L,
HK../O.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) M, P, Q, R, 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172)
U, V, W
HZ../O.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185)
G, T 400 (106) 400 (106) 400 (106) 400 (106) 400 (106)
HC../OF.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185)
X external – pressure-centered
HD../OF.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185)
(at a control pressure > 30 bar [435 PSI])
HK../OF.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185)
G, T 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 650 (172)
HZ../OF.. 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185) 700 (185)
• With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative
For performance limits see “General” on page 13. overlap of the spools Z, HZ and V and flows < 180 L/min
(47.55 GPM) a back pressure valve must be fitted.
Attention! • With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative
1)
If the stated flow values are exceeded then it is not possible to overlap of the spools C, HC, F, H, P and T a back pressure
guarantee the return spring function if the pilot pressure fails! valve must be fitted.
Δp-qv – characteristic curves – spools E, R and W Δp-qv – characteristic curves – spools G and T
18 (261) 18 (261)

16 (232) 16 (232)
B–T B – A 1)
14 (203) 14 (203)
12 (174) 12 (174)
P–T B – T 2)
10 (145) 10 (145)
8 (116) 8 (116)
A–T
6 (87) P–A 6 (87)
A–T
4 (58) 4 (58)
P–B P–A
2 (29) 2 (29) P–B
0 0
0 240 480 720 960 0 240 480 720 960
(63.4) (126.8) (190.2) (235.6) (63.4) (126.8) (190.2) (235.6)
Flow in L/min (GPM) Flow in L/min (GPM)
Δp-qv – characteristic curves – all other spools
18 (261)
16 (232)
14 (203)
12 (174)
10 (145)
8 (116)
6 (87)
4 (58)
2 (29)
0
0 240 480 720 960
(63.4) (126.8) (190.2) (235.6)
Flow in L/min (GPM)
70 140 210 280 350 70 140 210 280 350
Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075) Spools (1015) (2030) (3045) (4060) (5075)
X external – spring offset in main valve X external – spring-centered
(at pSt min = 10 bar [145 PSI])
E, J, L, M, Q,
C, D, K, Y, Z 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 750 (198) 680 (179) 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 750 (198) 680 (179)
R, U, W
X external – spring offset in main valve 1) G, T, H, F, P 900 (238) 900 (238) 800 (211) 650 (172) 450 (119)
C 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 800 (211) 700 (185) V 1100 (290) 1000 (264) 680 (179) 500 (132) 450 (119)
D, Y 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 540 (143) 480 (127) 420 (111) X external – pressure-centered
K 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 500 (132) 450 (119) (at a min. control pressure of 8.5 bar [125 PSI])
Z 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 700 (185) 650 (172) All spools 1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 750 (198) 680 (179)
X external – hydraulic offset in main valve
• When using a 4/3-way directional valve, with pressure cen-
HC, HD, tring of the control spool in the main valve, which exceeds
1100 (290) 1040 (275) 860 (227) 750 (198) 680 (179)
HK, HZ, HY the stated performance limits, a higher pilot pressure is
For performance limits see “General” on page 13. required. So for, e.g. with an operating pressure of
pmax = 350 bar (5075 PSI) and a flow of qV = 1100 L/min
Attention! (290 GPM) a pilot pressure of 15 bar (218 PSI) is required.
1)
If the stated flow values are exceeded then it is not possible to The maximum flow for this valve is only dependent on the
guarantee the return spring function if the pilot pressure fails! Δp value which the system can accept.
• With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative • With an X internal pilot oil supply and due to the negative
overlap of the spools Z, HZ and V and flows < 180 L/min overlap of the spools C, HC, F, G, H, P and T a back pres-
(47.55 GPM) a back pressure valve must be fitted. sure valve must be fitted.
Unit dimensions: Model 4WEH 10 … – dimensions in millimeters (inches)
2.2 B 11 2.1 A 4
19
7 (0.75)
6
T A P B T T A P B T
145.8 (5.74)
3.5 (0.14)
14 (0.55)
15
205.6 (8.09) (0.59)
44 (1.73) 14
Pg 11
2.3
5
B A
92 (3.62)
8
20 (0.79)
(1.57)
40
3.2 3.1
9
T A P B T
12
1
86 (3.39)
35 (1.38)
167 (6.57)
30.5 (1.20)
12 25.5 54 (2.13) 56.5 (2.22) 27

(1.00) 10 (1.06) 13.5
Ø6.6 (0.26) 25.5 (0.53)
(1.00)
Ø11 (0.43)
X Y
P
P
46 (1.81)
70 (2.76)
73 (2.87)
X A B Y
B A
(0.91)
T T
23
T
T A P B T
108 (4.25)
Subplates
• Without ports X, Y: G 534/01(/12), G 3/4 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
• With ports X, Y: G 535/01(/12), G 3/4 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
G 536/01(/12), G 1 (SAE-16; 1-5/16-20)
0.01/100 mm
to data sheet RE 45054 and
0.0004/4.0 in.
Valve fixing screws
4 off M6 x 45 DIN 912-10.9, (1/4-20 UNC x 1-3/4”) 32 (Rmax4)
MA = 15.5 Nm (11.5 lb-ft)
For items list see page 26. of the mating piece
205.6 (8.09) 15
(0.59)
Pg 11
3.1
3.2 B 10 2.3 A 4 14
92 (3.62)
6
19 (0.75)
8
7
(1.57)
40
3.5 (0.14)
2.1; 2.2
14 (0.55)
(0.79)
20
5
A B Y
9
1
96 (3.78)
12
(1.69)
43
13
27 (1.06) 17
(0.12)
55 (2.17) 155 (6.10)
3
15 Ø3 (0.12)
19
63 (2.48) 155 (6.10)
55 (2.17) 163 (6.42)
81 (3.19) 155 (6.10) 15

17
34.1 Ø11 (0.43) Ø18 (0.71)

1.6 10
(1.34) Ø6.6 (0.26) Ø11 (0.43) (0.06)
P X
T P X
69.9 (2.75)
P 94 (3.70)
91 (3.58)
12 (0.47)
B A
L
T
A Y
A B Y
B
35 (1.38)
50 (1.97)
1.6
101.6 (4.00) (0.06) 21 (0.83)
142 (5.59)
Subplates
G 172/01(/12), G 3/4 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
G 174/01(/12), G 1 (SAE-16; 1-5/16-20)
G 174/08 (3/4” ISO flanged ports)
Valve fixing screws 0.01/100 mm
4 of M10 x 60 DIN 912-10.9 (3/8-16 UNC x 2-1/4”), MA = 75 Nm (55 lb-ft) 0.0004/4.0 in.
2 of M6 x 60 DIN 912-10.9 (1/4-20 UNC x 2-1/4”), MA = 15.5 Nm (11.5 lb-ft)
must be ordered separately. 32 (Rmax4)
For items list see page 26.

of the mating piece
15
(0.59)
3.2 11 2.3 3.1 4 14
Pg 11
B A
92 (3.62)
6
19 (0.75)
8
2.1; 2.2
(1.57)
3.5 (0.14)
40
7 14 (0.55)
(0.79)
20
5
9
12 1
110 (4.33)
4 (0.16)
(1.61)
41
14 193 (7.60)
(0.55) Ø6 (0.24)
241 (9.49) 19
13 10
Ø20 (0.79)
53 (2.09)
Ø14 (0.55)
T P X T P Y
117 (4.61)
120 (4.72)
P
92 (3.62)
B A
46 (1.81)
T
X A B
X A B
14
(0.55)
77 (3.03)
17.5 (0.69)
130 (5.12) 180 (7.09)
Subplates
G 150/01(/12), G 3/4 (SAE-12; 1-1/16-12)
G 151/01(/12), G 1 (SAE-16; 1-5/16-20)
G 154/01(/12), G 1 1/4 (SAE-20; 1-5/8-12)
0.01/100 mm
G 156/01(/12), G 1 1/2 (SAE-24; 1-7/8-12)
0.0004/4.0 in.
Valve fixing screws 32 (Rmax4)
6 off M12 x 60 DIN 912-10.9 (1/2 13 UNC x 2-1/2”), MA = 130 Nm (95.88 lb-ft)
For items list see page 26. of the mating piece
15
(0.59)
3.2 11 2.3 3.1 4 14
Pg 11
B A
92 (3.62)
8
6
2.1; 2.2
(1.57)
40
3.5 (0.14)
7
(0.79)
19
20
14 (0.55)
(0.75)
5 9
12 1
126 (4.96)
4 (0.16)
(1.61)
41
19 225 (8.86)
(0.75) 13
297 (11.69) Ø6 (0.24)
27.5 19
(1.08)
324.5 (12.78)
332 (13.07)
15
324.5 (12.78)
17 16
Ø20 (0.79)
18 53 (2.09) Ø14 (0.55) 10
T P Y
120 (4.72)
117 (4.61)
T P Y
92 (3.62)
P
B A
T
X A
B X A B
77 (3.03)
14
(0.55)
130 (5.12) 21 (0.83)
195 (7.68)
Subplates
G 151/01(/12), G 1 (SAE16; 1-5/16-20)
G 153/01(/12), G 1 (SAE16; 1-5/16-20), for valves with pressure-centered neutral position
G 154/01(/12), G 1-1/4 (SAE-20; 1-5/8-12)
G 156/01(/12), G 1-1/2 (SAE-24; 1-7/8-12)
0.01/100 mm
0.0004/4.0 in.
Valve fixing screws
6 off M12 x 60 DIN 912-10.9 (1/2 - 13 UNC x 2-1/2”), MA = 130 Nm (95.88 lb-ft) 32 (Rmax4)
For items list see page 26. Required surface finish
of the mating piece
15
(0.59)
3.2 14
Pg 11
10 2.3 3.1 4
B A
92 (3.62)
8
19 (0.75)
(1.57)
7
40
2.1; 2.2 12 3.5 (0.14)
(0.79)
14 (0.55)
20
5
9
152 ((5.98)
(0.008+0.012)
0.2+0.3
1
(1.93)
49
286.5 (11.28) 30
21.5 (1.18)
(0.85) 13
4 (0.16)
362 (14.25)
Ø6 (0.24)
391 (15.39) 19
406 (15.98)
16
17 15
18 391 (15.39)
315.5 (12.42) 10
Ø33 (1.30)
(0. 19 76
75 (2.99)
) Ø22 (0.87)
T P
Y
T P Y
200 (7.87)
197 (7.76)
159 (6.26)
P
B A
T
X A B X A B
20.5
(3.13)
79.5
(0.81)
114.5 (4.51)
190.5 (7.50) 23 (0.91)

257 (10.12)
Subplates
G 157/01(/12), G 1-1/2 (SAE-24; 1-7/8-12)
G 158/10 (flange)
0.01/100 mm
0.0004/4.0 in.
Valve fixing scrrews
6 off M20 x 80 DIN 912-10.9 (3/4 - 10 UNC x 3-1/4”), MA = 430 Nm (320 lb-ft) 32 (Rmax4)
For items list, see page 26. Required surface finish
of the mating piece
Item description
1 Main valve 8 Switching time adjustment (6A/F), optional

2 Pilot valve model 4WE 6 … to catalogue sheet RE 23 178 9 Pressure reducing valve, optional
2.1 • Pilot valve model 4WE 6 D… (1 solenoid) for main valves 10 Machined valve mounting surface, position of ports
with ols C, D, K, Z spools HC, HD, HK, HZ 11 Name plate for the pilot valve
• Pilot valve model 4WE 6 JA… (1 solenoid “a”) for main 12 Name plate for the entire valve
valve with spools EA, FA etc., spring return
13 R-rings/O-rings
• Pilot valve model 4WE 6 MA… (1 solenoid “a”) for main
14 Space required to remove the plug-in connector
valve with spools HEA, HFA etc., hydraulic spool return
15 2-position valves with spring offset in main valve (C, D, K, Z)
2.2 • Pilot valve model 4WE 6 Y… (1 solenoid) for main valve
with spool Y spool HY 16 2-position valves with spring offset in main valve (Y)
• Pilot valve model 4WE 6 JB… (1 solenoid “b”) for main 17 3-position valves, spring centered; 2-position valves with
valve with spools EB, FB etc., spring return hydraulic offset in the main valve
• Pilot valve model 4WE 6 MB… (1 solenoid “b”) for main 18 3-position valves, pressure-centered
valve with spools HEB, HFB etc., hydraulic spool return 19 Locating pin
2.3 • Pilot valve model 4WE 6 J… (2 solenoids) for main valves
with 3-positions, spring-centered
• Pilot valve model 4WE 6 M… (2 solenoids) for main
valves with 3-positions, pressure-centered
3.1 Solenoid “a”
3.2 Solenoid “b”
4 Hand override “N,” optional – The hand override can only
be operated up to a tank pressure of up to approx. 50 bar
(725 PSI). Take care not to damage the hand override bore!
5 Solenoid without hand override
6 Solenoid with hand override
7 Height of the inter-connecting plate for hydraulic operation
(model 4WH…)
Ports
1)
A, B, T
Model A, B, T, P 2) X, Y, L P 1)
4W.H 10 … R-ring R-ring
13 x 1.6 x 2 11.18 x 1.6 x 1.78
4W.H 16 … R-ring R-ring O-ring
22.53 x 2.3 x 2.62 10 x 2 x 2 22 x 2.5
27.8 x 2.6 x 3 19 x 3 x 3 27 x 3
27.8 x 2.6 x 3 19 x 3 x 3 27 x 3
42.5 x 3 x 3 19 x 3 x 3 42 x 3
1)
Back pressure valve P4,5 (not for NS10)
2)
Without back pressure valve
Switching time adjustment, pressure reducing valve, back pressure valve
Switching time adjustment 7 5

In order to influence the switching time of the main valve (1)
a double throttle check valve (2) (for model Z2FS 6, see data
sheet RE 27506) has to be fitted.
Conversion from meter-in (3) to meter-out control (4):
2
Remove the pilot valve (5) leave the seal ring support plate (6) in 3
place, rotate the throttle valve (2) about its longitudinal axis and
refit it, replace the pilot valve (5). 4 6
Tightening torque of the screws (7) MA = 9 Nm (6.64 lb-ft).
1
Model 4WEH 10 ..4X/…S or S2
Pressure reducing valve “D3” 7

The pressure reducing valve (8) must be used it the pilot
pressure is higher than 250 bar (3625 PSI)
(for model 4WEH 22 …: 210 bar [3045 PSI]).
The secondary pressure is held constant at 45 bar (653 PSI).
Attention! 8
When using a pressure reducing valve “D3” (8), a throttle insert
“B10” must be installed in the P-channel of the pilot valve.
Tightening torque of screws (7) MA = 9 Nm (6.4 lb-ft).
Model 4WEH 10 ..4X/…/..D3
Back pressure valve (not for NS 10)

In valves with zero pressure circulation and internal pilot oil sup- The pressure differential of the back pressure valve must be
ply, a back pressure valve (9) must be installed in the P-channel added to the pressure differential of the main valve (see charac-
of the main valve to build up the minimun pilot pressure. teristic curves) in order to determine the acutal value.
The opening pressure of this valve is approx. 4.5 bar (65 PSI).
Main valve Marerial No.

Model P4,5
Model 4W.H 16 … R900302628
Model 4W.H 22 … R900315596
9
Model 4W.H 25 … R900303717
Subplate Model 4W.H 32 … R900317066
Δp-qv – characteristic curves –

measured with HLP46, ϑoil = 40 °C ± 5 °C (104 °F ± 41 °F)
14 (203)
1 2 4
12 (174)
3
10 (145) 1 NS 16
8 (116) 2 NS 25 (model 4W.H 25 .6X/…)
6 (87) 3 NS 25 (model 4W.H 22 .7X/…)
4 (58) 4 NS 32
2 (29)
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
(13.21) (52.83) (79.25) (105.67) (132.09) (158.50) (184.92)
Flow in L/min (GPM)
Notes
Bosch Rexroth Corp. © This document, as well as the data, specifications and other
Industrial Hydraulics information set forth in it, are the exclusive property of Bosch Rexroth
2315 City Line Road Corporation. Without their consent it may not be reproduced or given to
third parties.
Bethlehem, PA 18017-2131
USA The data specified above only serve to describe the product. No
Telephone (610) 684-8300 statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
application can be derived from our information. The information given
Facsimile (610) 694-8467
does not release the user from the obligation of own judgment and
www.boschrexroth-us.com
verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to a
natural process of wear and aging.
RA 08 000/06.98
Overview of Electrical Connections* RA

for Directional Control Valves
Models WE 4 and WE 6 with DC or AC solenoids
08 000/06.98
Replaces: 05.94
*For more information, see datasheet RA 08 006.

Z45 Z4
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
1.85 (47) 2.13 (54)
Plug-in connector Plug-in
(DIN 43650) connector
(DIN 43650)
3.23 (82)
3.23 (82)
1/2" NPT Pg 11
B A B A
Z55 Z5
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)
Large plug-in Large
connector plug-in Pg 11
1/2" NPT
connector
3.46 (88)
3.46 (88)
B A B A
Z55L Z5L
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)
Large plug-in Large
connector with light plug-in Pg 11
1/2" NPT
connector
3.46 (88)
3.46 (88)
with light
B A B A

Z45 Z4
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
1.85 (47) 2.13 (54)

Plug-in connector Plug-in connector
* Standard solenoid (A) (DIN 43650)
3.44 (87.5)**
3.44 (87.5)**
3.27 (83)*
3.27 (83)*
** High performance 1/2" NPT * Standard solenoid (A) Pg 11

solenoid (B) ** High performance
(DIN 43650) B A solenoid (B) B A
Z55 Z5
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)

connector connector Pg 11
1/2" NPT
3.68 (93.5)**
3.68 (93.5)**

3.50 (89)*
3.50 (89)*

B A B A
Z55L Z5L
(15)
(15)
0.6
0.6
2.44 (62) 2.68 (68)

connector with light connector with light Pg 11
1/2" NPT
3.68 (93.5)**
3.68 (93.5)**

3.50 (89)*
3.50 (89)*

B A B A
2
Note: Use “K4” code to order valve without plug. Warning: A highly flexible conduit (seal tight) must be used and be properly supported or the resulting
Pg 11 is a straight thread with a rubber grommet and jam nut for flexible (SJO type) cable installation. torque will break the plug mounting nut from the solenoid casing. Insulation exceeds NEMA class B.
1/2
RA 08 000/06.98
Directional Control Valve WE 6, central connections: dimensions in inches (millimeters)
Wiring for Central Connection (DZ, DZL only)
DA 1/2" NPT
1.85 (47)
With 2 solenoids:
Central connection both ends Solenoid A to terminals 1 and 2
with terminal box Solenoid B to terminals 3 and 4
(NEMA 4 rating)
3.50 (89)
2.64 (67)
A B
With 1 solenoid:
Solenoid always to terminals 1 and 2
DAL 1/2" NPT DZA ≈ 0.6 (15) 1/2" NPT

1.85 (47)
Central connection both ends Central connection
with terminal box, with terminal box and
and light(s) plug-in connector Z
3.54 (90)
5.16 (131)
2.64 (67)
2.64 (67)
A B
A B
K8 0.64 (16.3) DZAL ≈ 0.6 (15) 1/2" NPT

MS 3102-A 14S-2P Central connection
(double solenoid) with terminal box,
3.50 (89)
K16 light(s) and plug-in

2.64 (67)
5.16 (131)
MS 3102-A 14S-1P connector Z
(single solenoid) A B
2.64 (67)
(NEMA 4 rating) A B
To MIL C-5015 standard
DK23 Note: Part numbers for plug connector

3.50 (89)
2.64 (67)
DK25 For cable or flexible conduit, For cable only, with rubber
5 pin (double solenoid) with 1/2" NPT thread compression grommet & jam nut
A B
Without female connector rust (A) US00 004 823 greyt (A) US00 008 908
Z45 Z4
(NEMA 4 rating)
To ANSI / B93.55M standard black (B) US00 011 039 black (B) US00 008 909
rust (A) US00 004 824 grey (A) US00 008 616
DK23L Z55 Z5
3.54 (90)
black (B) US00 012 651 black (B) US00 009 129
DK25L
2.64 (67)
5 pin (double solenoid) For other plugs and further information, see parts list RA 23 177-E
A B
Wiring for Plug Connectors - Z45 (Z4), Z55 (Z5), Z55L (Z5L) only
(NEMA 4 rating)
To ANSI / B93.55M standard Bottom view of plug
Wiring for ANSI / B93.55M - DK23 (L), DK25 (L) only Terminal 2 Ground
Single Solenoid Double Solenoid Terminal 1
1 1 5
2
2 4
1
2 3
3
3
Pin No. Color Termination Pin No. Color Termination Terminal 3
1 Green Ground 1 White Solenoid B (not used)
2 Black Solenoid 2 Red Solenoid A
SolenoidAa to terminals 1 and 2 (grey plug)
3 White Solenoid 3 Green Ground
4 Orange Solenoid A
Solenoid B to terminals 1 and 2 (black plug)
5 Black Solenoid B (terminal 3 is not wired)


Printed in U.S.A.
Select A Model 901 Dial Size
25-901 40-901
2 ½ Inch 4 Inch
2 ½ Inch Dial Size
Size & Model Number: 25-901

NPT Connection Size & 1/4" NPT Brass Bottom Connection
Type: 7/16"-20 SAE (Stocked in Ranges Indicated with
(*) Below)
Model Specifications: Stock Model Specifications
Standard Pressure 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 psi -> 0 to 10,000 psi
Ranges: Dual Scale psi/kPa, psi/kg/cm², psi/bar
Dial Configurations: Regularly Stocked Options & Accessories
Options & Accessories: Ordering Information Sheet
Ordering Information: Contact Us for Details on Custom
Special Ordering: Configurations
STANDARD PRESSURE RANGES
Outer Scale Options: psi

Dual Scale Dial Units
Inner Scale Options: kPa kg/cm² bar
Pressure Ranges 30" Vac 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 300 0 to 300 psi

1
30-0-15 -30" Hg to 0 to 15 psi 400 0 to 400 psi
30-0-30 -30" Hg to 0 to 30 psi1 600 0 to 600 psi*
30-0-60 -30" Hg to 0 to 60 psi1 1,000 0 to 1,000 psi*

1
30-0-100 -30" Hg to 0 to 100 psi 1,500 0 to 1,500 psi*
15 0 to 15 psi 2,000 0 to 2,000 psi*
30 0 to 30 psi 3,000 0 to 3,000 psi*
60 0 to 60 psi 5,000 0 to 5,000 psi*
100 0 to 100 psi 6,000 0 to 6,000 psi*
160 0 to 160 psi 7,500 0 to 7,500 psi1
200 0 to 200 psi 10,000 0 to 10,000 psi

0°F to 140°F (-18°C to 60°C)
Lower operating temperatures are available to -40°F (40°C) by using a special glycerine mixture or
low temperature silicone.
Please Contact Us for assistance in selecting the best fill liquid for your application.
Note: All NOSHOK hermetically sealed gauges with ranges of 400 psi and below, including all
vacuum and compound ranges, are equipped with a vent pin in the relief disc. The vent pin should
be removed after installation of the gauge to insure accurate indication.
In keeping with and for purposes of product and/or manufacturing process improvements, NOSHOK
reserves the right to make design changes without prior notice.
Return to the top

* This Range is Also Available in a 7/16"-20 SAE Adustable Type Straight Thread Connection
as a Regularly Stocked Order Option
1
This Range is Regularly Stocked in the kPa Inner Scale Option Only
Return to the top
STOCK MODEL SPECIFICATIONS

Dial Size 2 ½ Inch (63 mm)
Case 304 Stainless Steel Case
Bezel 304 Stainless Steel Bezel
Connection 1/4" NPT Brass Bottom Connection
Pressure Stocked Ranges: 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 -> 0 to 10,000 psi
Ranges See Pressure Ranges for Specific Ranges and Dial Scale Units that are Regularly Stocked.
Safety
Safety Relief Disc Located on Top of the Case
Protection
Lens Clearfront Plexiglass Lens is Standard.
Bourdon Tube • Phosphor Bronze "C" Tube for Pressures up to 600 psi
• Coiled Safety Tube for Pressure above 600 psi
Movement Brass and Nylon with Highly Polished Bearing Surfaces

Accuracy ±1.5% Full Scale, ASME grade A
Pointer Balanced Aluminum, Black Finish
Aluminum with White Background. UV Resistant.
• Dual Scale psi/kPa is Standard. Dual Scale psi/kg/cm² & psi/bar are
Dial Regularly Stocked and Available upon Request. Outer Scale is psi in Black and the
Inner Metric Scale is Red.
• See Below for Stock Dial Configurations.
Fill Liquid Glycerine and Water

OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
1. Working Pressure Limitations

a. Dynamic Pressure
The working pressure should be limited to 60% of the dial range.
b. Static Pressure
The working pressure, where no sharp fluctuations occur, should be limited to 90% of the
dial range.
2.
3. Ambient Temperature
Select A Model 911 Dial Size
25-911 40-911
2 ½ Inch 4 Inch
2 ½ Inch Dial Size
Size & Model Number: 25-911

NPT Connection Size & Type: 1/4" NPT Brass Center Back Connection
7/16"-20 SAE (Stocked in Ranges Indicated with (*) Below)
Model Specifications: Stock Model Specifications
Standard Pressure Ranges: 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 psi -> 0 to 10,000 psi
Dial Configurations: Dual Scale psi/kPa, psi/kg/cm², psi/bar
Options & Accessories: Regularly Stocked Options & Accessories
Ordering Information: Ordering Information Sheet
Special Ordering: Contact Us for Details on Custom Configurations
STANDARD PRESSURE RANGES
Outer Scale Options: psi

Dual Scale Dial Units
Inner Scale Options: kPa kg/cm² bar
Pressure Ranges 30" Vac 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 200 0 to 200 psi
30-0-15 -30" Hg to 0 to 15 psi1 300 0 to 300 psi

1
30-0-30 -30" Hg to 0 to 30 psi 400 0 to 400 psi
30-0-60 -30" Hg to 0 to 60 psi1 600 0 to 600 psi*

1
30-0-100 -30" Hg to 0 to 100 psi 1,000 0 to 1,000 psi*
30-0-300 -30" Hg to 0 to 300 psi1 1,500 0 to 1,500 psi*
15 0 to 15 psi 2,000 0 to 2,000 psi*
30 0 to 30 psi 3,000 0 to 3,000 psi*
60 0 to 60 psi 5,000 0 to 5,000 psi*
100 0 to 100 psi 6,000 0 to 6,000 psi*
160 0 to 160 psi 10,000 0 to 10,000 psi
* This Range is Also Available in a 7/16"-20 SAE Adustable Type Straight Thread Connection
as a Regularly Stocked Order Option
1
This Range is Regularly Stocked in the kPa Inner Scale Option Only
STOCK MODEL SPECIFICATIONS
Dial Size 2 ½ Inch (63 mm)
Case 304 Stainless Steel Case
Bezel 304 Stainless Steel Bezel
1/4" NPT Brass Center Back Connection is Standard.
Connection
• 7/16"-20 SAE Connection is Available on Selected Pressure Ranges as a Stock
Option.
Pressure Stocked Ranges: 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 -> 0 to 10,000 psi

Ranges See Pressure Ranges for Specific Ranges and Dial Scale Units that are Regularly Stocked.
Safety
Safety Relief Disc Located on Top of the Case
Protection
Lens Clearfront Plexiglass Lens is Standard.
Bourdon Tube • Phosphor Bronze "C" Tube for Pressures up to 600 psi
• Coiled Safety Tube for Pressure above 600 psi
Movement Brass and Nylon with Highly Polished Bearing Surfaces

Accuracy ±1.5% Full Scale, ASME grade A
Pointer Balanced Aluminum, Black Finish
Aluminum with White Background. UV Resistant.
• Dual Scale psi/kPa is standard. Dual Scale psi/kg/cm² & psi/bar are
Dial Regularly Stocked and Available upon Request. Outer Scale is psi in Black and the
Inner Metric Scale is Red.
• See Below for Stock Dial Configurations.
Fill Liquid Glycerine and Water

OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
1. Working Pressure Limitations

a. Dynamic Pressure
The working pressure should be limited to 60% of the dial range.
b. Static Pressure
The working pressure, where no sharp fluctuations occur, should be limited to 90% of the
dial range.
2.
3. Ambient Temperature
0°F to 140°F (-18°C to 60°C)
Lower operating temperatures are available to -40°F (40°C) by using a special glycerine mixture or
low temperature silicone.
Please Contact Us for assistance in selecting the best fill liquid for your application.
Note: All NOSHOK hermetically sealed gauges with ranges of 400 psi and below, including all
vacuum and compound ranges, are equipped with a vent pin in the relief disc. The vent pin should
be removed after installation of the gauge to insure accurate indication.
In keeping with and for purposes of product and/or manufacturing process improvements, NOSHOK
reserves the right to make design changes without prior notice.
900 Series Pressure Gauges Diagrams
Model A B C D E F G H I J
IN 1.61 1.06 1.69 0.39 0.47 --- --- --- --- 1.54
15-910
MM 41 27 43 10 12 --- --- --- --- 39
IN 2.44 1.18 2.24 0.55 0.55 3.35 2.95 0.14 --- ---
25-900
MM 62 30 57 14 14 85 75 3.6 --- ---
25-910 IN 2.72 1.26 2.24 0.55 0.55 3.35 2.95 0.14 0.20 2.44
25-911 MM 69 32 57 14 14 85 75 3.6 5 62
IN 2.72 1.26 2.24 0.55 0.55 --- --- --- 0.20 2.44
25-901
MM 69 32 57 14 14 --- --- --- 5 62
IN 3.98 2.01 3.43 0.55 0.87 5.20 4.57 0.19 --- ---
40-901
MM 101 51 87 14 22 132 116 4.8 --- ---
IN 3.98 2.01 3.35 0.55 0.87 5.20 4.57 0.19 --- ---
40-911
MM 101 51 85 14 22 132 116 4.8 --- ---
IN 1.61 1.06 1.69 0.39 0.47 --- --- --- --- 1.54
15-910
MM 41 27 43 10 12 --- --- --- --- 39
IN 2.44 1.18 2.24 0.55 0.55 3.35 2.95 0.14 --- ---
25-900
MM 62 30 57 14 14 85 75 3.6 --- ---
25-910 IN 2.72 1.26 2.24 0.55 0.55 3.35 2.95 0.14 0.20 2.44
25-911 MM 69 32 57 14 14 85 75 3.6 5 62
IN 2.72 1.26 2.24 0.55 0.55 --- --- --- 0.20 2.44
25-901
MM 69 32 57 14 14 --- --- --- 5 62
IN 3.98 2.01 3.43 0.55 0.87 5.20 4.57 0.19 --- ---
40-901
MM 101 51 87 14 22 132 116 4.8 --- ---
IN 3.98 2.01 3.35 0.55 0.87 5.20 4.57 0.19 --- ---
40-911
MM 101 51 85 14 22 132 116 4.8 --- ---
IN 1.61 1.06 1.69 0.39 0.47 --- --- --- --- 1.54
15-910
MM 41 27 43 10 12 --- --- --- --- 39
IN 2.44 1.18 2.24 0.55 0.55 3.35 2.95 0.14 --- ---
25-900
MM 62 30 57 14 14 85 75 3.6 --- ---
25-910 IN 2.72 1.26 2.24 0.55 0.55 3.35 2.95 0.14 0.20 2.44
25-911 MM 69 32 57 14 14 85 75 3.6 5 62
IN 2.72 1.26 2.24 0.55 0.55 --- --- --- 0.20 2.44
25-901
MM 69 32 57 14 14 --- --- --- 5 62
IN 3.98 2.01 3.43 0.55 0.87 5.20 4.57 0.19 --- ---
40-901
MM 101 51 87 14 22 132 116 4.8 --- ---
IN 3.98 2.01 3.35 0.55 0.87 5.20 4.57 0.19 --- ---
40-911
MM 101 51 85 14 22 132 116 4.8 --- ---
Model AU BU CU DU EU
IN 2.44 2.72 1.06 2.05 2.95
25-910
MM 62 69 27 52 75
IN 2.44 2.72 1.06 2.05 2.95
25-911
MM 62 69 27 52 75
NOSHOK Installation & Maintenance Guide
Pressure Gauge Series 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 and 900
Installation filled NOSHOK pigtail steam syphon between the gauge
Prior to pressure gauge installation, the following and the steam line.
conditions should be considered: temperature, humidity,
vibration, pulsation, shock, and other climatic and Maintenance
environmental conditions of the application, as well as Apart from occasional calibration, NOSHOK pressure
the potential need for protective accessories and/or gauges require little or no maintenance. Some applications
special installation requirements. may be more aggressive than others, resulting in an
increased frequency in the need for calibration. The
Always use a wrench on the gauge socket when installing environmental limitations for the specific NOSHOK
a NOSHOK pressure gauge into position; never use force pressure gauge series should be observed in all cases, and
on the gauge case to tighten into position. This may result gauges applied in situations outside these requirements
in a loss of accuracy, excessive friction and/or mechanical may result in premature wear and/or failure of the gauge.
damage to the measuring element and case of the
NOSHOK pressure gauge. When surface or panel Warranty
mounting a gauge, be sure the surface is flat and the panel All NOSHOK pressure gauges carry a one or three year
cutout and/or the mounting hole configuration is correct warranty. NOSHOK warrants for three years our 300, 500,
(please refer to the NOSHOK Pressure Gauge catalog 600, and 700 series liquid filled pressure gauges to be
NK95G for these specifications). If the surface is uneven or free from defects in materials and workmanship, to remain
the panel cutout is larger than the gauges diameter, use within the cataloged accuracy and performance
an adapter ring to remove mounting strain and/or adapt specifications, and to maintain the integrity of the
the gauge to the larger diameter panel cutout. When hermetically sealed case preventing leakage. NOSHOK
connecting a gauge to a rigid pipe service, use flexible warrants for one year our 100, 200, 400, 600, 700, 800,
tubing where possible as a connector to eliminate and 900 series non-liquid filled pressure gauge. Certain
plumbing strain. Rapid pressure pulsation and extreme limitations do apply; for more information please consult
mechanical vibration may be damaging to some page three of the NOSHOK Pressure Gauges catalog
NOSHOK pressure gauge movement gearing, bushings, (NK95G).
and linkage. In extreme cases, steps should be taken to
dampen these forces. In pressure ranges over 600 psi, a Please do not hesitate to contact us with any additional
NOSHOK orifice is recommended for pulsation questions.
dampening, but in extreme pulsation applications a The
Instrumentation
NOSHOK Piston Type Pressure Snubber may be required. Company
When installing a gauge into a corrosive situation be sure

to select a pressure gauge or pressure gauge and
diaphragm seal combination suitable for your application. INCORPORATED
Gauges to be used on high temperature service should
1010 WEST BAGLEY ROAD
have a five foot or longer leg of pipe or tubing connecting
BEREA, OHIO 44017
the gauge to dissipate heat and protect the gauge
440/243-0888 FAX 440/243-3472
measuring element from damage. A gauge to be used on
E-MAIL: noshok@noshok.com
steam pressure service should be installed with a water
WEBSITE: www.noshok.com
CAUTION:
Operating conditions including, but not limited to, system pressure, media compatibility and ambient conditions must be considered when selecting gauges and accessories.
Improper selections and use of gauges could possibly cause gauge failure and lead to possible property damage or person injury
. Refer to American National Standard ANSI
B40.1 for the correct selection and use of gauges. A copy of this standard may be obtained from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, United Engineering Center, 345
East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017.
WARNING:
Glycerine or silicone could result in a spontaneous chemical reaction or explosion when combined with strong oxidizing agents including (but not limited to) chlorine,
hydrochloric or nitric acid and hydrogen peroxide. Do not use glycerine or silicone filled gauges or accessories in these types of service. Consult factory for application
assistance.
In keeping with and for the purposes of product and/or manufacturing improvements, NOSHOK, INC. reserves the right to make design changes without prior notice.
Model: NSA-BKX-VBA
Gauge snubber, male 1/4 NPTF to female 1/4 NPTF
Gage snubber backup seals are "PTFE" (Teflon®, product of E. I. DuPont Co.).Material: 303 and 416 stainless. Knobs are glass-filled
nylon.
Components
Part Description Quantity View
125-001 Hex Body 1 -
B325-042 Sub-assembly 1 -
Technical Data
U.S. Units Metric Units
Model Weight 0.18 lb. 0.08 kg.
Adjustment - Number of Counterclockwise Turns - Fully Closed to Fully Open 3.75
Effective Orifice Size .035 in. 0,9 mm
Material Stainless Steel
Maximum Operating Pressure 6000 psi 420 bar
Port Configuration .250 NPTF (Male), .250 NPTF (Female)
Seal Material Viton
Used With:
Z170-418-100
Copyright © 2007-2008 Sun Hydraulics Corporation. All rights reserved.

CSP0000160-01 Accessory Equipment-Tab 1-14 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CSP0000160-01 Accessory Equipment-Tab 1-14 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TAB 1

Warranty Policy & Procedures RA

Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation

Petroleum Based Fluids

Frequently used formulas and standards

e Specific heat 10 Suspension of solids DIN 51 592

g Bunsen coefficient 13 Effect on seal materials DIN 53 538 part 1

Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation

4 All rights reserved - Subject to revision

Viscosity Minimum Optimum Maximum Maximum

Manufacturer Fluid Name ISO Manufacturer Fluid Name ISO

-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

VPV 16, 25, & 32 Vane Pumps Maximum

-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

-34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 15 21 26 32 38 43 49 54 60 65 71

* Viscosity values extrapulated at low temperatures may not be acurate. Confirm

Bosch Rexroth Corporation*#

Bosch Rexroth Corporation

Bosch Rexroth Corporation

Bosch Rexroth Corporation*

*ISO9001 Certified Quality System

9 535 233 456 9/01

* Run internal combustion engines at idling speed.

Mannesmann Rexroth Corporation

For the description and operation of the

Axial piston variable displacement pump A4VSO is of swashplate – Swashplate design

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Charging pump 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000

Control and adjustment devices

Hydraulic control, volume dependent HM HM..

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Hydraulic fluid / version

Axial piston unit

Filtration (only for control device HS- and DS-)

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Hydraulic Fluid Notes on Hydraulic Fluid Selection

Limits of Viscosity Range Temperature range (See Selection Diagram)

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Hydraulic Fluid (continued)

Operating pressure range – Inlet Port

These are approximate values. Under certain operating

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Size 40 71 125 180 250/H* 355/H* 500/H* 750 750* 1000

Calculation of size Application of force

Vg = Geometric displacement per rev. - in3 (cm3)

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Drive power and output flow

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Drive power and output flow

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Drive power and output flow

Nominal Size 1000

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

1.2 Installation outside a tank

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3

Unit Dimensions, Size 40, SAE Version

Unit Dimensions, Size 40, Series 1, Metric Version

Connections for version 13

Connections for version 25

Variable displacement pump A4VSO, Series 1, 2, and 3